JP6709566B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “slot machine”).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game is played in which a large number of prizes can be won when a winning is won, as seen in, for example, Patent Document 1.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning game ball in the starting opening. Then, when there is a prize for the game ball to the starting opening, a determination process for determining whether or not the hit is won is performed. At this time, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variation time on a predetermined display device. Then, when a predetermined variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing that the winning is won, and the opening/closing member of the special winning opening is operated, thereby increasing the number of players. We will provide special games that can be won.

JP, 2010-187791, A

In such a conventional gaming machine, Yu Technical interest is concern that a decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game.

Means 1: determination means for performing determination,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained by the determination by the determining means,
Reception-related effect execution means capable of executing a reception-related effect that causes a period in which an operation opportunity is given,
A mock image display means capable of displaying a mock image display of the operation target of the player during the effective period in which the operation opportunity of the reception-related effect is given,
When an operation is detected in the effective period to which the operation opportunity is given, an disappearance EF display capable of displaying an disappearance EF display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the deletion image display before the display of the deletion image And means
When the reception-related effect is executed , a precursor effect display that indicates that an operation opportunity is given can be executed, and a valid period in which the operation opportunity is given has occurred, or the operation opportunity is given. A gaming machine capable of audibly outputting a reception acceptance sound that suggests that a valid period is generated,
As the reception related production,
The first reception-related production that can be executed based on the satisfaction of the first effect condition based on the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the satisfaction of the second effect condition based on the result of the determination by the determination unit There is at least a second reception related effect that can be executed based on
The first reception-related effect is
When the operation is not detected within the effective period to which the operation opportunity is given, the post-reception effect is not executed,
The second reception-related effect is
Even if the operation is not detected within the effective period to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to start executing the same post-reception effect as when the operation is detected within the effective period,
When the first reception-related effect is executed and when the second reception-related effect is executed, different effect modes are executed as the precursor effect display,
When the precursor effect display is executed in the second effect mode corresponding to the second reception-related effect , when the predictive effect display is executed in the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception-related effect. In the case where a specific sound that is not audibly output is audibly output as the reception permission sound, and when the aura effect display is executed in the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception-related effect. There is a case where a predetermined sound that can be audibly output is audibly output as the reception permission sound.
further,
When the aforesaid effect display is executed in the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception-related effect, the aforesaid effect display has an effective period in which an operation opportunity for the first acceptance-related effect is given. It is possible to execute in the form of crossing the timing
When an operation by the player is detected while the aforesaid effect display is displayed in the first effect mode within the effective period in which the operation opportunity of the first reception-related effect is given, the aforesaid effect display Is not displayed in a non-displayed state at the time when the post-reception production corresponding to the detection is started to be executed, but is displayed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the front with the outer frame disassembled. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. FIG. 7A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the production operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the explanatory view which saw the production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the EE line in FIG.34(b). 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross section of the production|operation production unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a part of the operation button cut away to hide a portion to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion which is about to be hidden by the first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the external appearance of the production operation unit by the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production operation unit from the direction which the center axis of an operation button has extended. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is seen from the back of the door frame left side unit. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the front, (c) is the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51( a ). 51A is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 51B is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back. Is. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 63, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 63, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of a function display unit in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front together with a front component member, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from the rear. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram illustrating a sequel to FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a CR unit input/output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. 92 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 92. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection restoration processing. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design and special electric auditors product control processing (Step S114). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing (Step S5322). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing (Step S5234). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing (Step S5238). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal processing (Step S5280). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about big hit judging processing (Step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a diagram showing a symbol determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding 1st special design stop design setting processing (step S5281). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing (Step S5282). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing (Step S5283). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop processing (Step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a normal electric auditors product control process (step S116). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate section passage processing (Step S5402). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (Step S5403). It is the figure which shows the decision table T1 of the production pattern (variation production) which is referred to in the production design fluctuation start processing when it is in the normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement|achieving the sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the reproduced channel is shown. It is the timing chart which shows one example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement|achieving the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure showing a relation with a game state, a reproduced sound, and a priority. It is the timing chart which shows one example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for an automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flow chart which shows an example of search processing of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combinations. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction|regeneration channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of free channel search processing in the case of performing control which outputs a sound of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of conditions for selecting a channel to exchange output of sounds (stop reproduction of sound) when a channel is not available at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing when the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel to which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the example of an effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the first half fluctuation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the production in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction|regeneration channel in sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the variation of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of group volume control processing which performs sound control corresponding to a group to which an output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound effect volume control table which shows the volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is a first half of a flowchart showing a procedure of a volume control process for performing sound control based on a parameter set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. It is the latter half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control processing for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating notification contents, notification modes, notification times, and conditions (cancellation conditions) for ending notification, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 155. (A) is an example of the processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) is an example of a process when one output of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied FIG. (C) is an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound which belongs to a 2nd notification group is satisfy|filled, while the 1 notification sound which belongs to a 1st notification group is reproduced. Is. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. Is. FIG. 6C is a diagram showing an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. Is. FIG. 6D is a diagram showing an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the contents of the notification process under production progress for every notification state of the pachinko machine 1 concerned. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of processing for setting a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of restrictions defined separately for channel restriction levels. It is a figure which shows another example about the content of restrictions determined separately according to a channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special opening process is performed. 7 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the suppressed operation sound output process is performed. 8 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to the channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the side of the movable decorative body when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination It is a time chart shown. The assignment status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected and the movable state when the movable body abnormality is detected not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination but in the process other than this. It is a time chart which shows an example about the situation on the side of a decorative body. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel and the situation on the side of the movable decoration when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorations at a specific timing in the period in which the symbol variation occurs. .. A time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the side of the movable decorative body when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at two different timings in the period in which the symbol variation occurs. is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement|achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (auto continuous hitting function). 9 is a time chart showing an example of display contents when an operation is performed a plurality of times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement|achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (auto continuous hitting function). It is a time chart showing an example of an effect using an automatic multiple times operation function (auto continuous hitting function). It is a time chart showing an example of an effect using an automatic multiple times operation function (auto continuous hitting function). It is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the production pattern in the production mode which can perform sword cutting production, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of sword removal preparation transition production according to the type of variation pattern, (B) ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence/absence of the unsheathed book production is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword removal operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sword part (sword blade part) itself, (A) Sword storage state, (B) First sword removal state, (C) Second Shows the sword removal state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword removal operation of the sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, showing (A) sword storage state, (B) first sword removal state, and (C) second sword removal state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword ornament and the operation effective period concerning an operating means. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration and the operation timing of the operation means in Modification 1. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device, the state transition of an operation button, and the movement transition of a sword ornament in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device, the state transition of an operation button, and the movement transition of a sword ornament in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device, the state transition of an operation button, and the movement transition of a sword ornament in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration used for a pseudo continuous production. It is the figure which shows the production transition example of the pseudo continuous production which is common to all production patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production|generation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given, while a pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production|generation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given, while a pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production|generation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given, while a pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the post-operation production of the sword decoration body (falling production of a specific decoration member SDY (slave accessory)) during pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the production patterns. It is the figure which shows the production transition example which features the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is the figure which shows the production transition example which features the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is the figure which shows the production transition example which becomes the feature of the pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of the effect pattern which can be selected based on a change pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (slave accessory) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (slave accessory) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (slave accessory) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material) in the pseudo continuous production, and shows the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decorative member SDY (slave accessory) in the pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach production by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation production (reach production) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a transition example of reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach production by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation production (reach production) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a transition example of reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the above-described first suggestion pattern, when it is determined that the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach production, the reach production of the pre-operation suggestion production of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button of the sword decoration is not enabled and the operation button is once enabled, and then the sword decoration is enabled. It is a figure showing the pre-operation suggestion production of a pattern. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about specific operation-related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about specific operation-related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about specific operation-related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about specific operation-related production. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation relevant effect. It is a figure explaining an example about the production when "specific operation relation production" is set up as the production object of a timer production. It is a time chart explaining an example of production contents for each type of production when a plurality of types (predecessor productions A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a precursor production. It is the figure which shows those production contents regarding the production contents when the indication production which is not the specific operation connection production is done and the production contents when the indication production as the specific operation connection production is done. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which a button image BTG is displayed in a mode in which a princess character is added (a specific effect mode). It is a figure showing an example of an effect when an operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode generate|occur|produces in the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when an operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode generate|occur|produces in the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when a 1st omen effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation degree is indicated by the automatic production function. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation degree is indicated by the automatic production function. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation degree is indicated by the automatic production function. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when a plurality of operations are performed in a single-shot operation mode when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and (b) is an automatic button effect state controlled. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect when it is operated in a mode of long pressing when it is not performed. (A) is a time chart showing an example of the effect when the automatic effect function is activated in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is activated in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect when an operation is started in a mode. When the automatic button production state is controlled and the number of holdings is three production situations, the symbol variation is started in the "first production pattern in which the specific production reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". It is a time chart which shows a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the automatic button production state is controlled and the number of holdings is three production situations, the pattern is "second production pattern (displacement variation) in which a specific production reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set" In the time chart which shows the processing example when the variation is started and the operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or the operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation is there. When the automatic button production state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the "third production pattern in which a specific production reception period (specific effective period) in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears" can be set, and an execution period of the symbol variation It is a time chart which shows a processing example when an operation for performing setting to an automatic button effect state is performed. It is the figure which shows the production example when production is advanced with 3rd production pattern. It is a figure showing a modification about a prohibition period concerning "specific processing related to production such as production setting". It is a figure showing a modification about a prohibition period concerning "specific processing related to production such as production setting". It is a time chart showing an example of an effect process regarding a special effect reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example concerning the production progress when the post-operation production is started while maintaining the "image indicating the type of the operation target" as the display state. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display which appears on the effect display device 1600, when the effect pattern in which the effect progresses in the aspect shown by FIG. 285 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display which appears on the effect display device 1600, when the effect pattern in which the effect progresses in the aspect shown by FIG. 285 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of displaying a mock image as a moving image by a plurality of mock images being displayed one by one when a specific reception effect occurs. It is the figure which shows the example regarding the production which appears when the operation by the player is not in time by the time the production reception automatically occurs. It is the figure which shows the example regarding the production which appears when the operation by the player is not in time by the time the production reception automatically occurs. It is the figure which shows the example regarding the production which appears when the operation by the player is not in time by the time the production reception automatically occurs. It is the figure which shows the example regarding the 1st reception production and the 2nd reception production where the time until the production reception automatically occurs after the period where production reception is permitted occurs. It is the figure which shows the example regarding the 1st reception production and the 2nd reception production where the time until the production reception automatically occurs after the period where production reception is permitted occurs. It is the figure which shows the production example where it is suggested whether or not the reception production where the “automatic production function” is activated occurs according to the mode of the precursor production. It is the figure which shows the production example where it is suggested whether or not the reception production where the “automatic production function” is activated occurs according to the mode of the precursor production. It is the figure which shows the production example where it is suggested whether or not the reception production where the “automatic production function” is activated occurs according to the mode of the precursor production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is activated only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is activated only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is activated only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure for explaining novel production nature using an automatic production function. It is a time chart which shows an example of a channel allocation situation. It is a time chart which shows an example of a channel allocation situation. It is a time chart which shows an example of a channel allocation situation. It is a time chart which shows the contents of processing when operating a movable decoration when a specific condition is satisfied. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol variation starts in the situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started arrives in a situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart for explaining a mode when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing of symbol variation, etc.) comes during the execution of the restoration operation. It is a time chart for explaining a mode when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing of symbol variation, etc.) comes during the execution of the restoration operation. 9 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the original position. 9 is a time chart showing an example of restrictions on volume setting and brightness setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on the sword section 5010. It is a time chart which shows the example about the light emission aspect of the production lamp during the abnormality alerting|reporting period according to specific abnormality detection. It is a functional block diagram explaining a configuration and an outline of a function for executing effect control in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the peripheral control part of the game machine of this embodiment. It is the explanation drawing which shows the basic concept of production control in the game machine of this execution form. It is a diagram illustrating a configuration until data required for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a function of sequence control in production control of a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a function of a lamp and sound in production control of a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in production control of a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement of the accessory which is controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows the execution timing of the notice production which is executed in the series of fluctuation display from the start of fluctuation of the special design in this execution form to the stop, shows one example of the scheduler and the scheduler data which are used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting/blinking control of the lamp in the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp in the button cut-in advance notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the whole flow in a starry thing notice of this embodiment, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls a left starry thing. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star role thing in a star role thing notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a medium star role thing in a star role thing notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data performed when the power supply of the game machine of this embodiment is turned on. It is a figure explaining the composition for processing a command and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the game machine of this embodiment, and the relation of these composition. It is a figure explaining the process of executing scheduler data at the time of power activation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice production in a series of variation display from the variation start of a special symbol to a stop in this embodiment, and (A) performs the production performed from the variation start to the end and the said production. FIG. 3B is a diagram for explaining the position of the hook-and-knuckle object in the notice of the drop of the hook-and-knuckle object. It is a figure explaining the content of the button-coupling object first-half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs motor control in the first-half part of the button-coupling thing fall notice of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the first half of the Kakuyoke late fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the Kakuyoke late fall notice which is the latter half of the Kakuyomi fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the Kakuyoke latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the latter half notice of the Kakuyomi fall notice of this embodiment which is the latter half. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal production block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal production block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal pattern block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is the figure which explains the sub production block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by the variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub production block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an outline of production control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control starting processing of this embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control renewal processing of this execution form. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs a notice production in the change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) the timing which performs notice production, and the execution time of the notice production, (B) is. The scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute the notice production are shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data according to the variation pattern of this embodiment, and the liquid crystal pattern block data according to the variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the data file for drawing of the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment by a step-up production unit (step-up 1 production-4 production) with a video composition/motion creation graphic tool. It is the figure which explains the constitution of the production block data of step up announcement of this execution form, (A) shows the constitution of the liquid crystal block data of step up announcement, (B) shows the constitution of the sub production block data of step up announcement. Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal productions of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a parameter for a liquid crystal production scheduler function in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a parameter for a liquid crystal production scheduler function in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production SW group of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the production SW starting command table of this execution form. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage in which a step-up notice production is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device at each stage. . It is the figure which explains the execution procedure of the advance notice which uses the production SW in this execution form. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment, (A) is liquid crystal production scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, (B) is step-up notice 1 liquid crystal production The drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master data defined on liquid crystal production scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and production SW corresponding to replacement data replaced with the master data concerned. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production switch of this embodiment, especially shows the evaluation procedure which sets production SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the details of composition of a production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code which defines a production SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of production SW control information, (C). Is a diagram showing an example of an effect SW group. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production SW number corresponding to production SW in this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the program data code which defines the production SW flag and production SW information table of this execution form, (A) shows the production SW flag, (B) shows the production SW information table. It is the figure which shows one example of the program data which defines the production SW replacement table information and the production SW replacement table which are included in the production SW information table of this execution form, (A) production SW substitution table information, (B) production SW. The replacement table is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of the layer information table (for background). Indicates. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) shows the content of the layer information table (first half of notice), (B) shows the content of the layer information table (first half of notice). Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of a step-up notice effect, (B) shows the structure of a liquid crystal effect common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up advance notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an outline of button mini-character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini-character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini-character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for performing the button mini-character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be judged in the callback function at the time of callback execution by the production|generation SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer at the time of the notice production execution of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all layers. It is a figure explaining an example of a common block over a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) display timing of a design and execution timing of notice production, (B) composition of a liquid crystal notice production block by a common block, (C). Shows a structure of a liquid crystal notice production block by a common block extending over a plurality of periods. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image in a frame buffer by each writing the image written in each layer. It is a figure explaining the procedure which converts the image file stored in the off-screen buffer in this embodiment, and writes it in a frame buffer. It is a figure explaining the procedure in which the display list command group in this embodiment is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM and then transferred to the sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure which transfers to the sound source built-in VDP, without storing the display list command group in this embodiment in peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a state transition between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when an expected production in which a princess character is displayed large as a background image is performed during execution of a specific production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a help image is displayed in the state where the expected production shown in FIG. 378 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when the character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the process when generating the production restriction period in the non-gaming state. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the effect restriction period is ended early. It is a time chart which shows an example about the processing concerning a special period (period for opening a store). It is a time chart which shows an example about the process at the time of the game being started when it is set to the opening-only period (special period). It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st operation acceptance production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd operation acceptance production. It is a time chart showing an example of special operation reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the mode of channel allocation of the sound data containing acceptance permission sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of channel allocation of the sound data containing acceptance permission sound. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the low expectation suppression reception production is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the production content when the high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the production content when the high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the modification when high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in which a first permissible sound is output in a specific mode when the "non-suppressing operation acceptance effect (here, non-suppressing/non-automatic acceptance effect)" occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example of production in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur one by one in the production according to a high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of production in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur one by one in the production according to a high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of production in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur one by one in the production according to a high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect (inhibition movement reception effect) which appears in "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as an operation target" in the suppression/automatic reception effect. It is the time chart which shows the contents of the production which appear when fluctuation pattern 1 is selected with fluctuation pattern decision. It is a time chart which shows the contents of the effect which appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is the time chart which shows the contents of the production which appear when fluctuation pattern 3 is selected with fluctuation pattern decision. The "inherent reception effect" is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is generated in the "non-suppression mode". It is a time chart which shows as an example an example of the processing procedure when various display effects are realized using scenario data and blocks. It is the flowchart which shows one example concerning the processing when operation detection is not done before and after the production acceptance period (effective period). FIG. 403 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m+1”th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) illustrated in FIG. 404. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example about processing when operation is started in the "m-2"th frame during the production acceptance period (effective period) shown in Drawing 404. It is a flow chart which shows an example about processing when operation is started in the "m-2"th frame during the production acceptance period (effective period) shown in Drawing 404. It is a flow chart which shows an example about processing when operation is started from the "m-3"th frame during the production acceptance period (effective period) shown in Drawing 404. Regarding the effect reception period (effective period) in the case where the timing of performing the “operation (setting) operation of the operation state flag” in the frame is performed after the “determination process for effect reception” It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a figure which shows the example about an integrated image. It is a figure which shows the example of a display about the integrated moxibustion image from the start to the end of the effective period. It is a figure which shows the example of a display about the integrated moxibustion image from the start to the end of the effective period. It is a figure showing an example about production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure showing the modification about the production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure showing the modification about the production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure showing the modification about the production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure showing an example about production progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd effective period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd effective period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd effective period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd effective period arises. It is a figure explaining the modification about the production which suggests the degree of expectation concerning an integrated image in steps. It is a figure which shows the example about an integrated image. It is a figure which shows the example of production progress in the effective period in which an integrated image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of production progress in the effective period in which an integrated image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of production progress in the effective period in which an integrated image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 2nd acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 1st acceptance permission state occurs. It is the figure which shows one example concerning the production contents when the 2nd acceptance permitted state occurs. It is the figure which shows one example concerning the production contents when the 1st acceptance permitted state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 4th acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 5th acceptance acceptance state occurs.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the curtain plate member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-back direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door-frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and is operable by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320 which is attached to the lower part of the front surface on the lower side, and the player which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and which is changed by the game ball being driven into the game area 5a. A door operation left side unit 530, which is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate operation unit 400 and the operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participation type effect. And a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right side of the front surface on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front view left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 attached to the lower part of the front of the game board 5 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the vehicle.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are paid one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 for paying out and the game balls that are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 in accordance with the stored state of the game balls. The upper full sphere path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full sphere path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 A normal guiding path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and a game ball that is discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e is guided forward and the door frame 3 is filled from the front end. And a lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tank receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and a lower portion for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 in which a power supply board is housed inside and mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view, and a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of game balls are housed inside. And a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are driven, and places the game balls emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are moved with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launching device 680. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning openings. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extends to the left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the left and right side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 face the same surface. Has been.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably attached.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is mounted to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are respectively attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 which is attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left-right center, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. In the engagement notch 11, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 includes mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width in front of and behind. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 21, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end cutout 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position that is rearward with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to a position near the rear end on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior are provided. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, inside the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported on an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to improve the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape having an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically with a size allowing a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51, The standing wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front side upper surface of the rear extending part 51 and the rear side extending part 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rearward extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, so that strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and a rectangular outer fixing portion 61, and a flat plate shape extending forward from a front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extension portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 toward the center of the front extension portion 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61. A plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the body frame 4 by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip plate-shaped lock main body 66a extending left and right with a predetermined width in the front-rear direction, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and then extending diagonally left front, and a mounting hole vertically extending near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the portion 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upright from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 that vertically penetrates so that only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 on the left side. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U-shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extending portion 51 when the outer frame 2 is assembled. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is inserted into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 so that the outer frame side upper hinge The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, so that it can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 projects rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower left fixing member 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging cutout portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surface of the lower frame member 20, respectively. It

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally displaced and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and the abutment is made on the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact surface with the inner surface of one side, and the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment that causes the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 to rotate in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the inner side surface is retained.

Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c to be prevented, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

Even if the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate in shape, the front end of the lock member 66 is directed to the outside of the front extension 62 at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is brought into a state of being housed in the space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked) in this state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member part]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the unauthorized tool can be prevented from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the illegal tool that abuts the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the incorrect tool to be bent. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and a fraudulent act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk that it will be caught between and. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

Therefore, by sandwiching the game ball between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being made by using a gap between the main body frame 4 and the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a figure. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the back.

As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a dish unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the dish unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and door frame left side The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that is a rectangle (quadrangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. An upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, A door frame 3 and a body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate through the door frame base 110 and project forward, and which can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, are locked. An opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for operating, a ball feeding unit 250 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball launching device 680 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270, which receives the game balls that have been fired by the player and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower plate 322, is provided.

Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the player rotates the rotatable handle 302 so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 are moved according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward, The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end of the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning a cash or a prepaid card from which the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine is returned, and a cash inserted in the ball lending machine. Or a ball lending/returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player at the time of presentation, and a lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower dish ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball to the lower side of the dish unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, can be pressed by the player, and presents effect images to the player. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so that the player can visually recognize the effect image. And a display device 460.

Although the details of the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 (above the dish unit 320). The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 is provided with a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) capable of light emission decoration.

Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the front side on the upper side of the dish unit 320 with respect to the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through hole 111 ( The outside right side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward more than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of left and right upper speakers 573, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and a left and right side of the top middle decoration member 576. The decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 with light emission decoration.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so that the door frame base unit 100 can be opened and closed (the hinge can be rotated). The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached on the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the outer right front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and the like, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view of the main frame 4 protruding forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and a front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 detachably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to be rotatable. And a glass unit mounting member 170 for

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, and to the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open/close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view, which is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides of the through-hole 111 forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is above and below the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at about 1/3 the height of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-holes 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end side slightly projects forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. And a cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and a recessed portion from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates back and forth in the cylinder mounting portion 113. Of the cylinder lock 211, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 penetrate forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are moved forward. And a ball feeding opening 115 for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The through hole 116 for the lower plate and the front and rear of the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front side of the door frame base 110 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The plate passage opening 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates in the front and rear at a corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 along an upper side of the door frame base 110 and a left and right extending reinforcing sheet metal that is attached to a lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 which is attached along the left side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcing which is attached vertically along the right side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via a cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The strength and rigidity of the parts are enhanced, while preventing unauthorized entry of external tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and vertically separated from each other, and a pair of the door frame upper hinge shaft brackets 141 protruding. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a and has an upper end inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The disk-shaped flange member 143 mounted at a position between the two, and is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the hinge pin 142 on the door frame is installed. And a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape whose side view is open to the front. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction at a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a. The bent portion abuts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and its upper end abuts on the collar member 143 and its lower end abuts on the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the flange member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is bent horizontally and is pulled downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 by the operator. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it out. You can Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 in front view. The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Accordingly, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that has a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a that is attached to the door frame base 110 and extends forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-shaped attachment piece (not shown) extended upward from the rear end of a horizontally extended flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has an attachment piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower hinge pin 152 of the door frame is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

The door frame lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through-hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decoration board 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in front view to the height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. The frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a, 162a capable of irradiating light to the front side, respectively. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decoration substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be made to emit light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and sticks out from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 172 that is open.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119, and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the projecting portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projecting portion 172 becomes glass. When the glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located inside the protrusion 172. .. From this, in the state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 becomes stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where it projects downward from the base 171, the projecting portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the projection 172 does not entirely rotate so as to project upward from the base 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is attached to the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends and a plurality of protrusions that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and that are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three protrusions 183 are provided, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 are provided. .

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 of the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side of the tubular portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be restricted.

Since the axis line of the tubular portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle attaching member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle attaching seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the tubular portion The axis of 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 is a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The attachment piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In this glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and the left and right spaced apart. And a pair of locking pieces 203 projecting forward from the main body 201 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so that it does not project into the game area 5a in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear protruding piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and within the game area 5a. It does not prevent the player from hitting the game ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thus, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

In the security cover 200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 is provided. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component member 1000 described later. Further, in the security cover 200, the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is in a state of protruding rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 or the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The open/close cylinder unit 210 has a cylinder-shaped cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 for rotating the key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to the key cylinder 710 of the 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the corresponding key is a clockwise key or a counterclockwise key when viewed from the front. It can be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape projecting forward in a plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both right and left sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side when viewed from the front is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side when viewed from the front side of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 to the reinforcing unit 130.

In the state where the open/close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward while being inserted into 114 and protruding forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 39(b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is transparently formed on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having operation buttons 410 and a decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. And a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter that is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side is bulged forward, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 that is attached is provided, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to easily pass therethrough.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no unevenness on the front surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center side (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a extend axially toward the center side in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arcuate cross-section at a position on the outer peripheral side and extend in the circumferential direction within a predetermined angle range. A plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and one group on both left and right sides is a group on both upper and lower sides. It extends longer than the center.

Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. The second button decoration portion 411b is formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to the unevenness of the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface in the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and is provided with a plurality (six) of frame opening portions 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a rear main body 413a from the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c that are arranged rearward along the outer circumference of the columnar shape and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and penetrate the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape that extends from the front end of the main body 413a to the front and the front end side is along the inner surface of the button lens 411. And an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to the (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction such that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressing detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the site of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. An inner diameter of a front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward is substantially equal to an inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed, and the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be viewed from the front. In the operation button 410, the four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is prevented from further moving forward by the front side of the outer peripheral edge contacting the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438 is restricted. By pressing against the front end, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved rearward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Also, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made invisible to the player side.

Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and an operation button is attached by a button frame 412 attached to an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear can be visually recognized is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 is changed. It is possible to prevent the base 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button bottom of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decoration substrate 436 from being light-emitted on portions other than the target area for light-emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light-emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a that is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 which are attached from the rear side to the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 which is attached to the frame main body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that has a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and a central opening 416a that penetrates forward and backward on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that extend in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c that is notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Are provided. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and three outer peripheral openings 416b are provided, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes an inner cylindrical portion 416d having a substantially cylindrical shape that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c is cut out. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tubular portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420. Is located between the first and second LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 is provided with a pair of attachment portions 416e that extend outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit attachment portions 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame main body 416 has a metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A plated layer having a luster is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right of the frame main body 416, three each on the left side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed as a smooth surface with no irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear side along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so that the frame top lens 418 is fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front surface side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are provided in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 has the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b on the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the frame top lens 418 and the like can perform light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side thereof is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side, and an inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the same. The operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside of the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 have white front and rear surfaces.

An eccentric weight 424a is attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, it is possible to light and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 and vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the operation button is pressed in the cross sectional view of the effect operation unit in FIG. 37. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of a production|operation operation unit. 46A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as seen from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show an effect image to the player according to a game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the operation image. The player can participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 to entertain.

The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Moreover, the overall width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Are formed. That is, the production operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line, It is inclined so as to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the like in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted in the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, respectively, and the operation button spring 438 urges the guide button bosses 413c forward. In the normal operation state (state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the center side (center axis CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the curved surface shape (a part of the substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The frame unit 415 projects forward from a central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the button lens 411 with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in the normal state, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis line CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he or she pushes the button lens 411 which is bulged forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore is pressed near the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis line CL is attached so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by an outlined arrow in FIG. 44, A portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis line CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation button for the performance in the conventional pachinko machine has a flat surface for the player to press, if the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , When pressing a part of the operation button that is off the center, the pressing surface tilts so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot move back straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight rearward. You can Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation, the player who is pressing the operation button 410 can perform the operation. Strong vibrations can be transmitted, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit downward. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or struck by a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 or the like is not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to make the damage less likely to increase the burden on the game hall side. Can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. Compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 are formed of transparent members, those The decoration by the unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface is the front side (player side). ) Can be seen from. In addition, in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. With this, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part in the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is formed between the outer peripheral surface of 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. Thus, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button inner decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, in the effect operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is defined by the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the part of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible to the player. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410, and thus the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. Then, the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the central axis CL as the center. Since they are arranged in concentric circles, the uneven line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (direction in which the central axis CL extends), so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a are separated from each other. With the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a geometric pattern with a depth and a three-dimensional feel can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the first button decoration portion 411a becomes uneven. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player and the player can be entertained.

As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button. An upper inner decoration board 435 and an operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are caused to emit light, so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are, as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis line CL extends, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. Therefore, only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 includes the operation button left outer decoration board 422 of the operation board unit 420 behind the second button decoration section 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer circumference of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. You can As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board are arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are disposed between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frame top lens decoration boards 437 are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437. The frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the above emit light. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached, a plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower rear of the frame top lens 418, Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 47C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162 (door frame left side decoration board 160) above the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in front view.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent element that is arranged in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member that is attached to the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. A decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 that is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member, and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535; And a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear direction on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160 (the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located at the substantially vertical center when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a non-translucent member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) which is erected from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the left reflection standing wall portion 538, an inner side surface that is flat and has a surface facing the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. The reflecting surface may be provided not only by providing the inner side surface of the left side reflective wall portion 538 with a reflecting material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflecting seal to the inner side surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-described reflective standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in a front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a of the left unit base 531 and a square lens having a square shape in a front view corresponding to the rectangular opening portion 531a. And a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b. Has been formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By the circular lens portion 532a, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged rearward to the front in a dot-like shape. By the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decoration portion of the left unit decoration lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 532c which is recessed conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape in the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases on the outside of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape in which the peaks are pointed rearward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflection portion 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries. The radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

The rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, and immediately after the input lens portion 532e, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located.

The light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input to the rectangular lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e into the rectangular lens portion 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection section 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is in a direction perpendicular to the axis line extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in various directions) and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels from the center side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the front reflection portion 532f causes the light to move forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). Accordingly, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side toward the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the rectangular lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the.

In the prismatic lens portion 532b, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are separated by the dividing lines. Are radially displaced so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b to the front has a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the front. As a result, the multi-faced decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative portion formed on the portion. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends in the front and rear. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in the shape as described above. The circular decoration portion and the multifaceted decoration portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decoration portion 561a and the multifaceted decoration portion 561b of the right unit decoration lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faceted decorative portion is forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by the light emitted from the circular decorative portion to the front from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light radiated to each of them causes a light emission decoration.

The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape that extends forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface of the outer periphery thereof projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end moves backward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that an intermediate portion in the up-down direction is recessed rearward, and a lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left-shaped portion. The upper part is bent backward so as to follow the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535, and the lower part of the upper dogleg-shaped part and the upper end of the lower dogleg-shaped part are connected. And a linear portion.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

The decoration member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a non-translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 51C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decoration board 552 attached to the door frame and the front side of the door frame right side decoration board 552 are attached to the left side from the center in the front view of the front surface of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member The transparent unit includes a right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 in front view and a right side of the front view center and a right unit left diffusing lens in front of the right unit base 551. The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is decorated. A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and is shallow in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with the front and right sides opened. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559, and a light opaque attached on the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a right unit right light blocking member 560 having a flat plate shape.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right with a polyhedral decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front-rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. And a plurality of decoration members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically pass through the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and extends in the shape of a rectangular tube that is short in the front-rear direction and is closed in the center in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a non-translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflection standing wall portion 568 (see FIG. 6 and FIG. 24) standing upright from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through hole 111. ing. In the right-side reflection standing wall portion 568, an inner side surface which is flat and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. Note that, like this inner surface of the left reflective upright wall portion 538, this reflective surface is provided on the inner surface of the right reflective upright wall portion 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, and is also reflective to the inner inner surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. Further, as will be described later, the right side reflection standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the reflection standing wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. The door frame right side decoration board 552 is a left LED 552a that is mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, a right LED 552b that is mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, and a center position in the left-right direction on the front. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for allowing the right unit left decoration member 554 to emit light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for allowing the right unit right decoration member 557 to emit light through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

The front and rear surfaces of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame lower right side decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in a front view in a short flat plate shape. A cutout portion 553c that is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left side and is formed in plural at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side in front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to house 554, an input lens portion 553e that is provided rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and is provided in plurality in the up-down direction, on the right side in front view of the main body portion 553a. The input lens unit 553e is provided with a plurality of side face reflection units 553f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be located at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and a lower side thereof becomes higher as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move rightward in front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality of (six) side reflection parts 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection part 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens part 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side-face reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 to the front proceeds from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread it, and the input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and entering the main body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e strikes the flat left surface inside the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface of the body portion 553a (side surface reflection portion 553f), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light reflected from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side to the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 are left. The light that is reflected toward one side and passed through the main body portion 553a is emitted to the left side, so that the right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric circular arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric circular groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (to the left) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to illuminate the left side with a more uniform light and shade. As a result, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body 553a (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decoration member 554, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decoration member 554 is transparent. This portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left side in front view in a short flat plate shape. The portion 556b, the rear wall portion 556b are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end side in the front view to the right side, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to house the unit right decoration member 557, an input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and is provided in the vertical direction, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left surface side, a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction.

The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a main body portion 553a that is substantially the same in outer shape. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward when viewed from the front as going from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

The rear wall portion 556b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutout portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the rectangular opening that penetrates in the front and rear direction is formed by the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutout portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved spherically. And a part. These input lens portions 556e are respectively positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Accordingly, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

The side surface reflection portion 556f is provided in a plurality (six) in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflection portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 goes from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread the light, and the input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 556a moves leftward when viewed from the front as it moves forward, The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration substrate 552 and incident on the main body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e strikes the flat right surface inside the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and should be reflected to the side surface reflection portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. Becomes

The light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in a front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. .. Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 The light that has been reflected toward one side and passed through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, so that the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (to the right) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the right. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side of the main body 556a (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decoration member 557 is transparent. Such a portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in a side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides thereof open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right side in a front view in a short flat plate shape, and the rear portion. A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed by cutting out a rectangular shape from the right end side of the wall portion 559b to the left in a front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and a lower side thereof is upward as it goes forward. The main unit 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 are formed to have substantially the same outer shape.

The rear wall portion 559b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to the right of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part of them corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward through the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets with a pair of the reinforcing portions 559d that are separated from each other in the vertical direction at the same height as the left and right widths and are separated from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light-shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the vertically extending quadrangular front end is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have an inclined shape, and has substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening of the right unit left light blocking member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape, to the right when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, when the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, each of the main body portion 559a and the right unit right light blocking member 560 is replaced with the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. Light radiated forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a non-translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, respectively. The left light 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 respectively correspond to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and It can be illuminated and decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged at the rear side of each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. By the LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, it is possible to prevent light from interfering with each other, so that the portion of the right unit decoration lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide into a plurality of (four) regions and individually light-embellish them.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the multifaceted decorative portion 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape that it was installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-faced decorative portion 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top of the front part, the multi-faced decoration parts 561b are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the up-and-down direction. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged rearward.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly projects forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of a non-translucent member. The three decoration members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decoration lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes largely in the plate shape forward of the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward of the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decoration member 554 and a right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be made to emit light and be decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes largely to the front, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exert an effect like a partition between the spaces. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to feel as if he/she is playing in a private room, and the other players around can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. You can

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 is largely projected forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light emission, even if the book is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book is viewed from a distance. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By illuminating the members 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify the attendant of the game hall of the occurrence of the defect and quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and reducing the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. It is a perspective view. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 at the center in the left-right direction, and at the left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, and extending in the left-right direction, with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 having a box-like rear opening, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. Each of the slits has a plurality of slits 574b (three in each of the left and right) that extend from each other, pass through in the front-rear direction, and are separated from each other in the vertical direction. A unit main body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which are arranged on the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 and are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a, respectively. ing.

Here, although illustration is omitted, each of the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) has an internal space opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the above, the outer light emitting portion 34 (the left outer light emitting portion 34a, the right outer light emitting portion 34b) provided to emit light from the outer circumference into the outer circumference of the opening window, and from the outer circumference of the opening window. The outer peripheral light detecting section 35 (the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a, the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b) for detecting the light of the outer peripheral light is provided.

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top middle decoration member 576 and is mounted on the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576. A door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 are closed, and both left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 are closed. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three in each of the left and right) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, which are respectively attached to the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration. Top middle left decoration members 581 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front sides of the respective lens members 580 and extending from the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 to the vicinity of the center side end of the opening 574a, respectively. The top middle right decoration member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271 respectively, and the LEDs are respectively mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 that are present, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the rear side of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction penetrate therethrough. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door having a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 are attached to the front side of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 to the rear side of the unit main body 271, respectively. And a pair of light blocking members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay substrate cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the unit cover so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, are obliquely attached such that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward as viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 271 in a front view is a rectangular shape that extends left and right, and is cut out in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has, in plan view, a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and a portion that is approximately ½ of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the bottom. A trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 to the left and right end portions of the front end of the unit main body 271 on both sides of the front protruding portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions outside the left and right ends on the front surface to positions outside the front portion. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend laterally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a portion that extends obliquely with respect to the frontwardly protruding trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends obliquely forward to the left and right to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and three slits 574b are vertically spaced apart from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is cut out in a square shape from the rear end to the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d which is cut out from the rear end in the left-right direction to the front in the lower surface. , Are provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

In addition, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decoration portion 574e and a top right decoration portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position in which the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward in the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The decoration member 576 in the top has a shape in a front view that is bent so that the central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends from the upper ends of the right and left sides of the variable pentagon to the outer side in the left-right direction. The right side of the pentagon is connected to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon to form a substantially right-angled triangle. The decoration member 576 in the top is inclined so that the part of the pentagonal shape on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has a light-transmitting property.

The door frame top middle decoration board 577 is arranged such that the front surface thereof is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decoration member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration board 577, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light by making these LEDs emit light.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front portion of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining the side closer to the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 as the end side and the side closer to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 has a straight portion that extends straight left and right from the end side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. In the light guide member 578, the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arcuate portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction is decreased in the arc portion 578b so as to decrease toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffusive reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like concavo-convex portion, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b having a plurality of concavo-convex portions. Is equipped with.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While advancing inside, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end portion side, and the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a emits light forward. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light emission.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration board 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration board 586, or the door frame top right decoration board 584 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to light-emit the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in the front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are juxtaposed left and right.

The top left decoration lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decoration lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 through the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are arranged in a row on the left and right.

The top right decoration lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 through the three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the top left decoration lens member 579 so as to fill up the space between the three decoration lens portions 579a in the state where the top middle left decoration member 581 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decoration lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the opening 574a on the right side in the front surface of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached so as to fill up between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front side near the center is the top right. The decoration lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the portion of the top left decoration lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is inserted through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached inside the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. By the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is inserted through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The board base 585 has a side wall that is substantially square in a side view and has sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is a quadrangle in a front view that extends outward in the left-right direction at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. A line that connects the upper side of the side wall to the middle is taken as a hypotenuse, and connects the upper side of the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall.The upper wall of the right-angled triangle is connected to the upper side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall. And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular columnar box shape with an opening between upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. The board base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface extends to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 are formed in a state where the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570 so that the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 causes a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top left decoration lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 that is attached to the right rear side from the left-right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction are formed when the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light blocking members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of a non-translucent member and are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. It is partitioned. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration are provided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated in a state where they are independent of each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration board 577, a door frame top left decoration board 583, a door frame top right decoration board 584, a door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decoration board 587 at the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are curved so as to be hollowed back. Therefore, it is possible to give the illusion of the player that only the top middle decoration member 576 is largely projected forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right top middle decorative members 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal behind the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, respectively. Since the speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically spaced apart from each other, the upper left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the door frame top right decoration by the plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a through hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the front and rear of the door frame base unit 100 in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the expansion of the through-hole 111, and the widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is small. This allows the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed as broadly as possible by the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). The game board 5 has a large game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (a second effect operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the left-right direction below the through-hole 111. The front surface (the front surface of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) of the lower halves (the part below the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be hollowed back (the plate unit It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located rearward rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude significantly forward, and thus the effect operation unit 400 is conspicuously emphasized to the player. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

In the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 400 arranged on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 is directed obliquely upward and forward. Since the player is attached in a state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his or her line of sight to direct the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, so that the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized intensely, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 that has a large diameter and is substantially rounded and bulges toward the front with a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the dish unit 320, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move the hand by a short distance. Since any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. Also, since the operation button 410 that is large in diameter and bulges forward in a circle, is attached in a tilted state, not only can it be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also left and right. On the other hand, the operation can be performed satisfactorily even from the front side, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the effect using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is mounted with the rendering operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower portion of the rendering operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations in accordance with the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, which makes the player surprised. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is larger than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes inconspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, and to appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having high strength can be provided.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is increased. It is possible to make a tactile sense that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower plate for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball supply port 323c from which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged outside the right side of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in a front view. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (outer right side of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side such as the side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed, The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower dish ball removal hole 322a disposed below (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish 322, the lower plate bowl removal hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 and the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the player side cannot see the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 and the like through the lower dish 322 to the dollar box is also possible. I can't see. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the game balls etc. paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to restrain the player from degrading the interest by devoting himself/herself to the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). it can.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray 322a provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 322a at a position on the lower tray 322 which is located on the front left side of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 on the right side of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is erected. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly changed to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball hole 322a by being reflected by the wall portion on the right side. As a result, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are areas on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), the lower plate 322 of the lower plate 322 can be seen without showing the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit attachment 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his/her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so the main body frame 4 The sound from the lower speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his/her hand on or comes close to the lower plate 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921, which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes largely forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give an illusion of being alive, and to let other players around play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, the door frame 3 is a plate-like, and the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which largely protrudes forward, can be light-embellished, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a line in a game hall. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and has a high appealing power to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are A shape that is recessed so as to be hollowed backward (a straight center line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 is not the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570. The front surface on both the left and right sides of 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that it is located rearward. As a result, since only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to be largely projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576 can be conspicuously emphasized to the player, It is possible to draw a strong attention to the middle decoration member 576.

By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other in the left and right are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which extend from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left and right direction in front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration distinct from that of the conventional pachinko machine is applied. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy good stereo sound. it can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. , Each of them has a large protrusion to the front at the center in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to show the player a uniform decoration on the top and bottom where a virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction is conspicuous, and a sophisticated feeling of decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Moreover, since the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, the middle middle decoration member 576. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board without the front and back units, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view disassembled and seen from back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game region 5a. A partitioning plate-shaped game panel 1100, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the contents of the game. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is inside the game area 5a (not shown).

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100. Further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front panel 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions within the gaming area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary draw, and a first special that is selected by accepting the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. It is provided with a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game balls to be accepted in either case according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1126 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a special winning opening 2005, and a starting opening unit. The lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front side of 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004, which are attached to the substantially center of the game area 5a, are provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, which is opened in the front. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 that is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached to the front view left side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the front center right side in the left-right direction above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends forward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 includes: the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, which extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 or the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1011 matches the notch portion 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portions 1011 and 1127 penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the unit 860 are arranged to face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, 64 and 65, and the like. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position that is the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113, which are circular holes that are arranged near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 that are arranged near the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrate the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , Are provided. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1115 having recessed front sides at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and has a holding step portion 1121 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction. And a through hole 1122 penetrating therethrough.

The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed such that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the expansion and contraction of the panel plate 1110 to be absorbed even if the panel plate 1110 relatively expands or contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with engagement claws 1124 and engagement pieces 1125 that engage with the engagement step portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front side of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip thereof does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 with a gap having a size such that the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 can be inserted between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side). By engaging the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 with the engaging step portions 1115 of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth in the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 has the same width as the outlet 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The cutouts 1127 match the cutouts 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutouts 1011 and 1127 penetrate the cutouts 1011 and 1127 of the lower full ball path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front constituent member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front constituent member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 and the front constituent member 1000 can be mounted together. 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a rectangular insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout portion 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from FIG. 63 as viewed from the front together with a front component member, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the above-mentioned game panel 1100.

The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates laterally in the front-rear direction to the left side in the front view of the lower end and is opened downward and has a notch 1152 having the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and a vertical direction above the notch 1152. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that penetrate through the positioning protrusions 1009 at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that project rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. The fixing hole 1154 is provided. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front constituent member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front constituent member 1000 and the gaming panel with the front constituent member 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and back for attaching the front unit 2000, similar to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged discharge part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are provided as members having transparency so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 or the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since the mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various actions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game status (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 that is a single LED that displays a game status, and four LEDs that display a normal lottery result that is drawn by a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 made up of, a normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and a lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. Number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball to the second start opening 2004, and to the second start opening 2004 When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, the second special hold number indicator 1406 including two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 including three LEDs for displaying the number of times the opening/closing pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially in the center. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves that are opened to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the back box 3010 from the diagonal rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface.

In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is selected by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the game ball can be accepted, and a special winning opening 2005 is provided.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially right below the hitting portion 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 in the front view. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1126 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a special winning opening 2005, and a starting opening unit. The lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front side of 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to the center of the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004 are provided.

The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately above the out opening 1126 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. In this starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 is open upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time, and the special winning opening 2005 allows a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are extended to the left and right in a size that can be received, and are formed to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that can always receive game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front slightly downward from the vertical center in the upper left of the side unit lower 2200 in the front view in the game area 5a. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). Can be guided to the left-right center).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, slightly above the center in front view, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units and the like provided in the back unit 3000 through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. It is not possible to break in.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened so as to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It is provided with a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball emitted from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately below the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a front opening, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall, and a back side of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a. And a box-shaped production drive board box 3042 which is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and accommodates the production drive board.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 mounted on the front end in the back box 3010 at the upper side from the vertical center on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached to the front view left side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the front center right side in the left-right direction above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, a rectangular opening penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d that is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the rear view and the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear surface of the notch 3010d on the rear side so as to be slidable up and down.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are stored. , Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 toward the left side in front view as compared with the highest part, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, and therefore is highly likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open special winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the side unit upper 2300 pulls it toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first winning unit of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the starting port 2002 and the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right hit), On the downstream side, the area where the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are provided flows down.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is carried out in the main control board 1310, and when the result of the ordinary lottery is "normal win", the second starting port 2004 has a predetermined time ( For example, during the period of 0.3 to 10 seconds), it is in the open state, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game balls passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is held until the suggestion of the result of the ordinary drawing is completed. Further, the maximum number of holding of the ordinary lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, "big hit", " A lottery of the special lottery results for generating "middle hit", "small hit", "probability change hit", "time reduction hit", etc.) is performed. Then, the result of the selected special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time). The special lottery results that are drawn by accepting game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and " 15R big hit, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time reduction (time shortening) hit”, “probability change time short hit”, “probability change time short hit”, and the like.

In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game balls are received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls from the payout device 830 are received by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Are dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game balls when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, a large amount of the game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the special winning opening 2005 Accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, if any of the conditions is satisfied, a predetermined opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that makes the game ball into an unacceptable closed state. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, if "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and if "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

In the case of "big hit", the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game is changed ("probability change"), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are received from the start of the special drawing until the result of the special drawing is suggested. (2) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is limited to four with respect to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, respectively. For more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are provided. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, it is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol row in a state where three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each of the symbol rows is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss", after three symbols are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small-hit game, a big-hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result selected by the lottery occurs.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) that suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence varies) The time until the confirmation image is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of center accessory 2500, various ornaments of back unit 3000, back lower back movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect. By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back inside movable effect unit 3400, the back below movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a move effect, a display effect, etc., and a game depending on various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. , The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

Also, the decoration member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention, and The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 respectively correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. ..

Further, each LED mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 and the sub-screen decoration board in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 respectively correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Peripheral decoration portion 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decoration full of decorativeness with no sense of perspective, it can attract the player's interest strongly and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 having a high price can be obtained.

Further, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) come close to or apart from each other, Due to a change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that is overlapped with the in-button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the first button decoration portion 411a can be changed. The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player, and the player can be changed. You can entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, which is the opposite side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the button lens 411 becomes the first decoration body. Since a space is formed between the second decoration and the second decoration, the distance from the player to the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are seen. The distance to the inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. Even when the player's eyes do not move, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). Since the crossing manner (the degree of overlap) with and changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided. Through, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be favorably visually confirmed through the radial direction of the first button decoration portion 411a. The decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame. The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 is formed. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g. It is possible to surely bring out the perspective of decoration by means of, and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g stand out. it can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g of By the decoration, the player's line of sight or interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

Further, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 (or the sub-screen decoration board 477). When the LED 477a) is caused to emit light, the light can decorate the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) with light emission, and further, the button lens 411 can also emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by light emitting decoration. At this time, the operation button left inside decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inside decoration substrate 434, the operation button above inside decoration substrate 435, and the operation button below inside by the second button inside decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decorative substrate 436 can be diffused, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, and the operation button on the second button inner decoration portion 432g. The interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), while the first button decoration portion 411a is used for the second button interior decoration. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is used for light emission decoration, whereas the second button interior decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly illuminated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated and decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 When the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a (or the LED 477a) emitting light, the perspective is further emphasized. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can show the decoration to the player and can attract the player's interest strongly can be provided.

Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame) It is possible to widen the side second effect display device 460A) to the outside to make the size as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 at a portion outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be operated. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in decorativeness, has a good appearance, and has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly, when the player hits the button lens 411 to impact on a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Compared to the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed in the entire button lens 411, it is possible to make the button lens 411 hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, when the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted, causing some players to feel annoyed and less entertaining, and to damage the button lens 411. Since it becomes difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the front through the through hole 111. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advance and retreat) when operated by a player in a circular shape of approximately 15 cm that is within a range of -30 cm, and an operation button interior decoration that is visible from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, In the pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) having the operation buttons 410 as large as possible can be seen at the position where the storage bowl of the game ball is conspicuous, so that at a glance to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized to be different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423, which are provided with the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration section 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450). The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for making the second button decoration portion 411b emit light and the second LEDs 422b, 423b for making the frame side lens 417 emit light. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b from each other, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that partition the second button decorative portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 and the second LED 422b by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. , 423b can prevent the light from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently illuminated and decorated. it can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly illuminated and decorated, and a good-looking luminous effect can be performed. Further, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other are appropriately combined with lights, lights, blinks, brightness, colors, and the like to perform light emission effects in various patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the first LED 422a, 423a for illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b, 423b for illuminating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided as one operation button outside decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided for 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be sufficiently supplied. The second button decoration portion 411b can be irradiated with the light in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly light-emitted, the appearance of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame-side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outside decoration board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 moves back and forth. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operated) and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. It is possible to entertain the player with the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are passed through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is changed to the second button decoration portion 411b. Are decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b are appropriately made to emit light so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen rearward. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-embellished in various patterns as described above. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect and operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second) It is possible to entertain an effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By performing the operation, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are illuminated and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained in the player participation type production and entertained.

Further, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-translucent main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f capable of emitting light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second portion of the operation button 410 The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged rearward because the center side becomes brighter. It is possible to prevent the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being hard to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state, and the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect) can be provided through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be fully entertained with decorations, light emission effects, and the like, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 including the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can be completely partitioned from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end portions (rear end portions) of the inner tubular portion 416d on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner tubular portion 416d with respect to the diffusion range is located closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to surely block light by the inner tubular portion 416d, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b on the rear side of the operation button 410. It is possible to completely partition the space between and the center side of the button lens 411 by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are Since the light also extends rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not dive to the rear end of the main body 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. You can Therefore, the second LED decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be fully entertained with decoration, light emission effect, and the like, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is provided in front of a portion outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second member) is inserted through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to make the outer member and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) invisible by the second button decoration portion 411b, and prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect) with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) less visible. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button interior decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved and the player's appearance can be improved. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which light gurgles around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect and the light emitting effect in which the light is converged from the outer side to the inner side of the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various light emitting effects, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stored game balls are driven into the game area 5a in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 and the upper plate 321 used for the game is displayed. Along with the installation, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 so that the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is provided with a predetermined space behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, and a part of the lower plate body 325 corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game balls is attached by extending the region corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate body 325, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. However, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance and can attract the player's attention strongly. it can.

Further, in the lower plate second region A2 portion of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward, and the mounting space 326j extends to the remaining space side. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from contacting the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered by the interruption of the game due to the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, a lower plate cover 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j in the lower plate second area A2 portion. Since it is provided with, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable by the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 bounce in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it is possible to reliably prevent the mounting space 326j from entering the remaining space side, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325, the player can move the lower plate body 325 to the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion). 326d), when the user puts his/her hand into the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321, the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), etc., and let the player play in a safe state. You can

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to contact of the game balls with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is ensured. Can be prevented.

In addition, since the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2 of the lower dish body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. In the state, the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball extracting hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball is the main body of the lower plate body 325. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), reduce interruption of the game, and reduce interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 is inclined. As it climbs the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball that abuts on the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate cover 340, 340A reliably restricts the game ball from moving to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. It is possible to reduce an increase in the burden on the side of the game hall where 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface swells to the frontmost below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The dish unit cover 326 of the ejected dish unit 320 is provided, and the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most bulged portion of the dish unit cover 326, and the dish 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, a storage plate capable of storing a game ball is provided, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is located outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in a front view. The lower plate first area A1 located and the lower plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made conspicuous, and the storage trays (the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) can be made small to make them inconspicuous. it can. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the parts where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is located. Although smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the additional part 325B, the second additional part 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range invisible from the front side of the lower plate 322 (lower plate second region A2). it can. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls contrary to the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1 are provided with the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension unit 325B, and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A having different sizes, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension section 325B, and the second extension section 325C of a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the attachment space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacement) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the space of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward projection of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the effect operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape that is recessed downward, and a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A have the cover standing wall portions 340a rising from the upper ends of the main body standing wall portions 325b of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower tray covers 340, 340A having shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to obtain the same effects as the above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game balls are placed becomes the lower plate body 325, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where the load of the more game balls is stored. No boundary (seam, division line PL) is located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate body 325, a force that separates the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from the lower plate body 325 even if a large number of game balls are stored. There is no action, and it is possible to prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower tray main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate capable of storing the game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and the lower plate 322 are provided, and the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged at the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to be seen from the front (player) (makes it difficult to see), the pachinko machine 1 can have a clean appearance and a good appearance, which is of interest to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), it is possible for the player to play a game in the lower dish 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and prevent the player from being distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since it is difficult to visually recognize the part between the ball removing hole 322a, the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding part 322c and the buffer part 322d, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is left open. The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged from the lower plate ball extracting hole 322a to the lower side. It is possible to make the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself/herself to the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since it is difficult to visually recognize more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball outlet 322a and discharged to the lower portion (dollar box) of the lower tray 322 by a portion between the lower tray 322a and the guide means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d. It is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating around the lower plate 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating inside the lower plate 322 difficult to visually recognize from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower plate 322, to prevent the player's distraction, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are immediately noticed to the player by the ball guiding section 322c and the like. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, it gives the player the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. You can As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself/herself to the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322, the lower plate that can be seen from the front. The size of the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice as large as the size of the plate 322. Therefore, as with the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine, a sufficient storage amount of the game balls can be secured.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward in the front view lower side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Production operation unit attachment for attaching a large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 in the center of the front side of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 of FIG. The plate front lower decorative portion 326c, which is provided with the portion 326a and is below the substantially center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, is recessed so as to be recessed rearward Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be made to appear as if it protrudes significantly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect). The operating unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at a glance, it can be recognized that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Since a part of the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) is made to wrap around behind, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322). It is not necessary to play the game while being aware that the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls, the player can concentrate on the game, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his/her hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips are in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall 322 (the front surface of the dish unit base 323), the lower dish cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize by tactile sense that the storage amount of the game balls is sufficiently secured, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, entertain the game, and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since it is difficult for the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness given to a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, which can reassure the player and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on the front end side is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322, and the appeal power to the player can be increased and the player It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can move the lower plate 322 into the lower plate 322. When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) or the like to injure the player. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent and highly appealing to the player, and the decoration by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the decoration and effect of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, since the lower tray 322 is provided with the lower tray ball supply port 323c capable of communicating with the upper tray 321, and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically so as to be opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine Since it has the same function as the lower plate in, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. It is possible to play the game with a feeling of feeling, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and entertain the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clean and the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 that faces the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of FIG. The operation button inside decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button is attached, and the operation button inside decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded so as to surround the outside. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 having a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and projects from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Since the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like are provided, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side first member) is inserted through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the second effect display device 460A, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the clearance between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decoration portion 411a and the like, so that a large-sized operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented while preventing deterioration of appearance. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be upsized, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strong. The pachinko machine 1 can be attracted to and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) that is cylindrically projected from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide those outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical body shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 is The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward/backward direction of the operation button 410). The light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane (orthogonal plane). Therefore, by combining the button base 413 and the button base 413 with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer peripheral edge, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge or the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the above) and the operation button, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described effects.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged inside the operation button 410 are increased. It is possible to make the side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device for entertaining the player through the operation buttons 410. It is possible to easily provide 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that further amuses the player.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with a design property (decorative property). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is made conspicuous and the player's interest is increased. Can be directed, and it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque, so that the button frame 412 has a button The back side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. can be surely hidden from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation can be reliably hidden. The appearance of the button 410 or the like can be reduced and the appearance can be improved.

Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end to the inner side, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to allow the player to play the game. Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) of the operation button 410 difficult to see from the side, the main body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 can be increased, and accordingly, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A move. Can be moved satisfactorily.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 has a cylindrical shape, the directionality of the outer periphery is lost as compared with the case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is increased in size, it can be pressed without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the operation button 410 is upsized, it is easy to perform the player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410 without operating the operation button 410 while checking the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player easily participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which makes the player entertaining and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the effect of the player is operated by presenting effect images according to the game state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is used. It is possible to entertain the effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by means of an effect image, light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by having the player actively participate in the player participation type production and entertaining. In addition, by executing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to think that there is something good for some players, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. You can

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is obviously different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, which is highly appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's expectation for production using the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused together, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 without the first button decoration portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed over the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first unit) so as to surround the entire outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Although the one including the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a tubular shape toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, the invention is not limited to this, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are shown. At least one of the display device 460A may be protruded toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire circumference. The button base 413 may have a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (planar decoration by sticking or printing a seal, three-dimensional decoration by relief or the like) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Further, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer side portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 has been shown. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and is connected to each other behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). 322 may be used, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer side portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and part of it may go around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). You may want to stay.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (the shape of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. Although an example in which the shape is concave is shown, the shape is not limited to this, and a polygonal prismatic surface or a front surface concave in a polyhedral shape may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “operation dial, touch panel, etc. "Equipment with an operating device", "equipment with a rotating body having a decoration on the surface", "equipment with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration", "game Characters, items, logos according to the concept of the machine, those with a decorative body that sculpt the scene (diorama) etc. "," Characters, items, logos according to the concept of the gaming machine A member such as a unit or a panel provided with ", etc., which has been decorated by a seal or printing." Further, the number of members to be mounted in the mounting space 326j (production operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be mounted. For example, separate members may be attached such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is formed with the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a that is open to the front for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It should be noted that the front surface of such a plate unit cover may be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine by sticking, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. desirable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in plan view of the lower plate 322 is defined by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to see from the front is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to be visually recognized from the front.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction, but have an arc shape. However, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button internal decoration portion 432g of the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 is used, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged at the front and rear (or the upper and lower) is provided under predetermined conditions. It is also possible to adopt a configuration having variable light transmission means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized when the above condition is satisfied. Here, as the variable light transmission means, "a rear surface can be visually recognized due to a difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side like a magic mirror", "a transparent state by turning on/off a power source like a liquid crystal film" And becomes opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized." The front member and the rear member may be movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are in a visible state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be prevented from getting bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, by darkening the rear side of the front member, only the decoration of the front member can be achieved. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap each other.

Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. The player can see the decoration by the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The player can show the decoration by the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously illuminated by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, are satisfied, and a member on the rear side of the rear member through the front member and the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character). Can be shown to the player. With this, by appropriately selecting the part to be brightened by the light of the light emitting part, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the back side is dark, so that the front member and the rear member have a surface. Glittering decorations can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned specific examples, the variable light transmitting means is described as a magic mirror, but the same effect can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (has a light transmitting property). If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or light-emitted) by the light of a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the player can be shown a variety of light-emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency forming the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for playing balls or the like that relays electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that performs a control power supply (for example, +5V) generation process and a game-related control including payout of prize balls. , And a second control unit SCG that produces an effect relating to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The 2 control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. Main control MPU1310a which is a microprocessor in which various control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations and ROMs for storing various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are built, and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once added is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in Hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset). A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (which is input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later), at high speed, other values within a predetermined numerical range are sequentially extracted without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, without overlapping with other values within the predetermined numerical range. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a makes a big hit with the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and no reset control main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset terminal provided with no reset terminal It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset described later, Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and general. The detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the winning hole 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. In addition, in the gate sensor 4003 which detects the game sphere which passes the gate section 2003 which is shown in Figure 60, the count sensor 4005 which detects the game sphere which entered into the special winning a prize 2005, and the back unit 3000 which is shown in FIG. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device 1403. , A second special symbol display device 1405, a first special reserved number display device 1404, a second special reserved number display device 1406, a normal symbol display device 1402, a status display device 1401, and a round display device 1407 to output a drive signal or To do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. Contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are proximity switches having a long life. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001, 201 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to payout from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function as serial data, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Now, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main control serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I/O ports, etc., connects the bus 1310ah. It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae is for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310eaa, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec outputs the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310eaa and starts transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to be described later is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. With this as a trigger, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Discharge control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. 70, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls and the like, and a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also has a function as a RAM clear switch, is a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and also pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, a ROM for storing various commands, a payout control MPU 952a that is a microprocessor having a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection from various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 are provided. In the payout control MPU 952a, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially outputs various kinds of information (game information) about a game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about payout as a main pay serial data reception signal through the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as serial data of a serial system as a signal to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes payout control after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output when a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, and thus various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information, and a dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, in the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset to be described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

A ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects a ball out of a game ball in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 which detects whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data system, or the operation signal (detection signal of the operation switch 954). Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the reset functionless payout control output circuit 952cb, thereby performing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. From the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the error LED indicator. By outputting the drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball ball" (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space that communicates with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. "Payment detection sensor error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, the payout detection sensor 842 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). That a “retry error” occurs when the number “5” is displayed (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit). When the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates "CR not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6) Is notified), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that "there is stock (there is a prize ball stock (not yet paid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid yet) That the number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. ), the number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error contents regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the hall computer uses the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 as a main control board 1310 for advancing a game and a payout control board 951 for controlling payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls in a serial manner, and this signal is the CR unit It is adapted to be inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in accordance with the number of balls of the rented game ball, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball loan display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit 330. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display unit 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the gaming ball/lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection board for lending devices such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 but also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (more precisely, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 951, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880, and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC+12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) in this embodiment) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. , While supplying to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, while supplying to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 ..

The frequency display plate 365 is provided with a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball return display section 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the unpaid balance display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 switches on (turns on) the return button 329, and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 has three segment displays arranged in a line, and one of the three-digit segment displays is sequentially driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the ball loan display unit 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 and displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball lending/returning display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the content to be displayed by lighting up, and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the plate 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially emits light according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of light emitted from the container can be visually confirmed through the lending remaining display portion 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball loan display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues one payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental ball connection terminal board for game balls, etc. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when the ball clerk button 328 is pressed and the game ball for 200 yen is paid out, when the clerk in the hall or the like presets the CR unit 6, the payout operation is performed once. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after the amount corresponding to the number of gaming balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 is subtracted.

[7-3. Power board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 capable of electrically connecting and disconnecting AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The firing control unit 953 performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the electric power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents that are supplied from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source.

[7-3-2. Firing controller]
A firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a, an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's intention. The detection signal from the input terminal is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal indicating that fact is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs it to the launch solenoid 682. Meanwhile, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the dish unit 320, It controls to send the game ball received by the ball-sending member to the side of the hitting ball launcher 650.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 72, and 19 and the peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 and controls sound such as music and sound effects that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and calendar information and time/minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music and sound effects that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. A volume control volume 1510a that is adjusted by operation is provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power was turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls production operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information that continues over the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and various LED light emission modes) Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing schedule data and the like for defining, and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot gaming state and special Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores the effect flag management information and the like, and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT 1511e" for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally). It is described as ".").

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored content only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The lighting data of the game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is output from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) to the lamp. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door frame. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of No. 3 is output from the peripheral I/O port for peripheral decoration control of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400, and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405. Detection signal is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, to the serial operation I/O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180, which is not shown in the figure. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control circuit board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e together. I am diagnosing whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while at the same time, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak are read/written via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I/O port 1511ag and the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control built-in serial I/O ports 1511ae, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , Peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, to independently perform data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Further, while reading/writing to/from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading/writing is performed on the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I/Os incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to independently perform data transfer, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and other storage devices are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, while various peripheral control types are used. For input/output devices such as the serial I/O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai are used. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between the two.

Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 1511ae include serial I/O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I/O ports for motor drive boards, serial I/O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. Serial I/O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port, a main control board serial I/O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I/O port.

Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and resets the signal. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and a game. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are electrically directly connected to each other to shorten the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and other LEDs other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to game performance are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player). The notification sound and the notification sound are also output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume of the sound can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from the mute to the maximum volume. Accordingly, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music or sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is low, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order or the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alarm sound from making it difficult for the clerk or the like in the hall to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music and sound effects, while There is a possibility of increasing the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects, and also to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to shift to a game state advantageous for the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arranged light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later at the time of power-on. Some of them are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

Further, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the LED type backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600 is included, and for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness of 80% is added to the correction information acquired by 5%, which is the acquired correction information. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the game board side effect display device is displayed. When the backlight of 1600 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by further adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that stores, among the various types of information that are updated by executing various control programs, those to be backed up. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy areas 1511cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce stored exclusively, and a backup non-management target work area 1511cf which stores, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, those which are not backup targets, Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written in the backup non-managed work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on status command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And the game state (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and the performance information (1 ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later is backed up. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. "Bank" is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The subsequent "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that it is in a state in which the screen data from can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each, it is respectively added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1fr) and effects described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, “(1 ms)” means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and thus “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, And “Bank4” (also used for production information (1 ms) and production backup information (1 ms) described later with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) has a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is output. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is set. A door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which a received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and stores the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. It is a storage area to be set, and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained from the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set, and detection operation signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400 are stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. Based on the above, various kinds of information obtained by the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like) are set in the storage area. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive substrate 4450 is arranged. When the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 on the basis of a LOCKN signal which will be output to notify the fact. It is a storage area in which various kinds of information acquired regarding the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects during connection with the effect display drive substrate 4450 are set.

It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control section steady process When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is provided in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door side emission data STL is displayed. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control section regular processing, When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed last time, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process of this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag Sometimes, when the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like this.

Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. As performance backup information (1 ms), by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is such that each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The page consistency is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) which is a storage area that is normally used is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), a backup first area 1511 cb and a backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is designed to perform high-speed copying, but the programs for executing the high-speed copy by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state (for example, for instructing the effect start when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning the power on. Even when) is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are zero-cleared. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the push operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state). While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect also, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over the days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit game state and a special production flag). (For example, information) is dedicatedly stored as Bank 0 (SRAM) for backup. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is “Bank”. The subsequent "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank 4” (also used for production information (SRAM) and production backup information (SRAM) described later with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM) that is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the peripheral control DMA every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, the backup second area 1511dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. In addition to a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with a sound source for controlling, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. To a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music and sound effects as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is directed to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that transmits the data and the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is output. On the other hand, while the circuit is connected for transmission, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, a forced switching circuit 1512f for circuit connection for transmitting the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, Is equipped with. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, for example, ring image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display a screen or an image to be described later, and an operation menu background image to be described later. The operation menu background image data to be used, the selection display object image data used to display at least one selection display object described later, the tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described below, and the volume adjustment icon described below. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, etc., the body frame backside image data used for displaying the body frame backside image where the position of each part on the backside of the body frame 4 can be visually seen from the player, and the display of the service mode screen The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and being output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data is generated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The sound command data extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae. After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the V blank signal is input, and the first data is generated according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the V blank signal as the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the sound command data at the head is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VRAM for doing so is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from a channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. Performance display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are Although attached to the game board 5, the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has "V-by-One (V-by-One By adopting the differential communication called "registered trademark"", the structure is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 is an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential).
Signaling) uses a serial type differential interface, while channel CH2 uses a parallel type interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. Then, various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data of one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, and one screen worth (1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data (for frames) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side The image display data for the effect display device 460 is supplied from the channel CH2 to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (for one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and at the same time, displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Not output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" holds drawing data for one screen (for one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting the sound data such as sound effect and sound effect and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effect are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. An output channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a. The sub volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the built-in sound source of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume adjusting volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the combined volume of the effect sound is actually output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To the master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, By combining the maximum volume without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to a master volume value that is the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, in the case where the effect sound is being output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to perform the control of outputting the alarm sound to notify the clerk in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1. To explain, first, forcibly set the sub volume value of the track containing the effect sound to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set to that sound, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually The master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

That is, actually, only the notification sound of the maximum volume is played as the sound played through the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the sound generation that has been compulsorily set to silence is generated. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the operation schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the board volume that is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 is set. When the operation mode 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and is adjusted, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It's flowing.

In this way, when the effect sound is being output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the clerk or the like in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, since the effect sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed a predetermined period. When the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 stop playing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound started to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. It started to flow again from the place where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay are provided as serial data of a differential method in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also used as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmitting IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, it is possible to take measures against noise.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal, the blue video signal, and the blue video signal each have 8 bits, that is, 24 bits in total. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, that is, 18 bits in total, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalid although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. Signal and clock signal and three synchronization signals are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only a differential 1 pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source includes the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first Since the length of the wiring required for the second route) is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is rotatably supported by the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the door frame 3 is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the main body frame 4 side, such as the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is also a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, there is arranged the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized unitary structure of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment where it is subject to noise, etc.

Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by THine Electronics Corporation. By adopting differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the structure is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to be described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel lines provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where parallel lines are adopted as the differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if a differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted and the mechanism is not easily affected by noise, the hardware configuration alone causes electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., a performance display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Since noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as irregular data different from the regular data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm appears. There is a problem that such an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the channel frame CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source has a door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510. In the transmitter IC for rendering 1512d, differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, Then, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. Adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image such as a sandstorm is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described below included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are described. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connecting various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is detached from the body frame 4 for maintenance of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If it can be done and the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics, Inc. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Can be used as a differential 1 pair cable that electrically connects between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are formed with the above-described video transmission wiring patterns, which are separated from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. In the path from the transmitter to the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 cross over a plurality of relay terminal plates, so that the video transmission formed on these relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The board of the terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the wiring of the power supply and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power to the harness is red and the other wires are gray. .. Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is supplied to the compulsory switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is adapted to be transmitted to the stored effect display drive substrate 4450. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f also outputs LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Are differentially input to the plus signal and minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connection of the,, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit these two signals when two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, are input, while the differential circuit 1512f is differentially connected. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the digitization circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are connected in a circuit. Has been done. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. , From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted in the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal, are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and therefore the door frame side effect transmitter. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the game screen side effect display device 1600 displays the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or in a customer waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, and is serialized. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. To the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not defective when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is detected. While it can be determined that the performance display drive substrate 4450 housed in the 320 is not defective, when the LOCKN signal is not input, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, “a problem occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device” is notified. "Please call a clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, "a malfunction occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") ") is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound is output from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above. Based effects can be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or the reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the brightness adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the LED brightness, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in the range of 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, is included.

In addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, and hour, minute, and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa first. Input date information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is equipped with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to ON/OFF control or only ON of the backlight. It is supposed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, the year when the input date and time information is input as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and day and hour, minute and second.

Thus, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of big hit game state in low probability or high probability).

Also, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. You can adjust the brightness. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the LED type, the game board side effect is displayed. The decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time is specified, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% steps in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance.

For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further added by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to When 12 months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, an additional 10%, which is the correction information acquired, is added to the 75% of 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is obtained.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of the music, the effect sound, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and the peripherally-controlled A/D converter 1511ak electrically connected to the volume portion 1510a is the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect. The contents related to, etc. (for example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player). Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound do not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all, and the sound is muted. To the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from the mute to the maximum volume. Accordingly, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music or sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is low, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order or the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alarm sound from making it difficult for the clerk or the like in the hall to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating.

Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to be more powerful in addition to increasing the volume of sound that is played and to add to music and sound effects. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

In the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and in addition to the dial operating section 401 of the effect operation unit 400, By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included among a plurality of tracks in the sound source with built-in sound source VDP1512a, and the effect sound is changed. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the clerk of the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may be difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel large and feel the music or the sound effect loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period in which the operation is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult for the clerk in the hall to hear the adjusted sound volume and hear the music or the sound effect, the effect operation unit 400 When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the clerk in the hall feels the volume adjusted to be loud and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the effect operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing the game feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to play the game. If the player feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time uses the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired volume.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various boards and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the Pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control section 935 and a firing control section 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The portion 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply substrate 931 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to generate direct current +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple to smooth the +37V and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control unit 953.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951. The backup power is supplied to the specified RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and the game ball is shown in FIG. The drive current for launching (firing) toward the ball is adjusted and output to the firing solenoid 682, while a constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 to output the ball of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply generation circuit 935d is DC+5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as “+5V”), DC+12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and DC. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with +5V is supplied as a +5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12V is supplied as a +12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24V is supplied as a +24V power supply line.

+5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and payout. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. In other words, +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the forward direction of the power supply terminal of the payout control RAM by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. A current flows toward the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is +5V by the electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951 and again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be recharged. As a result, when +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM to retain the stored contents. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The electric current is designed to flow toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V by the electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a has a diode at the power supply terminal. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

The three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and among these three types of voltage, +12V and Two types of voltage of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, the three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the surroundings via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

The three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 76A, the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b for generating a direct current 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3V”) from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generating circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, the three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as “+9V”) from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to +9V created by the +9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components forming the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And door frame side effect display device 460. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V. The +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). Is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in the payout control board 951 and is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which +5V is applied and which is supplied by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is a +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and +5V of the main control board 1310 is not provided. The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a and the like, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when detecting signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, it is adapted to be input to the decoration board of the door frame or the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies the voltage to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line. As compared with the case of monitoring the generated voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitor circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and subsequently, the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU. Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control circuit shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in the present embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )) is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded by ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal to which +5V created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g is applied, its second terminal grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component removed from its third terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is first electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Have been smoothed.

The +5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is adapted to be applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of which is connected to the ground (GND) to form a capacitor MC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM and the capacitor BC0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, +12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and +5V is generated. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal. Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and one end of which is a capacitor grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function are provided. The associated main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5V in which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The smoothed +5V is applied to the output frequency selection terminals A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from an F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to each of the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the clock signal of 24 MHz is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is designed to be operated when clearing the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to perform RAM clear within a predetermined period after power is turned on, and error release after power is turned on (after the period when the RAM clear function is achieved, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from power on) And the function of performing. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of releasing the error that the payout control board 951 has, the main control board 1310 does not operate when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A process for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

To the main control board 1310, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated, while a logic signal is output from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is operated. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on has a pull-up with one end electrically connected to the +12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the operation switch 954 is operated. In the meantime, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal which is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 to turn on the transistor MTR0, The circuit will also turn on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a is for instructing to perform a RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. To judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage +5V in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The signal reliability is enhanced by using +12V which is the voltage. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, like the operation signal from the operation switch 954, it is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor.

[9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure, and when detecting the sign of power failure or momentary power failure, a power failure notice signal is sent as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of +12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (multiplied to the voltage by the capacitor MC20). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , +12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the third terminal which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the negative terminal of the MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +24V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC23. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of +24V is interrupted or a momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V. Then, the monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the +12V power line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +12V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC25. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage of +12V starts a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from +12V. Then, the monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A described above, so that one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the other end and electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter, as described above.

When the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, in accordance with the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. The (logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state when the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, and outputs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal which is obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. On the other hand, when the signal having the logic HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latched state is set. Further, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to the latch state by inputting the signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. When this signal is input, a state in which a signal whose logic is HI is output from the output terminal 1Q is maintained (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic). Maintain the status output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, since the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are respectively grounded to the ground (GND), they are connected to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of +24V, and the power failure of +12V, to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. Alternatively, the signal from the terminal 7 which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the instantaneous blackout is input, and based on these signals, the signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND) and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. Is not connected.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW and is input to the CLR terminal through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted to the output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it as a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also has a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR20 is turned on, The switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29 and the logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The power failure notice signal is the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 has its logic level of HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the payout control board 951 as the payout power failure notice signal, is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage through the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control section 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the following stage is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. The MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is increased to +5V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR21 is turned on, The switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic HI and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage. By the input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, and the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). The payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure notice signal that has become is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is inputted to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and its logic is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is the peripheral control board. 1510.

As described above, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripherals. While the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs as a power failure notice signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure notice signal is the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripherals. The logic of the peripheral power failure advance notice signal input to the control board 1510 is inverted, and is different from the logic of the power failure advance notice signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure advance notice signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Of the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function is connected via a wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is provided. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to each other. Since it is mounted on the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the control reference voltage of +5V to notify the power failure by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power failure notification signal, while the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are provided. In order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a between the board 951 and the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The power outage notification is performed by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal using +12V that is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to/from the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main pay serial data transmission signal without the reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951 and the TXB terminal transmits the serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main serial output signal 1310cb without reset function is transmitted as a serial serial data transmission signal, and a main serial output signal 1310cb without reset function is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout indicating that normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above has been completed. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are sent via the main control input circuit 1310b. They are input respectively.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal that notifies the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payment main serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting opening solenoid 2107 through the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69. Drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various display devices, and various information regarding games (game information) Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) about the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. To the main control board 1310, +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. ing. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that enters a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using +12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC are built in as a communication interface circuit. It is composed mainly of).

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 and electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41eaa and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as the main serial data.

The main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12V which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main loop serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41eaa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When the shift register 1310aea transmits the main-circle serial data, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by +12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (3rd terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistance AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistance for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal for outputting the main-circulation serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (6th terminal) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main-circulation serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU1511a. Input to the input terminal of.

Accordingly, as described above, when +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be transmitted completely, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can surely receive the data without any loss.

When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is the logic of.

As described above, in this embodiment, the +5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage +5V of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the +12V power supply line to which the communication voltage +12V applied via the diode MD50 are applied. In this case, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, with respect to the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h that is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the +12V power line through the diode MD50 for communication. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the command from being interrupted while being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and to prevent the command from being lost. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are used as main-circulation serial data, and are composed of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as interface circuits as main-cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the functionless main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb, and also omits them. It can be received without fail.

[10. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals to/from the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Discharge control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Therefore, +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with the noise component removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripples are further removed from the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 to be smoothed. The smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is subject to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is adapted to be applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of which is connected to a ground (GND) to form a capacitor PC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. Thus, as described above, when +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. Since the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate at the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM. The memory contents are retained by applying the payout VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is configured by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout controller]
In addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 is reset as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Discharge control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The payout control system reset PIC1 has a delay capacitance terminal electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and one end of which is a capacitor grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Discharge control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the smoothed +5V is applied to the OE terminal which is the output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCC terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power outage advance signal from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply substrate 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input is explained, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. It should be noted that various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 have various output terminals because they have open collector output types. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, here, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed by the body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20 and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26 by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 has a +12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, The door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which ON/OFF is repeated for a short time.

A circuit formed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit formed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit formed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. A switch circuit that is turned on/off according to a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR23 and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. It Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The PTR 21 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the door frame opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal, which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI, is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. An outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power source line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is also connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power source line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 has a +12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing a variation in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits which are turned on/off by a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619.

In the state where the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 can be pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

As described above, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned on, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state where the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and/or The player can judge that the state in which the main body frame 4 is open does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Since the outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, the hall computer, based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal, inputs the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether the main frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 is opened. It is possible for the player to judge that a state that does not occur during the normal game has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even when the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited by some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618′ and body frame opening switch 619′). The door frame opening switch 618′ is turned on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The body frame opening switch 619' is turned on (conducts) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618′ is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and for some reason, the main body is opened. Even when the frame opening switch 619′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Thus, even if the door frame opening switch 618' and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line and also has resistance. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 and a power failure notice signal.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or the momentary power failure is detected, the reset function is not provided. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. The payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951 while the +24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and +24V. At this time, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the withdrawal control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 951, and therefore is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the withdrawal power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the withdrawal control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and/or +24 V, the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, the power failure notice signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs the signal. The logic of the power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a according to the power outage notice are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 through the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 is for detecting whether or not the game space in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. In the payout control board 951, the signal pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951 while the accommodation space is full of game balls. , The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of game balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power board 931. The signal that is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of gaming balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 and the payout control board. In 951, the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR47 and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistors PR45, PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration is adopted, the detection signals from the various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the delivery detection sensor 842, and the like provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to the influence of noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is the gaming ball in which the accommodating space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 operates. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of the game balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834. There is also a case where the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 834 and the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally generates heat, causing a failure, or a mechanism or the like that transmits the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body fails. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The output terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the preceding-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage through the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage changes by turning on/off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 of the previous stage and the signal changes as the RWMCLR signal, and the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Entered in.

Further, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, are pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is +12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the operation switch 954.

A circuit including the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and a circuit including the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is provided in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) included in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is designed to be operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to clear the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time and the error release after the power is turned on (after the period for performing the function as the RAM clear has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) It has functions and. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing the RAM clear within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while it is after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). In the function for canceling the error in ), it becomes an error canceling signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor of the preceding stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42 and the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned on, the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned on, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. By lowering the voltage to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminal of the operation switch 954, that is, the terminals 3 and 4 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 and the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic LOW shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5 and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW by pulling down the output terminal Nos. 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 to the ground (GND) side is the transistor of the previous stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned off, the front-stage switch circuit is also turned off, and the voltage is applied to the base of the rear-stage transistor PTR43, which is applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42. The voltage that rises to the +5V side by the resistor PR51 turns on the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage and also turns on the switch circuit in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminal of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above, this logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to perform the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Discharge motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power source input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power source line and the +5V power source line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 and the terminal 10 of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power terminal of the payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12V or +5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It supplies to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and supplies to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, an excitation signal is generated. A drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63 to the drive ICPIC 60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the cathode IC of the drive ICPIC 60 in front of the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal. Adopted a circuit configuration that does.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Through the terminal board 869, an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating infrared LEDs and phototransistors).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the infrared LED built in the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photo coupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71 and also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. 80 through the ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end of. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. It

The circuit including the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. It

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. To be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. The photocoupler PIC71 is turned on/off to change the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photo coupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal that is output from the output terminal of the above through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of No. 2 through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic of LOW becomes PR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from the input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b, as shown in FIG. To be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is sent to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function as a payer serial data transmission signal. The payout control output circuit 952cb having no reset function transmits a payer serial data transmission signal to the main control board 1310.

To each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notice signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) Signal 1 etc.), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the completion of the normal reception of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. For example, the detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to output the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the voltage switching signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the normal reception completion of the main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is used. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b and so on.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 has the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door opening signal, etc. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And big hit information output signal such as 2 round big hit information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, ordinary symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power failure notice signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as a prize ball by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The award ball number information output signal outputted for each, the main award ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal Output signal, game information signals such as probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start mouth winning information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and an award ball number information output signal, and the main award ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting mouth winning information Eight signals, which are output signals, are output (passed) through the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hole) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the game and the like of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is two (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots) and the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of big hits in the second round and the number of big hits in the 15th land from the total number of big hits. Therefore, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is impossible to know whether it is a two-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

However, the number of times of occurrence of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot in practice, so even if the player starts the game, only the two-round jackpot occurs. In some cases, a 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. As described above, the number of times of occurrence of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more motivated than necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 15th round jackpot information output signal and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the 2nd round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times of 15 rounds of big hits. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is the two-round big hit or the 15-round big hit, and the data counter has the 15-round big hit. The number of big hits and the number of big hits in the second round can be displayed separately or only the number of big hits in the 15th round can be displayed as the number of big hit game states, which may arouse the player's aspirations more than necessary. Absent.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period until the 2-round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15-round big hit information output signal is also the 15-round big hit. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when the 2-round jackpot is generated, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. When the 15 round big hit information is output to the hall computer, the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period. Such a 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Array of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer edge frame door opening information output signal, the award ball number information output signal, the main award ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the starting mouth winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951. It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

These various signals will be briefly described. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal does not occur during the normal game by the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. This is a signal that tells that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells you that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls that entered in 10 reaches 10 balls. The 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that 15 round jackpots have occurred. 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2 round big hit has occurred, and the probability fluctuation information output signal has probability fluctuation It is a signal that tells that it is in a state, the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The variable display is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped (stopped) state, and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 ( (Stopped) is a signal that conveys that it is in a state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that conveys that a time saving state has occurred, the start mouth winning a prize information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is a signal to that effect.

On the external terminal board 784, as shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a line. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys that fact whenever the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls as a prize ball each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of balls of the paid game balls to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the signal is transmitted while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 is open from the output terminal PT2. When the outer edge frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer displays the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is being input. It is possible to understand that the body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, it is a signal that tells that it is in a state, and in the present embodiment, the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is ended (stopped). Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start-port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start-port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer inputs the start-port winning information output signal to the first start port 2002 or the second opening of the pachinko machine 1 each time. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the starting opening 2004, and count the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is provided in black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal for notifying that the 15-round jackpot is being generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal has been input to grasp the total number of 15-round jackpots that have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is provided in pink and outputs a 2-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 2-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to know that the state is in addition to counting the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of two-round jackpots that have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is a terminal which is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal is, as described above, a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, 0.128 seconds is output from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted, and the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can grasp the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs a time saving/medium time information output signal. As described above, the time saving/time saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving/shortening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving/shortening information output signal is input. At the same time, the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state can be grasped by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT9 is provided in orange and outputs the information output signal during probability variation. As described above, the probability variation information output signal is a signal indicating that the probability variation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability variation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability variation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, when the probability variation information output signal is input, the hall computer is in a state where the probability change is occurring in the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that there is, and to count the number of times the information output signal during probability variation is input to grasp the total number of times that probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball that has been balled reaches 10 balls. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the pachinko machine 1 to receive 10 balls as a prize ball each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and also to count the number of game balls to be paid out and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. Note that, for example, game balls that are to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005. When the number of spheres of No. reaches 20 or more and the main prize sphere number information output signal is output plural times, the main prize sphere number information output signal is 0.256 (=0.128 seconds×2 times) seconds, As in the case of one continuous signal, the signals are output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control board. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are respectively colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10 respectively, other wirings are erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the physical connection. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are connected to the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the left side of the center toward the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various output on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer from being erroneously electrically connected.

In the present embodiment, the award ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main award ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively holes from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 when the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the 15 round big hit happens to the pachinko machine 1 at the time when the remaining amount is running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the payout is performed. (In addition, if, for example, a ball clogging or a ball scatter occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be eliminated). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal that conveys that fact, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game balls cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk in the hall or the like, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle for supplying the game balls to the prize ball tank 720 from the pachinko island facility and specifies the position of the ball clogging (in addition, for example, in the payout device 830. Then, the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball clogging is specified) and the problem is solved, whereby the game ball is returned to the payout state.

However, even in the situation where the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 rounds of big hits, the game balls are paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the state returns to the state where the payout control board 951 pays out unpaid gaming balls one after another, the payout control board 951 is generated even though the 15 round big hit ends and the 15 round big hit does not occur. Whenever the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as a prize ball reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal for notifying that is output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, despite the fact that the 15 round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of balls of the game ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and the payout balls are actually paid out, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are output. We adopted a mechanism that communicates to the hall computer via the. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (a clogging of a supply nozzle or the like, a clogging of a ball in the dispensing device 830, a ball clogging, or the like) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state. The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the dish unit 320. It is mainly configured by a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a differential serial signal (serial data) of "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side production of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Are transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 produces a plus signal. The noise can be separated from the negative signal. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. The horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the three synchronizing signals of the clock signal are restored (that is, the parallel signal before being serialized is restored). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8-bit red video signals, green video signals, and blue video signals output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, respectively. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are higher 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to be connected as described above. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference is transmitted. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, so that the door A signal output from the frame-side production transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510 into the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and the production display drive board 4450. Is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input. Serial signal (serial data) from the side effect transmitter IC 1512d by the differential system "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and is input to the RXIN+ and RXIN− terminals of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and then input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, are input. A LOCKN signal, which will be described later, is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is, as described above, the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request. The LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, but is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zine Electronics stock. The structure is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. To forcefully output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 purposely outputs the data. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with +3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDS GND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminals of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and the capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the GND terminal and the GND terminal serving as the ground for the digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. Removing high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the GNDO terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSDS terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and a PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal informs that the logic becomes HI when +3.3V is supplied (applied) and the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW to power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V through the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at a rising edge. This is a terminal for designating either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or when it is a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and in the present embodiment, As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it is in a state where it cannot output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) including a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, For some reason, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the fact to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Transmit to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door. You may connect directly electrically via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronizing signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that informs that the data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17 are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistance SDR3 which is a damping resistance.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal have three video signals (18: red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the ground, and are the same ground. Is becoming

[13. Commands related to transmission/reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from main control board to payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 to drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to store the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage pans. When a device for paying out game balls as a ball rental) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board The prize ball command transmitted from the 1310 to the payout control board 951 includes commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and the command 11H. , Two prize balls are designated,..., 15 prize balls are designated in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as ball rental balls as a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(b), the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The command 20H to the command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the player. The command 20H designates one prize ball, the command 21H designates two prize balls,... 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies the self-check. By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether or not the ACK signal is input, the transmission side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as a confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, normal electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the first special symbol display 1403, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “A*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” indicates a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. The probabilities and short-lived states include a low-probability short-lived state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-lived state, a high-probability short-lived state that indicates a high-probability state that is a short-lived state, and a low-probability It is composed of a low probability non-time saving state that indicates a state that is not a time saving state, and a high probability non time saving state that indicates a high probability state that is not a time saving state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high-probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low-probability state (normal game state), and the short-time state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), the time for displaying symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, so that the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery described later in the predetermined time is displayed. In addition to increasing the number of times of stop display as compared with the non-time saving state, the period during which the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed is lengthened as compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state), and is shown in FIG. A state in which a lottery opportunity for special symbols can be obtained without reducing the number of balls held by increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game balls to the second starting opening 2004 (in other words, compared with the non-time saving state) The second starting port 2004 is configured by increasing the determination of whether to open/close the pair of movable pieces and lengthening the period of opening/closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening/closing the pair of movable pieces. It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate of game balls to (ball entry rate).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the second special symbol display device 1405, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B*H” is assigned as the status and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode is assigned (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 variation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the jackpot related category includes jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 Nth display, jackpot opening 1 closed display, jackpot opening 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, jackpot opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The big hit opening command is for instructing to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). Is to open or start the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the big winning opening 1 (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is closed or starts to be closed between rounds, and the special winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of 0 to 10 game balls (shown in FIG. 69). It conveys the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening 2005, which is detected by the count sensor 4005. The big hit ending command is an instruction to start the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is the big hit. This is to instruct display of symbol information.

The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (when the small winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is open or The small hit count display command is for a small hit medium to big prize opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). In the small hitting ending command, a small hitting ending start is instructed.

As a transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 When the special winning opening 2005 is opened in the Nth round), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is closed), The special winning opening 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened and the special winning opening 2005 is entered) Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, the big hit symbol display command is when the big winning opening is opened (when the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). ) Is sent to.

The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command of the main control return destination at power-on. A status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state. The power-on state command is for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and information at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored) .) in the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state. , And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, when creating so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type, which game copyright it belongs to, what kind of game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like. In other words, the model code information of the pachinko machine is the series code for specifying which type is the max type, the middle type, and the sweet digital type, which indicates the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code, and game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, probability changes with a limited number of changes in special symbols. It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control recovery destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (when power is restored, power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure) Also included). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the container 1402, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. A status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the general figure synchronization effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the universal pattern specification command is for specifying the off, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state include a low probability time saving state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time saving indicating a high probability state being a time saving state. State, a low-probability non-time saving state that indicates a low-probability state that is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state that is not a short-time state As a gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is fixed), the state change command at the time of variation is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect-related relates to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which is opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into general parts as shown in FIG. 89. It is composed of a command called hit opening, den opening display, and genbu per ending. A status of “F*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The universal figure opening command is for instructing the opening of the universal figure, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (a pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure opening command is transmitted when the universal figure opening starts, and the universal battery open display command is transmitted when the universal battery is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the starter solenoid 2107 to move to the left or right). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display is made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the player hits the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating) (the win is not even during the big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the game ball is there). (When the count sensor 4005 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical signal in a path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is for instructing to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When the disconnection/short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005 or the like occurs, it is an instruction to start the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command indicates that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69 is abnormal. In case of occurrence of, the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification is instructed to start.

Further, the door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is in the opened state, the door frame is informed, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In the case of the opened state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the case where the main body frame 4 is opened, the main body frame opening command is issued, and the main body frame closing command sends the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening except during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Any of the above is transmitted when any one of them is broken or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the opened state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7*H” is set. The status is set and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds the additional information “7*H” to these received commands. Is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The shaped frame 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame is changed, and when the error is cleared, the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared, and the frame 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194 are inspected).

As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at the time of recovery from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 executed in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Other]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, starting mouth winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, normal symbol storage, special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect. A status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command is It is for instructing the state transition from the shortened operating state to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, the high probability end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command The special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls that have not been played (the number of reserves) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 memory command is 0-4 special symbols 2 pending (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol (reserved number), and the ordinary symbol storage command is the ordinary symbol 1 to 0-4. In order to convey the number of balls (the number of balls not yet used for variable display of ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game balls have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8) Yes, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol 1 is held in advance. Based on the first special symbol display 1403 is to instruct a pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command, the special symbol 2 hold is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it pre-reads and instructs the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the first starting mouth 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change-shortening operation end designating command is sent to notify that, and the high-probability end designating command , "High probability N times" is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the elapse of the discontinuation stop period) after the fluctuation has been confirmed, in which the high probability number has been exhausted, and the special symbol 1 memory command changes the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls. When (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 has a number of holdings not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, the first starting further. When a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases when the number of holdings decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for the variable display of special symbols) , Special symbol 2 storage command, when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400) In the state where there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the reserved number increases, and the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405 from the reserved number. It is sent to when the number of reservations used for display decreases), the normal symbol memory command is a normal symbol 1 when the number of operation reserve balls changes (normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003). In the state where there is a number of reserves not yet used in the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, when the number of reserves increases by the game ball passing through the gate section 2003, and from the number of reserves the normal symbol display 1402 It is sent to when the number of holdings is reduced to be used for the variable display of normal symbols, and the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command is when the number of special symbols 1 operation holding balls increases (the game ball in the first starting opening 2002). When the number of balls entered and the number of holdings increased is transmitted, the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command is when the number of special symbols 2 actuation holding balls increases (the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 is the number of holdings). (When increased) will be sent. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, the start opening winning command is, as described above, at the time of the start opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second starting opening). When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command) has a ball out, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error and a CR not connected. Bit 0 (B0, "B") is provided when the ball is out. Represents a bit), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball ball, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball ball, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2). On error, bit 3 (B3) is set to the value 1, and on retry error, bit 4 (B4) is set to the value 1. Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared for the ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process continued, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value updating type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not a reach (out of reach) is generated when the big hit game state is not generated The random number for reach determination to be used for the determination, and the variation used for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. 69. Random number for the display pattern, a big hit symbol for use in determining the big hit symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the big hit game state, and this big hit Random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, when the small hit game state is generated, the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 are derived and displayed Random numbers for small hit symbols to be used for determining the small hit symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for the small hit symbols to be used for determining initial values of the random numbers for the small hit symbols, and the like are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol for determining whether to open or close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 and an initial value for the random number for determining a normal symbol are used. For the normal symbol per determination for initial value determination random number, and the normal symbol variation display pattern random number for use in determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

Among various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, whereas other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a makes a big hit with the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hitting toward the maximum value, and subsequently counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hitting determination. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hitting determination random number, the normal symbol hitting determination initial value determining random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for the symbol hit determination. .

In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at power-on, or in the main-control-side power-on processing, which will be described later, of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum is stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol is normally the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and usually performs the initial value derivation process to derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for symbol determination based on the extracted ID code. It is executed so that the derived fixed value is set. That is, as for the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. As described above, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control internal RAM is cleared to execute the ID code. The second security measure for deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two-step security measure for prevent the analysis.

Here, an advantage of using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination will be described from the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value are obtained illegally, its ID code is unique for identifying an individual. Since they are provided with reference numerals, they are completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a' included in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting judgment random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1′, and thus is disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a game state in which a game ball can be received in the starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and start setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “ WDT control register”) to set a timer setting value to activate the main control built-in WDT 1310af and reset the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and the watchdog timer clear register (in the main control MPU 1310a built-in until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value) Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the electric power clear processing, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing +24V and the reference voltage or comparing +12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result indicates that when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power supply clearing process, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is started to start the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting its logic to LOW. To be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 can be applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input. The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Has been done. Whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure notification signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, by setting the logic of the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to HI. Entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC22 in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure advance notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is latched.

Following step S14, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. It is done depending on whether or not it has been done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16 (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above indicates whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag that indicates and is set to a value of 1 when erasing the game information and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 is activated (boot. Waiting). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) until booting.

Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When the power failure notification signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

When the power failure notice signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (power-off) to be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control internal RAM in the main power supply side power-off process to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power cut-off processing is normally completed, and is set to a value of 0 when the main control-side power cut-off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as the power recovery time ( Step S34). This setting reads the power recovery time information from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and sets this power recovery time information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power recovery" refers to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is turned off, a state in which power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, a fraudulent person has A state in which the main control board 1310 is reset by the high frequency output from the hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processing thereafter, so that the main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. , Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, the main control program executes the entire main control RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program is executing the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the ROM with built-in main control as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a, the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is for instructing the RAM clear, when deleting the game information, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power off process When not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the normal symbol per determination judgment random number based on the taken out ID code. Always perform the initial value derivation process that derives the same fixed value from, and set this fixed value to the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol per determination, which is used to determine the initial value of the above random number for the ordinary symbol. To do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951 and serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels for the peripheral control board 1510). Corresponding to the above), the transmission serial port prescaler is set with the communication speed and the presence/absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set with the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission.

Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a test facility for gaming machines, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Subsequent to step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, a hard random number control register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the random number for jackpot determination, which is used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state, out of various random numbers related to the game, by the hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and obtaining a random number, the startup of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when obtaining a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a big hit determination random number.

Subsequent to step S48, the main control program sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in (1) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S52, when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main processing on the main control side is started, the main control program sends an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal time operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954, as described above, for the error release navigation command for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. RAM clear processing is executed upon input (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, execution of RAM clear processing is restricted even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used for canceling the error that has occurred in the payout operation, is used as the game storing unit instead of the power-on for a predetermined time. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later) is caused to function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process for starting initialization, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the game is played. It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When no power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In this non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning/judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-win/win random number updating process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there is an input of the power failure advance notice signal. Then, step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Subsequent to step S60, the main control program is the starting port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display device 1403, the second special symbol display device 1405, and the first special reserved number display device 1404 shown in FIG. , The second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407 and the like, the drive signal output to stop (step S62).

Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting this RAM access prohibition, it becomes impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by subsequent power recovery.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

Here, description will be given of the point that the determination as to the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the wait time standby process in step S22 is followed by the determination of the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 and the subsequent process is performed Described below are the problems.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the charge from the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, so that the power from the pachinko island equipment is reduced. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main control side main processing or main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island equipment When the power is shut off, the main control side power shutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 upon power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 are displayed. Immediately before the waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment) until the system for performing the drawing control of the device 460 is activated (booted) is started, and the waiting time is reached. Then, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 In step S52, the interrupt initial setting is performed, and then, in step S52, the interrupt permission setting is performed, so that the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed and the main control side RAM is updated even if the content of the main control internal RAM is updated. It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off process in the power-on process. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the content of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process at the main control side is started again when power is restored.

Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the checksum value based on the contents of is compared with the value stored in the RAM with built-in main control immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the clerk in the hall or the like, and the information stored in the RAM with the main control is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention of the RAM clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that it will be done.

In view of this, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power outage notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power outage notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the content of the main control internal RAM (game information) is not changed at all.

As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the calculated and stored checksum value of step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power outage advance notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing a game while the pachinko machine is in progress. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the backup processing for storing the game information according to the progress of this game is performed. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing constituted by an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a's main processing is completed. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculated and stored in step S64). Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, the main control internal WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to reset the contents of the main control internal RAM. While the main control-side power-off processing can be restarted without updating at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the power-off process on the main control side within the “power-supply securing period during an instantaneous power failure or power failure” of about 7 ms by hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a is powered off when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or the instantaneous blackout. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power interruption or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after that, it is determined in step 24 whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power outage notice signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the above determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time is reset again. Since it becomes impossible to start timing, the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, a step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt process described later). Adopted the mechanism. When the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information) are not changed at all by software and the main control side power supply. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (by including the part covered by the hardware so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all by surely completing the disconnection process) It is possible to reliably prevent (game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). For transmission, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information for instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in step S50, that is, the problem when the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on at step S50 is not set will be described.

For example, while the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game display screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 is displayed. 8 activates the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 by the opening/closing member 2107, and a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 makes steps. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the special winning opening 2005 is shifted from the state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to the state in which it is opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a special winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is displayed. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is impossible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the big hit game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the special winning opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107, for example, when finishing four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit game state. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control of the special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, starting closing between the special winning opening 2005 rounds of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the big hit game state of the fifth round (fifth round), driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special winning opening opening fifth display command for instructing to shift from the state to the open state (that is, opening of the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005) is transmitted. To do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round in the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Becomes

In addition, for example, a screen informing that the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is advantageous to the player (for example, the fact that the movable piece is expanded) is displayed. The main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so that the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece of is being expanded in the left-right direction and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 causes the main control board 1310 in the work area of the main control built-in RAM to operate in the work area. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs That is, the movable piece moves from a substantially vertical standing state to a laterally expanded state.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state and is in a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, and a game state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed and returned to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 becomes a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating that there is any in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball was received at the second start opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power recovery has been returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he or she plays.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly returned after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a so-called frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and it is mistaken for it. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the time when the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89. Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the 4 rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening/closing member 2107 as the destination of the return of the main control board 1310. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the effect that it will shift to the state in which it is in the state, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies the screen indicating that it is the fourth round of the big hit game state (that is, the screen indicating how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. A screen that tells that there is something (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game ball so that it enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to display a game area on the game board side effect display device 1600 and instruct a player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine to play a game ball into the special winning opening 2005 after power recovery. For example, in the above-described example, in the state where the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen is displayed as a destination to which the main control board 1310 is to be restored, in which the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started to expand the pair of movable pieces in the left-right direction (for example, "the movable piece is The peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "The game is played so that the game ball enters the lower starting opening." is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 on the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to instruct a player who is seated on the front of the pachinko machine to display a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 after the power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 side to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting on the front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumpy state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspecting process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values should not match, and the entire area of the main control internal RAM must be cleared in step S38. Accordingly, when the reservation of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is set in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, that is, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in the state stored in. In these commands, a power-on state command is first transmitted and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in the figure is operated to perform the RAM clear, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs (Including when power is restored), in any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) It is composed of information for instructing whether or not to perform and information for indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine refers to the copyright of which work when the so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, if probability variation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (eg, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine) etc.) in which the probability variation occurs after being played 30 or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for which of the copyrights of the plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line for manufacturing the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D). Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 may be used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misconceptions that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the operator of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which product copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and which product type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, also when the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating that to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line, so that the inspection device is controlled by the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type of sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the occurrence, a game specification code (ST machine etc.) that specifies that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited), Based on the above, by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the copyright of the main control board 1310 belongs to, and also to confirm the copyright of the same work. Whether it is a model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type), and what kind of game specification (if probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspecting step of the production line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

When the main control timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, the second register bank is used in the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, the ordinary condition described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are paid out control board 951. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the message has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, whereby the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control RAM as time management information.

Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2001, 201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that entered the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 and the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. , A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 which detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and a magnetic detection sensor 4024 which detects fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. The payout ACK signal from the payout control board 951 which informs that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the detection signal and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing to be described later are read and input information Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004. When each of the signals is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 and corresponding thereto is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 4002, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting mouth sensor 4004. Then, the starting mouth winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201, the count sensor 4005 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning opening 2005. From the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 2003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). After the elapse of a second time, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the effect of chattering, noise, etc., by performing a total of two readings, the first reading to the third reading comparing twice and the second reading to the fourth comparison reading twice. Since the erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are detected. The reliability can be increased.

Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update processing, the above-mentioned big hit symbol random number and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for initial value determination for the big hit symbols and the random numbers for initial value determination for the small hit symbols are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so that each time the winning random number updating process is performed, each counter counts up. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the minimum value is set. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up from the minimum value. Normally, when the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for symbol determination, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for the symbol hit determination. .

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not included in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, are respectively updated. However, each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and If the number of executions of the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of occurs, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number , And the small hit symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created and the prize ball is paid out. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information storage area stores the output information as the output information. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, when a game ball is entered, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls planned to be paid out as a prize ball. Since it has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Alternatively, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. For example, a self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951. As in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, when the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10, the next number of balls is added to the exceeded number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the added number of game balls is added. When is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that effect and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands divided into the status displays shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer main serial data, the information transmitted to the payout control board 951 is output to the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM as output information. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation) The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005), etc. The abnormal winning state display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created, and is stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as the big hit determination random number. Then, whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match. Whether or not to determine (whether to generate the jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is stored in advance in the main control ROM It is determined whether or not the probability variation hit determination value matches (determination as to whether or not probability variation occurs). Here, the “probability change” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the above-described big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and the value is read from the normal time determination table, while the value 31768 is set in the high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When it is determined whether or not the big hit determination value stored in the ROM in advance matches, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). It is performed depending on whether or not is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, stored in the output information storage area described above as output information To do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as the big hit related ones shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the opened state twice (round), The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp 1407a is set so as to light the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round display device 1407 shown in FIG. At some time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to light the 15-round display lamp 1407b of the round display device 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so as to light the presence/absence of fluctuation in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol judgment is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control RAM. Remember.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved sphere. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted from this read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination value matches (called "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not to open/close the movable piece is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified into those related to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information is described above. Stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination that is taken out coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, various commands related to the normal electric power combination effect shown in FIG. 89. Is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. , When the value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination that has been taken out does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above. The display pattern is determined, various commands classified as related to the universal figure entrainment effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and normally according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern. Normally, the output of the lighting signal to the symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is issued to the payout control board 951. Or output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens/closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when in the big hit game state, or outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens/closes the movable piece. In addition to output, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals relating to the game, such as the time saving information output information and the starting mouth winning information output signal, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads the transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine shown in FIG. 89 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related Various commands classified as commands and big hits (for example, big winning based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected) 90, which is a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as ordinary figure synchronization effect-related, various commands classified as ordinary electric role effect related, and FIG. Various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) classified into notification display, various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release) Navi command and frame state 2 command), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other are stored. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main circumference serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. Therefore, the main loop serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41eaa and the transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as main circumference serial data. At the time of power recovery when power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is recovered, in order to inform the power recovery in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, since the power-on state command and the power-on main control recovery destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. , The power-on state command that constitutes the main-cycle serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is configured. The information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, the game information is read from the game backup information and the game information is responded to. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, first, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control unit Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to () (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 A body frame opening command (second body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (body frame command sending means, second body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the (unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door closing command (second door closing command) to the (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the timing, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af does not forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. 89, the peripheral control board 1510 sends the power-on main control return destination command of FIG. 89 for instructing the drive state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 which are the electric drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. It is possible to output to. In other words, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process of FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status command and power-on main command classified into power-on in FIG. 89 are transmitted in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery). A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command as main circumference serial data. , The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted in this order to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value that constitute the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power outage or power outage and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage should be promptly restored after power recovery. In addition to being able to perform, the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a condensed state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player is in a broken state and is in fault. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

Further, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process on the main control side, all areas of the main control internal RAM must be cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, whereby two commands, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, are stored. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM with built-in main control, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main circumference serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order, and subsequently the main control return destination command at power-on is configured. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-described max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine) and the like), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, which is shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb thereof. ) Is compared, and the production backup information (1 ms) that is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) is compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up to is compared with the production backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), and the comparison contents 73, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), is copied back to perform a hot start, while the compared content does not match (that is, , 0), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, for cold start.

Also, in the hot start/cold start determination processing, also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) is compared, and the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage region which is normally used in peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the year/month/day and the time information for specifying the hour/minute/second are acquired from the RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set as the game board. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turning it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn it on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It's not done at all. This is because the correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, triggered by the input of the V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it covered.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is activated Also, the value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Gaming board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is stored. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is used. This is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and the game. In synchronization with the board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED through the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. Then, via the peripheral bus 1511ai, the data is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED to write the data. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 is operated. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in which various information obtained is set, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is game effect. Whether or not to reflect in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a by the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. It outputs to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent the processing time from being delayed. However, although so-called frame drop occurs, the lamp data output processing of step S1012 causes the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects from a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and a lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and an upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by a sound data output process described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of a notification sound and a notification sound are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 perform stereo reproduction of music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects, as well as informative sounds and notification sounds.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the emission mode generating schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the emission data from the first emission data to the emission data of various LEDs is emitted. The pointer is updated in order to indicate whether the mode is set.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effect, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the first sound command data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the top drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later is generated. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor/solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own process is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so that the drive data that should be originally instructed is instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the effect control program is information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received from the command are analyzed by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving unit) described later (command analyzing unit). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound. Generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, the production control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of holding normal symbols Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and special winning opening 2005 The special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command It is analyzed whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command) (command analysis means), and it is recognized which game state is currently in. In addition, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main frame opening command, the main frame closing command, the door opening command, or the door frame closing after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. Analyze whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands are classified into special command 1 tuning effect related commands, special command 2 tuning effect related commands, jackpot related commands, and power-on shown in FIG. 89. Various commands, various commands related to general figure synchronization effect, various commands related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands classified to notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , Status display such as door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, error release navigation command (corresponding to second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various classified commands, various commands related to tests, and other classified commands.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, when the command analyzed by the reception command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before that abnormal condition is resolved. You can

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is divided into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, on the game board side. A performance display device 1600 (production device), a door frame side production display device 460 (production device), a lamp (production device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to auditorily warn the outside ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite the game state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the effect control program stores in the calendar information storage unit which is acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the emission control program in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and the emission data is arranged in time series to form the emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. In addition, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts the character data from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create the sprite data to produce the game board side effect display device. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the effect control program in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and audio data is transmitted as audio data in which the sound data is serialized by the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound have a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from the mute to the maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk or the like in the hall rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as music or effect sound flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is conducting an illegal act, the notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alarm sound from making it difficult for the clerk or the like in the hall to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to be more powerful in addition to increasing the volume of sound that is played and to add to music and sound effects. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Which is included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The performance information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are copied in sequence by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511cc. 1fr) are all copied in order from the start address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, for each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as effect effect backup information (SRAM) in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM), and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the content stored at the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511dc. All are sequentially copied from the start address of the (SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the production control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control part regular processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

The peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral controller steady processing. Set to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed to be executed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled on the way and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, at step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) shown in FIG. Notifying the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 in the processing flag SP-FLG, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. In step S1038 of the closing process (peripheral control unit steady process), the value 0 is set to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. By notifying the signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing drop.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The system waits until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral control steady processing) of FIG. 95. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is omitted, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, this routine is finished as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, according to the drive data designated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72. Is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port. When continuous transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is set. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is performed. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the amplifier board side motor. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. The frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is written to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port by writing and transferring to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. The data is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port is stored). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the operation (Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral MRAM 1511c externally attached to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. , A signal for outputting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A door frame side effect display device is obtained by acquiring the frequency and the occurrence state of the failure between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition storage area 1511cak. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached externally are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, every time the 1 ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 1511 ca shown in FIG. 73 occurs. Each time the backup is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) are included. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, as effect backup information (1 ms), in the backup first area 1511 cb, in the areas of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 becomes a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and change the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1ms), and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the top address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) continuously from the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511cc. (1 ms), all are copied in order from the start address.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. The start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I/O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is within the period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value 1 is set, and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data is followed by the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data and the third byte of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period during which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value at the byte is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a rasp environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise and is changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. 73 shows the status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. This reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU1511a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. Stored mode is stored in association with each other, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal to be executed when the power outage notification signal (peripheral power outage notification signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates the 2 microsecond timer (step S1320), and the power failure advance notice signal (peripheral power failure advance notice). Signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. When the power failure notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power failure notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started and the power failure advance notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time when the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) externally attached to the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

A high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. However, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in succession, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to request the cause. The contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and are specified in Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Then, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specifying a copy to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The contents up to this point are all copied in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core is copied. 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac into the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. By specifying copy, the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are specified. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance notice signal (peripheral power failure advance notice signal) is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power outage notice signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power outage notice signal is input. That is, whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input is continuously determined. By continuously determining in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. However, while the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure notification signal is canceled in the infinite loop without being continued in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are not connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise occurs for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the endless loop in the determination of S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation processing, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. 100, is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal that has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the receiver frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Remembered

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , A request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not abnormal data. Predetermined data for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read out in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted into the least significant bit B0 by the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←the least significant bit B0. From the most significant bit B7 is shifted one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, the connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, this LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. Is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. Is a signal output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.”)” in the present embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are in a state of being defective in the connection, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and the power is restored. It is adapted to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be the current state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative count determined to be in a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative count. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT This is a flag that indicates whether or not there is a problem with the transmitter. Value is 1 when there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the running state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, each value is set to 0. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and the power is restored. The communication error flag CC-FLG is restored to the value at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery processing, which is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 101, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data. First, it is determined whether or not the pointer is updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, while the pointer is being updated, since the effect is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule data is being activated. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointers are updated, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and display the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state or the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or during the customer waiting state, not during the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simply in the waiting state for the customer), This routine is finished as it is.

When the production is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540 the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the effect has been completed and the pointers have all been updated, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 every time it is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It does (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state, the number of times is not 1 While the routine is terminated, even if the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective has occurred once, If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times when it has been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. This is a flag that indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection has a problem has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby producing the door frame side effect included in the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is restored.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the communication error display process is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is completed. In this communication error display processing, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 included in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is provided in order to notify that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. The process of drawing is performed. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message "A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display processing, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to each other, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation check request, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 causes LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is considered that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that there is a problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.") is notified to that effect. The display sound is displayed in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, and a notification sound (for example, "a malfunction has occurred in the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device") is repeated from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform flow processing. At this time, a process of turning on all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8. The peripheral control of the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 95. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the unit steady process, etc., and the main control side of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. The first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process or the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94, or the second shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the starting opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is designed to be exhausted, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

From the main control board 1310, the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 is obtained. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a left decorative pattern, and the center is a central decorative pattern. Then, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. The player can recognize the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are in a translucent mode so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed. From the upper left side of the area to the lower left side, the central decorative pattern is from the upper center of the display area to the central lower side, and the right decorative pattern is from the upper right side of the display area to the lower right side. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped manner while being variably displayed in an imaginary manner, the left displayed decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. The left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are made opaque so that the background image at the position becomes difficult to be visually recognized. In this way, with the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are variably started and stopped, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002, or the second special drawing by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result is received, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, as shown in FIG. 103, the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right side decorative design is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit power-on process peripheral control unit steady state shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Since the pointer is updated in order to instruct which of the screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a from the data, that is, when the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, according to the screen generation schedule data. Because the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started. Until the stop display is performed, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The routine is forcibly ended as it is in the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process.

Thereby, until the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection with the receiver) is once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not processed. The process for recovering the connection with the connection is not performed, the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and, for example, "upper plate" is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The LCD display has a problem. Please call the clerk." message is not displayed, so it is reported that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral controller power supply shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated in the scheduler update process, the peripheral controller power-on shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. When it is determined in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 that is executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process in the time process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the process, and the communication check counter CC- When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is not once, the routine is ended as it is, while the communication check counter is terminated. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver becomes the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not reached, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), In other words, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail during the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While the connection is being made (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is performed without fail, for example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the store clerk." It is designed to notify you, and the drawing data received from the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side production is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the data is valid is validated.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is again displayed. In the interval period until the start, since the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect When the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in trouble at least once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble When the cumulative number of times determined to be equal to has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, by performing the SYNC pattern output process without fail, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is performed. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state becomes the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it has reached (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is performed without fail, for example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. A message "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the store clerk." is displayed to notify.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative pattern and the central decorative pattern are activated. , And until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 times. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. Without performing the communication error display processing in step S1548, for example, the message "A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated and the door frame side effect display device is displayed. Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative are again displayed. In the interval period until the variable display of the symbols is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated. This is because the combination result of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that is of most interest to the player, and is profitable to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot gaming state in which is given occurs, the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed by the influence of noise or the like and is correct. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the effect is interrupted in the middle, and the process of recovering the correct drawing is not performed, but the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. By stopping the display of the right decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is displaying a startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or waiting for a customer. In the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case where it is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e included in the peripheral control board 1510, the differential signal is generated as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the digitizing circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally, As described above, since the signal format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is output to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the control MPU 1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not failed when the LOCKN signal is input, as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, there is a problem with the effect display drive board 4450 that a problem has occurred with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And display a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the plate side. Please call the clerk.") by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source In addition to outputting to the 1600, a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.") is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is serial data, the compulsory switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit connection is made so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. When no signal is input, it can be determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460 because a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as the notification process when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is defective. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by performing the notification process. Before the player plays the game, the clerk or the like in the hall can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem, and the check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. When it is determined that there is a signal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver included in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal that is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side effect When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image due to communication failure between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to start the connection confirmation signal. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate the communication trouble between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the defect. It is like this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception cannot be performed normally, the production control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which notifies that there is a communication failure between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. It is an image that conveys that the message "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." is generated, and this generated image is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a early discovers a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect during the image communication, and notifies the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect, and Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall, etc., or can directly notify the clerk of the hall, etc. who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall, etc. may have a problem. It is possible to start work for solving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by early finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. Even if the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the side effect receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in trouble even once, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an error. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate a communication failure between image communication To the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the connection confirmation signal for transmitting from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. , You can continue to output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during a period in which the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, so that the communication failure can be solved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side included in the effect display drive board 4450. Even if the connection between the production receiver ICSDIC0 and the transmitter, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in trouble at least once, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communication is set. A door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission is started from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and the game. The output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped when the execution of the process is restarted, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d stops when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input. It is possible to stop transmitting the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It is like this. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is the defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game progress is not executed, it is possible to move toward the direction where the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display 1405 in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device to start the variation. Only while the game is not proceeding, while the connection confirmation signal is being repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is fluctuated and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect (image disturbance) that progresses on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460, Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the progress of the game again and ends it (every time period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2), it can be directed toward the elimination direction.

According to the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start opening 2002 and a second start which are start areas in which the game balls, which are shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on having entered the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the payout command from the main control board 1310 shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b). 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about a game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the information about the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for performing is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and is operated in the period when the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on, to the payout control built-in RAM. The RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout information, and the main control side power supply of FIG. When the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the closing process is performed (or the period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the error generated in the dispensing device 830 is canceled. The error canceling function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor without outputting it to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor as an error canceling signal for ..

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is stored. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is the game control microprocessor for erasing the information about the information regarding the erase, and when the payout control unit is operated within the period when the payout control unit power-on process is performed, The RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. When the operation is performed after a period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process (or a period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the power-on) has elapsed, the payout device 830 As an error canceling signal for canceling the error that has occurred, the error canceling function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor MPU952a without outputting to the main control MPU1310a which is the game control microprocessor, Since the two functions are combined, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, that is, the RAM clear function and the error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error clearing function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input part of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 is various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor here, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball that has been driven into the game area, and the flow down state of the game ball is manipulated as desired to obtain an unreasonable profit. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in association with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or an alarm by voice. There is.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the control relating to the game progress and the effect will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images of designs, various background images, characters, characters, etc.), The display mode and operation mode of various members (production operation unit 400, movable member, etc.) that contribute to the production are controlled.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control processing, first and second starting mouth winning processing is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that the winning is achieved, the holding number of the corresponding special symbol side is increased by 1 or the like. Done.

When the processing flag is 0 when the first/second starting mouth winning process is finished, the variation start process is executed. In this variation start process, on condition that the number of holdings is 1 or more, the big hit judgment in the hold state is digested and executed, and after the result of this big hit judgment (win or win, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to “1”.

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 1 when the first/second starting mouth winning process is finished, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the result of the stored big hit determination or the current game state, etc. ( After determining and setting the variation time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 2 when the first/second starting mouth winning process is finished, the changing process is executed. In this changing process, the change time determined and set in the change pattern setting process is monitored by the timer, and the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the time-out. To stop. After that, when the result of the big hit judgment stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big hit judgment stored in the change start process is not the big hit (miss). The processing selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 3 when the first/second starting mouth winning process is finished, the big hit game process is executed. In this big hit game processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is activated, and the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the big hit game determined based on the type of the big hit is set, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed, and when the type of the big hit is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability variation state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process.

A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored as the fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect that appears in the effect display device 1600. The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a jackpot variation variation pattern, an outlying reach variation variation pattern, and an outlying variation variation pattern. The big hit variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol finally develops so that the big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed through the reach effect. The effect is performed. The outlying reach variation is a variation which is performed when the result of the big hit determination is lost and the reach determination is made by the reach determination based on the reach random number, and in the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is used for the decoration. Finally, the variation display of the symbol is dislocated, and an effect is developed in which the symbol is expanded so as to be fixedly stopped and displayed. The out-of-range variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is performed, and the effect display device 1600 does not perform the reach effect. Finally, the variable display of the decorative design is finally dislocated, and an effect is developed in which the fixed design is displayed so as to be fixedly stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as a result of a big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it to allow such a variation pattern of decorative symbols to appear. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, a variation pattern of a decorative pattern appears on the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, and effect display (background or hold image) relating to the degree of expectation is changed or effected. Controls such as changing the mode (display or movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 are executed.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, in the main control program, if the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (FIG. 94: step S114) is entered, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first sets the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. The first jackpot determination random number is acquired from the random number counter under the condition that the detection signal from the one start opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start opening 2002) (YES in step S5231). A first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5322). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( The second big hit determination random number) is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second starting opening passage processing is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S5235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" and "8R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times. Control to the 8R jackpot gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or the 16R jackpot gaming state in which the opening and closing pattern (round game) is closed 16 times when the game ball 9 is won in the special winning opening 2005 is detected 16 times by the count sensor 4005.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or after opening the open/close pattern (round game) to be closed 8 times when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the 8R big hit game state is controlled,
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated twice, and the 2R big hit game state is controlled.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handing is more advantageous to the player than left-handing in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and is better than right-handing in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As described above, left-handedness is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if the big hit is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002, the big hit game of long time open for a maximum of 8 rounds. Only a state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). The expected value of prize balls that can be won when a big hit is won, for example, a 16-round long open big hit game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be won) is executed. Therefore, when the right-handed state is controlled to be transferred, it is possible to expect a larger number of winning balls than when the player is left-handed.

In the big hit control process, when the opening control of the special winning opening 2005 is started, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a variation counter, which will be described later, and the like are performed.

Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such a big winning opening 2005 opening control, as shown in FIG. 110, a high probability according to the jackpot winning type that triggered the jackpot game. The flag and the time saving flag are set.

The high-probability flag is a flag that indicates a high-probability state, and is used in a big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. Probably strange big hit, 8R is set when finishing the big hit game state based on the big hit B), when the big hit next, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown Is reset by.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time saving control after the jackpot gaming state has ended (high probability time saving state). It is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R certainty variation jackpot A, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot B) is finished, and the next special jackpot stop processing shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown). Or, when the special probability (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the big hit after the occurrence of the low probability time saving state, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol after the variation counter is reset, and is used in a first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. That is, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is updated (for example, counted up) when a change is made, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when the jackpot gaming state based on is started.

If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the processing of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is controlled is set. Determine whether. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed after the opening control of the special winning opening 2005 is performed. Each set process such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

Also, if the small hitting running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special holding number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special holding number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random number stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is held so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol that has been held (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), for the first special symbol Regardless of whether the lottery is held, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player only needs to keep the game ball hitting the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting) in the time saving state (high probability time saving state). Only the lottery (determination process) for the two-big hit determination random number can be continuously performed without interruption.

It should be noted that the special figure game (symbol variation) using the second special figure (second special symbol) is limited to one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and the starting winning occurs. In this case, a table is provided to store data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be decided.

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S5322).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 105. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, reach determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, variation display pattern random number). ) From the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the processing of this step S5242, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to obtain the state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

Then, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the first special diagram side is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, the information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side and the like (information regarding the win for the pre-reading determination, the symbol type for the pre-reading determination Information, information regarding a variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group in the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group in the symbol types, may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S5234).

Now, in the processing of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 4004 is in the on state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, second reach determination random number, second jackpot symbol) A random number, a second variation display pattern random number) is acquired from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special holding number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the holding number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of the second special symbols to be held is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly held. In order to obtain the state of, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

Then, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the second special diagram side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect, effect contents, and the like, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group in the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group in the symbol types, may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Command to instruct the reserved number of the first special symbol in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) when the reserved number of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 (First reservation number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when the number of reserves of the second special design changes on the basis of the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) indicates the number of reserves of the second special design. Command (second holding number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process are the same. Since it is a program module of, and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and the lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read big hit determination random number. First special symbol normal processing is performed (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) is performed based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol )

3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern and the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 are executed corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display

4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283)

5. As the mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The first memory among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM with built-in main control. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. First-in first-out (first-in first-out) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variable display pattern random number) The shift operation is performed in the First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol hold storage area a to second special symbol hold storage area d), depending on the occurrence of a start prize to the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers thus extracted are stored in order from the first (first) area. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held is stored so that it can be specified, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). .

Then, after that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit judging process which is a judging process for the winning of the big hit is performed based on the read first big hit judging random number. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

Main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. Select the big hit determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) (step S5313), select The big hit judgment table and the big hit judgment random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state has a low probability for each type of special random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number). Big hit judgment table at low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state), and high used when the game state is high probability (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state) And a big hit determination table at the time of probability. In the low probability big hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number, 204 kinds of first big hit judgment random numbers coincide with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and 65332 The first big-hit determination random numbers (65536 kinds) are associated with each other so that the first big-hit determination random numbers of the types match the deviation determination value indicating the loss (the big-hit probability at low probability; "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned defects. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability when the probability is low; about "1/321").

Further, in the high probability big hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number, 2040 kinds of first big hit judgment random numbers match the big hit judgment value, and 63496 kinds of first big hit judgment The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers coincide with the deviation determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; about "1/32"). On the other hand, in the special jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to in order to compare with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing , 2040 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 63496 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. The above-mentioned second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; about "1/32"). In addition, the big hit judgment value set in the big hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number and the big hit judgment table referred for comparison with the second big hit judgment random number (the big hit judgment value The number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability and the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability may be made different (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that the big hit (step S5315) ), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination process ends.

Further, when it is determined in step S5315 that the big hit has been lost, the read big hit judgment random number matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, based on the selected big hit judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process process) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; (0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (judgment determination).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that there is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. In the case of, the reach determination table at the time of the high probability time saving state and the reach determination table at the time of the low probability state used when the game state is the low probability state (low probability non-time saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number coincides with the reach determination value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers indicate that the reach determination value does not reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, all of the 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach does not reach. By doing so, the reach determination value indicating the reach may not be matched.

Further, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state are reached. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating that reach is made higher than in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, five types of reach determinations including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random numbers set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state are provided. The reach determination random numbers are associated with the reach determination values indicating that the reach determination random numbers reach and the 67 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that the reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is set to be the same as that in the low-probability non-time saving state in the high-probability non-time saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and determines that reach reach is lost (YES in step S5120). Then, the reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is reached is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110(B), and the first big hit symbol random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the symbol determination table, the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), in the symbol determination table on the side of the first special symbol, a random number for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200) for the determination result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) Random numbers for the first big hit pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110(C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, the second jackpot symbol random number (for the 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) determination result ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbols (random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of big hit determined based on the first big hit symbol random number and the type of big hit determined based on the second big hit symbol random number are set to be different. . More specifically, the probability of jackpot change that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state (allocation) are the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and effect contents for each type of jackpot.
1. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. Is a relatively advantageous state, which is controlled in the effect mode shown on the effect display device 1600.

2. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Is controlled to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a big hit is won within the period until it is exhausted 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state 8R normal jackpot controlled by the effect mode in which the effect display in which the specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) is relatively disadvantageous in the low probability time saving state is shown on the effect display device 1600.

3. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 16 times, the game ball is controlled into a 16R jackpot game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the jackpot 2103, and after this 16R jackpot game state Is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state, the production (success production) whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (will be 16 rounds) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the high-probability time saving state was controlled, the production display mode is controlled in the production display device 1600 that is in a relatively advantageous state. 16R probability variation big hit

4. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state, the production (failure production) whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the high-probability time saving state was controlled, the production display mode is controlled in the production display device 1600 that is in a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability change jackpot B

5. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected by 2 times, the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the jackpot 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, special Controls to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a big hit is won within the period until 100 times exhausted), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R big hit game state. 2R normal jackpot controlled to the production mode in which the production display device 1600 shows that the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state in the low probability time saving state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 1403, and a big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol will be generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, no game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 will occur, except for the case where there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186. Only the variable display is executed, and a big hit (16R sure change big hit, 8R sure change big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol will occur.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the open/close pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at most, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out, In the big hit related to the second special symbol, the open/close pattern of opening the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at the maximum can be repeated 16 times and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when 8R probability variation big hit A is determined, it is determined as 8R probability variation big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and when 8R normal jackpot is determined, as 8R normal jackpot symbol decide. Although not shown, if the 16R probability variable big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined as the big hit symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variable jackpot is determined as the big hit symbol. When the B symbol is decided and the 2R normal big hit is decided, the 2R normal big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol.

If the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol as a mode when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped ( After determining the unique symbol stop mode (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 determines to be a lost symbol as a mode when the special symbol is stopped changing (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. To do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5337, the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, out of reach, out of contact) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, after that, as the process of step S5338, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), this process ends.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed, and the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → Stop display in the order of the middle decorative design (note that the left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative patterns are arranged when the type other than the 2R normal big hit is won as the big hit. On the other hand, when a 2R normal big hit is obtained, it is determined to be a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as other symbols). In addition, when the reach out is specified, a detached pattern accompanied by a reach (a combination of the same symbols whose left and right decorative symbols are "0" to "9" and a different middle decorative symbol; reach loss) If it is determined to be a design, and the removal is specified, it is determined to be a removal design that does not involve reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative designs are different among the left, middle, and right decorative designs). The stop symbol thus determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the change time specified by the change pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when the hit is obtained as a result of the game being advanced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes an effect display (special display mode) of the hit to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. After the start, the effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. 112. If it is done (step S5341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag If is set (step S5343), a variation pattern table for small hits (not shown) is selected (step S5344). If the reach flag is set (step S5345), variation pattern table for reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S5346), and when none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are set, that is, when the normal hit occurs (the hit effect does not occur), the hit The variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. Thereby, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time determined in this way, and the production control is performed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example, the big hit determination random numbers (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) and big hit symbol random numbers (first big hit symbol random number, second big hit symbol random number) A plurality of types are provided for each determination result. Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The random numbers for the first variable display pattern are stored in association with each other. Then, the main control MPU1310a, in the variation pattern table of the plurality of types according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process read in step S5302 By comparing the random number for the variable display pattern and the variable time information associated with the read random number for the variable display pattern is acquired from this table, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) The fluctuation pattern of. Thereby, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control.

However, as described above, since the small hit is not won in this example, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach production to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach production is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 The random number for the variable display pattern of the type is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with the low expectation of the big hit is executed, and the random number for the variable display pattern of 18 types has the high expectation of the big hit. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

It should be noted that the super-reach effect (SP effect) has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of the big-hit gaming state, the player who is in the big-hit gaming state when the super-reach effect is executed. Expectations of are increasing. That is, such a super-reach effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of a big hit, so that even if a loss is finally displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state. Will be able to increase. However, in actuality, in order to sufficiently raise the expectation of the player for the jackpot gaming state, during the period in which the super reach production is being executed, a high-anticipation notice production that is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (composite).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, which is provided in correspondence with the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state The variation time of 12 seconds is set in common with both. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, which is provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds as a time saving state. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and the non-time saving state, and during the variation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is achieved. At the same time as urging, a time for the player to win the game ball at the second starting opening 2004 is secured.

In addition, when 0.1 seconds is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) It is possible to suppress the situation where the lottery process is discharged without being used.

That is, the game ball that has been hit to the right is supplied to the area immediately above the gate portion 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area to the gate unit 2003 when in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state), a winning as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation in which the second starting opening 2004 can be successively received one after another (a time saving state in which almost all of the game balls that have been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received in the second starting opening 2004). Even if there is such a game ball each time the acceptance of those game balls, the control that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be exhausted one after another with a high jackpot probability of about "1/32" (probability in a high probability state) It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the start opening 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in the present example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is out based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is extremely variable as a variation time of the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state). It can be set to a short time of 0.1 seconds. In other words, in this case, when the loss is obtained, the symbol fluctuation will be finished only in the time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds), so 0.6 seconds Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are successively received in the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being discharged without being used in the lottery process. ..

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5371. As the processing of 1, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is decremented by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

In addition, even if the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), if the fluctuation time timer is not 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until it is time to definitely stop the symbol), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5381. As the process, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started (step S5387), The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and if the time saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation counter is further reset, and at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step) (S5394), and this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is performed in the big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8R sure change big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R sure change) Big hit command, 8R probability variation big hit B command, 2R normal big hit command) are set. As a result, the effect display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, and the like perform a big hit game state effect (battle effect or additional challenge effect) in accordance with the type of big hit instructed by the big hit start command.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state is set (step S5390). Then, when in the low probability time saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low probability time saving state is satisfied, and the time saving is achieved. The function is stopped to shift to the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state) (step S5392).

After the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game state is started is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying that the small hitting game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag. When it is updated to (step S5394), this processing ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) is performed. The small hit game state comes to be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the process related to the big hit or the small hit, as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is made according to the state of suspension. The process related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) comes to be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned ordinary symbol and ordinary electric auditors product control processing (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area of the RAM. To do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. Ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1402 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the above-mentioned normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The variation display of the normal symbol is displayed so that the mode of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display aspect of the variation control of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop process to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004. Normal electric accessory release process (step S5407) that executes a process for controlling

The initial value of the normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the above normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of holding of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not its maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned symbol into the state of newly holding, the following steps S5412-S5414 Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S5412, the ordinary hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of the normal symbols to be held is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S5421, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, next, as the processing of step S5422, the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is normally stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, universal figure fluctuation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down, and the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The shift operation is performed in the first-in first-out (first-in first-out) mode for the random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) relating to the display mode in FIG.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (first) area. Remember. When a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 when random numbers are stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the random numbers extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area are stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a universal figure hit determination table (not shown) for time saving ( (Step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), a non-time saving ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected ( (Step S5427), the selected per-universal-drawing judgment table and the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing are compared (step S5428).

In addition, the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the universal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is time saving (high probability time saving state) and the gaming state is non-time saving. And a non-time saving time universal figure hit determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the general-use figure determination value indicating that the general-purpose random number has been won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not match the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball is always won per the universal figure, the movable piece is in the open state, and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. It controls the acceptance. Not all of the 255 types, but a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be matched with the per-universal-drawing determination value indicating that the per-universal-university drawing is won.

Further, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to in order to compare with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the general-university figure determination value indicating that the ordinary random number is won. However, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the general-university-deviation determination value indicating that the general-university figure is out of sync. As described above, in the non-time saving, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting opening is not won because the game is not won. It does not control the acceptance of the game ball in 2004. However, as described above, the normal symbol may be won even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is a winning. When the movable piece of the second start port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2004, the second start port 2004 is advanced again. The game ball may not be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected ordinary figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal process, when it is determined to be the ordinary figure hit (step S5429). ), after setting the universal symbol hit flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol (step S 5430 ), the regular symbol hit as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the regular symbol is stopped The symbol is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected universal symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal process, if it is determined that the symbol is out, fluctuation of the ordinary symbol The non-universal symbol as the mode at the time of control stop (normal symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S5432). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process ends.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the various commands described above transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform the peripheral control unit steady process (received command analysis process (received command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation at each time is grasped, and an effect corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a start winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to the hold display and the prefetch effect according to the start winning. Then, after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, production symbol variation start process, production symbol variation process, production symbol variation stop process, big hit display process , One of the big hit game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process: Until a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect (demonstration, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control regarding the big hit is not performed While performing the control, when the fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect design fluctuation start processing.

Production symbol variation start processing: While determining various production contents (production pattern, notice production, etc.) in the symbol variation period based on the variation pattern command, etc., the variation of the decorative design is started based on the determined production contents. To control. Then, after this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol. Of the variation patterns (production patterns), many of the "variation patterns (production patterns) that are stopped with a jackpot pattern" are prepared in a pair with the "variation patterns (production pattern) that are stopped with a lost design." By functioning as the same variation pattern (effect pattern), it becomes possible to provide an effect as to whether a big hit symbol or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, in the following description, when describing a variation pattern (effect pattern), when it is described as a “predetermined variation pattern”, a “specific variation pattern”, or the like, unless otherwise noted, “a big hit symbol is stopped. It means both "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)" and "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) stopped by a lost design", and as a result of the progress of the production contents in the same manner. It will come to the branch point where either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Production symbol variation process: various production contents determined in the production symbol variation start process, such as control to start at each timing during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends the value of the process flag production symbol Update to a value corresponding to fluctuation stop processing.
Production design fluctuation stop process: Based on the reception of the command (design determination command) to stop all designs, the variation of the decorative design is stopped and the display result (stop design) is derived and displayed. Then, when stopping the decorative design with the big hit design, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display processing, and when stopping the decorative design with the lost design, the value of the process flag is changed pattern waiting command reception processing Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls the effect (display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of the big hit) in the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped at the big hit pattern until the big hit game is started. Then, after this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game process.

Big hit game processing: Performs various effects during the big hit game state. When the big hit game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, control effect (display effect for notifying the player that the big hit game state is finished) in a period from the end of the big hit game state to the fluctuation allowable state. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) that is referred to in the effect symbol fluctuation start process in the normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. The variation of the decorative pattern is controlled based on the (variation effect).

The effect pattern (fluctuation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond to the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command on a one-to-one basis. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by a fluctuation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (fluctuation effects) is determined based on effect lottery or game situation. You may do so. As will be described later, also in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with some of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) in this way, the notice lottery (decision process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By performing control (production symbol changing process) to cause the notice production won in the notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the above-described production pattern (variation production) is performed, a plurality of production contents can be obtained. As it is possible to combine, the degree of expectation of the jackpot pattern is suggested by their appearance mode.

In the past, in such a composite effect, a plurality of appearances may be executed while one effect pattern (fluctuation effect) is being executed even though the same specific notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being executed, It is expected that this will help maintain the entertainment of the game. However, since the notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the big hit pattern appears is high, the frequency of execution of a plurality of timer effects naturally decreases while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. However, it was difficult to sufficiently improve the fun of playing games.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. (For example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (for example, "0 seconds") is performed as a count effect display, or is performed as a standby display before starting count display (preparing, etc.) Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the count value reaches the second predetermined numerical value. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A) that causes one of a performance mode (a performance mode with low expectations) and a performance mode (a performance mode with high expectations) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player to appear. , B, etc.) are targeted for the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the notice side timer effect executed as a result of the notice lottery), at least at the time when the count display is started, it is kept secret about which effect is the effect target. It is desirable to do so. In addition, the "production target of the timer effect" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value becomes the second predetermined numerical value (for example, "0 second") as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to accurately indicate the number of seconds).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (announcement side timer effect) that is the effect content that appears only when the advance notice lottery is won, the effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (fluctuation side timer effect) that is incorporated in advance as effect contents of (variation effect). That is, in this case, if only the notice side timer effect is executed, the count effect display is executed as "the effect content of the notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation level is increased for the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command". Instead, it is also executed as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command", so that the expectation from the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. The count effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without wastefully accumulating (increasing the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in advance notice lottery”). For example, when the big hit expectation rate when a specific effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is “20%”, if the notice timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation degree is increased by the function of the compound effect. Then, for example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency must be lowered correspondingly, whereas when the variable timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, a big hit is expected. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to “20%” (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be appropriately maintained.

In addition, the jackpot expectation degree when a production pattern (fluctuation production) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the production pattern), and basically, as the variation number increases, the jackpot expectation. It has a tendency to become more frequent. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the change numbers 5(6), 9(10), and 17(18), the change-side timer effect in which "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5(6)> variation number 9(10)> variation number 17(18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5(6)<variation number 9( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Further, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail here, but also in the determination table referred to in the low-probability time saving state or the high-probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself As, the effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the variable timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a different probability from that in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach production is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer production for which the conversation notice is produced. This is different from the fluctuation numbers 3 and 4. Also, the variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 9 and 10 are the variation side timer effects for which the conversation notice is the effect target, and the variation numbers 11 and 10. In 12, the variable side timer effect for the cut-in A is executed, and for the change numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed and the variable side timer effect for the effect is executed. They are different in that they can be done. Further, the variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 17 and 18 are the variable side timer effects for which the conversation announcement is the effect target, and the variable numbers 19 and 18. In No. 20, the variable side timer effect for the effect target of cut-in B is executed, and for the change numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed and the variable side timer effect for those effect objects is executed. They are different in that they can be done. In addition, the jackpot expectation is higher when the variable timer effect for which the cut-in A or B is performed is executed than when the variable timer effect for which the notice of conversation is performed is executed. Is set so that the big hit expectation tends to be higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation announcement and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

Note that the "conversation notice" is a production that can appear at a relatively early stage after the production pattern (variable production of a decorative pattern) is executed, and that a relatively low expectation is added. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B are capable of appearing at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and have a relatively high expectation. It is an effect that often occurs (or an effect in which a relatively high expectation is always added). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of other effects (cut-ins A and B, which are described later, action A and B, etc.) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. The "cut-in" that appears as the content of the fluctuating effect is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the effect of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas the "cut-in" is displayed in the SP reach. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B instead of the cut-in A that appears as the effect contents of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect content (effect pattern) for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as the variable side timer effect. Then, if the variation pattern is "predetermined type (eg, variation numbers 1 to 6 etc.) such as shortened variation or normal reach effect with low expectation", the count effect display as the notice timer effect is displayed. While the production pattern is not won (the premium degree is raised) and the expectation level UP when the notice timer production appears, the variation pattern is “variation pattern for executing the variation timer production ( Variation number 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22, etc.)”, the variation pattern has a predetermined type (for example, variation) as compared with the case where the variation pattern is not such a variation pattern. The numbers corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) are low.

It should be noted that, here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as the count variation patterns on which the variation side timer effect is executed, but two of them (0 Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) of "can be set individually" correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as the variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is not executed, and four of them are variation patterns (variation). Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

With such a configuration, when the effect contents of the variation pattern are those capable of performing the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is given more than when the variation pattern does not perform the fluctuation side timer effect. As a content of the production of the production, the rate of determining that the count production display (announcement timer production) cannot be executed becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to promote the appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (fluctuation effect) without unnecessarily increasing the expectation and decreasing the appearance frequency.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is the count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the ratio of appearance of the notice timer effect differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the notice timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the production pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, in reality, it is a big hit compared to the case of losing. In the production pattern that is won, the advance notice timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variation number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 22), the count effect display is an advance notice effect. The ratio of execution as the content of the effect (preliminary timer effect) becomes different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the appearance ratio of a plurality of count displays is high in one production pattern (variation production), its type Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate of appearance of a plurality of count displays, so that it is expected to maintain a suitable gaming interest.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even if the effect patterns (eg, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect contents of the same reach type appear, the variable timer effect is included as effect contents. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22) that is performed, the notice timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variable-side timer effect is not included as the effect content. The appearance ratio (the ratio at which the announcement timer effect is determined to be executed in the announcement lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer productions (variable timer production, notice timer production) appear in one production pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation degree that one announcement timer production is won in the preliminary drawing. As a result, it is possible to realize the double timer production opportunity without wasteful addition of the big hit expectation.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is the count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, the variable side timer effect (variation side count effect display) whose target is "conversation notice" and the variable side timer effect (variation side count effect display) which is targeted for "cut-in" In the above, the mode of the count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is made different. That is, in this case, even if an effect pattern (for example, change numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the variable timer effect (variable count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to recognize the easiness of appearance of the notice timer effect in combination with "the rate of appearance of the notice timer effect differs depending on which count variation pattern". You can expect it.

In addition, regarding the aspect of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (the notice side count effect display), the variable side timer effect (the change side) regardless of whether the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in). It may be different (or different from at least one) from the mode (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same mode (or at least the same). .

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (preliminary count effect display) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect that is the effect target. This is useful for making the player recognize that the advance notice timer effect, which is set to a high degree, is appearing and to improve the expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable timer effect (variable count effect display). As for the common aspect as the notice timer effect (preliminary count effect display), a plurality of aspects having different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

Further, in order to more appropriately recognize that the notice side timer effect is being executed, a count display when the notice side timer effect is executed and a count display when the changing side timer effect is executed are provided. It is desirable that the counting speed (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during counting up or counting down) is made different. With such a configuration, even after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is watched even during the period in which the count display is in progress, and the relative side with the relatively low-expecting fluctuating timer effect. It becomes possible to give an interest in which of the high-anticipation notice timer effect is being executed, and it is possible to preferably maintain the enjoyment of the game during the timer exhaustion period.

At this time, in the variable timer effect, the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notification timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in) ( If the count-in is performed by the cut-in) and the mode in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the count speed of the notice-side timer effect (conversation notice), whether the notice-side timer effect is being executed or not is displayed. It becomes possible to add interest by making the judgment difficult. Also, in the variable timer effect (or the notice timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the notice timer effect (or the variable timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count may be displayed by displaying.

With such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the fluctuating side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously executed, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the notice side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and that the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count display is performed for the fluctuation patterns (count fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts, or time required for all counts to be consumed) are set as selectable effect patterns. When the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect is acquired, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for effect and the count display of the fluctuation side timer effect and the notice side timer. If the ease of simultaneous execution with the production count display (for example, the larger the total count is, the easier it is to overlap) makes it easier to judge whether the notice timer production is being executed or not. I'm trying to add fun

In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effect target and reach effect) with different start timings or end timings of count display (total number of counts or time required for all counts to be consumed) for one variation pattern. Although the contents of the effect are the same, a plurality of effect patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display (total number of counts, or time required for all the counts to be consumed) (however, they are subject to the effect of the timer effect) It is also possible to prepare a plurality of different variation patterns for each effect pattern and the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern, and to make a one-to-one correspondence.

Further, even if the number of display counts (total number of counts) when appearing in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the changing side timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is being executed, and to add interest. .

Also, while the notice timer effect is executed in the countdown display, the variable timer effect is executed in the count up display, and it is possible to definitely determine whether the notice timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to significantly improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, while the notice side timer effect is executed in the countdown display, the variable side timer effect intended for the specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed in the count up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for (Cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, it is interesting to make it difficult to judge whether the notice timer effect is being executed or not depending on the effect target. Can be granted.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is used as the effect target for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, and there is a case where a different effect is effected. To control. Then, when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the same effect in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, compared to the case where different effect is applied in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the setting is made so that the jackpot expectation degree becomes low and that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the count display of each count display The end timing is different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the effect on the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, one of the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect is the predetermined value first. Since the other count display will be continued while it reaches the end, the target effect is different at this point (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode). It looks as if Then, after this, the other count display that has been continued reaches the predetermined numerical value in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for effect, and thus the count is ended first. Even when it is revealed by the timer effect on the end side that the conversation announcement with a relatively low degree of expectation is targeted for the effect, a different effect that can appear later is targeted for the effect ( It is expected that a sense of expectation that the timer effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is maintained to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the same effect in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the timing at which the fluctuating side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice side timer effect are specified. It is desirable to display separate count end correspondence displays (for example, “count successful!”, “chance UP!”, etc.) at timings when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect for which "conversation notice", which is executed as the effect on the varying side or the notice side, is produced are made to appear in one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the fluctuating side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect respectively proceed simultaneously, but in the fluctuating side timer effect, as the effect of the fluctuating side in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation-side specific effect that occurs (such as "successful counting!" or an effect that matches the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice-side timer effect relates to "conversation notice". A count display is made in accordance with a notice side specific effect that occurs as a notice side effect (such as “Chance UP!” or a timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined few seconds before the effect starts)). By advancing, separate count end correspondence displays will appear at different timings.

By the way, the conversation notice and the cut-in effects are required to be executed without fail when they are targeted for the effect of the variable timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and the cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different expectations, when the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value when it is an effect target of the variable timer effect. It is required to make them appear in a manner that has high expectations. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable side timer effect is previously incorporated as the effect content of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the effect of the variable side timer effect and the effect target thereof are simply executed. It is desirable that each of the effects (modes with a relatively high degree of expectation) that can be displayed can appear. However, instead of this, when the variable timer effect is executed, it is also possible to perform control so that the effect targeted for the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) is always selected in the advance notice lottery. ..

If the conversation notice and the cut-in effects are not included in the effect of the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not they will appear as the effect contents of the notice side in the notice lottery described later. A determination is made as to which form (a mode with a relatively high expectation or a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to appear as the side effect content, and the appearance control is performed based on the result of the determination. ..

Hereinafter, the effect pattern determination processing using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command, the symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, first, the current game is based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. The determination table corresponding to the state is referred to. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectancy) to the probability variation expectation when a particular effect pattern appears or the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state. become.

Then, next, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display that appear in the variable timer effect) that are different from each other are prepared as selectable effect patterns associated with the variable numbers. In the case of winning, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on whether or not the big hit determination is successful. At this time, when the big hit determination is won, the effect pattern is set so that the proportion of the start timing or the end timing of the count display being delayed becomes high, and thereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set. The slower it is, the more likely it is that a jackpot pattern will appear.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in the case, the effect pattern set so that the variable timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (effect from the change start of the decorative symbol to the change stop of the decorative symbol) appearing during the symbol change is thus selected, what kind of notice effect is to be given within the execution period of the effect pattern. In this manner, it is decided whether to additionally execute (composite) (preliminary lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the already described sound data creation processing (step S1032 in FIG. 95), a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, the automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, the background will be briefly described.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene in accordance with the progress of the game, so as to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is expected to improve the expectations of the player, there are those that output various sounds depending on the type, and those that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene including each such reach, and each such sound is associated with a corresponding predetermined preset. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to the channel assignment, and the sound to be played is played. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to achieve various sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 uses the pair of upper speakers 573 (sound) for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize a variety of sound effects and enhance the interest of the player. Output means) and each sound to be output from the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) are dynamically allocated and managed, while the number of combinations of sounds to be output is determined by When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in the present embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority order. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority order (sound output control means). .. The details will be described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
119(A) and FIG. 119(B) respectively show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. FIG. 119(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel system, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 119(B) shows an example of allocation of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is pre-assigned to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, regarding the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural.

The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the reproduction start sound until the reproduction end. As a channel assignment method, the playback channel and the sound are exclusively assigned as a pair so that the sound is not overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", the sound that has started to be reproduced may be overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and may be muted. As a channel allocation method, the channels are allocated to the same channel so that the reproduction timing is not exceeded.

In sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. With regard to sounds that are disturbed when overwritten, independent channels are assigned, or sounds whose playback timings do not overlap are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definition of playback channel number, left/right pan initial value, top/bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting is managed for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and when set to "0x80", for example, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers formed of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. It is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the reproduced channel. The time axis which is the horizontal axis shows the game state, and as the game state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit medium" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority order, and represents that the (reproduction) priority order increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 122(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122(B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122(C) shows that each sound cannot be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. 122(A) to 122(C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 122(A), as the gaming state along the time axis that is the horizontal axis, in the order of “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “big hit” It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

In the "first half of change" shown in FIG. 122(A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 of FIG. 122(C), during the reproduction time of the "first half notice A" as a new sound, the starting mouth prize (shown as "hold" 119), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", as shown in FIG. 119(B). The reproduction sound of “” is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the “first half notice A” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the “second half of variation” shown in FIG. 122(A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 of FIG. 122(C), during the playback time of the “full screen notice” as a new sound, the start mouth prize (“Hold in the figure 119), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen announcement", as shown in FIG. The reproduction sound of “” is overwritten by the pending winning sound, and the output of the “full screen notice” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment will be described. 123(A) and 123(B) respectively show an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 123(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel division being an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated according to a rule described later (above-mentioned). Equivalent to "Sound control by automatic channel method".

In the sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the fixed channel system described above. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 123(B) shows an example of allocation of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel system, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority order. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel requires one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

The "notification sound 1" to "button press sound" shown in the figure must not be muted in the middle of the sound that has started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", the sound that has started to be reproduced may be overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and may be muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel system, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce a sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority (priority) for designating a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if the sound is defined in the AUTO group, and if an empty channel (unused channel) exists in the specified AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced.

If there is no free channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority order of the sounds to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or is not the same as the sound itself being reproduced.

FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel system. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, for each sound category and sound name, a reproduction channel number such as sound control by the fixed channel which has already been described, a left/right pan initial value, a top/bottom pan initial value, a volume initial value, Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier for specifying an AUTO group and a priority order (also referred to as "playback priority order"), left/right pan initial value, top/bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates in which AUTO group among a plurality of AUTO groups each sound is reproduced. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when the sounds are simultaneously reproduced. This priority order indicates that a sound having a higher numerical value should be reproduced preferentially, and a sound having a smaller numerical value should be reproduced without priority. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, the notification sounds whose priority is “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”). , A sound effect with a priority of “20” (“big hit confirmation sound” and “button pressing sound”), a BGM with a priority of “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and a priority of “10”. Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("first half notice sound effect" to "second half notice sound effect"), pending winning sound with a priority of "01" I am trying. As a result, when there is no free channel, for example, when trying to reproduce the notification sound, it is not necessary to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound of lower priority (for example, the reserved winning sound) ), the notification sound is preferentially reproduced using the channel that is reproducing.

As described above, the left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and if "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

Further, as already described, the upper and lower pan initial values are set to the upper and lower sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the lower speaker pair 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R), for example. The initial position of the sound image localization of the sound from the speaker is shown. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, there is a difference in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers formed of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". In addition, "1" (0x1FF for 0xFF in 0xFF ) Is set, it is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume adjustment devices equipped in the gaming machine, and it is always played at the volume set by the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set for each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” are set. "1" is set for each "Sound". With such seek points, it is possible to register the number of sounds exceeding the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source.

The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. It is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the priority order. The time axis which is the horizontal axis shows the game state, and as the game state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit medium" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority order, and represents that the (reproduction) priority order increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 126(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126(B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In these FIGS. 126(A) and 126(B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126(A), in order as a game state along the time axis that is the horizontal axis, "first half of change", "second half of change", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and " It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

In the "first half of change" shown in FIG. 126(A), as shown in FIG. 126(B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from reproduction channel 00 to 01 from beginning to end ( Equivalent to range A). Here, when the player tries to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound because the starting mouth winning (corresponding to the "held winning" shown in the drawing) is present, the reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this hold prize sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any of the sounds being reproduced are not overwritten by the hold prize sound (corresponding to "hold sound reproduction" in the drawing), and other Output of all types of sounds continues.

In the "second half of variation" shown in FIG. 126(A), as shown in FIG. 126(B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from reproduction channels 00 to 01 from beginning to end ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, when the player tries to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound because there is a start winning (corresponding to the "reserved winning" shown in the figure), the reproduction channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to “reproduction of reserved sound” in the figure), and the output of all other types of sound continues.

In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126A, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is further generated after that, so that the notification sound having the highest priority level of “25” (new sound) ( When an attempt is made to reproduce the “notification 2” shown in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126(B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to "notification sound 2" in the figure) is Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the pending winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

FIG. 127 shows an example of the automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is, as work names, set reservation flags, requested sound numbers, playing sound numbers, automatic allocation groups, priority at automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a work for work and a work for pan control, and has respective information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag is a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if "-1" is stopped and is other than "-1". The playing sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound being played, unless "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, when the channel is "0", the channels are fixedly allocated, and when the channel is "1", the channels are automatically allocated ("Sound control by automatic channel system" described later). Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, "1" indicates the AUTO group 1, and "2" indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority when performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with "0" at the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound. It should be noted that the elapsed time from the registration corresponds to the number of the sounds currently being reproduced when a new sound is reproduced in a situation in which a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-described left and right pan and upper and lower pan setting values.

FIG. 128 shows an example of empty channel search processing when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. In FIG. 128, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

When the production control program receives a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100A), the production control program confirms the automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A), and when the automatic allocation group is “0”, the fixed allocation is performed. Then, the reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation is automatic allocation and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). ..

When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108A), and when it is present, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, a reproduction sound of the same priority as or lower than the priority of the new sound is reproduced in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110A).

The production control program ends the process when there is no channel of a reproduced sound that has the same priority as or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel that is being reproduced. Determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

When there are a plurality of relevant channels, the production control program is playing a sound with the longest playback time from registration among the relevant channels based on the elapsed time from the above-mentioned registration. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, when the corresponding channels do not exist and the number is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel satisfying the desired condition (step S1116A).

On the other hand, in step S1106A described above, if the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it is determined whether or not there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1120A). When the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts playing the new sound (step S1122A).

On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not there is a priority equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in the (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced (step (S1124A), since the processing is terminated if there is no sound, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, the effect control program, if present, determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

The production control program starts the output of the new sound on the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the above-mentioned operation is started when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel whose reproduction time from the registration is the longest (step S1130A).

As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel to reproduce a new sound. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually understandable manner.

129(A) and FIG. 129(B) to FIG. 132(A) and FIG. 132(B) respectively show an example of the specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 129(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the normal BGM whose priority is 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 129(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice _A whose priority is 05, and reproduce channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacant space, reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the reproduction request of the button press sound having the priority of 20, and then selects the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice _B whose priority is 05, and reproduces channel 06. Since there is a space in ~07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06-07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the jackpot confirming sound having a priority of 20, and sets the reproduction channels 08 to 09. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the big hit confirmation sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_C whose priority is 05, and then reproduces the channel 10. Since there is a vacancy in ~11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the reserved winning sound having a priority order of 01, and assigns it to reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the notification sound 3 having the priority order of 25 is generated, and selects the reproduction channels 14 to 15. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

133(A) and FIG. 133(B) to FIG. 136(A) and FIG. 136(B) respectively show an example of the specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 133(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the reach BGM having the priority of 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 133(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the notification sound 1 having the priority order of 25 is generated, and the reproduction channels 02 to 03 are empty. Since they exist, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program, next, as shown in FIG. 134(A), is triggered by the request to reproduce the full-screen notice sound having the priority level of 10, and the empty channel. Is performed and there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen notice sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel in response to the request for reproduction of the notification sound 1 having the priority of 25, and then displays the result in FIG. 134(A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure), reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request for reproduction of the notification sound 3 having the priority of 25, and reproduces channels 04 to 05 ( Since there is an empty space (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request for reproduction of the accessory notice sound whose priority is 10, and reproduces channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the reserved winning sound having the priority of 01, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a free space (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (free space)" in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the notification sound 2 having the priority order of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which is reproducing the "preferred winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is the desired sound is started.

By doing this, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output with a higher priority is output. Each sound will be played on the playback channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the empty channels can be effectively utilized as described above, but also each sound including the empty channels is used to output as many sounds as planned to be output as much as possible. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, various sound effects can be realized and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

FIG. 137(A) and FIG. 137(B) to FIG. 138(A) and FIG. 138(B) respectively show an example of the specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 137(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the left symbol stop sound whose priority is 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 137(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to play the right symbol stop sound whose priority is 15 and creates an empty channel in the playing channels 00-01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo by using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the medium symbol stop sound having the priority of 15, and then reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when the request for reproducing the big hit BGM having the priority order of 15 is generated, and makes an empty channel in the reproduction channel 00-01. Therefore, the reproduction of the big hit BGM in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Note that, when the reproduction replacement of the sound according to the priority order is generated using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that you can do this.

[12-3. Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the description has been made by way of example of performing the sound control by the automatic channel system by using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound control by the fixed channel described above is used. The sound control may be performed as follows according to a combination or the like.

FIGS. 139(A) to 139(F) are diagrams showing variations of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of channel systems or a combination thereof.

FIG. 139(A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the fixed channel system for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 139(B) shows this. It corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. The sound control by assigning these two channels has already been described, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 139C shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used and channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of reproduction channels to perform sound control by the automatic channel system (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 139(D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used to allocate channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels and perform sound control by the fixed channel method for some reproduction channels. (Corresponding to "PTN3" in the figure).

FIG. 139(E) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used to perform channel assignment for the maximum number of reproduction channels and some of the reproduction channels are subjected to sound control by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). A concrete example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139(E) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG. 140.

FIG. 139(F) shows that, using one automatic channel group, the maximum number of reproduction channels are assigned to channels to perform sound control by the automatic channel system, and some of the reproduction channels are reproduced by the fixed channel system. The control is performed, but differs from the above example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139(F) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG. 146.

As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, empty channels are assigned or channels being output are swapped based on a pre-designated standard. Sounds can be output only by determining the priority order of. Therefore, unlike conventional control methods that specify a channel and output sound, channel management is not required, so control related to sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. Becomes

Further, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, and for example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel system]
Next, details of another mode of the sound control method described above will be described. In the sound control method described above, as an automatic channel method, the sound allocation to each channel is dynamically changed, so that many sounds can be reproduced by effectively utilizing the empty channels. In recent diversified game machines, hundreds or thousands of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate management of sound sources.

In addition, by overlapping and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to execute the announcement effect in duplicate and to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139(C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and the plurality of sounds and the reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are reliably output in duplicate. can do. Further, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output prior to the effect sound, such as an informative sound, and a sound that is continuously output, such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139(D), the sound that is preferentially output or the sound that is always output is output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the variable display is output. Output in the automatic channel system.

With the above-described configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the empty channels by the automatic channel system and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel system. In addition, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, effect data can be easily managed.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 139(E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 139(C) and 139(D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 139(E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control with fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and a channel for reproducing sound by a fixed channel system and a channel for reproducing sound by an automatic channel system are included. .. The channels that reproduce sounds by the automatic channel system are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 140.

[15-1-1. Play channel configuration]
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in the sound source control in this embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of this embodiment, 32 channels are used and each channel is assigned a unique identifier (channel number).

The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, “classification” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “purpose of use” of each channel. Note that a “remark” is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 140, the configuration of each channel of this embodiment is such that channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

The channels of the automatic channel system with the channel numbers 8 to 19 are "AUTO group 1", and the channels of the automatic channel system with the channel numbers 24 to 29 are "AUTO group 2".

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment can output sound in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) channels are used. On the other hand, for monaural output, one channel is used.

The channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0” and each channel is represented by “channel”+“channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the game machine is started. Channel 1 is a channel that pairs with channel 0 when a sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channels 4 and 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channels 5 and 7 are channels paired with channels 4 and 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

In addition, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output but also the plurality of sounds are simultaneously output to improve the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Further, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM on channel 20 (and channel 21) as well, it is possible to output four BGMs simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). Is becoming

While the game machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is the fixed channel system and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method, while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the notice effect is executed. In the notice production, the sound selected by the lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. In this way, the channels can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition.

In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, channels to which the automatic channel system is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the notice production is AUTO group 1.

When outputting a sound at the time of executing the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched and, in principle, consecutive channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is an empty channel, the designated sound is set to be output from the empty channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, the channel in use is released and a new sound is output, or the output of the designated sound is stopped, based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

The channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. The channel 21 is a pair with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when four sounds are overlapped to output BGM or when a specific effect sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

Like the channels 20 and 21, the channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. The channel 23 is a channel that forms a pair with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the hold tone is output. The holding sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of winning the start prize, or a sound to be preferentially output when the big hit is determined. Sounds and the like based on the lottery result at the time of winning the start prize are output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel system is applied. On channels 24 to 29, the sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of winning the start prize and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation are reproduced. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 by the fixed channel method, the sound when the big hit is confirmed can be surely output even when there is no empty channel in the channels 24 to 29, and the player's attention is drawn. You can

The channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are the channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. In this way, the fixed channel system in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is assigned when the output is constantly continued like BGM or when it is necessary to reliably output like the abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output flexibly according to the game state, etc., it is prevented that the sound is not output even if there are empty channels, and a limited number of channels are set. It can be effectively utilized.

[15-1-2. Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for a vacant channel for sound source control according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a free channel search process when the control of outputting the sound according to the present embodiment is executed. Although FIG. 128 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, the difference is that FIG. 141 has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

In the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 141, in the processing of steps S1108B and S1120B, when the new sound is the automatic channel method, it is determined whether or not an empty channel exists in the channels of the same group. That is, even if channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the results of step S1108B and step S1120B are “No”.

Further, in the free channel search process shown in FIG. 141, when there is no free channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 142, a condition for selecting a channel for which sound reproduction is stopped will be described. It should be noted that the production in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for exchanging sound outputs (stopping reproduction of a sound, releasing a sound) when a channel is not available at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a concrete selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. As will be described later, the attributes include reproduction time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the size of the volume, the amount of change in the sound being reproduced, and the like, and the sound reproduction time at the time of channel selection, It also includes the remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 128, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel whose elapsed time is long after the reproduction is started, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed ends, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a new effect has been executed.

The condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, since an effect having a longer reproduction time may have a higher expectation, an effect having a shorter reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, the effect on the subsequently executed effects may be minimized by stopping the effect having a long reproduction time. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total reproduction time, not on the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

The condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of an effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. In addition, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress ratio of effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the effect.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output can be an effect with a higher degree of importance, a channel with a low volume in the output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel with a large volume of the output sound may be preferentially selected to let the player recognize that a new effect will be executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that the effect in which the sound that is faded in or faded out is output can be a more important effect, and a channel with a small volume change amount is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the sound control load may be reduced by preferentially selecting a channel having a large volume change.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change (panpot) in the sound image localization position. For example, by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers, it is possible to create a more three-dimensional sound effect with a more important effect. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel having a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on a note number (index). For example, a large (small) tone number is selected. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected assuming that a stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since only one channel of monaural sound is used, if the number of empty channels is insufficient even if the channels that output monaural sound are opened, select the channels that output stereo sound to increase the number of empty channels. You can

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set to be unable to adjust the volume may be more important, or an effect set to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority order to all sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority order.

In the table shown in FIG. 142, the conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied individually or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition and a channel that satisfies more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example in which control for channel allocation is performed based on the priority order assigned to sounds to be newly output will be described. Here, an example in which three types of advance notices (first-half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channels from which the respective sound effects are output. ing. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 143, the first half notice_A is generated when a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display was started. At this time, an instruction to operate the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Furthermore, the first-half notice C occurs while the first-half notice_A and the first-half notice_B are being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144, the priority of the first-half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice_C is 20. Furthermore, since volume suppression flags are set for the first-half notice_B and the first-half notice_C, when the notice productions of lower priority are duplicated in the same group, the volume is changed based on the control volume value. Will be reduced.

Explaining the contents of each notice, the first-half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and when the character appears on the display screen, sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

The first half notice_B is an effect that is executed by operating the effect button, and the button pressing sound is played when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice_B is started, and the effect is performed in stereo from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

In the first half notice_C, the sound display is stopped (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically other notice effects and BGM are temporarily. Is muted (blackout effect). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of the sound effects other than the first half notice_C is restarted.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis in (B) represents the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at time t1. At this time, the effect sound of the first half notice_A is output with the preset volume V_A.

Then, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output with the volume V_B. Since the priority of the first-half notice_B is higher than that of the first-half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

It should be noted that if the priority of the notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the notice effect being executed, the volume does not have to be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects being output at the same time. You don't have to turn down the volume. Also, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

Furthermore, when the first-half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen goes dark until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first-half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

Further, the output of the effect sound of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B, which have been muted at time t3, is restarted at time t5. Originally, the button press sound is output until time t4, but since t5>t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

Thereafter, in the first-half notice_A and the first-half notice_B, the effect is continued until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first half notice_C ends, and the first half of the change ends.

During the period in which the effect sound effect is muted, the effect sound effect may be output while the volume is set to 0, or the effect sound effect may be stopped. When setting the volume to 0, the volume (sub-volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire effect sound effect may be set to 0 to output the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be influenced by the control by the main volume. Further, even in a state where the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound of higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, the volume of the sound being played on all channels is not lowered, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc. The volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered. Further, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output the sound with a high priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for sure transmission to the player or an employee of the game hall, or the expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit is high. Sound effect for enhancing the sense of expectation, or a sound effect that has a high effect of directing and can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily manage the effect data regarding the effect sound by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency such as suppressing the occurrence of bugs due to systematic test execution. In addition, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by enabling a stable game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group that outputs the sound effect of the notice effect (AUTO group 1) and a group that outputs the hold-related sound effect (AUTO group 2). The number of effect sounds of the notice effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be simultaneously reproduced in duplicate. In particular, in the first half of the change, output of effect sound effects exceeding the number of allocated channels may be required by, for example, executing the advance notice of the pending change together with the advance notice of the change. In such a case, in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1, the effect sound having a lower priority is output while the effect sound having a higher priority is replaced and output, thereby maximizing the interest of the game. ..

Furthermore, it is desirable that the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by changing the hold display of the variable display and outputting the effect sound effect with the change can greatly enhance the player's expectation and is surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect related to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the effect sound independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Further, unlike the case of the notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, so the effect effect sound output is stopped. It is less likely to be done. Further, even in the case of being canceled, the output of the effect sound having a low priority is simply stopped. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by surely executing the production that is highly effective in increasing the player's expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the channels to which the automatic channel system is applied and the channels to which the fixed channel system is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively used by searching for empty channels, and priority effects are set and priority sound is output for priority effects. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output like BGM, or the case where the sound is preferentially output to notify a failure of the gaming machine or an illegal act. In this way, by applying a channel system suitable for the characteristics and use of the sound, each channel can be effectively used, and moreover, appropriate control according to the output situation of the sound can be performed. For example, in the control of outputting BGM, a sound may be output to a pre-allocated channel regardless of the game state, and in the control of outputting an alarm sound, a designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. You can output the sound directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to maximize the use of the empty channels and preferentially output the sound having a high effect of effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect having a high priority. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the effect with the lower priority executed earlier is continuing after the effect with the higher priority is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing the specific effect alone, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of production and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control system described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel system is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel system is set are preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel system is set. A modification in which the number of set channels and the number of fixed channels are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there may be a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a game machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of areas (for example, 9 divisions), and different scenes are displayed on the respective divided screens. At that time, it is possible to output the BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of the effect in the modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 146 is a notice effect in the latter half of the fluctuation after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and an effect of displaying different scenes on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is simultaneously output. The scene may be selected by lottery or may be selected by the player.

The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. The default channel allocation is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously output up to four types (8 channels) of BGM. However, in the multi-screen production in this modification, it is necessary to output 9 types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in the present modification, channels for outputting BGM are reassigned and the channel arrangement is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in the modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 147(A) is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 140, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 147(A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 147(B). Specifically, a fixed channel type channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 and employing the automatic channel method is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different notice effect is executed during execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGMs corresponding to each scene are reproduced while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGMs are output with the normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, so the volume is output with the volume being lower than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. .. In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, the BGM of the selected scene is changed to another by selecting a screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine and determining the scene. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the BGM of the other scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Indicates.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the time of start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 147(A)) to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 147(B). )) is changed. After the first-half fluctuation ends (time t11), a reach occurs and the second-half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 146, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the changed purpose of use of each channel is output to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 147(B)). At this time, the volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1 is output.

After that, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, scene 5 is selected and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the end of the multi-screen effect, the channels that output BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the BGM output from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a timing required. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half change.

Further, instead of changing the arrangement of channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the game state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a time saving state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 139(F)) for performing sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channel for performing sound control by the automatic channel method (see FIG. The number of “variable AUTOch” of 139 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the kind and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be made reproducible depending on the situation, and more kinds of notification sounds can be output, for example, when the game is not being played. It is possible to flexibly cope with the situation by reducing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced for performance.

[16. Control for sound output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which channels are grouped and sounds to be output are managed by being associated with each group. Also, when the number of sounds that can be assigned simultaneously in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being sounded is stopped and a new sound is output based on a predetermined condition, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound being output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, a case will be described in which, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel to be output, control such as changing the volume of a sound being output on another channel is performed.

After the start of the variation of the special symbol, in the state before the reach occurs (during the first half variation), the output of the predetermined effect sound and the output of the sound due to the BGM being reproduced and other effects are regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time. A typical effect for performing such control is a blackout effect in which the output of a sound effect is regulated and the screen is darkened. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the output of the sound effect is regulated, the darkening of the screen is released, and the output of the sound by the BGM or other effects is restarted, so that the newly output sound (the sound It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the fluctuation by making the effect including the output of (1) stand out and draw the player's attention.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which, instead of deallocating the channel from which the sound effect is output and newly allocating the sound, a new sound is allocated and output to an empty channel. In this case, in order to return the output of BGM or the like to the state before the regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering the processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sounds of different groups are being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and a priority is set for each group. Then, a case where a sound is output to a channel that belongs to a group having a lower priority and a sound is output to a channel that newly belongs to a group that has a higher priority will be described.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group-specific volume control table showing the priority order of volume (volume) control for each group in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into 5 groups of 3.

A group volume priority and a suppression volume value are set for each group. The group volume priority order indicates the priority order between the groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority order. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and “1” has the highest priority.

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode in which the volume of another sound being reproduced is changed when the sound is reproduced on a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when "-1" is set, the sound reproduction is continued as it is without changing the other sound being reproduced. If "0" is set, control is performed so as to mute other sounds being reproduced. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of another sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the unit is changed to% and the volume is changed. It should be noted that a numerical value of 100 or more may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

Furthermore, each setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 149. In the present embodiment as well, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system coexist. To the fixed channel, a sound that is preferentially output such as a notification sound or BGM or that is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, grouped effect sound effects are assigned according to the type and importance of the effect.

In fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to "1", which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to “0”, when a sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of a game hall as shown as a reference reproduction sound. Specifically, the sound detected by the magnetic abnormality is It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound such as a ball clogging. That is, when a sound is output from the fixed ch1, the output of the effect sound effect is stopped and only the notification sound is output because the occurrence of a fraudulent act or a failure is a factor. Further, while the notification sound is being output from the fixed channel 1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

For the fixed ch2, the group volume priority is set to "4", which is the lowest in FIG. 149. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "-1", even if the reproduction of the sound on the fixed ch2 is started, it does not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound played on the fixed ch2 is mainly the BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the effect sound that draws the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol while the BGM is being output, etc. Is output.

In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the reproduced sounds other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output alone.

Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a big hit confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, and the like, as shown in the reference playback sound. The big hit confirmation sound is a sound that informs that the result of the variable display is a big hit at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound that informs that a game ball has won in the V zone and is determined to shift to, for example, a high-probability state. Like the jackpot confirming sound, the player's expectation is greatly improved. Can be made

The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that is output in a silent state by suppressing the output of other effect sound effects when the above-described blackout effect is executed. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The big hit confirmation sound and the V winning sound are the outputs of the sounds that are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output, in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, with regard to the blackout effect sound, the attention of the player is focused on the blackout effect by keeping the effect sound of other effects not output for a predetermined time even after the blackout effect sound is output. Further, after the blackout effect is executed, the effect interlocked with the blackout effect may be executed in the variation, for example, the blackout effect is executed in the first half variation and the corresponding effect is executed in the second half variation. You can

In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the reproduced sounds in the groups whose priority is "4" or less are halved (50% or less). Output is suppressed). For example, since the BGM output from the fixed ch2 has the group volume priority of "4" as described above, the volume is halved, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at the normal volume. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that draws the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. The specific sound output by the AUTO group 2 is, for example, the first-half warning sound effect or the second-half warning sound effect.

In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, as in the case of AUTO group 2, since the suppression volume value is set to “50”, when a sound is reproduced in AUTO group 3, a group whose priority is “3” or less is being reproduced. All the sounds of are halved. For example, when the notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is reduced by half. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is already halved, the volume may be continued without being changed, or the volume may be halved (a quarter of the original volume). May be.

Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a winning prize sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the holding display has changed, and a button pressing sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same, the sound is output as it is with the normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of the BGM or the like is restricted, the sounds belonging to the AUTO group 3 are output. For example, when the game ball enters the starting winning opening, the pending winning sound is output even during the blackout effect execution.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, the procedure of volume control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a group volume control process for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a new sound reproduction request (step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce a new sound (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing of step S1420 and subsequent steps is executed.

On the other hand, when there is a request for reproducing a new sound (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the channel group from the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction is requested, and the volume control table for each channel group. From FIG. 149, the suppression volume value and group volume priority order corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppression volume value is "-1" (result of step S1403 is "Yes"), that is, when the control of the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes of step S1406 and the subsequent steps are executed.

When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (result of step S1403 is “No”), that is, when performing control on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further sets the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order have been registered (the result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processing of step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order are not registered (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The ranking is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters of the currently reproduced sound having the highest priority (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) are recorded.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction is requested (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1410 and subsequent steps.

The control for the sound being reproduced will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). When the sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound for which a new reproduction is requested is set (step S1407).

Explaining the sound control executed in and after step S1410, when the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is already registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a notifies the new reproduction request. The group volume priority order of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority order already held in the work area (step S1411).

When the group volume priority order of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is lower than the group volume priority order already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a notifies the new reproduction request. The volume of the affected sound is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

If the group volume priority order of the sound for which a new playback request is made is higher than the group volume priority order held in the work area (result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs new playback. The sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority order of the sound that is already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority order recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being reproduced was recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

When the processes of step S1415 and step S1416 are executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the process of step S1407 ends, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order are the work. It is determined whether or not the area is already registered (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (result of step S1420 is “No”), this processing ends.

When the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order are already registered in the work area (result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process is completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not ended (result of step S1421 is “No”), this processing ends.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority to the work area. To erase (step S1422). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the original volume value set in advance is restored (steps S1423 and S1424), and this processing ends.

The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of a new sound is requested in the present embodiment. Next, the sound volume control will be described in chronological order. FIG. 151 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 151, an example of executing the notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output on the fixed channel (fixed ch2). As shown in FIG. 149, the fixed ch2 has the group volume priority order of “4” and the suppression volume value of “−1”. Since the suppression volume value of the normal BGM is “−1”, the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, the group volume priority order and the suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

When the game ball wins the starting winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding winning is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is “3”, and the suppression volume value is “50” (steps S1402 and S1403 are “No”). .. Since no parameters were recorded in the work area at the start of the first-half notice (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the parameters of the effect sound effects of the first-half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

At the start of the first-half notice A, the normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first-half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is the same as the group priority of the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is previously set. The determined volume value is set (step S1413).

At this time, since the normal BGM is being reproduced and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half fluctuation (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound effect based on the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first-half notice A is used. Is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of normal BGM is reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

Then, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “0” (step S1402). At this time, although the parameters of the first half notice A are recorded in the work area, since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is blacked out. Parameter is updated (step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

Further, since the group priority order of the effect sound effects of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A being reproduced is lower than the blackout effect of the sound effect of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), these The volume of the sound effect of is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, the suppression volume value is 0, so the sound is muted.

Furthermore, the second half notice B is started during the blackout effect execution (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority order of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority order of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in a muted state and the blackout effect is produced. Continue until the end.

After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, a pending winning sound is output (time t24). The reserved winning sound is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “50”. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same (result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, while the predetermined volume is output. Therefore, even when the blackout effect is being executed, the reserved winning sound is output as usual.

When the blackout effect is completed (time t26), the blackout effect parameters recorded in the work area are erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). .. Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the output of the sounds of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

As described above, in the present embodiment, while a sound effect having a high group priority is being output, by suppressing the output of a sound effect having a low group priority, a particular effect can be emphasized. Furthermore, by controlling the volume with the suppression volume value, it is possible to let the player recognize that multiple effects are in progress at the same time, and for effect sound effects that greatly enhance the player's expectation, such as a jackpot confirmation sound, By setting the priority to be high, it is possible to execute the effect without impairing the effect.

Further, when a high priority sound is newly output and the output of the effect sound being reproduced is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the effect sound being reproduced is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. However, the volume of other effect sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out from the timing when the sound with high priority is output. Good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being reproduced), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified, or the target value may be set based on the effect contents such as the length of the reproduction time of the effect sound. The time to reach and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new effect sound effect is short, the time to reach the target value may be set to be short so as to make the effect sound effect stand out. The time to reach the value may be set to be long to reduce the discomfort that may occur when the effect sound effects are switched.

For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, by fading out the output of the effect sound being reproduced such as BGM in a relatively short time, The effect sound that is newly output can be made more prominent without breaking the tempo of the game.

Further, when the output of the new effect sound effect is finished and the output of the other effect sound effect is restarted, the volume of the other effect effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead of this, the start value (volume under regulation) and the time to reach the target value and the amount of change may be defined to control the fade-in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% during the sound effect reproduction of the first-half notice A, but when the output of the normal BGM is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is controlled to 50%), and the fade-in is controlled based on the amount of change for a specified time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort while making the switching of the effect sound effects prominent, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the effect sound effect as an example, it can be similarly applied to the case of an alarm sound or a notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with a high degree of importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to cheating), a notification sound with a relatively low degree of priority (priority) (in addition to a staging effect sound) is output. For example, the output of a ball clogging notification sound) may be restricted. On the other hand, if a fraudulent activity is performed while the notification sound of low importance (priority) is being output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted and the notification sound (alarm) of high importance (priority) is output. Sound) may be preferentially output.

Note that the warning sound and the notification sound do not have the sound output time set like the effect sound, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the warning or the notification is eliminated. Therefore, in the case where a plurality of types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another notification sound is output. .. At this time, the sound with the next highest priority may be output and the output of the remaining sounds may be restricted, or all the remaining sounds may be output at the same time.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)
In the above, the control of the sounds output in duplicate according to the priority order between the groups has been described. Next, a control example of controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long or short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table for each sound effect]
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a sound effect volume control table showing volume (volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sound in the present embodiment. A used reproduction channel (ch), a total reproduction time, and a suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 149, the used reproduction channels are each divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

The total reproduction time is the time from the start to the stop of the output of the sound effect. When the total reproduction time is set to -1, the sound effect is output with a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effect to be output to the other. At this time, the volume of the sound effect is controlled so that it cannot be suppressed.

When the total reproduction time is set to 0, the loop reproduction is repeatedly output, and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. If the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is any other number (a positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 149, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode in which the volumes of other sound effects output at the same time are changed. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being reproduced (in the total reproduction time is- The output of sound effects other than those for which 1 is set is suppressed (silenced). When the numerical value is other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

Next, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 152. Also in this embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed, and the sound effects to be assigned are also the same. Is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but it may be set for each sound effect.

Since the total reproduction time is set to "-1" and the suppression volume value is set to "0" in the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch1, when these sound effects are reproduced, the other sound being reproduced is not reproduced. All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of a game hall, and is caused by a fraudulent activity or a failure, and thus is output as a sound effect. Volume cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped or muted).

Since the total reproduction time is set to “0” and the suppression volume value is set to “−1” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of the output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being played. The sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in the game.

In the sound effect assigned to the AUTO group 1, since the total reproduction time is set to a value (reproduction time) set for each sound effect and the suppression volume value is set to “0”, the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output alone. As shown in FIG. 149, concrete sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a big hit confirmation sound, a blackout effect sound, a V winning sound, and the like.

In the sound effect assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3, the total reproduction time is set to the value (reproduction time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to “50”. When a sound is reproduced, the outputs of other sounds being reproduced are all halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as a specific sound output in the AUTO group 2 that can reduce the output of the BGM by half and enhance the effect while continuing the flow of the game, for example, the first-half warning sound effect and the second-half warning effect Sounds and the like, and specific sounds output in the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of winning a start prize, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a pressing of an effect button. For example, a button pressing sound for notification.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effect that is duplicately reproduced is controlled according to the reproduction time of the sound effect. 153A and 153B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the volume control processing for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of this embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the output of the sound effect in this embodiment will be described.

When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a new sound reproduction request (step S1501A). If there is no request to reproduce a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “No”), the processing of step S1530A and subsequent steps is executed.

On the other hand, when there is a playback request for a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound for which the playback request is made, and sets the sound effect volume. The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 152) (step S1502A).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is "-1" (no suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppression volume value is "-1" (result of step S1503A is "Yes"), that is, when the control of the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1506A and thereafter is executed.

When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (result of step S1503A is “No”), that is, when performing control on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further sets the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (result of step S1504A is "Yes"), the processes of step S1506A and thereafter are executed.

When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order are not registered (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction is requested (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1510A and subsequent steps.

The sound control based on the parameter stored in the work area and the parameter of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1”. Yes (step S1510A). When the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “Yes”), as described above, the alarm sound at the time of occurrence of an abnormality is output, and the new sound is generated. Prohibits the suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound and forcibly suppresses the output of other sound effects during reproduction.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Further, the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request is made are overwritten in the work area (step S1512A).

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made (step S1513A). When the volume of all the sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processes from step S1530A are executed (step S1514A).

On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is not "-1" (result of step S1510A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether or not a tone number is set to "-1" or the work area (step S1520A). When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is "-1" or the sound number is not set in the work area (result of step S1520A is "Yes"), the processing of step S1530A and thereafter is executed.

When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (result of step S1520A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

When the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound for which a new reproduction request is made. The number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are overwritten in the work area (step S1522A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). When the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is shorter than or equal to the total reproduction time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, when the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is longer than the total reproduction time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made. Then, the volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). If the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value already recorded in the work area (result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processes of step S1526A and step S1527A for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processes of step S1530A and subsequent steps (step S1528A).

When the volume control for the sound for which a new reproduction is requested and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (result of step S1530A is "No"), this processing ends.

When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not is completed (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not ended (result of step S1531A is “No”), this processing ends.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. It is erased (step S1532A). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (step S1533A, step S1534A), and this processing is ended.

The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Next, the sound volume control will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 154 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 154, an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output with the fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. Further, the normal BGM is a loop reproduction in which the reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, the preset volume value is set, and the normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first-half notice A is newly requested to execute the first-half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first-half notice A is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the total reproduction time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is “No”).

Further, since no parameter is registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the sound number of the sound effect of the first-half notice A, the total reproduction time, and the suppression volume value are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

Further, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and new The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the reproduction request is made is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”, the result of step S1521A is “No”, and the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request is made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

Subsequently, since the normal BGM is being reproduced at this point and the volume has not been suppressed yet, the suppression volume value is "100", which is larger than the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), and the volume of normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first-half notice A (step S1527A).

Subsequently, the parameter of the sound effect of the first-half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first-half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). , This process ends.

After that, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request of the blackout effect sound effect is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound effect is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total reproduction time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first-half notice A has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first-half notice A are being output (step S1506A). The result is "Yes").

Furthermore, the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made is “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the first-half notice A sound effect held in the work area. Is “15000” (the result of step S1520A is “No”).

Next, since the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first-half notice A held in the work area is "50" and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request is made is "0" (step The result of S1521A is "Yes"), the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" are overwritten in the work area (step S1522A).

In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout notice effect sound effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the first-half notice A sound effect (the result of step S1523A is "Yes"), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the notice effect sound effect (step S1524A).

Next, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is normally 50 for BGM, the sound effect for the first half notice A is "100", and the suppression volume value for the blackout notice effect sound already recorded in the work area is "0". (The result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A is set to “0” (step S1527A).

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning hole during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request of the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The reserved winning sound is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total reproduction time is "2000" and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

Further, the total playing time of the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request is made is "2000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total playing time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "8000". Is displayed (the result of step S1520A is “No”).

Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "0", and the suppression volume value of the reserved winning sound for which a new reproduction request is made is "50" (the result of step S1521A is "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total playing time (2000 ms; a2) of the reserved winning sound is shorter than the total playing time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the reserved winning sound (step S1524A). Since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Then, even when the output of the reserved winning sound ends (time t34), the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is recorded in the work area, so that the output of the blackout effect sound effect is continued.

After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), since the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the blackout stored in the work area. The parameter of the effect sound effect is erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM in which the reproduction of the sound is suppressed (the volume is reduced) and the sound effect of the first-half notice A is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM is suppressed during the sound effect reproduction of the first-half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the volume of the other sound effect being reproduced is muted and a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) can be emphasized, the effect sound effect of the effect sound is reduced during the mute period. Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a performance opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of the other effect is suppressed. While informing the player, if the output of the sound effect is continued until the end of the muffling period, by suppressing the output of the sound effect of the effect during the muffling period, the execution of the specific effect is emphasized. be able to.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, a new sound is generated when the channels to which the sound data is to be allocated are free (the number of empty channels is 0). When the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated due to the appearance of an unintended sound output in designing the production.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the condition for allocating new sound data is satisfied when the channel is not in a vacant state (the number of vacant channels is 0), it is set in advance. By controlling so that the less important sound output is selectively discarded based on the priority order, the appearance of unintended sound output in the production design is prevented from appearing, and the enjoyment of the game is reduced. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is important to devise a technical measure in terms of how it is difficult for the situation itself to appear when there is no available channel (the number of available channels is 0).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various types of output are not performed as long as a proper game is performed so that more channel resources can be allocated to the effect sound (effect sound). With regard to the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel-saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content and the like with only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel-saving control structure is adopted for outputting various notification sounds will be described.

FIG. 155 shows various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the effect sound as sound control by the fixed channel system, and a specific channel (hereinafter, referred to as channel X) out of a limited number of prepared channels. 2 shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the processing of outputting only in (). In this sound definition table, the definition of priority order for playback, left/right pan initial value, top/bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting is managed for each sound name. doing. Here, for convenience of description, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of other notification sounds and effect sounds are omitted. Note that, regarding the effect sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel system illustrated in FIG. 120, the definition by the automatic channel system illustrated in FIG. 124 is performed for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

The priority order is a parameter used for determining which of the notification sounds is to be assigned to the channel X and output when the plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and is output regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to the channel X is prioritized, and after the output of the notification sound is finished, the notification sound is assigned and output to the channel X. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and when set to "0x80", for example, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers formed of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. It is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 156 is a table showing, for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 155, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification ends, for each type of the notification sound. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is set as much as possible in order to effectively use the single channel X. This is a measure for maintaining the state and refraining from outputting the notification sound thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 156, the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed). It is to notify that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnet detected”). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". On the other hand, with respect to the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. Is becoming

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (it is highly possible that a fraudulent act due to a pounding act is performed). State 2) notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to notify that there is, and the count sensor 4005 (first big winning hole sensor or second big winning game even if it is not in the big hit game state (large winning hole open state) Notification sound to notify that it is in a state where it is detected by the prize hole sensor (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of winning the game ball by forcibly opening the closed big prize hole is performed) 3 (major winning a prize) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some cheating has been performed, and regarding the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “a boom vibration is detected” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration was detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively performed, and detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as notification time. While the loop processing of repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for six times) from the time when there is, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps With respect to the lighting by, the execution is continued until the power-on again, which is the release condition, is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “A big prize abnormality has been detected” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. Display (for example, "A big prize abnormality has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively, and as the notification time, While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for six times) from the time when the detection by the count sensor 4005 is performed, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and the lighting by the various lamps will be continuously executed until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Regarding the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily turned on) with the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be a mode). Further, regarding the notification sound to be the target of the loop processing, the notification sound 1 such as “Boo Boo” that plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (state in which fraudulent activity is likely to have been performed) The combination of the alarm sound used in any one of 3 to 3 and the message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of the content of the notification is sequentially adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify its distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, in the case of notifying what belongs to the first notification group (state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, the hall side response to the fraudulent act It is important to speed up the initial movement of. In this respect, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by the various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and the ones belonging to the first notification group (the misconduct is Since it is possible to recognize that it is a state in which it is highly likely that it has been performed), it is expected that the initial response of the hall side response to a fraudulent act will be accelerated. Further, a message sound for informing which of the notification types is to be output following the notification sound of "Boo Boo", or the display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the measures for the hall side after the initial movement will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is in a state in which the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (possibly a fraudulent act by opening the door. However, there is a possibility that the door may have been opened due to the abnormality handling measures by the hall side). Then, as the notification mode, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open )) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, as the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" is 30 seconds from the time when the door frame opening switch 618 detects (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for three times. ), the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and lighting by various lamps are release conditions “door close detection (door frame open switch 618 causes main frame 4 On the other hand, the execution is continued until “the detection that the door frame 3 is closed” is satisfied.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent acts due to opening the main frame, there is also a possibility that the main frame is open due to abnormal measures taken by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a possibility that some kind of misconduct has been performed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified of those notification sounds. The mode, the notification time, and the cancellation condition are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively, and the main frame opening switch is set as the notification time. While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time of detection by 619, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, The lighting by the various lamps is continuously executed until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. Regarding the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be a mode). However, the lighting manner by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting manner by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. Further, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to what the notification content is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (misconduct) (Potential ping-pong), which plays a role of informing that there is a medium possibility that a warning has been performed, is used in combination with an alarm sound that is used for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 that are used. There is.

In other words, when notifying members belonging to the second notification group (state in which there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing the appropriate game from feeling aversion. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side to some extent promptly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for notifying which of the notification types is output. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game will not easily feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound, although it is an alarm sound different from that in the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing an appropriate game to feel aversion. Output in the case of belonging to the third notification group, though it is a lighting mode different from the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make the person who is playing the appropriate game feel less dislike By notifying by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the countermeasures for the abnormality on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) causes the game ball to move the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, despite being in the non-time saving state. It is in a state in which the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (a state in which the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the game should be corrected in an appropriate manner (left-handed)). It is to inform that. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed" ]) and are executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both of the loop processing of repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Please return to the left" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in the non-time saving state. It is completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to repetition of two notification sounds) from the time of detection by the gate sensor 4003.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide), the lower tank 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 as being full of gaming balls (lower bowl). A notification sound 7 (ball cutting guide) indicating that the game ball in 322 is in a ball cutting state is provided, and game guidance is provided to properly advance the game although the possibility of misconduct is low. It is regarded that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when the power is in the proper state, and for the notification sounds that belong to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and release condition are all set to be common. I am trying.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball drop guide), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Please pull out the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and as a notification time, loop processing that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate", and the game board Any of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is completed within 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

However, regarding the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-drop guide), the sensors 2401 and 201, when they are completed in 20 seconds from when they are detected by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detected state, the notification process (the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-slot guide)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sounds are output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sounds for 5 seconds have been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to the channel X and a sound corresponding to the data is output (silent output), and a loop process is repeated to repeat the notification sound for 10 seconds in which the message sound and the silent data are set. It has become. Then, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are configured to output the silent data for the same time period, the notification sounds function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the side of the hall, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion which is difficult to hear in a noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed while the data is assigned to the channel X.

By the way, a silent part may exist in the notification sound used between the first notification group and the second notification group (between the warning sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to have a "between". It is clear that it is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long time silent part (third broadcast group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, the alarm sound such as “boo boo” or “ping pong ping pong” is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period, so that the player is notified. It becomes possible to give a notification about the game guidance without making the user feel aversion.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group have the same priority, but the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group have different priorities. You may do it. Further, as the reproduction type setting, the loop reproduction for repeatedly reproducing the target sound is adopted, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the 1SHOT reproduction for reproducing the target sound once may be adopted. . In addition, “Boo Boo”, which is commonly used for the notification sound belonging to the first notification group, and “Ping-Pong Ping-Pong”, which is commonly used for the notification sound belonging to the second notification group, are connected to the message sound. It may be possible to separately prepare each of the notification sounds as the sound data of the above, or prepare it as the sound data different from the message sound, and create the sound data in which the message sound and the warning sound are combined at the time of output. You may make it allocate to a channel later.

FIG. 157(a) shows a process when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), assuming that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 within the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no alarm sound is output, The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Then, information indicating that magnetic detection has been made is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetism has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command by the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, the information of the magnetic detection is obtained. If it is recognized that the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification mode (In this case, the loop of "Boo Boo magnetism detected" loop) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) is set to measure the alarm time of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality).

When the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control is performed. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism is detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to magnetic detection and light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to magnetic detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Through such a process, a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnet is detected") is performed. ”) and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group), respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157(a), 60 seconds after the timing tα1 has not elapsed, and at the timing tα2 when the notification sound such as “boo oo magnetism has been detected” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S112 ( It is assumed that the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration in the process of FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration is detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 when the magnetic detection is performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the vibration is detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is generated. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the alarm sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boo Boo vibration was detected") It is supposed to perform playback.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection. By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display and lamps can be displayed. As for lighting, these are executed.

In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the magnetic abnormality is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. In the lamp lighting, although the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set, since the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is already set and its priority is the same, The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has already been set is reflected by each type of lamp light emission, and various lighting modes of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection are reflected. It is not reflected in each lamp. The light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) similarly to the sound generation schedule data.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and the emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data content, either of them is used. Even if it is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at timing tα3, which is 60 seconds after the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism was detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having timed up. The loop processing to be executed is ended. In addition, since the time required to play back the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism was detected” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set to the time. At the timing tα3 when the loop is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times.

Further, at this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) has not timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest. By assigning the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) to the channel X only for the time (the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boob vibration Has been detected” loop).

That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set and is set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at the timing tα3, it is possible to play back the notification sound of “boo boo vibration detected” from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) times out, “boo boo vibration is detected. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be ended and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as “boob shaking”) of the notification sound such as “Yes”.

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 157(a)), the 6th alarm sound (here, “Boo Boo”) and the 6th message sound (here, “Magnetism detected”) have finished playing, and the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "Boo Boo") was played. As a result, “Boo Boo magnetism is detected” and “Boo Boo vibration were detected” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize illegal notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the notification sound 1 ends with "Boo Boo Magneto" and the notification sound 2 starts with "Motion detected", a meaningless notification such as "Boo Boo Magneto detected" Content, which may confuse the site) can be suitably suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up and ended at the warning sound of “Boo Boo”, and the message sound is generated. Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and is not reproduced (only for magnetic abnormality). If it is a notification, the notification sound will be ended at a good time). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at a halfway timing, it is urged to check the display in the liquid crystal, and "the magnetic field is detected" and "the vibration is detected" are displayed on the liquid crystal display. By being displayed, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

FIG. 157(b) shows a process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above) (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ) Is almost the same.

For example, as shown in FIG. 157(b), at the timing tβ1 at which no alarm sound is being output, the frame opening detection by the main frame opening switch 619 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If so, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame open detection has been made. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is provided for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95), and as a result, the frame open detection is detected. When it is grasped that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X and the notification is given. In addition to starting the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the frame is "ping-pong ping-pong" loop), set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame open). ..

When assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 5 (open frame) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "open frame ping pong ping pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Like

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection are transmitted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the frame closing detection, which is a condition for canceling the frame opening detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "a frame is open ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from timing tβ1, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "frame Open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group), respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157(b), at the timing tβ2 at which the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is not being passed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1 and the loop is being reproduced, the step S110 is performed. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door open switch 618 detects the door open in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening detection is performed, as in the case of the timing tβ1 when the frame opening detection is performed. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is provided for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame opening) is in the output state (playback state). As a result, even if it is ascertained that the information of the door opening detection is included, the warning sound of step S1024 (FIG. 95) causes the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. Not assigned. In other words, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly allocated to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame opening) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door open detection at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) is not processed in a state where it is not allocated to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out at the time when the output state (playback state) of the alarm sound 5 (frame opening) ends, the door open detection is responded to. Set the sound generation schedule data, assign the alarm sound 4 (door open) to channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, These are executed for the display and the lighting of the lamp.

In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the opening of the door appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is turned on, only the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, but the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection which is already in the set state is reflected by each lamp light emission, and the light emission mode generation schedule data lighting according to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection have the same data content, No matter what is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at timing tβ3, which is 30 seconds after the timing tβ1, the notification sound such as “Ping Ping Ping Pong is open” is set based on the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame opening) being up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "open frame ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times.

Further, at this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 4 (door open) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, and By assigning the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 is subtracted from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door The ping-pong ping-pong's loop) will play the notification sound.

That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is not set and is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at the timing tβ3, the notification sound of “door is open ping pong ping pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is up, “door is opened. It is possible to prompt the end of the loop processing at the halfway timing (for example, the timing when “the door is open”) of the notification sound such as “M.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (FIG. 157(b)) When the 3rd message sound (here "the frame is open") and the 3rd alarm sound (here "ping pong ping pong") have finished playing, the 4th message sound ( Here, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") was played. As a result, the "frame is open ping pong" and the "door is open ping pong" are connected at a strange place, and it becomes impossible to recognize the content of the notification in a tense situation. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door opening detection is shortened, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it becomes possible to surely grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 157(c) shows processing performed when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

As shown in FIG. 157(c), at the timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is played in spite of being in the non-time saving state in the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right hit detection in the non-time saving state), the main The control MPU 1310a sets the information indicating that the right-hand hit was detected in the non-time saving state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-hand hit detection in the time saving state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Like Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not output to the hall computer externally.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command by the received command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, the result is in the non-time saving state. If it is grasped that the information of the right-hand hit detection is included, the alarm sound 6 (left-hand guide) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (for setting) to start the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, "Please return to the left" loop) and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ( 20 seconds).

Regarding the right hit detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information indicating that is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate unit 2003 as a game. Only the information indicating that the passage of the ball is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a side determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in an untimely state. May be performed, and the process regarding the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied as various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handing" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Like

Further, at this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to extract the schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-described liquid crystal display is also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes the notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is up) which is a condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to be executed. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which is less likely to be fraudulent, it is important to avoid obstruction of the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. It will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to the left" is repeatedly executed from timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, "Please return to the left-hand side") is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157(c), at the timing tγ2 at which the notification sound such as “please return to the left-hand side” is in the loop reproduction state since 20 seconds has not elapsed from the timing tγ1, step S110 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a sets information indicating that the lower plate full tank has been detected as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 when the right hit detection is made in the non-time saving state. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (lower plate full tank detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is executed by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the lower plate full tank detection information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) shown in FIG. 156 is channeled. It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) should not be newly assigned to the channel X. By doing so, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the detection of the lower tray full at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guidance) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), the timer (20 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guidance) which has not been set yet (20). Second) is set, and when the timer (20 seconds) is not up at the time when the output state (playback state) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is finished, the lower plate is full. Set the sound generation schedule data according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Please remove the ball on the lower plate Loop) of the notification sound reproduction.

Also, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the lower plate full tank detection is not set, but for the screen generation according to the lower plate full tank detection. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c so that the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is executed. There is.

Incidentally, in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guide appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the left-handed guide is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Has become.

After that, at timing tγ3, which is 20 seconds after the timing tγ1, the notification sound “Please return to left” is issued based on that the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. Note that the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set here because the time required to play once the notification sound such as "Please return to the left" is set to 10 seconds. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-hand side” has been reproduced twice, and at a good timing.

Further, at this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the alarm sound 7 (bulb removal guide) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower pan full. Then, by assigning the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 subtracted from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here Then, the informative sound reproduction in the "please pull out the lower bowl" loop) will be executed.

That is, the timer for the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guide) is set at the timing tγ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set and set at the timing tγ3. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of “please remove the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is up. , At the timing of halfway of the notification sound such as "Please pull out the lower bowl" (for example, at the timing such as "Please pull out the lower bowl"), the loop processing is finished and it will not be played back. You can be encouraged.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. 157(c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to the left") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please remove the ball from the bottom plate") It becomes possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if it was reproduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which "Please return to the left" and "Please pull out the ball in the lower plate" are connected at a strange place, and you cannot recognize the content of the notification. Will be able to.

Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X and the sound corresponding thereto is output (silence output). It is like this. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, the silent data for 5 seconds is inserted. Since the message sound of another notification sound is reproduced in, the occurrence of a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized is preferable. You will be able to avoid it.

FIG. 158(a) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 158(a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 within the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 at which no alarm sound is output, Regarding the processing (magnetic abnormality processing) according to the magnetic detection, the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 157(a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism was detected” is started, and the timing at which the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158(a), 60 seconds after the timing t-1 has not elapsed, and a notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” is in the state of loop reproduction at the timing t-2. In the above, it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is detected in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 155). ), even if the door opening detection occurs, the process of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

Then, normally, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157(a) to (c) overlaps, the notification sound of the lower priority side is transmitted. A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

However, unlike the case where the door is opened only when the magnetic anomaly occurs and the door is opened immediately, there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed, and it is no longer possible to say `` It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158(a), at timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. , Only sets the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the flag being set, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection are respectively provided. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X and the notification sound reproduction in that notification mode (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) is started. . The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp in response to the door opening detection are started at timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even if the door sound is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the state of loop playback, the alarm sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" is detected. From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as “” is ended, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is played all over for 30 seconds, and “the door is open Ping Pong” The loop processing ends at a timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. As described above, since the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more careful notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority order, the notifications belonging to the second notification group are generated. Although it is the content (here, the door is open, the ping-pong ping-pong loop), it will be expected to raise awareness of the fact that there is a high possibility of fraud.

Also, after the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected”, the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation can be reached. It becomes possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification of belonging has been completed. On the other hand, the alarm sound of "ping pong ping pong" is reproduced after the message sound, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the notification is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

FIG. 158(b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 158(b), it is assumed that door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is detected in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 at which no alarm sound is output. With respect to the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 157(b) is performed. Be seen. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is up. Then, the loop processing will be ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158(b), 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing t δ2. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right hit in a non-time saving state in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left hitting guidance) according to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 155), even if the right-hand hit detection in the non-time saving state occurs, the process of the alarm sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

That is, as described above, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is similar to the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157(a) to (c) overlaps. Is set so that the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158(b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound is generated according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Schedule data is not set. Then, at timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) is assigned to the channel X for only minutes, and the notification sound reproduction is performed in the notification mode (here, the loop of "return to left-handing").

According to this configuration, the alarm sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, and the alarm sound such as "Please return to the left" at a good timing is not included. Is reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X and the sound corresponding thereto is output (silence output). It is like this. Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced is finished and that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is reproduced. Like

FIG. 158(c) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 158(c), it is assumed that the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening at the timing tε1 at which no alarm sound is output, in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). With respect to the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 157(b) is performed. Be seen. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is up. Then, when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, the loop processing is ended at a good timing. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 158(c), 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “The door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing tε2, at step S112. It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the processing of (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 155), the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is prioritized, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is performed in both sound and lamp lighting. The output content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Regarding the display in the liquid crystal, each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that priority is given during execution of notification having a low priority. Even if a notification with a high priority is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator regardless of whether the sound or the lamp is turned on, it has been set until the timing tε2. A process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Is maintained in the set state, and the priority is higher than the respective data. The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data are set respectively. Put in a state. Then, the assignment of the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the contents based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation. By switching to the content based on the use schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158(c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process (the door open process) having the lower priority in the execution state, It is possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158(c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Boo magnetism is detected” is started, and the timer of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times in time with the time up of (60 seconds). Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

With such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is likely to be fraudulent is performed, the process of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed in any of the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as an alarm sound, first, an alarm sound such as "Boo Boo" is reproduced, so that the alarms belonging to the first alarm group are being transmitted, and the fact that the situation has changed to a tense state is promptly transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

FIG. 158(d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 158(d), at timing tζ1 at which no alarm sound is output, the right-hand hit detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If there is, the processing corresponding to the right stroke detection in the non-time saving state (left stroke guide processing) is the same as the case described with reference to FIG. 157(c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is started, and the timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to the left-hand side" has been reproduced twice, and at a good timing. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp will be continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is the condition for canceling the left-handed guide, is up.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 158(d), at the timing tζ2 at which the notification sound such as “please return to the left-hand hit” is in the loop reproduction state since 20 seconds has not elapsed from the timing tζ1, step S110 or It is assumed that the door open switch 618 detects the door open in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opened) in response to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 155), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is prioritized, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. Regarding the display in the liquid crystal, each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that priority is given during execution of notification having a low priority. Even if a notification with a high priority is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, at the timing tζ2, the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state that has been set until then is detected. It is also possible to perform processing for canceling the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the set state.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, at the timing t ζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state. As for the above, they are kept in the set state, and the priority is higher than this, not only the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, but also the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection. Set the generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Then, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is reflected in the operation of each actuator regardless of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158(d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed on the process (left-handing guide process) on the side having the lower priority in the execution state, It is possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (left-handed guide process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158(d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is generated. When the timer (30 seconds) is up, the loop processing will be ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open Ping Pong" has been played three times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, as soon as the door opening detection in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is moderate occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed by sound, display in the liquid crystal, and lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, first, since the message sound (the door is open) is played, it is possible to prevent the person who is playing the game from feeling aversion, but after that, The notification sound belonging to the second notification group is given by the alarm sound by "ping-pong", and it is expected to promptly inform the hall side that the situation has changed to the possibility of fraud. .

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in such a situation that the abnormality notification sound is output. Is not reflected as the volume. However, it is desirable that when the brightness setting value is changed, the changed brightness is reflected in some of the effect lamps of the effect lamps.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 155 should be output, various processes can be performed by performing the processes described above according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to properly notify the content of the abnormality, the game guidance, etc. (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may become higher than medium depending on other detection situations. It is hard to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

The notification sound is output not only when an abnormality is detected that is likely to have been fraudulent, but also when an abnormality is detected that is unlikely to be fraudulent. is there. That is, in the case of anomaly detection with a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but with anomaly detection with a low possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed. If so, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (corresponding to recovery of various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state is continued, the alarm sound is not always output. It is important to be able to execute a more flexible notification process according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIGS. 159 to 164, the state of the gaming machine is further improved by taking into consideration special conditions in addition to the control based on the above-described priority order. It is supposed that the notification is realized in such a manner that it can be appropriately expressed. The special notification process will be described below for each situation with reference to FIGS. 159 to 164.

In the example shown in FIG. 159, door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no alarm sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also transmitted. It is set. Then, at this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played for a second.

On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal display in response to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 when the door frame opening switch 618 stops detecting the door opening.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the channel X is in the idle state, the priority of the notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection occurs by the sensor 4024. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission in response to the door opening detection started from the timing tα11, the light emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 comes, but regarding the allocation to various lamp operations, At timing tα13, the mode is switched to the mode of lamp light emission according to the magnetic detection.

That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are also set. They are set. Then, at this time, the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is detected for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the light emission of the lamp according to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained respectively unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 159, when the alarm sound reproduction in response to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor. 4024 magnetic detection has occurred. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some illegal operation opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, and then waits until the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection is finished, When a magnet for an unauthorized purpose is secretly placed inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, it is assumed that the magnet may momentarily enter the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, which is extremely malicious. Therefore, it is feared that merely performing the alarm sound processing according to the magnetic detection is not sufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already off, even if some measure is taken, magnetic detection cannot be used as a trigger.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα14 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, it is utilized that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued, Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data according to door open detection" in a state where the notification sound reproduction has already notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. It is supposed to perform a special process that is reassigned to. Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound according to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

With such a configuration, the alarm sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been in the closed state is reproduced in a manner connected to the “information sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”, which causes a large discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be brought to the attention of everyone. In addition, even as a person who commits fraud, "although the magnetic notification ends, the notification sound reproduction is all finished, and it is possible to finally make it difficult to notice the fraudulent activity," already By playing the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that should have ended, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected that further fraud will be recognized as too risky. Like

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, the other channels are selected. It is supposed to perform processing (processing for reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the effect sound that is being assigned and changing the design sound and other game sounds. The specific value may be zero volume. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound and the game sound other than that, which are being assigned to the other channels, are not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is to be suppressed) means whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). State), or whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 159, in the period of the timings tα11 to tα13 and the period of the timings tα14 to tα16, it is based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed, and the symbol variation. A process of suppressing the volume of the inside effect sound and other game sounds (a process of decreasing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period of timings tα13 to tα14, the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the period during which the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the game sound other than that (process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, both the notification process by the first notification group and the notification process by the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification process is performed by the first notification group (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period during which it is decided to reduce the sound volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sound to the same value, both the notification process by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of lowering the value to a value lower than that during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states by merely confirming the effect sound other than the notification sound, and it is expected that the initial action on the hall side can be made faster.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection ends, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound according to the door open detection that was already in the finished state is reproduced in a manner that is connected to the "reproduction of notification sound according to the magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection is ended, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the game sound other than that may not be suppressed, and this may be continued.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, as is apparent from the processing in response to the door open detection, the liquid crystal display in response to the door open detection is displayed during the period when the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is reproduced. Although the start time is the same in the period that is performed and the period in which the lamp emits light in a mode according to the door open detection, the end timings thereof are all different. As described above, since the alarm sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp light emission are operated so as to have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various alarm sounds. In spite of this, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the content of the abnormality, the game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 160, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, at the timing tα23, the right hit detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 159, it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, so that the notification sound reproduction in response to the right-hand hit detection in the non-time saving state is ended. At the timing tα24, the notification sound according to the door opening detection, which has already been completed, is not reproduced again. Further, during the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the change of the symbol and the volume of the game sound other than that is not changed. By the way, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely bad. Since it is unlikely that such an action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is completed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door opening detection ends, and the point shown in FIG. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is ended at the timing tα34 which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 161, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the finished state is “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. It is never played back in a connected fashion. That is, also in the example shown in FIG. 161, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 159, after a person who intends to perform some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, door open detection is performed. When the attempt is made to secretly place the magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cold, the magnet is momentarily within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 after waiting for the corresponding notification sound reproduction to end. It is possible that you are in a situation where you have entered. However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetism is not detected in the non-illegitimate state, the magnetic detection is performed even in the non-illegitimate state. It is considered that the alarm sound is sufficiently played as the alarm sound processing only by continuously reproducing the alarm sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacant in case the further alarm sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify the content of the abnormality and the game guidance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 162, FIG. 159 shows that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) according to the door opening detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 162, it is attempted to secretly arrange the magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air has cooled down, until the notification sound reproduction in response to the door opening detection is completed. Although the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response to this, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is within the detection range without being overwhelmed by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being placed again, and there is a possibility that more malicious misconduct is being performed. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state while the notification sound 1 The process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is provided for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed to when 60 seconds elapses from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection is performed. Will be able to be continuously played. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. And finally, the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected” does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected”. It will be expected that it will cause a big discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 when 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection was performed as a base point, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “door open”. A special process is performed in which "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection" is set again and the notification sound is reassigned to the channel X. Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound according to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

With such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been completed is played in a form connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”, and also in the midway such as “boo boo magnetic detection”. It is reproduced in a form connected with "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetism detection" in which the loop processing is completed at odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the higher state becomes higher, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection is stopped halfway and reproduced. It is expected that it will cause more discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 159 shows that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the door opening detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 163, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54, which is within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 163, when an attempt is made to secretly arrange a magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cold after waiting for the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection to end. Although the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state of being greatly shaken without being overwhelmed by such a situation. Assuming that this is the case, there is a possibility that more malicious fraudulent acts are being performed. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is finished, after the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a manner connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”, At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the finished state is reproduced in a manner further connected to the “information sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, and the timer (60 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set. Second) is set, and at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo vibration was detected" is not terminated at the time when the loop is good, and the loop process is stopped at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo vibration is detected". Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that a large amount of discomfort will be generated in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction in response to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound reproduction is already informed for the notification time (30 seconds). Special processing is performed by resetting "schedule data" and reassigning the alarm sound to channel X. Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound according to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been in the closed state is further connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the vibration detection” connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. Not only is it played back in, but it is also played back in a form that is linked to "playing a notification sound in response to vibration detection", whose loop processing has been completed at a semi-finished timing, such as "booboo vibration detection". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state becomes higher, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the vibration detection was reproduced by stopping in the middle of the hall. It is expected that it will cause more discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 164, a case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the frame opening detection ends, not the door opening detection. I'm assuming.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 164, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame open detection is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some fraudulent act is performed. On the other hand, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the main body frame 4 is opened, arranging the magnet would be useful. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the hall side may erroneously detect the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when the magnet is used to eliminate the ball clogging in the ball tank or the payout passage.

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 164, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection which has already been in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection. By playing in a manner that is connected to “play” (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a large sense of discomfort will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 at which the frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection ends, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection but also the magnetic detection is performed. Special processing for ending each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) is also performed.

According to such a configuration, while appropriately performing the function against fraudulent activity, when the false detection is made on the side of the hall, the main frame 4 is simply closed to notify the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection. It is expected that it will be possible to quickly respond to false detections on the side of the hall and maintain the atmosphere in the hall in a suitable manner, since all of the notification sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp) can be ended. Become.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 164, even when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is also performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp) corresponding to the magnetic detection You may make it perform the special process which ends.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with the player-side volume adjusting function.

For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 has been operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 128), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the speaker volume has been set by the player (the player set value), a process is performed to lower the effect selection right button 332. If it is determined that the production selection right button 332 has been operated, the speaker volume is set by the player. A process of increasing the value (player setting value) is performed. Further, when the player set value is lowered and the lowered volume is actually output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player set value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pipi!”) is output with the increased volume value. , It is made possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when it is increased. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority level referred to above when there are no available channels (for example, “20”, which is the same as the button pressing sound), and the output volume of the effect sound ( The change in the audible volume) can be transmitted more reliably.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, such volume adjustment processing is performed before the game is started because the symbol variation according to the big hit determination has not been performed yet (demo display etc. Not only (period that can be done), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is being executed, the acceptance by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. At times, it is possible to maintain amusement of the game by making it possible to flexibly change the volume value.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, in the situation in which various effect sound channels are assigned in accordance with the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine 1 concerned. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic abnormality or door opening, a process of assigning a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel and outputting it is performed. In addition, at this time, the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped itself, but the effect effect notification process for decreasing the output sound volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and is output, the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Therefore, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state ends, the output can be restored again by appropriately returning the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

However, in the above-described production progress notification process, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped itself, the normal notification is performed as long as the specific notification sound is allocated to the channel ( This means that more channels will be used than in the unannounced state), and there will be no free channels to which sound data has not been assigned before the end of the channel assignment (announced state) of a specific informative sound. Risk tends to be high. Then, if there is a case where there is no empty channel to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation (state of notification) of a specific notification sound, then one of the sound data Since one channel assignment is forced to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (announcement state) of a specific notification sound is finished after that, it is possible to reproduce the sound data that cannot be allocated to the channel and is discarded. It is not possible to do so, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

Regarding the concern about empty channels related to such effect sounds, if the fixed channel method is adopted for the notification sound channel assignment, no direct adverse effect occurs, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the notification sound channel assignment. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be decided from the viewpoint of the design of the game or the effect, so regardless of which channel method is adopted, as the above-mentioned performance progress notification processing It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to ensure cost reduction and improvement in reliability required for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, both the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while the production progress lower notification process is executed, it is lowered to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound is not made variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned sound volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” or “pipi!”) even if there is an operation by the player while the production progress lower notification process is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will be given a margin to reduce the risk of empty channels running out.

However, even though the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the setting of the volume value when a more important effect appears, the setting of the output volume is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the production progress lower notification process is executed due to the false detection or the notification due to the side of the hall (such as opening the door), the volume appropriate value according to the content of the production progress is appropriately set. It is unavoidable that amusement of game is deteriorated because the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the production during the period during which the production progress lower notification process is being performed, if a large deviation occurs between the proper volume value and the actual set value according to the production content, the output volume (acceptable) After the setting change of (listening sound volume) is allowed, it is necessary to accept the operation multiple times in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but this will occupy the channel with the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. Therefore, even though the production progress lowering notification process is finally completed, there is a concern that a lack of free channels will make it impossible to properly output the production sound, which may lower the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while the production progress lower notification process is executed, the value is lowered to a specific value. The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound that has been generated is not changed but is maintained, while the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the sound volume is allowed to be changed. When the production progress notification process (process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected is collectively changed.

According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) in accordance with the production progress while the production progress lower notification process is being executed, a new operation is performed. Even if the above process is not performed, it is possible to collectively change the output volume (audible volume) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected when the production progress lowering notification process is completed. In this way, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period in which the production progress lower notification process is executed, the production progress lower notification process ends. It is expected to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment level until the game is played. Also, immediately after the production progress notification process ends, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple levels, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage of empty channels. Will be preferably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when performing the batch change of the output volume to the player set value when the production progress lowering notification process is finished, the game during the period when the production progress lowering notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the player's set value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output by the sound of a special aspect different from (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more suitably eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the production progress lowering notification process is completed, depending on the number of times the player set value is changed and the player during the period when the production progress lowering notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of operations and the like, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when collectively changing the output volume (audible sound volume) with the end of the production progress notification process. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lowering notification process due to the notification due to an erroneous detection or the convenience of the hall side (such as opening of the door) is finally completed, the proper production is performed due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy.

In the above-described example, when the notification sound according to the door opening detection ends with the door opened state is maintained, when the magnetic abnormality occurs and the notification sound corresponding to this ends, the door opening detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 159). However, if a magnetic anomaly occurs when the alarm sound corresponding to the door open detection is in the output state and the alarm sound corresponding to this ends, the door open detection is not performed even if the door open state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the time remaining as the output time of the interrupted “information sound according to door opening detection”).

When the door is opened, the lamp emits light according to the door open detection, and this lamp emission is continued even after the alarm sound according to the door open detection ends when the door is open. Is desirable. Furthermore, it is desirable that the door frame 3 be continued for a predetermined time even after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state ends.

Even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and if the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is ended while the door open state is maintained, the specific error occurs. It is desirable that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection be output again based on the occurrence of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound according to the door opening detection.

Alternatively, even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and if the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound according to the door opening detection is ended while maintaining the door open state, The notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection based on the occurrence of the specific error may not be output again, and the state where the re-notification is possible may be maintained.

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in such a situation that the abnormality notification sound is output. Is not reflected as the volume. However, it is desirable that when the brightness setting value is changed, the changed brightness is reflected in some of the effect lamps of the effect lamps.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of the production progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible volume) will be described.

FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the content of the production progress lowering notification process for each of the notification states of the pachinko machine 1.

First, referring to FIG. 165, prior to explaining the processing from the execution of the production progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume), referring to FIG. Will be briefly described. Here, for convenience of description, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 155 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 165, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (a first volume suppression mode and a second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression modes of the effect sound, For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) regarding the sound volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” can be changed. Among the possible settings, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "0". Therefore, the degree of suppression of the second volume suppression mode is larger than that of the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this description example, the process related to the output itself is performed but the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as what makes it.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group with high possibility of fraud are detected. When the notification process relating to either of them is executed, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound sound volume) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode on the higher suppression degree side. Moreover, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even when abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound is increased in the second volume suppression mode on the higher suppression side). ) Is not terminated but the processing is continued.

In this example, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound) The period during which the processing for suppressing the sound volume) is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) is played according to the abnormality detection until it is ended. Is set to.

On the other hand, if the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is executed, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first sound volume suppression mode on the lower side of. However, when the notification process relating to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, the time Then, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound sound volume) in the first sound volume suppression mode, which is the side on which the suppression degree is low, is ended.

On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, if the notification processing is performed for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guide, ball-out guide) that belong to the third notification group related to the game guide, Is emphasized and no processing for suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is executed.

In this example, the suppression mode is set to be different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. Is not necessarily different, and the output volume of the effect sound is controlled in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (the volume of an audible sound). However, with respect to the termination condition of the processing to be suppressed, the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do so.

FIG. 166 shows the contents of the process relating to the sound volume adjustment when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated, while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this example of the explanation, the player setting value is made variable by "1" in the range of "1" to "5" by the operation with the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332. The smaller the value is, the smaller the volume of the effect sound is set. In addition, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is set by the player in a state where the above-described suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this description example, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the player's operation.

Now, as shown in FIG. 166(A), the player set value for the volume of the effect sound is "3" of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "60", which is 20 times the output volume. If the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination is not performed and the player is waiting for the start winning, the effect selection left button 331 is pressed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed image 331a and the display image 332a showing the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guide display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that enables recognition of which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. It The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be constantly displayed, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed with the background image changed. When it is present, it may be hidden so that at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and a second volume value display OH2 described later appears when the player operates. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In such a situation as shown in FIG. 166(A), when the operation with the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is incremented by "1" each time the operation is performed. The output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" accordingly. Further, each time the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) is reproduced at the changed volume.

Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the player setting values is “1” to “5” is the current setting value. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 166C) is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

In addition, when the production selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", neither the player setting value nor the output volume of the production sound (audible volume) is lowered, and the game is played. The user setting value remains "1" (the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the production selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable that the output is not audible by setting it to "0". This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is "5".

On the other hand, when the start winning occurs and the big hit determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the decorative pattern SZ changes in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of the change pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound according to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this respect, in the volume adjusting process according to the present embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 166(A) (the period during which the demo display can be performed), but also the variation of the symbols depending on the jackpot determination when the game is started. The player is allowed to accept the game even during the period in which it is being executed. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 166C appears, the volume value can be changed flexibly. As described above, the configuration allows setting changes.

That is, FIG. 166(C) shows the state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 166(B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is 20 times that of “60” → While the setting is changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at the changed volume "80", and the player setting is performed in the second operation. The value is changed from “4” to “5”, and the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is set to “80” → “100”, which is 20 times those, The volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at the changed volume “100”.

Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, the player set value is in the range of “1” to “5”. Then, the second volume value display OH2 indicating which of the present set values is displayed by the gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This is to clarify which current setting value is for the player setting value range "1" to "5", even in a tense situation where more important effects have appeared. The purpose of the present invention is to prevent an operation error such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even if the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical value range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed in blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased/decreased according to the change of the player setting value. The current player set value is displayed by displaying the above.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 166(D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 166(C). After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is hidden and the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (the operation to the production selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the production selection left button 331. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the production selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5") When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately encourage the user not to make an operation error such as repeatedly performing the operation for the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 167, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation and the process related to the notification sound is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment accompanying a thing.

The situation shown in FIG. 167(A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166(A). When a start winning occurs and a big hit determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 167(B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound according to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 167(B), door opening detection that belongs to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and processing relating to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed in response to this. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is being opened") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is performed.

Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed during the variation period of the symbols, the first volume suppressing mode is performed. The production progress lower notification processing for suppressing the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167(B), although the player setting value is maintained at “3” as in the situation in FIG. 167(A), the effect is produced. The output volume of the sound (audible volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player set value). The production contents will be developed based on the volume value.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while such production progress lower notification processing is executed, the first specification The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound that has been lowered to the value (here, "10") is not changed but is maintained at the same time, while the set value by the player regarding the sound volume (player set value) When the change notification of itself is accepted, when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) reflects all the operations up to that point. As described above, the changes are collectively made.

That is, FIG. 167(C) shows the state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 167(B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the production selection right button 332, the output volume of the production sound (audible volume) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the user set value (20 times) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the production selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the production sound remains until the production progress lower notification processing (processing for decreasing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect contents are allowed to proceed with the volume of the first specific value being maintained.

At this time, of the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is the first specific value. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player set value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and since the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by gauge display that the current setting value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player setting value, This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and also in the first volume value display OH1, the numerical value is changed and displayed from "3" to "4".

Also, in the second operation, the player set value itself has changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display OH2, the gauge setting indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" within the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Also on the display OH1, the numerical value is changed and displayed from "4" to "5".

Then, after that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the process relating to the notification sound 4 (door open) and the production progress lower notification process (output volume up to a specific value). 167) and the output volume (audible volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point, as shown in FIG. 167(D). Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" according to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution progress notification process. Since the output volume has changed, the output volume (audible volume) should be “80” or the second operation, which is originally the first specific value (“10” in this case) corresponding to the first operation. Although it should be changed stepwise to “100” according to the above, the first specific value (here, “10”) is collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

In this way, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period in which the production progress lower notification process is executed, the production progress lower notification process ends. It is expected to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment level until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in a plurality of steps immediately after the production progress notification process is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage of empty channels or lack of room. The occurrence of such a situation can be preferably avoided.

Moreover, in this example of explanation, when the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (“10”→“100”) with the completion of the production progress notification process, the output volume changes. Despite that, I'm trying not to assign the volume adjustment completion sound channel. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lowering notification process due to the notification due to an erroneous detection or the convenience of the hall side (such as opening of the door) is finally completed, the proper production is performed due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening are illustrated as the specific states. The end conditions may be different for the production progress lower notification process in the above state.

For example, first, regarding the production progress lower notification process in the state where the door is opened, when the door is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was opened (the door was continuously opened. Will be terminated). However, in any case, when the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (for example, “10”→“100”), the channel of the volume adjustment completion sound is generated despite the change in the output volume. It is desirable not to do the allocation itself.

On the other hand, the production progress lowering notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs does not end only when the state of the magnetic abnormality ends, but is continuously executed until the RAM clear or the power cutoff occurs. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (for example, “10”→“100”) when the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. In this case, Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel allocation itself of the volume adjustment completion sound.

In addition, in the production progress lowering notification process in the state where the door is opened, the display indicating that is made when the player set value is changed, whereas in the production progress lowering notification process in the state in which the magnetic abnormality is generated. Alternatively, when the player set value is changed, the display indicating that effect may not be performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end conditions are different between the production progress lowering notification process when the door is opened and the production progress lowering notification process when the magnetic abnormality is generated. become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted also by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob portion is mainly performed by the hall side, it is not possible to output the volume adjustment completion sound (channel allocation) triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob portion. Is more desirable in order to allow a free channel.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although illustration is omitted, various kinds of effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 in addition to the buttons for volume adjustment (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). Lamps (lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and provided for performance, etc. are applicable, and gaming lamps such as special figure LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting target. ) For brightness adjustment (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (player set value). Also, when the player setting value related to the brightness is lowered or increased, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at the volume value according to the setting value concerning the volume at that time. I have to. Further, the brightness of such a production lamp can be set and changed by an operation by the player in both a state where the symbol is not changed and a state where the symbol is changed.

For the brightness adjustment completion sound, it is desirable to assign channels under the same conditions as the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. In this case, even if the setting value related to the brightness is changed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is confirmed. There will be situations in which sound channel allocation itself is not performed, and situations in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (whether the above-mentioned production progress notification process is being performed) when the setting value related to the brightness is changed, not to the volume. Will be possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

Regarding the player setting value regarding the volume, when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has passed after being controlled by the demo screen) is set, a specific value (for example, “3”) is set without operation by the player. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, “3”) without any operation by the player, a display indicating which of the current setting values is displayed (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value). It is a third party that it is in a situation where the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is decreasing so that neither the value display OH2) nor the output related to the volume adjustment completion sound (channel allocation) is performed. More desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

Also, if a new volume adjustment is performed when the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment being performed is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state will be output even if there is a vacant channel. Assigning a new volume adjustment completion tone to the same channel as this in the way of abrupt termination, and outputting (overwriting and outputting) a new volume adjustment completion tone is more effective in giving a margin to the number of empty channels. desirable.

In addition, when the volume is increased even when the player setting value is at the maximum value, or when the volume is decreased even when the player setting value is at the minimum value. When the operation of is further performed, even if there are free channels, it is possible to allow a sufficient number of free channels by not assigning the volume adjustment completion sound to the channels and outputting it. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but the display indicating the current setting value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) is displayed. Good.

Although the volume adjustment by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is allowed, the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation may allow a period during which the adjustment is not allowed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 168, when the state detection generated in FIG. 167 is not the door opening but the magnetic abnormality, the process related to the notification sound is executed, and the production selection left button 331 or the production selection is performed. It is a figure explaining the content about the processing regarding the sound volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

The situation shown in FIG. 168(A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167(A). When the start winning occurs and the big hit determination is performed in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 168(B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound according to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 168(B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed, Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

Further, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed during the variation period of the symbols, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The production progress lowering notification processing for suppressing the sound output volume (audible sound volume) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 168(B), the player setting value is maintained at “3” as in the situation of FIG. The sound output volume (audible volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0") lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player set value). The effect contents will be developed under the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, also when the production progress lowering notification process according to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated, the second specific value (here, “0 )), the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume (mute here) that is reduced) is maintained without being made variable, while the set value by the player regarding the volume (player set value) itself Change acceptance is permitted, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) is reflected with all the operations up to that point. As described above, the batch changes are made.

That is, FIG. 168(C) shows a state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 168(B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the production selection right button 332, the output volume of the production sound (audible volume) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than the user set value (20 times) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the production selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the production sound remains until the production progress lower notification processing (processing for decreasing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect contents are advanced with the volume of the second specific value maintained.

At this time, of the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is the second specific value. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player set value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and since the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by gauge display that the current setting value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player setting value, This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and also in the first volume value display OH1, the numerical value is changed and displayed from "3" to "4".

Also, in the second operation, the player set value itself has changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display OH2, the gauge setting indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" within the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Also on the display OH1, the numerical value is changed and displayed from "4" to "5".

Incidentally, in this explanation example, in the situation shown in FIG. 168(C), the magnetic detection itself is already in the non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the second sound volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The production progress lower notification processing for suppressing the above is continuously executed.

Then, after that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed after the magnetic detection while the volume adjustment guide display OAH has returned to the state of being executed again, and the production progress lower notification process (specification of output volume) is performed. 168), the output volume (audible volume) reflects all the operations up to that point, as shown in FIG. 168(D). Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" according to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution progress notification process. Since the output volume has changed, the output volume (audible volume) should normally be “80” or the second operation from the second specific value (“0” in this case) corresponding to the first operation. Although it should be changed stepwise to “100” according to, the second specific value (here, “0”) is collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

Note that, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 168(D), the game board side effect display device is provided. The display in the display area of 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic anomaly, when the notification sound is ended, the notification sound by the liquid crystal display and the lamp are continued, and the effect sound is removed from the suppression target, and the notification sound is changed according to the player set value. The output sound is reflected in the output volume, whereas in the notification processing according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the effect sound remains suppressed even if the notification by the LCD display and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, it is possible to allow the player to accept a change in the set value (player set value) even during the period in which the production progress lowering notification process is being executed. It is expected that a decrease in the entertainment level of the game until the end of the production progress notification process is suppressed. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in a plurality of steps immediately after the production progress notification process is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage of empty channels or lack of room. The occurrence of such a situation can be preferably avoided.

Moreover, in this description example, even when the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (“0”→“100”) with the end of the production progress lowering notification process associated with the magnetic abnormality, the output is performed. The channel allocation of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed even if the volume changes. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lowering notification process caused by the notification due to the false detection is finally completed, it is not possible to enjoy the proper production due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of.

As for the alarm sound according to the opening of the door such as “Ping Pong Ping Pong” and the alarm sound according to the magnetic abnormality such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected”, as shown in Figure 155, Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the 3rd byte of the value, it is always reproduced at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player set value.

Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) is executed, the production progress notification processing is not executed. Therefore, during execution of those notifications, the player setting Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) can be appropriately changed. However, as for these notification sounds 6 and 7, since "1" (0x1FF) is set at the 3rd byte of the volume initial value as shown in FIG. 155, regardless of the player setting value, It will always be played at the volume set by the initial value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the 3rd byte of the volume initial value, It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

Further, regarding each processing described in FIG. 167 and FIG. 168, not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also in the state before the symbol variation is started, or the state is detected across the timing of starting and ending the symbol variation. Even when the notification processing according to is executed, the notification processing may be executed in the same manner.

Further, in each of the processes described in FIGS. 167 and 168, after the production progress lowering notification process is finished, as in the case before the production progress lowering notification process is started, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is changed accordingly. Then, every time the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) is reproduced at the changed volume.

Further, although the process described in FIG. 167 and the process described in FIG. 168 are made to have different effect sound suppression modes during the period during which the production progress lower notification process is being performed, the suppression mode is not always required. The output volume of the effect sound (audible sound) may be changed in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the (volume of sound) may be performed.

Further, in the production progress notification process, the output volume of various game sounds (audible volume) is suppressed, but among these game sounds, the game ball is in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Some game sounds, such as sounds (winning sounds) that are played in response to winning a prize, may be played back with the volume set to the initial value without being affected by volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily understand whether or not the game is being continued despite the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, a part of the sound (prize sound) reproduced in response to the game ball winning the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 when the production progress lower notification process is being executed It is desirable to reproduce the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the production progress lowering notification process is not executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 155 to 168, a channel-saving type control structure that can appropriately notify abnormality contents and the like with only a single channel regarding various notification sounds is used, so that there is no available channel. (Situation in which the number of empty channels is 0) It was proposed that the device be technically devised in terms of how difficult it is to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. There is still concern about the appearance of the above-described unintended sound output mode.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, with respect to the channel assignment of the effect sound, various technical factors are set at a stage before the situation where the channels are not vacant (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to devise. Hereinafter, various technical devices provided for output of the effect sound will be sequentially described. When adopting these technical ideas as the pachinko machine 1, it is not always necessary to adopt the above-mentioned channel-saving type control structure capable of appropriately notifying an abnormal content or the like with only a single channel regarding various notification sounds. You don't have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, both the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Further, when the automatic channel system is adopted, the control based on the above-mentioned priority does not necessarily have to be adopted, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all the channels are in use. Good. The examples described below can be implemented in an appropriate combination.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the prize, the channel to which the sound data is assigned has no free space. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated due to the inability to output the special sound.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific act such as “act of praying by holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” is performed. It can be detected by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action is performed, for example, a sound (output sound with a volume of 0) corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound, which does not show any expectation, is given. By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is maintained so as not to be used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, as a result of the game ball being received in the specific winning opening, for example, even when special performance conditions such as a big hit confirmation effect and a prefetch effect are established. At this time, no special sound corresponding to the effect is assigned to the channel. Then, after the completion of the channel reservation process, the special sound is assigned to the channel and the effect of reproducing the special sound can be executed (post-notification effect).

That is, in this case, at least one of the channels to which the special sound can be assigned is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the lack of channels even though the special result is obtained by the determination according to the winning.

Regarding the special sound, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when the jackpot is determined in accordance with the jackpot determination according to the prize, a production mode that is highly expected in the rendering determination based on the jackpot determination according to the prize , A high-anticipation notice effect that is performed while the reach effect is being executed) is selected, or a high-anticipation notification sound that is executed when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning It is possible to exemplify a pre-reading notification sound executed as an effect, but the point is that when a special judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the predetermined judgment means according to the winning, it is assigned to the channel and output. Anything can be used.

FIG. 169 shows that before a special sound (for example, cuin) that matches the so-called look-ahead effect is output as a “special sound” when a game ball wins the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, The channel to which the special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound is not output (more accurately, a state in which the determination to output the special sound (the determination to perform the prefetching effect) has not been made yet). 7 is a time chart showing an example of a channel reservation process that is reserved in advance from time to time.

First, before describing an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general prefetching effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a win is generated in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. The first/second starting mouth winning process (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 104 is performed. In the first/second starting opening winning process (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the starting opening (first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of holdings of the corresponding special symbol by 1 or the like is performed.

Further, as also described above, in the first/second starting mouth winning process (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), the pre-reading process for executing the pre-reading effect on the winning opening side is executed (FIG. 105: step S5245, FIG. 106: step S5255).

Here, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is, as described above, an effect that suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In this first special figure pre-reading process, the information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side and the like (information regarding the win for the pre-reading determination, the symbol type for the pre-reading determination Information, information regarding a variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group in the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group in the symbol types, may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol, as described above. It is a production to do. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect, effect contents, and the like, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group in the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group in the symbol types, may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the determination process as to whether or not the jackpot is won and the variation in the symbol have not been digested, and the information obtained from the prefetch command (when they are held) ( Expectation as to whether or not the jackpot judgment that is put on hold obtains a special result based on the information related to the prefetch effect on the first special map side and the information related to the prefetch effect on the second special figure side) A look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a start winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to the hold display and the prefetch effect according to the start winning. Then, after this, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-described variation start processing, variation pattern setting processing, variation processing, large hit game processing, small hit establishment time shown in FIG. 167. Do any of the processing. In the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue with a relatively low degree of expectation and red with a relatively high degree of expectation), a new hold display corresponding to the start winning is performed. Whether or not to perform a specific pre-reading effect that suggests the pre-reading expectation depending on whether it is displayed, and a mode according to the result of the determination (for example, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not performed in blue, red, or In this case, the processing for performing the hold display is performed in the normal display mode). As a result, until the big hit determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, the look-ahead effect in which the big hit expectation degree is preliminarily suggested by the display mode is executed.

By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display for confirming a big hit) appears in a mode with a high degree of expectation, a special sound (for example, a cuin) may be output in accordance with the execution of the read-ahead. Many. However, such a special sound (pre-reading effect) is reproduced at a game ball winning timing that occurs irregularly, so a game ball winning occurs at a timing when there is no space in the channel and the pre-reading determination is made. If there is a chance to win, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even if the look-ahead judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode with high expectation (blue or red). It is feared that the interest in the game will decline without doing so.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 169, as described above, prior to outputting the special sound (prefetch effect) by winning the game ball in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the special sound is output. Channels that can be assigned are in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more accurately, the determination that the special sound is output (the determination that the pre-reading effect is performed) has not been made). It is possible to execute the channel reservation process that is reserved in.

For example, at timing tY10 shown in FIG. 169, the number of jackpot determinations (holding number) that are currently in the hold state is 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Assuming that the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed under normal circumstances, the player normally wins the game ball at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Perform the game (handle operation) as described. As a result, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, a maximum of four jackpot determinations are put on hold in accordance with those winnings, and the jackpot determinations are performed. Each time the game is put on hold, processing relating to hold display and pre-reading effect according to winning is performed.

Here, as the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, in the winning order to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first winning (first hold) and the second winning ( When the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) occur, the prefetch effect process is performed at each timing when the holding occurs. Then, when the pre-reading determination is won and the pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cuin) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the winning and the pre-reading determination is performed), and the specific mode The hold display with "" appears.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed is, for example, in the order of winning the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ( If the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) occur, the prefetch effect process is performed at each timing when the holding occurs. However, when the pre-reading judgment is won and the pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cuin) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the winning timing), but is maintained in the execution waiting state. The special sound (for example, cuin) is output after waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation processing to become empty. It should be noted that the hold display having a specific mode may appear at the timing of outputting a special sound (for example, a cueine), or may appear at the timing when the hold held in the prefetch determination occurs. Good. However, when the hold display having a specific mode is made to appear at the timing when the hold held in the prefetch determination occurs, the readahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed and the case when the channel reservation process is not executed It is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red color) can appear as the specific aspect in any of the prefetch effects.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a hand is placed in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (not shown) such as an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor is displayed. Detects this as an object, and triggers the channel reservation processing when triggered by this.

For example, at a timing tY11 shown in FIG. 169, the player is holding the hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is a state detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a prayer mode background display is displayed in which the "shrine torii" is displayed as a background image, and a "countdown countdown" is displayed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of allocating "voice" to a predetermined channel and reproducing it is performed. It should be noted that the countdown voice starts, for example, from "30" and is counted down every one second, and is terminated when it reaches "0". In addition, even during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this way, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, effects in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern are continuously executed.

However, for the "shrine torii (prayer mode background display)" in such a display area and the "countdown sound" in a predetermined channel, the player holds his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can be triggered by this (triggered by detection by the sensor), and is not related to the production contents (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is being advanced within the pattern change that is being executed. It does not depend on the result of the jackpot judgment at all. Therefore, the display and the sound generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to other contents as appropriate, but by performing such a process, a predetermined time (30 seconds) is maintained. It becomes possible to maintain the channel in the use state (here, the use state by "countdown voice" that does not show any expectation), and until the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, It is possible to avoid a situation in which another sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and which is not known when it will end (channel reservation processing).

Then, until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way, the player plays the game ball so that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 169, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur. Then, the processing related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold is generated. However, as described above, while the "countdown sound" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the result of the determination according to the winning is that the determination result (prefetch winning) indicates that the prefetch effect is performed. Even if it is obtained, the special sound (for example, cuin) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a state of waiting for execution. In this way, the special sound (for example, cuin) in the execution waiting state is output as a post-notification sound output after the winning a prize at a timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tY11. Become.

On the other hand, the player holds his hand and starts playing the "countdown sound" (channel reservation process) by his/her will until the end thereof (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no winning, or if a special determination result is not obtained (the pre-reading effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 when the reproduction of the “countdown sound” ends is reached, it is special. No sound is played.

According to such a configuration, the player holds the hand and starts the reproduction (channel reservation process) of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation process) by himself or herself until the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If a special prize is generated and a special judgment result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, the special sound (cuin) is not output at that time and the “countdown voice” is output. It will be executed as a post-notification effect that is output aiming at a timing when the channel is finished and a channel becomes vacant. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the absence of a vacant channel even though the special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained. Further, even if a special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 and tY12, a special sound (cuin) corresponding to the special determination result is generated at at least one channel. Since the target tY12 is reproduced, if it is only necessary to confirm whether or not the special sound (cuein) is generated at the timing tY12, the special determination result (prefetching) can be performed within a relatively long time of the timings tY11 to tY12. You will be able to easily recognize whether or not you have won.

When outputting a special sound (cuin) as such a post notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels in the idle state at the timing tY12 and reproduced. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively allocated to the predetermined channel to which the "countdown sound" has been allocated, the channel reservation processing and the post notification effect corresponding thereto can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it can be realized, and it can be said that it is useful in that it is possible to broaden the range of production in the limited number of channels.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the prayer mode background display in which "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" is ended and the reproduction of the special sound (cuine) are performed. The display is continued even after the end timing comes. This is based on the fact that a person who requests the execution of such channel reservation processing tends to hold his/her hand so that the channel reservation processing is generated again each time the number of holdings becomes small. Considering that it seems that there is a benefit when you hold your hand up when "Torii of Shinto shrine" is displayed as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of the later notification becomes higher). Yes, the prayer mode background display is continuously displayed until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a button release operation). However, in reality, even if the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image or the "Torii of the shrine" is not displayed as the background image, the player holds his hand up. When this is detected, only the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the assigned state for the predetermined time by the predetermined sound (countdown sound) is performed, so the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" is ended. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuine) as the notification sound is ended.

Further, when the player holds his hand again and this is detected during the period of timings tY11 to tY12, the reproduction time of the "countdown sound" until the timing when a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the detection again. May be extended so that when the timing comes, a special sound corresponding to the look-ahead winning is output.

In addition, such prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that the player's specific action is detected even when the symbol fluctuation is not changing, and when the symbol fluctuation is not changing. You may do so. Further, the specific action may be an action targeted by a contact-type sensor such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to an action targeted by a non-contact type sensor.

However, when the special sound (kyuin) is output as such a post notification sound, compared to the case where the special sound (kyun) is output at the time of winning, the first winning (first hold) and the second winning ( Preliminary winning because it becomes difficult to know which of the 3rd winning (3rd pending) and 4th winning (4th pending) holds the special judgment result (prefetching winning) It is feared that the enjoyment of the game will be reduced due to the holding being exhausted without recognizing that the holding has been made. On the other hand, the content reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, "kyun"), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), and the third prize (second hold). It is also possible to make it different depending on which of the four preliminary winnings (third hold) or the fourth winning (fourth hold). However, with this, the content that has changed from the sound (here, "kyuin") that is played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not being executed can be understood as the pre-read win itself. There is concern that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a special determination result is obtained at any timing between the timings tY11 and tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetch win) is obtained, processing for varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, “cuein”) started at timing tY12 is performed.

For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 169, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, "cuein") is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 170, in the case where the special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) that is won at a relatively early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. Assuming that, in this case, the special sound is played for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. It should be noted that here, the time required to play the "Quine" once is 3 seconds, and when the special sound (here, "Qine") is played for 6 seconds, the "Quine" is played twice. Then, a sound of a form such as "Cuein" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 171, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained in the third winning (third hold) that is won at a relatively late timing from timing tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Note that, here, since the time required to reproduce the "Quine" once is 3 seconds, when the special sound (here, "Quein") is reproduced for 9 seconds, the "Quein" is 3 seconds. It is played back a number of times, and a sound in the form of "cuein cuin" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 172, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that is won at an extremely late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Note that, here, since the time required to reproduce the "quine" once is 3 seconds, when the special sound (here, "quine") is reproduced for 12 seconds, the "quine" is 4 times. It is played back batchwise, and a sound in the form of "cuein cuin cuin cuin" is output.

According to such a configuration, when the special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to understand that the special determination result (prefetch win) has been obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12, and it is possible to understand the timing. It is possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetch win) has been obtained with the winning. In this example, as the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is shorter, it is suggested that the special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained by the winning that occurs at the earlier timing of the timings tY11 to tY12. Therefore, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is, the more it is suggested that the special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained by the winning that occurs at the later timing of the timings tY11 to tY12. .

In this example, it may be assumed that only the first prize is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the prize, but in this case as well, according to the timing when the prize is generated. Then, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is made variable as described above. However, instead of this, in view of the fact that the maximum number of holdings is limited to four, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first winning, the special sound is set to "QUIN" 1 regardless of the winning timing. If the special play result is set for the 2nd prize and the special judgment result is obtained for the 2nd prize, the special sound is set for the 2 play time for "QUIN" regardless of the winning timing, and the special judgment is made for the 3rd prize. If a result is obtained, the special sound is set to the reproduction time for three "Cuein" regardless of the winning timing, and if a special judgment result is obtained at the fourth winning, the special sound is generated regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the reproduction time for four "cues".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the prefetching win is obtained, the "cuin" is played as the special sound. However, the prefetching judgment at the time of winning the prize makes the first determination result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation). The reproduction content as the special sound may be changed depending on which of the low prefetching win) and the second determination result (for example, the prefetching win with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained. For example, when the first judgment result (for example, the pre-reading winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment when the prize is won, the “cuin” is played as a special sound, while the pre-reading when the prize is won. When the second determination result (prefetching win with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the determination, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 and tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading win was obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading win with relatively low expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading win with relatively high expectation) It will also be possible to make predictions about which one was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce “cuin” or “dokan” as a special sound according to the determination result even in the prefetching effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the first judgment result (preliminary winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) which is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. ) Has been obtained, and the second judgment result (preliminary winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) when the prize is won at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, after the timing tY12, the special sound is reproduced in the "cuin" mode for 3 seconds, and then the special sound is reproduced in the "dokan" mode for another 9 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cuin” mode is 3 seconds, the first prize () that is won at an extremely early timing from timing tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (prefetch winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the prefetch determination in the (first hold). In addition, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3+9 seconds), it was possible to pre-read in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was awarded at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Further, in response to the fact that the first judgment result (preliminary winning with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) which is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the "dokan" mode after the end of the "cuin" for the first time, the second look-ahead judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) It becomes possible to predict that the judgment result (prefetch winning with relatively low expectation) is obtained.

Alternatively, when the first determination result (prefetch winning on the first special map side) is obtained by the prefetch determination according to the winning in the first starting opening 2002, “cuin” is reproduced as a special sound. , "Dokan" may be reproduced as a special sound when the second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special map side) is obtained by the prefetch determination according to the winning of the second starting opening 2004. .. In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the first starting opening 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the second starting opening 2004 is performed. Depending on whether there is a sound, it is desirable to play "cuin" or "doccan" as a special sound.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 173 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cuin” mode is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 are The first prize (first suspension), which was won at an extremely early timing in the interval, is a prize for the first starting opening 2002 side, and the first judgment result (the first special map side for the first special map side) in the pre-reading judgment corresponding thereto. It becomes possible to predict that the prefetched winning) has been obtained. Also, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3+9 seconds), the pre-reading determination is made even in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) when the prize is won at an extremely late timing. It can be grasped. Further, according to the fact that the first judgment result (pre-reading winning on the first special map side) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) which is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the "dokan" mode after the end of the "cuin" for the first time, the fourth win (fourth hold) is on the second starting opening 2004 side. It is possible to predict that the second winning judgment result (pre-reading winning on the second special map side) has been obtained by the pre-reading judgment corresponding to the winning.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of the channel control in the case where the special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is received in the specific winning opening while executing the channel reservation process. The case where the prefetching win in the prefetching effect is obtained is illustrated. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173 is, in essence, a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that has the technical characteristics of itself that can avoid the occurrence of channel shortage and the inability to output when a special sound is output when a determination result is obtained Therefore, it is obvious that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetch winning in the prefetch effect.

[Channel usage restriction]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the prize, the channel to which the sound data is assigned has no free space. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated due to the inability to output the special sound.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of free channels is monitored as the game progresses, and when the number becomes less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds is played. The rate of limiting the execution of processing related to output is increased (channel usage limitation). That is, in this case, at least a part of the game sound is restricted from being executed before the number of empty channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of empty channels approaches 0. Since the rate of limitation becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of empty channels to zero.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, every time the design variation corresponding to the big hit determination in the suspended state is exhausted (every time when the start condition is satisfied), the exhausted design variation is changed. Determine the availability of channels during the execution period. As a result, when there is room in the availability of the channel, the rate of limiting the channel usage (channel restriction level) is lowered until the symbol variation targeted for determination is at least ended, and the availability of the channel is reduced. When there is no margin in the situation, increase the ratio (channel restriction level) that channel usage is restricted until the symbol fluctuation that is the determination target is at least ended, and channel restriction with such symbol fluctuation as one unit. By executing it, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation that is the determination target is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel limit level, and the higher the level value, the higher the rate of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound.

FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for the processing relating to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

Now, it is assumed that it is determined that the pattern command (variation pattern) is received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 174, as the processing of step S3101, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation ends.

Then, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern in the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period in the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the pattern variation to the start of the reach effect, the symbol Specify "X", which is the number of free channels (minimum free channel number) based on the timing when the channel becomes the most free within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the design without starting the reach effect) To do. Further, as the process of step S3103, based on the type of the effect pattern in the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel is set within the period in the latter half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol fluctuation). "Y", which is the number of free channels (minimum free channel number) based on the timing when the free space is most empty, is specified.

However, when the production pattern in which the symbol production is stopped without starting the reach production from the symbol variation start is selected, the symbol variation corresponding to the “second half of variation” is not performed. In this case, the next step processing is performed without performing the processing of step S3103 itself, or the maximum numerical value that can be set as the number of free channels “Y” in the processing of step S3103 (a numerical value that is not subject to channel restriction) Will be set.

Then, as the processing of step S3104, the "X" specified in the processing of step S3102 is compared with the "Y" specified in the processing of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y". Based on the value on the side where the minimum number of free channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of free channels), the channel restriction level is set at least until the symbol variation targeted for determination is completed. As a result, during the period from the start to the end of the variation of the symbol that is the determination target, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be limited based on the set channel limit level. It is expected that the number of vacant channels will not be reduced to 0 easily and that the deterioration of the amusement of the game due to the appearance of an unintended effect will be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the "minimum number of free channels" used for the determination is divided into the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103), and each is specified. I have decided. This is because the production contents in the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of the pattern change to the start of the reach effect) are shared by multiple effect patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. .

However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the setting of the channel restriction level does not necessarily have to be specified separately in the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation, and the effect from the start to the stop of the symbol fluctuation The number of empty channels (minimum empty channel number) may be specified with the pattern as one unit, with reference to the timing when the channel becomes the most empty in the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

Further, the "minimum number of free channels" here means a sound automatically generated when the production pattern (production content) to be determined progresses (for BGM-related and symbol stop-related according to the big hit determination, big hit determination. It shows only how many channels will be left free when they are assigned to each channel. Therefore, a button pressing sound (such as a sound generated by a button operation), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (a sound accompanying a winning in a general winning opening), a holding winning sound (first The production pattern (production content) to be determined, such as the sound associated with winning the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004) and the normal electric sound (the sound associated with the production according to the determination of the normal pattern), is developed. It does not include various sounds that are not necessarily executed by simply making a judgment.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the value of the channel limit level set separately for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104 and showing an example of the content of the limit set separately for the channel limit level. .

As shown in FIG. 175, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, first, as a sound to be restricted in channel use, among the various types of game sounds, a block winning sound (general winning opening is won. Sound), a winning award sound (a sound associated with winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004), a general electric effect sound (a sound accompanying an effect according to the determination of a normal symbol), and a volume adjustment completion sound. Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation that there is no room in the empty channel, among various game sounds, at least these game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) Channel usage restrictions may occur.

More specifically, when the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, the channel limit level is set in the process of step S3104 based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Set to "0". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which a symbol variation in which there is a leeway in the free channel is executed, and the sound (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) that is subject to channel usage restriction None of them are limited, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation, the block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and the first starting opening 2002 or during the execution of the symbol variation. If there is a winning in the second starting opening 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the normal prize corresponding to the effect is given. The electric effect sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel to be reproduced, and when the volume adjustment is performed during execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is assigned to the predetermined empty channel and reproduced.

On the other hand, when the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction is performed based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Set the level to "1". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a slight fluctuation in the free channels in the symbol fluctuation, and four sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, ordinary electric effect sound, volume control completion) that are subject to channel usage restriction are completed. Of the sound), the channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but this is predetermined for the block winning sound. It will be processed so that it is not assigned to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data according to the winning in the general winning opening and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Set to "2". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a relatively small amount of symbol variation in the vacant channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, ordinary sound effect, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel usage restriction Of the completion sound), a channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds, a block winning sound and a pending winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restriction on the block winning sound, when there is a winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation, when this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the winning. Although the payout of the prize balls for the minutes and the above-mentioned first and second starting mouth winning processing are performed, the reserved winning sound is processed so as not to be allocated to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and not to play the reserved winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel limit level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Is set to "3". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which a symbol variation with no margin in the empty channel is executed, and the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion) that are subject to channel usage restriction Channel usage restriction (100% restriction) is generated for all sounds. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restriction on the block winning sound, and the restriction on the pending winning sound, even if the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation Will not be assigned to a predetermined free channel. Also, when there is a volume adjustment operation by the player during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment itself according to this is performed, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, for the POU effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to them, and do not play the POU effect sound or the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

According to such a configuration, as the game progresses, the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is assigned is less than the predetermined number, and when the symbol variation is executed, the number of the empty channels is set to the predetermined number. Compared to the case where a symbol variation that does not become less than a number is executed, the rate of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds of various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, some of the game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Execution of the related process is restricted, and the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, so the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol fluctuation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be suppressed appropriately.

Further, in the above-described configuration, among the various types of game sounds, the sound that is the target of channel use limitation is not the "playing sound related to the jackpot determination" that is the most important in the pachinko machine 1, but the other "accompanied by a prize". ", "Sound related to normal judgment", and "Sound related to volume adjustment". That is, even if the channel use restriction is generated during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation is not limited and is suitably executed, so during the execution of the symbol variation. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment appeal when the use of the channel is restricted.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types are prepared as types of sounds that are candidates for restriction of channel use among various game sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). , As the channel limit level becomes higher (the smaller the number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation is), the number of types of sounds subject to the channel use limit is increased. However, a method of restricting the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0 and increasing the execution restriction ratio as the number of empty channels decreases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 176 may be adopted.

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction contents separately set for the channel restriction levels.

As shown in FIG. 176, in this another example, according to the “minimum number of empty channels” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104, the channel is not used. A limited lottery will be conducted regarding whether or not to apply restrictions. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for restriction of channel use are not prepared and a judgment result indicating that a restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) For example), the restriction process for channel usage is performed only for ().

For example, in this another example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability that the judgment result indicating that the restriction will be applied is obtained is 0/100, and the channel usage The restriction process related to the use of the channel is not executed for the specific game sound to be restricted (for example, the volume adjustment completion sound).

However, when the channel limit level becomes 1 or more, the probability that a determination result indicating that the limit is applied will be obtained in the limit lottery becomes higher as the value becomes larger, and the channel limit level becomes 1 (minimum available channel). If the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 25/100, and if the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of empty channels is 2 to 5), the probability is 50/100. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the same probability is 100/100. Then, in this another example, when the determination result indicating that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, the restriction process for the channel use is executed with the same content regardless of the channel restriction level.

Even with such a configuration, as the game progresses, the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number, and when a symbol variation is executed, the number of empty channels is reduced. Compared with the case where a symbol variation that is not less than the predetermined number is executed, the rate of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit to the execution of the process related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution limitation is increased as the number of free channels is reduced and the number of free channels decreases, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol fluctuation is preferable. It will be expected to be suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not the specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum empty channel during the execution period of the symbol variation. It becomes possible to estimate the possibility that the number will be exhausted, and it becomes possible to promote the game progress (prize or button operation) commensurate with the estimation.

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 or FIG. 176, the minimum number of empty channels is specified from the occurrence status of the advance notice effects after executing the determination processing for various advance notice effects based on the effect pattern, and the specified minimum free period is determined. Although the channel limit level is set based on the number of channels, it is not limited to this. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance for each effect pattern how many sounds will be assigned to channels at the same time during the symbol variation period, the likelihood of channel shortage is classified in advance for each effect pattern. I'll do it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the rate of channel restriction may be set to be higher as the lack of channels in which the effect pattern is pre-classified is higher. That is, in this case, when a specific type of effect pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, many buttons are not actually used and various winnings do not occur, so many channels are not used and empty channels are used. Even if there is a margin in the number of symbols, the situation in which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound may be restricted during the execution of the symbol fluctuation, but the empty channel can be obtained only by performing a simple process. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to prevent the number of symbols from becoming 0, and even when such a process is executed, "the number of empty channels during symbol change is relatively large. When the number is small, the execution ratio of the process related to the output of the game sound is increased, and when the number of empty channels is relatively large during the symbol change, the execution ratio of the process related to the output of the game sound is restricted. However, since it is a phenomenon that does not cause any discomfort from the player's side, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained appropriately. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is limited, it is possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause a shortage of channels.

In addition, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and in other examples thereof, the channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is provided while the effect contents are advanced within one symbol variation. It is also possible to change the restriction level and execute the channel restriction according to the respective channel restriction levels. Or, when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, the channel limit level is kept unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations, and the channel limit level is set. Channel restriction may be executed accordingly.

By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, the sound to be restricted in channel use is not the most important “draft sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1 but other sound. Only "sounds associated with winning prizes", "effect sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment" will be adopted. However, since these sounds include those that occur less frequently than the effect sounds, in order to realize the limiting process that can more effectively secure the vacant channel, “a big hit judgment is involved. It is desirable to adopt "effect sound" as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction process is executed for "effect sound related to jackpot determination", there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, resulting in a lack of excitement. If the big hit symbol is stopped in some cases, the interest in the game may be reduced.

In this respect, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, only the “production effect relating to the pattern variation which is held and held in the future” among the “production sounds relating to the jackpot determination” If the use of the sound channel is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as the specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 176 or another example thereof), for the effect related to the result of the symbol variation being executed. As a result, it is possible to adopt a production sound that has a high frequency of occurrence as a restriction target without applying any restriction.

For example, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, when a winning is generated in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is put on hold, the holding is usually held. A determination process is performed as to whether or not the prefetching effect is performed with respect to the jackpot determination in the state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination in the holding state is to win the jackpot is performed. Become.

However, in a situation where the number of used channels is large and there is anxiety about vacancy (such as a state where a symbol variation with the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1 is being executed), the channel usage restriction target is "on hold". Yes, the effect sound corresponding to the effect on the design variation that will be consumed in the future" is targeted, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 is won, and the jackpot judgment corresponding to this is suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination process for the prefetch effect itself is not executed for the jackpot determination that is put on hold, and both the prefetch effect and the effect sound corresponding thereto are not performed. In this case, the pre-reading effect is not only the hold change in the game board side effect display device 1600, but also a predetermined effect change (effect sound according to the pre-reading determination, even in a different effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.). When it is executed as an effect that causes a production change that is performed in accordance with a suspension change, etc., not only the suspension change in the game board side production display device 1600 but also different production means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.) It is more desirable to prevent the predetermined effect change from being performed in order to suppress a feeling of strangeness (effect shift) when a specific effect sound is not assigned as a countermeasure against a channel shortage.

According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety arises in the vacancy, the channel portion that is applied to the effect regarding the future symbol change that is not the symbol change being executed is being executed. Because it becomes possible to supply to the effect sound related to the fluctuation of the effect, it does not have any adverse effect on the effect related to the result of the fluctuation of the symbol being executed, and the effect sound with high frequency of occurrence is limited. You will be able to. In addition, the production to be restricted is only the "production related to future symbol changes in the unexecuted state", and even if it is a symbol fluctuation that is subject to restriction, it will be subject to restriction when this is held down in the future. Since the effect during symbol fluctuation (effect content according to effect pattern) that is not set is always executed, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game enjoyment due to the effect being restricted.

Further, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, processing is performed so that a specific sound is not output when a “predetermined effect condition” that causes concern about the number of empty channels is satisfied. did. However, even if the "predetermined effect condition" is not satisfied and the number of free channels is not a concern, the process of limiting the specific sound to not be output under the predetermined condition May be executed. For example, when a specific condition different from the “predetermined effect condition” is satisfied, an effect state (effect period) in which the specific sound cannot be output over a plurality of symbol variations is generated. With such a configuration, a special effect state (effect period) in which the number of vacant channels has a margin over a plurality of symbol variations appears, and in the special effect state (effect period), only that much. It becomes possible to perform other effects more positively.

In addition, when the "effect sound related to jackpot determination" is the target of restriction, if only the effect sound of the effects (effect display and effect sound) is subject to the restriction (no sound output), the effect lacks excitement. However, in the above configuration, when the number of used channels becomes large and there is anxiety in the free space, the jackpot determination and the jackpot determination are put on hold. Sometimes, the judgment process for prefetch effect is not executed and neither the effect display nor the effect sound related to prefetch effect is performed. Therefore, the special result (prefetch win) cannot be obtained in the prefetch judgment. Only the same effect situation as that when the pre-reading effect is not executed (the hold display when the pre-reading effect is not executed) is achieved, and it is possible to preferably avoid the deterioration of the game interest due to the execution of the effect lacking excitement.

When the "effect sound related to the jackpot determination" is subject to the restriction, the determination process for the prefetching effect itself is not executed when the prize is hit and the jackpot determination is put on hold. I tried not to do both with sound, but it is not limited to this. For example, when "effect sound related to jackpot determination" is the target of restriction, determination processing for prefetching effect is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until the specific timing during the symbol variation comes Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, and limits them, and when the specific timing during the symbol change comes, only the effect display and the effect sound are limited. May be canceled and this may be performed. That is, in this case, the effect display regarding the prefetch effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing) different from when the "effect sound related to the jackpot determination" is not set as a restriction target (normal time), and is special. Since the pre-reading effect will be executed after it is displayed as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect can be achieved while suppressing the deterioration of the amusement of the game caused by not outputting the effect sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform it suitably.

In addition, as processing related to future production under conditions where channel use is restricted,
・While a prize is won, the judgment process for the prefetch effect is performed, but even if a special result is obtained, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the prefetch effect are not executed until the specific timing during the pattern change arrives. By limiting these, when the specific timing during the symbol change comes, only the restriction on the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is released and the configuration is performed. age,
When the prize is won, the judgment process for the prefetching effect is not executed, and neither the effect display regarding the prefetching effect nor the effect sound is performed, and the game is advanced when the second restricted process is adopted. Among them, the number of free channels in the state where the sound is not assigned is less than a predetermined number when the symbol variation is executed, compared to the case where the number of empty channels is not less than the predetermined number, the symbol variation is executed. As a result, the rate at which either the first restricted process or the second restricted process is executed is increased, and within the symbol fluctuation that is in the execution state when the first restricted process is performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in "A", and the expected value of the number of channels used within the symbol fluctuation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process is performed is "B". At this time, it is more desirable that either of the first restricted process and the second restricted process be executed so that the relationship becomes “A<B”. In other words, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and more anxiety arises due to the vacancy, not only the first restricted process in which only the effect sound is restricted, but both the effect display and the effect sound are restricted. Since the rate of channel restriction is increased by the second restricted process described above, it is expected that anxiety when the number of used channels is increased can be suppressed more appropriately.

As described above, the sounds assigned to the finite channels are the first group sound whose effect volume can be adjusted by the operation acceptance by the player, and the effect sound volume which cannot be adjusted by the operation acceptance by the player. At least it can be distinguished from the second group sound (such as an error sound). In this respect, when the "predetermined effect condition" that causes concern about the number of empty channels is satisfied, it is necessary to limit only the sounds that are distinguished to the first group sound so that the pachinko machine 1 becomes abnormal. It is desirable to appropriately execute the processing when it occurs.

Further, the finite channels are divided into a plurality of groups including at least a first channel group to which effect sounds can be assigned and a second channel group to which a notification sound (error sound) different from effect sounds can be assigned. If it is the one, “the number of empty channels in the state where the sound is not assigned in the first channel group is reduced to less than the predetermined number, the symbol effect display execution period is empty in the first channel group. Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number, the ratio that the specific sound is not newly assigned to the channels of the first channel group is high” As described above, it is desirable to perform the processing only for the first channel group in terms of more reliably performing the processing when an error occurs and reducing the processing load.

Further, as described above, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, “the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is assigned is reduced to less than the predetermined number Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio of the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel is high." There are features. In this respect, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as "a performance state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel", As soon as the execution period relating to the symbol effect display ends, the "effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel" can be canceled (ended). On the other hand, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “an effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel”, A production state (a production state in which a specific production sound is not newly assigned to a channel) is always continued over a plurality of symbol variations including the symbol production display even after the symbol production display is finished. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as "an effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel". Although the ratio is low, once this is processed, the effect state is not finished for a long period of time, and the specific effect sound cannot be output during that time. In other words, in this case, when "a production state in which a specific production sound is not newly assigned to a channel" appears, special production characteristics (the symbol production display is "reduce the number of empty channels to less than a predetermined number" Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

Further, in the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel, a specific image that can be displayed only in the effect state may be displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize that the "specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel" by displaying the specific image.

In addition, the specific image is allowed to appear at a plurality of timings in one symbol variation, and if it is displayed as an image having different contents (appearance, form, etc.) at each timing, one of a plurality of timings Even if you overlook it, or if there is an image of content (look, form, etc.) that the player does not understand, image display at other timings and other contents (look, form, etc.) As a result, it becomes possible to more reliably recognize that the “specific effect sound is in the effect state that is not newly assigned to the channel”.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the prize, the channel to which the sound data is assigned has no free space. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated due to the inability to output the special sound.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is lowered, A process of terminating the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel can be performed in the state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel is completed in this way, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound that is continuously allocated to the channel (channel special opening process).

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel allocation mode of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (a suppressed state)), and a usage state is aimed at. Will reduce the number of channels in (increase the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output the important game sound, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the entertainment level of the game due to the fact that a specific game sound is no longer output.

FIG. 177 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special opening process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 177, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern that is effected by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "normal BGM reproduction" corresponding to is reproduced and assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 (here, stereo reproduction), and corresponds to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this respect, as shown in FIG. 177(a), among the sounds in the reproduction state (normal BGM reproduction, effect A reproduction), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of effect. At a timing tk13 (in the middle of execution of symbol variation), the reproduction channels 08 and 09 are removed and the reproduction is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the midst of the effect, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern can be changed by terminating the effect sound allocation from the channel and quickly changing it to an empty channel. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes impossible to allocate and play a new sound due to a shortage of available channels when progressing.

However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) and the effect sound is removed from the channel and changed to an empty channel, The number of effect sounds in the reproduction state is decreased, and there is a concern that the decrease in the expectation that the jackpot pattern appears in the effect pattern is reduced by the decrease.

Therefore, in this description example, as shown in FIG. 177(a), first, before the arrival of the timing tk13 at which the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and the reproduction is ended. During the period from the "timing tk12" to the arrival of the "timing tk14" after the above timing tk13, the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" corresponding to the effect B displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is generated. It is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to be in a reproduction (here, stereo reproduction) state. Then, as shown in FIG. 177(b), in the period (timing tk12 to tk14) during which the sound of "production B reproduction" is put into the reproduction state in this manner, timing tk13 at which reproduction of "production A reproduction" is finished. When a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the “effect B reproduction” are assigned to the channels, the volume of each of the effect sounds is reduced (volume suppression processing).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 177(c), the sound of "production B reproduction" in this description example is output as a production sound corresponding to the step production in which the production content can be developed up to four times. After the effect contents have been successively developed three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the effect of further developing to the effect content according to step 4 is executed. Then, a process (volume suppression process) of decreasing the volume of each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" corresponding to the step effect is left in the state of being assigned to the channel. If a high-expectation production mode that further develops to the production content according to step 4 appears when the volume suppression processing is ended and the volume is returned to the normal volume (production with relatively high expectations), While the specific effect sound according to the effect content of step 4 is output as the sound of "reproduction B", the effect content does not develop into the effect content according to step 4, and the effect content according to step 3 corresponds to the step. When the low-expectation production mode in which the production is finished appears (production with relatively low expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of "production B reproduction".

According to such a configuration, an effect design is performed in which the timing tk13 is reached aiming at the time when the volume suppression processing is performed on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the sound of “play” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is ended, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of “playback A playback” becomes non-playback state). You will be able to make it difficult to notice what was done).

In particular, in the example shown in FIGS. 177(a) to 177(c), the production content with a relatively high degree of expectation (effect content that develops to step 4) and the effect content with a relatively low degree of expectation (step In the period (the period in which it is unclear whether or not it develops) that the production content (the production of whether or not to develop to Step 4) that is connected to any of the above (the production content that does not develop to 4) appears. The sound volume suppression processing is executed to remove the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" from the reproduction channels 08 and 09, and the reproduction is ended. With such a configuration, not only is the sound volume of the effect sound lowered, but the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the effect B (sound of "effect B reproduction"). Since the effect A (sound of "reproduction A reproduction") will be ended, after that, the volume of the effect sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" was returned. At this time, even if the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is not reproduced, the content of the production with a relatively high degree of expectation (the content of the production that develops to step 4) and the content of the production with a relatively low degree of expectation ( It becomes possible to draw an interest in which one of the contents (draft content that does not develop to step 4) has appeared, and make it difficult to notice that the sound of “drafting A playback” is no longer played.

Moreover, in the sound volume suppression processing according to this description example, although the sound volume is reduced while a plurality of sound effects including the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" are assigned to the channels, the volume of all the sound effects is reduced. The volume is not reduced, and the specific effect sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is continuously reproduced at the normal volume. In other words, in this case, some of the effect sounds (sounds of "normal BGM reproduction") are reproduced as usual without being suppressed in volume, and thus the volume of a plurality of effect sounds is lowered, and thus the sound can be distinguished. Since the reproduction of the sound of "production A reproduction" is ended while the sound of "production A reproduction" is made more difficult, it can be made more difficult to notice because the sound of "production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced. Like

Furthermore, in this example of explanation, the volume control processing is not ended immediately after the volume control processing is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the volume control processing. The reproduction of the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is ended after waiting for the lapsed timing tk13. That is, immediately after the volume suppression processing is started, there is a possibility that the player may be interested in the effect sounds A and B in which the change of “volume reduction” occurs, but the volume decreases to a specific value. It is assumed that such interest has already diminished when a state in which the specific value does not change is maintained for a predetermined time. Therefore, the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is aimed at such timing. By ending the reproduction of, the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced, which makes it more difficult to notice.

In particular, in this example of explanation, the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression processing is gradually decreased, and the reproduction of the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced, which makes it more difficult to notice.

In the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” is started while the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced in the suppressed state. The reproduction of the sound "" may be terminated.

Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be effects accompanied by effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as only sound effects, for example.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of “production B reproduction” is set to come by the progress of the variation pattern (production pattern) according to the big hit determination. Not limited. For example, the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is started based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like), and the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is reproduced while the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced. The reproduction of may be ended in the above-described mode.

In addition, it is not always necessary to gradually reduce the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression processing. On the contrary, as the process of returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be gradually returned. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a level lower than the normal level, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the "production A reproduction" sound has ended. Is possible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, a specific effect sound corresponding to the effect pattern (here, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction”) is excluded from the sound volume suppression processing, and the normal sound volume is maintained. Although the sound is continuously reproduced, the sound volume of all the effect sounds may be decreased when the sound volume suppression processing is performed. On the contrary, for the sound of “reproduction A reproduction”, the volume may be maintained without being reduced when the volume suppressing process is performed, and even in such a case, the volume is reduced. The reproduction of the "production A reproduction" sound is ended while the player is attracting the interest of the "production B reproduction" sound in the state of being reproduced, and then the "production B reproduction" sound is also included. Even if the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is not reproduced when the volumes of the plurality of effect sounds that have been targeted for volume suppression are returned, the content of the effect with relatively high expectations (step 4 The production of "production A" or the production content of relatively low expectations (production content that does not develop to step 4) attracts the interest, and the sound of "production A reproduction" is reproduced. You will be able to make it harder to notice that you are no longer being.

In addition, at least during the volume suppressing process in the period in which the effect pattern for reproducing the sounds of "production A reproduction" and "production B reproduction" is performed (after the volume of "production B reproduction" is decreased from the normal value). Until the normal value is restored), even if a winning is generated in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 in order to more favorably maintain the interest in the sound of “production B reproduction”, It is desirable not to play the corresponding pending winning sound. Further, even if a special result (prefetch win) is obtained in the prefetch judgment when a prize is placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the effect sound according to the prefetch effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound reproduction of “reproduction A reproduction” is ended within the period in which the volume of the effect sound is reduced, and when the period ends, the sound is reduced and assigned to the channel. It was decided to raise the volume of the effect sound that was used (return to the original volume value), but in addition to this, when the period ends, a special effect sound that was not assigned to the channel until then is added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played back (played at the normal volume). According to such a configuration, when the sound volume is returned, it becomes more interested in whether or not the special effect sound is reproduced, and it is further noticed that the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is not reproduced. You will be able to make it difficult. Moreover, when the number of channels used after the volume is restored is lower than that before the volume is lowered, there is a concern that the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation may have decreased, but a special effect sound Is newly assigned to a channel to be played back (played at the normal volume), so that the volume is the same before or after the volume is reduced, or more than that (two or more effect sounds are applied to the channel). It becomes possible to use the channels (when newly allocated), so that it is also preferable that the player remembers the feeling as if the expectations were lowered. It will be avoided. In this case, there is a case where the special effect sound is played when the volume is returned, and a case where it is not played, and it is suggested that the expectation is relatively high when the special effect sound is played. It is desirable to do.

When a special effect sound that has not been assigned to a channel when the volume is returned is newly assigned to the channel and is to be played back, the channel that is vacant due to the removal of the sound effect of “reproduction A” It is desirable to assign a special effect sound to. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a wide range of effects with a small number of channel resources.

In addition, such a special channel opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, the restriction target within the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. As "effect A" is adopted, the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation is (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where the number of free channels is large enough to prevent the user from feeling anxious about running out of channels, "effect A" can be continuously output without being terminated halfway. become.

In the above-described example, the "volume suppression effect" in which at least a part of the game sounds is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state, a specific-type effect pattern is executed (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination. ) Is performed, and when the effect content reaches a specific timing, it is executed for a part of the period in the effect pattern. In this regard, the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as "specific type effect patterns" that can generate such volume suppression effects is prepared as "other effect patterns" that do not generate volume suppression effects ( It is desirable to set the number to be smaller than the number of stored effect patterns in order to improve the enjoyment of the game when the volume suppression effect is generated.

Further, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as “effect patterns” capable of generating the volume suppressing effect, the effect patterns are longer than the effect pattern and the first setting time for executing the volume suppressing effect for the first set time. It is desirable to include a production pattern that executes the volume suppression production for the second set time, and to have different expectations for the big hit symbols appearing in these production patterns. According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game sounds among the game sounds is in a state of being suppressed or output silently, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by how long the state is continued. Will be able to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is changed by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). Processing is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (a demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (Process for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume even when the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in the state where the symbol variation is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the "production pattern capable of generating the volume suppression production", when the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the pattern change regardless of the production pattern, the volume adjustment confirmation is performed. Since the player, who sees no sound output, becomes aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 is configured to display that the volume setting value has been changed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable for the person to recognize (be aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is output at a volume of 0. Alternatively, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel. ..

During the period in which the "volume suppression effect" that puts at least a part of the game sounds in the suppressed mode or the silent state is executed, the expectation degree (including 100%) of the jackpot pattern is suggested. It is desirable to perform the expected display (for example, an expected presentation in which any one of a plurality of presentation modes having different expectations) appears. According to such a configuration, since the player's interest is transferred to the expected display (expected effect), the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is generated during the period in which the "volume suppression effect" is executed. It will be even more difficult to notice that it will be terminated.

When the "volume suppression effect" is executed and at least a part of the game sound is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state, the sound of "production B reproduction" is returned to a state in which it is output in a non-suppressed manner. At a predetermined timing before the timing arrives, new effect sound data different from any of the effect sounds (“normal BGM” or “effect A reproduction”) already in the output state is assigned to the channel, and the new effect sound is assigned. You may make it output the sound according to data in the non-suppression mode. That is, in this case, the sound corresponding to the new effect sound data is output in the non-suppressed mode while the "effect B reproduction" is being output in the suppressed mode or the silence, and the "effect B reproduction" is output. Since the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppression mode while being output in the non-suppression mode, the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is ended. Can be made more difficult to notice.

During the period in which the “volume suppression effect” is executed, it is desirable that the display image on the effect display device 1600 is not displayed or is displayed in a suppression mode. However, in this case, it is desirable that the display images displayed on the effect display device 1600 include those that are not the target of the processing.

In one effect pattern, the period in which the "volume suppressing effect" is executed is allowed to appear multiple times, and in those periods, the length of "time when at least a part of the game sound is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state" is long. It is desirable to make them different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make a particular effect sound in a non-output state in a manner that is difficult for the player to notice in any effect scene, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the prize, the channel to which the sound data is assigned has no free space. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated due to the inability to output the special sound.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to a specific effect pattern, and also assigns a sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel and reproduces the sound. Perform processing to Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and is output), and an operation on a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like) is detected in this state, a big hit symbol (corresponding to the symbol variation) The special effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is to be output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special effect may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound in response to the operation detection, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the channel usage situation is likely to be marginal. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special effect sound while eliminating the anxiety that "the channel may be full and the special effect sound may not be output". As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement of the game.

By the way, when a sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern is left assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppression mode or in silence, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of "BGM reproduction") (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to the player (generating a valid period for effect reception), a sound ("" It is possible to give an operation opportunity to the player (generate an effective period for effect reception) after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state.

However, as is well known, when the operation opportunity is given to the player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so as to start the reproduction of the sound matched to this at an indefinite timing.

In addition to the process of returning the volume when the player operates, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction exclusively for reproduction of special effect sound" and this is changed. It may be possible to perform a process of reproducing. However, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in accordance with the content of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped by the symbol and the timing of the symbol stop, and so on, within the effective period. When the operation (effect reception) is uncertain (depending on the player) at which timing the operation (effect reception) is performed, if the operation (effect reception) is used as a trigger, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is newly reproduced. However, there is a concern that a so-called sound shift may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of stopping the symbols, and the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data during normal fluctuation, the sound data during the first half of the super reach performance, the sound data during the second half of the super reach performance, etc.) are specified in time sequence specified by the respective sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Performs a process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, of the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When assigned to a predetermined channel in chronological order, it is assigned to the predetermined channel from a timing before the effective period of the effect reception within the specific effect pattern starts to be reproduced, and the effective period ends. After that, the allocation state for the predetermined channel is maintained and reproduced for a long period until the timing.

In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process of outputting sound in silence compared to other sections. When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in a time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special (Period)), there is a time-series relationship in which the effective period of effect reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) is changed to the special period. The sound of "BGM reproduction" is generated as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with a period after the (partial section) ends (another section). Playback is performed in a non-suppressed mode on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

With such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of super reach effect, and super sound effect). Sound data in the latter half of the reach production) is sequentially allocated to the predetermined channels in a time series specified by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these, and volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a “suppression mode or a state in which sound is output silently (special period)”. In addition, when the player's operation is accepted in the thus-created “suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)”, special processing is performed in a non-suppressed mode by the process with high immediacy. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the "BGM reproduction" sound that is in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is irrelevant to the effect reception, "the state of being output in the suppression mode or the silence (special period). Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (a suppression mode or a silent sound output) is ended by causing the special effect sound to be mixed in with it. Since the data content of the other section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, it becomes possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide a production sound that does not cause a feeling of strangeness. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently, the special effect sound is not suppressed by the process of high immediacy triggered by this. While the reproduction is started in, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that.

FIG. 178 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation state of each channel when such a controlled operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 178, a specific example of executing such a controlled operation sound output process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 178(a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the production is advanced on the game board side production display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the effect pattern of is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and already reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data over the entire period of the symbol change from the start to the end of the symbol change when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is executed. (Sound material) may be played based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol fluctuation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is May be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 178, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to channels 02 and 03 and are in a reproduction state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 178(a) and 178(b), one piece of sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is special. At the timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 when the operation valid period (the valid period of the effect reception) for which the operation opportunity that triggers the production of the production sound is given is generated, the silent data content is set. It is designed to be played in some sections. As a result, without adjusting the volume from the initial value for the sound of "BGM reproduction", it becomes possible to output the sound in silence without being assigned to the predetermined channel.

With such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in a reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in channel usage. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output the special effect sound while eliminating the anxiety that "the channel may not be available and the special effect sound may not be output". As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in playing the game.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this description example is the timing ts16 at which a part of the section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is ended even if the player does not perform any operation. At a timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is ended so that the player does not receive the effect. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation valid period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in a reproduction state within a partial section set as silent data content. While the atmosphere in which the use status of the bookmark channel is likely to be afforded is provided, it becomes possible to generate the special effect sound according to the operation by the player. The operation valid period ends when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player or when the player's operation is accepted. When the timing ts15 arrives without the player's operation, the special effect sound may be generated as in the case of the player's operation at that timing.

Then, in this explanation example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, and based on the reception of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned. , 03 different from channels 03 and 03, special effect sounds are assigned and reproduced.

In this regard, in this description example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the operation valid period (the time from the timing ts13 to the timing ts15) is set to “SY”, and the operation valid period is ended at this maximum time. When the time from the beginning to the end of the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF”, it is within the operation valid period. Even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced for a certain period of "SY+α (>BF)".

With such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. The sound of "BGM reproduction" can be output as a non-suppressed form by being mixed with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, the time from when the reproduction of the special effect sound is started to when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as a non-suppressed mode is variable in accordance with the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , A buffer period for returning the output period of the special effect sound in a non-suppressed manner to the sound of "BGM reproduction" (the sound of "BGM reproduction" is returned in an unsuppressed manner by being mixed with the special effect sound. By making it function as a period during which it is difficult to notice), when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, but the sense of incongruity is caused by returning after a predetermined time. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

Then, after the sound "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the non-suppression mode. The reproduction of the special effect sound comes to be ended in the state.

In the above-described example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are operated by the player as shown in FIG. 178(b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted line arrow depending on the received timing, but the timing ts16 comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state, regardless of which timing they correspond to. , It is obvious that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the "BGM reproduction" sound is started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, “a feeling of strangeness caused by returning the sound of “BGM playback” when the operation by the player is accepted as a non-suppressed mode without returning the sound after a predetermined time” is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. With such a configuration, while the attention is paid to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, when the player's operation is received as an effect, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception. However, a specific effect according to the variation pattern or the result of the jackpot determination. The special effect sound may be generated based on the reception of the effect only when the condition is satisfied. Even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is reproduced. Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly switched to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the point to be changed to is similar to the case of the example shown in FIG.

However, instead of this, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the reproduction time is set shorter than when the special effect sound is set to the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound is generated. The sound of the BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section after the reproduction of the sound) is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, a silent period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. (A period in which the length is variable) can be generated as a buffer period. In addition, if it is set so that a revival effect in which the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) is high can be generated in this silent period, it is expected that amusement of the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the sound of BGM reproduction is not returned to the reproduction state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner. Good. In this case, at timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be set as an empty channel.

Further, in the case of generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to perform a movable effect in which a predetermined movable body is operated based on the effect reception so as to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction. This is desirable for secretly shifting the reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output silently in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a mode in which the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed in other sections is suppressed. What is output by. Here, the suppressed mode may be, for example, a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, or a mode in which the vibration frequency of the cone of the speaker per unit time is reduced.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to a predetermined channel is set to a suppression mode or a time-series period in which no sound is generated, so that “BGM reproduction” is set. It is possible to create a state in which the sound is suppressed or output silently (a special period) simply by reproducing the sound without adjusting the volume. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period in which the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the player's operation is accepted at timing ts14, the process of increasing the sound volume of the "BGM playback" sound from the specific value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) is performed by the effect acceptance. Try not to. Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing for returning to the volume initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified among the predetermined effect sounds (failed effect sound, etc.) being reproduced, as in the above-described another example. The process of increasing the value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" may be set to a specific value when the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. May be performed (process to return to the volume initial value), or the design variation may be ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) from a specific value. Good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, at least the period from the predetermined timing before the timing ts12 arrives to the timing ts16 is subjected to the restriction process that makes it difficult to generate new sound allocation to the empty channel. Is desirable. It should be noted that, as such a limiting process, for example, there is nothing to do with the result of whether or not the jackpot pattern appears due to the pattern change being executed, such as a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjusting sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target, and that the specific game sound set as the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel so that the reproduction is not performed.

In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is generated on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. It is desirable to reproduce not sound but sound effects such as sound effects and dialogue so that it does not overlap with the sound), and timing ts12 arrives while the specific effect sound is being reproduced, and BGM reproduction is performed. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed manner or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed in with the specific effect sound, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state. Regarding the specific effect sound, the reproduction state of the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) should be ended before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). Is desirable for alleviating the anxiety that the special effect sound is not output.

Here, the specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 does not always have to be started at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and after the timing ts12. However, the reproduction may be started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, if the specific effect sound is output in the non-suppressing mode (normal mode) when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppressing mode or the silent mode, “ Since the sound of the BGM reproduction that is “suppressed or silent” can be made to appear as if it was returned to the normal reproduction state, the sound of the BGM reproduced is in the suppressed or silent state. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that it has become.

Further, "for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is ended before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output". , "The output of the specific effect sound is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player is received in the operation valid period, or is automatically ended at the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period)". It means that. In other words, if the player's operation is not accepted until the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically ended.

Further, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of the BGM reproduction is output from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound on a plurality of channels before the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the silence state is ended. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the BGM reproduction sound with the effect sounds, and the BGM reproduction sound is normally set. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

Further, such a controlled operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. "BGM reproduction sound" is adopted as a restriction target, and the smaller the minimum free channel number is, the smaller the symbol variation is (when the minimum variable channel number in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate of performing the suppressed operation sound output process may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation in which there is a sufficient number of empty channels so as to prevent the user from feeling uneasy that the special effect sound is not output due to insufficient channels, the BGM reproduction sound is output without being suppressed or silenced. Will be able to.

For the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, even if there is no operation, effect reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the effective period, and post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do it.

Further, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178 occurs, the production reception is permitted while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the suppressed mode or in the silent state. You may make it output "the acceptance|permission acceptance sound" which suggests that (or it will be in the state which acceptance of production|production is permitted) in a non-suppression mode. The "acceptable sound" is configured as a part of the "specific sound data" for outputting the "specific sound effect", and the "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, "specific sound data" is assigned to a channel before the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific effect sound corresponding to this is output in a non-suppressed manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the “acceptable sound” is output as the sound corresponding to the “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptable sound" is output from before the timing ts13 to after that so as to extend over the timing ts13. It should be noted that the specific effect sound can be output as a precursor effect sound corresponding to, for example, a predictive effect that is performed before the operation effective period occurs (an effect that suggests that the effective period will soon occur). In this case, in one sound data assigned to the channel so as to extend before and after the timing ts13, the "prediction effect sound reproduction section" and the "acceptance acceptable sound reproduction section" are provided. The "acceptable sound" may be a non-output state during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at timing ts15. Although it is good, it is desirable that when the production reception is made in the output state, this is used as a trigger to bring the production into the non-output state.

That is, the phrase “acceptable sound is output” here means that the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing ts13, and that it is already allocated to the channel. This is a concept that includes the arrival of the "reception acceptable sound reproduction section" in the sound data that has been reached at the timing ts13. Further, here, "set to the non-output state" also cancels the assignment state of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel, but maintains the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The concept is that the "reception acceptable sound reproduction section" in the sound data is ended and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

Further, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, even if the performance reception is performed at any timing within the valid period, the elapsed time from when the performance reception is performed. Until the preset time value is reached, the special effect sound is played back in a non-suppressed mode on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the "BGM playback" sound is assigned.

In this respect, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception is made to appear as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, regarding the special effect display according to the effect reception, "execution state (visible state) is continued until the elapsed time from when the effect reception is performed reaches the predetermined time value" Rather, it is desirable to perform "no matter when the performance reception is performed at any timing within the effective period, it is hidden when the predetermined timing within the performance pattern comes". As the “predetermined timing in the effect pattern”, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after timing ts15 and before timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even when the effect reception is made immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, it is a timing that comes before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound ends. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, regarding the processing relating to the special effect sound, the output state must be continued until the timing when the sound of "BGM reproduction" comes back after the timing ts16 when the sound is restored in a non-suppressed manner. However, the special effect display can be ended before the special effect sound, so that the effects after the post-operation effect can be advanced at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such an effect, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored or the timing that comes before the timing ts16. Can be said to be important.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is performed in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), "the elapsed time from the effect reception timing is predetermined based on the effect reception. The process for the special effect sound that keeps the output state until it reaches the specified time value and the process for the special effect display that continues to be displayed until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Will be started respectively.

For example, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process related to special effect display" of the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively long period, Of the post-operation effects, the "processing related to the special effect sound" ends at the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed since the effect reception. On the other hand, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "special effect display processing" in the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively short time. However, in the post-operation effect, the “processing related to the special effect sound” is executed from the time when the effect reception is made to the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

That is, in this case, with the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern is the specific timing. When the production is received within the special operation reception production (effective period), "the output state is kept until the elapsed time from the reception of the production reaches a predetermined time value. The processing relating to the special effect sound to be continued" and the "processing related to the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes" will be executed.

According to such an operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs, it is possible to maintain the execution state of the “process related to special effect display” in the post-operation effect for a long time. As a price to be met, the end timing of the "process relating to the special effect sound" in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate for a while after the effective period occurs and you operate it at a later time, regarding the end timing of the "process related to special effect sound" in the post-operation effect, this is a relatively late stage. However, there is a demerit that the execution state of the "processing related to special effect display" in the post-operation effect cannot be maintained for a long time.

That is, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no operation timing that is the most desirable for producing a lively action.
・In exchange for accelerating the timing of ending the "process related to special effect sound", do you enjoy it by lengthening the execution state of "process related to special effect display" (operation at an early stage within the effective period? Or)
・In exchange for shortening the execution state of "processing for special effect display", do you extend the time until "processing for special effect sound" ends and enjoy this (at a later stage within the effective period? Do you want to operate), or
・Slightly sacrifice the time during which the "process related to special effect display" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "process related to special effect sound" is finished, so that an overall balance is achieved. Whether (operate at a timing that is neither early nor late within the effective period)
It becomes possible to give strategic operation directivity such as to the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception effect that does not get tired and allows the user to select the operation timing according to the mood of the player. Will be able to.

Here, in the above-described example, as the post-operation effect when the effect reception is performed in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process related to special effect sound” and the “process related to special effect display” are performed. However, the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed, or the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be performed instead of the "process for the special effect display". May be executed. However, as for the “processing for moving the predetermined effect movable body”, as in the case of the above-mentioned “processing for special effect display”, even when the effect reception is performed at any timing within the effective period. , The operation state is ended when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives." Here, in the case of an effect of moving a predetermined effect movable body to a specific position, "to end the operation state" means to move the predetermined effect movable body in the operation state at the specific position to the original position. It means to start the process to operate to return.

In the above-described example, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives “Processing for special effect display (or , A process for operating a predetermined effect movable body)" and "a process for a special effect sound" that is continued until an elapsed time from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. And However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, when the jackpot determination is unsuccessful or when the predetermined effect determination is unsuccessful). If the production is received within the operation reception production, the "processing related to special production display (or processing for operating a predetermined production movable body)" is not performed and the predetermined production condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform the "processing related to the special effect sound" in which the "predetermined time value" is set relatively shorter than that in the case where is satisfied (FIG. 178) as a different effect sound. More desirable.

However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error), and the production reception may not be performed. As a result, the production reception is not performed and is effective. If the period is over, it is interesting for the player to see how the "special effect display processing (or processing for moving a predetermined effect movable body)" is not performed after the operation. There is concern that it will decline. Therefore, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached. (Or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body)" and "a process for a special effect sound" that continues until the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value is executed. It is desirable to be done. As a method of automatically generating an operation reception (automatic reception) and an effect mode related thereto, it is possible to use any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300, or an appropriate combination.

As described above, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, the effect reception is performed when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state in the non-suppressed mode. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect acceptance, and the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is canceled at this point. In this respect, even when the normal valid period that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed occurs, the acceptable reception sound is output in a non-suppressed mode in accordance with the occurrence thereof. However, it is desirable that the acceptance permissible sound be continued without canceling the output state even if the effect reception is made in the output state. In addition, the acceptance sound that is output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated is a performance sound that can be maintained in the reproduction state for a longer time than the acceptance sound that is output when the normal validity period is generated. It is desirable to keep the amusement of interest even when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed.

In addition, in the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, N acceptable reception sounds that indicate that the valid period will occur (or that the valid period has occurred) will be displayed. There are types (modes), and any of these types must be output (output in a non-suppressed mode). On the other hand, in the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressing mode, it indicates that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period occurs). Only M types (modes) less than N are prepared as acceptance-permitted sounds, and “when output is performed in any of those types (output in non-suppressed mode)” and “output by any of those types”. If the sound data itself including the acceptance sound is not assigned to the channel and the valid period is generated, it is desirable to set. In addition, it is desirable to suggest that "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears is different" depending on the type of acceptance acceptable sound.

Alternatively, either the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, and the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode. Also, in the above, although a plurality of types (modes) are prepared as acceptance-allowed sounds, the ratio of acceptance-acceptable sounds with a high expectation for a big hit occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state. It is desirable that it is relatively high during the effective period during which the sound is reproduced and relatively low during the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressing mode. . Also in this case, in the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, the acceptance permission sound that indicates that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period occurs) is received. While the output is always output (output in the non-suppressed mode), the effective period occurs in the effective period that occurs when the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode ( Or "when the acceptance acceptable sound indicating that the valid period has occurred" is output "in a non-suppressed manner" and "when the sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound itself is not assigned to a channel and is not output". It is desirable to have it.

According to these configurations, when the BGM reproduction sound is output normally in the non-suppressing mode, the degree of expectation suggested by the acceptance-allowed sound is too detailed (M kinds less than N kinds). You may not be able to recognize it, or you may not be able to expect much (relatively low). However, in this case, since the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode, the BGM reproduction sound may overlook the acceptable reception sound. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to make people aware of the possibility that the acceptable reception sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the BGM reproduction sound is output in the suppressed mode or the silent mode, the acceptance permission sound is output in a situation where the sound output in the non-suppressed mode can be emphasized. Since the output is always performed in the non-suppressed mode, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes is adopted, among the types of acceptable reception sounds that can be output when the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state” is generated, , At least one of the types of acceptance/rejection sounds that can be output when the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressing mode” (for example, Of these, the category with the lowest expected jackpot) may be included. However, the acceptable sound that can be output when the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode" is "the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or silence. The valid acceptance sound that can be output at the time of occurrence of the "effective period that occurs in the state of" is included in the types that cannot be output (for example, the type with the highest expected jackpot among the acceptable sounds). Is desirable. In addition, the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects according to effect acceptance in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressing mode as usual” is “BGM reproduction. It is preferable that the number of effect types is greater than the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound is in the suppression mode or in the silent state”. Among the effect types that can appear as post-operation effects corresponding to effect acceptance in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressing mode as usual”, “the sound of BGM reproduction is At least one of the effect types that can appear as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception in the “suppression mode or the effective period that occurs when in the silent state” may be included.

Further, in the normal game state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability variation function operates, the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed state or the silent state, and the sound of BGM reproduction is in the non-suppressed state. When preparing multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations as acceptable acceptance sounds in any of the valid periods that occur when output is performed normally, the output is performed in any of those valid periods. When this is done, it may be possible to output a special acceptance permissible sound "the proportion of which is stopped at the jackpot pattern becomes 100%". Note that a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as the special reception allowable sound.

That is, in this case, when the "special acceptance permissible sound" is output (non-suppression mode) when the "effective period that occurs when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state" occurs, the effect is produced within the effective period. Even as the post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the reception is made, when it appears, it will be executed in a special mode that "the proportion of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100%". When the production reception is made in a state where the special reception allowance sound is being output, the output of the special reception allowance sound is interrupted, and when it is output, "the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100%" special. It is desirable to output the effect sound.

However, when the "special acceptance permission sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the "effective period that occurs when the BGM reproduction sound is output normally in the non-suppressed mode", the effective period As a post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the effect is received in the case, when it appears, it is executed in a special mode in which the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100%, and in the special mode. It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that the special acceptance permissible sound that is output when the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state" and the "BGM playback sound is normally output in the non-suppression mode" are output. The special acceptance-permitted sound output during the “effective period that occurs when the state is in the state of being in the state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being different from each other.” In addition, there are a plurality of types of special reception allowance sounds that are output when the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressing mode”, and among these types, , The same type as the special reception permissible sound that is output when the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silence state” may be the same as or different from the type. . When the production acceptance is performed in the state where the acceptance acceptable sound (including the special acceptance acceptance sound) is output, the output of the acceptance acceptance sound is interrupted, and the effect sound corresponding to the post-operation presentation (the post-operation presentation is special When it is performed in a mode, it is desirable to output a special effect sound "when the output is 100% of the proportion stopped at the big hit symbol".

According to such a configuration, when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or in the silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in listening), when the special reception allowance sound is output, it is within the valid period. Even as a post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the effect reception is performed, when it appears, it will always be executed in a mode that "the proportion of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100%". On the other hand, in the state where the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode (when it is easy to hear a mistake due to the competition with the BGM reproduction sound), it is determined that the special reception permission sound is output. Also, as the post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the effect is received within the effective period, the effect is not necessarily performed in the mode of "the proportion of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%". From here, it becomes possible to have a suspicion (a suspicion of a mistake in listening) whether or not the reception allowance sound was output as a "special reception allowance sound", so that the tension can be appropriately maintained. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM reproduction is being output in the non-suppressed manner as usual, "how to not overlook the acceptable reception sound" becomes important, and the sense of tension until the acceptable reception sound is output. With respect to the above, it becomes possible to maintain this favorably. In order to increase such a feeling of tension, in the operation reception performance, "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation performance is not executed in a mode in which "the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100%" appears" "The special reception allowance sound is output and the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the ratio of stopping at the jackpot pattern becomes 100% when it appears" is compared with the case of the operation accepting effect. It is desirable that the effect (pre-allowance operation-related display or pre-allowance operation-related sound) be executed in a relatively short time so that the effective period is suddenly generated.

In the state where the BGM playback sound is normally output in the non-suppressing mode (when it is easy to hear a mistake due to the competition with the BGM playback sound), "the special reception allowance sound is output and the operation is performed. The post-effect is not executed in the mode of "the ratio of being stopped at the jackpot pattern becomes 100% when it appears", the operation acceptance effect (effective period), and "the special acceptance permission sound is output and the post-operation effect is " When it appears, the percentage stopped at the jackpot pattern becomes 100%. With the "operation reception effect (effective period)", the special reception permission sound is output as the reception permission sound of different types. Alternatively, the reception permission sound of the same type may be output. Further, in a state in which the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode (when the reception acceptable sound is liable to be mistaken due to competition with the BGM reproduction sound), “special reception acceptable sound is output. The operation reception effect (effective period) that is performed and is executed in a mode in which the post-operation effect is “executed in a mode in which the ratio of being stopped at the big hit symbol becomes 100%” may not necessarily occur. In addition, in the operation reception performance (effective period), when the special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is not executed in the manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100%”, the reception is allowed. Regardless of which type is output as a sound, the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode in which “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100% when it appears”, and the mode is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

In addition, during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) and the normal effective period that occur while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, an image display simulating the operation means used as the operation target and effective A gauge display indicating how much time is left is displayed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed. In this respect, at least during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, when the effect is received, the gauge display remains (is displayed) and the "effect" is displayed. "Processing related to special effect display (or operation of moving a predetermined effect movable body)" in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives, and "elapsed time from the time the effect is received" It is desirable to start each of the "processing concerning the special effect sound that continues until the time value reaches a predetermined time value". According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period the reception timing of the performance reception is made after the performance reception based on the remaining gauge amount as a display. Therefore, it becomes possible to predict whether the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body) will be finished soon. In addition, as a method of starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296, or an appropriate combination, and further, It is possible to use the written contents.

In the above-described example, regarding the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as the "specific type effect pattern" for outputting the sound of "BGM reproduction" in the suppression mode or the silence, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number of effect patterns to be smaller than the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “other effect patterns” that are not output silently in order to improve the enjoyment of the game when the effect occurs. .

In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as the "effect pattern" for outputting the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a suppressed manner or silent, the effect pattern suppresses the sound of "BGM reproduced" for the first set time. Or, a production pattern that is output silently and a production pattern that outputs the sound of "BGM reproduction" over a second set time that is longer than the first set time in a suppressed manner or in a silent manner are included, and in these production patterns, a jackpot pattern is generated. It is desirable to have different expectations. With such a configuration, when the state of outputting the sound of "BGM reproduction" in the suppression mode or the silent state is reached, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation degree by how long the state is continued. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is changed by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). Processing is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (a demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (Process for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume even when the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in the state where the symbol variation is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the "production pattern in which the sound of BGM reproduction is suppressed or output silently" can be selected, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the pattern change regardless of the production pattern. In this case, the player who sees that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output becomes aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, so that it is expected that the interest of the game is maintained appropriately. become. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 is configured to display that the volume setting value has been changed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable for the person to recognize (be aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is output at a volume of 0. Alternatively, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel. ..

The special effect sound output based on the reception of the effect when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state is over the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) for at least twice the time. It is desirable to configure it to maintain the output state. According to such a configuration, even when the effective reception period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs and the effect reception is performed immediately, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 elapses, It becomes possible to make it longer than the output time (special effect sound) until the timing ts15.

[Channel allocation cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the prize, the channel to which the sound data is assigned has no free space. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated due to the inability to output the special sound.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which the sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which the sound data is not assigned is triggered by the detection by the detection means. Executable (channel allocation cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created when the player operates, the empty channel is created by performing the operation by the player at a timing immediately before the effect sound or the special sound that the player likes is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to surely output the player's favorite effect sound and special sound through the previously secured empty channel.

It should be noted that the operation (channel assignment canceling operation) in this description example is not limited to the “button operation”, and an action such as praying by holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1 is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. It is also possible to use a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect any state change that occurs when such a specific action (channel allocation canceling operation) to be detected is performed. It suffices to perform processing for removing the sound in the state assigned to the channel from the channel and ending the reproduction upon the detection.

FIG. 179 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to the channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 179, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern which is effected by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM1 reproduction" (for example, effect sound effect reproduced during execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to reproduction channels 00 and 01 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and The sound of "BGM2 reproduction" according to the effect mode (for example, one music piece continuously reproduced over a plurality of fluctuations in a time-saving game state or the like) is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). ) Is in the situation.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), of the sounds (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction) in these reproduction states, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). The channel allocation is forcibly terminated when is detected, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the effect reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is accepted. The allowable reception period can be generated until timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action to be detected (channel allocation canceling operation) such as “Operate a button and secure an empty channel” in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An operation instruction image prompting the user to perform is displayed.

Here, FIG. 179(a) shows the allocation status of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed. Showing.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), when the detection by the predetermined detecting means is not made by the time the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. However, this is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. In addition, at the timing tw13 when the acceptance period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button and secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden.

Further, at timing tw13, a process of allocating a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) to the empty channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproducing the sound is performed. In this example of explanation, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to empty channels by the detection by the predetermined detection means, the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) have already been reserved, so that the empty channels are already reserved. It is possible to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, when the vacancy is not secured in advance in the other channels, there is no vacant channel to which the predetermined effect sound (here, the jackpot confirmation sound) can be assigned, and it becomes impossible to reproduce and output this. Concerns will arise.

FIG. 179(b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection unit. Shows.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179(b), when the detection is performed by the predetermined detecting means before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02, 03 are generated at the timing tw12a at which the detection is performed. The sound of "BGM2 playback" is removed from. As a result, it becomes possible to secure in advance an empty channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) that can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) before the timing tw13 arrives. , The concern that the predetermined effect sound (here, the jackpot confirmation sound) cannot be reproduced and output will be eliminated. Further, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly ended at the time when the detection is made by the predetermined detection means, and in this case, the music or the dialogue as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or Since the playback will end at a halfway point without being played back, it feels that a free channel has been secured in advance by the player's specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation). As a result, it becomes possible to easily wait for the timing when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) is reproduced.

In addition, at the timing tw12a when the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. (Operate the button to secure a free channel) is hidden, and the acceptance period during which the performance acceptance of the specific action (channel allocation canceling operation) is permitted is ended.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 179(b), at timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance as free channels, but other channels (reproduction channel 10, 11), a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) is assigned and reproduced. However, if there is no vacancy in another channel at the timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) is assigned to the previously secured reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced.

Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel assignment canceling operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in the other channel. Alternatively, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) may be assigned to the specific channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, the jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to the specific channel and is played back, an effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound (here, , BGM2) is assigned, the assigned state is canceled at that point by the detection of a specific action such as a button operation (channel assignment cancellation operation), so that one channel (specific channel) is canceled. Only by using it, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmation sound) can be reproduced respectively, and the reproduction channel which is a limited resource can be effectively used. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179(b), the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmation sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 at which the reception period ends, but the timing after the timing tw13. It is also possible to reproduce a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound).

Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the big hit confirmation sound, an effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation that a big hit pattern appears, an effect sound that indicates that a big hit is lost, and the like may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds be selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears in the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that the jackpot is lost to the jackpot, no effect sound may be output even if the timing tw13 comes and the idle channel may not necessarily be used.

On the other hand, the sound that terminates the channel assignment when the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is detected is not the sound that is output in any of a plurality of aspects, but is the one that is output in only one aspect. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the user misses the content of the specific sound when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and no trouble occurs. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal when the state is forced to end.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 179(b), when the predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives, the acceptance period during which the performance acceptance of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is allowed is generated, but this Not limited to For example, at least during a period when the specific sound to be removed from the channel allocation is in a reproducing state, acceptance of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel allocation of the specific sound is performed based on the acceptance. May be eliminated. Note that in this case, for example, a predetermined timing after a specific time has passed since the specific sound was put into the reproduction state, for example, at a predetermined timing, the state of the previously reserved empty channel is maintained for a predetermined time, and then another sound is transmitted to the empty channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

Further, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, there is a method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned to be an empty channel at that time, or a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel allocation of the specific sound by overwriting the same channel with an extremely short allocation cancellation acceptance sound (for example, 1 second). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound at an earlier stage when the specific action is accepted and forcedly terminated than when the specific action is not forcedly terminated.

In addition, at least during the period from the acceptance of the performance of the specific action (the operation for canceling the channel allocation) to the end of the reproduction of the predetermined performance sound using the empty channel created by the performance reception, a new sound is generated. In order to prevent the channel from being used wastefully, a specific game sound (for example, a winning sound, a pending change sound, or a volume adjustment sound) that is not related to the production of whether or not the big hit symbol appears within the symbol fluctuation. , Prefetch effect sound, etc.) is preferably not output.

Further, the specific sound (sound of "BGM2 reproduction") to be forcibly terminated is reproduced as a non-loop effect sound such as a music piece or a dialogue that is reproduced only for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easier to remember the feeling that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action by the player (channel allocation canceling operation) by making the playback end at a halfway point without being played back to the end. ..

[Abnormality notification while production is being performed according to production pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the prize, the channel to which the sound data is assigned has no free space. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated due to the inability to output the special sound.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to this is not necessarily assigned to a channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that the signal has occurred in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not always output, and thus, it is possible to increase the channels by that amount and reduce the risk of empty channels disappearing. Will be expected.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is at a timing that should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that a predetermined movable decorative body has an abnormality (movable body abnormality). Then, when such a moving body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the moving body abnormality (for example, "a moving body abnormality has occurred") and a game. It is possible to respectively perform an abnormal time display (for example, “an abnormality has occurred in the back inside movable effect unit 3200”) in the display area of the board side effect display device 1600. It should be noted that, as the abnormal time display in the display area, it is desirable to perform so that it is possible to identify which of the plurality of movable ornaments has an abnormality. It may be a mode in which it is specified which of the groups the abnormal movable body belongs to. For example, as a plurality of movable decorations, a plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and , The back inside movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, the back lower movable effect unit 3700, etc.), respectively, the frame side move The abnormal state display in the display area is performed in such a manner that it is possible to specify which side of the decorative body and the board-side movable decorative body has the abnormality. It should be noted that the plurality of movable decorative bodies are movable decorative bodies that are different from each other in drive source and are provided separately.

However, such an abnormality of the movable body is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and there is a high possibility that the player will not make any mistakes. Since there is no such thing, if there is a case where the notification process is executed in the open during the period when various games (symbol fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, On the other hand, it will be adversely affected and will be a nuisance for the player. Not only that, because the number of available channels is exhausted by the output of the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body, it may give the player a feeling of anxiety that a new sound cannot be output. , There is concern that the interest in playing games may decline.

On the other hand, however, the failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and it is difficult to assume a situation where the movable decorative body suddenly fails when the movable decorative body does not operate. In that case, if the movable body is abnormal while the movable body is not operating, it means that the movable body is removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a doggie or a wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in a detected situation, and if you do not output a notification sound corresponding to a moving body abnormality despite such a situation, it may promote fraud and It is feared that a player's interest in games will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such a movable body abnormality is detected during a period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, and this is detected. Even in such a case, it is possible to execute the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of a notification sound, abnormal time display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.). However, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the big hit determination are being executed, at least processing for moving the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern (effect pattern)) When a movable body abnormality is detected while the movable body drive processing for operating the movable decorative body based on the effect pattern during the big hit game or the like is being performed, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of the notification sound) , Abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lamp lighting by various lamps, etc.) is not performed. It should be noted that the external output (information on the hall side) of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body may be performed regardless of the situation because it is not performed explicitly and does not adversely affect the performance.

According to such a configuration, even if the various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to fail (by the peripheral control board 1510). Abnormality of the movable body in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the production control (the situation in which the movable body driving process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (production pattern) or the production pattern during the big hit game) is not performed) When the alarm occurs, an alarm notification sound or other notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 can be performed. However, at least in a situation where the movable decorative body is likely to fail (during the performance operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality is detected. When it occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not perform the notification processing such as the abnormal notification sound, so that the person who commits the misconduct is prevented from performing the misconduct, but the legitimate game is played. It is expected that the person will be prevented from having an adverse effect on the effect being executed.

For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the production control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side production display device 1600, the allocation control of the production sound to the channel, and the occurrence of the abnormality. The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. The influence will be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing of moving the movable decorative body again comes after the abnormal movable body is detected, the movable decorative body can be moved while the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. The production is not executed.

In other words, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is informed of an abnormality notification sound or the like according to the movable body abnormality is determined. Regardless, it is possible to execute a restoration process that causes the movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the movable ornament from the abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative object is performed. When the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state in the previous stage, the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body can be executed.

Note that, even though the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation (movement to the specific position (origin position)) on the corresponding movable ornament is executed, the movable ornament is identified within the predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is considered that the recovery has failed, and the game and the production are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state.

FIG. 180 shows the allocation status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body in accordance with the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. 7 is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the movable decorative body side.

As shown in FIG. 180(a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern being effected is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and already reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player can occur over a period up to the timing ti14. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended with this being a trigger. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. In addition, when the operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable ornament may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 180, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ti13. Therefore, at the timing ti13, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the reception of the operation by the player, and the movable production for producing the specific movable decorative body is performed (see FIG. 180(b)). ), the effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (see FIG. 180(a)).

Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, since the restoration process has failed and recovery cannot be expected, the movable body drive process is ended without performing any drive. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is located at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the driving of the specific movable decorative body is completed, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, When it is determined that the movable body is returned to the specific position (original position) based on the information, the movable body driving process is ended. However, if it is determined in the movable body driving process that the specific movable ornament is not at the specific position (original position), the restoration process that causes the specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed. After that, the movable body drive processing is ended. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

By such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. In this example, however, the specific movable decorative body is changed to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period in which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs and it cannot operate. Note that, in FIG. 180(b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the particular movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti17 after the drive (drive for the rendering operation) for the specific movable decorative body is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). When it is determined that there is an abnormality, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is performed based on the determination.

However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is Since it can be said that the situation is highly likely to be caused by the failure of the decorative body, in this description example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the allocation control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body is abnormal. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it is not detected, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed. That is, when a situation in which the movable body cannot be returned to the normal state (moved to the original position) appears while executing the movement process based on the effect pattern in which the symbol is changing, based on the appearance of the situation. As a result, the execution timing of the "restoration processing for the movable body (moving body that is not in the original position) in the rendering operation that has not been normally restored" is established, but when the restoration processing is performed (or, When the restoration process fails to return the movable body to the normal state, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced.

At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament is ended, but at this time, it is detected that the movable ornament is returned to the specific position (origin position). In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality is eliminated), the memory of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute the movable effect as usual. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 180(b), the restoration of the movable decorative body to the specific position (origin position) is not detected (determination that the abnormality of the movable body is eliminated), and the restoration fails. In such a case, thereafter, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, within the same symbol variation, or within the next and subsequent symbol variations, even if the timing at which the movable effect using the specific movable decorative element is executed based on the effect pattern comes, the specific movable decorative element The production effect is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred are emitted only in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even when the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body is operated (emits light) in a mode at the time of operation, so that the movable effect is not generated. It is expected that the interest in playing games will be suppressed.

As described above, in the period in which the symbol variation is performed, at least when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination, the movable body is detected. By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

On the other hand, even when an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same variation pattern (specific effect pattern) as shown in FIG. 180, this movable body abnormality causes When the effect control (effect pattern) occurs at a timing different from when a specific movable ornament is operated, an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

In FIG. 181, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body in accordance with the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination, but in the process other than this. It is a time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel when detected, and the situation at the side of a movable decoration body.

As shown in FIG. 181(a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being effected on the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and already reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case).

Then, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) at which the player has an operation opportunity is the maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over a period of up to. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended with this being a trigger. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the specific movable decorative body moves by some external force at a timing ti11a prior to the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform a production operation (moves without being based on the production pattern). It is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Note that, also in FIG. 181(b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

At the timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body ends, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (the movable movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it is possible to execute the movable performance as usual without any notification of the abnormality. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) occurs so as to cross such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state, and therefore, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed. Not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced, and an abnormality occurs. The various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body are emitted only in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), when the operation by the player is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14, the abnormal state of the specific movable ornament is determined by the restoration process. If it has been canceled, normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of the specific movable decorative body will be executed. It should be noted that this description example assumes that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormal state is being executed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are performing the restoration process, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14, The production operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, it is assumed that the restoration of the movable decorative body to the specific position (origin position) is not detected (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated) at timing ti13a and the restoration fails. doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state.

Further, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body even when the specific movable decorative body is not operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected due to the fact that the specific movable decorative body is removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a dogfighting action or a wire entry. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the movable body abnormality is not eliminated by some external force even by the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that fraudulent acts were performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

Therefore, at this timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality is to be executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, various effect sounds according to a specific effect pattern are assigned and reproduced in accordance with the progress of the effect contents, and an abnormality notification sound is reproduced for a predetermined time on the reproduction channels 00, 01. To be played back. In addition, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ "Abnormality occurs in the back inside movable effect unit 3200") is executed. Further, in various light emitting parts, as a form corresponding to the abnormal state of the movable body, a part of the light emitting parts is made to emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting parts are made in a normal form according to the progress of the effect contents. It will emit light.

According to the examples of FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol variation, at least a period during which the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs, the possibility of cheating is low and there is also a possibility of failure during the performance operation, so the performance is output with priority over the abnormality notification. . On the other hand, if the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs while the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed and it is more abnormal than the rendering It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it may be more important to output the notification.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 181, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, and the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a at which the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not eliminated. Decided to do. However, at the timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected even though the specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the effect pattern, and even by this alone, a fraudulent act such as a pounding action or a wire entry may occur. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the alarm has occurred, the output of the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body may be started at this timing ti11b. In addition, at this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed. That is, even when the movable process based on the effect pattern during the symbol change is not executed, if the situation where the movable body moves from the original position due to a doggie action or a wire entry appears, the change of the symbol starts or changes. Waiting for the restoration processing timing to arrive at the end, at that point (in the middle of the pattern change), there is an opportunity to execute "restoration processing for moving bodies that have not been restored to normal (moving bodies that are not in the original position)". However, when the restoration process is performed (or when the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to the normal state), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and reproduced. It is supposed to be done. Alternatively, when the movable body moves from the original position due to a dogfighting action or a wire entry, it is possible to perform a process of moving the movable body by a driving force from a drive source (such as a motor) (movable process not based on the effect pattern), You may make it move to an original position in this process. In this case, when the movable body cannot be moved to the original position by such movable processing, even if the symbol is in the process of being changed, at that point in time, “targeting the movable body not in the original position is targeted. The trigger for executing the "restoration process" is established. Then, when the restoration process is performed (or when the restoration process fails to return the movable body to the normal state (return to the original position)), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel. Will be played back.

In short, regarding the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, "the specific movable decoration body is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern. "Abnormality has occurred in", and "abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the production operation based on the production pattern". It is important to prevent the illegal execution from being performed as a sufficient condition, so that the person who commits the wrongdoing can be prevented from performing the wrongdoing, but It is expected to avoid adversely affecting the production of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decoration is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern After having adopted at least "the abnormality has occurred in the body", for example, "the restoration process performed in response to the abnormality has failed" or "the abnormality has occurred under a specific situation". Etc. can be adopted as further conditions.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when the specific movable ornament is operated according to the effect pattern, the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body is not triggered by this, and therefore the specific movable It is also possible not to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable ornament in the process of operating the ornament according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is regularly visited.

Further, the method of detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected, and for example, when an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 180, an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 181, an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti11b, which causes the abnormality of the movable body to be detected.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as an effect operation at the timing when the player operates, but the specific movable decorative object is performed at the specific timing determined by the effect pattern. May be performed.

Further, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. You may make it perform the process which reduces.

In addition, when the abnormality notification is not executed under the sufficient condition that "the abnormality occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the production operation based on the production pattern", after that, Even if the abnormal state is not resolved and remains, it is desirable that the abnormality notification is not performed at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the production are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing the predetermined restoration operation.

After the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 for a predetermined time and reproduced by the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality, the reproduction channels 00 and 01 are empty channels even if the movable body abnormality remains. When the game is started in this state, it is desirable that the effect sound is output in a non-suppressed mode even if the movable body abnormality remains.

In the above-described example, even when the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed, the restoring operation is performed on the effect movable body in which the movement abnormality occurs when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this regard, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, even if the effect movable body different from the effect movable body in which the operation abnormality occurs, the movable processing is performed so as to test whether or not the effect movable body can properly operate. Good. In other words, as a result of performing the restoring operation on the production movable body in which the movement abnormality is occurring, when this fails, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that cheating is being performed. However, as a result of performing a restoration operation on the production movable body in which the movement abnormality is occurring, if it succeeds, it becomes difficult to understand whether there is a high possibility that fraud is being performed. It will be. Therefore, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, a fraudulent act is performed through the moving process to test whether it is possible to properly operate the effect movable body that is different from the effect movable body in which the movement abnormality occurs. It is desirable to continue to judge whether or not there is a high possibility. Even when the restoration fails in the restoration operation, such a moving process may be further performed.

The content of the process related to the restoration operation is the restoration operation performed in the situation where the movable production based on the production pattern is not executed and the restoration operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the situation where the movable production based on the production pattern is executed. It is desirable that (for example, the number of retries) be different from each other.

[Restoring of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the prize, the channel to which the sound data is assigned has no free space. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated due to the inability to output the special sound. Therefore, conventionally, even when the movable body abnormality occurs in any of the plurality of movable decoration bodies (the movable decoration bodies in which the drive sources are different and are provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) is generated. By assigning (sound data) to a channel and reproducing the same, it is possible to prevent the number of used channels from being unnecessarily increased even in a situation where a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously with respect to a plurality of movable decorative bodies. It was In addition, the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body cannot operate properly, and is the same as that illustrated in "Abnormality notification while performance according to performance pattern is being performed". is there.

However, in recent years, the number of movable ornaments mounted on a game machine has been increasing, and it is possible to match the abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) common to all the movable ornaments to the game. It is becoming difficult to properly notify the state of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and a different abnormality notification sound is transmitted to a channel depending on which of the groups the movable decorative body has an abnormality. By allocating and reproducing the pachinko machine 1, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable ornaments mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the example of "abnormality notification while effect according to effect pattern is being performed" (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 181). Is processed. Therefore, in this example as well, even if various types of games (symbol fluctuations, big hit games, etc.) occur during the period of execution and are detected, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound) , Abnormal time display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and abnormal lighting by various lamps) can be executed. In addition, similarly, during the period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, at least processing for operating the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (change pattern) If a movable body abnormality is detected while the movable body drive processing for operating the movable decorative body based on the (production pattern) or the production pattern during the big hit game is being performed, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 ( The output of the notification sound, the abnormal time display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

However, in this example, further, when the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, only the abnormal sound data which is assigned to the channel and is in the reproduction state is assigned to one of the above groups. On the other hand, the processing for causing all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred to be restored is executed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that even when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to allow a channel to have a margin and reduce the risk of empty channels disappearing. In addition to the above, it becomes possible to quickly recover from each movable ornament, and it is expected that the channel usage time will be reduced by improving the efficiency of the process itself when an error occurs. . Note that the content of the restoration process, and each process at the time of success and failure thereof, is an example of the above-mentioned “abnormality notification while the production according to the production pattern is being performed” (see FIGS. 180 and 181). ) Is the same as the case.

Here, the mode in which the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups is required to be a mode suitable for informing the state of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided on the door frame 3 side, for example. A plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movable rendering unit 3200, a back left movable rendering unit 3300, a back) Right movable effect unit 3400, upper back movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.) are grouped into two groups, the frame-side movable ornament that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. It is possible to transmit to the hall side by the type of the abnormality notification sound whether or not the abnormality has occurred, or whether the abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative body, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. become. In other words, when an abnormality occurs on the board-side movable decorative body, it is highly possible that fraudulent acts are performed as much as it is difficult to contact the case when an abnormality occurs on the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by outputting the notification sound based on such grouping, the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is not noticed by the player depending on the type (the unpleasant feeling is felt). It becomes possible to secretly inform the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a state of a high degree of possibility of fraud (without having to do so).

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a movable body abnormality occurs, the pachinko machine 1 performs an alarm process in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality as well as the game board side effect display. As described above, the abnormal display can be executed in the display area of the device 1600. In this regard, in this description example, even in the notification mode according to the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and any one of the groups. It is desirable to perform different notification displays depending on whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the "display notification" is inferior to the "sound notification" in the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality, but is superior in the information transmission function for notifying the details of the abnormality. It has the characteristic that Therefore, in the above “notification by display”, the grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of performing the above “notification by sound” by utilizing the difference in the nature thereof, in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted. Therefore, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the groups thus uniquely divided has an abnormality in the movable decorative body.

That is, in this case, for example, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into a group in which a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B. Depending on whether there is any abnormality in the moving body, even though the abnormality notification sound reproduced is the same, as the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed", "A second notification mode in which the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is displayed and the notification content is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs And "a third notification mode in which the reproduced alarm notification sound and the displayed notification content are different from each other regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs". Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a more detailed notification mode by the notification using the two different contents of the sound and the display.

FIG. 182 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the side of the movable decorative body when the movable body abnormalities simultaneously occur in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol variation occurs. It is a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern being effected is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and already reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player can occur over a period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (the period from the timing tj13 to the timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended with this being a trigger. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. In addition, when the operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing tj15. Alternatively, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable ornament may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14. Therefore, at the timing tj14, originally, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the reception of the operation by the player, and the movable production for producing the specific movable decorative body is performed, and the channel is performed. 08 and 09, the effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned and reproduced.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, at timing tj11, a plurality of movable decorative bodies move by some external force (the movements are not based on the production pattern), which is more than the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the production operation. It is assumed that those movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In addition, in FIG. 182(b) and FIG. 183(b) described later, a dotted area indicates a period during which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. Therefore, in relation to this restoration process, even if the player's operation is accepted at the timing tj14, the specific movable ornament is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decoration A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decoration B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decoration C provided on the game board 5 side , A frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, a frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and a frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side have a movable body abnormality. Each situation is assumed.

More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 182, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side The processing modes are different between D, E, and F. For example, with regard to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorations are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and when they operate simultaneously, interference due to contact with each other may occur. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration processing is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C are used. Since there is no concern that the movements interfere with each other, including the relationship with, the restoration processing is performed at the timing tj12 at the same time so that quick restoration of each movable decorative body can be performed.

In such a configuration, while the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C provided on the game board 5 side is performed for a long time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj18, the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable ornaments D, E, and F provided in, the restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, a board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the end of the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player It is assumed that neither the restoration processing of A, B, C nor the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side is completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the operation is effective. Even if the production is received at any timing within the period (effective period of the production reception), the production operation triggered by this is not performed when the production is received.

That is, in this case, if the production reception occurs within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body cannot be operated for production as a result. However, even if the performance reception occurs after the restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed, it is possible to perform the mutual movement with other board-side movable decorative bodies that are still performing the restoration processing. There is a fear of interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one of the operation effective periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel effect is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. The light emission is limited to the light emission mode at the time. In short, when a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, after the restoration processing of all of them is completed (all restoration processing is completed successfully), Only when the timing of performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body comes, the execution of the effect operation is permitted.

On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) the effect is received, it is processed so that when the effect is received, whether or not to perform the effect operation triggered by this is received. Becomes

That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform an effect operation after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). Will always arrive, and there is no concern that other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F will interfere with them even if the restoration processing is being executed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted in any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is turned on, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) for performing is reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred are in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. It will emit light.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) occurs so as to cross the timing at which the restoration processing is ended. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period before the restoration process is completed in the operation valid period, the specific movable decoration is still in the abnormal state, and therefore the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state. The production effect of the body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. Then, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred emit light only in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process), the other movable ornaments A to C and F are restored. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even during execution of, the production control as usual (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission), including the production operation of the specific movable decorative body. Will be executed.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decoration is the frame-side movable decoration F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) will not come after the restoration processing is completed (successful restoration processing). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the effect operation of the specific movable ornament is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) at that time is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred emit light in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will remain.

Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 182 will be described. In this example, when the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is notified, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are provided. , C and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side are grouped into two groups, and the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there is one.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decoration body and the frame-side movable decoration body. However, this kind of situation usually cannot occur while proper games are in progress, and it cannot occur as a result of fraudulent activity. It is highly likely that you are in a special situation where you manually tampered with all the movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may become troublesome, and it is required to end the notification state early.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is detected that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, C and the frame-side movable decoration bodies D, E, F, respectively. At the timing tj12, the restoration processing on the side of the board-side movable decoration body and the restoration processing on the side of the frame-side movable decoration body are started at the same time as described above. The abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, F side is not assigned to the channel, but the abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the side movable ornaments A, B, C side is assigned to the channel. I am trying to keep it output.

That is, the time for which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body that is the notification target is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, among the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the side that takes a long time to complete the restoration process is the “board-side movable decorations A, B, C”. By assigning only the "board-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides" to the channel, the "board-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sides" is generated. It becomes possible to finish the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F while being reproduced, and "the board-side movable decorations A, B, C corresponding to the board-side common abnormality notification" After the output of the "sound" is completed, it is possible to avoid the demand for the output request of the "common abnormality notification sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F side". The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, while the restoration processing is performed on the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the board-side movable decoration A, The "board-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" is assigned to a channel and played over a period until the timing tj18 at which all the restoration processing of B and C is completed. Therefore, the "common alarm notification sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F" is not reproduced. At this time, the effect sound allocation control to the channels is performed as usual, as described above.

On the other hand, in the notification mode by the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, the above-mentioned “sound notification” is performed by utilizing the difference in nature from the above-described notification sound. Differently from the above, the above-mentioned grouping is performed in such a manner that the information transmission function is more exerted, and different display is performed depending on which of the individually divided groups the movable ornament belongs to. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, it is responded to. The "notification by display" remains maintained, and the "notification by display" is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Further, similarly to this, for example, if the board-side movable decoration A is grouped with the frame-side movable decoration D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decoration A is completed, The corresponding "notification by display" remains maintained, and the "notification by display" is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is completed. Therefore, even if the restoration process of the specific movable ornament is completed first, depending on the execution situation of the restoration process of the movable ornament that is grouped with the specific movable ornament, the restoration process of the specific movable ornament may be more than that of the specific movable ornament. It is possible that the “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process is finished may be finished first.

According to the example of FIG. 182, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. Is not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound, and a movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. In addition, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, it is possible to individually restore the movable decorative bodies according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not respond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration processing for these movable decorative bodies is executed at the same time. This makes it possible to shorten the total time required for the restoration processing for the movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, compared to the movable decorative body that corresponds to the notification sound in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to return all the movable decorative bodies from the abnormal state to the normal state while one of the notification sounds is being reproduced, and the second notification sound is output. It becomes possible to avoid it.

That is, in this embodiment, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body, and the restoration processing according to each group is performed at the same time. Not limited to In short, a plurality of movable decorations (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side in the above example) that can be operated without being affected by the operation status of the movable decorations belonging to other groups. The plurality of movable decorative bodies (D to F) belonging to at least one group (frame side in the above example) of which the restoration processing can be independently executed for each group by classifying 182 and 183 are referred to as long as they can be restored at the same time by selecting them as movable ornaments that can be operated without being influenced by the operation situation among them. It is possible to configure so that the effects described above can be obtained.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body regularly visits. Further, the method of detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected, and for example, when an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as an effect operation at the timing when the player operates, but the specific movable decorative object is effected at the specific timing determined by the effect pattern. It may be made to cause it.

Further, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. You may make it perform the process which reduces.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, the movable body abnormalities have occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation is executed. Although the description has been made assuming the situation, the symbol variation may not necessarily be executed. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, or when the special symbol game is in the waiting state (for example, during the demo screen), the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorations D, Even when the movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG. 182.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, restoration processing is performed on all the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C provided on the game board 5 side based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. And However, if the board-side movable decoration body includes a plurality of movable decoration bodies that do not interfere with each other even if they are simultaneously operated, the board-side movable decoration body is arranged according to a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed simultaneously on only some of the movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other due to contact with each other.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the timing at which it is determined whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, and C and the movable body abnormality in the frame-side movable decoration bodies D, E, F are detected. It is assumed that the timing at which it is determined whether or not it has occurred is the same, but these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 183, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, C, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decoration bodies D, E, F. Even if the determination is made, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F is finished at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, C is finished. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the "board side common decorative alarm corresponding to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side" is completed, "the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request of the "common abnormality notification sound on the frame side" is required.

On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 182, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decoration bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, C. The processing structure may be such that it is determined to have been performed. However, in this case, at the time when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F, notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F By not performing each of the above, and waiting for it to be determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorations A, B, C, the board-side movable decorations A, B, C are dealt with. It is desirable to perform the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F, respectively, during the notification processing. In addition, as a result of waiting for the processing for determining whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C. In this case, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F is performed while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F is performed.

When a specific movable body of the board-side movable bodies is being processed as an “abnormal state that is not used for the production operation”, the board-side movable body itself is in a normal state but in an abnormal state. It becomes possible to include a movable body that is not used for the staging operation in relation to the "specific movable body". On the other hand, with regard to the frame-side movable body, no matter which of the board-side movable bodies is processed as the "abnormal state where it is not used for the performance operation", the "specific movable body" is in the abnormal state. Because of this, there is nothing to be used for the rendering operation, and if they are normal, all of them are used for the rendering operation. Further, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is processed as the “abnormal state in which it is not used for the rendering operation”, the other frame-side movable bodies are rendered as long as they are normal. It is ready for operation. In addition, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not used for staging operation”, if the board-side movable body itself is normal, all of them will be processed. Is to be used for staging. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to realize a movable effect in a wider space, it is possible to increase the number of movable objects used for the effect operation regardless of the abnormal situation of other movable objects. It is like this.

For the movable bodies illustrated in FIG. 182 and FIG. 183, when a movement abnormality occurs in the production operation in response to the production request such as the production pattern or the big hit production, the restoration operation performed accompanying it fails. Even in the case, the abnormality notification sound is not output. However, even if the symbol is changing, the restoration operation is performed on the movable body in which the movement abnormality occurs when the predetermined condition such as the detection of the illegal activity is satisfied, but the restoration operation is performed. It is desirable to output an abnormality notification sound based on the fact that the restoration operation has been performed or the restoration has failed.

[Automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous stroke function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, there may be a case in which a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) on a predetermined operation means are prompted to perform a plurality of operation effects corresponding to each of those operations. However, in recent years, during a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for such a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is provided, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) can be operated without operating the predetermined operation means a plurality of times. The automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic multiple-time operation function that allows the appearance mode to appear when multiple operations are performed by simply performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) It is becoming more and more popular to have a continuous hit function.

In such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), when an operation in a long mode such as so-called long-pressing is performed, a single-shot operation is performed within a relatively short time (one-time operation in a short time). ) Is performed repeatedly (such as a feeling that a fast repeated stroke is being performed) so that the player can remember it more than once. It can be said that it is important for suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player (such as a player) and encouraging the use of the function by various players. However, in the operation state, if a production change (for example, an operation sound) when the production reception is made is simply generated each time a relatively short time elapses, the same as a player. Even if you intend to operate with a single press, the short operation time (the time when the operation state is slightly maintained by a single press) is slightly lengthened or shortened, resulting in multiple receptions of effects. Occurrence occurs (multiple operation sounds are generated), or performance reception is generated only once (one operation sound is generated), and the number of performance receptions for one single operation is stable. There is a concern that the interest in playing games may be reduced due to the feeling of strangeness caused by not doing it.

In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous hitting function, when a so-called long press operation is performed, first, as in the case where a single press operation is performed, a performance change (for example, an operation sound) accompanying the performance reception is made. Etc.) occurs only once. After the first effect change (for example, operation sound) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After the elapse of the predetermined interval time, the effect change (operation sound) when the effect reception is made is repeatedly generated every time the predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since a time margin can be provided between the time when the first effect reception (operation sound) is generated and the time when the second effect reception (operation sound) is generated, a single press is performed. Whether or not the operation is repeated within a relatively short time only by performing a so-called long-press operation while avoiding the occurrence of discomfort due to the number of staging receptions being unstable when the operation is performed. It will be possible to realize a production that looks like this.

However, from the player's point of view, it is necessary to have a time margin between the first effect reception (operation sound) and the second effect reception (operation sound). This is wasteful in terms of operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) generated per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time. I feel that the speed is slow), and there is concern that the interest in playing games may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in the single-shot operation mode, the operation on the operation means is long. Similar to the case of performing the operation (long pressing, etc.), it is possible to intermittently output the specific sound associated with the operation on the operation means. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, a feeling as if a single-shot operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. It becomes possible for the player to remember (a feeling as if a quick continuous hit is being performed). As a result, all operation modes can be adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the effect (whether it is one effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single press. Even if there is, it is possible to appropriately maintain the number of times of production changes (for example, operation sound) per unit time.

FIG. 184 is a time chart showing an example of the control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Note that, here, the operation button 410 will be described as an operation unit. Also, in other drawings including FIG. 184, the white specific sound output in the drawings indicates the specific sound generated based on the reception of the effect in response to the operation on the button 410. The black-out specific sound output in the figure indicates a specific sound generated following the white-out specific sound output in the figure in the absence of effect reception when the operation button 410 is not operated. Is. It is desirable that the volumes and timbres of these specific sounds do not differ from each other and are the same.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 184(a), the operation state is maintained for only a short time at the timing tx11 in the predetermined effective period in which the operation opportunity of the operation (continuous hits, etc.) is given (single-shot operation). It is assumed that one operation is performed in. Therefore, at the timing tx11, it is detected (determined) that the operation button 410 has been operated, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation of the operation button 410 and the The process of starting the output of the display (the display pattern at the time of the operation) associated with the operation is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (the period from timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure), a specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently operated in the situation. It can be output automatically.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Even if no operation by the player is detected until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, "picone )) is output, it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184(a), five times (N times) from the start of the grace time TY1 to the elapse thereof. It is set to have a time length such that a specific sound of minutes (for example, "picone") can be output. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as continuous hits) is given, a specific sound (a sound corresponding to the effect reception) associated with the operation. Is at least five times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and four times thereafter (N−) every time the automation time TY2 elapses even without operation. It is output intermittently over the total number of (1) specific sounds.

Particularly, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace time TY1 is ended during the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 184(a), the grace time is output during the output of the fifth specific sound). Even when the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends is reached, processing (output interruption processing, other processing, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at that timing tx13 ((for example, “pico”)) Is not performed), and even after the timing tx13 arrives, the specific sound that has been output until then (in the example shown in FIG. 184(a), the first to fourth specific sounds) is output. The output (sound waveform) in the same manner is made to appear. In other words, if the specific sound accompanying the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes unclear whether the operation was received multiple times or not, and in the end, the operation feeling as if it was operated multiple times was felt. It is feared that it will be difficult for the player to remember (thinking that it is just a specific sound that is artificially generated in the non-operation state). It is expected to be solved appropriately.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined effective period ends during the period from the start of the grace time TY1 to the elapse of the grace period TY1 and the new operation is not accepted, Until the grace period TY1 ends, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be intermittently output even after the expiration of the predetermined effective period, it is possible to prevent the number of performance receptions from being unstable when a single-push operation is performed. Of course, it becomes possible for the player to feel as if he/she performed an operation within a period exceeding the predetermined effective period, and it is expected that the interest of the game will be improved. In this sense, a display (such as a remaining time display for which the valid period is continued) is made to be able to be recognized by the player as to whether the predetermined valid period is continued or is finished. It can be said that it is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) under the condition that it is possible to recognize that it is in the finished state.

It should be noted that with regard to “specific sound output accompanying operation” in the figure, rather than a signal waveform associated with the specific sound output, a volume waveform of a specific sound output every time the automation time TY2 elapses (other sound output is (Excluding waveforms) are conceptually shown. As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is consumed before the time required for the specific sound of the previous output to finish outputting to the end elapses, and the specific sound of the previous output is changed. On the other hand, the sound data of a new specific sound is output in such a manner that it is overwritten on a specific channel, and as a result, it is possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if performing a rapid tapping operation. It is expected that the player will be able to learn such a feeling.

By the way, as the reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to a mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 has passed, It may be loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced each time the automation time TY2 elapses. Alternatively, a plurality of specific sounds that are output continuously and intermittently may be reproduced as one sound data. In the case of a mode in which a plurality of specific sounds are reproduced as one sound data, it is not always necessary to output all the specific sounds as the same single sound, but a plurality of different single sounds are sequentially output. It may be.

On the other hand, regarding the display output in the game board side effect display device 1600 in the example shown in FIG. 184(a), after the operation time display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11, the operation button 410 is displayed. Even if the player's hand is released from the above and no operation is performed (the period from timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure), the display content of the operation-time display pattern is advanced multiple times in the situation. It can be done.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order over the time from the timing tx11 until the set grace time TY1 expires. It is supposed that the display contents of the operation display pattern can be advanced by executing.

The contents of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as shown in FIG. 185. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 185, "display scene 1" is a moving image showing a ally character holding a sword and trying to pull out the sword, and "display scene 2" is an ally. It is a moving image showing a state in which a character pulls out a sword and cuts off a match. "Display scene 3" is a moving image showing a friendly character having a sword fight in a first manner with an enemy character. , "Display scene 4" is a moving image depicting a teammate character fighting with an enemy character in a second mode with a sword, and "Display scene 5" is a teammate character of the enemy character and a third scene. It is a moving image depicting a state where a sword is having a meeting.

At the timing tx11, after displaying the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410, the display sounds 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is output intermittently, so that the ally character is an enemy. This makes it possible for the player to feel as if the contents of the production of fighting the character were developed in response to a plurality of operations. Note that each of the display scenes 1 to 5 need not necessarily be a moving image, and may be a still image. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the operation time display pattern, various effect displays (holding display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of those effect displays, an image that changes effect (color change, etc.) each time effect acceptance is generated by an operation by the player may be included, but recognizes whether effect acceptance is occurring or not. In order to make it difficult to display, it is important to display as an image smaller than the display pattern during operation.

Here, in the display pattern during operation (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The time length is set so that at least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if an operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as continuous hits) is given, at least five display contents of the operation display pattern (M pieces are displayed). ) Minutes (one display scene 1 that is displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (developed) thereafter) And the total number of) will be displayed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is ended during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 184(a), the grace time TY1 is ended during the output of the display scene 5 at the timing tx13). In contrast to the case of the specific sound, the display pattern during operation is terminated by interrupting the display scene 5 in a chopping manner at that time, unlike the case of the specific sound. That is, for the operation-time display pattern with the progressive contents, unlike the case of a specific sound without the progressive contents, by intentionally interrupting it in the middle of the display scene, the display contents can be displayed if the operation is continued. It is expected that the player will be given the impression that he may have been able to make further progress, and that this will encourage further operations by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the display pattern at the time of operation (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all display scenes 1 to 5 are not finished to be displayed between the start and the end of the grace time TY1. It can be said that the setting of “1” is more desirable in order to encourage further operation by the player. In order to encourage further operation by the player, it is necessary to display only some display scenes of all display scenes 1 to 5 between the start and end of the grace time TY1. Is more desirable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined valid period ends during the period from the start of the grace period TY1 to the elapse of the grace period TY1 and a situation in which a new operation is not accepted, the predetermined valid period is reached. At the end of the period (the state where the remaining time of the grace time TY1 remains), the display scene in the output state is interrupted to display the result as the operation display pattern. This will be described later.

In addition, after the display scene 1 is displayed, the display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progressed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. May be preset according to the time (automation time TY2) from the output of the specific sound to the re-output, or it may be set regardless of the time (automation time TY2). It may be one. In this sense, a display change such as switching to another display or generation of a new display in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 185, the display scene 1 includes “from a state in which a sword is held, There is a display change due to "video rendering with the sword removed", and there is a display change due to "effect generation when an ally character fights an enemy character" in display scene 3). More desirable. By using a display scene having such a display change, it is possible to make it appear as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the reception of the effect, so the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if and are not strictly matched. Further, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, in the example illustrated in FIG. 184(b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in the predetermined effective period in which the operation opportunity of the operation (continuous hits, etc.) is given. It is assumed that the operation is performed in the long mode to be maintained at. Therefore, also at the timing tx21, similarly to the case at the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation button 410 is operated is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the operation button 410 is operated. The output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display (display pattern during operation) associated with the same operation are started.

Further, even during the operation maintaining period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses, as in the case of the above-described non-operation period (the period from timing tx12 to tx13). A sound (for example, "picone") is output so that it can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order to operate. The display contents of the hour display pattern can be advanced in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 184(a).

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, during the operation maintaining period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). It periodically monitors (determines whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has ended (for example, detecting a falling edge in the detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and during regular monitoring, “every time the automation time TY2 elapses, The processing of outputting a specific sound (for example, "picone") and the processing of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order" are performed. In other words, in the operation maintaining period (the period from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22), “each time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and it is determined that the operation is detected. Based on a specific sound (for example, “picone”) is output” or “operation detection state is determined every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A process such as "advance display contents based on determination" is not performed, and "regular monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)". "Processing for outputting a specific sound (for example, "picone" each time the automation time TY2 elapses)" and "Several display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order. The process of causing" is performed. The “regular monitoring (judgment) of whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is being continued (operation state)” is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. Is done.

Then, after this, as a result of the “regular monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When the timing tx22 at which it is determined that the operation state) has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, at this time, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone” each time the automation time TY2 elapses”)” and “a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents)” according to a predetermined time and order. Even after the timing tx22 at which the operation state is ended, the “sequential output” is continuously executed for a period up to the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 is ended. That is, in this case, from the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22) to the situation in which the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). It becomes possible to intermittently output the specific sound in a specific processing period (timing tx21 to x23) that spans the timings of transitions with the above, and is re-outputted every time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the operation-time display pattern can be continuously output in a single processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

With such a configuration, in producing the specific sound output mode during the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 184(a) and the specific sound output mode during the long-press operation shown in FIG. 184(b), respectively. The processing mode (program) relating to the output of the specific sound can be shared between them. Similarly to this, the output mode of the operation-time display pattern during the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 184(a) and the output mode of the operation-time display pattern during the long-press operation shown in FIG. 184(b) are respectively displayed. Upon generation, it becomes possible to make the processing mode (program) related to the output of the operation-time display pattern common between them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 184(a), as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)” at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has ended. In addition, the state in which the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) changes to the state in which the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In the specific period (timing tx11 to x13) that crosses the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in a single processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and a plurality of display scenes are displayed. The display pattern during operation is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

As a result, even when the operation button 410 is operated only once in the single-press mode, the operation button 410 can be operated in the same mode as when the operation button 410 is operated in the so-called long-press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated, regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press), a single press is repeated within a relatively short time (one operation in a short time). The player can be made to feel as if it is being performed (such as feeling as if a rapid continuous hit is being performed). As a result, while stabilizing the reactivity of the effect (whether it is one effect change or a plurality of effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single press, any operation mode (single press, Even if the “long press” is adopted, it is possible to favorably maintain the number of times the effect change (specific sound) is generated per operation per unit time.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 184, the operation button 410 is operated only once in the single-push mode (FIG. 184(a)) and in the so-called long-press mode (FIG. 184). Although the same effect change is generated as in (b)), actually, in the example shown in FIG. 184(a), one effect reception is made at timing tx11, and the white outline in the drawing is specified accordingly. While the sound output is performed only once, in the example shown in FIG. 184(b), the effect reception for four times is performed every time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11, and white in the drawing corresponding thereto is performed. The output of the specific sound without a key is performed four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, it is necessary to receive at least a specific number of effect receptions, or every time the effect reception is performed, an effect lottery is performed and a specific effect is specified. In the case where the type of effect that causes the effect result to appear, in the example shown in FIG. 184(a), since only one effect reception has actually occurred, a specific effect result appears. That's not what you can expect. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, by actually performing the output of the specific sound without the black in the figure even when the effect reception is not generated, the effect reception is actually generated so much. Even if it is not possible to expect a particular performance result to appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a performance situation as if many performance receptions are occurring. Even if the player who is not good at (such as a continuous hit speed is slow) makes a single-shot operation, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much effect reception is occurring just by checking the specific sound output once, but from the start of the operation until the end of the operation. By confirming how many specific sounds are output, it is possible to attach a star degree of how much the production reception has occurred.

In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and after that, the grace time TY1 is timed up. By displaying the display scenes 3 to 5 repeatedly until the predetermined effective period ends or the effect conditions are satisfied within the predetermined effective period and a specific effect result appears, the ally character is made to use the enemy character and the sword. A depiction is made so that the discussion is carried out. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific effect result is a depiction of how the teammate character wins over the enemy character as a result of such a sword fight, and the specific effect result within a predetermined effective period. When the character does not appear, it is desirable to display the effect result at the time of failure in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a sword fighting.

In this way, when the operation button 410 is operated only once in the single-press mode (FIG. 184(a)), and when the operation button 410 is operated in the long-press mode (FIG. 184). 184(b)), the specific sound associated with the operation is intermittently output multiple times, and the operation display pattern associated with the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule to progress. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating a plurality of times will be encouraged to operate with peace of mind. However, in practice, in the above-described predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in a single-shot mode. In order to improve the enjoyment of the game, it is important to make the player remember the operation feeling that the reception of the effects is generated by one operation. However, if the operation feeling that the reception of the effect is generated by one operation is completely reflected as the effect, the player who is good at operating multiple times is more advantageous than the player who is not good at operating multiple times. Since the performance becomes as if it were present, it is required to achieve both the performance elements (operation feeling, performance fairness) having such a trade-off relationship.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, in order to secure the operational feeling that the effect reception is generated by one operation at a time, the operation "improved" is performed. Note that "whether a sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "when the display is generated (or changed)," and the operation button Each time the operation on 410 is performed in a single-press mode, a specific sound corresponding to the reception of the effect is output in synchronization with the operation timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 186(a), now, during the period from timing tx31 to tx32 of the predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple-stroke operation in a single-shot mode. Suppose Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, each time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, a new specific sound is output for the specific sound of the previous output (specific sound in the output state) triggered by the detection. A new specific sound is output by overwriting the sound data on the specific channel. As described above, even when the operation button 410 is operated only once in the single-press mode, the specific sound is intermittently output a plurality of times, but such an output is performed. When the operation button 410 is operated again in the middle of the operation, a new specific sound is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is intentionally cut (interrupted) in the middle of the operation, so that the operation by the player It becomes possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound is newly output at the timing when is performed and the effect is received.

In this embodiment, even when the operation button 410 is operated only once in a single-press mode or when it is operated by long-pressing, the specific sound output last time is output to the end. The automation time TY2 is consumed before the time required for is passed, and the sound data of the new specific sound is overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. This is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm for each constant time (automation time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple-stroke operation in a single-press mode. In such a case, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output every time the operation timing by the player arrives irregularly. It becomes possible for the player to suitably remember the operational feeling that the production reception is occurring.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 186(a) as well, during a predetermined effective period, every time the operation button 410 is operated, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). Processing (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has ended) is performed. In this regard, during the period from timing tx31 to tx32 when the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple-stroke operation in the single-push mode, the operation button 410 is continuously operated each time the operation button 410 is operated. As a result of the regular monitoring of whether or not it is in the (operational state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed, and accordingly, the predetermined time length is set. The grace time TY1 is set (not shown).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is newly operated before the grace time TY1 is ended (timed up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. The operation button 410 is then returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, during the period of timings tx31 to tx32, a state in which a process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state or the non-operation state is performed is performed. The state transition is performed rapidly between the state in which the grace time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 186(a), after six consecutive hitting operations have been performed between timings tx31 and tx32, the user is tired of the multiple hitting operations, and thereafter, in repeated operations. It is assumed that the time required will be significantly longer. For a player who is not good at such multiple operations, after the timing tx32, it is not possible to successfully perform multiple continuous hitting operations, so the number of performance acceptances is higher than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the interest in games will decline due to the reduction. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a specific sound is generated every time the automation time TY2 elapses, even though the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state is ended. The output processing is performed as described above. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at least after the timing tx32, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly long, at least the grace time TY1 from the end of the previous operation state. If you can perform repeated operations within a shorter time, it is possible to output a specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently, which makes it possible for the player to feel as if a rapid repeated hit operation is being performed. Like

For example, if it is determined at timing tx33 that the operation state has been continued as a result of regular monitoring as to whether or not the operation state has continued from the timing tx32, based on the determination. A grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, although the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly long, a specific sound is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the player is not performing the operation. By performing the processing, the specific sound associated with the operation is continuously and intermittently output. However, these specific sounds are output as the black specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) in the figure in the situation where the effect reception is not generated.

In this regard, the black specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) can occur only until the grace time TY1 elapses from the end of the previous operation state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 186(a), with respect to the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation button 410 is operated again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (the time is not up) based on the operation. Along with this, at timing tx34, the white specific sound (the tenth specific sound) in the figure accompanying the production reception is generated by cutting off (interrupting) the specific sound in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to a state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

However, such an operation state is also terminated at the timing tx35, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the above monitoring, and the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is determined based on the determination. It will be set again. Then, each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the player is not operating, a black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sounds) is output again, and the grace period is increased. When the player finally performs the operation at the timing tx36 before the time TY1 is up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In the figure, the white specific sound (15th specific sound) in the figure is output.

As described above, even after the timing tx32, even when the time required for the repeated operation is significantly long, the repeated operation is performed at least within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the last operation state is completed. As long as it can be performed, the white specific sound in the figure at the timing when the player operates, and the black specific sound in the figure that is regular in the situation where the player is not operating By outputting each of these, it becomes possible to continuously output the specific sound associated with the operation, and to make the player feel as if a rapid tapping operation is being performed. Therefore, according to the aspect related to the output of the specific sound, it is possible for the player who is not good at operating a plurality of times, in addition to being able to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by the operation once. Even if there is, the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state allows the specific sound accompanying the operation to be output continuously and intermittently. , Production fairness) is expected to be achieved at the same time.

However, even when the specific sound is output in such a manner, a plurality of times are displayed in the operation display pattern that plays a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period. If a player who is not good at operating and a player who is not good at operating multiple times are made to differ greatly in the manner in which the progress of the display content is made, in the end, a player who is not good at operating multiple times There is a concern that a player who is good at operating a plurality of times may be advantageous, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may deteriorate. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, regarding the display pattern at the time of operation, the display content is not advanced stepwise in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is increased. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the operation mode.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 186(a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repeated operation is significantly long after the timing tx32 of the predetermined effective period. However, by the time the set margin time TY1 expires, the operation button 410 is operated again to cancel the setting of the margin time TY1. Therefore, the grace period TY1 does not time up within the predetermined valid period and the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends is not reached.

When the operation is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 186(a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. After that, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 185 are predetermined as the operation-time display patterns, regardless of the operation status, even though the speed of the repeated hit operation is significantly changed as described above. It is only displayed sequentially according to the scheduled schedule and progresses, so that it seems that fairness is maintained between the player who is not good at operating multiple times and the player who is good at operating multiple times. Will be able to.

However, even if the manner in which the display content as the operation time display pattern is advanced is the same, the number of times the performance reception accompanying the operation actually occurs is the number of times that the player who is not good at operating multiple times and the number of times when operating multiple times It is unavoidable that we differ from our favorite players. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, it is necessary to receive at least a specific number of effect receptions, or every time the effect reception is performed, an effect lottery is performed and a specific effect is specified. In the case where a type of effect that causes the effect result to appear, after all, a player who is good at operating multiple times is more likely to cause a specific effect result to appear. The significance will be retained. In other words, while maintaining the significance of such production, the production fairness between the player who is not good at operating multiple times and the player who is good at operating multiple times in terms of production such as sound and display is maintained. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to prevent the player's interest in playing a game that is difficult to operate a plurality of times from being deteriorated by making it appear that the game is being played.

Further, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automated time TY2) at which the effect is received when the operation is performed by long-pressing, the mode related to the progress of the operation-time display pattern is Since they are the same, it is expected to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the button deterioration is accelerated due to an excessively rapid repeated stroke operation.

Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 186(b), it is assumed that the operation button 410 is not operated in time before the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ends comes within the predetermined valid period, and the timing tx37 (specific end timing) starts from the timing tx31. The dynamic display output (processing for sequentially displaying and advancing the display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and ended at that point.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, with respect to the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone"), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends in the output state comes. Even if it does, the process of cutting off the specific sound in the output state ((for example, “pico”)) at the timing tx37 (output interruption process, process of interrupting by overwriting with another sound, etc.) As described above, even after the timing tx37 arrives, the output (sound waveform) in the same mode as the specific sound that has been output until then appears, without performing the operation. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is output. If the operation button 410 is operated before the sound is muted, the player can feel that a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently, and that a rapid tapping operation is performed. It is possible to allow it.

In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 186(b), before the black specific sound (10th specific sound) output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is silenced, After the tenth specific sound output is interrupted, the white specific sound in the figure occurs twice, and then the black specific sound in the figure is intermittently output again, so that the specific sound accompanying the operation is generated. It can be seen that is output continuously and intermittently. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 186(b), the specific sound is continuously output in this way, whereas in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is once ended at the timing tx37. .. Then, after that, it is clear that the display content is redone from the first display scene (display scene 1) at the timing tx38 when the white specific sound in the figure is output again.

187 is a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hit function) described in FIGS. 184 to 186. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect that appears when an operation is performed within the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48) when a specific effect pattern that causes is generated.

As shown in FIG. 187, now, at a timing tx41, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given occurs, and at a timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period, the game is performed by the player. If the operation is started, also in this example of performance, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation of the operation button 410 and the output of the display accompanying the operation (display pattern during operation) are respectively performed. The process to start it will be performed.

However, in this effect example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output outlined in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. It is possible to execute the output processing.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the specific sound output without a black dot in the drawing is generated even in the situation where the operation button 410 is not operated and the effect reception is not generated. In this figure, the black specific sound output is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output generated at the timing when the effect reception is generated (in this effect example, the same mode is used). ) Will be output. Further, as described above, even when the operation display pattern appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the display content is developed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation in a mode of long pressing and a plurality of operations are performed within a predetermined effective period, it is possible to recognize how much effect reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that the situation is difficult. Therefore, in this example of performance, when an operation on the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined effective period, an output of a specific sound outlined in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound has a predetermined probability ( For example, it is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output situation of such a special sound by performing a process of outputting at 50% or the like).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 187, during a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) after the start of the predetermined effective period, two consecutive hitting operations at timings tx42 and tx43 and from timing tx44. By performing each of the long-pressing operations, the effect reception for a total of 9 times occurs, and the white specific sound output corresponding to these is continuously generated for 9 times (the 1st to 9th in the drawing). The white specific sound), and the number of times the performance reception occurs per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in the comparatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the start of the predetermined effective period, it takes a long time such that the operation in the single-shot operation mode cannot be said to be a continuous hit, and the timing tx46. , Tx47 is performed twice, the reception of the production of two times occurs, and the white specific sound output corresponding to these is generated twice with a time interval (the tenth in the figure). , 11th white specific sound), the number of times the effect reception occurs per unit time is relatively small.

However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the operation display pattern, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by the output of the black specific sound described above. It is continuously output during both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined effective period is started. In both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), the display scenes are switched in accordance with the predetermined schedule, and therefore, these progresses. It can be seen that it is difficult to determine whether the number of times the performance reception is generated per unit time is large or small only by checking the output status.

In this regard, when checking the output situation of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the white specific sound output in the figure occurs, a relatively early period (timing In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than in the comparatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the start of the predetermined valid period, and thus such a special sound is generated. It will be possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to a certain extent which of the white specific sound output and the black specific sound output in the drawing is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game, which is difficult to operate a plurality of times, can be maintained appropriately. In this sense, the special sound may be generated when the specific sound output is generated, but is output based on that the output condition different from the generation of the specific sound output is satisfied. For example, even if the specific sound is output, it is required that the special sound is not output.

Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate the special sound when the performance reception is generated may be changed according to the number of performance receptions that have occurred within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output and the black specific sound output in the drawing is occurring.

Further, considering that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time value longer than the time from the output of the specific sound to the silence, and the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to be twice the "automation time TY2". Further, when outputting a new special sound while the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable that the previous special sound is cut off (interrupted) and the new special sound is output.

However, with such a pachinko machine 1, the number of players who perform multiple operations is reduced because the same effect as when multiple operations are performed can be enjoyed simply by performing a long-press operation. However, there is concern that the significance of the effect that requires multiple operations will be abolished. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, in a predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48), at least in the period after the player's operation is started at timing tx42, the operation by the player is long-pressed. The state of being performed as a mode of single-shot operation, between the state of being continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and the state of being performed as a mode of single-shot operation (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48). The display of the specific image (specific display) is permitted only when the specific display condition is satisfied.

That is, in this case, in order to confirm the specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a mode of a single-shot operation rather than at least an operation by long-pressing. Therefore, it is possible to perform multiple operations without using the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple times operation) function. It becomes possible to give a meaning to production to performing a double operation (such as repeated hits), and it is expected that amusement of the game is maintained appropriately.

In addition, in this example of performance, in order to confirm the specific image, only the operation as the mode of the single shot operation is not required, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since it becomes more difficult for the specific image itself to appear, each time a predetermined effective period occurs, the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple times operation) function is not used and a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) are performed. ), it seems that you are trying to display a specific image that is highly difficult to appear, and you dare to operate multiple times without using the automatic continuous hit (automatic multiple times operation) function. You will be expected to encourage others to understand what you do.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 187, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the “automation time TY2”) has elapsed from the timing when the last effect reception occurred without a new effect reception occurring. In addition, the display of the specific image within the predetermined effective period is defined as the above-mentioned “specific display condition” that the production win is obtained in the predetermined production lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed ( Specific display) is to appear. In this regard, in the predetermined effect lottery, when the big hit is won in the big hit determination (or, a success situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period (the big hit expectation is high. In the case of (production situation)), the production hit is obtained with a probability of 70%, whereas when the jackpot is judged to be a big hit in the jackpot judgment (or operation is performed within a predetermined effective period). In a production situation in which a success indication cannot be displayed no matter how much the production is performed (in a production situation in which the expectation of a big hit is low), the production hit can be obtained only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display of the specific image (specific display) appears within a predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation that the big hit symbol will appear is high, and the interest in the game can be favorably maintained. The "specific display condition" is not limited to this, and "a specific non-operation time (here, "automation time TY2" without a new effect reception from the timing when the last effect reception occurred) (2 times the time) has been passed" and "the effect win has been obtained in a predetermined effect lottery" is adopted as the "specific display condition", and when this is satisfied, The display of the specific image (specific display) may appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

In addition to the above-described types as the predetermined production lottery mode, for example, there is a production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation state within a predetermined effective period (production situation with low jackpot expectation). At times, there is a 0% chance of winning the production (or not performing the production lottery itself), however, no matter how many operations are performed within the predetermined effective period, the success display cannot appear. It may be a mode in which the effect hit is obtained with a probability of 60% in the case of (the effect situation where the big hit expectation degree is low). According to such an aspect, it is possible to definitely show that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, so that it is not necessary to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Will be recognizable within a predetermined effective period. In this case, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 187, when a new effect reception occurs while the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific value is specified at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued under the condition that the operation by the player is not performed (the state where no new effect reception is occurring) is maintained. There is.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, in order to make a specific effect result (success display) appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48), it is required that at least a certain number of effect receptions occur. The appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 at which the eleventh production reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 in the display state at that time is cut off ( In the form of (interruption), a process of causing a success display to appear as a display pattern during operation is performed. The contents of this success display include the effect contents of the repeated portions (display scenes 3 to 5) in the operation display pattern, such as destroying the enemy character who was striking with the sword in display scenes 3 to 5. It should be related. Further, when the success indication appears, it is desirable that the big hit determination suggests that the expectation of winning the big hit is high.

Further, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 at which the eleventh production reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined effective period is terminated at that time and a new production reception is performed. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at a timing after the timing tx47, a white specific sound or special sound in the drawing is not newly generated, or a specific display is not newly displayed.

FIG. 188 is executed under the same processing conditions as those of the effect example shown in FIG. 187, but the continuous operation of the player in the mode of the single-shot operation is shorter than the grace time TY1. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when repeated for a long time that cannot be said.

As shown in FIG. 188, even when the operation in the single-shot operation mode by the player is repeated for a long time, as long as those operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within the predetermined effective period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is output continuously and intermittently, and the display pattern at the time of operation is the display content according to the predetermined schedule. Will be advanced. According to such an effect mode, even when the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined effective period, it is possible to create an effect situation as if the continuous hit operation is performed about 20 times. become able to. However, in this case, even a person who is seriously performing the continuous hitting operation cannot understand the meaning of performing the continuous hitting operation, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game is deteriorated.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is "Tx1", the length of the grace period TY1 is "Tx2", and a specific effect result (success display) within the predetermined effective period is obtained. When the minimum number of effect receptions required for the appearance is “EU”, these numerical values are set so that the relation [“Tx1/Tx2”<EU] is satisfied. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeated at the last minute when the grace time TY1 elapses and a specific sound and an operation-time display pattern are continuously output, respectively, even if the operation is performed, these operations are performed. The number of effect receptions that occur will be less than the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) that is required to cause a specific effect result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it is possible to prevent a specific effect result (success display) from appearing when an operation is performed in such a malicious manner. It is expected that those who enjoy playing games will be able to maintain a good sense of entertainment. In order to more reliably obtain such an effect, regarding the minimum number of performance receptions (EU) required for causing a specific performance result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period, Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by "Tx1/Tx2" as a numerical value larger than the integer value when the integer value is obtained by rounding up.

In this respect, in this example of performance, the minimum number of times (EU) of performance reception that is required to make a specific performance result (success display) appear within a predetermined effective period is calculated by "Tx1/Tx2". Since it is set to "11 times" which is more than twice the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, the failure display appears due to the shortage of the number of operations, which leads to a production situation in which it cannot be recognized whether the jackpot expectation is low or high.

Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment allows the display of the specific image to appear only when the single control operation is performed and the specific display condition is satisfied. Is. In this respect, in this effect example, when the above-mentioned "specific non-operation time" required for displaying the specific image is "Tx3", the relationship "[Tx1/Tx3"<EU] is established. It is supposed to set each of these numerical values so that. With such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause the specific display to appear each time it is operated once within the predetermined effective period, the number of effect receptions that occur within the predetermined effective period will be within the predetermined effective period. In, the number becomes less than the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) required for causing a specific effect result (success display) to appear. That is to say, in this case, a stylistic selection function of whether or not an attempt is made to make the specific display appear until there is a risk that the specific display result (success display) does not appear, and the specific display is displayed. By not being able to easily make many attempts to make them appear, it is possible to improve the performance when making such attempts, so it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game. Like

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 188, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined effective period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( In the form of (interruption), processing for causing a failure display to appear as a display pattern during operation is performed. The content of this failure display is that the player character is defeated by the enemy character who was fighting with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5, and the effect content of the repeated portion (display scenes 3 to 5) in the operation display pattern. It should be related. Further, when a failure display appears, it is desirable that the jackpot determination suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is low.

On the other hand, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined valid period ends regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. It is designed so that it is not cut off (interrupted), but this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success indication or failure indication is displayed, and then the success indication or failure indication will be displayed. The relationship is set to be hidden.

In this embodiment, a grace time TY1 is set after the operation state by the player is finished, and a specific sound output in the black state in the non-operation state is output until the grace time TY1 elapses. Although it is assumed that the operation is performed at least four times or more, the number of “specific sound output without black in the figure” that occurs in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having a length that is at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operating state is output at least twice or more. Since it is generated, it is possible to make the user feel as if the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) was continued even in the non-operation state.

Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Then, the ally character appears so as to have a struggle with the enemy character with a sword. Then, you may make it perform the specific display which shows a jackpot expectation degree in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2. With such a configuration, if the specific display is overlooked, it will not be possible to reconfirm until the grace time TY1 elapses. Therefore, it is possible to provide the dramatization of which one is to be selected, which is the disadvantage of being wasted by that amount and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the continuous hitting operation is allowed in such a manner that the effect reception is generated at an interval shorter than the interval (automated time TY2) at which the effect reception is performed when the operation by long pressing is performed. Thus, it is possible to realize the operation effect with a high degree of freedom by the player (see FIG. 186). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous stroke operation is performed, the mode of progress of the display scene in the operation display pattern is set to be the same as when the operation is performed by long pressing. Therefore, it is possible to make the high-speed repeated hitting operation less attractive, and it is expected that this suppresses the excessive operation of the operation button 410 and reduces the risk of damage or the like. Will be done.

In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing an effect of a type that requires at least a certain number of effect receptions, it is only necessary to perform an operation by long pressing within the predetermined effective period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the performance reception is performed the specific number of times or more. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception is performed the specific number of times or more only by performing an operation by long pressing for half the predetermined effective period.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, a time (specific non-operation time) that is twice the “automation time TY2” has passed without a new effect reception from the timing when the last effect reception occurred. Although the display of the specific image (specific display) is made to appear at the time, the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, if the specific non-operation time is any time value that is at least twice as long as the "automation time TY2" and that has the grace time TY1 as the upper limit value (less than or equal to the grace time TY1). While in the non-operation state, the black specific sound is output two or more times in the figure (as if the continuous hit operation is being performed in the non-operation state), It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) appears based on the number of pseudo operations in the non-operation state (the number of output of a black specific sound in the figure) reaching a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Game machine equipped with multiple effect operation units]
By the way, in the above, the game machine provided with the dish operation unit 400 capable of being pressed by the player and presenting the effect image to the player has been described. 189 to 240, a gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's motivation for operation will be described. The peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control of the effect operation unit described below.

FIG. 189 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 190 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged in the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described, the same configurations as those described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be appropriately omitted.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in front view. The sword production operation unit 5000 accommodates a sword part 5011 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and the sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decoration body 5001 including a sheath 5020 capable of forming a sword is formed.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 such that the sheath portion 5020 is movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword extracting direction and the sword storing direction. The sword part 5010 is normally in a sword state in which the sword part 5011 is housed in the sheath part 5020, and in the sword removal effect, the sword part 5011 is in a sword extraction state in which the player can visually recognize it. Then, the sword part 5010 in the extracted sword state can function as an operation unit that receives a sword operation by the player and returns to the sword operation state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, an execution opportunity of the sword production that accompanies the movement of the sword production operation unit 5000 (the sword decoration 5001) will be described. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of effect patterns in the effect mode capable of executing the extraction effect, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of extraction preparation transition effect in accordance with the type of variation pattern. 9B shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence/absence of the removed sword book effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the excision book production is performed after executing the excision blade preparation transition production, a pattern in which the excavation book production is performed without performing the excision blade preparation transition production in advance, and the excision blade preparation transition production in advance. Despite the fact that there is a pattern in which the sword cutting effect is not performed, a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword cutting effect is not performed, and the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword cutting effect is, Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and one without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 191(A), whether or not to execute the extraction preparation transition effect is randomly selected in accordance with the type of the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a big hit fluctuation fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit, a small hit fluctuation fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for a deviating fluctuation at the time of deviation, and fluctuations that are advantageous for the player. The higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the extraction preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the extraction preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of a variation pattern for big hit variation, with a probability of 30% in a variation pattern for small hit variation, and in a variation pattern for out-of-range variation. It is executed with a probability of 20%. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of deviation variation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the extraction preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when the reach effect is not performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the presence/absence of execution of the main sword removal effect is randomly selected in accordance with the type of variation pattern and the presence/absence of the extraction preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the cutting-out preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the cutting-out main effect is executed is set to be higher than when the cutting-out preparation transition effect is not executed. Further, it is set so that the probability that the sword cutting main effect is executed becomes higher as the variation pattern has a more advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability of executing the cutting-out main production is higher when the cutting-out preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, in the case where the cutting-out preparation transition effect is executed with the variation pattern for out-of-range variation, the probability that the cutting-out main effect is executed is higher than in the case where the extraction preparation transition effect is not executed in the small hitting variation pattern. Incidentally, in the case of the variation pattern for big hit variation, the extraction of the sword is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the extraction preparation transition production.

Further, when the cutting blade main effect is executed, the cutting blade preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern has the advantageous result for the player, the higher the probability that the cutting blade main effect with the aura member is executed. Is set. It should be noted that here, in the case of the variation pattern for variation of small hits, the sword cutting effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member due to the sword removal operation of the sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195, the sword removal operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword removal effect (excision preparation transition effect and extraction effect) will be described. Further, in the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 192, 193), and an aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of forming an integrated ornament (FIGS. 194 and 195).

FIG. 192 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword removing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself, (A) sword storage state, (B) first The sword removal state and (C) the second sword removal state are shown. FIG. 193 is a vertical sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 193 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make it easier to understand the operation of the aura member 5030.

As shown in FIG. 192(A), the sword decoration 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 192(B), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword removal operation in the sword removal preparation transition production is visible only to the player by pulling out only the portion of the Habaki 5011a fitted to the sword blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. It becomes the first sword removal state. In the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword removal operation in the sword removal main production, as shown in FIG. 192(C), the sword blade portion 5011 is further removed from the sheath portion 5020, and most of it is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state can function as an operation means capable of accepting a sword operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be independently operable in addition to the sword removing operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword storage state (FIG. 192(A)) to the first sword removal state (FIG. 192(B)). Inside the portion 5020, the movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 193(A)) to the open state (FIG. 193(B)) to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the changing process of the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first extracted state to the second extracted state (FIG. 192(C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is maximally moved, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword cutting state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is contained in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 193(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a driving unit (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear movement in the right direction of the rack 5031a and a left direction of the rack 5032a, and FIG. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011.

Further, below the Habakaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) can be illuminated and decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sword storage state to the first sword extraction state, it changes from the closed state to the open state. Although an example in which the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state after the above is deformed, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword removal state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state functions as the operation means (including not only the maximum operation but also the operation stopped halfway) ).

FIG. 194 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword removing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020. (A) Sword storage state, (B) First sword removal state, (C) The second sword cutting state is shown. FIG. 195 is a vertical sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 195 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make it easier to understand the operation of the aura member 5035. Here, configurations similar to those in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 194(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) is the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) described above. The aura member 5030 provided on itself is movable in the horizontal direction, whereas it is movable in the vertical direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 maintains the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword storage state, and changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (the sword storage state. Operates according to (⇔ first sword removal state ⇔ second sword removal state). This allows the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) to be united with the member (aura member 5035) on the frame side to be viewed as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 195(A). The aura member 5035 is provided such that the upper end thereof is below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely accommodated state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011 and the surrounding aura member 5036. Has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in a front view by driving means (not shown), and both pinions are meshed with each other, so that the rotational force is right in the rack. Converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 195(B), the surrounding aura member 5036 unites with the blade portion 5011 and stops at a position where the second extracted blade state is formed. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the enclosure aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the movable range.

Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, so that the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be illuminated and decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (storing state ⇔ first sword cutting state ⇔ second sword cutting state). Although an example of combining with 5011 is shown, the invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (coalescence) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second extracted sword state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state functions as an operating means (not limited to the full appearance state in which the maximum operation is performed, but an intermediate appearance in which the operation is stopped halfway) (Including the form with the aura member in the state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state.

(Example of sword production using a sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 201, a sword removal effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001) will be described. In the following, in the reach effect, when the extraction preparation transition effect is executed ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the extraction pattern is not executed ((X6) and (X7) in the figure). The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the unsheathed book effect is executed. 196 to 200 are effect transition diagrams of the extraction effect. FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation effective period of the operating means.

In the reach effect, first, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts by forming a reach state (FIG. 196 (X1)). Subsequently, the reachable decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image suggesting execution of the sword removal effect (movement of the sword decoration 5001) is displayed. Specifically, an image (Fig. 196 (X2)) of two samurai facing each other and starting to go to Iai is displayed, and then one samurai holds the sword in its sheath while holding its handle (Fig. 196(X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600 suggests that the sword decoration 5001 is movable. During this period, the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword storage state (FIG. 192(A)).

Next, when the extraction preparation transition effect is executed by the lottery based on the type of the variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the extraction preparation transition effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 197 (X4) and (X5). When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face of the samurai holding a sword with the eyes closed is displayed in the above-described image, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed over time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-storing state to the first sword-extracting state, whereby the sword-preparing transition effect is performed. In addition, when the extraction preparation transition effect is performed, the extraction main effect is more likely to be performed thereafter than when it is not performed. Therefore, the sword removal preparation transition effect can be said to be an expectation effect that indicates the expectation that the sword main effect will be executed by moving the sword decoration 5001. In the sword removal preparation transition production, by swinging the sword decoration 5001 in the first sword state up and down, the player is expected to further change the sword decoration 5001 to the second sword state. Good. The vertical swing of the sword decoration 5001 in the first sword removal state is performed to such an extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) cannot be visually recognized by the player when the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with the aura member. On the other hand, when the extraction preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration body 5001 may be kept in the sword storage state and the image shown in FIG. 196 (X3) may be displayed continuously.

Here, when the sword decoration 5001 in the subsequent sword cutting main production is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath 5020 at the timing of this sword cutting preparation transition production (FIG. 193 (A )) to the open state (FIG. 193(B)), the movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) to deform the blade portion 5011. At this time, the sword decoration 5011 in the first removed sword state can be visually recognized by the player from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the portion of the blade 5011a, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is the blade 5011a of the blade 5011a. Since it is provided on the lower side, even if the aura member 5030 is maximally operated, there is no fear that the aura member 5030 is visually recognized by the player. Further, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state. Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword removal state functions as an operation means capable of accepting the sword operation by the player, and at the same time, the expectation is set according to the form of the operation unit (sword part 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

After the cutting-out preparation transition effect is completed, if the extraction-based book production is not executed by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the extraction-preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat bleeds on the samurai's forehead (Fig. 197 (X6)), and the center decoration pattern is left-sided in the center of the screen along with the image that the samurai abandon Iai at the timing when the variable display of the center decoration pattern is stopped. And a stop mode different from the right decorative pattern, that is, a stop mode (here, “6”) is stopped and displayed (FIG. 197 (X7)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the first sword cutting state to the sword storage state at the time of FIG. 197 (X6), and maintains the sword storage state. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword ornament 5001 functioning as an operating unit.

On the other hand, in the case where the sword removal main production is executed, after the sword removal preparation transition production is finished, an image for slashing Iai is displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600, and the sword decoration 5001 is the second extraction sword. It becomes a state. Here, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second extracted sword state, an aura member-attached form which can be seen in a form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 and an aura member 5030 which cannot be seen are shown. There is provided an aura member-less form in which the undeformed blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized.

First, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, a case will be described in which the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state has no aura member. When the punching book production is started, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened and the eyes are sharp is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai whose eyes are closed in FIG. 197 (X5) (FIG. 198 (A1)), an image is displayed in which the sword that has been set is removed and the opponent samurai is cut off (FIG. 198 (A2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state at the time of FIG. 198(A1), and the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

Next, when the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword removal state and a predetermined period of time has passed, the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player to store the sword, that is, the handle 5012 of the sword 5010 from which the player jumps out of the sheath 5020. In order for the sword blade 5011 to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of pushing the sword blade portion 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath portion 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword storage operation of the sword decoration 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that prompts a sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same shape as the second sword state of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "Please insert the sword!" (Fig. 198 ( A3)). In the sword decoration body 5001, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, it is preferable that the image in the operation promotion effect is an image related to a series of Iai, and the operation effect image is displayed in the front so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Iai cut scene image (FIG. 198(A2)). (See FIG. 204 (G2) described later).

Then, during the operation valid period, the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 and puts the blade 5011 in the sheath 5020, and performs a sword storage operation. The post-operation effect is performed in accordance with the expected degree of advantageous result, and the effect is ended together with the winning notification of the symbol type (FIG. 199). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is flashingly displayed (FIG. 199 (C1)), and the central decoration symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the timing when the opponent's samurai is defeated and the image of Iai's decision is made, the central decoration pattern at the center of the screen is the same stop mode as the left side decorative pattern and the right side decorative pattern, that is, the big hit mode (here "7"). It is displayed (FIG. 199 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is off, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of a big hit (FIG. 199 (D1)), and the central decoration symbol that is variably displayed is The stop mode where the central decorative pattern is different from the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern in the center of the screen together with the image that the opponent's samurai can not be defeated at the timing of the stop display and Iai cannot be settled, that is, the detached mode (here "6") Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 199 (D2)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a case will be described in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the second extracted sword state has an aura member attached form. When the punching book production is started, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharp eyes are displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai whose eyes are closed in FIG. 197 (X5) (FIG. 200 (B1)), an image is displayed in which the sword that has been set is removed and the opponent samurai is cut off (FIG. 200 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state at the time of FIG. 200 (B1), and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Can be seen by the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 has already been deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even if only the blade portion 5011 is in the second extracted state so that it can be visually recognized by the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state to deform the blade portion 5011 and form the aura member attached form. Of course, it is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the second extracted sword state before the operation effective period starts. However, since the sword decoration 5001 is already in the second sword removal state in which the player can operate the sword, it is possible to surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation due to the appearance of the aura member 5030, while If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may make an erroneous operation. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable to the player during a series of movements from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state as in this example, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword cutting state. It is preferable to promptly start the operation effective period.

In addition, the images of FIGS. 200(B1) and (B2) are the same as the images of FIGS. 198(A1) and (A2) described above, and the player only looks at the images to determine whether the sword ornament 5001 has an aura member. It is impossible to judge whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp which of the form with the aura member and the form without the aura member. As a result, the sword decoration 5001 can be noticed before the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation unit, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration 5001 as the operation unit and enjoy the operation effect without confusion. You can Note that the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time do not have to be the same as described above, and may be similar images to the extent that the player can be made to look at the sword decoration 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in samurai images (differences in eye color and effect effects).

Then, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is in an effective operation valid period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same aura member-attached form as the sword decoration 5001. It will be displayed (FIG. 200 (B3)). The subsequent effect is the same as that of FIG. 199 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. In the case of the form with an aura member, the effect images in the above-mentioned FIGS. 199(C1) and (D1) may be displayed more flashy than in the form without an aura member.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 and the operation valid period in the sword removal preparation effect in which the sword removal preparation transition effect and the sword removal main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 201, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and first, the sword ornament 5001 is moved from the sword state to the first as the extraction preparation transition effect. The state changes to the sword removal state (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern with the form with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by a person. Therefore, in the stage of the first sword cutting state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword cutting state, and if it changes, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member attached form. I can't. However, when the sword removal preparation transition effect is executed, the sword extraction effect is executed, and the possibility of the form with the aura member is further increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased. In addition, even if the sword removal main effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 196 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword removal preparation effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body production corresponding to the suggestive production, a state change (movable) of the sword decoration 5001 from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state can be captured.

Then, when the sword preparation preparation transition finishes, the sword main production is subsequently started, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (time t2). After that, after a lapse of a predetermined period, the operation valid period is started, and the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation unit (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of Iaido effects is performed. Then, when the sword operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), post-operation performance is performed. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the second unsheathed state to the swordsed state by the swordsmaning operation by the player. Then, when the preset operation valid period ends and the reach state ends (time t4), the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby ending the series of Iaido effects (( Time t5). Note that the operation valid period may be ended by the detection of the operation by the player, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure. When no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword cutting state to the sword storage state when the operation valid period ends.

Here, during a predetermined period (time t3 to t2) from when the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword extraction state until the operation effective period starts, the player operates the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword extraction state (aura member). A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4 to t3) is ensured as a mode confirmation period in which it is possible to confirm whether it is the attached mode or not, the light emission mode, and the like. That is, even if the operation section (sword section 5010) that can be operated by the player reaches the operation position (second sword extraction state) that functions as the operation means, the operation acceptance is started immediately (the operation effective period is generated). Instead, the player is allowed to operate after confirming the final aspect of the operation section at the operation position. As a result, the player confirms the final aspect before operating the sword ornament 5001, expands the sense of expectation in the subsequent development (for example, the sense of expectation increases in the case with the aura member), and prepares for the mind. Since it can be done, there is a concern that the entertaining of the game will be reduced by the operation valid period starting as soon as the second sword state is entered and the operation performance is rushed without confirming the mode of the operating means. Can be wiped off.

The sword decoration effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed in a series of Iaido effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the movable effect (time t0 to t3) as the movable body of the sword decoration object 5001. The effect related to the operation effect (time t3 to t4) as the operation means is set. As a result, it is possible to impress the player with the unexpectedness and variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword decoration 5001, and thus to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game which is caused by the conventional uniform operation. You can

In the above-described production example, the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) itself, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, but the aura member 5035 is the sheath portion of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 provided on the frame 5020 is united with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 of the present example constitutes an operation means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the aspects of members (sword portion 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the decorative movable body whose appearance is general. doing. And, the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword state, the first sword state, the second sword state, the form without aura member and the form with aura member) is one of the game balls to the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 191). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display is advantageous for the player due to the change of the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, and increase the player's interest in the operation means (the sword decoration body 5001). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, before the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second sword removal state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation degree is suggested by changing the state of the sword decoration 5001 from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state. doing. Further, the expectation is suggested by making the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the first sword cutting state and the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state (operation position). The player becomes strongly interested in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the action to the operation position is performed after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation is high. In the mode, when the player grasps the operation means, there is a concern that the player may operate the operation means even though the operation means is not in the operable position, but the sword ornament 5001 of this example is operated. Since the state change to the position and the suggestion of the degree of expectation simultaneously proceed, the above-mentioned erroneous operation can be prevented.

Note that, in the above-described first extracted sword state, only the Habaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the single-blade state. At this time, the sword removal amount in the first sword removal state is set to be less than the maximum sword removal amount in the second sword removal state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the fully appearing state when in the second sword cutting state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the expectation is high from the first sword cutting state, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword cutting state, and You can raise interest in the changes that follow.

In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first sword removal state, it is necessary to have the aura member attached at the stage of the sword removal preparation transition effect (high expectations). Since the player can grasp it and holds high expectations, the discouragement when the sword sword production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes extremely large. Therefore, when the sword removal preparation transition effect is performed, the player's emotions are greatly affected by the presence or absence of the sword extraction main effect, and it is possible to provide an effect with a high interest in the game.

(Modification 1-Extracting a sword using operation buttons)
In the following, referring to FIG. 202 to FIG. 205, in the case where the blade cutting effect is executed in the reach blade effect, the blade cutting operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the blade cutting effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. 202 to 204 are examples of an effect transition diagram of the extraction effect of the first modification. FIG. 205 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. Note that the description similar to that of the above-mentioned sword production (FIGS. 196 to 201) will be appropriately omitted.

Here, a production pattern ((Y1) to (Y3)→(E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which neither the cutting blade preparation transition production is performed nor the cutting blade main production is performed, and after the cutting blade preparation transition production is executed. Regarding the effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3)→(F1) to (F3)→(G1) to (G4) in the figure in which the unsheathed effect is performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 The transition and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

When the reach effect is started, the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 202 (Y1)), and the effect indicating the operation of the operation button 410 is indicated by displaying the operation button image with the effect added. Is performed (FIG. 202 (Y2)). Then, when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is started, an image of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation effective period are displayed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed (Fig. 202 ( At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is emitting light, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emitting mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It should be noted that the light emission of the operation button 410 is ended when the operation by the player is detected.

In the case where the cutting sword preparation transition effect and the sword cutting main effect are not performed and the result is out, when the player presses the operation button 410, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image for notifying the disengagement result (“767”) is displayed ((E1) and (E2) in FIG. 203), and the effect is finished. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410.

Further, in the case where the main sword cutting effect is performed after execution of the sword cutting preparation transition effect, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword cutting state to the first sword cutting state. A cutting blade preparation transition effect is performed (FIG. 203 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white character “Tenchu” is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 203 (F1)), and the image in which the samurai of the teammate is trying to put his hand on the sword is displayed. (FIG. 203 (F2)). Then, the main sword cutting effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state (form with aura member) is started (FIG. 203 (F3), FIG. 204 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (the form with the aura member) by the sword extraction main effect, immediately before FIG. 203 (F2) and immediately after. Unlike the Isai image of the samurai of FIG. 204 (G1), the image of the lightning bolt is interrupt-displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 203 (F3), and the aspect of the sword ornament 5001 (whether the aura member is attached or not) is displayed. The degree of expectation of winning (hit) Iai depending on the strength of lightning.

The subsequent effect is the same as that of the above-mentioned FIG. 198 (A2), (A3), and FIG. 199. When the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword removal state for a predetermined period, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to the player. In order to function as an operation means capable of effectively accepting the operation of, the operation effective period for effectively detecting the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 occurs. Then, the player is urged to operate the sword within the effective period of operation (FIG. 204 (G2)), and the player is notified of the symbol type (hit, off) by the sword operation (FIG. 204 (G3) or (G2)). G4)).

Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 205, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration 5001 will be described. The modification 1 is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts the state change of the sword decoration 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation valid period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration 5001 starts to change the state, and first, the sword state is changed to the first sword extraction state. Here, in the first sword removal state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has passed, this time the sword decoration 5001 is operated so as to function as the operation means. When the effective period occurs, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 is performed (time t3), and when the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( (Time tx), the decorative pattern in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is finished (time t5). In addition, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the preset operation effective period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword ornament 5001 is in the final form when the operation effective period ends (first time). It is also possible to change the state and change the state at once in the form of a double-bladed sword with aura member. Further, the state change timing from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state is changed in accordance with the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, that is, the second sword cutting state is changed after a lapse of a certain time after the first sword cutting state You can Further, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 is set to the second It is returned from the sword removal state to the sword removal state.

In Modification 1, the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 by the player. The start timing of the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the start timing of the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (time tx). In this way, the sword decoration 5001 is moved in reverse (sword cutting operation and sword cutting operation) depending on which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operating means is operated during the operation valid period of the one operating means, it becomes invalid.

As described above, in the modified example 1, the state change of the sword decoration 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, the form (final form) when the sword decoration body 5001 functions as the operating means is determined (for example, the sword decoration body 5001 is deformed and the state is changed to a form with an aura member). The second sword state) can be displayed. Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's motivation for operation can be increased.

Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, effect images (FIG. 203 (F1) to (F3)→FIG. 204) corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. Since (G1) and (G2) are displayed, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Modification 2 – Stage aura extraction using operation buttons)
In the following, referring to FIGS. 206 to 210, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decoration 5001 based on the modification 1, specifically, the aura member 5035 combined with the blade portion 5011. A case will be described in which the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410. 206 to 210 are examples of an effect transition diagram of the blade extraction effect of the second modification. It should be noted that description of the same effects as those described above will be appropriately omitted.

The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 stages. The aura level 0 indicates a completely housed state (FIG. 195(A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. In the aura level 3, the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 in the second extracted sword state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the sword storage state, so that the player can fully see the state (Fig. 195(B)) is shown. The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears in a visible manner to the player by a third of the full appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears in a manner visible to the player in only two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

Here, there are no production patterns for the preparation for cutting blade preparation and no production patterns for preparation for cutting blade preparation ((Z1) to (Z3)→(H1) and (H2) in the figure). When the sword main production is performed, the production pattern (in the figure) in which the sword decoration 5001 is in the final form (the form with the aura member in the fully-appearing state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once. (Z1) to (Z3)→(I1) and (I2)→(G1) to (G4)), the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. The effect pattern ((Z1) to (Z3)→(J1) to (I2)→(G1) to (G4) in the figure) to be displayed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword ornament. The operation transition of 5001 will be described.

In Modification 1 described above, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is found by operating the operation button 410 once, but in Modification 2, operation of the operation button 410 is performed multiple times in a stepwise manner. It is characterized in that the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to perform a step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decoration 5001.

First, in the production pattern in which neither the sword preparation preparation transition production is performed nor the sword main production is performed, that is, in the production pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 does not change in state even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3)→The same effect transition as in FIG. 203(E1)(E2) is followed (FIG. 206(Z1) to (Z3)→FIG. 207(H1) and (H2)).

In addition, when there is no sword preparation preparation effect, but the sword main effect is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is in the final form (a complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effect as that of the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 202 (Y1) to (Y3) (FIG. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword body section 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword body section 5011 in the sword storage state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 207 (I1)). The sword decoration 5001 of the modified example 1 is different from the aura member 5030 in the form with the aura member 5030, and the modified example 2 is composed of the aura member 5035, but other effects are the same as those of the modified example 1 described above. 203(F1)(F2)→The same effect transition as in FIG. 204 is followed (FIG. 207(I1)(I2)→FIG. 204(G1) to (G4)).

Further, in the case where there is no sword preparation preparation effect, but the sword main effect is performed, the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times, and in the effect pattern in which the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 changes stepwise, 1 The same effect transition as before is followed up to the operation of the operation button 410 for the first time (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration body 5001 after the first operation is in the sword state to the second sword extraction state However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) invisible to the player. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 207 (I1) described above (FIG. 208 (J1)).

Next, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion operation in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 208 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

First, when the aura level to be set is "0" (that is, in the case of the form without the aura member), the aura member 5035 maintains the completely accommodated state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (no operation request of the operation button 410 is thereafter required), and the fact that the sword effect corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (Iaido effect) is returned is notified. An image (here, the white character of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (FIG. 208 (J3)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 is in the form without an aura member, and the same effect transition as in FIG. 203(F2)→FIG. 204 of the above-described Modification 1 is followed in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0. (FIG. 208 (J4)→FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

On the other hand, when the set aura level is any of "1" to "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the completely accommodated state to the 1/3 appearance state. Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 208 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is light-emitting decorated with a green color indicating an aura level 1.

Next, the operation effect of the operation button 410 for the third time is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 209 (K1)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green indicating aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "1", the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( From this point onward, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the user will return to the sword removal effect (Iaido effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword removal state (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen). A white character) is displayed, and an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K2)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a 1/3 appearance state, and in the rendering mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, as shown in FIG. 203(F2)→FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 209 (K3)→FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, the image showing the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "2" or "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is light-emitted and decorated in a red color indicating an aura level 2.

Next, the operation effect of the operation button 410 for the fourth time is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with the image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect that is illuminated is performed (FIG. 209 (K5)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red indicating aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (There is no operation request for the operation button 410 thereafter), and an image notifying that the sword decoration (Iai production) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state will be returned (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen). (White character) is displayed and an image showing the aura level is displayed (FIG. 210 (M1)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the 2/3 appearance state, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 203 (F2) of FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (M1)→FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "3" and the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image showing aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 210 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating aura level 3. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (hereinafter, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and the sword effect corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword removal state (Iaido effect) is obtained. An image (in this case, the white character “Iza” on the blackout screen) for notifying that the user will return is displayed, and at the same time, an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 210 (L2)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a fully-appearing state, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 3, the same as in FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. Follow the effect transition (FIG. 210 (L3)→FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In the above description, the degree of coalescence with the blade portion 5011 of the aura member 5035 is changed each time at the operation timing of increasing the aura level to widen the range visually recognized by the player (increasing the appearance degree). Not limited to Even if the aura level rises, the aura that has been confirmed when the aura level is confirmed (specifically, when the white character of "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen) without increasing the appearance degree of the aura member 5035. Stock type coalescence may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is integrated with the blade portion 5011 at a stretch so that the appearance degree according to the level is achieved. Further, the target whose level of appearance is increased stepwise is not limited to the aura member 5035, but the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011) may be the target. For example, the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) may be changed in stages from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state.

As described above, in Modification 2, since the sword ornament 5001 functioning as an operating unit is in the movable state, the player is requested to operate the other non-movable operation button 410, which is a surprising novelty. It is possible to provide various operation effects, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game as compared with the first modification. Further, since the player is given a plurality of operation opportunities to develop the production step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great involvement in the production and prevent the interest in the production from being interrupted. be able to. Further, the confirmed aura level is notified so that it can be recognized even in the subsequent production, so that the player can feel the aftereffect of the operational production.

(Another effect pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration 5001 will be described. 211 to 213 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001. First, the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword storage state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword removal operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword cutting state is the same as that of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to operate to the center of the front.

When the changing pattern forms the reach state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the three decorative symbols becomes the reach state (FIG. 211(A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 211 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decoration member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the blind is stationary above the display area in a state visible to the player (initial state). There is. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sword storage state.

In the princess reach effect, an image in which the princess is heading behind the blind is displayed (FIG. 211(A3)), and then an operation effect suggestion image indicating operation effect is displayed (FIG. 211(B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, and the player is urged to perform the sword operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 212(B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY can be moved in small increments in the vertical direction from the time when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the time when the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed. Good. Then, when the player's sword removal operation is detected, an effect is produced according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword removal operation performed by the player refers to an operation in which the player holds the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to pull out the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword removal state, the sword removal operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification operation may be an operation such that the sword section 5010 (or the handle section 5012) moves up and down, vibration, or the like, and an operation different from the sword removal operation of the player can be felt through the handle section 5012 grasped by the player. Good. The detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration 5001 (re-grasping for confirmation of detection, etc.) can be reduced to prevent the movable body from being broken or damaged. You can

The aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear in the sword removal operation performed by the player here, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword removal operation, depending on the degree of expectation. You may do it.

In the case where the end pattern is performed, when the player's removal of the sword is detected, the specific decoration member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initial state). (State) is maintained and a screen showing the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (FIG. 212 (C1)). Then, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the disengagement mode “767” (FIG. 212 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword storage state at the timing of notifying the stop result of FIG. 212(C2), but not limited to this, it is returned to the sword storage state at the timing of ending the detection notification operation. You may do it.

On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when the player's removal of the sword is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is overlapped with the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). 212. (D1) of FIG. 212. Then, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration is displayed. 5001 maintains the second sword removal state (FIG. 212 (D2)) At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example, By changing the shadow color, the size of the shadow, and the comment that is displayed after that, you may be able to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Hime Reach (such as the degree of expectation of winning or the gaming profit when it is a hit). ..

Then, after the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword removal state by the player's sword removal operation, that is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword removal state was set. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is moved (FIG. 212 (D3)). Then, when the sword ornament 5001 reaches the center position on the front surface of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decoration member SDY returns from the completely dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the visibility is good is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed after the screen is removed (Fig. 213 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword removal operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a hit, it notifies the hit together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 213 (E1) and (E2)), and an image is displayed to notify the princess who is sad when she is out (FIGs. 213 (F1) and (F2)).

It should be noted that when the player's removal of the sword is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. When the player is unable to move due to being grasped when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is displayed. Although the production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration 5001 can be operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing of the sword decoration 5001 (FIG. 212 (D3)). If it is held at the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the left-right movable effect. However, regardless of whether or not the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration 5001 has been executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) progress. Since it is configured to do so, the game progress will not be stagnant. It should be noted that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration 5001 or not to perform a movable effect. May be.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the player removes the sword decoration 5001 (vertical movement) to drop and move the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward by the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 in the forward direction (to the operation position). It can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword removal operation performed by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword removal operation is performed, which increases the operation value of the player and the motivation of the player to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, one operation means is configured to be operable in a stepwise different manner (vertical direction during operation, left and right direction after operation) by an operation by the player, so that an effect using a plurality of movable aspects is provided. Therefore, the operation value of the operating means can be increased as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the left and right movable effects of the sword ornament 5001 are effected for the purpose of performing an effect integrally with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after performing the sword removal operation with the sword decoration 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration 5001 can be moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the left-right movable effect of displacing to the left (the left end of the frame) may be performed. In addition, since the player's operation of the sword decoration 5001 of this example is a vertical operation (a sword extraction operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from below), the sword decoration 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 operates in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operation direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

Further, when a player's sword removal operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. In addition, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually check it, and thus it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for confirmation of detection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the subsequent moving effect of the sword decoration 5001 and damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, when the movable effect cannot be executed due to the contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to release the hand, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Since the operating means is prohibited even from contacting after the detection/informing operation is completed, the operating value of the operating means can be enhanced.

(Another effect pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 214 to 216 are views for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, reach transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including operation effects of the operation buttons 410 used for multiple purposes. is there. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B)→N in the figure) in which an expectation suggesting effect that indicates a degree of expectation that a variation in execution is a big hit is performed, and operation of the operation button 410 A pattern ((A)(B)→M in the drawing) in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is performed as effect will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 214(A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is. When started, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 214(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is produced according to an effect pattern set in advance.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 214 (N1)), an image suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is displayed (FIG. 215 (N2)). After that, the result of the current variation display (big hit, out) is reported (FIG. 215 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variable display being executed, and for example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expectation degree (FIG. 215 (N2)). You may make a character which changes the pending display displayed appear.

Further, in a pattern in which the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. FIG. 214 (M1), in which an effect image indicating that an operation effect requesting a sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed is displayed. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 (here, the message of the title "Sword chance" and the operation explanation "Welcome you to pay the sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decoration 5001 at this time is in a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 216 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword removal state and the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 begins, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state to produce the effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to put a sword on the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge that indicates the effective operation period are displayed (FIG. 216 (M3)). When the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, an effect based on the result of the variable display this time is performed.

When the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state ( FIG. 216 (M4)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message”) is displayed (FIG. 216 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, when the player's operation of putting the sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (a decorative pattern stop mode “767”) for notifying the deviation is displayed (FIG. 216 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible, and the player can operate the operation button 410. It is not possible to specify the subsequent development at the time of operating. Therefore, the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410 can be increased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment level of the game, which are concerned because the effect after the operation is monotonous.

Further, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (pressing operation and sword operation) between the first operation (pressing operation button 410) and the second operation (storing operation of sword ornament 5001) are the first operation. The player is requested based on the operation (pressing operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and suppress a decrease in amusement of the game which may be caused by a monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. The sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 may be an effective operation as the first operation opportunity. In this case, the operating means that is effective for the second operation opportunity is for the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Another effect pattern 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 217 to 221 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 in the reach effect, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2)→O in the drawing) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410. Even if the specific decorative member SDY (shadow material) is not moved based on the pressing operation of, and is displayed in the disengagement mode, the symbol display of the disengagement mode causes a change again to give the player another operation opportunity. The pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) in the figure → (P1) to (P4) → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given/R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 217(A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , "A message that the movable body cannot be moved with one button stroke" is displayed (FIG. 217(B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation production is performed (FIG. 217(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the effective period of operation are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is produced according to an effect pattern set in advance. The operation of pressing the operation button 410 is not limited to one shot (one shot), and may be repeated shots (a plurality of shots). Further, in order for the player to easily grasp the object (movable body) that moves by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is vertically moved in small increments in the initial state during the effective operation period of the operation button 410. You may do it. When the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state at this point.

In a pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) moves and becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is completely dropped from the initial state. It is dropped and moved so as to become (Fig. 218 (O1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image for notifying the big hit (a decorative pattern The stop mode “777” and “superb message” are displayed (FIG. 218 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In a pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (serving part) does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (serving part) is stopped only in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a swinging manner in the center of the screen (FIG. 219 (P1). It is expanded to a pattern (FIG. 219 (P2)) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the detached state (“767”), or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the revival pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the revival start image indicating that the variable display has not ended yet from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the outlying mode of FIG. (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 219 (P3)), the decorative pattern is again in the reach state and is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the screen, and at the center of the screen either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated. The operation valid suggestion image (face with eyes closed of friendly samurai) is displayed (FIG. 219 (P4)). Then, with the lapse of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 219 (P5)). This increases the player's expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-emitted and decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state and moved up and down. The operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means according to the effect pattern to be set, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. The production of (sills) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is operated is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image in which sweat is spread on the forehead of the samurai of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (operation button confirmation image) is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is illuminated and decorated (FIG. 220 (R1)). Then, while the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material) continues to move in small steps, and the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation of pressing the operation button 410 is prompted. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 220 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not illuminated and decorated when it is operated a necessary number of times.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is dropped and movable from the initial state to the all-drop state. (FIG. 220 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed on the lower right of the screen so that the player can visually recognize it. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 216 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is returned from the completely dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is released. An image (a message of a decorative pattern stop mode "777", "superb") informing the big hit is displayed in the center (Fig. 220 (R4)).

On the other hand, in the case where the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600. In the display area, a decorative pattern in a shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 220 (R5)).

When the sword decoration 5001 is used as the operation means, an image in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and the eye light becomes sharp (sword decoration (Confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state with the aura member attached (FIG. 221 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be light-emitted. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the sword ornament 5001 is valid for operation instead of the operation button 410. At this point, the sword ornament 5001 has an aura member or not. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Then, when the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is moved in small increments, a predetermined period elapses in the second sword cutting state, and when the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge that indicates the effective operation period are displayed (FIG. 221 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in the above-described FIG. 220 (R3) and (R4) is followed (FIG. 221 (FIG. 221 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of alignment, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 220 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 221 (Q5)).

In this way, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the state of fall of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow material) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and thus the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the degree of expectation indicated by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material) is not dropped and movable based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. To be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game, which is a concern because the operation effect is not shining and becomes a monotonous operation effect.

Note that although FIGS. 211 to 221 described above exemplify three production patterns for reach production using the sword decoration 5001, various production modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of effects and further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Pseudo continuous production using a sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIG. 222 to FIG. 236, a pseudo continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001 in which the form is changed step by step according to the number of times the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is continued will be described. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect that temporarily stops the variable display of the decorative pattern and re-changes, and is performed corresponding to the pseudo continuous fluctuation together with the pseudo continuous fluctuation in which temporary stop and re-variation are repeated once or a plurality of times. And the like. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears as if it has stopped, but in actuality it slightly fluctuates and continues the fluctuation. In the present example, when the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern for performing pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), the pseudo continuous production of the production pattern that can be selected by lottery of the production content by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explained.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, with reference to FIG. 222, the form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described. The sword decoration body 5001 described above is provided in two types, an aura member-attached form and an aura member-less form, but here, the sword part 5010 is further deformed by operating the handle 5012. There are two types.

FIG. 222 is a view for explaining the form of the sword decoration 5001 used for the pseudo-relational effect. The sword ornament 5001 here is provided so that the shape can be changed in two stages by the deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020 to the player. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 similarly to the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the aura member 5030 described above. 222(A) to 222(D) are diagrams showing the type (step change) of the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword storage state, showing step 0 form to stage 3 form in order. The sword decoration 5001 is in any of the stages 0 to 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 222(A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 192(A) and FIG. 194(A), and the operation is not required at all in the initial state. The morphology is shown. As shown in FIG. 222(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 222(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle 5012 is spread and moved so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from the inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 222(D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. The morphology is shown. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here enable the form change without making the sword decoration body 5001 into the second extracted sword state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 that can accept an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the inactive sheath portion 5020 work together to form an integral ornament, a more powerful operation means is provided. You can

(Pseudo rendition example)
Next, with reference to FIG. 223 to FIG. 236, an example of the effect transition of the effect pattern for performing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 231(A), the main control board 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. When any one of the six types of variation patterns is selected, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. As the effect patterns for performing the pseudo continuous effect, basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weak respectively corresponding to 6 types of variation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), specific effect patterns (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) are provided. When the variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern). ), one of the sword LV3 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, and the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern). Selected.

In the effect pattern, the number of times (1 to 3 times) the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is continued, whether or not the sword ornament 5001 is operated according to the number of times of continuation, and the operation opportunity is given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) is set (see FIG. 231(B)). The effect pattern names "LV1" to "LV3" correspond to the continuous number of times 1 to 3 of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). In addition, “weak” and “strong” correspond to the drop position (semi-drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blend material). In addition, the "pseudo sword LV1" is given a chance to select the sword ornament 5001 for the first pseudo-repeated variation (re-variation), and the player chooses not to operate it to continue the pseudo-reciprocal variation (re-variation). It is a production that can acquire. Further, the “pseudo resurrection sword LV1” follows the same production transition as the sword LV1 weak production pattern of the basic production pattern that gives the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 at the first pseudo-speech variation (re-variation). It is an effect in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is performed again after the end of the drop effect of the special decoration member SDY (braid accessory) based on the first change operation opportunity. Details of the effect contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set to have a higher expectation as the number of times of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation) increases, that is, as the morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 progresses, and further, the specific decoration member SDY (braid part). The lower the drop position of the object), the higher the degree of expectation is set. However, the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is 1 when the drop position of the specific decoration member SDY (the curtain) is half-fall. It is set to have the same degree of expectation as in the case where the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (blend material) is the total fall with the effect pattern that is less frequent. Specifically, the quasi-repeated fluctuation (re-variation) continues once and the half-fall sword LV1 has a low expectation of 29%, the pseudo-reciprocal fluctuation (re-variation) continues once and the total fall sword. The expectation of the LV1 strong effect pattern is 40%, the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is 2 times, and the expectation of the half-fall sword LV2 weak effect pattern is 40%, the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is 2. The expectation of the sword LV2 strong effect pattern of 1 time and full fall is 50%, the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is 3 times, and the expectation of the LV3 weak effect pattern of half drop is 50%, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change). (Variation) is repeated 3 times and the expectation of the sword LV3 strong effect pattern of all drops is set to 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set such that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected variation pattern even with the same effect pattern, and the higher the degree of expectation is, the higher the degree of expectation is set. The degree of expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern and when it is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern, respectively. Becomes Further, the degree of expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74% when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 strong variation pattern and the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, respectively. Moreover, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the expected degree of the pseudo revived sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

In the following, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 231(B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 223 to 230 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. 232 to 236. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an example of the effect transition of the pseudo continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. 224 to 226 are diagrams showing a transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given while the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. In addition, FIG. 227 is a diagram showing a transition example of the post-operation performance (falling performance of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow cast)) of the sword decoration 5001 during the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-changing) common to all the effect patterns. is there. In addition, FIG. 228 and FIG. 229 are diagrams showing an example of an effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. In addition, FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Also, FIG. 232 to FIG. 236 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (screening material) in the pseudo continuous production, and FIG. 233 shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern), FIG. 234 shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), and FIG. 235 shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern). 236 shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern. In the following, a description will be given along with an example of the effect transition when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the effect before the variable display is started and the reach state is reached.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 223(A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and a part of the blind is visible to the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in the stage 0 form (initial form).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 223(B) and (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo continuous effect (the effect content notification “A big chance if you can destroy 100 bodies” message, samurai warrior). The image that collects the aura) is displayed, suggesting to the player that the pseudo-relation production is started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) and the sword decoration 5001.

Then, as shown in FIG. 223(D), the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player re-varies the decorative symbols. Notify that. Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. By displaying with the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative pattern (start of the pseudo continuous change). At this time, although there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) and the sword decoration 5001, the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is changed in the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. ), a sword image showing the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in advance is displayed. In this way, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (the number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are notified, so the player Can grasp the stage of pseudo-link fluctuation (re-fluctuation).

Then, when the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is started, as shown in FIG. 223(E), it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time point of FIG. 223(D) described above. The pseudo continuous sword design is enlarged and the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 at this time is the timing at which the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration 5001 from the effect display in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) is started and the sword decoration 5001 is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration 5001. That is, that is, after the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) is started. The shape change timing of the sword decoration 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). For example, at the time of the above-mentioned FIG. 223(D), it is performed together with the display of the pseudo continuous sword pattern, and thereafter. The pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) may be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 223(F), while the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is enlarged and displayed, the sword cutting state is changed to the second sword cutting state. The state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 223(G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is the sword decoration body 5001 in the second unsheathed state in which the player can operate the sword operation enabled as the operation means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with the eyes closed) indicating whether or not the operation opportunity is given to the player is displayed. Subsequent productions include a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is valid for operation (a production pattern with a name "LV1") and a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is not valid for operation, depending on a preset production pattern. To an effect pattern with "LV2" or "LV3"). In the following, an example of the effect transition will be described in order for 9 kinds of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak production pattern/Sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, referring to FIGS. 224 and 227, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that makes the sword decoration 5001 effective as the operation means in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of the effect transition in that case will be described. When these production patterns are set and the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the display area of the production display device 1600 displays the above-mentioned FIG. The operation confirmation image (the image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that the operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) (FIG. 224 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“good opportunity!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation (FIG. 224 (T2)). . Then, while the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for promoting the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the sword image in the second extracted sword state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword decoration 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "Please put the sword!" (FIG. 224 (T3)). Then, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, the expected degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) according to the set effect pattern.

Here, in the case where the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern, when the sword operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U1), as shown in FIG. ) Is moved from the initial state to the full fall state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second sword cutting state to the sword storage state by the player's sword storage operation, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U2), the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) is returned from the all-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. An expectation notification image (“100 killed!”) for notifying the expectation of the variable display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown. Here, the expectation degree indicated by the full fall state is set to be higher than the expectation degree indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 remains unchanged. Here, the expectation notification image is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

Further, when the set effect pattern is the “weak” effect pattern, when the player's operation of storing the sword is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product). Is dropped and moved from the initial state to a half-fall state. The semi-dropped state is a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is dropped and movable to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-dropped state, and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. .. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second sword cutting state to the sword storage state by the player's sword storage operation, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U4), the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) is returned from the half-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as that shown in FIG. 223 (B). An expected degree notification image (“50 bodies destroyed!”) for notifying the expected degree of the variable display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 remains unchanged. Then, similarly to the “strong” effect pattern, the expectation notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation).

In addition, when the player's sword operation is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword ornament 5001, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, when the player's sword cutting operation is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial form of the sword housing state when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation).

Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends, as shown in FIG. 227 (U5), the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the reach effect is started. It As for the reach effect at this time, the reach effect having the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. In this way, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword operation is requested, the player grasps the degree of expectation by the falling position of the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) and then performs the reach effect. You can meet. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, different expectations can be felt each time, so that the player's motivation for operation is suppressed, and further, the decline in amusement of the game for uniform production is suppressed. can do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 231(B) and FIG. 232, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blend material) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231(B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player is performed. Further, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped by the operation of the player is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 232, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time when the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is started ( See FIG. 223(E)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223(F)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (FIG. 223(G)→FIG. 224(T1)→(T2 )), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the all-drop state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification of the all-fall expectation level is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak production pattern/Sword LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that makes the sword decoration 5001 effective as the operation means in the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. A description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not granted at the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) operation opportunity grant timing. After following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 223(A) to (G), no operation opportunity is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 223(G). A continuous image (image with the eyes of the samurai closed) indicating that is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second sword state is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (Fig. 224 (S1)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols will be re-varied (FIG. 224 (S2)). ). Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. By displaying with the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative pattern (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a sword image that shows in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo-sequential change (re-change). To be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the form and production level (number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are displayed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) and face it.

Then, when the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-simultaneous symbol pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 224 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is split left and right and the first decorative part 5012a is visible (FIG. 224 (S3)). Then, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is actually changed from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 224 (S4)). The morphological change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 1 configuration to the stage 2 configuration and the state change timing from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state may be set at the same time. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 changes all at once when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state (stage 2 form) in which the player can store the sword is enabled as the operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggesting image (a samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of the determination as to whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 225 (V1)).

Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given by the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image with the samurai's eyes open) indicating that the operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) is displayed ( FIG. 225 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“good opportunity!!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation (FIG. 225 (V3)). .. Then, while the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for promoting the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the sword image in the second extracted sword state (stage 2 form) same as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "Please put the sword!" (FIG. 225 (V4)). Then, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, as shown in FIG. 227, an expected degree notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) according to the set effect pattern. That is, the player can recognize that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has ended. If the player's sword operation is not detected during the operation valid period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern, In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) indicating that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) has been completed without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) being displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, when the player's sword cutting operation is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial form of the sword housing state when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation).

Subsequently, referring to FIG. 231(B) and FIG. 233, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blend product) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231(B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed. In the period T2 in which the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 2 form is made effective as the operation means, and the operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped by the player's operation is performed. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 233, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time when the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is started ( See FIG. 223(E). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223(F)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced (see FIG. 223(G)), the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) is generated without generating the operation effective period in which the operation of the player is effectively received. Is returned to the sword storage state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (see FIG. 225 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)) ), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 225 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword cutting operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state, and also changes its form from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-repeated change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the all-drop state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification of the all-fall expectation level is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 229 ( The player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern/Sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that makes the sword decoration 5001 effective as the operation means is set in the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change). An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. A description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

When the set production pattern is the sword LV3 weak production pattern or the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the sword decoration is provided at the operation opportunity giving timing of the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after the effect transition shown in FIG. 223(A) to (G)→FIG. 224(S1) to (S4)→FIG. 225(V1) is followed, In the display area, a continuous image (image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above, and is in the second sword cutting state. The sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword storage state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 225 (V5)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols will be re-varied (FIG. 225 (V6)). ). Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. By displaying with the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative pattern (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a pseudo sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a sword image that shows in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change). To be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (the number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are displayed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) and face it.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is started for the third time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 225 (V6) is enlarged and displayed. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012b projects above the first decorative part 5012a and both decorative parts are visible as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 225 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is actually changed from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (Fig. 225 (V8)). The morphological change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 2 configuration to the stage 3 configuration and the state change timing from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state may be set at the same time. Further, the form of the sword decoration 5001 may not be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-continuous changes, and may be collectively changed for a plurality of stages when the final stage is reached. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 changes all at once when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form) in which the player can operate the sword is enabled as the operation means, that is, the game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of the determination as to whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 226 (X1)).

Here, when the set production patterns are the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image with the samurai's eyes open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1) is displayed ( FIG. 226 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“good opportunity!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation (FIG. 226 (X3)). . Then, while the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for promoting the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the sword image in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form), which is the same as the sword decoration 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "Please put the sword!" (FIG. 226 (X4)). Then, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, as shown in FIG. 227, an expected degree notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) according to the set effect pattern. That is, the player can recognize that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has ended. If the player's sword operation is not detected during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) indicating that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is completed without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is displayed ( See FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, when the player's sword cutting operation is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial form of the sword housing state when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation).

Subsequently, referring to FIG. 231(B) and FIG. 234, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blend product) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231(B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) occur. In the period T2 that is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is not given the opportunity to operate, and in the period T3 when the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is made effective as the operation means, and the game is played. Opportunity is given to a person. When the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped by the player's operation is performed. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 234, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time when the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is started ( See FIG. 223(E)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223(F)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced (see FIG. 223(G)), the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) is generated without generating the operation effective period in which the operation of the player is effectively received. Is returned to the sword storage state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced (see FIG. 225 (V1)), the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) is generated without generating the operation effective period in which the operation of the player is effectively received. To the sword storage state (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form at the same time as the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) starts (see FIG. 225 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the stowed state to the second unsheathed state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) ), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword cutting operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state, and also changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-variation change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the all-drop state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification of the all-fall expectation level is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword removal state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 229 ( The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern/pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 228 and 229, the sword ornament 5001 is made effective as the operation means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-continuous variation is made by the player selecting not to operate. An example of the effect transition in the case where the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern capable of obtaining the continuation (level change effect) of (re-change) is set will be described. A description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given at the operation opportunity giving timing of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). .. However, the operation opportunity at this time is not the above-mentioned operation opportunity for requesting the player to actively operate, but the selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after the effect transition shown in FIG. 223(A) to (G)→FIG. 224(T1) is followed, the operation opportunity of FIG. 224(T1) described above is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation selection image (a message "Is it a good opportunity?") indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z1 )). Then, while the effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, an operation selection promotion effect for promoting the selection of the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the same sword image in the second extracted sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation effective period are displayed together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword". The image is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z2)).

Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is a fluctuation of either the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). Subsequent production transitions greatly differ depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern.

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the sword operation by the player during the operation valid period When detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 227) as the basic effect pattern sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is followed.

On the other hand, when the player's sword operation is not detected during the operation valid period, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”), the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above. When the operation valid period in which the operation is performed ends, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second extraction state of the stage 1 form to the initial state of the sword state, and the selection operation opportunity of this time is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (“Is it a good opportunity...”) indicating that it was an opportunity to operate is displayed (FIG. 229 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (blind material). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the escape image (“enemy, escape!”) indicating that the pseudo-repeated fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) being performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends, the reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 229 (W3)).

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the player's sword operation is performed during the operation valid period. When detected, in the same manner as when an operation is detected in the operation opportunity in the basic effect pattern sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), FIG. 227 (U3)→(U4) (FIG. 227(U1)→ (U2)) After tracing the production transition, during the remaining production period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3), the variable display by the decorative pattern in the normal mode is performed (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode at the same timing as the predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 227 (U5). reference).

On the other hand, when the player's sword cutting operation is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation valid period in which the operation is performed ends, the operation pseudo continuous variation (re-fluctuation) is continued due to the acquisition of the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-described FIG. 228 (Z2) to the continuous image (FIG. 224 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not added at the first operation addition timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation. After that, similarly to the basic sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, the above-described FIG. 224 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1) → FIG. 225 (V5) to (V8). )→FIG. 226(X1) to (X4)→FIG. 227(U1)→(U2) or (U3)→(U4)→FIG. 227(U5).

As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) greatly differs in effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 1310. If the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and if the operation is performed at the selection operation opportunity, it becomes a basic effect pattern. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and face the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described below, but you will also reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the degree of expectation that you could have learned if you originally operated it. .. Further, when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If no operation is performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) as in the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if it is operated, the effect (continuation change of the sword decoration body 5001 due to the level-up effect) due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) which could be obtained without the operation is overlooked and the shape of the sword decoration body 5001 is initially set. It will be returned to the form. For the operation in the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 which is not known to the player is the opposite, and the operation is performed in the operation effective period during which the operation is effectively accepted. It provides a novel effect that brings a disadvantageous operation result to the user. Further, the operation in the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation in the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation in the selection operation opportunity with a feeling of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game caused by a uniform operation effect.

In particular, in the case where the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). When the player operates the sword ornament 5001 in the selection operation opportunity, the stage 3 form is leveled down from the stage 1 form in the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration 5001, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is increased to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, a preset number of operations are required in the production pattern, but in this example, the operation opportunity can be given twice (LV1 and L3) in advance, but the operation is performed once by the player. It is possible to end the grant at an opportunity and provide a novel effect that more reflects the player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate with respect to an operation effect that does not appear as a substitute, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the operation of the player, the initial form to the stage 1 form may be performed. You can see only the changes up to and reach the production of reach. Since the player can make an operation selection without being caught by the selected variation pattern (set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player a feeling that his or her own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, if the sword decoration 5001 is operated in the selection operation opportunity, the shape of the sword decoration 5001 returns to the initial shape, but the expectation can be grasped by the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory). . When the sword ornament 5001 is not operated without grasping the degree of expectation, and when the form further changes (levels up) and is operated in the operation opportunity given after the form 3 is formed. Therefore, there is a case in which the degree of expectation can be grasped by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blend material). In this way, the operation selection in the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection not operated produces a lower effect than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set so that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 231(A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the expectation level of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. In order to provide an appropriate effect more suited to the player's feeling of selection, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in amusement of the game.

Then, referring to FIG. 231(B) and FIG. 235, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (braid part) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of is described.

As shown in FIG. 231(B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed, a sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form. Is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) falls half by the operation of the player is performed. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped by the operation of the player is performed. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is originally provided three times, it is possible to perform the specific decoration. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (time period T2+time period T3).

If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns. Then, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is continued, and the second pseudo continuous variation. In the period T2 in which (re-changing) is performed, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-changing) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. As a result, the operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player is performed. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped by the operation of the player is performed. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 235, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 223(E)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223(F)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword removal state) (FIG. 223(G)→FIG. 224(T1)→FIG. 228 (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation by the player is started (see FIG. 228 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Although illustration is omitted, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow harness) changes from the initial state to the total drop state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the total drop. The difference is that the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) continues (when set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern), The ornament 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state with the end of the effective operation period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S1)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced (see FIG. 225 (V1)), the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) is generated without generating the operation effective period in which the operation of the player is effectively received. To the sword storage state (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form at the same time as the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) starts (see FIG. 225 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the stowed state to the second unsheathed state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) ), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword cutting operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state, and also changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-variation change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although illustration is omitted, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow harness) changes from the initial state to the total drop state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the total drop. The difference is that the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword removal state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 229 ( The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

Further, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV1 strong variation pattern), The decorative body 5001 changes from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state with the end of the effective operation period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 230, after the same effect transition as in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed and it is shown as if it directly enters the reach effect, the pseudo-revival (re-variation) is restored. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. A description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, similar to the aforementioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIG. 223(A) to (G)→FIG. 224(T1) to (T3) Follow the production transition. Then, when an operation by the player is detected in the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, the same effect as in FIG. 227 (U3), (U4), and (U5) described above is used. After tracing the effect transition of (UA1)→(UA2)→(UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo continuous sword pattern is restarted again. When the operation by the player is not detected in the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state to the initial form of the sword-cutting state with the end of the operation effective period, as in the other effect patterns. Instead of the above-described FIG. 230 (UA1)→(UA2), the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is finished without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) being performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) indicating that the action has been performed is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)).

Resume resumption of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7↓7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 230 (UA3). The decoration pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the mode showing the form and the production level (the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration 5001. This notifies the player (FIG. 230 (UA4)). At this time, the sword image and the effect level 3 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed in the pseudo continuous sword design. At this point, the sword decoration 5001 has no change and maintains the initial form (the state of sword storage). As described above, in the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form sword ornament 5001 is not performed, A pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the stage 3 form sword decoration 5001 is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 230 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form is informed, the form and effect level of the sword ornament 5001 in the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo continuous sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 230 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display acts on the sword decoration 5001. The display is moved toward 5001 and the change of the decorative pattern is displayed again. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to a stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration portion 5012a, and the second decoration portion 5012b are operated so that both decoration portions can be visually recognized as an integral decoration body. (FIG. 230 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is actually changed from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 230 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration 5001 is changed in shape at once in a plurality of stages from the initial form to the stage 3, it is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the interest of the player.

After that, the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form) in which the player can store the sword is enabled as the operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the above-described FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X5). When the player's operation is detected after following the effect transition, although not shown, the specific decorative member SDY( depending on whether or not the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity regardless of the type of the variation pattern. The type of falling effect of the curtain is determined. When the operation is detected in the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is once in a half-dropped state, so the level is upgraded to the above-mentioned FIG. 227 (U1)→(U2). → Expectation degree notification production is performed by the full fall production of the same specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) as (U5), and the pseudo continuous variation (re-fluctuation) ends. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected in the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the half-drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (blend product) as in (U3)→(U4)→(U5) of FIG. 227 described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends.

In addition, when the operation by the player is not detected in the operation opportunity to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation effective period ends like other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state to the initial form of the sword state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo decoration change (re-change) is carried out without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) being performed. The escape image (“enemy, escape!”) indicating that the process has ended is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)), and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) ends.

In this way, in the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the same effect transition as in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is restored again, the level of the step 2 mode is skipped and the step 3 mode is performed. Since the same development as the production at the level of (the production of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) of the third time in the basic production pattern) is performed, the player is surprised and reaches with a stronger expectation than other production patterns. Can face. Further, even if the player is given an operation opportunity in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped, the player will not be discouraged. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of simulated fluctuations (re-changes).

Next, with reference to FIG. 231(B) and FIG. 236, operation execution timings of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blend product) when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

As shown in FIG. 231(B), in the pseudo revived sword LV1 effect pattern, during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-repeated fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is made effective as the operation means, Give the player an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the drop effect (expectation degree notification) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the player's operation Production) is performed. In addition, if there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed.

Then, after the first pseudo-repeated fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is finished and once the normal pattern fluctuation display is returned, the third pseudo-reciprocal fluctuation (re-fluctuation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the morphology of the sword ornament 5001. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is made effective as the operation means, and the operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shelter material) is performed in the period T1, the drop effect (expectation degree notification) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (shelter material) is dropped by the operation of the player. Production) is performed. Further, in the period T1, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shelter member) is not performed in the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (shelter member) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. Performance (expectation degree notification performance) is performed. In addition, if there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 223(E)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 223(F)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (FIG. 223(G)→FIG. 224(T1)→(T2 )), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 230 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 230 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode (see FIG. 230 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is restored (FIG. 230 (UA4). )reference).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form at the same time when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is resumed (see FIG. 230 (UA5)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 230 (UA6)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) ), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword cutting operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state, and also changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, when the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow-casting object) is performed in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-fluctuation), the specific decoration member SDY (shadow-casting object) is changed from the initial state to the all-falling state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 227 (U1)). Then, at the end of the pseudo-repeated change (re-change) of the revival, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) returns to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 corresponds to all the fall. Since the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case where the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow-effect article) is not performed in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the specific decoration member SDY (shadow-effect object) is changed from the initial state. The difference is that the state changes to a half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)), and an expectation notification image of the expectation corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword removal state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the pseudo-repeated change (re-change) of the revival, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a flight image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 (W2 )), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

As described above, in the pseudo continuous production using the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous variation times are two and three times in the sword LV2 production pattern and the sword LV3 production pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times. When it is less than, the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state for each pseudo-simultaneous variation (re-variation) to make it operable by the player, but an operation effective period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the sword state without any (without giving the player an opportunity to operate). For this reason, the player will have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the operation will be effective even when the sword decoration 5001 is in an operable state, so that the sword decoration 5001 as an operating means can be interested. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to operate and a decrease in interest in the game.

In the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial form when the player operates the sword ornament 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression, which is different from the conventional uniform operation effect of providing a beneficial effect for the player by the operation of the player. Let the player carefully select the operation. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation on the sword decoration 5001 interested, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for the operation and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the sword ornament 5001 can change its form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation effective period is generated), so that the expectation and interest of the player can be increased step by step, and the game can be improved. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. It should be noted that during the period from when the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating state and in the second sword removing state (operating position) until the operation valid period is generated, the player operates in the operating position (form, light emitting, movable It is desirable to have a period during which sufficient confirmation can be made. As a result, the player can check the operation mode before operating the sword decoration 5001, and thus the operation effective period is generated as soon as the second sword removal state is reached, and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to eliminate the concern that amusement of the game will be deteriorated by shifting to the operation effect in a hurry.

Although the step change of the sword decoration 5001 described above is shown in the form, it is not limited to this. It may be possible to change each production mode such as a change in the light emission mode and the operation mode of the sword decoration 5001 in stages in correspondence with the number of continuous pseudo continuous fluctuations (re-changes).

(Apply to look-ahead production)
It should be noted that although the sword cutting effect in the pseudo continuous reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a prefetching effect. The case of applying to the prefetching effect will be described below. In the following, an example will be described in which the third hold is the prefetch effect target and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

When the hold that is the prefetch effect is generated as the third hold 3, the same effect as that of FIGS. 223(B) to 223(F) described above is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. The sword decoration 5001 is different in that the sword decoration 5001 is in the second extraction state only when an operation opportunity is given (when the operation effective period is generated). Then, in the next variable display (that is, the variable display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in the above-described FIG. 223(G)→FIG. 224(S1) to (S4) is performed. Further, in the next variable display (that is, the variable display of the hold 2 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as the above-described FIG. 225 (V1)→(V5)→(V8)→FIG. 226(X1) to (X3) is performed. Be seen. As described above, in the prefetching effect, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-putting state to the second sword-cutting state only when the operation valid period occurs. Here, the operation valid period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 which is the prefetching effect target is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. The second sword state) is performed. Then, the same look-and-play transition as shown in FIG. 227 (U1)→(U2)→(U5) is followed, and the prefetching effect is ended.

Although the state change of the sword ornament 5001 from the sword state to the second sword state is limited to the generation timing of the operation effective period, even if the gradual morphological change is performed at the end of the variable display, the next variable display is displayed. It may be performed at the start. In the look-ahead effect, the same effect as the pseudo-reach effect is produced.

(Pre-operation suggestive effect using the specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240, a pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is in the operation effect in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to indicate whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operationally effective among a plurality of operation means according to the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory). . Specifically, as the suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product), the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is located at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation effective period in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggestion position, and the sword ornament 5001 (from the operation button 410). If the hit expectation degree is high and the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237(B)) that causes the operation effective period in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (shadow harness) is positioned at the initial position even during the operation effective period. When the operation is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated in the state in which the specific decoration member SDY (shadow harness) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. , The sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 70% (including step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) in the first suggestive pattern and the second suggestive pattern of the pre-operation suggestive effect will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
237 and 238 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern selected by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production|presentation in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed, when it determines with operation being effective. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 237(A)), the operation button which is previously determined to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation effective period for the operation means of either 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a concrete effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is operation enabled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 237(B)), and at this time, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) which is determined in advance to be operation effective is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sillary material) is maintained at the initial position. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestive pattern is set to be executed as a pre-operation suggestive effect at a higher rate than the second suggestive pattern (described later). In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated at a higher ratio than the sword ornament 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 is enabled for operation, as shown in FIG. 237(C), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Even when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 237(D), the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation on the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state (the form with the aura member), so that the player can perform the sword storage operation.

When the operation of the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) that is operationally effective is detected in FIG. 237(C) or (D) described above, if the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, The specific decoration member SDY (shadow cast) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) remains in the initial state and is not movable, and the outflow is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image (decorative pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 239 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. In addition, in FIG. 240, although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 is once enabled and the sword decoration 5001 is not enabled, and then the sword decoration is performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern in which the operation of the body 5001 becomes effective.

As shown in FIG. 239 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 which has been previously determined to be operation valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The operation is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a concrete effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is operation enabled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (blend product) is displayed. From the initial position, when viewed from the front, it operates in a small drop state (indication position) overlapping the upper portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) moves vertically between the initial position and the suggestion position. It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) that is determined in advance to be operation-enabled while the specific decorative member SDY (sillary material) is moved to the suggestion position. generate. In this example, when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material) is in the suggestion position, the sword decoration 5001 is set to be operation effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword ornament 5001 is valid for operation, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA3), the operation valid period for the sword ornament 5001 in the state where the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is operating at the suggested position. Generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation on the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state (form with aura), and the sword operation can be performed by the player. Even when the operation button 410 is enabled, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, although at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA2), the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) is operating at the suggestion position, and along with that, the effect display device 1600. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that indicates the effective operation period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decoration member SDY (sill-shaped object) is moved from the state in which it is operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (serving material) may be moved to the fully dropped state or the initial state from the state in which the specific decorative member SDY is operating without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) which is operationally effective is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 239 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 237 (C) or (D) is displayed. Similarly, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) remains in the initial state and is not movable, and the outflow is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image (decorative pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

In addition, the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio at which the sword ornament 5001 becomes effective is different, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the motion, so that the specific decoration member SDY (blend product) is selected. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect that are used.

(Step-up pattern)
In the case where the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is moved to the suggestion position is performed and the sword ornament 5001 becomes operation effective, In addition to the basic pattern of following the above-mentioned production transition of (AA1)→(AA3) in FIG. 239 until the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective, the operation button 410 becomes temporarily effective, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

As shown in FIGS. 240 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 which is previously determined to be operation effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promoting effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) as in the case of FIG. 239 (AA1) described above and the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) are moved in small steps (FIG. 240 (BB1)). ). Then, the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is moved to the suggestion position. Along with that, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that shows the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 240 (BB2)). Here, even if the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 238 is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means is performed. A suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 240 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-putting state to the second sword-cutting state (form with aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, operation means that become operable is displayed from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001. A switch notification image (messages of “extraction chance” and “hazardous to have the sword paid”) is displayed to notify that the display will be switched to (FIG. 240 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is in the state of moving to the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition (FIG. 238) after the operation promotion effect in the above-described second suggestion pattern.

Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect) in the above-described FIG. 240 (BB2). It suffices if the sword ornament 5001 can be operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestive pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestive pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is set to be operation-effective is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (spare member). ) Is changeable, and the operation means by which the position is effective is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237(B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (shadow harness) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. The second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 239 (AA1), the sword ornament 5001 is shown in FIG. 239 (AA1), in which the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (shadow harness) is located at the suggestion position. Therefore, there is a high degree of expectation that the operation will be effective.Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (silver accessory) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, and therefore the pre-operation suggestion The interest of the production can be enhanced.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (blind material) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Then, since the motion effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 238) after the operation of the operating means, the drop effect is sequentially moved from the small up and down movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind object), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is operationally effective by the movable body is operationally effective, is not limited to this. It may be displayed to indicate the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means to be operated is determined, not only the operation button 410 is turned on or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second extraction state, but the operation means to be operated is moved by vibration or the like. You may.

In the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is once activated (or when it appears that the operation is activated) in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (shadow harness) is located at the suggestion position. (2) A step-up pattern is provided so that the sword ornament 5001 can be operated effectively. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to expect that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that. Therefore, the motivation for operation and the amusement of the game are reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operation enabled is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 237(B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239(AA1)), the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is displayed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (indication position) overlapping with the upper portion and to make small vertical movement between the initial position and the suggestion position. It should be noted that when the operation valid period is generated thereafter, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player is suggested to produce an operation according to the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to expect the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 effectively. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is strongly desired to occur, so the pre-operation suggestion The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation related performance]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the specific effect is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Perform production with patterns. In the production period in which the specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (effective period) in which a specific production execution condition is satisfied can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. Then, based on the establishment of the specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation effect (eg, an effect in which the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is suggested). The degree of expectation related to the privilege grant, which is suggested as a result of the specific operation effect, may be 100% or 0%.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation is performed as an operation means provided for such an operation effect (an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of privilege grant when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include operation means (sword decoration 5001 and the like) other than this. In this regard, in the specific effect pattern, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when the specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the other operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), even if the operation opportunity is not performed, only the pre-operation effect that the operation opportunity is given is generated. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (a big hit expectation degree) for awarding is higher than that when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation related to the privilege grant suggested when an operation opportunity is granted to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), an operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the player is in the previous stage where the production has not been performed yet and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result which suggests that the degree of expectation for privilege granting is high) does not appear in the operation effect corresponding to the operation on another operation means (sword ornament 5001 or the like). Even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific effect reception period (effective period), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game through such operation-related effects. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any one of a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001 and the like) having such a rendering property. In such a case, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunities are given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is activated (allows effect reception),
When the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is activated (enabling the production to be accepted), the operation on the operation button 410 is activated after the production of the "specific operation-related production" is started (the production can be received). ) A first effect mode in which an effective period (effect reception period) is generated, and an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (allowing effect reception) without the effect of starting "specific operation-related effect". A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect by executing any of these effect modes). An effective period (reception acceptance period) during which the reception is possible is generated.

According to such a configuration, there is a case where there is a period during which the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) can be received. Regardless of whether a period during which the operation means other than the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is ready to receive the effect occurs, common (specific ), the operation-related effect can be executed, so that it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can accept the effect. By causing the operation to be performed while the game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started, the operation-related effect corresponds to any one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001). The effect reception period will be generated. At least at the time when the effect is started, which operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period is generated. It is desirable to keep it confidential. Regarding each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. May be displayed (displaying the effect result display), and a plurality of operations may be performed within the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs. It may be configured to indicate to which means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) the operation opportunity is given (the effect result display appears), and the operation-related effect is executed up to any timing. Whether to do it can be changed appropriately.

Hereinafter, some performance modes that can be adopted when performing such a common (specific) operation-related performance will be sequentially described. In each of the following description examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of a common (specific) operation-related effect. The types of operating means are not limited to these, and three or more operating means may be prepared as a plurality of operating means targeted for a common (specific) operation-related effect. Further, in the following performance examples and other examples thereof, mainly, the content of the performance in the case where any performance reception period occurs after the common (specific) operation-related performance is executed is shown. ) In the case where one of the effect reception periods occurs without the operation-related effect being executed, the effect content may be omitted. However, as the content of the effect when a common (specific) operation-related effect is not executed and one of the effect reception periods occurs, "the operation for the operation button 410 is performed without the specific operation-related effect being executed. A general effect such as "a prompting operation instruction image appears, or an operation instruction image prompting an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears." Furthermore, in each of the following performance examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related performance is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach performance is performed. It is also possible to generate a common (specific) operation-related effect as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period when is executed, or it is common during the execution period of the jackpot game. A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed with each of the other examples of effects to be described later, and can also be appropriately combined and executed with each of the above-described effects. It is possible. Each effect described below can be combined by substituting a part of it with the effect of each other example described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Then, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform the effect of each of different examples described later. The same can be said for the effects of each of the other examples described later.

[First production mode]
241 and 242 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being performed after the effect of the specific operation-related effect is started. It is the figure which shows the production example (the 1st production aspect) which is done.

FIG. 241(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

FIG. 241(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 241(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241(b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display for moving each inside is displayed. In this way, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, whereby the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation on any of those operating means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect, while it remains unclear which of the ornaments 5001 is allowed to receive the effect. You will be able to.

In FIG. 241(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241(b) progresses, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (in this case, a character display such as "operate" and a performance reception) that prompts the user to operate any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) in a state where the display is stopped in each area. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the available period) is displayed to show the production status.

According to such an effect mode, although the operation on at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted as an effect, those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). It becomes possible to make it unclear which one of them is allowed to receive the performance. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 241(c)) in both the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect and the situation in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. Because it is displayed, it is none other than that. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means are operated before the operation on at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) can be accepted. Common (specific) operation relations as shown in FIGS. 241(b) and 241(c) over a period until after the operation of at least one of the (operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) is ready to receive an effect. I'm trying to perform the performance.

Therefore, not only in this effect example but also in each effect example described below and other examples thereof, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 241(b) and (c). Absent. In short, when the specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It only has to occur in the middle). With such a configuration, it is unclear which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect, and at least one of those operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). It is possible to suggest that the operation for one is acceptable for performance. For example, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are displayed. It is also possible to cause none of the images SYG to appear and cause an effect image different from any of them to appear as the specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more securely conceal which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, in order to more securely keep the effect reception period for the operation button 410, and for the sword decoration 5001. It is more desirable to set the time required from the execution of the specific operation-related effect (start of effect) to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period to be the same as when the acceptance period occurs.

In addition, although it is unclear which one of the operating means should be operated as the operation instruction displayed while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, a display prompting an operation for any one of the operating means (“ Etc.), and always operate a specific operation means of the plurality of operation means, regardless of how the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. The display may be such that it prompts the user. In short, as the operation instruction, the same effect mode is made to appear in both the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect and the situation in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping it secret which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect.

Further, in the example of the effect (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 241(c), which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is capable of accepting the effect is hidden. , Whether the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can accept the performance or the operation on the sword decoration 5001 cannot accept the performance (in any of the first to third situations described later). However, only the operation button 410 among the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is in a light emitting state to prompt an operation on the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the side of the sword decoration 5001 to connect the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect state in which the image shown in FIG. 241(c) appears is that only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated. It is in the first situation in which the production can be received, in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can be received, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001. Both are set to be in one of the third situations in which the production can be received. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs among these plural situations, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410). (Situation) is expected to be higher than when the privilege is granted. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (the situation in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) within the pattern variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable that the rate is set lower than the rate at which the situation) is generated.

Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), the operation button 410 is operated when in any of the first condition (operation button 410) and the third condition (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). Is performed (whether the “FF” in the figure is advanced), or in any of the second situation (sword decoration 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 (when "GG" in the figure is progressed), an effect reception is made and an operation time operation corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 242(d) and 242(f)). Is to be done.

In the on-operation production, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242(d) and (f), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display production is performed on the production display device 1600. ("Chance!!") is executed. Note that, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and “intense heat!!”, which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting a privilege by preparing a plurality of effect modes and displaying any of these effect modes in accordance with effect acceptance. As for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, similarly to this, for example, an effect mode in which the operation of displacing to the front of the display area is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Alternatively, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), effect reception is performed by an operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242(d) and (f). Then, it is possible to execute the control to bring the operating means into the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation) based on the operation.

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242(d), although the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the operation is performed in response to the effect acceptance. The control for reciprocating the sword ornament 5001 on the side not performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although the effect reception is generated as a result of the player's operation on the operation button 410 and the operation-time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the sword decoration 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect on the sword decoration 5001 side may have been executed. It becomes possible to appeal the possibility such as "to the player.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242(f), as a result of the player performing a sword removal operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the sword position according to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword cutting position (sword cutting state) instead of returning to the (sword cutting state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the swords-position (the sword-storing state) to the swords-slicing position (the swords-slicing state) based on the operation by the player, and is maintained in such a swords-slicing state. Occasionally, an on-effect production will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (the specific decorative member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, the sword decoration body at that time is executed. By confirming the operation state of 5001, it is possible to make the user feel a real feeling that the operation effect caused by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 side is being executed.

Then, after the operation effect (FIGS. 242(d) and (f)) is performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 242(e), a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the reach effect execution period, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation time effect on the sword ornament body 5001 side is executed. Even when it is executed, when the predetermined time elapses (before the reach effect is started), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the non-operation state (the sword position (the sword state)). Control to return to will be performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operating state (reciprocating operation, or maintaining in a sword cutting state) be continued for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage before returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001). 5001) whether the production can be received or not, the common (specific) operation-related production is started, and the common (specific) that the production is started is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 will be able to receive the performance, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can receive the performance. It becomes possible to give an operation opportunity in the state where it is kept secret.

In this performance example (first performance mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) can accept a performance, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) is a performance. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 can be received without being able to receive the operation, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, Due to the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect, the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect. You will be able to deceive as if you were not there. That is, in this case, when the effect is received, it is possible to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 on the lower side rather than the sword ornament 5001 which is the side on which the rate of relatively high expected effect is performed. It becomes possible to expect that the operation means should be operated when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, when the operation means on the side that is not ready for effect reception (the side on which the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the effect reception period is consumed by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, when the operation means on the side that is not ready to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, Although the effect reception required for execution of the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the operation itself is detected, and the operation on the side that can accept the effect based on the detection is performed. You may make it perform control which ends the production|generation reception period with respect to a means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk that an operation opportunity is lost. Therefore, it is possible to encourage careful operation by carefully considering which of the plurality of operation means is capable of receiving the performance. become able to.

Further, in the above-described example of the effect (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is obtained in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side. Although it is configured to be executed, these operational effects may have different effect contents. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed by the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light). , An original effect sound is generated), it is possible to more appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted.

Further, in the case of preparing another effect mode which can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is involved in the occurrence of the other effect mode. When the effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the effect reception period related to the generation of the different effect mode is not set. A performance reception period for the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001 if the first operation means is the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001) is set. Regardless of whether the operation is performed or not, when the first operation means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 241(c), the operation effect may be performed. That is, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for the first operation means is performed while an effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set, While another effect mode is executed as the operation-time effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an effect acceptance period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (( 2) (when the effect reception period for the second operation means is set), when another operation mode is not executed as an operation time effect, when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation effect will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation time. Settings are made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when another effect mode is made to appear as the operation time effect, the second operation mode is not made to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation time effect on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as effect contents different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

In the example of the above-described effect (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001. A first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can receive the performance, a second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can receive the performance, and an operation on the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. Both of the operations with respect to are set to correspond to any of the third situations in which the production can be received. In addition, in this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is made to appear when the effect reception is made, whereas in the third situation, when the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or another effect mode (different from the effect during operation in the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the third situation is not necessarily required.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as the operation means to which the driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as the operable operation means. In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242(f), no operation is performed by the player as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242(d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control for operating the operation means on the side not operated by the player, it is at an earlier stage than when the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end the operation state and allow the gaze by the player to be naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (shadow work). In addition, examples of the "movement" of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source include "movement", "rotation", "rocking", and "vibration". It is possible to do, and this is not limited to the example of the effect, and is the same in other example of the effect.

[Second production mode]
243 to 246 are to be executed as an effect showing a progress of the effect until the specific operation-related effect appears either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means is suggested, and when the second effect result appears as the result of the effect, the plurality of operation means is generated. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect (second effect mode) in which it is suggested that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will occur.

FIG. 243(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

FIG. 243(b) shows an effect situation in which a particular operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 243(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243(b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The images are simultaneously displayed in the figure, and a state in which the lightning bolt image IZ is acting on the images BTG and SYG is depicted. In this way, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, whereby the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation on any of those operating means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect, while it remains unclear which of the ornaments 5001 is allowed to receive the effect. You will be able to.

In FIG. 243(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243(b) progresses, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed as effects. The effect of pushing each other out of the display area of the device 1600 by pushing each other is performed.

That is, the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) is “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other to obtain those images. Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area?" is performed as an effect, and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and a production result (second production result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, a production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 243(b) and (c) is either "the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001". Even if occurs, it corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods".

Note that the left side of FIG. 243(c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right side of the figure shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts the situation in which it is in a dominant position to remain in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such a situation of inferiority/dominance changes momentarily with time.

244(d) shows that the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243(c). Is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while keeping it secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept effects is executed. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 244(d)). By executing the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

In addition, at this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt an operation, so that a plurality of images can be displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the operation of the operation button 410 of the operation means is ready to receive the effect (that is, during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, even if only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is set to the light emitting state, the operation of the operation button 410 is prompted.

Note that the effect shown in FIG. 244(d) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243(b), (c), etc.), or without the specific operation-related effect. The production progress (for example, production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 243(a)) may be performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 244(d) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege be set higher than that.

Also, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when the effect (FIG. 244(d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed through the specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. Proportion in which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that in the case where the effect (FIG. 244(d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed without passing through Is desirable to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to a dramatic extension described later when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

FIG. 244(e) shows that, as a result of the operation shown in FIG. 244(d) being performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operating means, the effect reception is performed and the operation is responded to. This is a depiction of how the operation-time performance is performed.

The effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 244(e) is the same as that in FIG. 242(d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 244(e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. In addition, at this time, in spite of the player's operation on the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second position according to the reception of the effect. It is also the same that the control for reciprocating to and from the position (control for setting the operating state) is executable. Note that, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and “intense heat!!”, which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting a privilege by preparing a plurality of effect modes and displaying any of these effect modes in accordance with effect acceptance. As for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, similarly to this, for example, an effect mode in which the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Then, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 244(e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 244(f), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. However, since the effect using the sword decoration 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation effect was executed (the reach effect is started. Control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-operated state (the sword storage state)). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operating state (reciprocating operation, or maintaining in a sword cutting state) be continued for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage before returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 245(g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243(c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the display area. An effect that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second effect result). When the effect contents are advanced, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) that indicates that an operation opportunity is about to be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect is executed. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 245(g)). Is performed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 of the plurality of operation means can be accepted for the effect (the effect acceptance period for the sword accessory 5001 will occur). .

Further, at this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as "extract sword" or bar display indicating remaining time of performance reception period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means is ready to receive the effect (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 including the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be in the light emission state) is in the light emission state. By doing so, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is prompted.

Note that the effect shown in FIG. 245(g) is not limited to the case where the effect progresses through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243(b), (c), etc.), but without the specific operation-related effect. The production progress (for example, production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 243(a)) may be performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 245(g) is performed, if the effect is performed via a specific operation-related effect, if the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation of granting the privilege. In addition, when the effect shown in FIG. 244(d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 245(g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to make the expectation degree for the privilege grant higher than that for the case, and to lower the expectation degree for the privilege grant as compared with the case where the effect shown in FIG. 245(g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

FIG. 245(h) shows that, as a result of the operation shown in FIG. 245(g) being performed on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operating means, the effect reception is performed and the operation is accepted. It is a depiction of a state in which a performance during operation is being performed.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 245(h) is basically similar to the operation effect shown in FIG. 244(e), in that the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device is provided. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, the production mode such as “intense heat!!”, which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the production acceptance, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. In some cases, “chance!!” will be displayed. As for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, similarly, similar to this, for example, an effect mode in which an operation of displacing the display area to the front side is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes is made to appear in accordance with effect reception. By doing so, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 245(h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the plurality of modes described above based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 ( It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 222 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form). Depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege such as a big hit may be increased. Height has come to be suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 245(i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 245(h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword decoration body 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is kept in the sword state. That is, in this effect example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the extracted state, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword state (after the reach effect is produced). An operation opportunity for operation is further provided, and at that time, an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation to the sword storage state can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (sword decoration 5001) in two steps, and the first step operation (operation to the sword extraction state) and the second step operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed in accordance with each operation (operation to put the sword), not only when the operation means (sword decoration 5001) is operated, but also at the first stage. It is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately even in the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword cutting state) is performed until the second step operation (operation to the sword cutting state) is performed. Become so. It is desirable that the operation of the first step and the operation of the second step are operation modes different from each other (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). Further, it is desirable that the operation effect corresponding to the operation of the first stage and the operation effect corresponding to the operation of the second stage have different effect contents.

Further, when the operation effect (FIG. 245(h)) corresponding to the operation of the first stage is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not always maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. In this case, it is desirable not to give the operation opportunity of the second stage. Whether the sword decoration 5001 is maintained at a position (extracting sword) where the operation opportunity of the second step (operation opportunity from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state) can be given in the operation time effect corresponding to the operation of the first step It may be executed as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation. That is, when the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword cutting state without being maintained in the sword cutting state, it is practically impossible to give the operation opportunity of the second stage (operation opportunity from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state). It will be obvious that The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

As a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 245(h)) corresponding to the operation of the first stage, when the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the extracted state, when the predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect The control is performed to return the sword decoration 5001 to the non-driving state (the sword storage state) before the start of (1). However, in this case, the sword decoration 5001 has its operating state (reciprocating) for at least half the period from the movement of the specific decorative member SDY toward the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance of the sword removal state. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage before returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 246(j), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 243(c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 244(d). Then, an effect is drawn in which the button image BTG is depicted in the display area. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect shown in FIG. 243(c) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 244(d) or the effect shown in FIG. 245(g) is generated. Either the effect shown in FIG. 2 or the effect shown in FIG. 246(j) appears. It should be noted that which effect content will appear is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination processing according to the result of the big hit determination.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 246(j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244(d), the effect that was performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIG. 243(b), (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 246(j), an instruction display (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation is not displayed, and FIG. 244(d) ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG remains in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that there is.

246(k) shows that, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 246(j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in haze MY, and even its outline drawing is lost. The production is being broken.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 246(k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that have suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 246(j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 246(k) appears. As a result, it is possible to have a suspicion that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 will be generated.

Note that, also in the effect shown in FIG. 246(k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243(b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the mode of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitively shown to which of the plurality of operating means the performance acceptance period is occurring is reduced. Suggesting that

In FIG. 246(i), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 246(k), the outer shape of the haze MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) rather than the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the situation of being brought is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, it is suggested that the appearance reception period may occur for the sword decoration 5001 instead of the operation button 410 due to the outer shape of the haze MY. You will be able to.

Also in the effect shown in FIG. 246(i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) that has been performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243(b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with the case of FIG. 246(k), and until it is definitely shown to which of the plurality of operating means the performance acceptance period occurs. Suggests that the remaining time of is getting even less.

Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246(i) further progresses and the haze MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

With such a configuration, as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 244(d), FIG. 246(j)), there is a possibility that a performance acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 will occur, so that the entertainment of the game is maintained. Will be able to.

In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 244(d), FIG. 246(j)). , The production for the sword decoration 5001 by confirming whether or not the production display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related production (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is still continued. It is possible to know whether there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the entertainment of the game.

In addition, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246(j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY (FIG. 246(k)), and When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 245(g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 246(j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and also displays the button image BTG. It can be said that this is an effect that suggests that the effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 246(k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY does not necessarily come close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG). It is also possible to set such that an effect pattern approaching the outline of) can also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, then the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 244(d) is performed. When such an effect pattern is allowed to be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 246(j) and (k) also conceal which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In addition, after the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit, even in the effect state shown in FIG. 245(h) in the effect example (second effect mode), FIG. 244(e) Similar to the effect situation shown in, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side not operated by the player may be made executable. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (shadow work). In addition, examples of the "movement" of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source include "movement", "rotation", "rocking", and "vibration". It is possible to do, and this is not limited to the example of the effect, and is the same in other example of the effect.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 247 to 250 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. Is.

247(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment when the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

247(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 247(a). However, as shown in FIG. 247(b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. By this, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be ready for production reception.

In particular, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are adopted as the predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are respectively operated. Thus, it is easy for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 to be ready for production, even when the production display related to the operation is not yet performed on the production display device 1600 side. I try to make it recognizable. Note that here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 from the initial position toward the operation position, but compared to the case of operating each to the operation position when giving an operation opportunity. And operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, even if the operating means in which time remains before the production acceptance period occurs, or the production acceptance period does not occur in the first place until the symbol variation ends Regardless, these operating means (the operating button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) are operated respectively. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left before the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur until the end of the symbol fluctuation, the entertainment of those operations will be changed. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), not the effect display on the effect display device 1600, but the specific operation-related effect by the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 (FIG. 247(b)). After the start, basically the same effect development as in the second effect mode is performed.

For example, first, of the effects shown in FIG. 247(c), in the effect display on the effect display device 1600, except that the button image BTG is displayed as one corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 243(b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 247(c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243(b), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are in a state of operating from the initial positions (positions when not driven), respectively. It has become. The effect shown in FIG. 247(c) suggests that either of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect even with such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 247(c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are at different positions from the initial position (the position when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. In addition, the operation position (the state in which the driving force is applied) is set at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is applied.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is postponed as compared with the case where the operation opportunity is immediately given without the operation-related effect, but the operation of the movable type is performed. When the operation means is adopted, even if such operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to move the operation means on the side that can accept the effect to at least the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effect is further delayed by the amount of time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are set to both the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position during a period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. The position is set as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when the specific operation-related effect is ended and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period occurs is moved to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operating means on the raised side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment level of the game due to the delay in the operation-related effect. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operating means on the side to be operated is placed in the operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 247(c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 247(d) comes to be performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. The content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 243(c), except that it is displayed as one corresponding to "410". However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 247(d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243(c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is arranged so as to be in an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

Note that, in the effects shown in FIGS. 247(b) and 247(c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driving position). In contrast to the display, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are in the operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are intentionally made different from each other, so that the matching will be made in the near future. It is possible to suggest that the effect to be achieved (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 operate) occurs.

When the effect shown in FIG. 248(e) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247(d), in the effect display on the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG is displayed at the “operation position”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 244(d), except that it is displayed as a button corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248(e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244(d), the operation button 410 is in the operated position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. Both the (non-driving position) and the operating position are in different positions. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved toward the operation position from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven), the extension of the operation-related effect is appropriately suppressed. Become so.

Note that, as the effect shown in FIG. 248(e), "display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (it is desirable that the button image BTG is moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed" is first displayed. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character display such as "press" or effect A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. With such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “movement mode to the operation position”, whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode in which the operation position is moved”. In this way, by causing the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of the specific operation-related effect to be displayed as a mode that is different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the gap between those modes will soon be filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 248(f) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 248(e), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 244(e). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248(f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244(e), the operation button 410 is in a state of being returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position). In addition, the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

After such an operation effect (FIG. 248(f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 248(g), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. This is also as described with reference to FIG. 244(f).

On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 247(d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247(d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword ornament 5001. Except for the fact that the instruction content regarding “to push in” is displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “movement mode to the operation position”, the effect as described with reference to FIG. 245(g) It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position. It is in an operating state, and the sword ornament 5001 is in an operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword ornament 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven), the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

Note that, even as the effect shown in FIG. 249(h), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (it is desirable that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a mode in which it has moved to the operation position)”. First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display (characters such as “pushing in”) that prompts an operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "movement mode to the operation position", whereas The decoration image SYG will be in a mode different from the “mode in which the decoration image SYG has moved to the operation position”. In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is intentionally different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, there is a shift in those modes. It will soon be possible to indicate in advance that the sword decoration 5001 will move to the operating position.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 249(i) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 249(h), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 245(h). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249(i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245(h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position. The sword decoration 5001 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an operation effect (FIG. 249(i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 249(j), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 244(f).

On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 250(k) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247(d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG is in the “operation position”. The effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 246(j) except that it is displayed as a button corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250(k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246(j) and the effect shown in FIG. 248(e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively at the initial positions ( Both the non-driving position) and the operating position are in different positions. Even in such an operating state, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will occur. Will be able to.

When the effect shown in FIG. 250(k) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 250(k), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246(k). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246(k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 respectively have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position. Both are operating in different positions.

When the effect shown in FIG. 250(m) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 250(l), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246(l). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246(k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 respectively have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position. Both are operating in different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 250(m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the haze MY should be closer to the sword decoration 5001 in the operation position than the sword decoration 5001 in the initial position.

Note that when the effect shown in FIG. 250(m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 249(h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 250(k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and also displays the button image BTG. It can be said that this is an effect that suggests that the effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 250(l) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY does not necessarily come close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG). ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, thereafter, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 248(e) is performed. When such an effect pattern is allowed to be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 250(k) and 250(l) also conceal which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the above-described example, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated to receive the effect during the effective period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect reception is performed. Accordingly, the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (FIG. 242(d), FIG. 244(e), etc.). However, it is only necessary to put the sword ornament 5001 on the non-operated side into an operating state. Examples of the operating state include a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 moves to another place and stays, and a mode in which it vibrates. It is possible to adopt. In addition, in the effective period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect is executed, even when the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword decoration bodies 5001 are operated to receive the effect, the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to put the operation button 410 on the side on which the operation is not performed into the operating state (vibration etc.).

In addition, for such an effect that brings the "operation section on the side not being operated" into the operating state, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is "the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears, "0", It appears when executed in a "high aspect of "100"), and the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is of "expectation degree (the proportion of the big hit symbol, including "0" and "100"). It may not appear when executed in a “low mode”.

Further, when the post-operation performance is performed by the operation on one of the two operation units (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001), the "operation unit on the other side not operated" is also in the operating state. Alternatively, when the post-operation effect is performed by the operation on the other, the “one-side operation unit in which no operation is performed” may not be in the operating state.

In addition, in this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used.

In each of the above-described effect modes and the other examples thereof, in the case where the "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, it is basically The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is received, the operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. Further, when the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration 5001" appears as the result of the specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001 among the body 5001 and the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received as an effect, the operation time effect on the sword actor side is performed. In this respect, in the button-side operation effect, there is a success effect (the specific decoration member SDY is operated) and a failure effect (the specific decoration member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination. In contrast to the appearance of either one, even in the production on the side of the sword role, the production on success (operating the specific decoration member SDY) and production on failure based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit determination. Either (the specific decoration member SDY is not operated) is made to appear, and the effect contents thereof are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

In addition, in the button-side operation effect and the sword-effect-side operation effect, not only the effect regarding whether or not the specific decorative member SDY is operated, but also the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the same effect. You may make it a content.

Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is assumed that an effect is given to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is to be performed. Opportunity is given to the operation. However, no matter which effect result appears, for example, when a specific operation means is pressed against each other, a specific operation-related effect may be performed with an effect content that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means. There may be.

For example, in any mode for one operation means (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration 5001 in the sword cutting state is in the sword cutting state, or a mode in which the sword decoration 5001 in the sword cutting state is in the sword cutting state It is also possible to perform an effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given by the operation (1), and to give the operation opportunity to the operation means in a mode on the side according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword storage state and the sword removal state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 be operated in the sword storage state or the sword removal state when the effect result is displayed.

Also, when the symbol variation in the suspended state is exhausted, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the symbol variation is in the suspended state (digested before this. The effect suggested from within the execution period of the symbol variation) may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means provided with the operation opportunity and the operation means provided with the operation opportunity are not provided. It becomes possible to maintain the gaming interest related to the operation for a longer period for both. As such an effect, when the symbol variation in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in a suspended state (within the execution period of the symbol variation consumed before this), the operation in the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to operate each of the provided operation means.

In the above-described second and third effect modes, and their modified examples, a plurality of images (button images BTG, button images BTG, corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decoration 5001) are provided as specific operation-related effects. The sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, but these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 may occur thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the performance acceptance period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, those operations are performed until the performance acceptance period occurs. It becomes possible to conceal which of the means the production reception period occurs. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operating means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are displayed. It is also possible to cause none of the images SYG to appear and cause an effect image different from any of them to appear as the specific operation-related effect.

However, even when adopting an effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, when the specific operation-related effect is finished, the button image is finished. Either the BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operating means the performance acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to determine which of the plurality of operating means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect by executing the specific image (for example, the lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) that was used as the effect content. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive production. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one of two rocks, and when lightning falls on one of the rocks, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When the lightning strikes the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG is made to appear from the rock, so that it is possible to develop the effect as shown in FIGS. 244(d) and 245(g). .. Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one rock, and when lightning falls on the rock, one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. It is also possible to make the production progress to the production shown in FIG. 244(d) and FIG. 245(g). In short, it is desirable to make the production progress as the production content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related production.

In addition, in the above-described second and third effect modes, and in other examples thereof, there are specific cases when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and when the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of effects) to the occurrence of these effect reception periods. In addition, it is desirable to set such that the effect reception period is generated for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated depending on which of these effect modes the effect is performed. The ratio set for the specific operation means of the plurality of operation means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and their examples, the operation is not performed based on the operation on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (FIG. 244(e), etc.), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time with reference to the time when the operation is performed. You can However, the operation is not performed based on the time when the operation is performed, and the operation means on the side not operated is operated until the operation is ended, depending on the timing of the operation during which the operation is performed. It is desirable to have different time lengths.

That is, when the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated as the remaining time of the effect reception period is short. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has a conflict as to whether or not the operating means on the side not shown in the specific operation-related effect should be operated. Therefore, depending on which timing of the performance acceptance period the operation is performed (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side not operated is operated and then the operation is ended. Time until (possible that the performance reception was performed and the performance during operation was executed even when the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related performance was operated) If the time length of appealing to the player) is made different, it becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game favorably.

In addition, after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect acceptance period ends. May be all operated.

In addition, from the time when the specific operation-related effect is started until the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. You may make it perform the predetermined effect which suggests the ratio of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) displayed. The movable body effect may be performed as the predetermined effect, but in this case, the specific movable object that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed (here, , The specific decorative member SDY) is operated so that the specific movable body is more reliably operated based on the reception of the effect within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to enable it.

In addition, from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of an effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in those effect results. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period regarding a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decoration member SDY) While the related effect is being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operating means. As a result, it is possible to generate a special effect mode as if the effect was shown and the effect was finished, even though the effect was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. It becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game while playing. In addition, when an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the proportion of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side of high expectation displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the above-mentioned specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of the specific operation-related effect, among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001), the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is desirable to use the operation means on the lower side (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the enjoyment of the game when the player recognizes that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. ..

Further, in the middle of performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect for a plurality of operation means, if the effect reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of those operation means, within the effect reception period When the operation button 410 is operated in, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Regardless of whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) appears as the effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the performance as the specific operation-related effect from the start of the effect of the specific operation-related effect until the effect result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means with the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production reception periods, when an operation is performed by the player, the production is usually generated based on the operation, but the production reception period elapses even if such an operation is not performed. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed earlier. According to such an automatic button effect state, since the effect at the time of operation will be generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect acceptance period occurs, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, in the case where the specific operation-related effect is performed in such an automatic button effect state, when the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operating effect as when the operating means is operated will be executed without operating the operating means on the corresponding side within those effect acceptance periods.

However, even when the automatic button effect state described later is set, the effect acceptance period is only applied to the operation button 410 of those operation means in the middle of the specific operation related effect being performed. When the action is generated, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed (the automatic button function does not function) unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period. After this, even if a performance reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related performance being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated within the performance reception period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed (the automatic button function is operated) even if the operation means is not operated. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the player is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect depending on whether or not the automatic button function works. It is expected to suppress the decrease of

It should be noted that the setting change related to ON/OFF of the automatic button effect state can be performed not only during the period in which the symbol variation is not performed by operating the operation button 410, but also during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is desirable that For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur when the automatic button effect state is in the off state, the automatic button effect state can be set and changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs when the effect state is on and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period, the on-operation effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the automatic button effect state is changed. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where the player wants to generate an on-operation effect while the automatic button effect state is kept on, for example, the automatic button effect state is set to the on state. During the performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 at this time, when the operation button 410 as well as the operation means different from the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation is performed on the different operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the effect being executed be changed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when it is changed from the on state to the off state.

Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes, and other examples thereof, the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is imitated as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. While the sword decoration images SYG are displayed, the operation opportunities corresponding to them are given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode of these display modes is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is displayed on the operation button 410. If the operation opportunity (production acceptance period) is given to the sword ornament 5001 when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are given. Any display content may be adopted as.

For example, in the above-described second and third effect modes, instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 244(d) and 248(e), effect image CG shown in FIG. 251(a) (first Display mode), and instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 245(g) and 249(h), the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251(b) is displayed. Good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (the portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both of them are suddenly replaced with an effect image CG (first display mode) or an effect image TG (second display mode) as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 244(d), 245(g), 248(e), and 249(h), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) Unlike the case where the decoration image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the addition of the operation opportunity is displayed using almost the entire display area (until the other effect images such as the background part that may be expected to be hidden are not displayed). By doing so, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game with respect to the operation will be improved.

Note that in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 251(a), the first image holding the shield (the button image BTG that emulates the operation button 410) that incorporates the operation button 410 into the design. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251(b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) that holds the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly indicate which operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), it is not necessary to prepare the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 itself as an effect image. It is desirable to display as an effect image that incorporates at least part of the shape and design of these operating means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG You may make it perform also the effect which suggests a different expectation degree according to which of the (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of effect modes (color differences, etc.) are prepared as effect images CG (first display mode) and effect images TG (second display mode), depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. You may make it suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. You can

Further, with respect to the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (it is desirable that the effect situation has a relatively high degree of expectation), When the operation-related effects are displayed without being executed (for example, after a precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect is executed) (the effect status is preferably relatively low in expectation), There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, only the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means is effected. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing the below-described predictive effect that is not the specific operation-related effect). When displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, another effect reception period not corresponding to the button image BTG (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is received. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in the effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to give the operation a fun different from the case where the button image BTG appears in the production situation with a relatively high degree of expectation, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. The different operating means may be an operating means different from the sword decoration 5001.

In the case where the button image BTG appears in a relatively low-expectation production state in which no specific operation-related production is executed, an operation is performed on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the production reception period. Is received, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, “a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively. It is desirable to suggest that the production situation has a higher expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, when the button image BTG appears in the effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means which is occurring at the same time is ended to prevent the special operation effect from being executed, and the operation means (operation button 410) is operated. It is desirable that the performance at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, in the case where the button image BTG appears in an effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is performed. Despite the operation of the operation means other than the operation means, the operation effect when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even when the effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to do so (the automatic button function works). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the above-described automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means other than the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG can be operated even if no operation is performed. It is preferable that only the same operation effect as when it is operated is executed, and the special operation effect that can appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is operated is not executed.

However, within the effect reception period, before the specific timing at which the operation effect (effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the automatic button function, another operation When the operation means is operated and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the special operation effect is performed in response to the effect reception, and it is determined that the specific timing has arrived. Also, it is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the production reception period, but the automatic button production state is continued in the ON state even after the production reception period ends. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then each effect described above (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, in the case where the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described below that is not the specific operation-related effect). If the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described below that is not the specific operation-related effect), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect reception period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Becomes

Further, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes, and in other examples thereof, as a result of the effect in which the specific operation-related effect is performed, “a button image BTG (first display mode) in which the operation button 410 is used”, or If any of the “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) showing the sword decoration 5001” is displayed, and if the effect reception is made by the operating means on the displayed side, the relative To the first operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decoration member SDY operates) that is the effect content that suggests that the expectation degree is high, and the effect content that suggests that the expectation degree is relatively low. It is possible to cause any of the second operation effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decoration member SDY does not operate) that has been set to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation effect, which is the effect content that suggests, is executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first Display mode) is displayed based on the reception of the effect on the operation button 410 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, it is the case where the effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation effect is executed based on the acceptance of the effect, the effect image on the side with a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect (sword decoration) As compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, no demerit is produced in terms of the effect result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

Further, in the above-described timer effect (FIG. 118), "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" can be set as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes that are timer targets). That is, in the timer effect in which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" is the effect target, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is soon applied to the operation means. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the effect at the time of operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect object of the timer effect, when the operation means is operated, the effect result advantageous to the player is obtained according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Make sure that any of the unfavorable performance results can appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect object of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result that is advantageous to the player is higher than that when it is not the effect object of the timer effect. Is more desirable. The percentage may be 100%.

In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect is executed, in which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)" is executed, the "operation opportunity for the operation means" to be the effect object is displayed. A specific operation-related effect using "grant" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, respectively, so that an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when played.

However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) until immediately before that. , It is not possible to understand which production should be watched, and the attention is distracted, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may decrease.

Therefore, in the case where a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 252. , Until the count value of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is in an unexecuted state, and the count value is It is desirable that the "specific operation-related effect" is started after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0").

FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). Note that the following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned notice timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processes according to it.

252(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

FIG. 252(b) is an effect that the timer effect is started (countdown display here) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 252(a). It shows the situation. Note that in the effect situation shown in FIG. 252(b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, first of all, the count value is set to a predetermined value (while it remains unclear which effect of a plurality of timer target effect candidates prepared is being executed. Here, the count "0") is reached and is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 252(d), the "specific operation-related effect" is started. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), those effects are time-dependent. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in series, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches the predetermined value (here, the count “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect targets which effect. It is not possible to recognize whether or not the game was played as a game, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252(c), between the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) and the specific operation-related effect is started, An effect that suggests the type of effect (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) that is the target of the timer effect is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 252(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the effect display device 1600 first displays “nata”. Therefore, it is suggested that this is a timer effect for which "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by "sword"") to the sword ornament 5001" is an effect target.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 252(d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed ("Sword sword" It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because the "specific operation-related effect" is started in the effect situation in which the player recognizes that "the operation opportunity is given". become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the “sword” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be continuously displayed.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the sword ornament 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, It is configured to perform a reciprocating motion in the up-and-down direction, and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by a "sword"") to the sword decoration 5001 is a target object of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

The predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001", but also when another effect is an effect object. It may be performed when is zero. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is an effect target, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become 0. Becomes In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the effect that is the effect target is started, and the timer effect is the effect object. It is set to be executed at the same timing as the timing at which the effect suggesting the effect type that is present is started or before this, and during the execution state, the effect that suggests the effect type targeted for the effect by the timer effect is also being executed. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 252(d) shows an effect situation in which the effect of "specific operation-related effect" is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only is the count value already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to execute the effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started, and The execution state of the operation-related effect may be continued after the effect is started.

After the "specific operation-related effect" is started in this way, the effect is advanced in the order of FIGS. 252(e) to 252(h). ), FIG. 245(g) to (i), or FIG. 247(d) and FIG. 249(h) to (j), the description is omitted because it is almost the same as the content described with reference to FIG.

As the timer effect performed in association with the specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 and a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the point that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 252, but the specific operation-related effect is effected. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly, slightly before this), so that the specific operation-related effect continues even after the effect is started. It has become. Then, in this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege granting ( The expectation for big hits is becoming the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected, but at the time when the effect situation in which the effect is simultaneously advanced appears, the specific operation-related effect of the specific operation-related effect is increased. Whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect values thereof are the same (the degree of expectation for privilege grant (big hit) is the same). Same). That is, in this case, since the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected, any effect It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to understand what to pay attention to and distracting attention. However, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, when the effect pattern in which the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected appears, the privilege is granted more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 252(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, a display indicating the type of the effect target on the effect display device 1600 ( However, the display suggesting such an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is selected as the timer effect. However, among a plurality of effects that can be targeted for a timer, when a specific effect is targeted for a timer, it is possible not to perform a display that suggests which effect the timer effect is targeted for.

In addition, in each of the above-described effect modes and the other examples thereof, prior to the operation opportunity being given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of those operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it is given. However, before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (prior to the effect reception period), the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Does not appear, or does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 (before the performance reception period occurs). You may make it possible for an effect pattern to appear, such as performing a second omen effect. When performing these aura effects (first aura effect, second aura effect), the time required for the effect (aura effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when the effect appears also be low in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

Here, as the indication effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) showing the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given (for example, the button image BTG) appears, for example, fog is displayed. A specific image is displayed to express the state of being crowded in. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position that is difficult to be visually recognized by overlapping with the specific image (a position on the layer, which is a rear side of the specific image). After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is possible to execute it as an effect to be exposed to the outside. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode relating to such a sign presentation will be described later.

Then, at this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations regarding bonus grant (big hit), It is possible to have an interest as to which display mode the button image BTG appears as the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed.

It should be noted that the first omen effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration body 5001, and the operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration is made. A second aura effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Is important to be executed as different effect contents. Further, it is desirable that not only the contents of the effect but also the time required for the effect is different.

Such a precursor effect means the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the giving of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept including. As to the aura effect including the "specific operation-related effect", a plurality of effect modes are prepared and the aura effect is performed in any of these effect modes, as described below with reference to FIG. 253. By suggesting how long the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to the aforesaid effect is, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the aforesaid effect is performed. It is more desirable for the purpose.

FIG. 253 is a time chart for explaining an example of effect contents for each type of effect when a plurality of types (indication effects A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the aura effect.

First, in the example (symptom effect A) shown in FIG. 253(a), when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started, the indication effect A is started. This aura effect A is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the aforesaid effect A When A is executed, an effect acceptance period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example (precursor effect A) shown in FIG. 253(a), when the predictive effect A is performed, the same time length is set regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The owned reception period (effective period) T1 will be generated.

In the effect reception period (effective period) T1, an instruction display (a character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect A to perform an operation. ) Is displayed. When the effect reception is performed by the operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, the above-described operation time effect (for example, FIGS. 242(d) and (f) or , 244(e), 245(h), 248(f), 249(i), etc.) are executed, and a process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example (symptom effect B1) shown in FIG. 253(b), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation started, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed, The indication effect B1 is to be started. This precursor effect B1 is not "a specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the operation opportunity when a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is given (a specific operation). It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410). Is to occur.

In the production reception period (effective period) T2, an instruction display (a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) that prompts the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor production B1 to operate is displayed. To be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the operation time effect described above is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, processing for ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

In this respect, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1 is, as shown in FIGS. 253(a) and 253(b), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Effective period) T1 is generated as a period having a different time length (here, a shorter time length). This suggests how long the effect reception period generated corresponding to the aforesaid effect has, depending on which mode (aura effect A, aura effect B1) is used. As a result, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game when the portent production is performed.

On the other hand, in the example (symptom effect B2) shown in FIG. 253(c), the indication effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. Like the precursor effect B1, the precursor effect B2 is not a “specific operation-related effect” but is executed prior to the operation opportunity when a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is given an operation opportunity. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the indication effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1. Performance reception period) T3 is generated.

Even in the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") that prompts the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 to perform an operation, or a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the effect reception is performed by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an operation time effect that is different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this respect, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the indication effect B2 is, as shown in FIGS. 253(a) and 253(c), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when the specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed, even though the predictive effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation related to the privilege grant (big hit) is executed. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (effective period) T3 having a length will occur, an effect situation as if a specific operation-related effect was performed is created, and the indication effect B2 is It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game when it is played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for award is different when the production reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the production reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

In addition, regarding the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect form appears from the start of the effect until a timing in the middle of the effect, and a different effect mode appears after the timing elapses. The operation means may be provided with a performance property regarding which of the performance reception period (effective period) T2 and the performance reception period (effective period) T3. However, such performance is not necessarily required, and even when the indication effects B1 and B2 are started, the effect is started when a different time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. Alternatively, the indication effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths.

On the other hand, in the example (symptom effect C) shown in FIG. 253(d), the indication effect C is adapted to start production when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" that indicates which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given. When C is executed, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example (precursor effect C) shown in FIG. 253(d), when the predictive effect C is performed, the same time length is set regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The owned reception period (effective period) T4 will be generated.

Even during the production reception period (effective period) T4, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") that prompts an operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor production C, or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation time effect (for example, FIG. 242(d), (f) or 244(e), 245(h), 248(f), 249(i), and the like) are executed, and a process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

In this respect, in this example production, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the indication effect C is, as shown in FIGS. 253(a) and 253(d), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the indication effect C itself is shorter than that of the indication effect A, as long as the indication effect is executed as the "specific operation-related effect" described above. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (effective period) T4 having the same time length as in the case of the indication effect A will be generated, the amusement interest when the indication effect C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

In the production example shown in FIG. 253, the production reception period is associated with the types of the precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C by associating the length of the production reception period (effective period) with a one-to-one relationship. The length of (effective period) is suggested. However, the effect reception period (effective period) is set so that the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period having a predetermined time length (for example, the effect reception period T2) is different for each type of precursor effect. ) May be suggested.

In addition, in each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is displayed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to show the same state as the state of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 248(e), the operation button 410 is in the state of being operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as being in the state of being operated at the operation position accordingly. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of being operated at the operating position (extracting state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as a state of operating at the operating position (extracting state). Has been done.

However, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given after the specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) which is reproduced as it looks. If this happens, even if a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed, the range of the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect, and the enjoyment of the game will decline. I'm worried.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is performed. Regarding BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from that of the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 254 is a diagram showing effect examples of effect contents when a precursor effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and effect contents when a predictive effect is performed as a specific operation-related effect.

First, FIGS. 254(a) to 254(c) show the effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the effect state, as shown in FIG. 254(a), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 only correspond to the sword ornament 5001 side, not the "specific operation-related effect". If the precursor effect is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decoration 5001. In the indication effect (the same applies to the indication effect in another example), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is soon given is given, an effect image of the operation means is displayed. Need not always be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity even when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production acceptance period is not yet displayed. Will be said.

In the portrayal effect shown in FIG. 254(a), the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation. And are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect contents as to which of them is finally left in the display area appear. Therefore, in this presentation situation, although it is recognizable that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG has a low expectation, or the sword decoration image SYGa has a low expectation. It is kept secret which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed.

FIG. 254(b) shows the final result of the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura, which shows that the sword decoration 5001 is in a relatively high-expecting performance situation. It will be suggested that a performance reception period will occur. In the display shown in FIG. 254(b), the final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (sword decoration image SYGa or the like) is displayed. .

FIG. 254(c) shows an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“press it Character display such as ", or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb is also extracted from the sword state from this state. I am trying to change the state. When the production reception is made within the production reception period, the predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the sword storage state. Maintained. In addition, a process of ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the indication effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, the operation means). , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracting sword state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the effect image (here, sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the operation means on the operation target side, and the operation means on the operation target side (here, sword decoration body 5001) Are both stopped at predetermined positions.

On the other hand, FIGS. 254(d) to 254(g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the precursor effect. For example, now, in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 254(d), if the precursor production as the “specific operation-related production” is started, which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is started? It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to something.

FIG. 254(e) shows an effect situation in which the precursor effect as the "specific operation-related effect" progresses and the effect result appears. In this presentation situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 as a result of the "specific operation-related effect". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 254(e), the final effect indicating that the sword decoration image SYG is not changed to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

FIG. 254(f) shows an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“pressing in” Character display such as ", or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword cutting state.

In this respect, in the example shown in FIGS. 254(f) and 254(g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration 5001 is in the extraction state during the production reception period (sword decoration image SYG). While the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously displaced upward in the period until the effect reception period ends, the sword ornament body 5001 is in a different state. I am trying to do it.

In the production reception period, no matter where the sword ornament 5001 is located, the production reception is performed when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword storage state. A predetermined operation effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword storage state. In addition, a process of ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

With such a configuration, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to be used for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 254(f) and 254(g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the effect reception period, but the invention is not limited to this. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated, and the sword decoration 5001 may be stopped.

Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, both the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed in the effect reception period (FIG. 254(c)) that occurs without performing a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stop state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 254(f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. On the other side, this is kept in a dynamic state so that it can be used for performance. Therefore, when a performance acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related performance, the range of the performance can be widened, and amusement of the game can be favorably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not the operation means to which the driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 is operated. While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the description is continued, a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is expected to greatly improve the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

It should be noted that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a predictive effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a predictive effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, either one of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword embellishment image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001 appears in addition to either When the effect image (for example, button image BTG) appears, which of the display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation and the display mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed for the effect image (button image BTG) It will be possible to further provide the directivity of. This method may be appropriately adopted not only in the effect example of FIG. 254 but also in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof.

Then, in the case of giving such two performances to a specific operation-related effect, first, as a result of the specific operation-related effect, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is to be displayed. It is in a state where it can be seen or recognized, and it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearance side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is displayed). Recognizable display state, etc.) will appear as the production progresses. Then, after this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the whiteout of the effect image imitating the operation means). It is desirable that the states be released so that the colors can be confirmed) appear sequentially by further progress of the production. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed through such production progress, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high expectation (for example, operating means In such a state that the button image BTG is further hidden after the whitening state of the effect image produced is canceled) and that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Yes, and it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has a high degree of expectation (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined and only the outline can be recognized). Therefore, a production pattern for further producing production may be generated. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, a white state of the sword decoration image SYG). To make it possible to check the color). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the side with high expectations (for example, red), the display mode on the side with low expectations (for example, blue) is more than that when it is. Also, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

255 (a) to (e) is a diagram showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 254 (d) to (g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the predictive effect. That is, in FIG. 255(a), the precursor effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, but in the precursor effect, a shield (button image BTG) which is a model of the operation button 410 is held. A second character (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) having a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001. And are facing each other, which suggests which operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am trying.

FIG. 255(b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the second character (sword decoration) is displayed. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001 is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 255(b) is almost the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 251(b) (the instruction display prompting the sword decoration 5001 to be operated is hidden), and While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (face to face between the characters) and the other background image (the portion displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) are concerned. The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 255(b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

255(c) to (e) show an example of an effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 255(c). An instruction display (a character display such as "pushing in" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed on the screen.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 255(c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to move from the sword storage state to the sword removal state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 255(d), the sword decoration body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state only after a relatively short time has elapsed since the production reception period was started. It is supposed to do. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 255(e), the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the extracted sword state until at least the effect reception period ends, unless the player operates the sword decoration body 5001. The operation (operation from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state) will be awaited.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 255 (c) to (e), a movement (swing in the rotation direction) that is completely different from such a movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration 5001. The sword decoration image SYG continues to be displayed after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the extracted state by the second character swinging down the sword decoration image SYG. It is designed to operate. The sword decoration image SYG according to this effect example is a loop of a series of displays from the start (FIG. 255(c)) to the end (FIG. 255(e)) of the swing-down operation within the effect reception period. The process is repeated.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time. Further, the sword decoration 5001 is also in the sword removal state while a series of displays from the start (FIG. 255(c)) to the end (FIG. 255(e)) of the swing-down operation are being performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will not be affected by the loop processing and will be maintained in the unsheathed state. In addition, when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword storage state within the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and a predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, and The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword storage state. In addition, a process of ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG will operate within the effect reception period. The operation modes (operations that play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position), loop operations provided for performance) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 ends. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues its operation without ending. Thereby, when the effect reception period (FIG. 255 (c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect continues until after the effect reception period occurs ( It becomes possible to broaden the range of the effect, such as allowing the background to be continued) to be executed, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 255, the effect content (display in which characters face each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 255(a)) as the specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effect (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs is changed by changing both the background image and the background image. In particular, in the production acceptance period according to this production example, a special background (full moon) is displayed, and the production image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) that are different from the operating means are specified. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the production performance during the production reception period. In this sense, also in the aura effect, it is possible to perform the effect using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to further improve the performance by providing a dramatic connection between them. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) may have a plurality of display modes with different expectations regarding privilege grant, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

In addition, in the signage effect as a specific operation-related effect and in the effect during the effect acceptance period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect acceptance is performed depending on which of these effect modes appears. It may be possible to give a suggestion as to whether or not a mode having a high degree of expectation appears as an operation time effect when the effect reception is made during the period. The degree of expectation for privilege grant may be suggested using the background image that appears when the aura effect is performed.

Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, when the aura effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image appearing in the aura effect. It was decided to execute the effect within the period, but the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect (for a specific operation means of a plurality of operation means (or in a specific operation mode of a plurality of operation modes ) When a special signage effect when an operation opportunity is given) is being performed, when the effect reception period occurs by changing both the effect contents and the background image that have appeared in the signage effect. You may make it perform an effect. In short, "it is possible to generate an operation-related effect (symptom effect) related to the operation on the operation means, and as the operation-related effect (symptom effect), the operation reception by the player is performed for the first effect At least a first operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect reception regarding a second effect different from the first effect by the operation of the player is made possible and are displayed in the first operation-related effect. The first operation promotion image that is displayed is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation promotion image is not being displayed yet is displayed. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed in accordance with the change of the background image to another background image when the second operation promotion image is not displayed yet”. I wish I had it. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image do not have to be the same image, and for example, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, the gauge display, or "press!" It is possible to appropriately adopt such as displaying a comment. Further, the "first effect" and the "second effect" may be different post-operation effects, and, for example, as the "first operation-related effect in which the effect reception regarding the first effect is made", the effect reception It is possible to exemplify an effect as to which mode will appear as a conversation notice when the action is performed, and as the "second operation-related effect in which effect acceptance regarding the second effect is performed", effect acceptance is performed. It is possible to exemplify it as an effect as to whether or not the specific decoration member SDY operates at the time. At this time, regardless of which mode appears as a conversation notice, there is a relation that the proportion (including 100%) of the jackpot pattern appears higher when the specific decoration member SDY operates. It is desirable to do. Also, for the "second operation-related effect for which effect reception regarding the second effect is made", refer to FIG. 178, FIG. 390 to FIG. 393, FIG. 395 to FIG. 398, FIG. 401, FIG. 428, FIG. It may be executed as one of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described later. On the other hand, regarding the “first operation-related effect for which the effect reception regarding the first effect is performed”, the operation acceptance effect (without BGM suppression) described later with reference to FIG. 394, FIG. 400, FIG. May be performed as one of the above (operation reception effect). Moreover, you may make it employ|adopt suitably also about each of these different examples of operation reception production mentioned later. In addition, the background image “continuous display” does not necessarily have to be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing a river flowing or a duel between characters, It also includes those displayed in such a manner that the range where such a still image or moving image is displayed is slid (displayed in such a manner that the coordinates move). That is, it can be said that the background image is “continuously displayed” if the displayed depiction contents are displayed in a time series or in a coordinated manner. On the other hand, “changing the background image into another background image” does not necessarily mean that the image is displayed by another image data or another layer. For example, the background image itself is time-series or coordinates. It includes those that are suddenly changed or replaced (switched) to "images having different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the effect reception period)" that are not physically connected. Further, it includes those that are changed to a “black image” or replaced (switched). That is, it can be said that “a background image is changed to another background image” if there is no connection in terms of depiction content in terms of time series and coordinates before and after the change. In this way, in order to make it easier to recognize that the background image has changed, an effect image (blackout, whiteout, or the like) that hides the background image that has been displayed until then is displayed in the effect display device 1600. It is more preferable that the second operation promotion image is displayed together with a new background image after the display over a region (more preferably substantially the entire region) of at least half of the display region. The first operation-related effect and the second operation-related effect may be sequentially displayed within one variation pattern. As described above, the timing for changing the background image to another background image may be before the performance reception period occurs, or the performance reception period is generated including the timing when the performance reception period is generated. The timing may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 255(b) may be omitted and the production may progress from FIG. 255(a) to FIG. 255(c)).

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the effect reception period has occurred, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started before the effect reception period occurs. Alternatively, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (a role of accurately transmitting the current situation). The carried operation may be completed before the production acceptance period occurs and the stopped state may be maintained thereafter.

Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001), a background image is changed and a background image is changed when the production acceptance period occurs. The display may not be performed in some cases. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period occurs, the degree of expectation for privilege granting is higher than that when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period occurs. Is desirable.

Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect reception is performed, the specific decoration member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation effect based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 242(d), FIG. 244(e), and FIG. 245(h), the sword ornament 5001 (or operation button) is used as the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. 410) is also operated so as to improve the performance of the operation effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. In this way, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, in the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect depends on the result of the effect. Then, both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated, or a movable situation provided on the game board 5 side appears. While the production situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the side of the door frame 3 are not activated is made to appear, the production at the time of operation (for example, a specific operation-related production performed without passing through a specific operation-related production). In the operation-time effect after the precursor effect that is not the operation-related effect is performed), depending on the result of the effect, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. It is possible to display the performance situation at the time of success when only one operates, or the performance situation at the time of failure in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

Further, in the above-described effect modes and the specific operation-related effects according to their different examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the effect, the button image BTG is displayed as the result of the effect. The expectation of granting the privilege is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 256(a), the button is displayed in a mode in which the princess character is added (specific mode of effect). The image BTG may be displayed in some cases, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation of privilege granting is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. By increasing the value, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific effect mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 256(b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific presentation mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for privilege granting is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (button image BTG) displayed in a specific effect mode (mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 256(a)) and a second effect pattern in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 256(b). )) and may be prepared respectively. In this case, the expected degree of privilege grant is set to be the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the fun of whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect, and of course, the button image BTG and the sword It is possible to provide a completely different fun such as whether or not a particular effect mode (mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of which of the decorative images SYG appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, when such a specific effect mode (mode in which the princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 256(c), when the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) is not yet appearing in the particular effect mode. (For example, when the specific operation-related effect is in the middle of the effect), it may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed By the appearance of the mode), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same degree of expectation). In other words, in this case, since the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, such as "a sign effect by a princess character" despite the situation in which the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide a dramatic effect with a completely different purpose.

In addition, in the sword decoration 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, the sword portion (handle 5012, blade 5011) of the sword decoration 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 212, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword ornament 5001 can be operated laterally. It is provided so as to have both modes (second operation modes). Therefore, in each of the above-described effect modes, and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit. The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect. It should be noted that the sword portion (handle 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are all operably (operable) supported by one main body support portion (not shown) provided in the door frame 3, and Even if one side of the sword part (handle 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in the operated (operated) state, the other side has a structure that can be operated (operated). Has been formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and it is not possible to perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error may occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, the effect image (and its effect) in which the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 is used. If the instruction display for prompting the operation) is displayed, it may be more and more likely that the player will make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. That is, in this case, while the remaining time of the performance acceptance period is gradually decreasing, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the originally correct manner. It is difficult to say, and if the performance reception period ends before the performance reception is made, even if a specific operation-related performance with a relatively high degree of expectations is performed. , There is a concern that the interest in playing games will decline.

Further, the sword decoration 5001 has a mode of “moving in the vertical direction” by the sword part and a mode of “moving in the lateral direction” by the sheath part. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the wrong side is operated when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the proper side operation, and the performance acceptance period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

Therefore, when performing the specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit, As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258, an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the originally correct operation is not performed, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

257 and FIG. 258 show an example of effects in the case where an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

257(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

257(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 257(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257(b), the first effect in which the first operation mode for operating the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 from the sword removal state to the sword storage state is used. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image OX and the second effect image TX that shows the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword ornament 5001 is operated to move in the lateral direction are displayed. It is displayed at the same time to suggest that an operation opportunity by any of those operation modes will soon be ready for production reception. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image part of the sword decoration 5001 that shows the sword part is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are not displayed. In each of the second effect image TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

In FIG. 257(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257(b) has progressed, and a first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and a second operation image corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX and the effect image TX of No. 1 are pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect of pushing out the other party from the display area is performed. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect). When the result) appears, a performance acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

Note that, in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 257(c), when the first effect image OX is left in a predominant state, a display such as “push” can be visually recognized. The display such as “slide” is made visible when the second effect image TX is left in a dominant state. The details of the operation content are made easier to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, these displays may not be necessarily displayed because there is a concern that it may be erroneously recognized as urging the operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

257(d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 257(c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. An effect that depicts the state left behind is being performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, the specific operation effect (movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the operation in the first operation mode is performed. When the operation is performed, the effect reception is made, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 257(d), the effect acceptance period relating to the specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as “pushing in” or the remaining time of the effect reception period is shown. Bar display) will be displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword storage state to the sword removal state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 258(e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) in the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. The production situation when it is done by the player is shown.

That is, in this effect example, even when the effect reception period relating to the specific operation effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received in the effect reception. (Here, "it is good as it is").

Further, as shown in FIG. 258(f), the content of such a specific notification is changed (here, “calmly push in”) so that the player can regain his composure. It is like this. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words. Therefore, even if the player side is in a panic state, this can be suitably performed. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword ornament 5001 in the second operation mode is operated as it is in the first operation mode, the player is informed that the operation is properly received. You will be able to recognize.

258(g) shows that an appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production situation (production reception period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 258(e) and 258(f). As a result, the operation reception is performed and the above-described operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is finished), the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operation state (normal state). ) Will be returned to.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the originally correct operation is left unchanged. Even if the operation is performed from the state (operation error state), since the production reception is properly performed, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game when the operation error occurs.

In the above example of performance, when the player makes an erroneous operation, it is notified that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error. However, the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error as it is It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, since there is a possibility that the player is panicking in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, notifying complicated contents may be counterproductive. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received as an operation, not a message display but an effect or sound notification It is desirable to give a simple notification such as. In this case, the player may not recognize that an operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which a specific notification is given based on the operation being performed and no effect is produced during operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to sufficiently expect to switch the operation to the operation on the proper side.

On the other hand, depending on the player (especially, an aged player or the like), a situation may occur in which an operation may be mistakenly performed before a performance reception period occurs in a specific operation-related performance. For example, when an operation instruction for the second operation unit (for example, a sheath portion) is not issued, the first operation is performed while the operation for the second operation unit (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed. It is assumed that a performance reception period related to a specific operation performance may occur only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case also, how should the player side operate? There is a concern that I may not be able to recognize it.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit (sword region) and the second operation unit (sheath region) the operation opportunity is given is being performed, Despite being in a situation (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 257(b) and (c) of FIG. 257) in which the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the second operation unit side, the second operation unit It is desirable to be able to perform the specific notification that cannot appear even when the operation for is performed when the operation in the proper mode is received. The specific notification may be “a message display that the operation unit on the proper side to which an operation opportunity is to be given will be operated soon while the operation state is maintained” may be displayed. Instead, it may be a simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound. In any case, even if an operation is performed, it is possible to perform the operation on the proper side afterwards by confirming a special situation in which the specific notification is made based on the operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a reason to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed. , The sword part) side, even when the performance reception period related to the specific operation performance occurs, the state in which the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is operated (sword decoration) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state where 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-described operation effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Becomes

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the operation error state is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed as it is, the performance reception will be properly performed, so an operation error will occur before the performance reception period occurs. When the occurrence of the game occurs, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

However, in the period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed regarding which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit the operation opportunity is given, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is given in the period immediately before the occurrence of, the information will be mixed with the contents to be notified (instruction display, etc.) within the production reception period, which will further confuse the player. There is a concern that it will happen. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect that is finally displayed, the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit, and in the period until the effect result is displayed. The first notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation where the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, It is desirable to generate a performance acceptance period for one operation unit.

In the above-mentioned example of performance, the degree of expectation of privilege grant may be suggested when the specific notification is given. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the above-described effect modes and the sword ornament 5001 according to the other examples thereof, the effect mode of the sword ornament 5001 itself is changed to any one of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. 222). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in 1) to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to any one of the plurality of modes described above, and in the changed state, the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated. It may be allowed to. Alternatively, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed to any one of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect acceptance period, an instruction display (a character display such as “pushing in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) for prompting an operation on the sword ornament 5001 or a sword ornament 5001 is displayed. The sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration 5001 at that time (step 0 form to step 3 form shown in FIG. 222). It will be.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to have some fun in confirming the sword decoration image SYG. However, the performance is poor during the performance reception period. Therefore, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a different mode from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to secure the performance during the performance reception period.

At this time, it is preferable that the aspect represented by the sword decoration image SYG has a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration 5001 in order to further enhance the performance during the performance acceptance period. It is desirable in order to secure it appropriately. For example, when the sword decoration 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To be displayed. With such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to understand that the sword decoration image SYG has a higher degree of expectation by checking the form. As a result, the interest in the game during the production acceptance period can be favorably maintained.

In order to obtain such an action effect, the number of effect modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of effect modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the side of the sword decoration 5001 may be one. In addition, when a plurality of effect modes are prepared as the sword ornament 5001, the effect modes do not necessarily change.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made different in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because a false display is made. There is concern that this may reduce the fun of playing games. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects (here, stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 222) prepared as the form of the sword ornament 5001. Is prepared, and when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the aspect of the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the sword decoration image SYG is further deformed and united to change its outer shape, or the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a mode that does not appear, or the sword decoration body 5001 operates. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, since the representation expression that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, it is possible to suppress the concern that the display is false and that the user feels uncomfortable. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by providing the playability beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decoration 5001.

Even in the case where the sword decoration image SYG has a special aspect as described above, the sword decoration image SYG is provided with each aspect prepared as the aspect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, shown in FIG. 222). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. It should be noted that it is desirable to suggest that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed with a higher degree of expectation of privilege granting than when it is displayed in a special mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

In addition, regarding the method of allowing the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, other effects (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 223 to 230) You may make it apply.

For example, if it is now in the effect situation shown in FIG. 226 (X1), as the next effect development destination, in addition to the effect situation shown in FIG. 226 (X2), the effect situation shown in FIG. And a production pattern for production progress will be prepared. Then, when the production is advanced to the production pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 259(a), in the display area of the production display device 1600, the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226(X1) is operated. A continuous image (image with the eyes of the samurai closed) indicating that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the second sword state is in the sword state while maintaining the form in stage 3 form. Will be returned.

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the player is informed that the decorative symbols will be re-varied (FIG. 259(b)). ). Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. By displaying with the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative pattern (start of the pseudo continuous change).

However, here, as shown in FIG. 259(c), the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the fourth pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is included in the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although a sword image showing (special mode) is displayed, this special mode can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself is immutable. The special mode according to this example of performance is a mode in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259(c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the sword decoration 5001 in the display area changes to a special mode, the sword decoration 5001 has a stage 3 form. While maintaining the above, the sword state will change to the second sword state.

Then, after that, the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and at the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) showing the sword decoration 5001 in a special mode is displayed, An image (bar display) showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "Please put the sword!" (Fig. 259(d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 259(e), when the player's sword operation is detected in the operation valid period, the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blend product) is performed according to the set effect pattern. The sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form as the expectation notification production is performed. As a result, the player can recognize that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) has ended.

Further, in each of the above-described effect modes, and in other examples thereof, for example, when the design variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first omen effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration 5001 can be executed. Further, when the design variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the design variation. The second omen effect that appears when an opportunity is given is executable. Further, when the design variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the third aura that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to execute effects (specific operation related effects).

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as effect contents different from each other, but as the effect contents thereof, for example,
-Before the effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, a specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion in which the effect image appears,
After that, at the position where it is difficult to visually recognize by the specific image, the effect image showing the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
・After that, it is common in that the specific image gradually changes from the display area to the non-display (increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself, decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.) You may make it change. For example, in the first omen effect, a display effect by a "cloud effect" (a display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image with the operating means) is performed as the specific image, and in the second omen effect, the "flame" is used as the specific image. Display effect by "effect (display effect that makes it easier to visually confirm the effect image that depends on the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by "water effect" as the specific image (effect image that changes the operation means It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by making the types of the specific images different, for example, by making the display effects gradually visible. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is being performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed. In this case, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is being performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and when the display effect by the “water effect” is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that the third aura effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given is being performed.

Then, in the case of performing the indication effect (at least one of the first indication effect, the second indication effect, and the third indication effect) with such an effect content, an effect image that makes use of the operation means by the specific image is displayed. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize. When such a configuration is applied to one of the first aura effect and the second aura effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a high expectation display mode (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage when it is not sure which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect during the effect acceptance period It becomes possible to improve the sex. Further, even when such a configuration is applied to the third aura effect (specific operation-related effect), it is confident as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where the player cannot hold the performance, it is possible to improve the performance during the performance reception period.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 261 is an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 260 and FIG. 261, an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed will be described. However, regarding the example of the effect, the second omen effect and the third omen effect are not the first omen effect. It is also possible to apply it to a precursor effect.

FIG. 260(a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment, with the number of holdings being 0. Showing the production situation.

FIG. 260(b) shows an effect situation in which the effect of the first predictive effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 260(a).

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260(b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 261 (when the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased. Or, the area in which the specific image is displayed is reduced).

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 261, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is changed at the timing t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. Along with the occurrence, a button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 are respectively displayed ( FIG. 260(c)).

In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue) when the button image BTG is displayed, the proportion at which the effect during operation is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher. In this respect, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260(c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as well, since the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from such a precursor effect, the button image BTG is the same as the first display mode. It is possible to progress the production without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 260(c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, at a timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the effect situation shown in FIG. 260(c) occurs, the "cloud effect" is generated while the effect acceptance period generated at the timing t2 continues. Are completely hidden (FIG. 260(d)). In such a situation, it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, and the operation button 410 can be operated. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed while the effect contents are switched from the effect shown in FIG. 260(d).

According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period (timing t2 to t3) after the button image BTG is displayed until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden. In (), it is possible to provide a rendering effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

It should be noted that, in order to enhance the performance during the production reception period (timing t2 to t4) during the entire period, the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform the effect display which is not performed during the period of the above timings t2 to t3. In this production example, when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as "press" is displayed. However, for example, at timing t2 to t3. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stopped mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period of the timings t3 to t4, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more suitably enhanced. Will be able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 260, the instruction display prompting the operation button 410 to operate and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG showing the operation button 410 may be displayed before the performance acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize first appears, and after a predetermined time after that condition, the effect situation is difficult to visually recognize. Until then, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the production reception period occurs, the display pattern of the button image BTG changes to a mode with a higher degree of expectation (third sign). In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the fun in which the value of watching the button image BTG becomes higher as the button image BTG is more difficult to visually recognize. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 260, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. We decided to display it so that the visibility would be maintained. As a result, it is possible to enjoy with peace of mind that the visibility of the button image BTG is changing while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the “cloud effect” and may not be easily visible until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode, while the remaining time of the effect reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented novel performance.

Also, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 260, the above-mentioned or later-described “acceptable sound” may be output. In this case, the "acceptable sound" is output even when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the "cloud effect".

In addition, when such an "acceptable sound" is output in any of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (the proportion of the jackpot pattern, including "0" and "100"), the button image BTG It becomes possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation before the whole thing appears, and it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game.

When the production reception (operation) is performed while the "acceptable sound" is being output, it is desirable that the "acceptable sound" in the output state is not output at that time. In addition, as for the “acceptable sound”, each configuration described above or below may be appropriately adopted.

The “cloud effect” may be transparent, and in this case, the button image will be slightly visible behind it, but the visibility is still maintained even with such a configuration. ..

The “cloud effect” itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (the proportion of the jackpot pattern, including “0” and “100”). In this case, the function of making the operation button 410 difficult to visually recognize, but when the high degree of expectation is suggested, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Before the "cloud effect" is displayed and completely hidden, a specific production sound (BGM) is output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, or a production method described later is set to a non-output state. It may be adopted. In this way, the specific effect sound (BGM) that is in the suppressed state or in the output state in the silent state or in the non-output state is output in the non-suppressed state at the time when the operation is performed by the player. It will never be returned.

In addition, in any of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, when such an effect is applied, the effect image that is peculiar to the operation means after the amenity effects are started is clear. Even if the length of time until they are visually recognized (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image showing the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the same time until they are visually recognized (time until the specific image is hidden). Further, when applying such a rendering property to any one of the first indication production, the second indication production, and the third indication production, the production in which the operation means is used after the indication production is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare a plurality of these so as to give multiple performances with different expectations. However, the time from the display of the effect image imitating the operating means until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

In addition, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image created by using the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, by changing the setting of the transmittance of the effect image imitating the operation means itself, the effect image imitating the operation means appears in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to see, and then the relative The display mode (timing t3) that is easily visually recognized may be gradually changed. However, the timing in which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2. In this case, the appearance in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a predictive effect, or while a display different from this is performed as a predictive effect, an effect image evoking the operation means may be displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize. Good.

In addition, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 261 will be described later in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). ) May be executed only when the above occurs. That is, when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect, and as a result of the effect being advanced, a plurality of Since the production acceptance period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, if it may be delayed in determining which of the plurality of operation means should be operated, rather than being operated by the player. The production reception period may end before all the remaining time is consumed. In this respect, if the specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later occurs, an effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed. In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect, the player operates the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function. Since the effect reception is performed by any of the above, and the post-operation effect is always executed, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

[Automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the automatic button effect state is controlled. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, during the effect reception period Even if the operation by the player is not received as an effect, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as the operation when the operation by the player is received as an effect within the effect reception period. There is. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect after operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect acceptance period occurs, so that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by forgetting to operate is suppressed. You will be able to. Regarding the automatic effect function, when the function is activated, the same effect reception as that when the operation is actually performed may be generated so that the process corresponding to the effect reception may be performed. The same process may be performed without receiving the effect reception.

In the embodiments relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned techniques, effects, and settings related to the operation may be used in an appropriate combination, or may be used by being replaced.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. It is set so that the production state can be set. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is displayed so that the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed therein is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of a different operating means may be performed a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating once, and by the simplification of such operation, The automatic button production state can be set while keeping a close watch on the production progress while the symbols are changing. However, some players want to positively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred. From such a person, the operation button 410 can be operated. If there is a case where the automatic button performance state is set just by operating it, the interest in the game may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time ( In this case, it is required to operate this once in a mode in which it is maintained for 2 seconds (a so-called “long press mode”). Accordingly, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation button 410 is positively operated regardless of whether or not the effective period is generated, the automatic button effect state is set. And it becomes possible to make it difficult to be accidentally set. In addition, it is preferable not to set the automatic button production state even if the operation is performed in a long-press mode when at least the production reception period is occurring during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set, even if the method is canceled, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is displayed so that the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When "cancel the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by only operating the operation button 410 once, and by the simplification of such operation, The automatic button performance state setting can be canceled while keeping a close watch on the performance progress while the symbols are changing. However, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is set to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state without maintaining the operation state of the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even in the long-press operation mode). The setting of the automatic button presentation state is released only by detecting that the action has been performed (by operating in a single-shot operation mode). That is, it can be said that some operation is performed on the operation button 410, which means that there is a desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button effect is produced. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal effect state at an early stage, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be favorably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. A performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) (more accurately, a predetermined performance pattern in which a performance reception period for the sword decoration 5001 or the like is set). Occurs, and even if the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received during the performance reception period, the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is still performed within the performance reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the production is received. According to such a configuration, a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received, or another operation means (for example, When the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether a period during which an operation for the sword ornament 5001) can accept the effect occurs, the effect result is executed. Since it is not necessary to worry about forgetting to operate the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 regardless of whether the operation reception is possible, it is possible to enjoy such a specific operation-related effect with peace of mind. ..

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first side effect acceptance period in which a first operation means (for example, operation button 410) of a plurality of operation means is set as an operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When the first operation means is not operated within the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process that causes the same change as the operation when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic production means),
The second side effect acceptance period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When it occurs, when the operation for the second operation means is not performed within the second-side effect reception period, an automatic process that causes the same change as when the operation for the second operation means is performed for the effect is executed. Possible (second automatic production means)
Even if either the first side effect reception period or the second side effect reception period occurs, it is possible to determine whether the same specific time elapses after the period has occurred. The automatic processing by the one automatic rendering means or the automatic processing by the second automatic rendering means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are the operation object. Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, when a first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period occurred. When the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed, and when the time different from the specific time elapses after the first side effect reception period occurs, the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed. As in some cases, production progress may be performed within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side effect acceptance period has occurred, but at a different timing from this. Since the effect reception is made and the effect after the operation is automatically generated, it is possible to function as a surprise effect.

When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol variation period than when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). You may make it the ratio which the produced|generated production reception period generate|occur|produces becomes high. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency with which the performance reception period occurs increases, and the frequency with which the user forgets to operate within the performance reception period also increases. Since the post-operation performance is executed due to the functioning of the function, it is possible to generate the performance reception period with a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to frequent forgetting operations. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the ratio of occurrence of both the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the occurrence rate be different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
If the performance reception condition is satisfied within the performance reception period, post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means),
A process for satisfying the effect reception condition based on the player's operation being performed within the effect reception period (player operation reception means),
When an operation is not performed by the player within the production reception period, it is possible to execute a process for satisfying the production reception condition without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception unit )
However, the specific timing within the performance reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the performance reception period elapses after the performance reception period starts. I am going to do it. As a result, it becomes possible to give a sufficient margin for the player to operate by himself until the automatic effect function works, and the option to cause the effect acceptance by the operation by the player will also be left. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the amusement of entertainment.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred. When performing the production progress within the symbol variation so that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means may be executed when a different time from the above, the "specific time" or the "specific time" Any of the "time different from" will be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side effect reception period.

Here, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, and the operation for the operation button 410 is effected during the effect reception period, The process for generating post-operation effects according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may be performed together.

Also, similarly, during the period in which the symbol variation is controlled when the automatic button production state is being controlled, a production reception period for an operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the production reception Even when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received during the period, a process for generating a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state should be executed. Is desirable. At this time, as for the "post-operation effect according to effect reception", an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during a period in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the effect reception period. It will be executed as the same effect as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation on the body 5001 is received.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect) The desire to end the condition) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the performance reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending a specific staging state and the operation for receiving the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is being controlled, the operation button to which the operation opportunity is given within the effect acceptance period. The process of ending the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and the process that may cause a change in performance by only performing an operation on 410 or the sword decoration 5001 once (only by operating in a single operation mode). (Processing to execute post-operation production) is performed respectively, so the desire to end the automatic button production state (specific production state) and to develop the production depending on the player's own operation is production reception Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the effect state.

However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button production state (the setting change to the automatic button production state or the cancellation of the setting of the automatic button production state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting of the sword ornament 5001 can be changed without the need for an operation. That is, the sword ornament 5001 is less frequently given an operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the period of execution of the pattern change, and when the operation opportunity is provided by that much, a big hit expectation is expected than the operation button 410. The degree is raised. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is prevented from being permitted only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), whereby an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling when playing and maintain the entertainment appeal. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operation means other than the sword ornament 5001 (operation buttons) among the plurality of operation means. 410 or another operation means other than this) is operated a plurality of times to set or cancel the automatic button effect state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation when the state is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation to the automatic button effect state is performed without the need to operate the sword ornament 5001. The settings can be changed. That is, as described above, the operation button 410 is controlled to the automatic button effect state by operating once in the "long press mode", but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For the purpose of, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the setting related to the automatic button effect state may be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the design when the automatic button effect state is controlled It is limited to the case where an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the variation execution period, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the operation appears. .. According to such a configuration, the setting change to the automatic button effect state can be performed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. Like

In addition, as the plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the automatic button performance state is set, “automatic operation-based performance is generated without operation within the performance reception period. In addition to the operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "drafting function", special operation means that is not the target of the "automatic rendering function for generating a performance at the time of operation without operating during the performance acceptance period" May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and when an operation for the special operation means is received during the effect reception period, The expectation for a big hit will be suggested by the post-operation production according to the production reception. However, even if it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not accepted during the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted appears. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but it may be made to appear if the effect is different from when the effect is accepted.

Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the form of long press), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only the time, but also an effect reception period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (an effect reception time period when the sword ornament 5001 is operated is expected to be expected, and when a special operation means is operated, the expectation degree is suggested. It is desirable not to allow this even when the performance reception period etc.) occurs. That is, if the automatic button presentation state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long-press mode) during the production reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function for producing an on-operation production even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period" is activated, so that the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410 is operated. If the player who is not knowledgeable about such an automatic button effect state has generated the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410, or the operation button 410. This is because it may be confusing whether or not there is a performance acceptance period for an operating means different from that, and this may reduce the entertainment appeal.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is capable of executing the precursor effect prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears before the occurrence of the effect reception period when not performed, and a precursor effect that appears before the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) The display mode may be different from the above. That is, in this case, it is possible to previously recognize whether or not the automatic effect function is in a possible effect state within the specific effect reception period, so that the effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the effect reception period. However, when the performance acceptance period occurs, the specific image is displayed so that the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image of lightning falling toward the specific area) may be displayed outside the area (a sign effect). In other words, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by checking the movement of the effect image that is different from the specific image, the "specific image that suggests the remaining time" in the hidden state is watched at the point where it will appear. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it is possible to suitably prevent the situation where the specific effect reception period ends without the player's operation being in time, and further, Even if the player's operation is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the interest of the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player, but the results of the jackpot determination are also included in each of the following description examples. The state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state may be performed in accordance with the progress of the game or the effect based on it. As an example in which the state setting and the setting cancellation can be performed in accordance with the progress of the game and the production, for example, “While the game is controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as the automatic button production state, but the big hit game state. Or a control mode such as "the automatic button production state is canceled when the state is shifted to a high probability time saving state", or "the automatic button production state is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation in the execution state ends. Prior to being performed, a control mode such as "generating an effect pattern for releasing the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence" or "generating an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol variations are executed" It is possible to adopt such a control mode as described above and the like. Further, the pachinko machine 1 which is always controlled in the automatic button performance state may be used. In this case, the setting or cancellation related to the "automatic button performance state" is not released. Such processing will disappear.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function operates may be when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted or at a predetermined timing thereafter, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or when the above-mentioned automatic production function works at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions as in the case where an actual operation is performed. At the point of time (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

However, in order to secure a sense of security that the post-operation performance will occur even if the automatic button performance state is not controlled, the time until the performance reception period ends (performance reception) It is important to activate the above-mentioned automatic effect function at a specific timing within a period) to start the post-operation effect corresponding thereto. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function despite the arrival of the specific timing within the effect reception period, the player himself/herself operates after the arrival of the specific timing to generate the post-operation effect. It is also possible to make the user feel uneasy when controlled to the automatic button performance state (for example, "it is wrong to control the automatic button performance state even though it is not controlled to the automatic button performance state. Recognize that you may not be able to check the post-operation performance", "You may not be able to check the post-operation performance because the automatic performance function does not work due to some trouble, etc." You will be able to.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be sequentially described, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to the above-described effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. You may make it use it combining suitably.

In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when not normally controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When an effect reception period that can occur is also generated, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination) that can be executed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if an operation is not performed within the specific effective period. You can According to such a configuration, the performance when being controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) is improved (improvement of performance by allowing the generation of a specific display performance). In some cases, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, the automatic effect function may not function in another effect reception period that is set when a specific display effect is not performed. On the other hand, during the specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function works to save the time and effort of operation, so that it is possible to experience a VIP feeling. Therefore, it is expected that the interest of the game will be enhanced appropriately. In addition, it is not necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the different production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and the automatic production is performed at least in some production reception periods. If the function cannot be operated, the above-described operation effect when the specific effective period occurs when the specific display effect is performed (when the effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always works) occurs It is possible to expect Further, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player before the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the automatic effect function described above is caused to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation performance corresponding to this.

Moreover, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
When the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-described automatic effect is generated at a timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the first specific effective period. While the function works and ends the first specific effective period and generates a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
-When the second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time period longer than the first predetermined time period after the second specific effective period occurs. When the above has passed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to end the second specific effective period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto,
When the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is controlled despite being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of, each process such that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed may not appear may be performed in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is possible to perform the first time from when the effect acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function works when a predetermined time of, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses, Even if the production reception period ends, the automatic production function described above may not function in the first place. Therefore, even when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is possible to confirm which type of specific display effect was being performed when the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function despite the elapse of the first predetermined time, the above-mentioned operation is performed when the second predetermined time elapses. It is possible to make the production progress with a sense of tension such as whether the automatic production function of (1) works or whether the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work in the first place. It should be noted that the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operating state (so-called. The effect is received when a single-shot operation is performed, and the post-operation effect is generated.

Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can be executed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be. In this way, when the display is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is displayed. In this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the entertainment of the game when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, the first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and the second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and regarding the third specific display effect (third specific effective period) Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Moreover, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are received in the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

Further, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at which timing in the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function is activated (which is the effect acceptance period when the effect is accepted). Automatic display function worked for the bar display (image change (area change here) with the passage of time) that shows the remaining time of the performance acceptable period so that it can be recognized) The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which it is not hidden at this point but is displayed. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function is activated, the effect reception period is the first specific effective period ( After the performance reception period has occurred, a period in which the automatic performance function operates when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage, has elapsed, and the second specific effective period (the performance reception period has occurred, relatively It becomes possible to recognize which is the later stage, that is, the period during which the automatic effect function works when the second predetermined time elapses.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic effect function operates when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the effect reception period has occurred) and the second specific effective period ( The jackpot expectation level is different when the performance time period when the automatic performance function operates when the second predetermined time elapses after the performance acceptance period occurs (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected depending on when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. The functions are performed so that the degrees are different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when the after-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state in which the after-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic effect function. Similarly to the case where the above-mentioned function is performed, the post-operation effect may be generated while the "bar display" is not hidden and is displayed. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed as, for example, light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable ornament. Good.

In addition, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (eg, the operation button 410) that is the operation target. Since the effect is automatically generated, the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated after-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function to generate an after-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation to be an operation target) that suggests an operation means to be an operation target in the effect reception period Image display, etc.) is displayed, and even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning, the post-operation effect is generated without displaying the operation target suggestion image without displaying it. Is desirable. In this case, the display mode (for example, the color, the transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation performance, and the operation means that is the operation target. It suffices to be able to recognize which of the two is even in the state where the post-operation performance has occurred. On the other hand, when the after-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state in which the after-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic operation is performed. Similar to the case where the effect function works, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not hidden and is displayed. When the automatic effect function described above functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the first specific effective period described above, or when the automatic effect function operates within the second specific effective period described above. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not hidden but is displayed.

Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, the post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed, for example, as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable ornament. It may be.

For example, even with a pachinko machine 1 that does not have the above-described automatic effect function, a jackpot expectation degree (for example, appears only when a jackpot is obtained) as an operation target suggestion image (a shot image of the operating means). If multiple modes with different ratios in which the post-operation effect is executed in different modes) are prepared and the operation is accepted by the player's operation, the operation target at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the operation acceptance. If the suggestion image (such as a practicing image of the operation means) is left displayed in any of the plurality of modes with different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of post-operation performance will be obtained. It becomes possible to check both of them at the same time, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the effective period (effect reception period) in which the mock image is displayed is generated, the type of the effective period (effect reception period) (effective period generation condition and post-operation effect that occurs when the operation is accepted) When the display is performed in which the display area is reduced according to the lapse of time (the first effective period generated by the establishment of the first condition), the display area is reduced according to the lapse of time. It is desirable that there is a case where the display is not performed (the second effective period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time remains until the operation is accepted during the valid period when the display area is reduced and the display area is reduced over time. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the tension inside. Note that "the display area of the specific image is not reduced as time elapses" means that, for example, normally (the first effective period), the display area is reduced with time. Where the image is displayed, it can be realized by not displaying the gauge image itself in the second effective period, or by adopting a method in which the gauge image is displayed but the display area thereof is not reduced with time. is there.

In this respect, when an operation is accepted in the second effective period (when the display area is reduced as time elapses), a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) corresponding to the operation acceptance is made. It is desirable that the image is not hidden but is displayed at the time when the execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect) is started. This makes it possible to understand that the operation has been accepted while the image is being displayed (before the expiration of the effective period), and the anxiety that "it may not be in time for the operation" Will be able to be removed.

In this case, the display mode (for example, the color or the like) of the change image before and after the change (at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) according to the operation reception occurs. Transparency etc.) does not have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult for the other image to visually recognize the mock image, and the operation acceptance can be made to determine which operation means was the operation target. It suffices to be recognizable even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain such an operation effect, at least at the time point when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) corresponding to the operation reception is started. It is desirable that the display state of the mock image be maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the operation was accepted so that the other image does not make it difficult to visually recognize the mock image. Therefore, if the mood image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed, at least one of the changes (the display change, the lamp light emission, and the like caused by the post-operation effect) in response to the operation reception. It is desirable that the dynamic display be continued even when () is started. On the other hand, if a change (at least one of a change caused by post-operation effects such as a display change or lamp light emission) in response to an operation reception occurs by the operation by the player within the first effective period, the change The mock image may be hidden when (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) has occurred, or like the case of the second effective period described above, the mull image is not hidden and is displayed. In the state, a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) may be generated according to the operation acceptance.

However, in this way, even in the effective period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced with the passage of time", the image of the operating means to be operated is displayed and the image is displayed. It is desirable to display the image in the mode described with reference to FIG. 288. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is possible to grasp the remaining time that the operation reception is allowed by the dynamic display by the image, but it is possible to play the game. It is expected that the interest will be maintained appropriately.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes the first operating means (for example, the operation button 410) and the second operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) as the operating means, and the first operating means. There is a case where an effective period (production reception period) in which operation reception is permitted is generated and a case where an effective period (production reception period) in which operation reception is permitted for the second operation means are generated. Among them, the first operating image showing the first operating means is displayed during the valid period in which the operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted, and the second operating means is activated during the valid period in which the operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted. The reproduced second image is displayed. In addition, in the valid period in which the operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted and the valid period in which the operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted, the jackpot expectation degree (post-operation effect) suggested when the operation acceptance is made. As a result, the rate at which the mode that appears only at the time of a big hit is executed is different. It should be noted that, in addition to the valid period during which the operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted (production acceptance period), the valid period during which the operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted (production acceptance period), an effective period different from these is set. It may also be one that can occur. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during an effective period (eg, an effective period during which operation acceptance for the second operation means is allowed) on the side of high jackpot expectation, a change (display change or display change) corresponding to the operation acceptance is made. , At least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lamp light emission, is preferably not displayed and not displayed at the time when execution is started.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 258(f) described above, for example, the operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001). Nevertheless, the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is left in the operating state (the operation is performed. Even if the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is operated and the operation is accepted as it is, the player side is made to recognize that the performance has been properly accepted. Will be able to.

In this case, the display mode (for example, the color or the like) of the change image before and after the change (at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) according to the operation reception occurs. Transparency etc.) does not have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult for the other image to visually recognize the mock image, and the operation acceptance can be made to determine which operation means was the operation target. It suffices to be recognizable even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) has occurred. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described action and effect, at least when a change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp emission) corresponding to operation acceptance is started, the operation is started. It is desirable that the display state of the mock image is maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to be visually recognized by other images. Therefore, if the mood image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed, at least one of the changes (the display change, the lamp light emission, and the like caused by the post-operation effect) in response to the operation reception. It is desirable that the dynamic display be continued even when () is started. In addition, in order to make the player recognize that the performance has been properly received, a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) according to the operation reception by the operation of the player is made within the first effective period. Even when the change occurs (display change, lamp emission, etc.), the change image (first change image) is not hidden in the state where the change (display change or display change) , Lamp emission, etc.) is desirable.

According to such a configuration, "based on the determination means for performing the determination, the production means for performing the production based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and the predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means And a specific operation receiving portion (operation button 410 that can be displaced between the normal position and the pressed position) provided so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position. ), a first detection unit capable of detecting a specific operation (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation reception unit to the second position, and a special operation reception unit different from the specific operation reception unit. (For example, a sword decoration 5001) is provided with a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action by the player (for example, a sword operation), and (a post-operation effect that occurs when effect reception is made). A plurality of production reception periods including a first production reception period and a second production reception period are prepared as production reception periods (different types), and in the first production reception period, the specific operation receiving section A mood image is displayed, and performance reception is made by detection by the first detection unit. In the second performance reception period, a special mood image that mangles the special operation receiving unit is displayed, and 2 The detection is performed by the detection by the detection unit, and the special action by the player is displayed in spite of the display of the special mockup image of the special operation receiving unit in the second performance reception period. When the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by the second detection even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the second position. The effect reception is made by the detection by the unit, and the post-operation effect can be executed based on the effect reception."

Then, in such a configuration, “even if the special operation is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving portion is maintained at the second position, the production is accepted by the detection by the second detecting portion. At the time when the post-operation performance is started to be executed based on the performance reception, by not hiding the special motion image simulating the special operation receiving unit and keeping it displayed, it is not the side operated by mistake, This allows the player to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an appropriate operation on the side.

If the special miraculous image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, the post-operation effect is started to be executed in the displayed mode. If the performance reception is made without such an erroneous operation being performed, it may be possible to leave the mood image displayed instead of hiding it at the time when the post-operation performance is started to be executed. The mock image may be hidden at the time when the effect is started to be executed.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation reception unit is lower than that of the first effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation reception unit. In many cases, this is considered to be one of the causes of the operation error. Therefore, at the time of the occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving unit, it is suggested that the effect reception is allowed or the effect reception is allowed. It is desirable that the acceptance permission sound is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect reception period has occurred, and it is expected that an operation error is unlikely to occur. The "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (valid period) is always generated while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or It is a sound that is in a state where an allowable state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it suggests that the output is started within the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed, or before the set time when the production reception is allowed is started. It indicates that the output is started and the effect reception is allowed, and is output as an effect sound such as "Pikyne".

However, even when the first performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit occurs, it is suggested that the performance reception is permitted or the performance reception is permitted. A reception acceptable sound may be output. However, in this case, it is preferable that the acceptance sound is made different in its mode (timbre, etc.) between the case where the first effect reception period occurs and the case where the second effect reception period occurs. Alternatively, in the first production reception period, even if the production reception is performed while the reception acceptable sound is being output, the reception acceptable sound in the output state is continued without being terminated, but the second production reception period In the above, it is preferable that, when the performance acceptance is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the acceptance permission sound in the output state is ended in the middle thereof. You may make it employ|adopt both of those structures. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand which of the first effect reception period and the second effect reception period occurs, the operation for the specific operation receiving unit, and the special operation reception period. It becomes possible to properly understand which of the operations for the department has been accepted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, a display for reducing the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) with time elapses. (For example, when a display is finally set to “0”, a small gauge effective period (performance reception period) that indicates the remaining time for which operation reception is allowed is generated, and Displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image) and then decreasing the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) with time (for example, finally setting the display area to "0"). There is a case in which a large gauge effective period (effect reception period) that suggests the remaining time for which the operation reception is permitted is performed by performing the display. Then, in the small gauge effective period in which the small gauge image is displayed and in the large gauge effective period in which the large gauge image is displayed, the jackpot expectation degree suggested only when the operation reception is made (only as a post-operation effect during the jackpot). The rate at which non-appearing aspects are executed) is made different (for example, a large gauge effective period has a higher jackpot expectation). In addition to the small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period, an effective period different from these may be further generated. The small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period may give an operation opportunity to the same operation target, or may give an operation opportunity to different operation targets.

In this respect, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge effective period, a change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) corresponding to the operation acceptance is started at the time of execution start. It is desirable that the large gauge image is not hidden but is displayed. In addition, even when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) in response to the operation reception is started, the large gauge image becomes smaller with the passage of time. It is desirable that the display is not ended and this is continued. As a result, there was a sense of security that it seemed that a lot of the remaining time was left due to the large gauge image being displayed, but after the operation was accepted, whether or not the operation was properly accepted It becomes possible to make the user feel a sense of anxiety, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the tension.

In this case, the display mode of the gauge image before and after the change (at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) in response to the operation reception occurs (for example, the color or the The transmittance and the like) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the gauge image may be difficult to be visually recognized by another image. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described operational effects, at least when a change (at least one of a change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) according to the operation reception is started, the operation is performed. It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image be maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the reception, and that the gauge image should not be made difficult to be visually recognized by other images. On the other hand, when a change (at least one of a change caused by a post-operation effect such as a display change or a lamp emission) caused by an operation by the player occurs during the small gauge effective period, the change The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) has occurred, or the gauge image (large gauge image) as in the case of the large gauge effective period described above. ) May be displayed instead of being hidden, and a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) may be generated in response to the operation acceptance.

Further, when the large gauge effective period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception permission sound that indicates that the production reception is permitted or that the production reception is permitted. .. As a result, the player can recognize that the large-gauge effective period has occurred, and the sense of security until the operation is accepted can be further emphasized. The "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (valid period) is always generated while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or It is a sound that is in a state where an allowable state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it suggests that the output is started within the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed, or before the set time when the production reception is allowed is started. It indicates that the output is started and the effect reception is allowed, and is output as an effect sound such as "Pikyne".

However, even when the small gauge effective period occurs, a reception permission sound may be output that indicates that the production reception is permitted or the production reception is permitted. However, in this case, it is desirable that the acceptance allowable sound be made different in its mode (timbre, etc.) depending on whether a small gauge effective period occurs or a large gauge effective period occurs. Or, in the small gauge effective period, even if the performance acceptance is made while the acceptance allowable sound is being output, the acceptance allowable sound in the output state is continued without being terminated, but in the large gauge effective period. When the performance acceptance is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is desirable that the acceptance permission sound in the output state be terminated in the middle of the performance acceptance. You may make it employ|adopt both of those structures. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand whether the small gauge effective period or the large gauge effective period occurs, the operation acceptance during the small gauge effective period, and the large gauge effective period. It becomes possible to properly understand which of the operation reception during the period is performed.

The large-gauge image and the small-gauge image may not only be different in size, but may also be images in which the shapes themselves are different (such as images that are not in a similar relationship).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above (or later), during the period in which the operation reception is permitted, the movement image is dynamically drawn so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced. It is supposed to be displayed. In this respect, at the time when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) in response to the operation reception is started, the mood image is not hidden but kept displayed. In this case, the dynamic image display may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the pad image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated pad image described later in which they are integrated.

In each of the above-mentioned effect examples and each of the below-described effect examples, "operation reception" means not only detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button but also detection of contact with a specific operation receiving portion by a touch sensor. The operation may be accepted, or the operation may be accepted by detecting the movement of the player in the specific area in a non-contact manner.

Further, when an effect that causes an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as an “operation system effect”, the operation system effect is related to this. There may be a case where it is executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.) that does not have any. However, in this case, when the "operational performance" is executed but the "other specific performance unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational performance" and the "unrelated to this" It is desirable that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works is higher than that in the case of the effect situation in which "specific effect of" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect that is not related to this" are in parallel, it is assumed that the effect reception is not performed in "the operation system effect" and the post-operation effect is not executed. Also, since "another specific effect that is not related to this" is in the execution state, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the gaming enjoyment, while "operating system effect" is executed, but "another special effect that is not related to this" When the "specific effect" is not being executed, if there is a case where the effect reception is not performed and the post-operation effect is not executed in the "operation system effect", no effect will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the game will be less interesting. Therefore, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are performed. By making the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to be higher than that in the effect situation in which "effects" are performed in parallel, it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game when the operation-related effects occur. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, a precursor effect that is performed before the performance acceptance period occurs and a performance in which the operation means to be operated operates are executed as an "operation system effect" or a related effect. It can be said that it is a thing. Further, if it is assumed that the "other specific effect" is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the indication effect), it is suggested in advance that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works increases. You will be able to. In this case, it is desirable to be executed as an effect that is ended after the end of the effect reception period (preferably after-operation effect). On the other hand, if "another specific effect" is to be executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the indication effect) and is ended before the end of the effect reception period, for example, It becomes possible only to recognize immediately before whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a high functioning state, and it is possible to provide an effect with a sense of tension. In this regard, as "another specific effect", when it is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect), the "another specific effect" is repeated a plurality of times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so if the ratio of the automatic production function that works when "another specific production" is executed is high, With this, it becomes possible to give a sense of tension as to whether a performance reception period will occur.

Further, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss depending on the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the variation in loss is continuously executed 999 times, Until the 1000th loss variation), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) can be generated with a predetermined probability based on the result of the big hit determination. In addition, even if the effect reception period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there are cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated and cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not activated. On the other hand, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially exhausted and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the variation in loss is continuously performed 999 times). When the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (rendering pattern) that has reached the specific value, the operation opportunity for the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, there is an operation by the player within the effect reception period by operating the above-mentioned automatic effect function. You may make it perform the process which generate|occur|produces the same after-effect as the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, "the operation should be performed for the player every time the performance acceptance period occurs while the loss variation is continuously executed. Even though I urged him to do so, I could not achieve any results.” As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there is no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself must function automatically. Since it is realized as an effect to be played, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game. At this time, in the performance acceptance period that occurs when the variation in loss is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th variation in loss), the variation in loss is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, a display image different from a display image (for example, “operation margin” or the like) that appears during the production acceptance period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, a variation of up to 999 times)) "If it is troublesome, I will operate on your behalf" etc.) Further, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied, the symbol variation. In the (production pattern), regardless of the result of the big hit determination, an operation reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is always generated, and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate on your behalf" etc.), and even if there is no operation by the player within the production reception period, the automatic production function described above will function to respond to the production reception. It is desirable to execute a process that always causes post-operation performance.

In the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the variation in loss is continuously executed 999 times, It is also possible to display the number of remaining variations until the 1000th variation in loss).

In addition, until the number of executions reaches a specific value, the variation of the loss according to the result of the big hit judgment is sequentially digested in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and the first operation during the symbol change. Both the production reception period for the means and the production reception period for the second operation means are allowed to occur, but in the variation of the symbols when the variation of the loss is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. Alternatively, the production may be advanced such that only one of the production reception period for the first operation means and the production reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of the production reception period and the expectation of itself. I will get it. However, this performance example "provides some results even though it prompts the player to operate every time the performance acceptance period occurs while the variation of loss is continuously executed. As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there is no operation by the player, considering that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always causes the automatic effect function to operate, it is a transition. In order not to have any more expectations, a performance acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate a performance acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001).

Further, in the first effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means, it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur both when it is not operated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means of the plurality of operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). The second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given cannot occur when it is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be allowed to occur while being performed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to enhance the performance when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the effect is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the performance acceptance period is generated based on the result of the big hit determination,
Displaying a mock image of the operation means (an operation target suggesting image that suggests the operation means to be the operation target) (mature image display means),
When an operation is performed by the player while the mood image is displayed after the production acceptance period has occurred, post-operation production can be executed based on the operation (player operation acceptance means),
-After the production reception period occurs, if the specific timing arrives without any operation being performed by the player while the mood image is being displayed, post-operation production can be executed without being operated by the player ( Automatic performance reception means)
However, regarding the mood image, it is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation level) in which the post-operation effect is executed in “a mode advantageous to the player” when the effect reception is made is different. It is desirable to be able to be done. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the after-operation performance is generated by the player operation reception means or the after-operation performance is generated by the automatic performance reception means. It is possible to generate a post-operation performance while being said that.

In addition, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (eg, the operation button 410) that is the operation target. Since the effect is automatically generated, the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated after-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when generating the post-operation effect by causing the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function, first, while displaying the mood image (the operation target suggesting image that suggests the operation means to be the operation target) during the effect reception period, Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the mood image is not displayed but is displayed. In this case, the display mode (for example, the color, the transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation performance, and the operation means that is the operation target. It suffices to be able to recognize which of the two is even in the state where the post-operation performance has occurred. On the other hand, when the after-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state in which the after-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic operation is performed. Similar to the case where the effect function works, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not hidden and is displayed. The post-operation effect may be executed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area in which the mock image is displayed. May be executed as an operation by.

At this time, when the mood image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, even in the state where the post-operation performance has occurred, the expected degree (the mood image) suggested during the performance acceptance period. It becomes possible to confirm the display mode).

In this way, the image to be continuously displayed is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred The time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the non-display of the mood image should be different from the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a different time has elapsed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation performance has been generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation performance has been generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if it does not exist, it is possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect has occurred by checking the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the hiding of the mock image. ..

In addition, when the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, and when the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed, the big hit is determined by the big hit determination. The degree of expectation that has been obtained may be different.

In addition, when a production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player occurs while being controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), two displays are displayed during the production reception period. One of the modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) is allowed to appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image). ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the performance reception period, the performance reception is always performed (the automatic performance function is always functioning) and the post-operation performance according to the performance reception is executed, but the low expectation display When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, effect reception (automatic effect function) is performed and post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. In some cases, the production may be performed such that there is a case where the production is not received (the automatic production function does not function) and the post-operation production is not executed. That is, if the user forgets to operate the display when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is unavoidable that the entertainment of the game is deteriorated due to the inability to confirm the post-operation performance, but the low expectation. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that even if a user forgets to operate the game, it is assumed that the interest in the game will not be deteriorated so much, so a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. When the user forgets to operate the device, he/she always operates the automatic effect function within the effect reception period to avoid a decrease in the entertainment level of the game due to forgetting the operation. If you forget to operate it when (image) appears, make sure that you do not forget to operate it by making the automatic effect function not necessarily function during the performance reception period so that you have a sense of playing It is expected that the player's awareness of participation will increase. In addition, when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low-expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) is displayed. You may not be allowed to appear. Further, any one of three or more display modes may be allowed to appear during the production acceptance period.

Then, in each of the characteristic techniques described below, these other examples of the automatic button effect state may be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Expectation suggestion by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect acceptance period (when applying the above-mentioned another example, the first specified effective period or the second specified effective period), A process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button production state, when the operation by the player is not received during the production reception period, the same change as when the production is received is performed. It is also possible to generate an effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) for causing the effect is not executed. And at this time, in the automatic button production state, when the automatic production function does not work when the operation by the player is not received within the production reception period, when the automatic production function has worked, the symbol variation concerned In, it is possible to execute a process in which the production within the symbol variation is advanced so that the degree of expectation (rate) at which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the degree of expectation (rate) at which the big hit symbol appears may be 0%.

With such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is provided when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect acceptance period. By confirming whether or not it works, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol variation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button production state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation production itself, which should have been confirmed by performing production reception (operation on the operation button 410) within the production reception period. With the risk that a production demerit may occur, a novel production performance in which the player exercises a production selection such as "Dare not to operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period". Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) can be accepted as an effect. The above-described effects (specific operation-related effects (FIG. 241 to FIG. 261) regarding whether a period occurs or a period during which an operation for another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) is allowed to receive an effect occurs. See))) is executable. In this respect, in the automatic button production state, during the production reception period that occurs corresponding to such a specific operation-related production, compared to the production reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related production, those productions When there is no operation (reception of production) within the reception period, it is possible to execute a process in which the production within the symbol variation is advanced so that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions increases. At this time, the rate at which the automatic effect function works may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs also functions as an effect that suggests that the above-mentioned automatic effect function has a high functioning rate. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately improve the gaming interest when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Although this is also described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 more than when it is shown that the operation button 410 is given the operation opportunity as the effect result. When it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol variation in the execution state becomes higher. However, in the automatic button production state, regarding the proportion of the above-mentioned automatic production function that operates when there is no operation (production reception) within the production reception period that occurs corresponding to a specific operation-related production, the operation button 410 is used. It is more desirable to set the ratio to be the same in the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001.

According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect situation with a relatively low degree of expectation (indicating that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. Also, since the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works does not change due to this (the effect result of the specific operation-related effect), this can be expected regarding the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and expectations suggested by the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by the effect of each other are put in parallel, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Hereinafter, a specific example of an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264.

FIG. 262(a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the performance situation that is being performed. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button effect"). Setting in progress)) appears continuously.

262(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 262(a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

Here, if the operation on the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 262(b), a specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) is provided as an after-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. Etc.) and a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” with a relatively low expectation or “intense heat!” with a relatively high expectation). Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect reception is performed without consuming the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 262(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance is not generated), the ratio is 60%. Therefore, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 40%.

That is, when the above-described automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the specific effect acceptance period. As a result, the post-operation effect that would have occurred if the effect reception has been performed will not be executed. Then, after this, the production progresses in a form in which the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific production reception period occurs.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 262(d), even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific effect reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as that when the operation is performed and the effect is received within the specific effect reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that occurs due to the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material, etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. Any one of multiple modes (eg, "Chance!" In either case, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the mode displayed in the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 262(e), after that, the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific performance reception period is generated as a "performance reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function operates" or "the above-mentioned automatic performance function". Is generated as a non-functioning production reception period", when the symbol variation is executed, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the big hit judgment, and as a result, 60% in a specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a ratio of 40%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a ratio of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the relevant time of selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function works "Period" or "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, the selection table for the big hit is referred to, and the selection table for the big hit is used. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works" or "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not operate" is generated. As a result, the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% and the automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40% during the specific effect reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the specific performance reception period is generated as the "performance reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function operates", " Of which period so that the jackpot pattern appears at a higher rate when the symbol fluctuation is stopped than when it is generated as "the stage reception period in which the automatic production function does not work". Is determined (selected) on the basis of the result of the jackpot determination.

With such a configuration, the automatic production function is activated when the production reception period in which it is determined that a mode with high expectation (such as "heat!") will appear as post-operation production when production is received. In contrast to the relatively high proportion, the automatic production is performed when a production reception period occurs in which it is determined that a mode with low expectation (such as “chance!”) will appear as post-operation production when production is received. The rate at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether the automatic effect function works when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect acceptance period. By performing the confirmation, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button production state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation production itself, which should have been confirmed by performing production reception (operation on the operation button 410) within the production reception period. With the risk that a production demerit may occur, a novel production performance in which the player exercises a production selection such as "Dare not to operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period". Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

However, as shown in FIG. 262(d), even if the automatic effect function works when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, it is expected as an after-operation effect. Even if a mode with a low frequency (such as "chance!") can appear, even if it is suggested that the expectation is relatively high due to the function of the automatic production function, Such a suggestion that the expectation level continues to be raised (a suggestion by the function of the automatic production function, a suggestion by the mode of the post-operation production) makes it possible to realize an unobtrusive performance, and to maintain the amusement of the game appropriately. You will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(c), even when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, the effect reception is even accepted. Since there is a possibility that a mode with a high degree of expectation has appeared in the post-operation production that should have appeared if it is left, it is expected to maintain a good gaming interest. However, when the production situation (the situation where the automatic production function does not work and the post-operation production does not appear) shown in FIG. 262(c) appears, the production situation (automatic production function shown in FIG. 262(d) Functioned, but it is desirable that the expectation level be lower than when a situation in which a mode with a low expectation level appeared as a post-operation effect).

FIGS. 263 and 264 show effects that the automatic effect function suggests when the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) occurs in the automatic button effect state. A specific example is shown.

In FIG. 263(a), in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the performance situation that is being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, , "Auto button setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 263(b) shows a specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. (May be a staging) indicates the staging situation in which the staging is started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. , The common display effect is performed. While the common display effect is performed, it is kept secret which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given the operation opportunity. .. However, when a predetermined time elapses after the specific operation-related effect is started, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation, or As a result of the second effect having a relatively high degree of expectation, an effect state indicating that the sword ornament 5001 should be operated appears, and thus the operation button 410 having a relatively low degree of expectation and the relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given an operation opportunity is shown.

263(c) shows that the operation button 410 is to be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263(b) being performed. Is displayed, and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press”, etc.) is displayed. A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific performance reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

Here, if the operation on the operation button 410 is received as an effect during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263(c), the specific decorative member SDY (such as a curtain) is used as a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. In addition to performing the rendering operation, one of a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” with relatively low expectations or “exciting heat” with relatively high expectations). Will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect reception is performed without consuming the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the ratio is 20% as described above. The automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate during the effect reception period. A situation may occur in which operations cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect acceptance period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 263(c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)), the production within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic production function to function is increased when there is no operation (production reception) within the production reception period. Is being executed. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing the anxiety that "a proper operation cannot be performed within the production reception period and the production corresponding to the operation may not appear". It becomes possible to provide the fun about which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related effect. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic effect function has worked.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, "auto button high accuracy middle") indicating that there is a production situation in which the ratio of the automatic production function is high continues. Is becoming apparent.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 263(d), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is not accepted during the effect acceptance period. The post-operation effect, which should have occurred, will not be executed as long as the effect reception is performed. Then, after this, the production progresses in a form in which the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific production reception period occurs. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance is not generated), the above-described automatic effect function does not function. In this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 262(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above functions. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if not.

Further, when the above-described automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 263(e), even though the operation button 410 has not been operated within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. The post-operation effect having the same content as that when the operation is performed and the effect is accepted within the acceptance period will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that occurs due to the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material, etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. Any one of multiple modes (eg, "Chance!" In either case, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the mode displayed in the display area. Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 263(f), the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, FIG. 264(g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 should be operated as the second effect result having a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263(b) being performed. In the drawing, the effect status indicating that the effect is present appears, and the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, " A character display such as "Deliver the sword" and a bar display showing the remaining time of the specific performance reception period) will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, and this also prompts the operation of the operating button 410 and moves the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Will be allowed to operate.

Here, if the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 264(g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263(c). The same post-operation effect as when it was performed will be executed. However, when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263(g), the operation on the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263(c). Of multiple modes with different expectations (for example, “Chance!” with relatively low expectations, “Gekijou!” with relatively high expectations, etc.) The appearance ratio in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. Further, when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the remaining time is consumed during the specific effect reception period. The fact that the production is ended when there is a production reception is the same as in the case of the production reception period shown in FIG. 263(c).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 264(g), when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed within the effect acceptance period (effect reception does not occur. In the case), although the effect situation has a higher expectation than when the effect situation shown in FIG. 263(c) occurs, effect acceptance is generated in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263(c). As in the case of not doing so, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, the effect state indicating that the operation button 410 is in a state in which the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having relatively low expectations (FIG. 263). Even if ((c)) appears, the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works is not changed by this (effect result of a specific operation-related effect). It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the expectation that the function will function. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and expectation of the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by each other's effect results are put in parallel, so that an adverse effect result appears in the effect on one side. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in playing games. However, in this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when the effect acceptance does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function functions. In such a case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 264(g), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect acceptance period (when the effect acceptance is not generated). Expectations will be lower than if they worked.

In addition, when the above-described automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 264(h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted during the effect acceptance period. The post-operation effect, which should have occurred, is not executed as long as the effect reception is performed. Then, after this, the production progresses in a form in which the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific production reception period occurs. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 264(g), the above-described automatic effect function functions when the sword ornament 5001 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when the effect acceptance does not occur). Even if there is not, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function is provided. Expectations should be higher than if they did not work.

Further, when the above-described automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 264(i), although the sword ornament 5001 is not operated within the effect acceptance period, The post-operation effect having the same content as that when the operation is performed and the effect is accepted within the effect acceptance period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that is generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (a shade accessory) and the like are operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. When one of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" or "Intense heat!") is displayed, but after-operation performance occurs in response to operation within the performance reception period In either case, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 264(j), the production progresses in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time elapses from the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production.

It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263(c) and 264(g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as the “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function works” or “the above-mentioned. As for the effect reception period (see FIG. 262(b)) in which the specific operation-related effect occurs without being executed, whether or not the automatic effect function does not function is generated. At the time of execution, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the big hit judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is operated at a rate of 20% in the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect. Instead, the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the relevant time of selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function works "Period" or "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, the selection table for the big hit is referred to, and the selection table for the big hit is used. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works" or "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not operate" is generated. As a result, the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263(c) and 264(g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and 80%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of.

Similarly, the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263(c) and 264(g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is also generated as the “effect reception period during which the above-described automatic effect function works”. In that case, the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing when the symbol fluctuation is stopped becomes higher than that in the case where the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function as the production reception period. Then, which of these periods should be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination.

It should be noted that the post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263(c) and 264(g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and without the specific operation-related effect being executed. It may be executed as an effect different from that during the effect reception period (see FIG. 262(b)). However, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect even when the effects are executed as different effects. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, the sword decoration 5001 used in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be the sword decoration 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 222. In addition, in FIGS. 263 and 264, an explanation is given as an example in which the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 243 to 246. The "effect using function" may be applied to any of the specific operation-related effects in FIGS. 241 to 261.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 263 and 264, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect. In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button performance state from being accepted, the state "the setting operation to the automatic button performance state is not accepted" is set before the performance reception period occurs. It is desirable to generate at least from the time of the effect situation (the effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect has started) shown in FIG. 263(b) so that this is continued until the effect acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is attempted after confirming that the specific operation-related effect has started, this will not be accepted. It will be possible to provide "production using the automatic production function" only for those who continuously play while maintaining the game, and continue playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state. You will be able to provide dramatic value for what you do.

Also, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262(b)) that occurs when a specific operation-related effect is not executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 263(c), FIG. 264(g). )), a first display mode (for example, a blue button image BTG or a blue sword decoration image SYG) and a second display mode (for example, a green button image BTG or a green sword decoration). (Image SYG) is allowed to appear, and when the second display mode appears, the "performance reception period during which the above-described automatic effect function works" occurs compared to when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to have a higher ratio in.

Also, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262(b)) that occurs when a specific operation-related effect is not executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 263(c), FIG. 264(g). )), a third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) is allowed to appear, and when the third display mode appears, "the above-mentioned automatic effect is displayed." It may be configured such that the "performance reception period during which the function works" is always occurring.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button production state, it is not possible to confirm the post-operation production itself which should have been confirmed if "reception of production (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the production reception period. "There is a risk that a production demerit such as" may occur, and to provide a material for determining whether to make a production selection such as "Dare not to operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period". It will be possible to expect that it will be possible to maintain a favorable interest in the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" illustrated in FIGS. 241-261, 263, and 264. With regard to the above, it is desirable to generate as a period having a time longer than the effect reception period (such as FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without the specific operation-related effect being executed. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate during the effect reception period. Although it may happen that operations cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent such situations from occurring by allowing a long time for the production reception period corresponding to "specific operation-related production". Will be expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 263 and 264, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic effect function to be set is relatively high in the effect reception period corresponding to “specific operation-related effect”. For example, whether or not the automatic performance function works by setting the performance reception period to have a longer time than the performance reception period that occurs when "specific operation-related performance" is not executed. It can be said that it is desirable in order to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the performance of the game last longer. In this case, with regard to the timing at which the automatic effect function works, in the effect reception period that occurs without the "specific operation-related effect" being executed, it will come when the first time has elapsed after the period has occurred. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation related effect”, the automatic effect function is to be set to arrive when the second time longer than the first time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period. Is important in sustaining the playability of whether or not it works.

In addition, the time from the start to the end of the effect reception period that occurs when the "specific operation-related effect" does not occur and the effect reception period that corresponds to the "specific operation-related effect" Even when differently set, the bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same manner (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is reduced. It is desirable to only make the speeds different. That is, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, the period is continued for the same time as the effect reception period that occurs without the "specific operation-related effect" being executed. Since it is possible to make it seem like it is, it is possible to maintain the directivity of whether or not the automatic directing function works, coupled with the “twistedness” due to being continued for a longer time than expected Will be able to

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 262 to 264, the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Occurs and the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated within the first effect reception period, the process by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not always performed. Although not necessarily executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect occurs without being executed. When the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period than the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) The rate at which the processing by the automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is executed is increased.

In this respect, in such an automatic button effect state, the proportions ("60%-40%", "20%-80%") of the automatic effect function that function depending on the type of effect acceptance period are different as described above. When the automatic button effect state to be set is the “first automatic button effect state”, the proportion of the automatic effect function that functions depending on the type of effect acceptance period is another distribution rate (“50%-50%”, “10%”). %-90%") is set differently, and when the production reception period occurs, the automatic production function is set to always function regardless of the type as the period. It is also possible to further prepare a third automatic button effect state to be performed so that it can be set to any of these effect states, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, the normal production state in which the automatic production function does not work is not prepared, and the game is always in the automatic button production state (first automatic button production state, second automatic button production state, third automatic button production state). Alternatively, the effect may be executed.

The above-mentioned "type of effect reception period" may mean that the type of post-operation effect that occurs when an operation is accepted is different. For example, in the first automatic button effect state, in the "first effect reception period for generating post-operation effect of conversation notice" and "second effect reception period for generating post-operation effect of cut-in", When an operation is not accepted for the operation means within the effect acceptance period of, the same post-operation effect as when the acceptance is made is not generated (although automatic acceptance is not made), but "after the operation of moving the movable body A. In the "third effect reception period during which the effect is generated", the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated when the operation is not accepted within the effect acceptance period (the automatic acceptance is performed). It will be. On the other hand, in the "second automatic button performance state (second performance state)" in which automatic reception is more likely to occur than in the "first automatic button performance state (first performance state)", "conversation notice" In the "first effect reception period for generating post-operation effect", the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not generated when the operation is not accepted within the effect acceptance period (automatic acceptance However, in the "second effect reception period for generating post-operation effect of cut-in" and the "third effect reception period for generating post-operation effect of moving the movable body A", those effect receptions are performed. When the operation is not accepted within the period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated (automatic acceptance is performed). However, any one of a plurality of production reception periods including the first production reception period (type of conversation notice), the second production reception period (type of cut-in), and the third production reception period (type of movable body A) occurs. Even if it is done, when the operation for the operation means is not accepted, there is no case where the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated, and the "normal effect state" is not prepared and should be set to this. Will not be allowed.

That is, in this case, "the operation means operable by the player, the determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the game based on the result obtained by the determination made by the determination means" As a performance acceptance period in which a privilege giving unit that can give a privilege to a person and a production state control unit that can control any one of a plurality of production states are provided, and an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, A plurality of effect reception periods having different types of post-operation effects that occur when an operation is received are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of effect reception periods occurs in the plurality of effect states, Depending on the type of effect reception period that has occurred, when the operation after the operation is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect is generated as when the operation was accepted, and the acceptance is performed. When there is both a case where the same post-operation effect is not generated and a case where any one of the plurality of effect reception periods occurs, depending on the type of the generated effect reception period, A case where the same post-operation production as when the reception is made when the operation is not received within the production reception period and a case where the same post-production as when the reception is made is not generated However, the easiness of occurrence of the same post-operation effect includes at least a second effect state different from the first effect state, and any of the plurality of effect reception periods has occurred. Even in the case, when the operation for the operation means is not accepted, a performance state in which the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not included is not included. Will be provided as.

Also, the distribution ratio may be set to either 0% or 100% depending on the type of the performance acceptance period and the type of the performance state.

Further, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be modified and implemented as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function operates in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262(b), the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs (first Of the effect reception period), the automatic effect function described above functions to end the first effect reception period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto. However, when the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262(b), the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs (first The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing within the one effect reception period), and then the first effect reception period is ended without executing the post-operation effect (even after that, the post-operation effect is not executed). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function works in the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 263(c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 264(g), the second effect reception period or The automatic performance function described above operates at the timing when the second predetermined time, which is longer than the first predetermined time, has elapsed since the third performance reception period occurred, and the second performance reception period or the third performance reception period. The production reception period is ended and the post-operation production is generated in accordance therewith. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 263(c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 264(g), the second effect reception period or The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the third effect reception period, and thereafter, the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period without the effect after the operation is executed. The production reception period of is ended (after that, the post-operation production is not executed).

According to such a configuration, in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function is low, the automatic effect function can operate at a relatively early stage, and the automatic effect function is Even if it does not function, the player will have a sufficient time to receive the effect by his/her own operation until the end of the first effect reception period, so that You will be able to play games with all your heart. On the other hand, in the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function is high, the automatic effect function can function only at a relatively late stage. Since there is not much time left for the player to operate when it does not function, it is possible to provide a game with a sense of tension although the proportion of the automatic production function is high. Will be able to.

Regarding the above-described modified example, in the first effect reception period, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the first effect reception period) and when it does not function. However, in the second effect reception period and the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (the timing within the second effect reception period). You may do it. Even with such a configuration, if the automatic production function could only work at a relatively late stage and the automatic production function did not work (due to some trouble), the time required for the player to operate Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, the same effect can be expected.

In addition to the effect examples described above with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, in other effect examples, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the player's operation. Alternatively, for example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the automatic button effect state setting itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined ratio.

[Unified operation control in the automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (desirable to end the automatic button effect state) Aspirations) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the performance reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button performance state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception is performed. After the operation according to the process of terminating the automatic button effect state and the operation acceptance by only performing the operation once on the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given within the period. The effect (the process that can cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if the player desires to finish the automatic button production state and progress the production depending on the player's own operation within the production reception period, the production mode is switched while avoiding the loss of the operation opportunity. Will be able to be done smoothly.

As described above, when setting to the automatic button effect state when the symbol variation is in the execution state, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can be set. ..

On the other hand, although this is also described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated in a state where the effect acceptance period has not occurred. An operation for canceling the setting is allowed only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period has occurred, when the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001 or the like) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated during the effect reception period. , A process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (a process for causing a change in effect) in accordance with effect acceptance are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated in the state where the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is occurring, the operation is not accepted and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players play games with a selfish game technique, such as "while maintaining the automatic button performance state (without switching the performance mode), perform the operation by themselves to progress the performance". It can be envisioned that some may wish to. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect is generated. Although a process for ending the state (specific performance state) and a process for causing a change in performance are respectively performed (operation unified control in the automatic button performance state), control to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) When the special operation means is operated during the performance reception period related to the specific performance, the processing for ending the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) is not performed and the performance changes according to the operation. The processing that can cause the above is performed.

According to such a configuration, when it is desired to end the automatic button effect state and actively perform the operation game thereafter, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated within the effect acceptance period. However, if you want to rarely perform an operation while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode), operate the special operation means within the production reception period. The game desired by the player can be realized only by properly using the operating means.

The operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 265 to 267.

FIG. 265(a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 1 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The figure shows a state in which an effect acceptance period for accepting a pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred in a reach state in which the reach state is formed. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button effect"). Setting in progress)) appears continuously.

Also, as shown in the figure, during this performance reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, the bottom A direction arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also the operation on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 that does not change at all is allowed.

265(b) to (d) show that the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), but the automatic effect function described above causes the effect reception period. It shows a state in which a post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation is performed and the effect reception is made is being executed. Note that the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a) is ended when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing). Any operation opportunity for the pressed button) 1410 will be lost.

That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, staged production progress appears, and any production result of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 265(c) and 265(d)) with different expectations is displayed. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the big hit determination), first, as shown in FIG. 265(b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion) Smoke image) is displayed. Then, after this, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 265(c), the specific production image shown in FIG. 265(b) (here, explosion) (Smoke image by) is gradually disappearing, a production image (here, “Kichi”'s fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 265(d), the specific production image (here, the smoke image caused by the explosion) shown in FIG. 265(b) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi's fortune”) that suggests that the effect result has a relatively high expectation is displayed.

Then, the flow of the effects shown in FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) appears as a basic effect development when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the automatic effect function described above is provided. Even after the post-operation effect (FIG. 265(b) to FIG. 265(d)) is executed by the operation, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless an operation is performed by the player. .

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the desire to return to the normal production mode in which the production can be advanced depending on the operation of the player himself (the automatic button production state The desire to end) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the performance reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button performance state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), it is detected that the operation is performed. Based on the detection of the fact that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position, the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance are performed (automatically). Unified operation control in button production state). It should be noted that when the operation on the operation button 410 is received the effect, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a) is ended, the automatic effect function described above is disabled, and special operation means ( In the figure, the operation opportunity for the button described as "PUSH") 1410 is also lost.

Even when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), as shown in FIG. 266(e), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and effect reception is performed. As a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 266(f), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 266(e) is generated. (Smoke image by) is gradually disappearing, a production image (here, “Kichi”'s fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, the specific production image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) shown in FIG. 266(e) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 266(g). In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi's fortune”) indicating that the effect result is relatively high in expectation is displayed.

However, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), a process of ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 266(e) to 266(g), after the effect on the operation button 410 is received, it is indicated that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (in this case, "during automatic button setting") is hidden. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggested display (here, "auto button release") appears (see FIG. 266(e)).

Further, as described above, during the effect reception period that has occurred in FIG. 265(a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also special operation means that does not change at all (described as "PUSH" in the figure). Button 1410 is also permitted to be operated. Then, this special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "operates only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing effect mode switching). As mentioned above, it is prepared in order to enable a selfish game technique such as "advance the production."

Therefore, even when the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), as shown in FIG. 267(h). First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact that an operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is performed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 267(i), the specific production image shown in FIG. 267(h) (here, an explosion) (Smoke image by) is gradually disappearing, a production image (here, “Kichi”'s fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 267(j), the specific production image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) shown in FIG. 267(h) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi”'s fortune) indicating that the effect result has a relatively high expectation is displayed. It should be noted that when the operation for the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect is generated. The function is disabled and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is lost.

However, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period that has occurred in FIG. 265(a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. There is no simultaneous processing for terminating. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 267 (h) to (j), even after the operation on the operation button 410 is received, the fact that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The display (here, "auto button setting is in progress") will be continuously displayed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a). Special operations that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-described automatic effect function works (FIG. 265(b)), or when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 266(e)). We are trying to make the production appear. Although such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body or a lamp, in the effect example shown in FIG. 267(j), the above-described automatic effect function is performed in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 265(b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 266(e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to do it. Instead of the glittering effect display, an effect using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally implemented.

According to such a configuration, the change content of the effect caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period regarding the fortune-telling effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the automatic button production state (specific production state) is controlled, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is operated within the production reception period for the fortune-telling production. In this case, the content of the change in the effect that is caused will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-described special effect (here, a glittering effect display) appears, "the operation means is operated and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance is displayed, but the automatic button effect state is It is possible to recognize while in the "state where the setting is not canceled and this is continued" while enjoying the post-operation performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 267(i), even when the effect image (here, “Kichi” fortune) indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed, the special image is displayed. The production (here, a glittering effect display) can be displayed.

Further, such a special effect (here, a glittering and shining effect display) is made to appear in addition to the above-described post-operation effect at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the big hit determination, and the special effect is displayed. When the effect is additionally appeared, it is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbol to appear due to the symbol variation is higher than that when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it becomes useful for the player to operate not the operation button 410 but the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that the operation will not be performed. Therefore, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), the special effect (here, glittering) If the effect display) does not appear, any effect result appears by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), or by operating the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable to make the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing lower than the above case due to the symbol fluctuation.

According to such a configuration, by the operation on the "special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410", "the operation means is operated and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button production state is not canceled and this is continued", a production demerit such as "It can be suggested that the proportion of the big hit symbol that appears in the pattern variation is extremely low" occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to maintain a favorable interest in the game by making the player exercise such a dramatic selection.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 267(i), although the same effect mode as in the example shown in FIG. 266(f) appears, the above-described effect of the demerit has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing due to the symbol variation is lower than that in the example shown in FIGS. 265(c) and 266(f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 267(i), while making it possible to recognize that the situation is in a low expectation level, the effect mode is shown in FIGS. 265(c) and 266(f). By making them the same as in the case, it is possible that a third party who has not operated the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation in which the production selection has failed. Is difficult to grasp, and it is expected that this will prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

It should be noted that in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, no matter which productional selection is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), FIG. 265(b) or FIG. 266( e), as shown in FIG. 267(h) and the like, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) is displayed. However, with respect to the specific effect image, as a post-operation effect, it is relatively performed. It is also possible to display in one of a plurality of modes in which the appearance mode with a high degree of expectation (here, “Nakichi”'s fortune) appears, or the ratio in which the special effect appears differs.

In addition, regardless of which staging selection is made within the staging acceptance period that has occurred in FIG. 265(a), the staging mode is omitted without displaying a particular staging image, and a staging mode having different expectations. Either one of (Okiji, here “Kichi” or “Nakichi”) may appear directly as the post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to understand that there is a rendering situation (FIG. 267(i)) in which the rendering selection has failed, a rendering aspect with different expectations ( Here, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) when causing either "Kichi" or "Nakichi" fortune to appear as a post-operation effect.

In addition, it is possible to perform an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested even within the effect reception period that has occurred in FIG. May be.

Further, the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, the other operating means already prepared may be used.

In the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265(a), is there a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) can be received? Or, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 241 to FIG. 261)) as to whether a period during which an operation for another operation means (for example, sword ornament 5001) can be accepted for effect occurs is executed. It may be generated as a result.

Further, during the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, the first effect in which the operation opportunity to the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is also given. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 265(a)) and the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is not given are included. Good. Then, in this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 265(a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect described above (see FIGS. 241 to 261) than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to increase the ratio of (see) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the ratio of the above-described specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appears depending on which of the first effect reception period and the second effect reception period has occurred. It will function as a suggested production.

[Stable automatic performance processing]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operating means is capable of receiving effects and different effects are executed depending on which operating means is operated". The production reception period can be generated. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when in the state of being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and for any operation means within the special effect acceptance period. If there is no operation, which of the plurality of operating means the automatic performance function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operating means causes the same change to the performance as when the performance is received) Is a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operating means are capable of accepting effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operating means is operated" When the production reception period of occurs, not "whether there is a possibility that a result with higher expectations may appear", but "whether there is a possibility that a result with lower expectations may appear" Based on the above, the process of activating the automatic performance function for the operating means different from the "operating means on the side that can generate the performance with the possibility of producing a performance result with lower expectations" (stable stable automatic performance) Process) is executable.

With such a configuration, the production mode with the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the plurality of operating means within the special production reception period, Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic effect function works, occurrence of a situation such as "When the operation is forgotten, the automatic effect function causes the appearance mode with the lowest expectation to appear" It can be preferably avoided.

Hereinafter, the stable-side automatic effect process in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270.

First, a description will be given of an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs in the normal effect state without being controlled to the automatic button effect state. In FIG. 268(a), in the normal effect state, the number of holdings is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It is possible to allow the player to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 under the reach state in the performance situation that is being performed. The production state in which the production display suggesting that the special production reception period is started is shown. It should be noted that in this effect situation, although neither the effect acceptance for the operation button 410 nor the effect acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword have been activated since that time. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state and the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword extraction position in order to prompt a determination as to which of the decorations 5001 should be operated. Further, on the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

FIG. 268(b) shows the player a special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. The production situation in which a production reception period that can be selected by the side) has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, at least a part (here, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG) of the effect display on the effect display device 1600, which has appeared from the time of the effect state shown in FIG. 268(a), and the operation button. While the state of 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained, the instruction display prompting the user to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed. Correspondingly displayed downward arrows, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period, and the like) are displayed.

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 268(b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “disturbance” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are ready to receive the effect. In addition, the dedicated mark may not be displayed when both of the two operating means are ready to receive the effect. For example, even though both the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, “the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed without displaying the image of the operation button 410. It is also possible to "display the mutilated image" or "display the mutilated image of the operation button 410 and not display the mutilated image of the sword decoration 5001".

That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268(b), first, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed as the button-side post-operation effect. After it is displayed that it was done (Fig. 268 (c)), it is suggested that the less the number destroyed, the lower the degree of expectation, and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the degree of expectation is "50 destroyed". And an effect (FIG. 268(d), FIG. 268(e)) that causes one of “100 kills” to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the button-side operation effect when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268(d) appears at a rate of “40%” and at the rate of “60%” in FIG. 268(e). In the post-button operation effect when the big hit is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268(d) appears at the rate of “60%” and the ratio of “40%”. It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 268(e) appear.

On the other hand, when the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed within the special production reception period, as a post-sword operation production, it is first displayed that the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been performed ( FIG. 269(f)), the production results suggesting that the smaller the number destroyed, the lower the degree of expectation and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the degree of expectation are "1 body destroyed", "100 body destroyed", and " The effect (FIGS. 269(g) to 269(i)) of causing any of "777 bodies destroyed" to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the post-sword-side operation effect when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269(g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and at the rate of “50%” in FIG. 269(h). The effect mode shown appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 269(i) appears at a rate of “40%”, and the ratio of “40%” in the post-sword side operation effect when the jackpot is lost. In FIG. 269(g), the effect mode shown in FIG. 269(h) appears at a rate of “50%”, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 269(i) at a rate of “0%”. It is possible for aspects to appear.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, regardless of whether the button-side post-operation production or the sword-side post-production production appears as a result, the number of defeated productions is small. Has a lower expectation than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. In the case where the number of defeats is the same effect mode (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268(e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 269(h), and the effect mode shown in FIG. 270(e) described later) , Expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

In such a configuration, a special performance acceptance period is generated that allows performance reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means), and the special performance reception period is generated. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (button-side operation effect, sword-side operation effect) depending on the type of operation means on the side operated within the effect reception period, one operation means is operated. It is possible to improve the monotonous performance of playing, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, the same degree of expectation is not displayed by operating either the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), but rather the sword decoration 5001 (first operation means). Only when the operation means 2) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 269(g)) that suggests that the big hit symbol is difficult to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state). Since the production mode of "defeating one body" can be made to appear, it is desired to see the production on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side (post-sword production after production) at such a risk. You will be expected to maintain amusement of the game by giving conflict and inspiration about such things.

In this case, the button-side post-operation effect is "a specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated during the special effect acceptance period. In this sense, the appearance risk of "(the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 269(g)") is eliminated, and thus it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. In addition, the sword-side post-operation effect is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here Then, in the sense that there is an appearance risk of "the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 269(g)", it will function as a post-operation effect that relatively includes disturbance.

Furthermore, in this effect example, from the appearance of the effect situation shown in FIG. 268(a) to the appearance of the effect situation shown in FIG. 268(b) (here, within the special effect acceptance period), 268(a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears, the effect mode appears more than when the effect mode does not appear. , The ratio of appearance of the "specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, the effect mode of "defeat one body" shown in FIG. 269(g))" is low when the sword ornament 5001 is operated. It is possible to make progress in the form. This percentage may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, the risk that "a specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 269(g))" may appear is taken. Since it becomes possible to use the effect result indicating whether or not the effect mode shown in FIG. 268(a-b) appears, as a material for determining whether to operate the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. 268(b), it is expected that the interest of the game when the special effect reception period shown in FIG.

In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268(b) occurs, but no production reception is made within the special production reception period, the above-described automatic production is performed. The function does not function, and the production is advanced without executing either the button-side post-operation production or the sword-side post-production production.

On the other hand, FIGS. 270(a) to 270(e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect reception period occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state.

As shown in FIGS. 270(a), 270(a-b), and 270(b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except that the display (here, "auto button setting") indicating the effect is continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600, an effect display indicating that a special effect reception period is started appears. From the time until the special effect reception period ends to the same effect as in the normal effect state described above (FIG. 268(a), FIG. 268(a-b), and FIG. 268(b)). To be advanced.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270(b), "a result with lower expectation (here, The automatic production function is enabled for the operation button 410 different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the production in which the production mode of "defeating one body" shown in 269 (g) may appear. It is possible to execute processing (stable side automatic effect processing).

That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 has been operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270(b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. By doing so, the same change as in the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is received in the special effect reception period is caused to the effect. Therefore, as the button-side post-operation effect, after the fact that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been displayed is displayed (FIG. 270(c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeats. As an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher, either "50 kills" or "100 kills" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 270(d) and 270(e)). ) Will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the lowest expectation among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when the operation reception is performed for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within the special effect reception period. The effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 269(g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function works, so "when forgetting to operate" It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as "the effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation appears by the automatic effect function."

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, it is feared that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, during the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 270(a-b) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears. , While the appearance ratio of the "specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, the effect mode of "defeat one body" shown in FIG. 269(g))" is low, the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Since the opportunity to enjoy the game will be provided, it is expected that the sword ornament 5001 can be suitably operated.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, a special period in which the period in which the operation on the operation button 410 is received and the period in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received are simultaneously generated and simultaneously ended. Although the control is performed as the production reception period, these periods may not necessarily be generated at the same time. For example, if the period in which the operation on the operation button 410 is received and the period in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received overlap in part of these periods, these periods are separated. You may make it generate|occur|produce at a timing.

When a particular effect pattern is selected from among a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means are capable of accepting effects, and different operation means are operated depending on which operation means is operated. The above special effect reception period such as "is executed" may be generated. That is, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the symbol variation starts with a specific effect pattern, "Which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect acceptance period, and a special effect acceptance period occurs? You should be able to ponder a staging strategy that assumes that a special staging reception period will occur, such as ``Should I perform the setting operation to the automatic button staging state before doing it?'' . For example, it is possible to confirm "how much advance notice production was performed in what kind of production mode (expectation level)" before the special production reception period occurs, so these confirmations can be made. It becomes possible to use the result as a judgment material for "which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period", and a game until the special effect reception period occurs. As for interest, this can be maintained appropriately.

However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when the operation button 410 is operated or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period, the automatic effect function is further used. Which effect mode is to appear when is activated is determined by lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the start of symbol variation or when the effect reception occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

In addition, even in a production situation in which a special production reception period has not yet occurred, "the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. When the effect display is in which the effect display (FIG. 268(a), FIG. 270(a)) suggesting that the special effect reception period is started, the setting to the automatic button effect state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that it is not prohibited. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that "a special effect reception period in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button production state after confirming that "production display" has started, this will not be accepted, so you can continue playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state. It becomes possible to provide "stable side automatic performance processing when in the automatic button performance state" only for those who are active, and performance for continuously playing games while maintaining the automatic button performance state Will be able to provide specific value.

Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the “lowest expectation specific effect mode (FIG. 269(g))” that can appear when the sword-side operation effect is performed is performed on the button side operation. Although it was decided to execute it as a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production is performed, regarding the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation", the button-side operation post-production is It may be executed in the same manner as the appearance aspect that can appear when performed (for example, (“50 body destruction” shown in FIG. 268(d)). Even if the "particular effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" appears as a result of, the objective appearance is that the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when the effect after the button-side operation is performed appears. Therefore, it may be difficult for a third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated to recognize that the production situation is in a state where the degree of expectation is significantly low. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed, that is, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, one such as "a specific effect mode is displayed based on effect reception". Despite the fact that the effect situation only appears, the effect of the effect varies depending on whether the effect situation is caused by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword ornament 5001. Since the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in (variation of symbols in the execution state) will be different, it will be possible to further enhance the fun as an effect using a plurality of operating means.

However, this is a case in which the "lowest expectation specific effect mode" in the sword-side post-operation effect is executed as the same effect mode that can appear even when the button-side operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the “special effect mode with the highest expectation” in the post-sword side operation effect, a unique effect mode that differs from any of the effect modes that can appear when the button-side operation effect is performed (for example, It is desirable to execute this as "(defeating 777 bodies" shown in FIG. 269(i)." According to such a configuration, "a specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation" in the post-sword operation production. When appears, it is difficult to recognize that there is a production situation in which the degree of expectation is remarkably low for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 has been operated. On the other hand, when the “special effect mode with the highest expectation” appears in the post-operation operation on the sword side, even a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 has been operated Therefore, it becomes possible to easily recognize that there is a production situation in which the degree of expectation is remarkably high. It becomes possible to enjoy the effect (effect after the sword side operation) on the side of the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means). Anything that can be recognized may be used, and for example, it may be possible to ensure uniqueness with other effect modes by executing a movable body operation or lamp light emission.

In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, as a result of the effect after the sword-side operation (FIGS. 269(f) to 269(i)) being performed, the effect mode of “defeating 777 bodies” (FIG. 269( i)) can appear, and when the production mode of “defeating 777 bodies” (FIG. 269(i)) appears, any other production mode (FIG. 268(d), FIG. 268(e)). , FIG. 269(g), FIG. 269(h)), the proportion of the big hit symbol that appears in the symbol fluctuation (symbol fluctuation in the execution state) becomes higher than that when it appears. This percentage may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary to cause the production mode of “defeating 777 bodies” (FIG. 269(i)) to appear, and in this case, as compared with the production mode shown in FIG. 268(d), FIG. The appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 269(h) is made higher than the appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 268(e) by the amount of lowering the degree of expectation of the effect mode shown in (g). Becomes

In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect after the button side operation (FIG. 268(c) to FIG. 268(e)) and the effect after the sword side operation (FIG. 269(f) to FIG. 269(i)). ), the common effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating 100 bodies") can appear, but the common effect mode does not appear. Good. Further, in the button-side post-operation effect, only the display change appears, whereas in the sword-side post-operation effect, not only the display change but also the movable body operation, the lamp light emission, and the like may be executed. In addition, the button-side post-operation effect and the sword-side post-operation effect may not be shared as effect contents regarding the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as mutually different effects.

Further, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, when the production reception occurs, including when the production reception is made by the function of the automatic production function, first of all, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. The display (FIG. 268(c), FIG. 269(f), and FIG. 270(c)) that suggests whether or not the performance has been accepted appears here, but the expectation level is suggested without making the display appear. You may make it perform the production which makes the production result which appears.

In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, as a result of the effect after the sword-side operation (FIGS. 269(f) to 269(i)) being performed, the effect mode of “defeating 777 bodies” (FIG. 269( i)) appears, the above-mentioned specific operation relations than when any other effect mode (FIG. 268(d), FIG. 268(e), FIG. 269(g), FIG. 269(h)) appears. Proportion (see FIG. 241 to FIG. 261) that appears until the symbol variation is stopped, and further, when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means (sword ornament) with higher expectation. It is desirable to increase the ratio of the operation opportunity given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, it is possible to favorably perform the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 on the side with a higher effect risk.

[Production reception processing according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested) based on the effect received by the operation, and an effect reception that allows effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being displayed, the above-described first effect is received based on the fact that the operation is accepted by the operation. It is possible to execute a process related to a plurality of different operation effects, such as a process of generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested) different from the first expected effect.

In such a configuration, the effect type as the expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation may differ according to the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed during the effect acceptance period. Therefore, it becomes possible not only to enhance the interest in the game when operated, but also to favorably increase the interest in the game from the occurrence of the effect reception period to the operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at least when controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), within the effect acceptance period during which the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed. When a production situation in which the first display production is displayed or a production situation in which the second display production is displayed appears within the production reception period in which the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed, the production reception A process of generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation button 410 is operated even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period. Is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button production state (specific production state) is being controlled, when the production situation in which the first display production is displayed appears within the production reception period, the operation button 410 is operated. Whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated when the first display effect is started to be executed and the effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect acceptance period. Regardless, the second display effect is executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), regardless of whether the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect acceptance period, there is a concern that the user may forget to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without any.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect may be displayed only when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. And
A production situation in which the production is controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the production reception period for allowing production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has occurred, and the first display production is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) and the process of ending the automatic button effect state are respectively performed (effect shown in FIG. 271 described later). See progress),
A production situation in which the production is being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), a production reception period for allowing production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has occurred, and the second display production is being displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 272 described later). Refer to production progress),
An effect that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and that an effect acceptance period that allows effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button Processing for ending the effect state is also not performed (see effect progress shown in FIG. 273 described later),
A first display effect and a second display effect that are controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and that an effect acceptance period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred. When the operation button 410 is operated in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process of generating a first expected effect (after-operation effect) and a process of generating a second expected effect (after-operation effect). None of the above is performed, and each process such as a process of ending the automatic button effect state is performed according to each effect situation (effect acceptance process according to display type).

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear, and when the first display effect appears. If the operation is not performed and the operation button 410 is operated while the second display effect is appearing, a type (first operation) as an expected effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation (effect reception). The expected effect 1 and the second expected effect are made different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself does not appear. There is a possibility that there is a possibility that the process for ending the automatic button effect state will not be performed. Therefore, diversity as an effect using the operation button 410 is ensured, and it is possible to preferably improve the enjoyment of the game when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed.

Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 275.

FIG. 271 shows that during control of the automatic button production state, the period from timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 271(a)) in the symbol variation execution period is set to “production reception (operation) for the operation button 410”. The example of production when the first production pattern that can be set as the "production reception period that allows" is executed.

In the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the "effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" is reached, as shown in FIG. 271(b), in the effect display device 1600. , A button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears. (First display effect).

Then, at the timing tb12 prior to the timing tb13, if the effect on the operation button 410 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 271(c), the symbol variation (in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. A first post-operation effect (in the figure, "Nakichi"'s fortune) indicating the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the pattern variation) is executed (first expected effect). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect acceptance and is returned to the normal effect state, and the effect acceptance period generated from the timing tb11 is accepted without consuming the remaining time. It will be ended at the time. Therefore, at the timing tb12 when the production is received, a display indicating that the "automatic button production state has been controlled" that has appeared in the display area of the production display device 1600 (here, "auto button setting is in progress"). )” will also be hidden.

However, in this case, no matter which of the timings tb11 to tb13 the performance reception is performed, at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271(d), the first post-operation performance generated by the performance reception ( The first expected effect) is not finished yet and is in the midway of execution so that the gaming enjoyment is preferably maintained over the period of timings tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the effect is received. It is desirable to do.

272, during the control of the automatic button production state, during the period of the symbol variation execution, the period of timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 272(a)), "production reception (operation) to the operation button 410". The example of production when the second production pattern that can be set as the "production acceptance period for which is allowed" is executed.

In the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 at which the "effect acceptance period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410" is generated, as shown in FIG. 272(b), in the effect display device 1600. , "Haunted OBK with present box" appears (second display effect).

Here, when the “ghost OBK with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated is always generated. Since this is not always the case, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) that prompts the user to operate the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 272, the haunted OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, and the period before the timing tb23 is displayed during the period in which the haunted OBK is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated at the timing tb22, the effect is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 272(c), the big hit symbol is the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. A second post-operation effect (in the figure, a character display of "hot heat") indicating the degree of expectation that appears is executed (second expected effect).

However, at this time, the effect reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 is ended at the time when the effect reception is performed without exhausting the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. I try to maintain this. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, "auto button setting")" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be done.

It should be noted that, no matter which of the timings tb21 to tb23 is used for effect reception, at timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 272(d), the second post-operation effect (second operation) generated by the effect reception is generated. The expected effect) is not finished yet and is in the midway of execution so that the gaming interest can be appropriately maintained over the period of timings tb21 to tb23 regardless of the timing when the effect is received. Is desirable.

FIG. 273 is for generating the second post-operation effect during the period from timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 273(a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. The example of production when the third production pattern for displaying "Haunted OBK with a present box" is executed even though the production reception period has not been generated.

In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 273(b), in the effect display device 1600, a haunted OBK with a present box is made to appear (second display effect).

However, as described above, in the effect situation in which the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the after-operation effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested even if the operation button 410 is operated is displayed. Since it is not always generated, an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 273, the haunted OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period of timings tb31 to tb33, but as shown in FIG. 273(a), the haunted OBK is displayed. During the period, the "production reception period in which the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted" does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 272(a) and 272(c), even if the operation button 410 is operated while the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation is performed. The effects (first after-operation effect, second after-operation effect) do not appear, and the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed over the period of timings tb31 to tb33.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the operation button 410 is operated in the automatic button effect state when the effect acceptance period regarding the after-operation effect does not occur. In this case, basically, the process of ending (setting cancellation) the automatic button effect state is performed, but even when the effect acceptance period regarding the effect after operation is not generated, it is shown in FIG. 273. When the operation button 410 is operated in such a production situation (a production situation in which a haunted OBK with a present box is displayed), the process for generating post-operation production and the automatic button production state are performed. The production is to be advanced so that none of the processing to end is performed.

Therefore, when the mode shown in FIG. 273(b), which is the same mode as FIG. 272(b) (the haunted OBK with a present box), is being displayed, the second operation shown in FIG. 272(c) is performed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in the expectation that a post production (second expected production) will occur, no production change occurs, but the automatic button production state is not released. You will be able to continue this. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
The detection whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is enabled even in the state where the production reception period regarding the post-operation production has not occurred, and the detection is performed when the production reception period regarding the post-operation production does not occur. If it is detected, it is determined whether or not the timing of the detection is “within the period of timings tb31 to tb33 at which the haunted OBK with a present box is displayed” and the “hold the present box”. When the timing of displaying the haunted OBK is within the period of tb31 to tb33", the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and "the timing of displaying the haunted OBK with the present box" When it is not within the period of tb21 to tb23", the method of performing the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state (the period of timings tb31 to tb33 is set as the prohibition period for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state). Method)
-Use a method such as a method of not detecting whether or not there is an operation on the operation button 410 within the period of timings tb21 to tb23 when the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, etc. Is possible, and any realization method may be used.

274, while the automatic button effect state is being controlled, during the period of the symbol variation, the period of timings tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 274(a)) is set to "effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410." The above-described first effect pattern that can be set as the "allowable effect acceptance period" is executed, but an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13 is shown.

As described above, in the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 at which the "effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is generated" comes, as shown in FIG. 274(b), effect display is performed. In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period). (Display) appears (first display effect).

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb11 to tb13, but when the timing tb12′ prior to the timing tb13 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Is designed to function, and thereby, the same change as when the operation button 410 is operated is made to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274(c), at the timing tb12′, the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the fact that the above-described automatic effect function has worked. The suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, a “Nakichi's fortune”) is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period that has occurred from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic effect function operates without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state continues without being released. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12', the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here, "auto button setting is in progress")" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also continued. Will be displayed.

Also, when the above-described automatic effect function operates at the timing tb12', at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 274(d), the first post-operation effect (first operation) generated by the above-described automatic effect function is generated. It is desirable that the expected effect) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to maintain a preferable gaming interest over the period of timings tb11 to tb13.

275, during the control of the automatic button production state, during the period of the symbol variation execution period of timing tb21 ~ tb23 (see FIG. 275 (a)), "production reception (operation) for the operation button 410. The above-described second effect pattern that can be set as the "allowable effect reception period" is executed, but an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 is shown.

As described above, in the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect accepting period for allowing effect accepting (operation) to the operation button 410” comes, as shown in FIG. 275(b), effect display is performed. In the device 1600, a “ghost OBK with a present box” appears (second display effect).

Here, as described above, when "Haunted OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not always necessary to generate the effect, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (the downward arrow display or the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears. There is no.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 275, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22′ before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Is designed to function, and thereby, the same change as when the operation button 410 is operated is made to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 275(c), at the timing tb22′, the expectation degree that the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the fact that the above-mentioned automatic effect function has worked. The suggested second post-operation effect (in the figure, the character display of "hot heat") is executed (second expected effect). However, also in this case, the effect reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 is ended when the automatic effect function operates without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is continued without being released. Becomes Therefore, at the timing tb22', the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, "auto button setting is in progress")" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also continued. Will be displayed.

In addition, even when the above-described automatic effect function operates at the timing tb22', at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 275(d), the second post-operation effect (second operation effect) generated by the above-described automatic effect function is generated. It is desirable that the expected effect) is not finished yet and is in the midway of execution in order to maintain the amusement of interest preferably for the period of timings tb21 to tb23.

By the way, although illustration is omitted, although the above-described third effect pattern (see FIG. 273) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33. When no operation is performed, the effect reception period for generating the second post-operation effect does not occur in the first place, so the automatic effect function described above cannot function and the automatic button effect state is also released. It goes without saying that it will continue (that is, nothing will change).

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, effects which are different from each other in the first display effect shown in FIG. 271 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 272 and 273 are executed. , A type as a post-operation effect when the operation is performed depending on whether the operation button 410 is operated when the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed (first The expected effect (the second expected effect) is made different, and the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears. Therefore, the processing for ending the automatic button effect state is not performed. Therefore, diversity as an effect using the operation button 410 is ensured, and it is possible to preferably improve the enjoyment of the game when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed.

It should be noted that the first display effect may have a plurality of effect modes with different expectations and may be executed in any of these effect modes. Also, with respect to the second display effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes with different expectations, and the second display effect may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect be executed as display contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, in the first display effect, an instruction display prompting the user to operate the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, the button image is pressed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is performed is displayed. Is becoming

In addition, as for the first expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the first expected effect may be executed in any of these effect modes. Also, with respect to the second expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the second expected effect may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed as effect contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the example effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the omikuji image is displayed in the first expected effect, whereas the omikuji image is not displayed in the second expected effect, and the degree of expectation based on the character display is displayed. Is being suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as a movable effect or an effect by a lamp display, the contents may have no relation to each other.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, as an effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the second display effect appears, “effect for the operation button 410”. A second effect pattern and a second effect that have been determined in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation) that a "reception acceptance period that allows acceptance (operation)" will occur. And a third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process that is performed at the start of the symbol variation) that the "effect accepting period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur when Decided to prepare. However, after preparing a second effect pattern in which it is predetermined that a "effect accepting period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410" will occur when the second display effect appears, Based on that the production reception is performed within the "production reception period in which the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted", it is determined (lottery) as to whether or not to generate the second expected production. By generating the second expected effect when a specific result is obtained in the determination and not generating the second expected effect when the specific result is not obtained in the determination, ~ You may make it implement|achieve the example of an effect shown in FIG. 275. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, there may be no occurrence of the "effect acceptance period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410" when the second display effect appears. It is also possible to further prepare the above-described third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation).

When the second expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) being performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. It is possible to make the proportion of the big hit symbol appear higher in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) than when the first expected effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. desirable.

Further, when the second display effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) described above is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped, as compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance during. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) being performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) will be performed, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the interest of the game.

Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271(b)) is displayed and when the second display effect (FIG. 272(b), FIG. 273). The above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function at any time when (see (b)) is displayed. However, even if an operation is performed, the second expected effect does not necessarily occur, the second display effect (see FIGS. 272(b) and 273(b)) is displayed, and the above-described automatic operation is performed. If the effect function is made to work, when the second display effect (see FIG. 272(b) and FIG. 273(b)) is displayed, the operation is performed by entrusting it to the above-described automatic effect function. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, while the first display effect (see FIG. 271(b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function works, but the second display effect (FIG. 272(b), FIG. 273(b)) is displayed. (See) is displayed, the automatic effect function described above is disabled, and when the second display effect is displayed, it is not known whether the second expected effect will occur even if it is operated, but at least the operation must be performed. For example, the second expected presentation may not occur.

Further, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the haunted OBK is displayed, a “deletion acceptance period during which the production acceptance (operation) for the operating means is permitted” is generated while the haunted OBK is displayed. You may do it. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the haunted OBK is displayed, the automatic effect function functions within the “effect accepting period during which effect accepting (operation) of the operating means is allowed” or by the player. Even if the operation is performed, the haunted OBK may not be hidden, and the effect of displaying the haunted OBK may be continued at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Automatic continuous stroke function in the automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) to a predetermined operation means to generate an effect reception each time there is such an operation, and an operation operation corresponding to the operation is performed. There are times when you are told. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, how to operate the above-mentioned automatic effect function becomes a problem when the specific effect acceptance period in which such operation effect is performed occurs.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given. Even if the user does not operate multiple times, the effect when the operation is performed multiple times only by performing an operation in a long mode in which the predetermined operation means is maintained in the operating state for a relatively long time (so-called long press etc.) It is equipped with an automatic multiple-stroke operation function (auto-continuous-stroke function) that allows the mode to appear, and the automatic multiple-stroke operation function (auto-continuous-shot function) functions by performing an operation on a predetermined operating means in the mode of long operation. In this case, the effect reception is performed every time a predetermined time elapses while the operation state is maintained, and the process for generating the post-operation effect corresponding to these is performed a plurality of times.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated during the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in a long operation mode during the specific effect reception period. Similar to the case where the operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) functions a plurality of times, a process for generating an effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time has elapsed (automatic effect function).

With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has the automatic continuous hitting function activated when a so-called long press operation is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as continuous hits) is given. Thus, at least when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous hitting function is activated appears even if the operation by long pressing is not performed within the specific effect acceptance period. Therefore, even when the automatic effect function is activated when the specific effect reception period in which the operation reception is required a plurality of times occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period The player can enjoy the production without being dissatisfied with the occurrence frequency.

276 (a), when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 of the execution period of the symbol variation "operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) on the operation button 410". The specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in a single-shot operation mode in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. The example of production when performed over is shown.

As shown in FIG. 276( a ), in this example of performance, each time the operation button 410 is operated in the above-described single-shot operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timing tc<b>11 to tc<b>13 ). Each time it is detected that the position is changed to the operation state (here, each time the rising is detected), an effect reception corresponding to the operation is performed, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the effect reception. .. When a specific performance condition such as the number of times operation detection (reception of performance) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the performance is received, is satisfied. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the satisfaction of the specific performance condition is made to appear, and the specific performance reception period is ended at that point without consuming the remaining time. ..

Here, although omitted in the figure, within the specific effect reception period (timings tc11 to tc13), a specific time from the start to the end of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception. There is a case where a new performance reception (operation detection) is made. In such a case, when the effect is received, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the middle of execution is interrupted, and a specific effect (after-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is newly generated. Therefore, it is desirable to appropriately maintain the operational feeling (production responsiveness) when the player operates it. It should be noted that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is to be ended when a specific time has elapsed from the start unless a new effect reception is generated again during execution of the specific effect. Become.

276 (b), when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 of the execution period of the symbol variation, "operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) on the operation button 410." A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period (so-called long press) An example of the effect when the button 410 is operated is shown.

As shown in FIG. 276(b), during the specific effect reception period (timings tc11 to tc13), while the operation state of the operation button 410 is maintained in the long-press mode, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Processing for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time a predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on operation detection (effect reception) when Auto continuous hit function) is to be executed. As this processing (automatic continuous hitting function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed on condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time a predetermined time t1 has elapsed, and the operation detection (effect) It is possible to perform the processing as "generation of a new specific effect (post-operation effect) based on (reception)". When a specific performance condition such as the number of times operation detection (reception of performance) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the performance is received, is satisfied. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the satisfaction of the specific performance condition is made to appear, and the specific performance reception period is ended at that point without consuming the remaining time. ..

FIG. 277(a) shows an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) on the operation button 410 during the period from timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button production state is controlled. Shows a production example when a specific production pattern that can be set as a "specific production reception period to which is given" is executed and no operation is performed within the specific production reception period.

First, assuming that no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed once, and the timing tc13 is reached. When it reaches, the specific effect reception period ends.

On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, as shown in FIG. At the timing tc12 when a predetermined time elapses after the effect reception period occurs, the above-described automatic effect function operates. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function creates a new specific effect every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described automatic continuous hit function functions. A process for generating (post-operation effect) will be executed.

Note that, as this processing (automatic effect function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect (operation reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). It is possible to execute it as a process of "generating post-operation performance)". Further, when the above-described automatic effect function operates at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous hit function is caused to be used to “use the operation detection (effect acceptance) every time the predetermined time t1 has elapsed, and detect the operation. A new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on (effect reception). When a specific performance condition such as the number of times operation detection (reception of performance) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the performance is received, is satisfied. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the satisfaction of the specific performance condition is made to appear, and the specific performance reception period is ended at that point without consuming the remaining time. ..

FIG. 277(b) shows an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) on the operation button 410 during the period from timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated by pressing and holding in the state where the above-described automatic effect function is functioning in the specific effect reception period. The example of production when performed is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 277(b), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 277(a), the above-described automatic effect function is activated at timing tc12, whereby the first specific effect at timing tc12. After the occurrence of, the new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described automatic continuous hitting function functions (or by causing the automatic continuous hitting function to function). The processing that causes it is executed.

However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is operated in a long-pressing mode at the timing tc12a when the process by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, at the timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected in the automatic button effect state, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished). However, in this example of effect, the effect is not accepted although the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a. Then, the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception is thus prevented from occurring at the timing tc12a, and the process (predetermined time t1) executed before the automatic button effect state is released. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time is elapsed is continued without being terminated.

According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period, operation by long pressing at any timing in the state Even if is started, the rhythm and tempo involved in the generation of the specific effect (post-operation effect) will not be delayed by the operation, and the effect progress will not be delayed. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a manner that is continued after the operation mode by long pressing is started. Therefore, in the automatic button production state, even if the above-mentioned automatic production function is functioning within the specific production reception period, the player can perform the operation without fear of adversely affecting the production in the execution state. It becomes possible to perform the operation, and thereby, the operation by the player is suitably prompted. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 277(b), although the player is in the effect state different from the effect example shown in FIG. 277(a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a. The same aspect appears as the aspect of the specific effect that appears within the specific effect reception period.

It should be noted that the processing that is already in the execution state (the processing of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued until the operation mode by long pressing is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an automatic continuous hit function that works when a long press operation is performed during the specific performance reception period, and a function when no operation is performed within the specific performance reception period. The same process (a process for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time a predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to perform. It is nothing but a blank.

However, after the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the operation state each time the predetermined time t1 is exhausted, and it is in the operation state. On the condition that the determination is made, the processing that has been executed from the time when the automatic button performance state was present (processing for generating a new specific performance (post-operation performance) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued. It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the previously executed specific effect is consumed, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated at that time. Instead, the processing that has been executed from the time of the automatic button effect state (the processing of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 has elapsed) is ended.

In the example of the effect using the automatic continuous hitting function shown in FIG. 276(b) and the automatic effect function shown in FIGS. 277(a) and 277(b), a predetermined time t1 is set with reference to the timing when the specific effect ends. Although the process (the first mode as the automatic continuous hitting function and the automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed after the elapse, instead of this, the timing when the specific effect is started is used as a reference. As a result, a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) (second mode as an automatic continuous hitting function or an automatic effect function) may be executed after the elapse of the predetermined time t2. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be set longer than the specific time required from the start to the end of the specific effect, but preferably from the start to the end of the specific effect. Set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed by interrupting it, so that only a long press operation is performed, or It becomes possible to give a feeling as if a single-shot operation is repeatedly performed at high speed even though no operation is performed, and it is expected that amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 277(b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing tc12 at which the automatic effect function operates (within the period of timing tc11 to tc12), at that time. The setting of the automatic button effect state will be canceled (finished). Further, at this time, the first specific effect is generated in response to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, if the operation is a long-press mode, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses. A process (automatic hitting function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single-press mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A new specific effect (post-operation effect) will be generated each time.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, when the effect reception is performed while the specific effect is in the mid-execution state, the specific effect in the mid-execution state is interrupted in response to the effect reception. Although the new specific effect described above is generated, a new specific effect corresponding to the effect reception may be generated in parallel with the specific effect that is in the middle of execution without ending.

As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, when a new single-shot operation is performed and an effect is received when the previous specific effect generated by the single-shot operation is in the process of being executed, While a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated according to the effect reception, when the previous specific effect generated by the function of the automatic effect function (or the automatic continuous hitting function) is in the process of being executed. Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from the original position to the operation state due to a single-shot operation, a long-press operation, or the like, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection, and the operation state is already in the execution state. The process (the process of generating a specific effect each time a predetermined time elapses) is continued. Then, even after that, when the operation state is maintained when the predetermined time based on the previous specific effect has elapsed (in the case of long-press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (specific effect for the predetermined time Since the process to be generated each time the operation is continued) is further continued, the automatic button performance state is ended while the operation system performance in the execution state is favorably continued from the time when the automatic button performance state is in effect. It is possible to shift to a state in which an operation system effect is performed by the operation by, and it is expected that the player's consciousness of participation will be increased by this.

[Setting process related to automatic button production state according to production pattern type]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even when the symbol variation is being executed, by operating a predetermined operating means (for example, the operating button 410). Settings and cancellations related to the automatic button performance state are made possible, and by simplifying such operations, settings and cancellations related to the automatic button performance state can be performed while maintaining a focus on performance development during symbol changes. I am able to do it.

However, if the setting or cancellation of the automatic button production state is made during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation, the processing load will increase due to the setting change not expected at the start of the symbol fluctuation, and at the start of the symbol fluctuation. There is concern that it will adversely affect the decided performance development. In this regard, as the types of the "effect pattern executed based on the result of the jackpot determination", at least "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" and "the operation The second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the prompting instruction appears appears cannot be set. Therefore, depending on the type of effect pattern, the setting or cancellation related to the automatic button effect state is not always executed promptly. In some cases, no problem may occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, when the symbol variation is in the execution period. By making the processing mode relating to the setting and release related to the automatic button effect state different, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation.

FIG. 278 is a pattern variation in “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is in the effect state of 3 Is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. . It should be noted that the first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

As shown in FIG. 278, when the automatic button production state is currently controlled and the number of holdings is three in the production situation, “a specific production reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the pattern variation is started in the "production pattern". Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the production progress as the first production pattern is performed in the state where the automatic button production state can be released (the state where the release operation is allowed). ..

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. (Finished) As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is executed based on the fact that the operation button 410 is detected to be in the operation state. To be done.

Further, in this effect example, after the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, at the timing td12 within the specific effect acceptance period shown in the figure, the operation on the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state). ) Is assumed to be detected. When the operation on the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without exhausting the remaining time. Will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, effect operation is accepted when the operation button 410 is operated, It is not accepted as a setting operation for the automatic button presentation state. On the other hand, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect acceptance is performed and the post-operation effect is executed, and the automatic button effect state is released. The operation is also accepted and the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (ended).

Furthermore, in this effect example, after the specific effect reception period is ended in this way, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the drawing, and the design is changing. The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the pattern is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) in the operation state of the operation button 410. When it is detected, it will be executed. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol may also be executed based on the fact that the operation button 410 has been detected to be in the operation state.

Then, in this example of effect, when the symbol variation is stopped after the setting to the automatic button effect state is made, it is in the hold state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped. The next pattern fluctuation is to be digested (start fluctuation). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is executed, unless the release operation is performed by the player, production progress is made in the state set in the automatic button production state.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 278, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed, the specific effect during the period in which the first effect pattern is executed When the operation button 410 is operated when the acceptance period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the executing state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the symbol variation has started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. Also, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is possible to cause the specific effect reception period to be generated in the state in which the automatic button effect state is released, and the player operates it himself. It becomes possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game when the desire to do so arises. In the example production shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific production reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific production reception period ends. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

Further, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set”, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed. Is also allowed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the specific effect acceptance period ends, but the setting operation by the player within the period before the specific effect acceptance period starts. Even if the setting is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the instruction display for prompting the operation to appear can be set in the first effect pattern in which the instruction display prompting the operation is set" in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period earlier than that, the specific effect acceptance period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. It is also possible, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain this even for the interest of the game when the user wants to enjoy the post-operation effect by the automatic effect function.

In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of the symbol fluctuation, any effect determination result regarding the effect (lottery) on the effect content in the first effect pattern Even if the above is obtained, it is desirable to always generate this during the specific effect reception period. Further, the specific effect display is allowed to appear within the period of the symbol variation, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect acceptance period is always generated before the symbol variation in the execution state is ended. It is desirable to make the production progress. According to these configurations, by confirming the effect contents that appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. Then, it becomes possible to select whether to release or set the automatic button effect state.

At this time, regarding the specific effect display, when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period, it is possible to suggest whether or not the post-operation effect is likely to be performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation. If it is performed by any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that the determination regarding whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state is provided.

Further, regarding the specific effect display, at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display are provided, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. Although it is permissible to perform setting (or cancellation) to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player from the beginning until the specific effect reception period occurs, when the second specific effect display appears, If the setting (or cancellation) to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player is not allowed between the appearance of the second specific effect display and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect It is possible to preferably maintain the interest of the game from the appearance of the display to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period.

FIG. 279 is a second effect pattern (a deviation change in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the hold number is in the effect state of three. )”, the symbol variation is started, and an example of processing when an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation It is a time chart shown.

As shown in FIG. 279, when the automatic button production state is being controlled and the number of holdings is three in the production situation, "the specific production reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set. It is assumed that the pattern variation is started in the "2 production pattern". Then, also in this effect example, as in the case shown in FIG. 278, although the symbol variation is in the execution period, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed). The production progress as the second production pattern is performed.

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. (Finished) As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is executed based on the fact that the operation button 410 is detected to be in the operation state. To be done.

That is, there seems to be little merit of ending the automatic button production state when the second production pattern in which the specific production reception period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, normally, when the symbol variation in the reserved state is exhausted, there is a high possibility that the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set" appears. At this time, there may be a desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (a desire to end a specific effect state).

In this respect, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set is being executed, but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed Also, the automatic button effect state can be ended by an operation by the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to pre-end the automatic button production state when the "first production pattern for which the specific production reception period is set" is still in the hold state, whereby "in the first production pattern" The situation in which the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect reception period is set and the operation means (operation button 410) must be operated without hesitation” can be avoided.

Furthermore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the player performs a setting operation at a timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is released. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the second effect pattern is not being controlled to the automatic button effect state and the specific effect acceptance period is not set, when the second effect pattern is being executed. Even if the player performs an operation (even if the operation button 410 is changed from the original position to the operation state and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)), at least the second effect pattern. The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed) within the period in which is executed. Note that, instead of this, even in the case where the setting to the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, The setting operation by the player is not accepted during the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed.

That is, even if the "setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state" is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, no operation needs to be performed within the specific effect reception period. In addition, even if an operation is performed, the effect reception is made and the post-operation effect is executed. In view of such a fact, during the period when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed, it is not necessary to promptly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed. Instead, it is considered that no problem will occur if the automatic button production state is set before the specific production reception period that may occur after the next symbol variation is exhausted.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed, the setting operation is performed by the player within the period. Even so, until the period ends (while the symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol variation according to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol is stopped (lost). When the symbol is stopped (timing td24 in the figure), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted even if the player performs an operation, and the timing of the setting is changed to the symbol. Since it is carried over after being stopped, the processing load is increased by the setting change related to the effect state that was not decided at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (due to the operation by the player) during the execution of the symbol fluctuation. Such a situation can be suitably suppressed.

Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation is stopped, the automatic button effect state is set and the hold state is set. The next pattern change that was there is to be digested (start of change). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is executed, unless the release operation is performed by the player, production progress is made in the state set in the automatic button production state.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, in the state where the second effect pattern is not being controlled in the automatic button effect state and the second effect pattern is being executed, Even if the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suitably prevent the processing load from increasing due to a change in the setting relating to the effect state that has not been determined at the start of the symbol variation (due to an operation by the player) during the symbol variation. Like

In the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that after the symbol variation of the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is stopped, the next symbol variation in the suspended state is started. However, at the time when the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is stopped (missing symbol stop), even if the next symbol variation is not in the hold state, the automatic button is in the state of symbol stop (missing symbol stop). It will be set to the production state.

Further, in the example production shown in FIG. 279, if the player performs a setting operation within a period during which the second production pattern (miss variation) in which the specific production reception period is not set is executed, the second production pattern is generated. Although the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed when the symbol variation is stopped, the invention is not limited to this, and the point is that the automatic button is activated during the period in which the second effect pattern is executed. It does not allow the setting to the effect state, and the timing to be set may be carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the automatic button performance state is set when the symbol is stopped (missing symbol is stopped) or within the period when the next symbol variation is being executed. That is, at the time when the next symbol variation is started, if there is a production situation such as "within the symbol variation, it has been decided to change the setting related to the production state", production according to the determined schedule Since it suffices to make progress, it is possible to preferably avoid that the processing load increases due to an unintended state change during the execution of the symbol variation.

In this case, even when the next symbol change is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the last time), when the symbol is stopped (missing symbol stop), or the next symbol change is executed. It is desirable that the automatic button performance state is set within the period of time during which the automatic button production is performed. According to such a configuration, when the player performs the setting operation within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined which of the effect patterns the next symbol fluctuation is executed in. Without carrying out, it is possible to carry over the timing of setting to the automatic button effect state after the symbol is stopped.

Further, when the operation button 410 is in the operating state within the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed to set to the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect pattern was ended. It is possible to set the automatic button presentation state only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is finished while the next symbol change is in the hold state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol change, but the next symbol change is performed. When the second effect pattern is finished in the state where is not in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (missing symbol stop).

In addition to the “second effect pattern (miss variation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set”, “the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display instructing the operation appears cannot be set” "3 production pattern (winning variation)" is further prepared, and when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the third production pattern, the state of the symbol stop or the execution period of the big hit game You may make it set to the automatic button production state in the inside.

[Prohibition period for setting the automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even when the symbol variation is being executed, by operating a predetermined operating means (for example, the operating button 410). Settings related to the automatic button performance state can be made, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to perform settings related to the automatic button performance state while maintaining a focus on performance progress during symbol changes. ing.

However, including the setting process to such automatic button effect state, if the specific process related to the effect such as effect setting is allowed by the operation of the player at any time during the execution period of the symbol variation, the feeling of tension may be increased. There is a possibility that amusement of the game may be deteriorated due to the lack of performance. Therefore, in the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at least when a specific effect reception period does not occur, a specific process related to the effect such as effect setting by the operation by the player is performed. In the permissible gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibition period in which specific processing relating to the above-mentioned production is not permitted can be started between the start of the symbol variation and the generation of the specific production reception period. That is, in this case, there is a concern that a prohibition period will occur, so that even in a state in which a specific performance reception period has not occurred, the operating means (such as the operation button 410) is activated while the prohibition period has not occurred. ), it becomes necessary to maintain the player's consciousness to participate in the game and the effect.

Hereinafter, a description will be given in detail of an example of an effect in which the "setting process to the automatic button effect state" is adopted as the "specific process related to the effect", but the "specified process related to the effect" is not limited to this and, for example, an effect mode It may be applied as another process such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character is the main character) to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character is the main character).

280, when the automatic button production state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the "3rd production pattern in which a specific production reception period (specific effective period) in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set", and the symbol is changed. FIG. 281 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting to the automatic button effect state is performed within the variation execution period, and FIG. 281 shows an example effect when effect production is advanced in the third effect pattern. FIG. It should be noted that the third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the above-described first effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (a), when the production state is not controlled to the automatic button production state, “the third production in which the specific production reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the pattern variation has started in the "pattern". Then, during the execution period of the symbol variation, the production progress as the third production pattern is performed in the state where the automatic button production state can be set (the setting operation is allowed). ..

However, in this production example, when the symbol variation is performed in the “third production pattern in which the specific production reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set”, the timing te11 (before the specific production reception period occurs) In FIG. 280), the operation reception itself for setting to the automatic button effect state or the prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 281(b), in this prohibition period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is displayed. Note that in the specific effect (inhibited image) shown in FIG. 281(b), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is displayed, and a character such as “auto setting disabled” is displayed as a button lock effect. Has been done.

The prohibition period thus generated is ended when the timing te12 after the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has passed from the timing te11. However, no matter how much operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 281 (c) and (d), the specific effect (prohibited image) ), so that no change will occur.

Then, when the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (inhibited image) comes to be hidden, and the state is returned to the state in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. Then, after that, when the above-mentioned "predictive effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 281(e)), at timing te13, a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears. ((See FIG. 281(f))). Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 281(f), although it is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is set. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 280 and 281(f), since the specific effect reception period occurs in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set, the specific effect reception period The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a specific timing. However, even in the case where the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 280, before the prohibition period is started. If the setting for the automatic button production state is performed in advance, it is possible to generate the specific production reception period in the state in which the automatic button production state is set. In this case, the specific production reception period is set. The above-mentioned automatic effect function can be made to function at a specific timing within the reception period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol is not the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). However, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the arrival of the timing te11 shown in FIG. 280, after the timing te11 is generated. Therefore, the setting to the automatic button performance state can be permitted. Therefore, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 at which the prohibited period is started as in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 280, but is generated at the timing te11. Is desirable.

282 and 283 are diagrams showing a modification example of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period relating to the setting of the automatic button effect state) concerning the "specific processing relating to the effect such as effect setting".

That is, as described above, in the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281, when the prohibition period occurs at the timing te11 (see FIG. 280), the first specific time (for example, 25 No matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed until the end of this after the lapse of seconds, the setting operation is not accepted and the specific effect (inhibited image) is displayed. Is designed to make no changes.

However, in the following modified example which will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283, the prohibition period is “one that requires the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) from the occurrence to the end”. However, if a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, a player operation (operation button) for ending the prohibition period early. This is different from the above-described effect example described in detail with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281 in that a process that allows (operation 410) can be executed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283(a), when the production situation is not controlled to the automatic button production state, "a specific production reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation is started in "3 effect patterns". Then, in this modified example as well, during the execution period of the symbol variation, the production progress as the third production pattern in the state where the automatic button production state can be set (the state where the setting operation is allowed). Will be done.

Further, at timing te11 (see FIG. 282) prior to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the process of setting the automatic button effect state is allowed. 280 and the point that, in addition to starting the generation of the prohibited period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed in the prohibited period. This is the same as the effect example described with reference to FIG.

However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 282, a period from the timing te11 to the timing te11a at which the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 (period in which cancellation is not possible). Then, no matter how much operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (prohibited image) (see FIG. 283(c). In the period from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses after the prohibition period has occurred) arrives (the period in which the cancellation is permitted), the operation by the player is performed. When the (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute a process in which the prohibition period can be ended early.

More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibited period becomes a state in which it can be ended early by an operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), first, the timing te11a arrives in the effect display device 1600. The special image that has not appeared in the period up to (the period that cannot be canceled) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283(d), an image NJG indicating the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

That is, in the prohibition period according to this modification, such an image NJG appears when the timing te11a arrives (see FIG. 283(d)), so that the prohibition period cannot be released ( It becomes possible to suggest that the transition from the timings te11 to te11a) to the period (timings te11a to te12) in which the release of the prohibition period is permitted is performed, whereby the prohibition period is shown in the remaining time. Will be able to function as an effect as to whether or not to finish early.

Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the prohibition period during which the prohibition period is permitted to be released (timing te11a to te12), the operation button 410 becomes the operation state. Based on the fact, the process of ending the prohibition period early is executed. As a result, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not arrived yet.

Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period is ended early by the player's first operation (operation of the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. The process that causes In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 283(e), the effect is changed by destroying the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock and displaying the characters "release successful". As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

Then, in the state in which the prohibition period is ended early in this way, when the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process to the automatic button effect state can be performed. Then, in this case, on the effect display device 1600, a display (here, “auto button setting is in progress”) accompanying the effect setting is made to appear.

Then, after that, when the above-described "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 283(f)), at timing te13, a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears appears. ((See FIG. 283(g))). Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 283(g), although it is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is set. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 282 and 283(g), since the specific effect reception period occurs in the state where the automatic button effect state is set, the specific effect reception period If no operation is performed by the player before the specific timing arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. However, even in the effect examples shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283(g), the first operation is performed within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the invalid period is permitted, and the invalid period is first set. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281(f), unless the setting processing to the automatic button effect state is performed by performing the early operation and performing the second operation in the early completed condition. It goes without saying that the same production situation will appear.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, the specific effect reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” ends. The specific effect reception period may be generated immediately (in connection with the prohibition period) immediately after the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is ended. That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button performance state is not controlled, the specific performance reception period occurs while the setting opportunity for the automatic button performance state remains in the prohibited state. It becomes possible to raise the player's consciousness of participation when the production reception period is not occurring.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the “prohibition period in which setting processing to the automatic button production state is not allowed”, when the production reception is made within the specific production reception period that occurs thereafter. As a post-operation effect, one of a plurality of effect modes in which a ratio of a relatively high expected effect mode appears, a ratio of a big hit symbol that appears due to a symbol variation in the execution state, and the like may be made to appear.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, based on the result of the big hit determination,
When in the third state in which the effect image of FIG. 283(e) appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, "padlock" in which the proportions (expectations) at which the big hit symbols appear due to the change of the symbols in the execution state are different from each other (for example, "padlock") Any of a plurality of effect modes in which the degree of destruction of the image with the chain attached to each other is different"),
When in the second state in which the effect image in FIG. 283(d) appears, when the third state is reached, a "specific third effect mode (a plurality of third effect modes" is selected from among a plurality of third effect modes. Of a plurality of modes, a plurality of second effect modes (for example, “a plurality of effect modes in which the color of the image NJG is different”) having different ratios (expectations) in which the “most advantageous third effect mode for the player” appears. Make one appear,
When in the first state in which the effect images of FIGS. 283(b) and 283(c) appear, when the second state is reached, the "specific second effect mode (plurality) Of the second effect modes of "the second effect mode that is most advantageous to the player", a plurality of first effect modes (for example, "a plurality of effect modes having different background image colors") having different rates (expectations). It is desirable to execute a process such as causing any one of “. According to such a configuration, as the production progresses within the prohibition period or the processing of ending the prohibition period early is executed, the expectations can be suggested stepwise by the related productions. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game during the prohibited period can be appropriately maintained and that the participation of the player is enhanced by prompting the early termination of the prohibited period. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as effects in which the movable decorative body cannot operate, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibited period is moved to the predetermined movable mode. It is desirable to be able to be executed as a presentation mode for operating the decorative body. A predetermined movable decoration is operated when a specific third effect mode appears among a plurality of third effect modes, and a predetermined movable decoration is activated when a third effect mode different from the specific third effect mode appears. The body may not move.

281(e) and (f) and the effects illustrated in FIGS. 283(f) and (g), the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001 and the like) is used. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation) as to whether a period during which the operation can accept the effect occurs or a period during which the operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can accept the effect occurs It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261)).

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, the specific effect acceptance period is always generated after the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate the specific effect reception period, and after the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted" is generated, the symbol variation stops without the specific effect reception period occurring. You may make it prepare the production pattern which can be performed.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, regarding the “prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed”, an effect pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation degree (for example, super reach state). It is desirable that the appearance ratio of the effect pattern having a relatively high jackpot expectation degree (for example, the effect pattern in which the super-reach state occurs) is higher than that of the effect pattern in which the occurrence does not occur. In other words, in this case, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state for a predetermined period will be forcibly lost, even though the effect pattern with a relatively high jackpot expectation degree appears. It becomes possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's consciousness of getting a big hit increases.

However, if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, it will be inevitable that the player who desires the automatic button effect state will be less entertained. As shown, after a certain amount of time has passed, the player can release the prohibited period early, and when it is released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button effect state is returned to the state where it is allowed again. It is desirable to

Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target set by the operation of the player may be the operation button 410, a touch panel, a sword ornament 5001, a cross key, or other operation means. In addition, the prohibition period may be ended early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used when the automatic button performance state is set, or when the automatic button performance state is set. The prohibition period may be ended early by operating the operation target used. However, when the prohibited period is ended early by operating the operation target used when setting to the automatic button effect state, the operation mode (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

Note that, as described above, in FIGS. 280 to 283, an example of production in which the “setting process to the automatic button production state” is adopted as the “specific process related to production” is shown. Not limited to However, with regard to the "specific processing relating to effect", even if the design variation is performed in any type as an effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, the operation means is operated within the execution period of the symbol variation. It is desirable that it can be executed by an operation.

[Automatic production function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even when the symbol variation is being executed, by operating a predetermined operating means (for example, the operating button 410). Settings related to the automatic button performance state can be made, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to perform settings related to the automatic button performance state while maintaining a focus on performance progress during symbol changes. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the operation button 410 is a movable operation provided between the original position and the operation position by a predetermined driving force as operation means. A means (here, sword decoration 5001) is provided, and in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), by the player within the effect acceptance period for the movable operation means (here, sword effect object 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed.

By the way, when the effect reception period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) occurs, the movable operation means is moved to the original position by a predetermined driving force as shown in FIG. 204 (G2), for example. There is a case where the player is given an operation opportunity to move the movable operation means from the above to the operation position first and operate the movable operation means in the moved state. In this operation opportunity, the effect reception may be performed by an operation of moving the operation position to a position different from the original position, instead of the operation of returning the operation position to the original position.

However, when such an effect reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), which causes the movable operation means (here, If there is a case where the sword ornament 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) cannot be properly given, and the production reception can be performed. There is a concern that a corresponding post-operation performance may not occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, some kind of abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), which causes the movable operation means (here, Even if the sword ornament 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position and the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) occurs, the sword decoration 5001) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. During this, a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as the production when a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the production reception period can be executed. ..

According to such a configuration, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) becomes inoperable due to some abnormality or failure, the movable operation means can be moved by using the automatic effect function. The post-operation effect using the operation means can be appropriately made to appear.

However, when the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state in which it cannot operate due to some abnormality or failure, the operation itself for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) itself is performed. In a difficult situation, if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is required to be operated to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button It is not possible to set to the effect state (specific effect state), and eventually the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot occur.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) are used. No matter which one of the production reception periods occurs, the same production change as when the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated. It is possible to execute processing (automatic production function). Then, on this, setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed only by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). I am supposed to be.

That is, in this case, the operation is not performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) on the side that may be inoperable when an abnormality or a failure occurs, but only on the general push-down operation button 410, It becomes possible to generate an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001). Therefore, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is abnormal or malfunctions during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation button 410 is operated to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By doing so, it becomes possible to properly generate post-operation effects corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001).

In order to appropriately secure the operability at the time of such an abnormality/fault, regarding the operation means (here, the operation button 410) provided for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It is important that it is provided as an operating means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it will not be subject to the above-mentioned restoration processing in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say.

However, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality/failure, as long as the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality/failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the state is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) has an abnormality/failure at the start timing (or the end timing) of the symbol variation. A restoration process for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the normal state (home position) is executed. It should be noted that the restoration process can be executed as the above-mentioned processing contents, and for example, a restoration operation (an operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to the original position is performed. , Is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) until the original position is properly returned.

According to such a configuration, the movable operation can be performed by confirming that the restoration process is started for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) at the start timing (or the end timing) of the symbol variation. The player side can recognize that the means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is in a state of abnormality/failure. Furthermore, by confirming whether or not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position as a result of the restoration processing being performed, the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is confirmed. The player side determines whether the restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has succeeded and the state in which the abnormality/fault has occurred has been resolved, or the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality/fault has continued is continued. You will be able to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player side recognizes that the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality/fault is continuing continues to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by operating the operation button 410. By performing the setting for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of abnormality or failure, It becomes possible to appropriately generate post-operation effects according to effect reception.

However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) in the abnormal/fault state has failed, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is performed, a performance acceptance period for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) may occur before the automatic button production state occurs (for example, during the restoration process execution period). If so, there is a concern that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) cannot be properly generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special effect reception periods may be further generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). No matter which of the effect patterns is selected and executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the maximum time required for the restoring process for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) (the restoring operation (5 (Operation for 2 seconds) is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times), and the addition time of the time (here, 2 seconds) required for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It is possible to execute the process of advancing the production so that the special production reception period is generated only after the elapse.

According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is started in the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the movable operation is performed. Even if the means (here, the sword ornament 5001) has an abnormality or a failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality or the failure has occurred before the special effect reception period occurs. However, since it becomes possible to perform the setting operation to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the post-operation performance corresponding to the performance reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is appropriate. Will be able to be generated. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect reception period occurs while the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is in an abnormal state or malfunction, the special effect reception period occurs. The same change as that when the movable operation means is operated during the reception period is caused to the effect.

FIG. 284 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the example relating to this effect processing, when an abnormality/failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), the movable operation means (here Then, the restoration process for returning the sword ornament 5001) to the normal state is executed for up to 15 seconds. Further, it takes 2 seconds to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state. Further, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation of the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is accepted. It takes 10 seconds.

Considering such time setting values, first, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) capable of generating the special effect reception period, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect reception A period longer than “30 seconds”, which is the sum of the period) and 10 seconds (effect after operation), is allocated, and 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) are added. Unless the production is advanced so that the special production reception period is generated at a timing later than “second”, the symbol variation in the state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality/fault ( It is not possible to secure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can generate a special performance reception period) is started.

Therefore, in the figure, as a plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (design variation time of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are respectively assigned are illustrated. However, in the effect patterns A to C to which only a time shorter than the above-mentioned additional time “30 seconds” is assigned, only the effect progress in which the special effect reception period cannot occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time “30 seconds” is allocated, the special effect reception period can be generated, but the symbol variation is started. Since the special effect reception period cannot occur at a timing before "17 seconds (addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation))", In order to secure the above-mentioned performance when the pattern variation (production pattern that can generate the special production reception period) is started in a state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is abnormal/failed. I have to.

In the example of this effect process, the special effect reception period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than the above-mentioned added time “30 seconds” is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

However, in reality, if the special effect reception period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has elapsed since the symbol variation started, the restoration processing fails. If the user does not perform the setting operation to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) immediately after recognizing that, the special performance reception period is generated in the state where the setting is changed to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state). It is impossible and unrealistic. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually requires time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can be said that the above-mentioned effects are not effective unless the above-mentioned time setting values are designed in consideration of such time values.

In this respect, it is designed including such a time value that a plurality of operations are received and a post-operation effect is generated each time the effects are received (for example, 8 Seconds), or a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds) in which an effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated when an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given is maintained in an operation state for a predetermined time or longer. In the effective period (production acceptance period), even if the operation is started after the effective period is delayed, a plurality of operations or long presses are required for an appropriate number of times/appropriate time until the effective period ends. It can be done over a period of time.

In view of such a fact, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation) in the above-mentioned time setting, an operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) should be used. Is desirable. That is, in this case, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, "15 seconds (restoration process)", "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multi-operation effective period or long-press effective period)", A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds" to which "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (post-operation effect)" are added is allocated, and "15 seconds". (Restoration process) and "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multi-operation valid period or long-press valid period)" are added to generate a special effect reception period at a timing later than "23 seconds" or "25 seconds" As described above, the production is advanced as described above, and only the production pattern E among the production patterns A to E can be executed as the production pattern satisfying the condition.

Note that the operation valid period for a plurality of times (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) do not always occur in the effect patterns (variation patterns) that can generate the special effect reception period. Alternatively, it may occur in an effect pattern different from this. Moreover, as the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), only one of the operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) may be generated a plurality of times. Will set the length of the valid period on the side of occurrence in place of 2 seconds (setting operation). If the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) is capable of generating both an operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) multiple times, those valid periods It is desirable that the long side of is set instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

Further, in the gaming state where the time saving function is enabled, it is required to consume the symbol variations one after another in a shorter time. Therefore, in the gaming state where the time saving function is enabled, the above-mentioned time settings are set. It is not always necessary to design the above. However, in this case, there is a concern that the special effect reception period may occur during the period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even during the period when the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), the player is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by the setting operation. It is desirable to make it possible. According to such a configuration, the post-operation performance as an effect using the movable operation means even while the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). Can be executed, and an efficient process in which both the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the post-operation effect are performed can be realized. It should be noted that this processing is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to the gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design for each time setting described above. Will not be performed.

Further, in the example of the effect process described with reference to FIG. 284, the effect using the movable operation means may be executed as any of the effects shown in FIGS. 190 to 261. .. When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the "effect using the movable operation means" shown in the figure is realized as an effect in which the specific operation-related effect, the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect are sequentially performed. The Rukoto.

Also, the special effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is prevented from occurring only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period has occurred, even if no operation is performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means may be necessarily performed within the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect may appear. Incidentally, when the automatic button production state (specific production state) is not controlled, there is an operation opportunity for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at least during the symbol variation in the normal game state. Although the special effect reception period to be given does not occur, the effect reception period is given in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-described restoration processing in the event of an abnormality/failure. Is possible. Regarding the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-mentioned restoration processing in the case of abnormality/fault, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Can occur when When such a configuration is adopted, the design for each of the above-mentioned time settings may be performed, but the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) may be designed without performing the above-described design for each time setting. It is possible to secure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can cause a special performance reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or a failure has occurred.

Further, in the example related to this effect process, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled by the setting operation by the player, but the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Does not necessarily have to be done by the operation of the player, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit judgment, or the automatic button production state itself is not set, and the automatic production function always functions. It may be provided as a playable game machine.

[Post-operation performance that suggests the automatically accepted operation target]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the first reception effect (effect in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) according to the establishment of the predetermined effect condition is executed. Even if the operation button 410 is not operated during the period, when the predetermined timing within the period in which the first reception effect is executed arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated, and the operation button 410 is operated. The same post-operation effect is executed. Also, an operation on the sword decoration 5001 within a period in which a second reception effect (an effect that gives an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) according to the establishment of an effect condition different from the predetermined effect condition is executed. Similarly, when the predetermined timing comes within the period in which the second reception effect is executed, the effect reception is automatically generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the sword ornament 5001 is operated is obtained. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, even when the operation means on the side of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 to which the operation opportunity is not given is mistakenly operated when the reception effect is generated, the operation opportunity is lost during the operation and the operation is performed. It is possible to prevent the situation where the post-effect cannot be confirmed from occurring. The "predetermined effect condition" and the "effect condition different from the predetermined effect condition" can be separately established as the result of the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination.

However, if there is a case where a performance reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know due to "looking away" and the post-operation performance corresponding to the performance reception is executed, the post-operation performance becomes an operation target. The player is not involved in the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) that is being used. That is, in this case, since the player cannot recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is the post-operation effect that occurs due to the operation, the first reception effect and the second reception effect are generated. If the degree of expectation is different, it may not be possible to recognize it and the interest in the game may be adversely affected.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the design changes, the ratio of the predetermined effect condition being satisfied (the ratio of the first acceptance effect being executed) is different from the effect condition. The determination (effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination) concerning various effects is performed so that the ratio is higher than the ratio (the ratio at which the second reception effect is executed), and within the symbol variation based on the result of the determination. It is designed to control the production. As a result, even in the case where the effect reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know, it is possible to predict that there is a high possibility that the first reception effect has been executed. Become.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the performance reception is automatically generated, “the image indicating the type of the operation target (the first image that appears during the period in which the performance reception is permitted (first If the reception effect is 1, it corresponds to the button image BTG, and if it is the second reception effect, it corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG).” The post-operation performance based on the reception is started. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect is executed while the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is displayed even when the effect reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably prevent the user from being unable to recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is the post-operation effect that has occurred.

In this case, the display mode (for example, the color or the transmittance) and the display position of the “image suggesting the type of the operation target” may be the same before and after the post-operation performance occurs. However, they may be different, and the point is that the type of the operation means to be operated is represented as a display on the effect display device 1600 when the effect after operation is started. Good. Further, when the after-operation effect is generated based on the effect reception generated by the operation by the player, the "image indicating the type of the operation target" may be hidden when the after-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the effect reception described above is automatically generated, the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player is started while the "image indicating the type of the operation target" is not hidden and is kept in the display state. You may do it. However, considering the simplification of the design and the processing load, the “image suggesting the type of the operation target” is not hidden and is maintained as the display state regardless of whether the production reception is automatically generated. Therefore, it is desirable to start the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player.

FIG. 285 shows an example of production progress when the post-operation production is started while the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is not hidden and is maintained in the display state when the production reception is automatically generated. It is a time chart shown. FIG. 286 and FIG. 287 are diagrams showing an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when the effect pattern in which the effect is advanced in the aspect shown in FIG. 285 is executed. In the example of the effect, it is assumed that the effect reception is automatically generated.

That is, now, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, a specific effect pattern that can be set as a "time effect acceptance period during which effect acceptance (operation) is allowed" in the period from timing tf1 to tf3 in the symbol variation execution period. If it is started based on the result of the big hit determination, as shown in FIG. 286(a), in the effect display device 1600, first, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is variably displayed.

In this specific effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 286(b), before the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) in the symbol variation execution period, the effect acceptance (operation) is soon permitted. The specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246 and the like (may be the specific operation-related effects illustrated separately from this) are performed as the indication effect to be suggested. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. , The common display effect is performed. While the common display effect is performed, it is kept secret which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given the operation opportunity. .. However, when the predetermined time elapses after the start of the specific operation-related effect and timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) arrives, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation. A relatively high expectation is produced by the appearance of the effect state indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high expectation. Which of the operation button 410 having a low degree of operation and the sword decoration 5001 having a relatively high degree of expectation is given an operation opportunity is displayed.

FIG. 286(c) shows that, as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286(b), at timing tf1 (see FIG. 285), the operation is performed as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation. A production situation indicating that the button 410 is to be operated appears, and a production situation in which the first reception production is started in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started (based on the result of the jackpot determination. The first production condition (production pattern in which the production result shown in FIG. 286(d) described later appears) or the second production condition (production in which the production result shown in FIG. Shows the production situation when the pattern) is satisfied.

In this effect situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG (a model image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area and the operation button 410 is operated. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period (FIG. 285: timing tf1 to tf3) set so that the acceptance of the effect is permitted, and the predetermined timing within the valid period (here Then, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated at the timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)).

That is, in this case, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 is made to the effect within the period (FIG. 285: timing tf1 to tf3) set to allow the effect reception. Becomes Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of changing the symbol, the "low-expectation mode effect" in which "the specified decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) does not operate and chance is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 286(d))" or "the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is operated, and a high heat mode production is displayed on the production display device 1600 (see FIG. 286(e)). )” is executed as a post-operation effect.

However, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes, the post-operation effect is started in a state where the image of the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is not hidden and is maintained. Even if the performance reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know, the post-operation performance is performed according to the "performance reception for the operation button 410" (relatively high expectation). Can be recognized as a post-operation performance on the low side).

Note that, in this example performance, as for the period during which the effect reception is permitted, as shown in FIG. 285, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and the effect reception is automatically ended at a timing tf2. It will be. Then, after that, in the case where the effect reception is not permitted, the after-operation effect is started with the image of the operation button 410 (button image BTG) being displayed, but the operation button 410 is used. The model image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing tf5 at which the post-operation effect is finished arrives.

According to such a configuration, during the period from the start to the end of the post-operation effect, a mock image of the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed. The period (timing tf2 to tf4) and the period (timing tf4 to tf5) in which the same image is not displayed appear. Therefore, even when the post-operation performance is started with the image of the operating means (here, the operation button 410) being the operation target being left in the display state, the image of the operating image is not displayed. It is expected that the feeling of tension due to having to confirm the post-operation performance before being performed is appropriately maintained.

Further, in this effect example, the period of timings tf2 to tf3 and the period of timings tf3 to tf4 are set to have the same length. According to such a configuration, when the time obtained by doubling the "remaining time indicated by the bar display" when the production reception is automatically generated, the operation means (here, the operation button) that is the operation target is passed. 410) It becomes possible to recognize that the mood image that has been played is hidden, so that it is possible to prevent the mood image from being overlooked (the mood image is hidden while the post-operation performance is being executed). It will be expected to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level when the game is played). In this case, the bar display may not be hidden when the effect reception is automatically generated, and the display may be continued.

On the other hand, in this effect example, at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286(b) is performed, the effect state shown in FIG. 287 (f) the production situation (the production determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the third production condition (production pattern shown in FIG. 287 (g) later described production result), or the fourth. There may be a case where an effect condition (an effect situation when an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 287(h) described later appears) is satisfied.

Also in this effect situation (FIG. 287(f)), as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a model image of the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area, and An instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the production reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the point that the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state is also the same as the effect situation shown in FIG. 286(c).

However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287(f), the button image BTG (a model image of the operation button 410) is displayed in a specific mode (here, a mode of wearing a flame). Compared to the case of the normal mode (here, the mode in which the flame is not put together) that appeared in the effect situation shown in 286(c), the ratio of the big hit symbols appearing due to the symbol change (relatively as expected after operation) It has been suggested that a high production result (here, the rate at which “extraordinary heat!!”) appears is high.

Then, also in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period (FIG. 285: timing tf1 to tf3) set to allow the acceptance of the effect, and the predetermined timing within the valid period (here Then, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated at timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)).

In this respect, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the button image BTG is displayed in the specific mode, as shown in FIGS. 287(g) and (h), the button image BTG is in the normal mode. Similar to the above-described case where the effect reception is automatically generated in the displayed effect status (FIGS. 286 (d) and (e)), "the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) does not operate, and the effect display device" 1600 is a low-expectation mode effect in which chance!! is displayed (see FIG. 287(g))” or “the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is operated and the effect display device 1600 is extremely hot!! The displayed high-expectation mode effect (see FIG. 287(h)) is executed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when effect reception is made by an operation on the operation button 410).

However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287(g) and 287(h), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes, the image of the operation button 410 is not hidden, This is to start the post-operation effect while the state is displayed in the specific mode (here, the mode of wearing the flame). As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know, the post-operation production is performed in accordance with the "production reception for the operation button 410", and a specific mode with high expectation. It becomes possible to recognize that the button image BTG was displayed (here, in the form of wearing the flame).

That is, in this effect example, even when the same effect mode (for example, chance!) Appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the operation image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the specific mode. When the after-effect is started (for example, refer to FIG. 287(g)), when the after-effect is started while the operation image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode (for example, Since the proportion of the big hit symbols appears is higher than that of FIG. 286 (d), it is possible to recognize such a difference in performance even after the post-operation performance is started, which is preferable for amusement of the game. You will be expected to keep on.

Also in this example of performance, the timing at which the period during which the acceptance of the performance is allowed is ended, the timing at which the image of the operation button 410 (specific mode) is hidden, and the period of timings tf2 to tf3. The point that the period of timings tf3 to tf4 is set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, and is similar to the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286(c) to 286(e). is there.

On the other hand, in this effect example, at timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286(b) is performed, it is shown in FIGS. 286(c) and 287(f). Not in any of the effect situations, the fifth effect condition (effect result shown in FIG. 287(j) described later appears in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287(i) (effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination). Effect pattern) or a sixth effect condition (effect situation when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 287(k), which will be described later, in which the effect result appears) may appear.

In this effect situation (FIG. 287(i)), as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG (a mock image of the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, a character display such as "put in the sword", an arrow display in the lower right direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which performance reception is allowed) Is to appear. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 to which the operation opportunity is given is moved to the operation position, which allows the player to operate the original position.

Also in this example of production, the operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) that is the operation target within the period (FIG. 285: timing tf1 to tf3) set to allow the production reception is operated. However, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the sword decoration 5001 is activated at a predetermined timing (here, timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)) within the valid period.

In this respect, even when the effect reception is automatically generated while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 287(j) and (k), the button image BTG is displayed in the effect situation. As in the above-mentioned case (FIG. 286(d), (e) or FIG. 287(g), (h)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated when the "specific decoration member SDY (blend product) is operated". First, a low-expectation mode effect in which a chance!! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 287(j))” or “a specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is operated, and at the effect display device 1600. The high-expectation mode effect (see FIG. 287(k)) in which intense heat is displayed is executed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect reception is made by the operation on the sword ornament 5001). Is becoming

However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287(j) and 287(k), the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001 is hidden regardless of which mode the post-operation effect is executed. Instead, the post-operation performance is started in the displayed state. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated in the place where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the post-operation effect is performed according to the "effect reception for the sword ornament 5001". Become.

That is, in this effect example, even when the same effect mode (for example, chance!) appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the sword decoration image SYG showing the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed. When the post-effect is started (for example, refer to FIG. 287(j)), when the post-operation effect is started while the mock image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode or the specific mode. (See, for example, FIG. 286(d) and FIG. 287(g)) Since the proportion of the big hit symbols appears is higher, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be maintained appropriately. .

Also in this example of performance, the timing at which the period during which the reception of production is permitted is ended, the timing at which the image of the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG) is hidden, and the timings tf2 to tf3. 285 and the points of timing tf3 to tf4 are set to have the same length, as shown in FIG. 285, and in the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286(c) to (e). Is the same as.

According to the effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, since the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, the operation target suggestion is generated. Both the image aspect and the post-operation effect aspect can be confirmed at the same time, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the case where the effect situation shown in FIG. 286(c) appears, the case where the effect situation shown in FIG. 287(f) appears, and FIG. 287(i). The same effect contents as the post-operation effect are made to appear when the effect situation shown in (1) appears. However, instead of this, the effect situation shown in FIG. 286(c) (a situation in which a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has occurred) and an effect situation shown in FIG. 287(f). Although the same post-operation effect is generated in, the operation is different in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287(i) (a situation in which a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 has occurred). A post-effect (for example, post-operation effect shown in FIG. 269) may be generated. Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 286(c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 287(f), and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287(i), different post-operation effects are produced for each effect situation. You may make it appear. Note that when these other examples are adopted, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 286(b) may not necessarily be executed.

In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, after executing the “precursor effect shown in FIG. 286(b) (here, specific operation-related effect)” that suggests that the reception effect will occur soon, "A reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (effect situation shown in FIGS. 286(c) and 287(f))" and "An operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. The reception effect (the effect situation shown in FIG. 287(i))" is generated, but the "reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 (in FIG. 287(i). It is not always necessary to generate the "displayed situation shown)". That is, in this case, in FIG. 286(c), as the reception effect in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 at the timing tf1 after the precursor effect indicating that the reception effect will be generated soon is executed. One of the effect status shown in FIG. 287(f) and the effect status shown in FIG. 287(f) is displayed. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 is pressed at the time when the effect after operation is started. The degree of expectation for the post-operation performance becomes different depending on whether the plucked image is displayed in the normal mode or the specific mode with a high degree of expectation (here, the mode of wearing a flame). Therefore, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained appropriately.

In addition, it is desirable that the content of the precursor effect in this case is executed as something that cannot appear in the precursor effect when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. In addition, a common sign is displayed when a mock image of the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode and when the mock image is displayed in a specific mode with high expectation (here, a mode of wearing a flame). It is desirable to execute the effect and, as a result, perform the effect so that the mock image of the operation button 410 appears in the normal mode or the specific mode.

In addition, the mock image of the operation button 410 is displayed in any of three or more modes including the normal mode and the specific mode, and the degree of expectation varies depending on which of the modes. You may do it. However, in the above-described effect example, at timing tf1, regardless of which of these modes the display image of the operation button 410 is displayed, post-operation production is started with the mode of the image displayed. It will be.

In addition, after the appearance of a specific precursor effect, “the effect situation shown in FIG. 286(c)”, “the effect situation shown in FIG. 287(f)”, and “the effect situation shown in FIG. 286(c). Similar to the above, the effect display device 1600 displays a normal image of the operation button 410, but when the player does not operate, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not activated and the post-operation effect is produced. May be made to appear. That is, in this case, when the reception effect in which the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode occurs, it is grasped whether the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated when the player does not operate. Since it becomes possible to make it difficult, it is expected that the feeling of tension when the reception effect occurs (the feeling of tension as to whether the player should operate the operation to start the effect after operation) is appropriately maintained. Become so. On the other hand, when the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in a specific mode, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and the post-operation effect is always generated even if the player does not perform an operation. As a result, together with the fact that it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Note that, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 in the effect display device 1600 is used in the same manner as in the “effect situation shown in FIG. 286(c)” instead of the “effect situation shown in FIG. 286(c)”. When the "playing situation (not shown)" in which the automatic image is displayed in the normal mode but the player does not operate the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 and the post-operation rendering is not executed" If the operation button 410 is not operated by the end of the effect reception period, the post-operation effect will not be executed. However, in this case as well, when the production reception period ends and the production situation is in which production reception is not permitted, the image of the operation button 410 is not hidden but is kept displayed in the normal mode. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, in a production situation in which the player's operation is not performed and the post-operation production is not executed even though the reception production in which the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode has occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that the operation button 410 has been changed in the next reception effect, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled when the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode. Especially, it is expected to encourage the player to operate without excessive expectations.

In the above-described effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, the display mode of the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001 are changed. Although the post-operation performance is started in a state in which these mood images are displayed in the changed display mode, the mood that the operation button 410 is mangled in the display mode and the display position during the performance acceptance period. The post-operation effect may be started in a state where the image or the image of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed.

The post-operation effect that is started while the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword ornament 5001 are displayed is the display effect on the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the lamp provided on the game board 5. It may be any one of the effect, the effect by sound, and the movable effect by the decorative accessory, or may be an appropriate combination of these effects. Further, as will be described later, the first post-operation effect that is started while the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001 are displayed, and the image of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration You may make it each perform the 2nd after-operation production|presentation started after the timing tf4 when the mock image of the body 5001 is hidden.

In the above-described effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated while being displayed. I tried to start the post production. However, in terms of processing load, even when a player receives an effect reception by an operation, a post-operation effect is started while displaying the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword ornament 5001. In this way, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed in the same process.

Also in the above-described effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, similar to the case of the effect example described later, a mock image of the operation button 410 and a mock image of the sword ornament 5001 are dynamically displayed. Alternatively, the post-operation effect may be started in the state where the dynamic display is maintained.

In addition, when the precursor effect that indicates that the reception effect shown in FIG. 286(c) is about to occur is generated and then the reception effect shown in FIG. 286(c) is executed, the operation button 410 is pressed. It is also possible to start the post-operation performance while displaying the plucked image.

[Post-operation performance that makes it difficult to recognize the timing of automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the operation is performed without the operation by the player. It is possible to generate post production. However, in a state where such an "automatic effect function" can be activated, if it is desired to generate a post-operation effect by the player's own operation, it is predetermined in the period during which the reception effect is performed. The operation must be performed before the specified timing (timing at which the automatic effect function is activated) arrives, and when the player himself attempts to operate it, the effective period as the reception effect is that much. It will be substantially shortened. Therefore, under such a situation where the reception effect is being executed, it is impossible to recognize what kind of operation should be performed, or to display an image that suggests the elapsed time (remaining time) after the effective period occurs. If there is something to be confirmed one by one, the player may automatically generate a production reception by the time the player attempts to operate the game, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a mock image of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) targeted for effect reception is converted into a plurality of mood images (for example, the operation button 410). "How to move a specific operation means" by displaying as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of images that are drawn so that the operating state (operation state) of each is different. The operation method of is suggested. In addition, in the case of displaying a moving image as a moving image in this way, a predetermined predetermined moving image of a plurality of moving images is displayed as an image to be displayed first, and thereafter, a plurality of moving images are displayed in a predetermined order. By sequentially displaying the moving images of the above, it is possible to determine the elapsed time from the occurrence of the specific reception effect (effective period) only by seeing how much the display as the moving image has progressed. It is made possible to recognize.

That is, in this case, the operation method regarding "how to move the specific operation means" and the specific reception effect are executed only by looking at the image of the specific operation means targeted for the effect reception. It becomes possible to simultaneously recognize the elapsed time after the period (effective period) has occurred. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for the player to grasp the operation method and the remaining time after thinking about operating the game, and thus to operate before the performance reception is automatically generated. You will be expected to urge.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the processing for automatically generating the effect reception can be executed at the timing after half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed. Therefore, this also encourages the user to operate before the performance reception is automatically generated.

However, even if these processes are performed, it is not possible to completely avoid the situation in which the effect reception is automatically generated before the player himself/herself operates it. Therefore, it can be said that it is more important to take measures to make it difficult for the interest in the game to be deteriorated even if such a situation occurs. In the case where the countermeasure is taken, the above-mentioned “prompt to operate before effect reception is automatically generated” process may not necessarily be performed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, even when the effect reception is automatically generated, the process of displaying the mood image as a moving image is continued without being stopped. That is, by continuously displaying the progress image as a moving image even after the performance reception is automatically generated and the post-operation performance is started, a predetermined time (video image) after the performance reception is automatically generated. It is difficult to recognize that the post-operation performance has started while the image is continued), and the operation by the player is performed while the moving image as the moving image is continuously displayed. For example, it is possible to give an impression as if the post-operation effect was started by the operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the operation by the player is delayed after the "automatic generation of effect reception", it is as if the effect change occurred due to the operation. In order to give such an impression, the post-operation effect is executed as a stepwise effect. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the production changes from the second stage onward are caused by the operation by the player, and the operation opportunity by the player is deprived by "automatic production reception". It is expected that it will be difficult to give such an impression.

FIG. 288 shows that when a specific reception effect is generated, a plurality of images of a mock image (sword decoration image SYG) of a specific operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) targeted for effect reception are generated. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a moving image by sequentially displaying images (here, a plurality of mock images in which the operation state (operation state) of the sword decoration 5001 is different). is there.

Now, if it is assumed that a specific reception effect is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and a time period during which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the specific operation means (here, the target) of the effect reception. First, the sword decoration image SYGa (predetermined model image) shown in FIG. 288(a) is displayed as the "first displayed image" as a model image (sword decoration image SYG) of the sword decoration body 5001). At this time, the bar display showing the remaining time during which the production reception is allowed is also displayed in a state where the gauge is full.

Here, the sword decoration image SYGa shown in FIG. 288( a) is a moving image of “a mock image of the sword decoration 5001” when a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 occurs. When displayed as an image, it is always selected as the "first displayed image". That is, it can be said that the state in which the bar display of "gauge full" is displayed within the period in which the acceptance of effects is allowed is the state in which the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed, and these images correspond to each other. It can be said that it is a thing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 288(b) to (f), the bar display showing the remaining time is depicted as a moving image in which the gauge amount decreases with time (a plurality of gauge remaining amounts are different. The sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a moving image in which the amount of movement (the amount of operation) increases with the passage of time. The images SYGb to SYGf) will be displayed in a predetermined order.

According to such a configuration, an operation method for "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" only by looking at the movement of the sword decoration image SYG that appears when a specific reception effect occurs, Both the elapsed time after the production acceptance period is generated (which can be grasped by the operation amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa) can be respectively recognized. Like Therefore, it is expected that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to try to operate, but it may be difficult for the timing of automatic reception of performance reception to occur before the operation by the player. become.

Here, in the specific reception effect, the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) during the period in which the reception of the effect is allowed (the timing after the half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed has elapsed). ), the production reception is automatically generated. Therefore, when the player intends to operate it, it is required to operate the sword decoration body 5001 until the moving image as the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and displayed on the "sword decoration image SYGd". Becomes

By the way, even if there is no operation by the player, if the specific reception effect is executed so that the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288(d), the "sword decoration image SYGe" and The “sword decoration image SYGf” can be said to be an image that cannot be originally displayed regardless of whether or not the player has operated it. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288(d), the "sword decoration image SYGe" and the "sword decoration image SYGf" are displayed. Is intentionally displayed, which will be described later.

289 to 291 show that although a specific reception effect has been generated in which a mock image of the sword ornament 5001 is dynamically displayed, the operation by the player can be performed by the time the effect reception is automatically generated. It is a figure which shows the example about the production which appears when it is not in time. In the example of the effect, it is assumed that the effect reception is automatically generated.

In FIG. 289(a), the number of holdings is 2 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the situation.

289(b) shows that the specific moving image TDG is based on the fact that a predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 289(a). It shows the presentation situation that has started to be displayed. The "predetermined effect condition" may be, for example, accumulating a certain value of the score accumulated in the effect.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is set to the waiting state (up to 3 times). ) It is possible to execute the process of waiting. In this regard, in FIG. 289(b), in the effect display device 1600, the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is started to be displayed in the frame shaped like the first coin, and the "sword stock" is displayed. By performing a display for changing the count value from “0” to “1”, the “production mode in which an operation opportunity is generated for the sword decoration body 5001” is in a new production standby state. Is being suggested.

Here, with regard to the specific moving image TDG according to this effect example, it is assumed that each image shown in FIGS. 255(b) to (e) is sequentially displayed in a frame in the shape of a coin to be displayed as a moving image. Is becoming After the "image shown in FIG. 255(b)" is displayed and then the images shown in "FIG. 255(e)" are sequentially displayed, a series of these displays (FIG. 255(b)-( e)) is repeatedly performed by loop processing.

In FIG. 289(c), after the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" shown in FIG. 289(b) is started to be displayed, the predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied again. On the basis of the fact, a performance situation in which a new "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" is displayed, which is different from the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" that has already started to be displayed. Is shown.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the "performance mode in which an operation opportunity is generated for the sword decoration 5001" is set as a waiting state (maximum). It is possible to execute the process of waiting for up to three times. In this regard, in FIG. 289 (c), in the effect display device 1600 in which the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is displayed in the frame shaped like the first coin, the second coin By displaying a new display of "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" and changing the count value of "sword stock" from "1" to "2" even in the frame shaped as It has been suggested that the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001" for the second time is in the effect state in which the execution wait state is set.

Here, in this effect example, when a new display of the "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" is started within the frame in which the second coin is shaped, the frame in which the first coin is shaped A process of synchronously displaying the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” that is already being displayed in the inside is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment performs a process of updating the timer value of the predetermined timer related to the specific moving image TDG at predetermined time intervals, and when newly displaying the specific moving image TDG, the timer value is updated. The image corresponding to the timer value (one of the images shown in FIGS. 255(b) to (e)) is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image".

For example, assuming that the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated every predetermined time within the range of "1" to "4", when the above-referenced timer value is "1", the timer value shown in FIG. ) Is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image", and when the timer value referred to above is "2", the image shown in FIG. 255(c) is displayed as the "first displayed". When the timer value referred to above is “3”, the image shown in FIG. 255(d) is selectively displayed as the “first displayed image”. If the referenced timer value is "4", the image shown in FIG. 255(e) is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image". After the new display of the specific moving image TDG is started in this way, each time the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated, the image corresponding to the updated timer value is newly set as the “specific moving image TDG”. Display it so that the previously displayed image is hidden. By performing such processing on the specific moving image TDGa in the first coin and the specific moving image TDGb in the second coin, respectively, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb is displayed as a moving image synchronized with each other regardless of their display start timing (in FIG. 289(c), both the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are displayed in FIG. 255(d). It is displayed as the image shown). The method of displaying the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb in synchronization with each other is not limited to this, and another method may be adopted.

However, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not display any specific moving image TDG in the update processing for the predetermined timer every predetermined time (for example, the situation shown in FIG. 289(a)). In addition to the above, it is also executed in the case where the symbol variation is not performed), and thus, the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is displayed in the frame in the shape of the first coin. When starting to display "," which of the images shown in FIGS. 255(b) to (e) is selected as the "image to be displayed first" is made different each time, and this is undefined ( The “first displayed image” changes according to the timing when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. That is, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a "moving image as the sword decoration image SYG" in which the "first displayed image" is predetermined within a period in which a specific reception effect is performed. (Figs. 288 (a) to (f))" and "a moving image as a specific moving image TDG (Figs. 255 (b) to (e))" in which the "first displayed image" is indefinite. Are displayed respectively.

After the specific moving image TDGb is newly displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 289(d), the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are respectively displayed as moving images in synchronization with each other. .

Then, while the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are being displayed and displayed as moving images in synchronization with each other, the “waiting execution state for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed as the above-mentioned execution waiting state. When the condition for executing "(second effect condition) is satisfied, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, it is displayed in the first coin as shown in FIG. 289(e). It is suggested that "a production mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" has been started by performing a display in which a production operation (predetermined movement) like a coin toss appears in the "specific moving image TDGa" I am trying to do it. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a process of changing the "sword stock 2" that has been displayed until then to "during stock release", and at the same time performs a coin-toss-like operation on the "specific moving image TDGa" with respect to the background image. A production change (effect) associated with the appearance of a production operation (predetermined movement) is generated.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a performance action (predetermined movement) like a coin toss appears in the "specific moving image TDGa", the "specific moving image TDGa" is displayed as shown in FIG. 289(f). Is performed without returning the original position to the original position, and the "mode of effect for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001" is executed, whereby the player to the specific moving image TDGa I'm trying to encourage people to gaze. Note that, here, as the "production mode in which an operation opportunity is generated for the sword decoration 5001", first, a display such as "plucking a sword" and "paying for a sword" is displayed on the production display device 1600. A process of moving the sword decoration 5001 to the operation position is performed.

Note that, after that, the specific moving image TDGa that has performed the predetermined movement is in the moved state and the display progress before the movement is continued. Therefore, even if the specific moving image TDGa is moved, the display progresses as a moving image display synchronized with the specific moving image TDGb displayed in the second coin. In the moved state, the specific moving image TDGa according to the present embodiment is displayed in a mode different from that before the movement (here, a state in which the sideways rotated a little). It is suggested that the "performance mode for generating an operation opportunity" has been started.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is started in this way, as shown in FIG. 290(g), the operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 is operated. A specific reception effect to which is added is started. In the specific reception effect, a mock image of the sword decoration 5001 is dynamically displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 288, whereby the sword decoration image that appears when the specific reception effect occurs. Just by looking at the movement of SYG, the operation method about "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" and the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period during which the acceptance of the performance is allowed (the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed). As described above, it is possible to recognize both the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG as the starting point).

Therefore, also in this effect example, if an effective period corresponding to a specific reception effect occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 290(g), first, "a mock image of the sword ornament 5001" and "effect reception" 290(h), (i) (corresponding to FIGS. 288(b), (c)) after the "bar display indicating the remaining time allowed" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 288(a). The display progresses in each mode.

However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the player does not perform an operation within the effective period corresponding to the specific reception effect, and is shown in FIG. 290(j) (corresponding to FIG. 288(d)). When the timing comes, the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is started.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as described above, even when the performance reception is automatically generated within the specific reception performance, the mood image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as a moving image. The processing is to be continued without stopping. That is, as shown in FIG. 290(j), and FIG. 291(k), (l), the mood image (sword decoration image) as a moving image even after the effect reception is automatically generated and the post-operation effect is started. By continuously displaying (SYG) as it is, it is possible to recognize that the post-operation performance has been started for a predetermined time (while the moving image continues) after the automatic reception of the performance reception. If the operation by the player is performed while the sword decoration image SYG is continuously displayed (FIG. 290(j) and within the period shown in FIG. 291(k), (l)). By this operation, it is possible to give the impression that the post-operation effect has started.

Further, in this example of performance, after the operation is performed at least while the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued (FIG. 290(j) and the period shown in FIGS. 291(k) and (l)). Regardless of whether the first effect result (FIG. 290(m)) or the second effect result (FIG. 290(n)) with different expectations is to be produced as the effect, the same (common) effect mode (expectation level is An aspect that is not suggested) appears (first stage effect change). Here, as shown in FIG. 290(j), and FIG. 291(k), (l), the sword decoration body 5001 is set to be “the mode in which the aura member 5040 appears” as the “same performance mode”, and An effect corresponding to an aura member is also displayed on the sword decoration image SYG displayed on the display device 1600.

Then, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of changing the symbol, "the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) operates and the effect is produced. A low-expectation mode effect in which a chance is displayed on the display device 1600 (see FIG. 291(m))” or “a specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is operated, and intense heat is generated on the effect display device 1600! The high-expectation mode effect (! is displayed (see FIG. 291(n))” is further executed as a post-operation effect (effect change in the second stage). Further, while the post-operation effect suggests the degree of expectation, drive control for returning the sword decoration 5001 and the aura member 5040 to the original position is performed.

According to the configuration in which the post-operation effect is executed as a stepwise effect in this way, the operation by the player becomes "automatic generation of effect acceptance (timing shown in FIG. 290(j) (FIG. 288(d))". Even if it is not in time, if it is delayed while the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued (by the timing shown in FIG. 290(l) (FIG. 288(f))). If so, after that, the post-operation effect (the second-stage effect change) is performed in a mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested, and therefore, it has an impression that the effect change is caused by the operation. It becomes possible to make it possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the operation opportunity by the player has been robbed by the "automatic generation of effect reception".

In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, in the specific reception effect (FIGS. 290(g) to (j), and FIG. 291(k), (l)), the effective period corresponding to the reception effect is The image displayed at the time of starting (the image displayed first) is a predetermined “moving image as a sword decoration image SYG (FIGS. 288(a) to (f))” and the image is indefinite. Each time, a different "moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255(b) to (e))" is displayed. In other words, not the "moving image as the sword decoration image SYG (Figs. 288(a) to (f))" but the "moving image as the specific moving image TDG (Figs. 255(b) to (e))" If the player side confirms, the situation may occur in which the elapsed time from the start of the specific reception effect may be erroneously recognized, but according to the above configuration, the specific reception effect is generated. As a result of erroneously recognizing the elapsed time from the start of the operation, a situation occurs in which the operation by the player is not in time for "automatic generation of effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 290(j) (FIG. 288(d)))". Even in such a case, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained appropriately.

By the way, the specific reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291 is basically adapted to be effected in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290(g) appears, and at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290(j) appears. Is becoming However, at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, only the post-operation effect that does not indicate the degree of expectation is executed, and the timing tf4 shown in FIG. 285 at which the moving image continued as the sword decoration image SYG is hidden. It can be said that this is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 in that after the arrival of, the post-operation effect that indicates the degree of expectation is newly started. It should be noted that, in this effect example, the another example described above with reference to FIG. 285 may be applied.

Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic occurrence of effect reception until the end of the period initially set as the effect reception period (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time (timing tf3 to tf4) from the timing when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends until the moving image is not displayed (time tf3 to tf4) may be set as the same length of time. desirable.

It should be noted that a plurality of modes are prepared as the specific moving image TDG, and a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared also as a mock image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) that simulates the operation means to be operated. Then, when the predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied, it is determined which of a plurality of modes is to be displayed as the specific moving image TDG, and the specific moving image TDG is displayed in any of these modes. Depending on whether it is performed, a mode having a high degree of expectation may be likely to appear as the above-mentioned image (here, the sword decoration image SYG).

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the second production condition is satisfied and the "production mode in which an operation opportunity is generated for the sword decoration 5001" is executed after the two specific moving images TDG are displayed has been illustrated. However, the second effect condition may be satisfied when only one specific moving image TDG is displayed. Even when the second effect condition is satisfied (when the specific moving image TDG shows a predetermined motion), the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001" is not always required. It may not be executed, and for example, any one of a plurality of effect modes including the “effect mode in which an operation opportunity is generated for the sword ornament 5001” may be selectively executed. Further, in the above-mentioned example of effect, such a specific moving image TDG may not necessarily be displayed, and a specific reception effect is started when a predetermined timing comes while the symbol effect is being performed. You can

Although the "same image (here, sword decoration image SYG)" and the "bar display having the same length" are displayed within the effective period in which the performance reception is allowed, the performance reception is allowed. The first reception effect and the second reception effect, which have different effective period lengths, may be executed. That is, in this case, for the "bar display", the speed at which the gauge amount decreases in accordance with the length of the effective period will be different, but for the "black image (here, sword decoration image SYG)", Regardless of which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, an operation method regarding "how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decoration 5001)" , Both of the elapsed time after the generation of the period in which the acceptance of the effect is permitted (which can be grasped by the operation amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG with the sword decoration image SYGa as the starting point) can be recognized. As possible, it is desirable to perform display development as a moving image in the same manner. According to such a configuration, even if it is difficult to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being performed, it is difficult to recognize the "reception image (here, sword decoration). It is possible to grasp the elapsed time after the acceptance of the performance reception is allowed only by confirming the “image SYG)”. Then, by checking whether the remaining gauge amount of the bar display is large or small based on the elapsed time thus grasped, which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed? Will be able to be recognized. That is, usually, the first reception performance and the second reception performance are often different in the performance expectation level. Therefore, the post-operation performance is started based on the recognition of the type of the reception performance. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

When the above-described first reception effect and second reception effect are prepared, it is desirable to set the time from the expiration of the effective period until the effect reception is automatically generated as different times. If different times are set in this way, the time until the performance reception is automatically generated is erroneously recognized, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the operation is not in time even if the player tries to operate it. However, according to the production example in which the dynamic display by the “black image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” is continued or the post-operation production is executed stepwise, such a situation occurs. Also, the decline in the interest in playing games can be appropriately suppressed.

In the above-described production example, in the case of displaying a mock image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) of the operation means to be operated as a moving image in the specific reception production, as shown in FIG. From the position (see FIG. 288(a)) to the position after the operation (see FIG. 288(f)) according to the length of the effective period as the specific reception effect. It was decided to advance the display. However, one operation from the "operation start position (see FIG. 288(a))" to the "operation end position (see FIG. 288(f))" is not necessarily adjusted to the length of the effective period. The display does not have to be advanced by, for example, “the position where the operation is started (see FIG. 288(a))” and “the position where the operation is finished (FIG. 288) over the time until the valid period ends. (See (f))” may be displayed as a moving image in which the reciprocating motion between the above and the other is repeated. In short, the image displayed at the time when the effective period corresponding to the reception effect is started (the image displayed first) is predetermined, and thereafter, the moving image is displayed in the predetermined order and the development speed. If it is something that progresses (sequentially displayed by a plurality of images), the operation method regarding "how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the reception of performance are allowed. Both the elapsed time after the occurrence of the period (which can be grasped by the movement amount of the sword decoration image SYG (starting from the sword decoration image SYGa, here, the movement amount including how many reciprocating movements are made)) It is possible to recognize.

In the example of the above-mentioned production, the "post-operation production executed stepwise" performed based on the production reception may be in another mode. For example, in a state in which a moving image as a mock image of the operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated is being continued, the “light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5” is set to 1 It is started as a post-operation performance. Then, after the moving image as a mock image of the operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated is hidden, and "the light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5 is produced. In a situation in which "is being executed as the post-operation effect of the first stage, "display effect in effect display device 1600" or "movable effect by decoration accessory" (or at least one of them) is in two steps. It is started as the post-operation production of the eye (in the second-stage post-production production, a production target different from the production target used in the first-stage post-production production is used). According to such a configuration, the "light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5" is the "display effect on the effect display device 1600" or the "movable effect by the decorative accessory" (or at least one of them). Since it is expected that it will function as a staging effect, it is uncomfortable even if it is recognized as the first stage post-operation staging (a predetermined time has elapsed since the staging was accepted. Until then, it is possible to provide a post-operation effect without a feeling of strangeness in which the post-operation effect using the effect display device 1600 or the post-operation effect using the decorative accessory is not executed.

In addition, the same production target (for example, light emission production by a lamp provided on the game board 5) is used in the first-stage post-operation production and the second-stage post-production production, and is then set as the operation target. In a state in which a moving image as a mock image of the operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is continued, post-operation effect (light emission effect by a lamp) is performed in a manner that the expectation is not suggested. In this way, after the moving image as the moving image is hidden, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) may be advanced as a mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

A plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared as modes of the moving image as a moving image of the operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated, and the moving image is displayed in any of these modes. Even in the case, the moving image may be continuously displayed even after the production reception occurs, in all of the modes.

Even if a moving image showing the operation means to be operated (here, the sword decoration 5001) is displayed as a moving image, if the operation means is not operated within the effective period, the effect is produced. The special reception effect in which reception is not generated may be generated by the establishment of an effect condition different from the effect condition that causes the specific reception effect. That is, in this case, by causing the “moving image of the same image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” and the “bar display having the same length” to be displayed, the effect reception is automatically generated. It becomes possible to make it difficult to understand which of the "specific reception performance" and the "special reception performance" in which performance reception does not automatically occur, and provide a tense reception performance. Will be able to. However, in the case of "specific reception performance" in which performance reception is automatically generated and "special reception performance" in which performance reception is not automatically generated, different performance contents will appear as post-operation performance. This is desirable in order to make it possible to recognize which reception performance was performed when this was done. In addition, a production pattern that can generate either a "specific reception production" in which production reception is automatically generated or a "special reception production" in which production reception is not automatically generated, or both are generated at different timings. Prepare a possible production pattern, when changing the design, by executing one of the plurality of production patterns including those production patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, at a predetermined timing within the design variation. You may make it "special reception performance" and "special reception performance" can appear.

In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, a moving image as a mock image of the operation means (the sword ornament 5001 in this case) to be operated. The post-operation effect is started while the progress of the dynamic display is continued, and the post-operation effect is executed stepwise. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect reception is generated by an operation by the player, a moving image as a moving image of the operating means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated is changed to the moving image. It is desirable that the post-operation effect be started while continuing the progress of the target display, and that the post-operation effect be executed stepwise so that the post-operation effect is executed in the same process.

[Post-operation performance that suggests the type of automatically received reception performance]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the operation is performed without the operation by the player. It is possible to generate post production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 having such an “automatic production function”, even if the player forgets to perform the operation, the production reception is automatically generated. There is a concern that the feeling of tension when given will disappear, and that it will become a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image flows.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to generate the first reception effect and the second reception effect, which are different in the time from the generation of the period in which the reception of production is permitted to the time of automatic production reception. In the above, the remaining time image (for example, bar display) and the mockup image (for example, button image BTG) displayed at the reception of the effects are set to be the same image. That is, in this case, it is urged that the second reception effect is erroneously recognized even though the first reception effect is generated. , "The production reception is not automatically generated even though the production reception should be automatically generated after the period when the production reception is allowed (or the timing when the production reception is automatically generated has not yet arrived. It is possible to maintain a suitable sense of tension until the production reception is automatically generated. You will be expected.

However, even if the first reception effect has occurred, if the time until the effect reception is automatically generated is erroneously recognized as a second reception effect that is different from this, what kind of effect It is feared that it will not be possible to understand whether progress is being made and that the interest in playing games will decline. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bar display showing the remaining time as the effective period is continuously displayed even after the performance reception is automatically generated. That is, in this case, even if it is not possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed when the effective period in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the effect reception is automatically generated (the post-operation effect is started). ), it is possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect was being performed by checking how much gauge is left as a bar display. After the operation, the performance can be started.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sign effect having the same content is generated, and even when the same effective image and the same bar display are displayed when the effective period occurs, It is possible to execute the production progress that may or may not automatically generate the production reception within the effective period. With such a configuration, even if a precursor effect or a reception effect occurs, it is not possible to distinguish whether or not the reception is automatically performed within the effective period, so that the reception effect can be performed with a sense of tension. become able to.

292 and 293 are diagrams showing an example of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, which are different in the time from the generation of the effect reception permitted period (effective period) to the automatic generation of the effect reception. is there. In the example of the effect, it is assumed that the effect reception is automatically generated.

In FIG. 292(a), the hold number is in the state of 3, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment, and the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

292(b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 292(a (here, in the reach state, it may be in the non-reach state), the production reception (operation). Shows a production situation in which a precursor production that suggests that is soon permitted is being executed.

FIG. 292(c) shows an effect situation in which the first reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292(b) is performed (the result of the jackpot determination). The first effect condition (effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 292(e) described later appears) or the second effect condition (effect result shown in FIG. 292(f) described later) is determined in the effect determination performed based on The production situation) in the case where the appearing production pattern) is satisfied is shown.

In this effect situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG (a model image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area and the operation button 410 is operated. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

However, in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow production reception, and the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period. It is supposed to be done. FIG. 292(d) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (effective period) of the first reception effect, and the automatic effect function is activated. Then, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 is made to the effect within the effective period set to allow the effect reception. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of changing the symbol, the "low-expectation mode effect" in which "a specific decorative member SDY (a shade character product) is operated and a chance!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 292 (e))" or "the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) operates, and a high-expectation mode production in which intense heat is displayed on the production display device 1600 (see FIG. 292 (f)). )” is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this respect, in this effect example, "the remaining time as the period during which the effect acceptance is permitted is shown, regardless of which mode (Fig. 292 (e), (f)) the effect after operation is executed. The "bar display" is not hidden and the post-operation performance is started in a state in which it is maintained. In this way, by confirming how much gauge is left at the time when the post-operation performance is started, the relevant reception performance is "reception reception after the production acceptance period (effective period) occurs. It is possible to recognize which of the "first reception effect and the second reception effect" in which the time until automatically occurs is different. That is, usually, the first reception performance and the second reception performance are often different in performance expectation level. Therefore, it is possible to start the post-operation performance after recognizing the type of the reception performance. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

On the other hand, in this effect example, after the effect situation shown in FIG. 292(a) appears, the effect effect shown in FIG. 293(g) appears instead of the effect effect shown in FIG. 292(b). (The third production condition (production pattern in which the production result shown in FIG. 293(j) described later appears) or the fourth production condition (FIG. 293(k) described later) in the production determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination. (The effect pattern in which the effect result shown is shown) or the fifth effect condition (the effect situation when the effect pattern in which the effect situations shown in FIGS. 293(l) and (m) described later appear) is satisfied) There is.

After the precursor effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 293(g), as shown in FIG. 293(h), the second reception effect in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started. Will be done.

However, in this second reception effect, although the time from the occurrence of the period in which the effect reception is allowed to the activation of the automatic effect function is shorter than the first reception effect, As also shown in FIG. 293(c) and FIG. 293(h), a button image BTG (an image of the operation button 410) and a bar display (the gauge length is the same) indicating the remaining time of the effective period. ) And are both the same images as in the case of the first reception effect.

That is, in this case, the first reception is performed regardless of whether the production situation shown in FIG. 293(c) is occurring or the production situation shown in FIG. 293(h) is produced. It becomes difficult to recognize which of the production and the second reception production is occurring, and it is possible to give a sense of tension as to when the production reception is generated.

Then, in this example of performance, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the production reception, and the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period. It is supposed to be done. FIG. 293(i) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (effective period) of the second reception effect, and the effective period has occurred. Therefore, if the automatic effect function is activated at an earlier timing than the second reception effect, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 will be caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of changing the symbol, the "low-expectation mode effect" in which "a specific decorative member SDY (a shade accessory) operates and a chance!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 293(j))” or “the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) is operated, and intense heat!! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 293(k)). )” is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this respect, in this production example, "representing the remaining time as the period during which the production reception is permitted, regardless of which mode (FIG. 293(j), (k)) the post-operation production is executed. The "bar display" is not hidden and the post-operation performance is started in a state in which it is maintained. In this way, by confirming how much gauge is left at the time when the post-operation performance is started, the relevant reception performance is "reception reception after the production acceptance period (effective period) occurs. It is possible to recognize which of the "first reception effect and the second reception effect" in which the time until automatically occurs is different. That is, usually, the first reception performance and the second reception performance are often different in performance expectation level. Therefore, it is possible to start the post-operation performance after recognizing the type of the reception performance. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

However, in this effect example, even when the precursor effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293(g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293(h) are sequentially displayed, FIG. As shown in l), a production situation (fifth production condition) in which the effective period as the reception production is ended without the automatic production function being activated can also appear when the player does not perform an operation. ing.

That is, in this case, the same indication effect (see FIG. 293(g)) is generated, and the same bar image and the same bar display (including the gauge length and how to reduce the gauge are also included when the effective period occurs). And (2) are respectively displayed, the effect reception is performed as the second reception effect that is automatically generated within the effective period (see (i) to (k) in FIG. 293). Is executed as a third reception effect that does not automatically occur (see FIGS. 293(l) and (m)), it is possible to execute a certain effect development. With such a configuration, even if the indication effect in which the specific aspect appears or the reception effect in which the specific aspect appears, it is not possible to distinguish whether or not it is automatically accepted within the effective period, so that a feeling of tension is felt. You will be able to perform reception production with holding.

Moreover, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 293(m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, the effective period is ended and effect reception is performed. "Is not permitted," the "bar display indicating the remaining time as the period during which performance reception is permitted" is not hidden but is maintained. Therefore, it is a reception performance in which the automatic performance function is not activated by confirming that a performance situation has occurred in which after-operation performance has not occurred even though the gauge remaining amount is "0". Will be able to be recognized, and it is expected that a decrease in the interest of the game will be suppressed. Although “?” appears in the diagram shown in FIG. 293(m), it may be configured not to cause any production change.

Further, in this effect example, although the type of the precursor effect (see FIG. 292(b) and FIG. 293(m)) is different, the same mood image and the same bar display are displayed when the effect reception occurs. However, since the time until the automatic effect function is activated is different (see FIGS. 292(c) and 293(h)), when the precursor effect is overlooked, it is relatively So that it is possible to provide directivity whether the automatic production function is activated at an early timing, the automatic production function is activated at a relatively late stage, or whether the automatic production function is not activated in the first place. This makes it possible to perform reception production with a sense of tension. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the precursor effect has been performed in the mode shown in FIG. 292(b), it is possible to recognize in advance that the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is always activated occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

In this example of effect, the indication effect shown in FIG. 292(b) and the indication effect shown in FIG. 293(g) are different in display mode. However, these may be executed in the same display manner. You can In other words, in this case, even if both the indication effect and the reception effect are confirmed, the operation opportunity is kept secret in which timing the automatic effect function is activated, and further, whether the automatic effect function is activated in the first place. Can be granted.

By the way, basically, the reception effects described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293 are also advanced in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 292(c) or FIG. 293(h) appears, and at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, FIG. 292(e), (f ) Or the production situations shown in FIGS. 293(j) and (k). However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, the automatic effect function may not be activated in some cases, and the timing tf2 when the automatic effect function is activated may be delayed depending on the established effect condition (effect pattern). It can be said that this is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 in that the effect may be accelerated and the post-operation effect is started with the bar display left. It should be noted that, in this effect example, the another example described above with reference to FIG. 285 may be applied. Also in this example of effect, after the operation, the effect after the operation may be started while the bar image is displayed and the image of the operation means is left. Further, when the post-operation performance is started while leaving a practicing image of the operating means, the practicing image may be continued as a moving image as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289.

Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic occurrence of effect reception until the end of the period initially set as the effect reception period (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time (timing tf3 to tf4) from the timing when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends until the bar display is hidden (timing tf3 to tf4) may be set as the same length of time. desirable.

Also in this effect example, when the effect after operation is started while the bar display is left, the stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

Also, the time from the occurrence of the second reception effect to the automatic reception of the effect reception and the non-display of the bar is more than the time from the occurrence of the first reception effect to the automatic generation of the effect reception. It is desirable to set it as a short time. According to such a configuration, when the bar display is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 292(d), it is made clear that it is not the second reception effect in which the effect reception is automatically generated at a relatively early timing. (If it is the second reception effect, it should have already been hidden.) Therefore, it becomes possible to enjoy the remaining effective period while being aware of the possibility of the first reception effect.

In this example of performance, when the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated is the third reception effect, the effect patterns (FIGS. 293(l) and (m)) for generating the third reception effect are not necessarily prepared. May be.

The first reception effect and the second reception effect may be sequentially generated within one symbol variation. However, when the second reception effect is executed in which the time until the automatic effect function is activated is relatively short, then the first reception effect may occur until the symbol is stopped, When the above-mentioned first reception effect is executed in which the time until the automatic effect function is activated is relatively long, after that, the second reception effect cannot occur until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, the person who recognizes that the time until the reception of the effect is relatively long due to the execution of the first reception effect is relatively early when the second reception effect occurs. It is expected that the situation in which the operation opportunity is lost due to the automatic generation of the production reception of is suitably suppressed.

Also in the example of the above-mentioned effect, the mock image of the operating means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different expectations. Then, the automatic effect function is not always activated when the first mode with low expectation appears (third reception effect), but the automatic effect function is always activated when the second mode with high expectation appears. (First reception effect or second reception effect) may be performed.

In the above performance example, when the first reception performance (see FIGS. 292(c) to (f)) occurs and when the second reception performance (see FIGS. 293(h) to (k)) occurs. , When the third reception effect (see FIGS. 293(l) and (m)) is generated, and after the effect reception is performed, the same post-operation effect (such as the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blend product)). Is to be done. However, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292(c) to (f)) occurs, when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293(h) to (k)) occurs, and when the third Different post-operation effects may be performed when the reception effect (see FIGS. 293(l) and (m)) occurs and when the effect reception is performed.

In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being enabled, the bar display is left and the operation is performed. We have made it possible to start the production, and to show the production situation where the production is not started after the operation. However, in terms of processing load, even when the player receives an effect reception by an operation, the after-operation effect is started with the bar display left, and the after-operation effect is executed by the same process. Is desirable.

[A precursor effect that also functions as an effect that suggests whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the operation is performed without the operation by the player. It is possible to generate post production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such an "automatic production means", even if the player forgets to perform the operation, the production reception is automatically generated, so that the operation opportunity is given to the player. It is feared that the feeling of tension when the video is played will disappear, and that it will be reduced to a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image flows.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" and an automatic reception effect that is the target of the "automatic effect function" can be generated. That is, in this case, the effect reception is not necessarily automatically generated, and accordingly, it is expected that the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is appropriately maintained.

However, even if a non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted by the "automatic effect function" occurs, it may not be operated as a result of erroneously recognizing that the effect reception occurs without operation by the player, There will be a loss of opportunities to receive staging, and there is concern that the interest in gaming will decline. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a special mode, the automatic reception effect is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, thereby providing the automatic effect function. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the loss of the opportunity to receive the performance reception without understanding whether or not the game is activated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the precursor effect is executed in the special mode, the automatic reception effect in which the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect is the target of the “automatic effect function” However, when the precursor effect is terminated and the reception effect (automatic reception effect) is actually generated (effective period), the reception effect is changed to “automatic effect”. It is made difficult to recognize whether it is an automatic reception effect targeted for the “function” or a non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the “automatic effect function”. For example, in both the non-automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect, by displaying the image of the same operating means as the operation target and the bar image having the gauge amount of the same length, etc. , It becomes difficult to recognize which reception effect is occurring.

According to such a configuration, if it is overlooked in which mode the precursor effect is being executed, after the reception effect is once started, whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated is determined. It is difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected to maintain a suitable feeling of tension until the production reception is automatically generated while performing the production that suggests whether or not the "automatic production function" is activated. ..

294 to 296 are diagrams showing an example of an effect that suggests whether or not a reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated is generated depending on the mode of the omen effect. Again, as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function is enabled (such as an automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state that can always be automatically effected), the example of the automatic effect function will be described. Since a reception effect that is not an activation target can also occur, the display such as "auto button is being set" is not displayed.

In FIG. 294(a), the hold number is in the state of 3, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, and the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

FIG. 294(b) is an effect reception (operation) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294(a) (here, the reach state, but may be the non-reach state). Shows a production situation in which a precursor production that suggests that is soon permitted is being executed.

Here, the aura effect shown in FIG. 294(b) is generated when the timing tg1 (see FIG. 296(a)) arrives, and a simulated image of the operation button 410 as the operation target is generated. It is to be displayed as an effect image (special mode) that moves in a swirling direction toward a location that appears later. When the precursor effect is executed in such a special mode, the automatic reception effect targeted for the "automatic effect function" is always generated as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. By this, it is possible to know in advance that the "automatic effect function" will be activated in the reception effect after that, during the period when the sign effect is performed. In the precursor effect according to this effect example, a display such as “auto button!” also appears, but this need not always be displayed.

FIG. 294(c) shows the effect situation (effect based on the result of the big hit determination) when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294(b) is performed and the timing tg2 (see FIG. 296(a)) arrives. In the determination, the first determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294(e) described later appears) or the second determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294(f) described below appears) are shown. That is, the reception performance in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is just started.

In this effect situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG (a model image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area and the operation button 410 is operated. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

And, as described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 294(c), the effect reception is automatically generated (the "automatic effect function" is enabled) when the predetermined timing within the effective period arrives without any operation by the player. The same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is performed appears. However, as will be described later, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 294(c), whether the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated has occurred, or the "automatic effect function" is not activated in non-automatic It is difficult to recognize whether the reception production is occurring. That is, in this case, if it is overlooked in which mode the precursor effect is executed, it may be possible to recognize whether or not the "automatic effect function" is activated after the reception effect is once started. Have difficulty. Therefore, while performing an effect that suggests whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled (a precursory effect of a special aspect), it is possible to appropriately maintain the tension until the effect reception is automatically generated. Will be expected.

Then, in this example of operation, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the acceptance of the effect, and the operation button 410 is set at a predetermined timing tg3 (see FIG. 296) within the effective period. It is assumed that the automatic rendering function for is activated. FIG. 294(d) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at the timing tg3, and when the automatic effect function is activated, acceptance of the effect is permitted. Thus, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set as described above is caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of changing the symbol, the "low-expectation mode effect" in which "a specific decorative member SDY (a shade accessory) operates and a chance!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 294 (e))" or "the specific decorative member SDY (blend product) is operated, and a high heat effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 294(f)). )” is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 295), whichever mode (FIG. 294(e), (f)) the post-operation effect is executed, , "The bar display showing the remaining time as the period during which the production reception is allowed" is not hidden but the post-operation production is started in a state where this is maintained. That is, although detailed description will be omitted, in this example of performance (including a performance part described later with reference to FIG. 295), the performance reception is automatically performed after a period (effective period) during which the performance reception is allowed occurs. The first reception effect and the second reception effect that are different in time to occur are to be prepared, and by checking how much gauge level remains at the time when the effect after operation is started, It is possible to recognize whether the reception performance is “first reception performance or second reception performance with a different time from the generation of the performance reception permitted period (effective period) to the automatic generation of the performance reception”. It is supposed to be. That is, usually, the first reception performance and the second reception performance are often different in performance expectation level. Therefore, it is possible to start the post-operation performance after recognizing the type of the reception performance. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately. Even in this example of performance, the above-described configuration described in the item of “after-operation performance suggesting the type of automatically-received reception performance” (“bar display” is not hidden and is maintained) Each configuration other than (starting post-operation performance) may be appropriately adopted.

Also, in this example of effect (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 295), the mood image display described in the item of “after-operation effect that suggests the automatically accepted operation target” is left. You may employ|adopt the structure which starts an after-operation production as it is. Further, in this case, each configuration other than the above-described configuration described in the same item (starting the post-operation performance while leaving the mock image display) may be appropriately adopted. Further, in this case, the configuration in which the post-operation effect is generated while the bar display is not hidden and is left may not be necessarily adopted and may be omitted.

On the other hand, in this effect example, while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294(a) (here, in the reach state, it may be in the non-reach state) is being performed, FIG. 294(b) is displayed. Not the special mode of the sign effect shown in FIG. 295, but the effect state in which the particular mode of the sign effect shown in FIG. 295(g) appears (the third determination condition (the later-described diagram) 295(j) an effect pattern in which an effect result appears, or a fourth determination condition (an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 295(k) described later appears), or a fifth determination condition (FIG. 1) and (m), there are cases where the effect situation) in which the effect pattern) in which the effect situation appears is satisfied).

Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295(g) is generated when the timing tg1 (see FIGS. 296(a) and (b)) arrives, and the operation button 410, which is the operation target, is used. The two simulated images are displayed as an effect (specific mode) until they approach each other and overlap with each other. However, in the precursor effect, the simulated image of the operation button 410 as the operation target is not necessarily used. Good. Then, when the precursor effect is executed in such a specific mode, a case where an automatic reception effect targeted by the "automatic effect function" occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, and a case of the "automatic effect function" There is a case where a non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the aforesaid effect, so that during the period in which the aforesaid effect is performed, in the subsequent reception effect, the "automatic effect function" is used. It is not possible to know in advance whether "" will be activated. In the precursor effect according to this effect example, a display such as “auto button?” also appears, but this need not always be displayed.

FIG. 295(h) shows the effect situation when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295(g) is performed and the timing tg2 shown in FIG. 296(a) arrives, and the operation button 410 is operated. It is depicted that the reception production, which gives an opportunity, has just started.

In this effect situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG (a model image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area and the operation button 410 is operated. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time during which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

As described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 295(h), a case where effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period (the "automatic effect function" is activated) without any operation by the player, If there is no operation by the player, the production reception may not be generated within the effective period (the "automatic production function" may not be activated). Although this is also described above, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 295(h), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a mock image of the operation button 410) and the remaining time when the effect acceptance is permitted. And the bar display indicating "" are displayed respectively, and it is difficult to distinguish them from the effect situation shown in FIG. 294(c). As a result, it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension until the production reception is automatically generated, while performing the production (the precursor production of the special aspect) that suggests that the "automatic production function" is activated. You will be expected.

In this respect, when the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated is generated, when the timing tg3 (see FIG. 296(a)) arrives without any operation by the player, As shown in 295(i), the effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated will appear. Then, after this, when the automatic effect function is activated, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set to allow the effect reception is generated for the effect. Will be made. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of changing the symbol, the "low-expectation mode effect" in which "a specific decorative member SDY (a shade accessory) operates and a chance!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 295 (j))" or "the specific decorative member SDY (blend product) is operated, and the intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 295(k)). )” is executed as a post-operation effect.

As described above, in this performance example as well, even if the post-operation performance is executed in any of the modes (FIG. 295(j), (k)), “remaining time as a period during which performance reception is allowed is permitted. The "bar display indicating" is not hidden and the post-operation effect is started in a state in which it is maintained. In this way, by confirming how much gauge is left at the time when the post-operation performance is started, the relevant reception performance is "reception reception after the production acceptance period (effective period) occurs. It is possible to recognize which of the "first reception effect and the second reception effect" in which the time until automatically occurs is different. That is, usually, the first reception performance and the second reception performance are often different in performance expectation level. Therefore, it is possible to start the post-operation performance after recognizing the type of the reception performance. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

However, although this is also described above, in this effect example, in the case where the precursor effect in the specific mode shown in FIG. 295(g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 295(h) are sequentially displayed. Even if there is, the production reception may not be generated within the effective period (the "automatic production function" is not activated) unless the player operates it. In this case, when the timing tg4 arrives without the player's operation, as shown in FIG. 295(l) and FIG. 296(b), the reception is performed without the automatic effect function being activated. A production situation (when a production pattern is selected according to the establishment of the fifth determination condition) in which the effective period as production is ended will appear.

That is, in this case, when the predictive effect of the specific mode (see FIG. 295(g)) is performed, the reception effect corresponding to the predictive effect may display the same mood image and the same bar display. However, there are cases where the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 295(i) to (k)) and not automatically generated (see FIGS. 295(l) and (m)). Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the reception production with a sense of tension.

In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 295(m), even when the effective period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being activated, the effective period ends and effect reception "Is not allowed, the "bar display indicating the remaining time as the period during which the performance reception is allowed" is not hidden but is maintained. Therefore, it is a reception performance in which the automatic performance function is not activated by confirming that a performance situation has occurred in which after-operation performance has not occurred even though the gauge remaining amount is "0". Will be able to be recognized, and it is expected that a decrease in the interest of the game will be suppressed. Although “?” appears in the diagram shown in FIG. 295(m), it may be configured not to cause any production change.

Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of effect reception until the end of the period initially set as the effect reception period (see FIG. 296(a)). The timings tg3 to tg4) shown and the time from the timing when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends until the bar display is hidden (timing tg4 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296(a)). Should be set as the same length of time.

Also in this effect example, when the effect after operation is started while the bar display is left, the stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

Also, the time when the bar display is left when the automatic effect function is activated (timing tg3 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296(a)) and the time when the bar display is left when the automatic effect function is not activated ( It is desirable to set the same time as the timing tg4 to tg5a) shown in FIG. 296(b).

Regarding the non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 295(g), (h), (l), and (m)) and the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 294(b) to (f)), sequentially within one symbol variation. May occur at any time. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may be generated thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the effect reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect, and then loses the opportunity of the effect generation in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated. It is expected that such situations will be suppressed appropriately.

Also in the example of the above-mentioned effect, the mock image of the operating means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different expectations. The first aspect with low expectation can be displayed in both the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated and the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated, but regarding the second aspect with high expectation May be allowed to appear only when a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated is occurring.

In the example of the effect, the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294(d) to (f)) that is generated after the special mode precursor effect and the automatic reception effect that is generated after the specific mode precursor effect (FIG. 295(i)). (See (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295(l) and (m)) that occurs through the precursory effect in the specific mode (see FIGS. 295(l) and (m)), the same post-operation effect (when the effect reception is performed). The operation of the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is performed. However, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294(d) to (f)) that occurs after the special mode precursor effect and an automatic reception effect that occurs after the specific mode precursor effect (FIGS. 295(i) to (k)). )) and a non-automatic reception effect (refer to FIGS. 295(l) and (m)) that occurs after the sign effect of a specific mode, so that different post-operation effects are performed when effect reception is made. You can

In the example of the effect, the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294(d) to (f)) that is generated after the special mode precursor effect and the automatic reception effect that is generated after the specific mode precursor effect (FIG. 295(i)). (See (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295(l) and (m)) that occurs through the omen effect in the specific mode (see FIGS. 295(l) and (m)), at the same timing tg1 from the start of the symbol variation. Although the presentation is started and the reception presentation is started at the same timing tg2, the respective start timings of them are not necessarily the same. In addition, as described above, each of these effects is executed in a different effect pattern.

The special effect precursor effect shown in FIG. 294(b) and the specific effect precursor effect shown in FIG. 295(g) may have different effect times. For example, with respect to the special form of the sign effect shown in FIG. 294(b), a relatively long effect time is set so that it is hard to miss this, and with respect to the particular form of the sign effect shown in FIG. By setting a relatively short production time so that it becomes easier, it is easy to overlook only when a precursor production that is inconvenient for the player appears, and it is possible to entertain the game before the reception production is started. Can be suppressed.

In the example of the above-mentioned presentation, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that occurs after the special aspect of the indication effect, the sword ornament 5001 is the operation target, and the automatic reception effect that occurs after the specific aspect of the indication effect ( 295(i) to (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295(l) and (m)) that occurs through the precursory effect in the specific mode (refer to FIGS. 295(l) and (m)). You may do it. Furthermore, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that occurs after the special mode precursor effect, the case where the reception effect with the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target occurs and the operation button 410. There may be a case where a reception effect for which is an operation target occurs. Needless to say, in the case of generating a reception effect in which the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target, the mock image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

In the above example of the effect, a part of the period in which the precursor effect (special mode, the specific mode) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, if at least a part of the precursor effect (for example, a part of the spiral effect) is left only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started and gradually disappears, the reception effect of the reception effect is reduced. Even after the effective period is started, it is possible to understand that the automatic effect function is activated in the early stage. It should be noted that, among the special effects and the special effects, only the special effects may be left after the reception effect is started.

In this example of performance, when a precursory effect (Fig. 295 (g)) of a specific aspect appears, a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" is always generated as a reception effect corresponding to the precursory effect. By doing so, it may be possible to know in advance that the "automatic effect function" is not activated in the reception effect after that, during the period when the precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 295(h) occurs, if no operation is performed by the player, FIGS. 295(l) and (m) will appear in sequence, and FIG. 295(i). About (k) will be omitted.

In the above-described effect example shown in FIGS. 294 to 296, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being enabled, the bar display is left and the operation is performed. We have made it possible to start the production, and to show the production situation where the production is not started after the operation. However, in terms of processing load, even when the player receives an effect reception by an operation, the after-operation effect is started with the bar display left, and the after-operation effect is executed by the same process. Is desirable.

[Reception performance that also functions as a performance that suggests whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the operation is performed without the operation by the player. It is possible to generate post production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such an "automatic production means", even if the player forgets to perform the operation, the production reception is automatically generated, so that the operation opportunity is given to the player. It is feared that the feeling of tension when the video is played will disappear, and that it will be reduced to a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image flows.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a specific mode, a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. In some cases, there is a case where an automatic reception effect that is the target of the "automatic effect function" occurs. That is, in this case, the effect reception is not necessarily automatically generated, and accordingly, it is expected that the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is appropriately maintained.

However, even if a non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted by the "automatic effect function" occurs, it may not be operated as a result of erroneously recognizing that the effect reception occurs without operation by the player, There will be a loss of opportunities to receive staging, and there is concern that the interest in gaming will decline. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the precursor effect is executed in the specific mode, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect is generated in either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect. Although it is difficult to recognize, by making it possible to display a display that makes it possible to recognize that the reception performance is occurring in the automatic reception performance within the effective period after the reception performance is started. In this way, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to be received from the production being lost without being able to understand whether the automatic production function is activated.

FIG. 297 to FIG. 299 are diagrams showing an example of effects that makes it possible to recognize that the “automatic effect function” is activated only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. Again, as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function is enabled (such as an automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state that can always be automatically effected), the example of the automatic effect function will be described. Since a reception effect that is not an activation target can also occur, the display such as "auto button is being set" is not displayed.

In FIG. 297(a), the number of holdings is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment, and the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

FIG. 297(b) is an effect reception (operation) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. Shows a production situation in which a precursor production that suggests that is soon permitted is being executed.

Here, the aura effect shown in FIG. 297(b) is generated when the timing th1 (see FIG. 299(a)) arrives, and the two oscilloscopes that use the operation button 410 as the operation target. The images are displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the images approach each other and overlap. In particular, in this example of performance, it is kept secret that the “automatic effect function” is enabled and the first image of the image that displays “relief” indicating that the “automatic effect function” is enabled. It is adapted to be displayed as an effect (a specific mode) until the second mood image displayed as "dokidoki" approaches each other and overlaps. When the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297(b) appears, as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated and the "automatic effect function" are generated. Since there are both cases where the non-automatic reception effect that is not activated occurs, while the precursor effect is being performed, either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect is performed after the precursor effect is performed. It is difficult to recognize what will happen. It should be noted that, in this aura effect, it is not always necessary to display the image of the operation button 410 which is the operation target, and which of the automatic reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect occurs after the aura effect is performed. Anything that makes it difficult to recognize

FIG. 297(c) is the first mood image on which a display such as "relief" that suggests that the "automatic effect function" is activated is made as a result of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297(b). , Of the second image which is displayed such as "Dokidoki" where "Automatic production function" is enabled or hidden, the first image which is displayed as "Relief" is left, The production situation in which the second image is displayed such as "Dokidoki" is hidden (the first determination result in the production determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination (the production result shown in FIG. 297 (e) described later is Effect pattern) or a second determination result (when an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 297(f) described later appears) is shown. Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299(a)) arrives, and at this timing th2, the acceptance effect in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started. Will be done.

More specifically, as shown in the drawing, the first image of the image in which "safety" is displayed as a button image BTG (an image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area. And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which performance reception is allowed) appear. It is like this. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

In this respect, the case where the first image (safety) is displayed in the reception performance means that "the reception of performance is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the effective period comes without operation by the player (the "automatic production function" It is limited to the time when the "automatic reception effect" which is the same as when the player performs the operation and the same post-operation effect appears" is being executed. Therefore, by confirming that the first image (safety) is displayed when the reception effect occurs, it is possible to confirm that the "automatic effect function" is being executed as the automatic reception effect. It becomes possible to recognize.

According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297(b)) is being performed, the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated" is the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. It is possible to keep track of what happens after this, but when the reception effect is started, it is possible to understand that the "automatic reception effect with the automatic effect function enabled" is being executed. Become so. That is, in this case, until just before the reception performance is started, it is possible to appropriately increase the sense of tension by concealing whether or not the "automatic production function" is enabled, but after the reception performance is started. By making it possible to grasp this, it becomes possible to suppress the loss of opportunity for performance reception without understanding whether the "automatic performance function" is activated.

Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the effect reception, and at a predetermined timing th3 (see FIG. 299(a)) within the effective period. It is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. FIG. 297(d) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at the timing th3, and when the automatic effect function is activated, acceptance of the effect is permitted. Thus, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set as described above is caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of changing the symbol, the "low-expectation mode effect" in which "a specific decorative member SDY (a shade accessory) operates and a chance!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 297 (e))" or "the specific decorative member SDY (blend material) is activated, and a high-expectation mode effect is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 297(f)). )” is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this respect, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 298), whichever mode (FIG. 297 (e), (f)) the post-operation effect is executed is executed. The model image (button image BTG) created by using the operation button 410 is not hidden and the post-operation effect is started in a state where the image is maintained. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the post-operation effect is performed according to the "effect reception for the operation button 410". , "Relief", it is possible to recognize that "the post-operation effect is automatically generated due to the activation of the automatic effect function".

In this example of performance, as for the period during which the performance reception is allowed, as shown in FIG. 299(a), the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated and the performance reception is automatically generated at the timing th3. It will be terminated. Then, after that, in the case where the reception of the effect is not permitted, the post-operation effect is started while the image of the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is displayed, but the operation button 410 is used. The model image (button image BTG) is hidden before the arrival of the timing th6 at which the post-operation effect is finished.

According to such a configuration, during the period from the start to the end of the post-operation performance, the image of the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed. The period (timings th3 to th5) and the period (timings th5 to th6) in which the same image is not displayed appear. Therefore, even when the post-operation performance is started with the image of the operating means (here, the operation button 410) being the operation target being left in the display state, the image of the operating image is not displayed. It is expected that the feeling of tension due to having to confirm the post-operation performance before being performed is appropriately maintained.

On the other hand, in this effect example, after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297(b) is performed, the reception effect shown in FIG. 298(g) occurs instead of the reception effect shown in FIG. 297(c). In some cases, it is possible.

That is, in FIG. 298(g), as a result of performing the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297(b), a display such as "relief" indicating that the "automatic effect function" is activated is displayed. Of the image and the second image that is displayed as "Dokidoki" that is activated or has the "Automatic production function" hidden, the second image that is displayed as "Dokidoki" remains. , A production situation in which the first image is displayed such that "safety" is not displayed (the third determination result (production shown in FIG. 298(i) described later in the production determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination). An effect pattern in which a result appears), a fourth determination result (an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 298(j) described later appears), or a fifth determination result (in FIG. 298(k), (l) described later) Is obtained). Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299(a) or (b)) arrives, and the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 at the timing th2. The reception production will be started.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, a second image of a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (an image of the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area. And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which performance reception is allowed) appear. It is like this. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

In this respect, the case where the second image (dokidoki) is displayed in the reception performance means that "the reception of performance is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the effective period comes even without the operation by the player (the "automatic production function" Enable) and the situation where the "automatic reception performance in which the same post-operation effect that appears when the operation is performed by the player is performed" is being executed, and "effect reception does not occur without operation by the player". There is both a situation in which the "non-automatic reception effect in which the effect after operation is not executed" is being executed. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether the "automatic effect function" is enabled or not by confirming that the second image is displayed when the reception effect occurs. You will be able to understand and this will help maintain tension.

According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297(b)) is being performed, and while the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect (see FIG. 298(g)) is being performed. In any of the above cases, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the "automatic effect function" is activated, and thus, a sense of tension can be maintained.

When the reception detection shown in FIG. 298(g) is executed as “automatic reception performance in which the automatic performance function is enabled”, the timing th3 (FIG. 299( (see a)) arrives, as shown in FIG. 298(h), an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated will appear. Then, after this, when the automatic effect function is activated, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 within the effective period set to allow the effect reception is generated for the effect. Will be made. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of changing the symbol, the "low-expectation mode effect" in which "a specific decorative member SDY (a shade character product) is operated and a chance!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298(i))" or "the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is operated, and intense heat!! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 298(j)). )” is executed as a post-operation effect.

As described above, also in this example of effect, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes (FIG. 298(i), (j)), a model image of the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is used. ) Is not hidden and the post-operation performance is started in a state where this is maintained. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the post-operation effect is performed according to the "effect reception for the operation button 410". , "Dokidoki" is used to hide the fact that the "automatic reception function is activated and the automatic reception performance is occurring" is hidden, and as a result of automatic reception of the performance reception, post-operation performance is performed. Will be able to recognize that you are in the situation.

On the other hand, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298(g) is executed as “non-automatic reception performance in which the automatic production function is not activated”, the timing th4 (FIG. 299( (refer to b)) comes, as shown in FIG. 298(k) and FIG. 299(b), the effective state as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being activated. (At the time of selecting the effect pattern according to the fact that the fifth determination result has been obtained) will appear.

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 298(l), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, the effective period is ended and effect reception In this case, the “image of the operation button 410 (button image BTG)” is not hidden but is maintained. Therefore, as a result of the fact that the production reception was not automatically generated while it was concealed that it was in the "state in which the automatic reception production in which the automatic production function was activated was occurring", post-operation production was not performed You will be able to recognize that you are in a situation. Although "?" appears in the drawing shown in FIG. 298(l), it may be configured not to cause any production change.

Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of effect reception until the end of the period initially set as the effect reception period (see FIG. 299(a)). (Timing th3 to th4 shown) and the time from the timing when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends to the time when the mood image is hidden (timing th4 to th5 shown in FIG. 299(a)). It is desirable to set and as the same length of time.

In addition, the time when the image is left when the automatic effect function is activated (timing th3 to th5 shown in FIG. 299(a)) and the time when the image is left when the automatic effect function is not activated ( It is desirable to set the same time as the timings th4 to th5a) shown in FIG. 299(b).

The non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 298(g), (k), (l)) and the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 297(b) to (f)) can occur sequentially within one symbol variation. You may do it. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may be generated thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the effect reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect, and then loses the opportunity of the effect generation in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated. It is expected that such situations will be suppressed appropriately.

Also in the example of the above-mentioned effect, the mock image of the operating means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different expectations. The first aspect with low expectation can be displayed in both the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated and the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated, but regarding the second aspect with high expectation May be allowed to appear only when a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated is occurring.

In the example of the above-mentioned production, the automatic reception production (see FIG. 297(c)) in which the first mood image in which "Relief" is displayed and the second mood image in which "Dokidoki" is displayed are displayed. The automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298(h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298(k)) in which the second moving image with a display such as "Dokidoki" is displayed are displayed. When done, the same post-operation effect (such as the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material)) is performed. However, the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297(c)) in which the first image of the image such as "Relief" is displayed and the automatic reception in which the second image of the image such as "Dokidoki" is displayed are displayed. When the production reception (see FIG. 298(h)) and the non-automatic reception production (see FIG. 298(k)) in which the second moving image with a display such as "Dokidoki" is displayed are received. Alternatively, different post-operation effects may be performed.

In the example of the above-mentioned production, the automatic reception production (see FIG. 297(c)) in which the first mood image in which "Relief" is displayed and the second mood image in which "Dokidoki" is displayed are displayed. With respect to the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298(h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298(k)) in which the second image is displayed such as "Dokidoki", the symbol variation is Although the precursor effect is started at the same timing th1 after the start and the reception effect is started at the same timing th2, the respective start timings thereof are not necessarily the same. In addition, as described above, each of these effects is executed in a different effect pattern.

A reception effect in which the first mood image with a display such as "safety" is displayed (see FIG. 297(c)) and a reception effect in which the second mood image with a display such as "Dokidoki" is displayed (FIG. 298). (See (h) and (k)), the length of the effective period in the reception effect may be different. In particular, in the reception effect (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)) in which the second mood image that displays “Doki Doki” is displayed, the first mood image that displays “Reliable” is displayed. By setting the effective time shorter than that of the reception effect (see FIG. 297(c)), the tension in the effective period can be more appropriately maintained.

In addition, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298(h)) in which the second mood image is displayed such as "Doki Doki" and a non-automatic image in which the second mood image is displayed such as "Doki Doki" is displayed. The length of the effective period in the reception effect may be different from that in the reception effect (see FIG. 298(k)). Particularly, in a non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298(k)) in which the “automatic effect function” is not activated, compared to an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298(h)) in which the “automatic effect function” is activated. By setting the short effective time, it is possible to more appropriately maintain the feeling of tension during the effective period.

In the example of the above-mentioned presentation, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image of the image such as “Relief” is displayed (see FIG. 297(c)), the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target, and the display such as “Thrilling” An automatic reception effect in which a mock image is displayed (see FIG. 298(h)) and a non-automatic reception effect in which a second mood image with a display such as "Dokidoki" is displayed (see FIG. 298(k)) Then, the operation button 410 may be the operation target. Needless to say, in the case of generating a reception effect in which the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target, the mock image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

In the above example of the effect, a part of the period in which the precursor effect (special mode, the specific mode) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started, at least a part of the precursor effect (for example, a predetermined effect) is left in such a manner as to be wholly or partially overlapped with the above-mentioned image, and this is gradually increased. If it disappears, it will be difficult to understand that the automatic effect function will be activated in the early stage even after the effective period of the reception effect is started. It should be noted that the reception effect (see FIG. 297(c)) in which the first mood image that displays "safety" is displayed, and the reception effect that the second mood image that displays "dokidoki" are displayed ( 298 (h) and (k)), at least a part of the precursor effect (for example, a predetermined effect or the like) entirely or partially overlaps with the above-mentioned image in only the reception effect. It may be left in the form.

In this example of the effect, the reception effect in which the second image is displayed such as "Dokidoki" may be generated only as a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function". That is, in this case, if the player's operation is not performed after the reception effect shown in FIG. 298(g) occurs, FIG. 298(k) and (l) will appear in sequence, and FIG. 298(h) About (j) will be omitted.

In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being activated, after the operation while leaving the mood image. We have made it possible to start the production, and to show the production situation where the production is not started after the operation. However, in terms of processing load, even when the production reception is generated by an operation by the player, the post-operation production is started with the left image, and the post-operation production is executed by the same processing. Is desirable.

In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, the precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first effect image in which “Relief” is displayed and the second effect image in which “Dokidoki” is displayed are displayed. Is the same as the precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect in which is displayed. However, under normal conditions (see FIG. 297 (b), as a precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first image of the image such as "relief" is displayed on condition that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. You may make it the production content different from that of the reference) appear. For example, if a flame effect that indicates that the degree of expectation is high is added to the precursor effect, “the degree of expectation” and “the automatic effect function is activated” are predetermined. Since the suggestion is made only when the performance condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the sense of tension when the effective period occurs.

In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when the effect reception occurs or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being activated, the operating means to be operated is used. The display mode of the image is changed, and the post-operation effect is started (or the post-operation effect is not started) in a state in which the mock image is displayed in the changed display mode, but the effective period (effect reception The post-operation effect may be started (or the post-operation effect may not be started) in a state in which the mood image is displayed in the display mode and the display position during the period).

The post-operation effect that is started while displaying the image of the operation means to be operated is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5, the sound effect, and It may be any one of the movable effects by the decorative accessory, or may be an appropriate combination of these effects. In addition, the first after-operation effect that is started with the image of the operation means that is the operation target being displayed and the timing image when the image of the operation means that is the operation target is hidden are not displayed. You may make it respectively perform the 2nd after-operation production started after that.

Also in the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, similar to the case of the above-described effect example, it is decided to dynamically display a mock image of the operation means to be operated and maintain the dynamic display. The post-operation performance may be started in this state.

In the above-described effect examples shown in FIG. 297 to FIG. 299, by adding a notation such as “relief” or “pounding” to the mood image, and changing the mode as the mood image, when the reception effect is performed. It was decided to make a suggestion as to whether the "automatic production function" would be activated. However, it suffices if the special image that is displayed only when the "automatic effect function" is activated is displayed within the period (effective period) during which the reception effect is performed, and this is not necessarily displayed as the mode of the image. You don't have to. In this case, it is desirable not to hide the special image displayed separately from the mock image, but to start the post-operation performance with the special image left. Similarly, with respect to the notation such as "Dokidoki", the post-operation effect may be displayed (or the post-operation effect may not be started) while being displayed separately from the mock image.

In the above example of performance, by making different displays such as "relief" and "pounding" during the period of reception performance, there is a suggestion as to whether an automatic reception performance in which the "automatic performance function" is activated has occurred. I decided to do it. However, instead of this, by changing the mode (light emitting mode, operation state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.) of the operation means to be operated, the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated is generated. You may make a suggestion as to what you are doing. Or, during the period when the reception performance is performed, both the display such as “safe” and “pounding” and the mode of the operation means to be operated (light emitting mode, operation state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.) are made different. However, in this case, one of the display such as "safety" and "pounding" and the mode of the operation means to be operated (light emitting mode, operating state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.) In order to shift the gaze to the newly generated post-operation effect, it is desirable that the state be continued only and the other end the state and the post-operation effect be started.

In the example of the above-mentioned production, when the automatic reception production in which the "automatic production function" is activated occurs, "safety" is displayed within a period before the precursor production for the automatic reception production occurs. A specific display mode suggesting that a reception effect in which the first image is displayed may be displayed. In this case, it is desirable that the specific display mode is hidden at least before the reception effect is started, such as during the period from the start of the precursor effect to the end thereof.

In the example of the above-mentioned production, after the specific image (throttle) that once indicates that the "automatic production function" may not be activated within the period during which the precursor effect is being performed is displayed, The reception effect may be started by changing to the special image (safety) that has been hidden until then. Even with such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is activated within the period in which the precursor effect is being performed, and the feeling of tension when the effective period occurs is preferably maintained. Will be able to.

[Improvement of performance using automatic performance function]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the operation is performed without the operation by the player. It is possible to generate post production. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is devised to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 by creating a novel performance using such an "automatic production function". I have to.

FIG. 300 is a diagram for explaining a novel performance using the automatic performance function. More specifically, a reception effect is generated based on the number of holdings (0 to 3) that maintains an unexecuted state when the symbol variation is newly extinguished, or further an automatic effect function is activated. It is a distribution table of random numbers that is used for effect determination regarding whether or not. The total number of random numbers is “100”, and any one of these random numbers is acquired, and the reception performance is generated by referring to which of the above allocation tables the acquired random number is allocated to. Whether or not, furthermore, the production decision regarding whether to validate the automatic production function will be made. It should be noted that here also, a description will be given as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function is enabled (the automatic effect mode, or the gaming machine in a state in which the automatic effect is always possible).

As shown in FIG. 300, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the first effect situation (for example, the specified number) in which the number of holdings (just starting the game) is still small When the reception effect occurs within the symbol fluctuation (effect pattern) that has been digested when there is less than the number "2"), this is the "non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted by the automatic effect function" However, in the second production situation (for example, a situation in which the number is larger than the specific number “2”) in which the number of holdings is large (the game is continued to a certain extent), the reception production is performed within the symbol fluctuation (production pattern) that has been digested. When the occurrence occurs, the control related to the effect is performed such that the ratio becomes higher than the ratio of the “non-automatic reception effect which is not the target of the automatic effect function”.

In addition, here, in the symbol fluctuation (effect pattern) started when the number of holdings is still small, to relatively increase the ratio of generating “non-automatic reception effect which is not targeted by the automatic effect function”. On the other hand, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of holdings is large, the ratio of generating the “non-automatic reception effect which is not the target of the automatic effect function” is relatively low. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even for the automatic reception effect targeted for the "automatic effect function", in the pattern variation (effect pattern) started when the number of holdings is small. While making the occurrence rate relatively high, the occurrence rate is made relatively low in the symbol fluctuation (effect pattern) started when the number of holdings is large. However, the degree of change in the occurrence ratio tends to be milder than in the case of non-automatic reception performance that is not subject to the "automatic production function", and when this occurs, when the reception performance occurs The proportion of "non-automatic reception performances that are not subject to the performance function" is reduced as the number of holdings increases.

According to such a configuration, when the number of holdings is small, the ratio of the non-automatic reception effect rather than the automatic reception effect when the reception effect occurs is higher than when the number is large. Therefore, when the game has just started and the number of holdings is small, it is possible to increase the player's consciousness of participation in the game and encourage the player to be absorbed in the game. In addition, if the game continues to a certain extent and the number of holdings becomes large, the proportion of non-automatic reception performance will decrease, so another performance ( It will be possible to provide calm performance). As described above, by changing the performance related to the operation while the game is continued, it is expected that the user is less likely to get bored and the interest of the game is maintained appropriately.

Further, according to the above configuration, if the player is tired of the above-mentioned other performance (comfortable performance) and tries to quit the game, the number of holdings is reduced and the sense of participation in the game is enhanced. Since it will appear again, it is expected that such interruptions in game play will be discouraged.

It should be noted that an important point of the invention according to this effect example is to change the ratio at which the "automatic effect function" is activated by increasing or decreasing the number of holdings. To produce. Therefore, the occurrence rate of the reception effect may or may not be different between the symbol variation consumed when the number of holdings is small and the symbol variation consumed when the number of holdings is large. It can be said that there is a technical feature in how, when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation, the ratio at which the "automatic effect function" is activated for the reception effect changes.

For example, of “non-automatic reception performance that is not targeted for the automatic performance function” and “automatic reception performance that is targeted for the automatic performance function”, only for “non-automatic reception performance that is not targeted for the automatic performance function”, For the "automatic reception performance that is the target of the automatic performance function," the occurrence ratio is set to be different when the number of holdings is small and when the number of holdings is large. The occurrence rate may be the same at a certain time and in a situation where the number of holdings is large. That is, in this case, for the “non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function”, for example, the random number allocation shown in FIG. 300 remains as it is, and the symbol variation (effect) that is started when the number of holdings is small. In the pattern), the occurrence rate is relatively high, and in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of holdings is large, the occurrence rate is relatively low. However, with respect to the automatic reception performance that is the target of the "automatic production function", the same occurrence rate (for example, the value of "automatic reception function" shown in FIG. Regardless of the number, all are set to "20").

With such a configuration, a level that guarantees that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is performed even without the operation by the player (the generation ratio of the “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function”) For itself, it will be uniform regardless of the number of holds. Therefore, even if the ratio of occurrence of "non-automatic reception performance that is not subject to automatic performance function" is changed according to the number of holdings, even if the player forgets to operate, it does not depend on the game situation It will be possible to provide the security of the above, and a sense of security will be created.

Regarding "non-automatic reception performance that is not targeted for automatic performance function", a plurality of performance modes (such as different display contents during reception performance generation, different post-operation performance, different operation targets, etc.) In addition to the case where the non-automatic reception performance occurs in only one of the performance modes based on the result of the performance determination at the time of the pattern change, the non-automatic reception performance is sequentially performed multiple times in two or more performance modes. It may be generated in some cases. That is, in this case, the occurrence rate of the "non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the automatic effect function" means a rate at which at least one of the effect modes occurs within the execution period of the symbol variation.

Also, regarding the "automatic reception performance targeted for the automatic performance function", a plurality of performance modes (different display contents during reception performance generation, different post-operation performance, different operation targets, etc.) In addition to the case where the automatic reception performance is generated in only one performance mode based on the result of the performance determination at the time of changing the symbol, the automatic reception performance is sequentially generated in a plurality of times in two or more performance modes. There may be cases. That is, in this case, the occurrence rate of the "automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function" means a rate at which at least one of the effect modes occurs within the execution period of the symbol variation.

However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may be generated thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the effect reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect, and then loses the opportunity of the effect generation in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated. It is expected that such situations will be suppressed appropriately.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, only one of the "non-automatic reception production which is not the target of the automatic production function" and the "automatic reception production which is the target of the automatic production function" within the period in which the symbol variation is performed. Although it has been described as an example that occurs, the “non-automatic reception performance that is not targeted by the automatic performance function” and the “automatic reception performance that is targeted by the automatic performance function” may be sequentially generated. In this case, in the table shown in FIG. 300, the total number of random numbers obtained by adding the distribution value of “without reception effect” and the distribution value of “with reception effect” exceeds “100”.

Further, in the above-mentioned example of production, in at least one of the "non-automatic reception production which is not targeted for the automatic production function" and the "automatic reception production which is targeted for the automatic production function", the operation means to be operated is 2 There may be more than one. For example, when a random number value of “20”, which is assigned to “automatically accept function” when the number of holdings is “0”, is given to the first operation means and to the second operation means. On the other hand, it may be further divided depending on whether an operation opportunity is given.

It should be noted that the determination of whether to generate the "non-automatic reception performance that is not the target of the automatic performance function" or the determination of whether to generate the "automatic reception performance that is the target of the automatic performance function" is performed when the symbol changes. It is desirable to be executed as one of the effect determinations according to the result of the jackpot determination.

As described above, in the above-mentioned example of performance, when the number of holdings is large, “non-automatic reception performance that is not targeted by the automatic performance function” is hard to occur. In this respect, when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs in the situation where the number of holdings is large as compared to the case where the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs when the number of holdings is small, If the ratio of "automatic reception performance targeted for the automatic performance function" is further increased within the one symbol variation in which the "non-automatic reception performance" is generated, only when the number of holdings is large, "Non-automatic reception effect" can be made to function as an effect that suggests that "automatic reception effect" will occur (an effect that is suggested before the precursor effect for the automatic reception effect is performed). Also, it becomes possible to change the performance of the automatic performance function. In addition, as a method of increasing the rate of further occurrence of "automatic reception performance" within one symbol variation in which "non-automatic reception performance" has occurred, rather than increasing the occurrence rate of "automatic reception performance" itself, It is desirable that the performance condition for generating the "automatic reception performance" is easily satisfied in accordance with the performance condition for generating the "non-automatic reception performance" being satisfied.

Further, when the number of holdings is the largest (the situation in which the "non-automatic reception effect" is the most difficult to appear), when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, the one symbol variation in which the "non-automatic reception effect" has occurred An "automatic reception effect" may be generated in the interior. With such a configuration, the "non-automatic reception effect" can be made to function as a precursor effect to the "automatic reception effect", and this also makes it possible to change the directivity regarding the automatic effect function. become.

Depending on whether the "non-automatic reception effect" has occurred (effective period) or the "automatic reception effect" has occurred (effective period), a mock image or background image of the operating means It is desirable to have different display contents. In this case, of the display images displayed respectively when the "non-automatic reception effect" has occurred (effective period) and when the "automatic reception effect" has occurred (effective period). For at least the different parts, it is desirable not to hide them but to generate the performance reception while leaving them to perform the post-operation performance. This is as described in the example of "Post production". For different parts (such as images of the operating means) that are not hidden and are left unattended to generate a performance reception and perform after-operation performance, select “Automatically accepted operation target”. The configuration and other examples described in "Post-operation effect suggested by" may be appropriately adopted.

Regarding each of the above-described configurations and modifications related to the example of the effect (improvement of the effect using the automatic effect function), the non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function and the automatic reception that is the target of the automatic effect function. The effect may be applied to each of the above-described effect examples in which the effect can be generated.

[Prevention of wasteful use of channels by automatic production function]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited (for example, 32 channels), even if a special result is obtained in the jackpot determination according to the winning prize, the channel to which the sound data is to be assigned is selected. In a situation where there is no free space (when the number of free channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result cannot be assigned to the channel and cannot be output (or the sound that is already playing). It is feared that the interest in playing games will be reduced by forcibly stopping).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, a process for advancing a display effect according to a specific effect pattern in the effect display device 1600 and a process for allocating a sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel and reproducing the sound are performed. To do. Then, when the display effect on the effect display device 1600 progresses to the predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. Generates a reception effect for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.). As a result, when the effect reception occurs, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is maintained in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, while a jackpot pattern (a special display mode in the effect pattern) due to the symbol variation. The special effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation that appears is output in a non-suppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special effect may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound in response to the reception of the effect, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the channel usage situation is likely to be marginal. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special effect sound while eliminating the anxiety that "the channel may be full and the special effect sound may not be output". As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement of the game.

It should be noted that data relating to various effect sounds such as a plurality of BGM data is stored in a predetermined storage means, and various effect sounds are reproduced by being read from the storage means and assigned to a channel. Become.

By the way, when the specific BGM data (sound of “BGM playback”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is left assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppressed manner or in silence, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) being suppressed (the process of changing the volume initial value defined in the sound data and lowering it). In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to the player (generating a valid period for effect reception), a sound ("" It is possible to give an operation opportunity to the player (generate an effective period for effect reception) after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state.

However, as is well known, when the operation opportunity is given to the player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM playback" in advance so that the specific music is cued at an indefinite timing.

In addition to the process of returning the volume when the player operates, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction exclusively for reproduction of special effect sound" and this is changed. It may be possible to perform a process of reproducing. However, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in accordance with the content of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped by the symbol and the timing of the symbol stop, and so on, within the effective period. When the operation (effect reception) is uncertain (depending on the player) at which timing the operation (effect reception) is performed, if the operation (effect reception) is used as a trigger, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is newly reproduced. However, there is a concern that a so-called sound shift may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of stopping the symbols, and the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate. In short, considering that "the remaining time from the production reception to the end of the pattern change is also indefinite", the length corresponding to the indefinite remaining time is the timing when the production reception occurs. It can be said that it is difficult to newly allocate the BGM data (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) of the above to the channel.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data during normal fluctuation, the sound data during the first half of the super reach performance, the sound data during the second half of the super reach performance, etc.) are specified in time sequence specified by the respective sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Performs a process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, of the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When assigned to a predetermined channel in chronological order, it is assigned to the predetermined channel from a timing before the effective period of the effect reception within the specific effect pattern starts to be reproduced, and the effective period ends. After that, the allocation state for the predetermined channel is maintained and reproduced for a long period until the timing.

In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process of outputting sound in silence compared to other sections. When the data content that specifies that is performed is preset (stored as silence data), and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in a time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, There is a time-series relationship in which an effective period of performance reception occurs within a part of the section (special period). In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) is changed to the special period. The sound of "BGM reproduction" is generated as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with a period after the (partial section) ends (another section). Playback is performed in a non-suppressed mode on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

With such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of super reach effect, and super sound effect). Sound data in the latter half of the reach production) is sequentially allocated to the predetermined channels in a time series specified by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these, and volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a “suppression mode or a state in which sound is output silently (special period)”. In addition, when the player's operation is accepted in the thus-created “suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)”, special processing is performed in a non-suppressed mode by the process with high immediacy. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the "BGM reproduction" sound that is in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is irrelevant to the effect reception, "the state of being output in the suppression mode or the silence (special period). Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (a suppression mode or a silent sound output) is ended by causing the special effect sound to be mixed in with it. Since the data content of the other section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, it becomes possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide a production sound that does not cause a feeling of strangeness. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently, the special effect sound is not suppressed by the process of high immediacy triggered by this. While the reproduction is started in, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that.

As described above, regarding “BGM reproduction” corresponding to a specific effect pattern, a part of the section (special period) when viewed in a time series is output in a suppressed mode or in silence compared to other sections. The data content (silent data, etc.) that defines that the process of step 1 is performed will be set in advance, but in the "state of suppression or output in silence (special period)", the volume from the initial value is set. The volume may be lowered by the adjustment. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect due to noise or the like from a channel to which BGM data is assigned.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern is being reproduced, in a section (normal section) different from the special section described above. Also, the reception effect is generated for the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, the reception effect occurs in the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). When an operation by the player is received as an effect, one of the effect sounds in the reproduction state is stopped to output an effect sound corresponding to the effect reception, or in response to the effect reception. There is no choice but to cancel the output of the directing sound itself. In this case, a production situation that lacks excitement, such as when a big hit judgment is lost, such as "the production sound is forcibly terminated in the middle, or no production sound is played even though the production is accepted" appears. Therefore, the player side also has a consciousness that he/she does not want to generate such an auspicious production situation (a consciousness that the production reception should not be generated by an operation).

If so, there is a concern that the player may not be able to easily operate the game even though the reception effect is generated, and it may not be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, contrary to the player's intention that "I do not want to generate a reception effect", if I simply apply the above-mentioned "technology for automatically generating a reception effect", the interest of the game will decrease. It could happen.

On the other hand, on the developer side, in the reception performance with confidence and enthusiasm, no matter what the condition of the channel is, "the player will actively generate the operation reception to generate the post-operation performance. It can be assumed that there is a desire to have fun.

Therefore, as described above, in the above-described configuration, first, in a section from the time when the specific BGM data is assigned to the channel to the time when the assignment is finished, a special section in which the specific BGM effect sound can be output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state is provided. , There is a normal section different from the special section. Then, in the normal section, "non-automatic reception performance that is not the target of the automatic performance function" can be generated as the reception performance, and in the special section, "the automatic reception performance that is the target of the automatic performance function" is received. It can be generated as a production.

That is, in this case, in the "normal section in which the specific BGM effect sound is not suppressed or silenced and can be output in the normal mode", whether the effect reception is generated (by predicting the availability of the channel) Since the selection right is left only to the player, the reception performance will be automatically generated against the player's intention, such as "Please do not generate reception because there may be no free channels." This is preferably avoided (preventing wasteful use of channels by the automatic effect function).

On the other hand, in the "special section in which the specific BGM effect sound can be output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state", the impression that the specific BGM effect sound is out of the channel allocation and a vacant channel is created (viewed from the player side) Even if you feel like the channel is open) you will be able to have it. Therefore, it is possible to positively prompt the player to perform an operation while removing the anxiety that "the channel may be full and the special effect sound may not be output". Of course, even if the player does not perform any operation, by automatically generating the reception performance, "If the production reception occurs anyway, let's generate the reception reception by the player's own operation next time" Will be able to encourage you to.

FIG. 301 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such processing is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 301. In this example of performance, the special section is described as a silent section in which silence data is set, but it may be a suppression section in which data in a suppression mode is set.

As shown in FIG. 301(a), during a period in which a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the effect determination is being executed, at timing tm11, the effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being effected. The sound of “BGM reproduction” is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data over the entire period of the symbol change from the start to the end of the symbol change when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is executed. (Sound material) may be played based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol fluctuation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is May be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In any case, in the example shown in FIG. 301, one sound data (one sound) as the sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing tm11. Material) is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in a reproduction state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 301(a) and 301(b), one piece of sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state has a timing At tm14, a reproduction state is set in a silent section in which silent data content (silent data) is set. As a result, it becomes possible to output the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the particular effect pattern without any volume adjustment from the initial value, while the sound is output without being assigned to the predetermined channel. .

With such a configuration, in the silent section after the timing tm14 is generated, an atmosphere in which the sound of "BGM playback" seems to be removed from the channel is likely to be available in the channel usage situation. On the other hand, in the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, the "BGM playback" sound occupies the channel, providing an atmosphere in which the channel usage situation seems to have no margin. Will be done.

That is, although illustration is omitted, timing tm14 is generated for various sounds different from the sound of “BGM reproduction” (for example, notice effect sound, effect sound accompanying generation of effective period, winning sound, etc.). In each of the subsequent silent section and the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, they are assigned to appropriate channels and are set in a reproduction state. Especially in the normal section, multiple sounds are often output at the same time in order to excite the performance and to suggest that a game situation such as winning or payout has changed. It is difficult to know whether it is in use (whether there are free channels), and it seems that there is not enough room in the channel usage due to the fact that the "BGM playback" sound is always playing. The atmosphere will be provided. Further, the reproduction channels “00” and “01” are dedicated channels for allocating the above-mentioned various error sounds, which also reduces the number of channels that can be used as effect sounds.

Then, in this example of performance, when the timing tm12 arrives in the normal section where the channel usage situation is likely to be low, an operation opportunity is usually given to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.). Generate a reception effect. When the player performs an operation within the operation valid period A (timing tm12 to tm13) for the normal reception effect, the effect reception is performed as shown in FIGS. 301(a) and 301(b). As one of the post-operation effects according to the effect reception, "special effect sound A" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "08" and "09" in the figure) and reproduced. On the other hand, if all of the channels to which the "special effect sound A" can be assigned are in use at the time when the effect is received within the operation valid period A, one of the sounds in the reproduction state is forced on the way. When the channel is terminated, the "special effect sound A" is assigned to the channel to be reproduced, or the "special effect sound A" is not assigned to the channel and is not reproduced.

However, as described above, in the normal section where the channel usage situation is likely to be low, some players have the consciousness that the performance reception should not be generated. Therefore, in this example of performance, the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) that occurs in the normal section where the channel usage situation is likely to be low is referred to as "non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted by the automatic effect function". Is to be generated. As a result, only the player has the right to select whether or not to generate the effect reception within the operation valid period A. Therefore, “the effect reception is not generated because there may be no free channel. It is possible to preferably prevent the reception performance from being automatically generated against the player's intention, such as "Let's do it."

In other words, if the player does not operate the operation means to be operated in the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the normal reception effect does not occur (operation effective period A). ) Is ended, and no post-operation effect including the "special effect sound A" is executed, and effect effects thereafter are performed.

On the other hand, in this example of performance, as described above, when the timing tm14 arrives, a silent section appears in which the use status of the channel seems to have a margin. Then, when the timing tm15 arrives in such a silent section, by generating an in-silent reception effect (operation effective period B) that gives an operation opportunity to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.), While eliminating the anxiety that "maybe there is no vacancy in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound", the player is actively encouraged to accept the effect by operation. This is also as described above. When the effect reception occurs within the operation valid period B (timing tm15 to tm16) for the in-silence reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 301(a) and 301(b), the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is generated. As one, "special effect sound B" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "10" and "11" in the figure) and reproduced.

In this regard, the anxiety of "maybe the channel may not be available and the special effect sound may not be output" is removed from the silent effect reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example. In view of the state, this is to be generated as "automatic reception performance targeted for the automatic performance function". In other words, in this case, the player will no longer have the intention of "not generating the performance reception because there may be no free channel", so that the reception performance is automatically generated against the intention of the player. It is possible to reliably execute the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception within the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) while appropriately avoiding the occurrence.

In addition, in the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example, irrespective of presence or absence of operation by the player, until a predetermined timing tm15a within the operation effective period B arrives (operation. When the timing tm15a comes at the latest (when the automatic effect function is activated), the effect reception is always generated. As shown in FIGS. 301(a) and 301(b), while the "special effect sound B" is in the reproduction state as one of the post-operation effects corresponding to such effect reception, the "BGM reproduction" is performed. The relationship is such that the timing tm17 at which the sound “” changes from the silent section to the normal section arrives.

According to such a configuration, while the "special effect sound B" is being reproduced, the "special effect sound B" is confused with this, and the silent section of the specific sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") ends and other Since the data content of the section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, it becomes possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the non-suppressed mode, It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not cause discomfort. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is generated in a state in which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as silence data, the "special effect sound B" is started to be reproduced in a non-suppressed manner by the process of high immediacy triggered by this. While doing so, it becomes possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift in the BGM between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that. As described above, in order to covertly return the sound of “BGM reproduction” to the output in the non-suppressed mode, the above-mentioned silent reception reception effect (operation effective period B) is set as “target of automatic effect function”. It can be said that it is important to generate "automatic reception performance".

In the operation valid period B (timing tm15 to tm16) according to this effect example, in order to prevent all the channels to which the “special effect sound B” can be assigned from being in use, the symbols are changing. Execution periods of various notice productions are set respectively.

FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical characteristics of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) will be described in more detail.

As described above, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example is the normal operation within the period in which the specific sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) according to the specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm12 in the section, it is generated as "non-automatic reception performance not targeted by the automatic performance function". Although illustration is omitted, when the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs, a precursor effect (eg, FIG. 293(g)) suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player. However, it is desirable that the aforesaid presentation effect is executed as a display content different from the aforesaid presentation effect performed when the silent silent reception effect (operation effective period B) occurs.

When the operation valid period A corresponding to the normal reception effect occurs, the operation valid period A ends due to the effect reception accompanying the operation in the operation valid period A, or the operation valid period A Until the operation valid period A ends without any operation being performed and no effect reception has occurred, for example, the mode (or another example thereof) described with reference to FIGS. 293(h) and (l) For example, an image prompting an operation or an image showing the remaining time is displayed. Then, when the operation is performed within the operation valid period A and the effect reception is generated, in addition to outputting the "special effect sound A" as one of the post-operation effects, FIG. 293(j), (k) ), another post-operation effect is further executed in the mode (or another example thereof) described with reference to FIG. When the post-operation performance is performed in stages, it is desirable to first output the "special effect sound A" first. On the other hand, when the operation valid period A is ended without any operation being performed within the operation valid period A and the production reception is not generated, for example, the mode described with reference to FIG. In another example), the effect situation will appear after the operation valid period A ends.

Here, the in-normal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example is set as a period from timing tm12 to timing tm13 when "time Ta" has elapsed, and the in-normal reception effect (operation effective period) is set. When the effect reception is generated in A), the "special effect sound A" is output for "time Tc" longer than "time Ta".

That is, in this case, even when the player's operation is performed immediately after the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs at timing tm12 and the effect reception occurs, the "special effect sound A" is generated. As shown in FIG. 302(a), channels are assigned and output until timing tm13a after timing tm13. On the other hand, when the player's operation is performed immediately before the timing tm13 at which the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) ends and the effect reception occurs, the "special effect sound A" is as shown in FIG. ), the signal is assigned to the channel and output until the timing tm13b which is delayed.

According to such a configuration, the "special effect sound A" according to the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) is distributed over the channel, which is more than twice as wide as the operation valid period A, such as the timings tm12 to tm13b. It can be understood that it can be used. This means that at timings tm12 to tm13b, at least four channels (BGM by stereo, special effect sound A by stereo) can be used, and the empty channels have no margin.

In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 302 and 303, in the normal reception effect according to the example of the effect, the “time Ta” as the operation effective period A is changed to a later-described silent reception operation (operation effective period B). ) Is set to a time shorter than "time Tb". As a result, the time (timing tm12 to tm13b) until the output of the "special effect sound A" is completed can be relatively shortened, and as a result, the effect sound associated with the normal reception effect is generated. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation where there are not enough channels. In addition, by making the time as the operation effective period A relatively short in this way, it seems that there is not much room in the vacant channels, and during the period when the automatic effect function cannot be activated, It is also possible to create a dramatic effect that urges you to select whether or not to operate.

In this example of performance, the output of the "special effect sound A" is finished at the latest before the timing tm14 of switching to the silent section arrives (Fig. 302(a), ( See b)). In this regard, according to the above-described configuration in which the timings tm12 to tm13b are relatively shortened, while maintaining the relationship between the timings tm13b and tm14, there is no sound at a relatively early stage after the in-normal reception effect is generated. It is also possible to allow the section to appear, and it is possible to suitably eliminate the dramatic extension.

FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) will be described in more detail.

As described above, the in-normal reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is silent during a period in which specific sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm15 in the section, the "automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function" is generated.

As described above, although illustration is omitted, a precursor effect suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs (for example, FIG. 292 ( Refer to b)).

In this regard, although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, the predetermined timing is also used when the pattern variation is performed in a predetermined performance pattern different from the specific performance pattern based on the result of the performance determination. When comes, BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern can be output in a suppressed manner or in silence. However, when a "period of suppression or silent output" is generated in the predetermined effect pattern, no reception effect is generated even if a predetermined time (a fixed period) has elapsed from the occurrence of the period. Thus, production progress is performed to return the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") to the production state that is output in a non-suppressed manner.

In view of the pachinko machine 1 in which such an effect development (predetermined effect pattern) can appear, the above-mentioned precursor effect (for example, the figure 292(b)), by starting after the timing tm14 when the silent section appears, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the reception effect occurs at the time when the silent section appears, and the tension is increased. It is desirable to maintain the feeling. Further, at this time, it is desirable that the production progress in which the reception effect occurs in the silent section has a higher degree of expectation than the production progress in which the reception effect does not occur in the silent section.

By the way, in the above-mentioned predetermined effect pattern, the method of outputting the BGM data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) in a suppressed manner or silent is not limited to the method of setting the data content (volume initial value) itself in the suppressed manner or silent. Instead, this may be realized by adjusting the volume from the initial value. That is, in the predetermined effect pattern, the reception effect cannot be generated while the BGM data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) is being output in the suppression mode or in silence, and the BGM data (of “BGM reproduction”) is not generated. Sound) is output in a non-suppressing manner, the timing for returning to the production state is not indefinite, and is set in advance. Therefore, even when the volume adjustment from the initial value is performed, the above-mentioned sound deviation or the like occurs. There is no inconvenience.

Then, as shown in FIG. 303(a), if the operation valid period B corresponding to the in-silent reception effect is generated, the effect reception due to the operation in the operation effective period B is generated. Until the operation valid period B ends, or until the operation valid period B ends due to automatic generation of an effect reception without performing an operation within the operation valid period B, for example, FIG. 292(c). , (D), or the like (or another example thereof) or the like, an image prompting an operation, an image showing the remaining time, or the like is displayed.

Here, the in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is set as a period from timing tm15 to timing tm16 when "time Tb" has elapsed, and the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period). When the effect reception is generated in B), the "special effect sound B" is output for "time Td" longer than "time Tb".

That is, in this case, the "special effect sound B" is generated even when the player's operation is performed and the effect reception is generated immediately after the in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs at the timing tm15. As shown in FIG. 303(a), the signals are assigned to the channels and output until the timing tm17a after the timing tm17 when the normal section is restored. On the other hand, at the timing tm15a (timing when a specific time (<time Tb) has elapsed since the operation effective period B occurred) in the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) when the automatic effect function is activated. When the effect reception is automatically generated, the “special effect sound B” is assigned to the channel and output until the timing tm17b which is delayed, as shown in FIG. 303(b).

By the way, the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the effect does not include the setting process by the player in the "automatic effect mode", and the operation by the player when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs. If there is not, the "automatic effect function" is always activated at timing tm15a to automatically generate the effect reception. Therefore, although the in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B) itself occurs as a period that can be continued from the timing tm15 to the timing tm16, substantially only the timing tm15 to the timing tm15a is continued. It can be said that it is a period when it is not profitable. That is, in this case, the effect reception is unlikely to occur within the period from the timing tm15a to the timing tm16, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the effect, such a camouflaged period (timing tm15a to tm16). The intention reception effect (operation valid period B) is generated during a silent period as a longer period (timing tm15 to tm16).

According to such a configuration, unlike the case of the above-described normal reception effect (operation valid period A), there is a margin in both the number of empty channels and the remaining time as the operation valid time B. It is possible to give an operation opportunity to the player in an atmosphere with a sense of security, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In order to make the remaining time as the operation valid time B appear to have a margin, the gauge amount required for the bar display indicating the remaining time of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) is set to the full value at the timing tm15. After being displayed as the tongue state, it is desirable to display so as to decrease in a mode (speed) in which it becomes 0 as the timing tm16 arrives. Further, in this case, since the timing tm15a arrives and the effect reception is automatically generated in a state where the gauge amount related to the bar display is left, the modes (or, (e) and (f) shown in FIG. As in another example), the bar display is not hidden, and the "special effect sound B" is started to be output while it is continuously displayed, whereby the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) It is desirable to be able to recognize that the "automatic effect function" has been activated. The bar display left in this way is hidden while the "special effect sound B" is in the output state.

Further, according to such a configuration, the operation valid time B can be substantially shortened compared to the time recognized by the player (remaining time shown by the bar display). For example, if there is a case where an operation is performed by the player immediately before the timing tm16 at which the in-silent reception effect (operation valid period B) ends, the effect reception may occur. Will be assigned to the channel and output until the timing tm17c, which is further delayed, as shown in FIG. 303(c). Then, there is a possibility that the "special effect sound B" corresponding to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) can use the channel over an extremely wide range such as timings tm15 to tm17c, and that much. It can be understood that only the free channel margin is lost.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as described above, the operation valid time B is substantially shortened with respect to the time (timing tm15 to tm16) recognized by the player (timing tm15 to tm15a). By doing so, a period during which the "special effect sound B" corresponding to the in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B) can use the channel is shown from the range (timing tm15 to tm17c) shown in FIG. 303(c). The range can be narrowed to the range (timing tm15 to tm17b) indicated by 303(b), and the empty channel can be provided with a margin accordingly.

However, in the example of the above-mentioned production, even when the in-silence reception production (operation effective period B) is regarded as a substantially shortened period (specific time from timing tm15 to timing tm15a), This is set as a time longer than the time Ta set as the internal reception effect (operation valid period A). It is important to adopt such a configuration in order to create a comfortable atmosphere in which the number of empty channels and the remaining time as the operation effective time B seem to have a margin. You can say that.

Further, in the above-described effect example of the silent section, “a feeling of strangeness caused by not returning the sound of “BGM reproduction” when the operation by the player is accepted as a non-suppressed mode and returning it after a predetermined time” is further enhanced. In order to make it difficult to remember, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound B to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. With such a configuration, while attention is paid to the special effect sound B having a large initial volume value, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section.

In addition, in the example of the effect on the silent section, the special effect sound B is generated based on the effect reception, but only when the specific effect condition according to the variation pattern or the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. The special effect sound B may be generated based on the reception of the effect. Even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation effective period is generated at the timing tm15, and when the effect is received within the operation effective period, the predetermined period is determined based on the effect received. Play the sound effect (such as failure sound effect). Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly switched to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the point to be shifted to is similar to that in the case of the above-described effect example.

However, instead of this, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the reproduction time is set shorter than when the special effect sound is set to the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound is generated. The sound of the BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section after the reproduction of the sound) is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end.

Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the sound of BGM reproduction is not returned to the reproduction state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner. Good. In this case, at timing tm14, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be set as an empty channel.

In addition, when the special effect sound B is generated, the display change and the movable effect of operating the predetermined movable body are performed together based on the effect reception so that the degree of attention to the sound of the BGM reproduction is reduced. It is desirable to secretly shift the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. In this case, when the special effect sound A is generated, it is preferable that only the display change occurs based on the effect reception, and the movable effect that operates the predetermined movable body is not executed.

Further, in the example of the above-described effect, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently in a part of the section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a more suppressed manner than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. Anything will do. Here, the suppressed mode may be, for example, a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, or a mode in which the vibration frequency of the cone of the speaker per unit time is reduced.

Further, in the above example of the effect, the volume of the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is set by setting the time series period in which the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel itself is suppressed or silence is set. It is possible to create a suppression mode or a state of outputting silently (a special period) only by reproducing this without any adjustment. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel. For example, at the timing tm14, the sound of "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the effect reception occurs at the timing tm15a, the process of increasing the sound volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound from the specific value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) is not performed by the effect reception. . Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing tm17 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing for returning to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified among the predetermined effect sounds (failed effect sound, etc.) being reproduced, as in the above-described another example. The process of increasing the value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" may be set to a specific value when the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. May be performed (process to return to the volume initial value), or the design variation may be ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) from a specific value. Good.

Further, in the above-described production example, at least the period from the predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing tm14 to the timing tm17 is subjected to the restriction processing for making it difficult to generate a new sound allocation to the empty channel. Is desirable. As such a limiting process, for example, a particular game that has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation during execution, such as a winning prize sound, a general electric effect sound, and a volume adjustment sound. It is desirable to set a sound as a restriction target and not to reproduce the specific game sound that is the restriction target without newly assigning it to a channel.

In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is generated on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing tm14 arrives. It is desirable that the sound effect is not a music but a sound effect such as a sound effect or a dialogue, so that the timing tm14 arrives while the specific sound effect is being played, and BGM reproduction is performed. It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed in with the specific effect sound, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of the specific effect sound is ended before the timing tm15 (timing tm15 or before the timing tm15) at which the special effect sound B (or the predetermined effect sound) can be output. This is desirable in reducing the anxiety that the special effect sound B is not output.

In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the BGM reproduction sound is output from the timing when the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the effect sound be output on a plurality of channels before the timing tm17 at which the suppression mode or the silence state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound B are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sounds of the BGM reproduction with the effect sounds, and the sounds of the BGM reproduction are mixed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the normal mode.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described example of performance may also be provided with a setting process by the player in the "automatic effect mode". That is, in this case, when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated and the effect reception occurs when the predetermined timing arrives even within the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). . On the other hand, when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated when the predetermined timing before the timing tm15a comes. It is desirable to be activated so that performance reception is generated.

In the example of the above-mentioned production, the execution periods of various notice productions during the symbol change are set so that the number of empty channels does not become 0 even during the execution period of the normal reception production (operation valid period A). You may do it. The point is that the sound of "BGM reproduction" is continuously output in a non-suppressed manner, so that it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which an empty channel feels that there is no room. On the contrary, the number of empty channels may be 0 even during the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). In short, it suffices if the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state, thereby providing an atmosphere in which there is a margin in the empty channels.

In the above example of performance, the "special effect sound A" is assigned to the channels "08" and "09", while the "special effect sound B" is assigned to the channels "10" and "11". The "special effect sound A" and the "special effect sound B" may be assigned to the same channel.

In the above example of the effect, the sign effect for the in-silence reception effect (the operation valid period B) is started after the timing tm14 when the silent section appears. However, the aforesaid effect may be started before the timing tm14 at which a silent section appears, and the timing tm14 at which a silent section appears during the execution of the aforesaid effect may arrive. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide performance such as whether or not a silent section appears while the precursory performance is being performed.

In the above example of the effect, the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the silent reception effect (operation effective period B). In the normal reception effect (operation effective period A), the operation button 410 is executed as a reception effect, whereas in the silent reception effect (operation effective period B), the sword ornament 5001 is operated as an operation target. It may be executed as a reception effect. In this case, different image images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) are different during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and during the silent reception reception effect (operation effective period B). Since it will be displayed, when the post-operation effect is started with those reception effects, the mood image is not displayed as in the mode (or another example thereof) described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 287. Instead of this, the post-operation effect may be started with this being continuously displayed.

In the above-mentioned production example, in the specific production pattern, the normal reception production (operation effective period A) is generated only once in the normal section, but non-automatic reception is performed in the normal section. You may make it generate the normal receptionist production (operation effective period A) several times as a production. However, it is desirable that different post-operation effects be executed in these normal reception effects. On the other hand, in the silent section in the specific effect pattern, in order to silently output the “sound of BGM reproduction” in a non-suppressed mode while the “special effect sound B” is being reproduced, the in-silence reception is performed. It is desirable to generate the effect (operation valid period B) only once. Then, it is desirable that the post-operation effect due to the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the post-operation effect due to the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) have mutually different effect contents.

[Moveable production triggered by the establishment of a condition different from the condition of the symbol game]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when the game ball is received at the starting opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), the determination regarding the hit is performed. As a result, when a big hit is won, a big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be acquired is executed after executing a symbol variation in which a big hit symbol is displayed, and after the big hit game, it is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to various game states (time saving state, probability changing state). In addition, while such a symbol game is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a produces an effect according to the result of the judgment regarding the hit (for example, in addition to the effect pattern, various effect effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, etc. As described above, it is possible to maintain the entertainment of the game until the big hit game is played.

However, only by performing the effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back inside movable effect unit 3200, the specification) There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (sliding material, etc.) will become monotonous and it will be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operating rate for a long period.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, even when a different condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the variation in the design (the starting condition of the design game) is satisfied, the display content and the movement on the effect display device 1600 are movable. It is possible to execute a process that can change the behavior of the ornament. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode beyond the scope of the symbol game, and the monotonicity is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period. Can be expected.

Here, when a different condition unrelated to the determination process relating to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (starting condition of the symbol game) is established, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable ornament are changed. As a method of causing the above, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. To change the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any one of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted, but a situation in which the symbol variation is not temporarily executed (the processing flag shown in FIG. 167 is “0”, and the number of holdings is Is in a state of “0”), the above-mentioned different condition must be satisfied, and even when the different condition is satisfied in the situation, the contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 and It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable ornament.
-A technique that regularly executes a production lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuations, and obtains a specific result in this production lottery as the above-mentioned "establishment of another condition"-Cumulative number of operations for a specific operation means Is determined as the above-mentioned "establishment of another condition" when the number of times reaches a predetermined number. ・Time is measured by the RTC (real time clock) function or the arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a (or main control MPU 1310a) (for example, when the power is turned on). From the above), and the above-mentioned "establishment of another condition" means that the measured time reaches a predetermined time.

Generally, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is determined that another condition is satisfied, and a method of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decorative body is changed. Is often adopted. However, no matter which method is adopted, when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, if the display content or the behavior of the movable body is changed, until the change timing arrives. Since it is common to require a relatively long time (for example, at least several hours), it is possible to cause a change in the displayed contents or the behavior of the movable decorative body despite such a long time. If there is a situation that cannot be done, it is feared that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, RTC state) in which the movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set in advance as a start condition of the symbol game. Can be generated based on the establishment of another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). And, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it should not be in the original position even though it should be in the original position) and the specific state has not occurred, the pattern change When the corresponding restoration operation time comes, it is possible to start the process of causing the movable decoration body to perform a predetermined restoration operation, while the movable decoration body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if the predetermined restoration operation time comes, the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation is not started, but the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation can be started at the predetermined time within the specific state. ..

That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the specific state, a movable body abnormality is detected by a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. It is expected that the movable decorative body is restored to perform the operation in a specific mode (operation when another condition is satisfied) more reliably.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 304, an example of the processing content when the movable decorative body is operated when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 304, for convenience of description, “RTC state in which different display contents appear when the elapsed time from power-on is determined to have reached a predetermined time by using the RTC function ( The specific state) is generated, and the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state) can be executed”. As described above, the method for causing changes in the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. As described above, each technique described below can be appropriately adopted even when other methods are adopted.

Now, assuming that the RTC state (specific state) is in a state prior to the occurrence, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first sets the remaining time until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs. (Remaining time) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time and the RTC state (specific state) is generated, and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the satisfaction of the condition (the satisfaction of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol variation, and the flow of the game up to now is You will be able to have a sense of expectation that will change. At this time, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

In order to more appropriately enhance the sense of expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is caused to function as a production period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the production is performed. If a big hit is won from the time when the period (RTC state) occurs to the time when it ends, the production progress by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) ( It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling the special production mode).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, a condition irrelevant to the situation of the symbol variation is established even at timing Rt1 slightly before such timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before), Based on the satisfaction of the condition (the satisfaction of the first condition), the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is satisfied) can be executed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example, it is determined whether or not the timing Rt2 has come, in addition to the timing Rt2, by periodically checking the elapsed time from power-on. When it is determined that the time Rt2 has arrived, a previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decorative body) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. .. The "previous display" can be executed as, for example, a display such as "RTC state is coming soon" or a countdown display for timing Rt2.

With such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in synchronization with the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations result in a big hit determination. Since it will be suggested to the player in advance that it is not based on (no expectation of any big hit), it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the interest of the game due to a recognition error by the player. You will be able to.

In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at least during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. Therefore, the decorative design (effect pattern) is hidden so that the display itself is not displayed. That is, in this case, as the display contents on the effect display device 1600, only the display that does not show any degree of expectation (the display that does not conform to the pattern variation) appears, and the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. Since the processing for starting the game is started, it is expected that it is possible to more appropriately avoid the deterioration of the game interest due to the recognition error by the player.

Here, the "pre-display appearing at the timing Rt1" and the "movable body operation appearing at the timing Rt2" correspond to "a display not conforming to the pattern variation" and "behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation", respectively. To do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body occur regardless of the execution status (including the execution status) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the execution state of the symbol variation, the situation that the movable ornaments A, B, and C are not ready to operate (the movable ornaments A, B, and C are in their original positions despite the arrival of the timing Rt2). It is feared that the movable decorative bodies A, B and C cannot be sequentially operated even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation in accordance with the result of the big hit determination, the movable decorative body A or the movable decorative body B, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, A movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed. However, during the execution of such movable effect, the movable body operation timing (here, when the RTC state occurs) in the RTC state described above arrives. In some cases, it is not possible to use this as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the fluctuation of the pattern" at least for the movable decorative body in the middle of execution among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Can be assumed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the design variation arrives, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C but also various movable machines included in the pachinko machine 1 are moved. It is possible to perform a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the ornament is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined in this movable abnormality determination that there is a movable decorative body that is not in a normal state (abnormality determination), a predetermined amount is determined for the movable decorative body that is the determination target in a manner following the abnormality determination process. By performing the restoration process for performing the restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), it is possible to quickly restore the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Therefore, the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state described above may be reached while the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.) on the movable decoration body is being performed. If there is, it is not possible to use this as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation" at least for the movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of the restoring operation Can be assumed.

As the "restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation", for example, the start timing of the symbol fluctuation (the timing of acquiring the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation starts) and the symbol fluctuation It is possible to execute it as at least one of the stop timings (the timing to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) (to execute the restoration process based on the acquisition of the command). Is.

Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, first, after at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is identified by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed", the movable decorative body (the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B) used in the period is completed. , The movable decorative body C) is prohibited so as not to be used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the pattern variation side, so that the movable object operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration that does not conform to the symbol variation) It is possible to prevent the situation in which the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the side where the pattern changes.

However, at this time, even if the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated. In this regard, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, at timing Rt1, only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. That is mentioned above.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when there is a symbol variation (B variation (loose) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, “No expectations "Display not displayed (display from timing Rt1)" is not hidden at this point, and this is changed over a period until the timing Rt2a at which the symbol variation (B variation (miss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, the RTC state (specific state) occurs and the symbol variation is actually performed, but in the effect display device 1600, the decoration is performed. The effect pattern based on the design is hidden and only the display that does not show any expectation appears. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) progresses, It is expected that it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the movable effect according to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a.

In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (miss) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives (stops) (when the timing Rt2a arrives) , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)" that has been displayed until then is not displayed at this point. Then, the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol variation (in the figure, C variation (miss)) is started, depending on the symbol variation, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. The display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and notice effect is started as usual.

However, even if a new pattern variation (C variation (missing) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed in this way, "the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached. As long as the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially move) depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state, It goes without saying that the movable effect on the pattern variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, only the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game is performed by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol variation side. Deterioration of interest will be suppressed.

As such prohibition processing, it is determined whether or not there is a situation that should be prohibited at the start of symbol variation (C variation in the figure), and when it is determined that there is a situation that should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol variation (Figure In the above, C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibited target of the movable effect (at least the movable effect using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, in the middle of the corresponding symbol variation (C variation in the figure), "the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached, and then the movable decorative body is changed by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state Even if the “period until the operation in the specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C) ends” is completed, the movable effect (until the symbol variation ends) ( Execution of at least the movable effect using the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, or the movable decorative body C is not permitted.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing of causing a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) to appear is a timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. Is a concern. However, the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, but the production privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (If the jackpot is won from the time the RTC state occurs until the end, the special production mode is controlled. Etc.) does not occur at the timing Rt2, and since only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the symbol fluctuation first digested after the RTC state has occurred are targeted. It can be said that it is proper to make the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

By the way, until the timing Rt2 arrives (until the timing Rt2a arrives) until the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (miss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution is ended (stopped). ), "After the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It is also possible to envisage a case in which the “period until the sequential operation by C) is completed”. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display without any expectation (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. This is the example shown in FIG. 304, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) that is executed before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) is targeted for the RTC effect privilege. Because not.

Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, after at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is identified by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. "(Period until the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C are sequentially operated here)", the restoration process triggered by this even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes By prohibiting this (processing to cause the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not conforming to the pattern variation) The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be prevented from occurring in a situation that cannot be performed due to the restoration process on the pattern variation side.

According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is performed. The process that causes the change is prohibited, and the process that causes the predetermined restoration operation to be performed at the predetermined time within the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the movable body abnormality is restored by a predetermined procedure within the RTC state (specific state) without being affected by the above, and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode is executed more reliably. .

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the game is being controlled to the normal gaming state, and the symbol variation (A variation (lost) in the figure) according to the big hit determination is in the middle of being performed. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 comes. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display not conforming to the symbol variation, for example, a display such as “soon RTC state” appears on the background display on the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (loose)) is ended before the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs after the display such as "soon RTC state" is completed, and a new symbol Variation (variation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 is set to come when the symbol variation is in the process of being performed, and at the timing Rt2, as the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation, three movements are possible. Processing for sequentially operating the ornaments A, B, C is executed. The "display not conforming to the symbol variation" from the timing Rt1 is continued for a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (miss) in the figure) is stopped.

Although this is also described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, three movable decorative bodies A, depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, In the period until the sequential operation of B and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5′)”, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, This is prohibited so that neither the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, in the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (B variation (loose) in the figure) is being performed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( It is controlled as a period during which neither the display indicating the degree of expectation), the movable effect on the symbol variation side (movable body operation indicating the degree of expectation), nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is executed (No. One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 304, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expected) The movable body operation indicating the degree) and the restoration process on the symbol variation side are controlled as a period in which neither is executed (second limit).

It should be noted that the control at such timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both the effect display (display indicating the degree of expectation) and the movable effect (moving body operation indicating the degree of expectation) on the symbol variation side is not performed) It is executed even if the symbol variation in the period is not a loss variation but one that is performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit variation). That is, in this case, no expected effect is executed, and when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C reaches the timing Rt2a in the middle of execution, the big hit symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, as a player expecting to be in the RTC state, it becomes possible to enjoy the fun as a surprise-like production that exceeds the expectation. In addition, after the big hit pattern appears in this way, a big hit game state occurs while the three movable ornaments A, B, and C are sequentially operated.

Further, as described above, as for the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display of the decorative symbol is not changed and no expectation is shown), the symbol change which is being executed when the timing Rt2 arrives The display is hidden at the stop timing Rt2a, and instead of this, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state occurs is displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started in a state where a specific background (“in RTC state” or the like) is displayed, an effect display according to the variation pattern (expectation level is shown). Will be executed as usual. However, regarding the movable effect on the pattern variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, after the timing Rt2a arrives. Will be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, based on the result of the jackpot determination, even if the effect pattern in which the movable effect on the pattern variation side using any of the movable decorative objects A, B, and C is performed is temporarily selected, Although the liquid crystal display, the sound, the lighting of the lamp, etc. are executed as usual, the corresponding movable decorative body is prevented from operating.

Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, three movable decorative bodies A and B are moved depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. , C until the sequential operation is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5')", the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation (here, the start of the symbol fluctuation Even when the time, stop time) comes, this is prohibited so that the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform the predetermined restoration operation) is not triggered. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoring operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (miss) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (miss) in the figure). )) start time (restoration operation time) is reached, but at these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, it is restored to the movable decorative body. No processing is performed.

However, in the period of timing Rt2 to Rt5 (at the time of abnormality, timing Rt2 to Rt5'), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. Is determined. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304(f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in the abnormal state, and the movable decorative body A is operated in the normal operation mode based on the result of the determination. The process for operating (operation during normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (first position) and then in the predetermined effect position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

Next, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at a timing Rt3 after the normal operation of the movable decorative body A is completed. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304(f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in the normal operation mode. The process for operating (operation during normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

Then, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state at a timing Rt4 after the normal operation of the movable decorative body B is completed. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304(f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in the abnormal state, and the movable decorative body C is operated in the normal operation mode based on the result of the determination. The process for operating (operation during normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after the movable decorative body C in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304(e), when the timing Rt5 after the operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. The “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, when it is determined by any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that the abnormal state is present, a process for causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation Is feasible. However, while a series of movable body operations (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated) at the time of occurrence of the RTC state, a predetermined operation is performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that the restoring operation is being performed, it may be annoying, and there is a concern that the interest of the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for a movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body movements (here, three movable movements) when the RTC state occurs. The sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C) is not performed independently as a different operation, but is performed as a special mode operation including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. .. That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. In this way, it is possible to preferably avoid a decrease in amusement of the game when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 304(f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation of the movable decorative body A is completed. However, on the basis of the result of the abnormality determination, an abnormal time including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in a normal operation mode (normal time operation). It is possible to execute the processing for performing the operation (special operation) in the operation mode. Then, after this, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not operated again in the normal operation mode (normal operation), and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Similar to the timing after the normal operation of the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in the abnormal state, the movable decorative body C is A process for operating the body C in a normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

With such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state has occurred (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred Until the timing to operate comes, regardless of the situation on the symbol variation side, this will be left as it is in an abnormal state. When the timing to operate the movable decorative body B comes, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoring operation instead of the normal operation mode. The movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred can be restored while appropriately maintaining the effect mode when the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is generated. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as the operation at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state has been executed, so that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. It is possible to favorably avoid a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the symbol variation (in the figure, C variation (loose)) started at timing Rt2a is a sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It is started at an intermediate stage and continued until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is completed. Therefore, the start time (restoring operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (missing) in the figure) stop time (restoring operation time) and the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (missing in the figure)) come When doing, since the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration process is executed for the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304(f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the "special mode including the restoring operation", the "special mode including the restoring operation" It is only necessary to restore (return to the original position) the movable decorative body B by an operation mode different from the “mode”, and for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt1, only the display (for example, “soon RTC state” or the like) that does not show any expectation is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display has different display contents (for example, "RTC preparation state") based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2. You may switch to. However, even when the display content is switched at timing Rt2 and a new display appears, a display that does not show any expectation as the display content in the effect display device 1600 during the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a (symbol variation). It is important that the display that does not conform to) appears.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restore operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in the specific mode is set as the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the RTC state (specific state) occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 that are satisfied on the basis of the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, “Do not conform to symbol variation” It was decided to start "display" and "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not follow the pattern change". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function that does not conform to the symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "display not conforming to the symbol variation" or "behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation" May be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode (here, 3 when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached, depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state). It is forbidden to prevent the restoration process on the symbol variation side from being performed during the period "until the completion of the sequential operation of the two movable decorative bodies A, B, and C)". The movable body operation (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation) in the specific mode within the (specific state) is made difficult to occur due to competition with the restoration process on the pattern variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable ornaments A, B, C is started immediately before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the restoration process is set to the execution state. Among them, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and eventually the movable body operation timing within the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed. There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even in the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is advisable to prohibit this so that it is not performed.

FIG. 305 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 304. The restoration process is not executed", which is a difference from the example shown in FIG. 304.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 305, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timings Rt1 to Rt2), the abnormality determination (or the at least three movable ornaments A, B, C) (or , Restoration process) It does not execute itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display (“RTC state soon” or the like) that does not follow the symbol variation is made, this is restored. In no case, it will be left in an abnormal state.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 305, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, first, the three movable ornaments A, B, C are executed before the processing relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state is executed. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) is made as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable ornaments A, B, and C as a result of the above abnormality determination, it is determined that the movable body operation timing (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived, and FIG. The processing (processing regarding the movable body operation in the RTC state) described above will be performed with reference to. Therefore, when the three movable ornaments A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable ornament that is the operation target is individually executed again, and there is no abnormality. When the determination is made, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 304(e)) appears, and when the abnormality is determined, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 304(f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed before the processing regarding the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the processing regarding the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. After that, the second abnormality determination is executed before operating the movable decorative body B.

On the other hand, as a result of the above-described abnormality determination being performed prior to executing the processing relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that any of the three movable ornaments A, B, C has an abnormality. In such a case, the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed by delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is a situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started. By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the “special mode” described above. Become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 305(f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, “the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable ornament in a specific mode” It is assumed that it is determined that any one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality as a result of the abnormality determination when "is not yet started". Then, the movable decorative body that has been determined to be abnormal is maintained while maintaining the "situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started". Restoration processing will be executed for.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 305(e) and (f), as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal, in the RTC state. Although the arrival of the movable body operation timing is delayed (delay from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b in the figure), the period (timings Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) produced by such a delay is used. Thus, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal can be restored, and then the movable body operation time in the RTC state can be reached. After that, when the movable body operation timing in the RTC state comes, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 304 is performed.

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 305(f), it is assumed that it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 304(e). When the timing Rt5b comes after the three movable ornaments A, B, and C have sequentially finished operating in the normal mode, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, "a movable ornament that does not conform to the fluctuation of the symbol" Of "behavior" is ended, and the prohibition state (prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 305(g), when it is determined that the movable decorative body B has an abnormality when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing It is assumed that the abnormality is newly generated in the movable decorative body B after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after the restoration). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 304(f). After the three movable ornaments A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in a manner according to each determination result (the movable ornaments A and C are normal aspects and the movable ornament B is a special aspect), When the timing Rt5b arrives, the "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" when the RTC state (specific state) occurs is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration processing (restoring operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. The operation in the special mode is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the movement abnormality occurs during the movement of the movable body immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movable body movements (here, three movements of the movable body movement at the time of occurrence of the RTC state are performed). It becomes possible to appropriately execute the sequential operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and it is possible to preferably maintain the expectation that the RTC state has occurred.

In the example shown in FIG. 305, when there is an abnormality in the plurality of movable ornaments in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration process is sequentially performed on the movable ornaments in the abnormal state, and then the RTC state is changed. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence (in this case, three movable decorative bodies A, B, C are sequentially operated). In this case, a series of movable body operations at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in accordance with the increase in the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored). ) Will be delayed for a longer period of time, but it becomes possible to execute a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state in a normal mode. The restoring operation for a plurality of movable ornaments may be executed in parallel, and in this case, it is possible to suppress the delay time until the series of movable body operations is started when the RTC state occurs. become.

However, even in the example shown in FIG. 305, if the player sometimes feels that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body that is in an abnormal state, it becomes a nuisance, and the game is entertained. Is a concern. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 305(f) and 305(g), when the "restoring operation" is completed, the "sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, C" is executed (sequentially executed). By doing so, the series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs". It is made difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, a display (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 305(f) and 305(g) as well as the example shown in 304(f), during the period during which the restoration operation (restoration processing) is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period in which the movable decorative body B is operated in the special mode (during the special aspect according to the second abnormality determination). The display (error code, etc.) indicating that it is performing does not appear. Also, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is started, the timing when the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is finished, and further, in FIG. f) and (g), the display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is started after the restoration operation is finished. It does not cause a change in. These things also make it possible to see that a "series of movable body operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state" is being performed and perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. It can be said to be important in making it difficult to recognize.

In addition, in FIG. 304 and its another example, and in FIG. 305 and its another example, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. Not limited to, the movable decorative body (such as one or two, or three or more) that is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side, based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition). It suffices that the movable body is operated in a specific mode at the time of operation of the movable body in the specific state.

Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, movably provided Operation buttons 410, a sword decoration 5001, and the like, and a board-side movable decoration provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back inside movable effect unit 3200, a specific decoration member SDY (paranoid object) ), etc.) and may be used respectively.

However, for example, in FIG. 304 and its another example, and in FIG. 305 and its another example, as an operation means, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). When the frame-side movable ornament (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) that is also used is used, even after the timing Rt2a arrives, the frame-side movable ornament that is also used as such operation means is A situation may occur in which an "operation that does not conform to the symbol variation" is being performed.

That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body in response to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display that has been displayed until then is "display without any expectation (from timing Rt1. "Display)" is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol variation (C variation (disappearance) in the figure) is started, depending on the symbol variation even within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. It is also described above that the display indicating the degree of expectation of the presentation pattern, the announcement presentation, etc. is started as usual. Therefore, the frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is within the period in which such a new symbol variation (in the figure, C variation (loose)) is performed. Despite being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as an operation means depending on the effect pattern, A situation that may cause confusion in production may occur. In the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display (display without showing any expectation) which does not conform to the symbol variation appears. Even if a symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, the operation opportunity is not given within the period.

Therefore, even if the specific operation means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in the state of being subjected to the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operation means is operated according to the result of the big hit judgment. When the effect time for providing the operation opportunity has arrived, the effect display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means, Even if a specific operation means in the state of performing the specific operation is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being executed, the operation opportunity is originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to give appropriate suggestions to the person. Further, by not performing the operation reception on the specific operation means, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a failure or abnormality due to the operation performed on the specific operation means in the operating state. You will be expected.

However, during the execution period of the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display prompting the operation of the specific operation means is displayed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the interest in the game may be reduced due to the lack of progress in the production. Therefore, of the frame-side movable ornaments provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided, the sword ornament 5001 and the like), the operation effect within the symbol variation according to the big hit determination. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high occurrence rate should not be used as one of the movable decorations that can be operated at the movable body operation timing within the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high occurrence ratio of the operation effect within the symbol variation. When it is given, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the effect reception (predetermined effect corresponding to the effect reception) when operated are executed as usual.

That is, of the frame-side movable decorations provided on the side of the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 that is provided so as to be able to move (for example, vibrate), the sword decoration 5001 and the like), the symbol variation according to the big hit determination Of a movable decorative body that can be operated at a movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) by operating a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low occurrence rate of operation effects in the inside. By using the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) in a state where the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the movable decorative body ( For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect time for providing an operation opportunity corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is reached for the sword decoration 5001).

Further, a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably, a specific operation means having a relatively low occurrence rate of operation effects in the pattern variation) is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When it is used as one of the movable decorations that can be operated at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorations A, B, and C, It is desirable to perform an operation using the frame-side movable ornament (for example, the sword ornament 5001). According to such a configuration, when the special operation (see FIG. 304) or the restoring operation (see FIG. 305) is performed on any of the three movable ornaments A, B, and C, Also, it becomes possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the pattern variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected (delayed or the like) by performing these operations. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable ornaments A, B, and C be used as a board-side movable ornament. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility that interference with the movable decorative body may occur is eliminated, and the movable decorative body is provided on the door frame 3 side. It becomes possible to execute the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body in parallel.

Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body) in which the occurrence ratio of the operation effect within the pattern variation is relatively low. When the time required to complete the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation by 5001)) is defined as "specific time", any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot determination is executed. Even in the case, as long as at least the "specific time" has not passed since the symbol variation was started (the effect pattern was started), a predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration) It is desirable to make settings related to each effect pattern (internal operation opportunity giving timing) so that an operation opportunity for the body (for example, sword decoration 5001) does not arrive.

According to such a configuration, in FIG. 304 and the other examples thereof, and in FIG. 305 and the other examples thereof, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, within the symbol variation By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state Since the operation) is already completed and it is possible to receive the effect, it is possible to enhance the effect when the RTC state occurs without sacrificing the effect on the symbol variation side.

Further, as described above, considering that the normal production control is allowed only in the symbol variation after the symbol variation that is first digested after the RTC state occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, As for the operation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the pattern variation due to the sword ornament 5001), the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, while the RTC state occurs. Since the pattern variation that is first digested after that will have to start after this, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is delayed by the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ), it is possible to allow a margin to precede the completion of the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation.

In addition, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decoration bodies A, B, and C, At the time of execution, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is substituted for the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) or perform the restoration operation and then perform the normal-time operation as the operation. In this case, the "special aspect including the restoring operation" also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) in an operating mode different from the "normal operating mode". It suffices if it is sufficient, and for example, it may be the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001).

Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is the “normal mode”, the “special mode including the recovery operation”, and the “recovery operation after the operation. Even if the operation is performed in any of "a manner of performing a normal mode operation in a subsequent form", as long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) It is more desirable to make settings for each effect pattern so that the timing at which an operation opportunity is given does not arrive. With such a configuration, no matter which of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is performed in the normal mode or the mode when the abnormality is determined, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed only after the operation is completed. It becomes possible to give an operation opportunity to the user.

Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received as an effect, at least one of the three movable decorative objects A, B, C is operated based on the effect reception. You may make it possible to perform a specific movable effect. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the pattern variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (RTC) Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It is no longer possible to receive staging, and there is concern that the interest in playing games will decline. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required until the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is performed in the normal mode, the time from the timing Rt2 is a "special time", the big hit determination is made. Even if any of the effect patterns according to the above is executed, as long as neither of the “specific time” and the “special time” has elapsed since the symbol variation was started (the effect pattern was started) , A predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, each effect pattern (operation opportunity giving timing within) so that the frame-side movable ornament (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive) It is desirable to set the above.

When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration processing for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. It is desirable that the timing Rt2 arrives with the abnormal state intentionally maintained.

On the other hand, among the above three movable ornaments A, B, and C, the specific movable ornaments (for example, the movable ornament A whose operation sequence is early, the movable ornament which takes a long time to restore, etc.) When the abnormal state is within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament is prohibited, but the movable ornament different from the specific movable ornament (for example, the operation sequence is slow). When the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) or the movable decorative body that requires a short time for the restoration operation is in an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored to the movable decorative body. The processing (restoring operation) may be performed without prohibiting it. This means that, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) does not have to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A performs the movement when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed in the meantime, the sequential operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C can be executed in a normal mode.

Further, the timing at which a series of operations of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started after the RTC state occurs, and the operation of the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoring process for movement abnormality with less influence on movement production]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a), when the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state (more accurately, and when the specific state does not occur), it corresponds to the symbol variation When the restoration operation time (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol variation) comes, a process for causing the specific movable decoration body to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be executed. However, regardless of the status of the performance, if such a restoration process is executed, it is a humorous game, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol change" is set as "restoring operation time corresponding to symbol change". Then, as shown in FIG. 306, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where the specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state has arrived, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at least, performs each of the following processes. Will be executed.
-Based on having acquired the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation starts, the effect pattern according to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is subjected to the symbol variation. Among these, based on the fact that the process to advance the production/the change in the design is started and the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side is obtained (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the change in the design), Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, it is assumed that a "specific production pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the production pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the production progress according to the "specific production pattern that allows the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation" and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. There will be situations where the processes to be performed are parallel to each other.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, an effect pattern (a relatively high degree of expectation) that has a pairwise relationship with the specific effect pattern. A low performance pattern) is prepared. Then, in the production pattern having a paired relationship (production pattern of relatively low degree of expectation), even though the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, toward the specific timing tm2. The same form of effect as in the case of “a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation” is performed. It In this way, by providing two effect patterns that are in a pairwise relationship in terms of effect (effect pattern that causes a specific movable decorative body to operate and effect pattern that does not cause the specific movable decorative element to operate), at the specific timing tm2. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives), a predetermined effect having a directing effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the moving decorative object operates). Is made executable, and the enjoyment of the game is favorably maintained due to such performance.

However, after the symbol variation is started, even when the specific timing tm2 arrives, there may be a case where the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is still in the execution state, Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation in which it cannot perform a staging operation. That is, in this case, even if the above-mentioned predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the production progress related to “a specific production pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to operate at a specific timing tm2” among the production patterns, and a predetermined development for the specific movable decorative body. When a situation occurs in which the processing for performing the restoration operation (restoration processing based on the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) appears in parallel, irrespective of the restoration situation, the "specific timing tm2 is reached". The "processing for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament”, but in the following description, “whether the abnormal state is resolved, It is assumed that "a process of repeatedly performing a restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed until the predetermined upper limit number is reached".

More specifically, with regard to the "processing for causing a predetermined restoration operation to be performed on a specific movable decorative body," restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. It takes different time to be done. For example, when the abnormal state is recovered and the original position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable ornament, "a predetermined restoration for the specific movable ornament" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing for performing the operation" is completed comes at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored) As the number of times increases, the timing tx at which the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament” is completed is delayed and delayed. Then, at the latest, if the restoration operation for the specific movable decoration fails and the restoration operation has not been performed yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is performed once again, the specific movable decoration is deleted. By ending the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in the abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is finished before the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration situation. Like

In addition, when it takes x time to perform the restoring operation once for a specific movable decorative body, one design is made so that the relationship of “x time×n times<time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. The upper limit number of times n at which a predetermined restoration operation is repeated within a fluctuation is set, and the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended even if the upper limit number of times n has not been restored (restored). By doing so, it is possible to end the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation.

According to such a configuration, the production progress according to the specific production pattern that allows the specific movable decoration to be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decoration are performed in parallel. When a situation occurs, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored before the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, the specific movable decorative body is restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in the stopped state, it is possible to favorably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if the specific movable decoration is in a stopped state at a position different from the original position, some behavior may be triggered by the arrival of the specific timing tm2, or the movable decoration does not operate. Even if the lamp included in the movable decorative body may emit light (when the lamp included in the movable decorative body emits light when the effect operation by the movable decorative body is performed), it is possible to give a hope. ..

However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the above-described predetermined effect is being performed, the specific movable decorative body has a directivity as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined presentation may be lost. Therefore, with regard to the timing tx at which the "processing of causing the predetermined movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the timing tx may be ended before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It can be said that it is more desirable to keep the interest in the game.

As the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates “when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and when the specific display result does not appear, the operation is performed. It is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a manner that fuels whether or not a specific display result appears" when the specific movable decorative body is " When a player operates according to an effect received by the player's operation (or receives an effect but does not operate), "an effect that causes a specific display that prompts an operation by the player to appear" Can be illustrated.

Here, in the example illustrated in FIG. 306, at the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state. It is supposed that the normal state has been reached. In this way, even when the fluctuation starts (or the "restoration operation time" such as the last time the symbol stops), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation comes under the condition that the symbol is restored to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored (restored) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained until at least the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, timing tx) the symbol variation is ended and the next restoration operation timing comes. Becomes That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to favorably maintain the effect of the specific movable decorative object that operates. When the particular effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit pattern is stopped even if the particular movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the particular timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be provided with a movable decorative body that performs a multi-step movement with a more complicated structure, and such a movable decorative body has a longer time until the restoration processing is completed. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in the case of a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that has a paired relationship with this, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time period shorter than the time period required from the start of the pattern variation until the specific timing tm2 arrives (more preferably, the time period until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament. That is, in this case, each time the specific movable decorative body is brought into an abnormal state, it can be restored only in an emergency measure and in a simple manner, which accelerates deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It could be

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation starts. When the special effect pattern is selected on the basis of the command sent out, while the special effect pattern is being effected (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), a specific movement is possible. The decorative body is controlled so as not to operate and a predetermined effect (for example, effect display indicating whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation starts in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the production progress according to the special production pattern When a situation occurs in which the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed in parallel, at least while the special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped) Tries to continue the restoration process without ending it.

More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is eliminated and the original position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable ornament. Even in such a case, the restoration process is not ended at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process is performed on the specific movable ornament over the entire period.

According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, a restoration process in a more full-scale aspect (for example, a normal diagnosis after restoration is performed) is performed with the aim of performing the special effect pattern. Since it becomes possible to perform additional implementation, etc., this special production pattern will function as a production pattern for restoration/diagnosis, and will be carefully restored by the player as well. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent productions with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare the special effect pattern so that it can be selected only when the big hit judgment fails. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents on the effect display device 1600 should have a unique display mode such as “effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis. Please wait for a while”.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A(a) and (d), the timing tm11 arrives when the specific movable ornament is in the abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed as described above, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not ended and is continued even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the constraint that “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the pattern variation is performed despite the occurrence of the abnormality in the specific movable ornament” is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more authentic manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if the hold exhaustion is not interrupted and an effect pattern corresponding to a new symbol variation is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, next time The design fluctuation start time) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not located at the original position). Will be done. Then, if there is a case where a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and the failure as a specific movable ornament may be accelerated due to inability to sufficiently deal with the abnormality. ..

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is in a state of performing restoration processing for a specific movable ornament, as shown in FIGS. 307A(b) and (d). When the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) arrives, the restoration processing in the running state is not ended and this is continued in the form of crossing the next restoration operation time. .. According to such a configuration, even if there is a suspension during the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, "when there is an abnormality in the specific movable decorative body," Since the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed", it is possible to perform the restoration process in a more serious manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 307A(c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol variation being started when the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is being performed, the new symbol variation As a result, there may be a case where "a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) to (c), the timing is started from timing tm11 regardless of the status of the game or the performance (and the status of restoration, etc.) after the special performance pattern is finished. Regarding the timing tx at which the "processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably, It is desirable to end the process within a shorter time than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timings tm11 to tm12 (the time required to digest the special effect pattern), a specific movement is performed over a relatively long time until the time of timings tm12 to tx ends. It is possible to continue the restoration process for the decorative body.

In addition, when a situation in which the special effect pattern (restoration/diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (restoration/diagnosis effect pattern) is finished, Restoration processing is not ended within a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration/diagnosis), and the symbol variation (production pattern) is repeated three or more times (after one restoration processing is started, One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process extends over two or more restoration operation times.

In the example shown in FIG. 307A, at the timing tx when the "processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. The situation is assumed. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be restored, and the specific movable decoration body can be operated at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, despite the fact that the one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), the specific movable ornament is abnormal at the timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the symbol fluctuation is ended from the timing tx and the stopped state is maintained until the next restoration operation time comes further. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to favorably maintain the effect of the specific movable decorative object that operates. When the particular effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit pattern is stopped even if the particular movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the particular timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

In addition, in a situation in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific operation is performed each time the restoration operation time (here, the pattern variation start time) arrives. If the restoration process for the movable ornament is repeatedly performed, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. It is feared that amusement of the game will be deteriorated by repeating the restoration process for the body. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time reaches the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body is set to the abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number). Even if the abnormal state is not restored, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes thereafter.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (reproduction/diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed (started) by the predetermined upper limit number. , When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (restoration/diagnosis effect pattern) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special effect patterns and their One restoration process may be continued over the next presentation pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, it is not restored from the abnormal state even though the restoration operation time has reached the predetermined upper limit number. Even when the "+1"th restoration operation time comes, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is continued without being terminated. As described above, regarding the aspect in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set no matter how many times the restoration operation time comes while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable that the count of the above is treated as one restoration process so as not to be terminated so that the restoration process in a more serious manner is not hindered.

By the way, regarding such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back surface) provided on the game board 5 side is provided. In addition to the middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (slater etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. It However, of the frame-side movable ornaments provided on the door frame 3 side, regarding the frame-side movable ornaments that are also used as the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided and the sword ornament 5001) In some cases, it may be restored (returned) in a mode different from the case of the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body).

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the design variation is performed, the movable operation in which the operation opportunity giving effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed is executed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, "a process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 252(f))", "Process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 252(f))", and further "display for prompting an operation (character display such as "pushing in" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) Processing (see FIG. 252(f))” is performed. As a result, when the sword decoration 5001 in the state of being moved to the operation position is operated (here, it is pushed in) and the effect is received, the "specific decoration member SDY (shadow effect object) is received based on the effect reception. ) Or the like (a process (see FIG. 252(g)) for performing a production operation of the board-side movable decorative body) and a “process (see FIG. 252(g)) for causing a change in display content”, respectively. Become. Note that the board-side movable decorative body that is produced in this processing may be the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 306 or 307A.

However, the "movement of the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" in the operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. While the sword decoration 5001 can be executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in a normal state, the sword decoration 5001 is in a normal state with respect to the “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001” and the “processing for displaying an operation prompt”. It can be executed both at a certain time and in an abnormal state. Therefore, in the movable operation system effect pattern, even if the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state, if the player who saw the "display for prompting the operation" operates the sword ornament 5001 and receives the effect, The "process for effecting the board-side movable decorative object such as the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) and the "process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600" are performed. Not only that, in the movable operation system production pattern, even if the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration 5001 receives an external force by the operation by the player and the operation portion moves, which causes the abnormal state. It is possible that the problem will be resolved by itself.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 that is operably provided, a sword decorative body 5001 and the like) that is also used as operating means is provided. In the case of an abnormal state, a return process (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A, a process of applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position is performed. Restoration processing), at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the production is received by the operation by the player within the production pattern of the movable operation system". It is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decoration is aimed at the timing of the start or stop of the symbol fluctuation (more strictly, after the start or the stop). While the process to restore the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing such as the start and stop of the symbol fluctuation, but also a unique timing (during the fluctuation period) Of the above, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation) is aimed at an external force (operation by the player) applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) to eliminate the abnormal state. Since the processing for restoring (returning) the means) is performed, it is expected that the original position of the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) in the abnormal state can be quickly returned. .

FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of a process until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration (operation means). is there.

As shown in FIG. 308, the effect pattern of the movable operation system (the effect pattern in which the operation opportunity giving effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the period in which the design variation is performed) is executed. Therefore, it is assumed that the “processing of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration 5001 is located at the operation position, "process for generating a performance reception period for the sword decoration 5001", "display prompting operation (character display such as "pushing in", or performance reception period) When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and receives the effect (timing tm22) while the bar display indicating the remaining time of (1) is being executed (timing tm22), “a specific decoration member SDY (slave part etc.) The "processing for effecting the board-side movable ornament" and the "processing for changing the display content on the effect display device 1600" are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 308, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 306 and 307A is operated as the board-side movable decorative body.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 at the timing tm22 at which the production is received in this way, and the sword decoration 5001 is not returned to its original position. It is assumed that another abnormality has occurred in the body (movable decorative body on the board side) and it cannot be returned to its original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 and that a specific movable ornament has an abnormality, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable ornament. For the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the determination of the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 is accompanied by the specific notification sound and the display. It is desirable to perform at least one of the notifications. This is what the sword ornament 5001 is "placed within a reach (door frame 3) of the player", and if it is notified that this is in an abnormal state, restoration work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable ornament is "the one placed on the place (game board 5) out of reach of the player", and this is in an abnormal state. This is because, when the notification is made, nothing can be assisted as the player, and merely emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed can promote the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further speaking, in the example shown in FIG. 308, when the "process for effecting the effect of a specific movable decorative body" is being performed based on the reception of the effect at the timing tm22, the specific movable decorative object is abnormal. Although it occurs, the "processing for changing the display content on the effect display device 1600" is executed as usual to recognize that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After this, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration are both brought into the abnormal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 308, when the timing tm23 comes, the already-pending symbol fluctuation is immediately exhausted (for example, 0.6 seconds later) (beginning), and the new symbol. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 306 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. In other words, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is operated at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the pattern change, but the restoration operation timing (here, when the pattern change starts ), the timing "tx" at which the "processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament" is completed is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration situation). As described above, the process is ended before the predetermined effect is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, based on the fact that the restoration operation time (here, at the time when the pattern variation starts) has arrived for the sword decoration 5001 as well, "a specific movable decoration It is possible to execute a process of giving a driving force (applying a driving force) so as to return it to the original position in a manner that at least a part of the action is performed in parallel with the process of performing a predetermined restoring action on the body. Moreover, the timing at which the "processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is also within a time period shorter than the timing tm2 regardless of the restoration state (more preferably, the predetermined rendering effect). Until it starts).

With such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm2, the restoring operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since it is not continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of play when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 308, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is started and ended is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is started and finished. However, only one of the timings may be the same or both of the timings may be different.

Further, as for the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament”, as described with reference to FIG. 307A, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) appears. Not only is it possible to continue after the special effect pattern is finished, but also the pattern fluctuations that are in a hold state after the special effect pattern is ended are immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds) digested (started). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is crossed over, the processing (one restoration processing) is not ended but can be executed by continuing this. It is desirable that the “processing for causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 307A). That is, in this case, also regarding the “processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, when the special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is straddled. Although it will be executed in the form, between the time when the time required until the timing tm2 arrives after the start of the next symbol change is elapsed, it is ended regardless of the status of restoration. Become.

Also, with respect to the sword ornament 5001 as well, after this is brought into an abnormal state, only the special effect pattern (reproduction/diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for the predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis appears, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 may be continued.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable ornament and the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails. Therefore, at timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is advanced while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the abnormal state. Then, at the timing tm24, the symbol variation will be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force (not applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body within a period from timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (normalized) by, the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that the fact that an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable ornament within the period of timings tx to tm2 is an abnormal situation. Even in the situation of low reliability, even if a specific movable decoration is used, it is highly likely that it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable for doing.

In addition, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed. In other words, if there is a case where the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 fails and a notification is given each time an abnormal state occurs again, it gives a misunderstanding that it is the responsibility of the player that the abnormal state is not resolved. Therefore, the above notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) should be given only when the first abnormality occurs from the normal state to the abnormal state so as to encourage the repair work by the player. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are changed by the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation timing (here, the symbol variation start timing) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a particular movable ornament recovers from the abnormal state. Then, while only the sword decoration 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 308, the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is If the production is accepted by the player's operation, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality occurring in the sword decoration 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the player receives the effect of the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 by the operation of the player, the sword decoration 5001 is then used as the original. Driving force can be applied to return to the position (remain in the original position). At this time, considering that the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed based on the reception of the effect, the period in which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative object 5001 to the original position is performed (once The period when the restoration operation is successful) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended (the specific movable decorative body is moved to the original position). It is desirable to end it before it is returned) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the rare chance that the sword decoration 5001 that could not be restored by such an external force (operation by the player) has been increasing, the sword decoration 5001 is in the original position. If the process of applying the driving force to restore the sword decoration (returning operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is left as the original until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is finished. It is possible for the player to recognize the abnormal situation by continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return it to the position (re-execute the returning operation for the sword decoration 5001). It is desirable to encourage them to help. However, even when this restoration process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the returning process (returning to the original position) for the sword decoration 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) has succeeded. The sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration are both kept in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 308, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operation unit is set with respect to the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol fluctuation), the restoration operation timing (timing after the reception of the effect) using external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, although the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operating means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by the player, even if it is in an abnormal state, Since there are many opportunities to return to the position and various methods (returning only by applying the driving force, at least reverting by using the external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility that the game will be played will be increased, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

In addition, after the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state has been received by the player's operation, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 to the original position will start the symbol variation. The driving force may be applied to the sword decoration 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration processing performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the sword decoration 5001 is restored by using an external force (operation by the player), the processing is different from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said to be desirable for increasing the probability. In addition, the processing is to be executed in a simple manner such that the return processing is completed within the fluctuation of the symbol regardless of the status of the return, and when the return fails, a full-scale operation is performed at the next restore operation time. It is desirable that the restoration processing be performed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for that number of times. Despite this, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the pattern variation start time) arrives, the sword decoration 5001 cannot be newly started to be restored. Even when the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state is received by the player's operation at the timing tm25 after the operation-system effect pattern is started, the sword decoration 5001 is displayed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (stay at the original position). That is, as described above, the returning process after the reception of the effect is performed when the sword decoration 5001 that has not been able to be returned by the external force (operation by the player) has a high possibility of returning. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up. Therefore, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 252(f))", "display for prompting an operation (character display such as "pushing in"), and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. It is important that the processing (display) (see FIG. 252(f))” is also performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up.

In addition, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword ornament 5001 is pushed into the operating position (moves to a specific detection position), and when it is in the original position (to the specific detection position). When the operation means is provided such that the second operation opportunity may be given such that it is operated), even if the production reception occurs in the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, and the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs in the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, and therefore the possibility that the abnormal state is eliminated is naturally expected to be low.

In addition, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state to the original position after the sword decoration 5001 is received by the player's operation is not necessarily the production reception. It does not need to be executed on the condition that it has been performed, and may be executed after the production reception period ends, for example.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 304 to 308, the symbol variation start timing (further, the timing after the reception of the effect) is illustrated as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation, but the restoration operation timing is As long as the predetermined timing comes at least on condition that the symbol variation is executed, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. When the symbol variation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is stopped, and this start The restoration processing is ended until the timing tm2 in the particular production pattern that has been held down is reached, or is executed so as to extend until after the end of the special production pattern that has been held down, etc. Each of the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

Further, the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (reproduction/diagnosis effect pattern) may differ depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body becomes high occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur due to the increase in the operation frequency, so in the special effect state, the normal effect state It is desirable to be able to play the game so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (reproduction/diagnosis effect pattern) becomes higher than that in the case of.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body that is also used as the operating unit is in an abnormal state. When the above special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 307A, the abnormal state over a period until the effect pattern according to the next symbol variation is started. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body in. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a pattern variation start time) arrives while one restoration processing is continuously executed, the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is newly performed. It does not start, but continues the restoration process that is already in the running state without ending it. Therefore, it is possible to move the restoration object that is different from the movable decorative body that is the target of the restoration process. It becomes a problem at which timing to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body newly becomes in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307A, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 has a new restoration operation timing (next time) after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends. (The start time of the symbol fluctuation) is continued without being completed even when straddling. In this regard, a new abnormality occurs in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body between the timing tm11 and the arrival of a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or “both method 1 and method 2” or “both method 1 and method 3” is adopted to perform restoration processing for the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to do.

Method 1: At least when there is a relationship such that "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, while another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body" When a new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol variation) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed for the movable decorative body, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol variation) ) Has arrived, a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is newly started.

According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation timing (start timing of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, It is treated as effective for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process is not yet in the execution state, and the other movable decorative body is triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). The restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decoration body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation occurs in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously executed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early restoration of the movable decorations is expected.

Method 2: If at least "the specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as the board-side movable decorative body", one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) arrives during execution, at that time, the restoration processing for another movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) is not started, and a specific After waiting for the completion of the one restoration process for the movable decorative body, another movable decorative body (board side movable decoration) based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). The restoration process for the body should be newly started.

According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation timing (start timing of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, It is treated as effective for another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration processing is not yet in the execution state. In this regard, when starting the restoration processing for another movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body), it is arranged to wait until one restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early restoration of the movable ornaments is expected.

Method 3: At least when there is a relationship such that "a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as the board-side movable decorative body", one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) comes during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). It does not execute the restoration process for the other movable decorative body, and waits for the completion of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body before the restoration operation timing that comes after that. The restoration process for the decoration body is newly started.

According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body which is already in the execution state, and another movable decorative body which is not in the execution state yet. It will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for the above, and even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed. No processing for the abnormal state will be executed. That is, in this case, even if one of the movable decorative bodies is in an abnormal state while one of the movable decorative bodies is in the execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to sufficiently deal with the abnormality, and thus it is expected that the progress speed of deterioration of the movable decorative body is suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 307B and FIG. 307C for the mode (the above method 1 to method 3 etc.) when a new restoration operation timing (start timing, end timing of symbol variation, etc.) arrives during execution of the restoration operation. While detailed.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for convenience of description, a first movable decorative body (the above-mentioned "specific movable decorative body"), a second movable decorative body, a second movable decorative body, and At least the third movable decoration body, the fourth movable decoration body, and the fifth movable decoration body are provided. When only one of the movable decorations is not in the normal state, the movable decorations that are not in the normal state are the “first movable decoration”, the “second movable decoration”, and the “third movable decoration”. In any of the "movable ornament," "fourth movable ornament," and "fifth movable ornament," the movable ornament that is not in the normal state is a restoration operation time (design) corresponding to the design variation. The restoration operation (restoration processing) is started when the fluctuation start timing, the end timing, etc. arrive.

However, when there is a plurality of movable decorations that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, all of the movable decorations that are not in the normal state are collectively restored with the restoration operation time as a trigger. If the (restoration process) is started, there is a concern that it will not be possible to concentrate on the effect according to the variation of the symbol, which will be a nuisance.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this description example, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation has arrived, some of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state Only when the restoration operation time has come, the restoration operation can be started, thereby avoiding that all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. The restoration operation is realized according to the situation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 307B, the timing tm32 when the symbol fluctuation (first time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol fluctuation (second time) starts (restoration corresponding to the symbol fluctuation). When the operation time has arrived), an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body. Suppose that The "abnormality" here means that the detecting means detects the "abnormality", but the "abnormality" does not necessarily have to be detected. May simply mean that the “abnormality” is present (undetected state).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this description example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm32), the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, the restoration operations of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, and the fourth movable decorative body are started in parallel, but the third movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body are started. The movable ornament of No. 1 does not start the restoration operation and stands by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state from starting the restoring operation all at once, and the restoring operation in a mode according to the situation is realized.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third movable decorative body which is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32 waits for the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35). Instead, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. As a result, it is possible to restore all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state at a comparatively early stage, while avoiding that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. become.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the fifth movable decorative body which is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, the next restoration operation time (timing tm35) arrives. Also, the restoration operation is not started, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is completed. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoring operation in parallel in a combination that impedes concentration on the effect.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the second movable decorative body is ended before the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is ended. The "third movable decorative body" and the "fifth movable decorative body" do not start the restoration operation when the restoration processing for the decorative body is completed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the fourth movable ornament is ended after the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable ornament is ended. The third movable decorative body does not start the restoring operation and stays in the standby state until the restoration processing for the body is completed, and when the restoration processing for the fourth movable decorative body is completed, the “fifth The "movable ornament of" does not start the restoration operation.

That is, the third movable decoration body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the specific movable decoration body (here, the first movable decoration body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restore operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament). The restoration processing (restoring operation) is started after waiting for the restoration processing (restoring operation) of the first movable decorative body 1 to be completed.

In addition, the fifth movable ornament starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the first movable ornament and the third movable ornament are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoring operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and each restoration processing of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the completion of the (restoration operation).

As described above, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders the concentration of the effect) among the plurality of movable decorations, so that the pattern variation can be dealt with. It becomes possible to perform the restoration process while preferably maintaining the environment in which the user can concentrate on the performance.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, even though the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state earlier than the “third movable decorative body”, the “first movable decorative body” When the restoration process for "is completed, the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is started first. In this way, by not performing the restoration processing in the order of the abnormal state, it becomes possible to preferentially restore the movable decorative body with high production importance to the normal state, which is suitable for amusement of the game. You will be expected to maintain.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoring operation), the symbol variation (second time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol It is assumed that the variation (third time) starts timing tm35 (restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation). Such a restore operation timing originally functions to newly start the restore operation for the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to extend over the restoration operation time (timing tm35). ing. As a result, it becomes possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm35. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to perform the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time) The probability that the third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state prior to the timing when "starts" increases. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, even if the movable decorative body using the movable decorative body is started, the movable decorative body is restored to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to perform a production operation as a movable production using a movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, the third movable decorative body is the timing tm32 (when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at a timing tm31 before the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm32 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed (timing tm34).

However, for the third movable decorative body, after the timing tm32 (restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), and within the period in which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoring operation). Even when the normal state is maintained until the "timing tm33" which is the timing of No. 1 and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, similar to the example shown in FIG. It is desirable that the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which (3) is ended. In other words, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state where the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state at the timing tm33, but the other movable decorative body (first It is possible to start the restoration process (restoration operation) by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm32 arrived before timing tm33) that triggered the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. Therefore, it becomes possible to return to the normal state at an early stage. The details of the “restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm32” will be described later.

At this time, when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable that the restoration process be continuously executed so as to cross the timing tm35. Further, at the timing tm35, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, and at the timing when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body executed so as to cross the timing tm35 is finished. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament.

In this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrives, it becomes an abnormal state at the time when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) comes. Since it becomes possible to start the restoration process (restoring operation) for the "third movable decorative body" that has not been performed before the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration of high production importance. You will be able to return to normal from the body preferentially. The "fifth movable decorative body" is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoring operation) for the "third movable decorative body" that was in the normal state at the timing tm32 (restoring operation time). Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm32 is started. "Restoring processing using the restoration operation time at timing tm32 (restoration operation)" means the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament in the program executed based on the arrival of timing tm32. And a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable ornament, and a mode in which each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decoration body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decoration body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is The restoration process for the “third movable ornament” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the movable decoration body 5” is started. If the “third movable ornament” is not in the abnormal state when the restoration process for the “first movable ornament” is completed, the restoration process for the “third movable ornament” is not performed, and “fifth movable ornament” is not performed. It is determined whether the "movable ornament of" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is reached, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the “third movable ornament” is in the normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the “fifth movable ornament” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. Becomes

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, the “restoration process for the first movable decorative body” started at the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is “symbol variation (1 (Time) ends (stops losing) and the next time the symbol variation (second time) starts tm42” (the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived) and it is not finished and is still in the middle of execution In the above situation and when the timing tm42 arrives, the "second movable decorative body", the "third movable decorative body", the "fourth movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body". Is assumed to be in an abnormal state.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the "first movable decoration body" is not performed again from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm42, but the timing tm42( It is designed to be continuously executed across the restoration operation period). This makes it possible to restore the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm42. For example, when the symbol variation (second time) is to perform the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the symbol variation (second time) The probability that the first movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state before the timing when “starts” increases. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, even if the movable decorative body using the movable decorative body is started, the movable decorative body is restored to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to perform a production operation as a movable production using a movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration process is executed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm42). However, here, with respect to the fourth movable decorative body, the restoration operation is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body which is in the middle of execution, but the second movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are started. The movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body do not start the restoring operation and stand by in the abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state from starting the restoring operation all at once, and the restoring operation in a mode according to the situation is realized.

In particular, as for the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 307B, when the first movable decorative body is in a state such as “not in a normal state and not executing restoration processing (restoration operation)”, Based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32), the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 307C, when the first movable decorative body is in a state such as “not in a normal state and performing restoration processing (restoration operation)”, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 ) Has arrived, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started at the time when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) has arrived.

That is, the situation in which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoring operation) over the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) means that the first movable decorative body returns to the normal state (return to the original position). It can be said that the player side is in a state of trouble, and the player side is in the situation of being distracted by the “first movable decoration body” in such a state. Then, in such a situation, if many movable ornaments newly start the restoration process (restoration operation), the player cannot concentrate on the effect according to the fluctuation of the symbol, which is a humorous result. Is concerned.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fourth movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 307B) capable of performing the restoration process (restoring operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body. With regard to the above, even in the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process is started in parallel with the first movable ornament in the situation of being executed. On the other hand, regarding the second movable ornament, in the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process is not started in parallel with the first movable ornament that is in the middle of execution, and the first movable ornament does not start. The ornament body is kept in a standby state until the restoration processing is completed. Then, the restoration operation timing (timing tm45 in FIG. 307C) is waited for in the state where the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body is completed, and the timing based on the arrival of the timing tm45. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament 2 is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large number of movable decorative bodies from newly starting restoration processing (restoring operation) when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to restore the normal state. Will be resolved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the third movable decorative body which is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, the next restoration operation timing is similar to the example shown in FIG. 307B. Instead of waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. As a result, it is possible to restore all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state at a comparatively early stage, while avoiding that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the fifth movable decorative body which is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, the next restoration operation timing is similar to the example shown in FIG. 307B. The restoration operation is not started even when the (timing tm45) arrives, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm46 when the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. I am trying. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoring operation in parallel with each other in a manner that hinders concentration on the effect.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process for the fourth movable ornament is ended before the timing tm44 when the restoration process for the first movable ornament is ended. The "second movable ornament," "third movable ornament," and "fifth movable ornament" do not start the restoration operation when the restoration process for the ornament is completed.

That is, the third movable decoration body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 comes unless the specific movable decoration body (here, the first movable decoration body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restore operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament). The restoration processing (restoring operation) is started after waiting for the restoration processing (restoring operation) of the first movable decorative body 1 to be completed.

Further, the fifth movable decoration body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the first movable decoration body and the third movable decoration body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoring operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each restoration processing of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the completion of the (restoration operation).

As described above, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders the concentration of the effect) among the plurality of movable decorations, so that the pattern variation can be dealt with. It becomes possible to perform the restoration process while preferably maintaining the environment in which the user can concentrate on the performance.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol It is assumed that the change (third time) starts timing tm45 (restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change). Such a restore operation timing originally functions to newly start the restore operation for the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation timing is not used, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to extend over the restoration operation timing (timing tm45). ing. As a result, the normal state can be restored earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to perform the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time) The probability that the third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state prior to the timing when "starts" increases. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, even if the movable decorative body using the movable decorative body is started, the movable decorative body is restored to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to perform a production operation as a movable production using a movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, the third movable decorative body, the timing tm42 (when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at the timing tm41 before the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm42 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed (timing tm44).

However, for the third movable decorative body, it is after the timing tm42 (restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), and within the period in which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoring process (restoring operation). Even when the normal state is maintained until “timing tm43” which is the timing of, and the abnormality occurs at the timing tm43, similar to the example illustrated in FIG. 307C, the restoration process (restoration operation of the first movable ornament) It is desirable that the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which (3) is finished. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state in which the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state at the timing tm43, but the other movable decorative body (first The restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that arrives before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. As a result, the normal state can be quickly restored. The details of the “restoration process using the restoration operation time at timing tm42 (restoration operation)” are as described in “Restoration process using the restoration operation time at timing tm32 (restoration operation)”.

Further, in this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time when the timing tm42 (restoring operation time) arrives, it becomes an abnormal state at the time when the timing tm42 (restoring operation time) comes. Since it becomes possible to start the restoration process (restoring operation) for the "third movable decorative body" that has not been performed before the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration of high production importance. You will be able to recover from the body preferentially. The “fifth movable decorative body” is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoring operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that was in the normal state at the timing tm42 (restoring operation time). Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm42 is started. The "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm42" means the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament in the program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm42. And a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable ornament, and a mode in which each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decoration body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decoration body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is The restoration process for the “third movable ornament” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the movable decoration body 5” is started. If the “third movable ornament” is not in the abnormal state when the restoration process for the “first movable ornament” is completed, the restoration process for the “third movable ornament” is not performed, and “fifth movable ornament” is not performed. It is determined whether the "movable ornament of" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is reached, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decorative body" is in the normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. Becomes

According to such an example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, the movable decorative body (first position) that is not in the normal state (not in the original position although not in the movable state) is displayed. Of the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body), the restoration operation timing (symbol variation ( For the movable decoration body (first movable decoration body) that is performing the restoration operation triggered by the (start timing of the first time)), the restoration operation time is ignored and the restoration operation time is ignored and is continuously executed. However, with respect to the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that is not performing the restoration operation, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored and the restoration operation can be started with this as a trigger. That is, in this case, depending on the situation in which each of the plurality of movable ornaments in an abnormal state is placed, there are those that ignore the function as the restoration operation time and those that do not ignore it. As a result, the restoration processing suitable for the situation can be realized.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 307C, the "first movable ornament" performs the restoration operation triggered by the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation (the start timing of the symbol variation (first time)). When the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol variation (second time)) corresponding to the pattern variation arrives again during the execution, the first movable decorative body performing the restoration operation again arrives. The restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol variation (second time)) is used as a trigger, and the restoration operation can be continuously executed without performing the restoration operation again. In other words, in this case, it takes time to restore normality, and as a result, even if the restoration operation time comes again while the restoration operation is being performed, it will be ignored, so it is in the state of being executed. It is possible to continue the restoration operation without interruption, and thus it is possible to prompt the early restoration of the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed on the first movable ornament over a plurality of fluctuations, another movable ornament (third movable ornament) is displayed. When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decorative body does not start the returning operation at the time of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the change in the symbol, and is compared with the first movable decorative body in the midway of execution. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is not redone when the restoration operation time comes (timing tm42), and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornamental body is performed. It is not started at the time (timing tm42), and immediately after the continuation of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is completed, the restoration process for the third movable decorative body ( Since the restoration operation is started, the restoration process should not be performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders the concentration of the effect) among the plurality of movable decorations. At the same time, it becomes possible to restore the plurality of movable ornaments to normal relatively quickly.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the third movable ornament is in an abnormal state at timing tm43, the third movable ornament has not reached the restoration operation time since the abnormality. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 (the end timing of the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” executed over the restoration operation time). ing. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state in which the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state at the timing tm43, but the other movable decorative body (first The restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that arrives before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. As a result, the normal state can be quickly restored.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation time, the movable ornament is restored to the normal state. When the performance execution timing comes, the movable decoration can be executed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to the normal state. With such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), it becomes possible to restore the movable decorative body to the normal state early by the timing when the movable effect is started.

In addition, even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the design variation occurs multiple times during the execution of the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration, all of them are ignored and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to continue.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body have a relationship in which restoration processing (restoration operation) is performed in parallel, as shown in FIG. 307B. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 307C, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration operation, the second movable ornament is moved at the timing tm42. Restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started for ornaments so that each restoration operation is not performed in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large number of movable decorative bodies from newly starting restoration processing (restoring operation) when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to restore the normal state.

Then, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decorative body ends and the normal restoration is performed, the restoration processing (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm45. I'm trying to get it started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the first movable decorative body takes time to restore the normal state and the restoration process (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is not immediately started. Since the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation time (timing tm45), it is possible to concentrate on the effect. It becomes possible to adjust the environment appropriately.

At this time, even when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends due to a failure, a new restoration operation time ( When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it is not possible to provide the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, it is possible to restore the normal operation by using only the second movable decorative body and perform the movable effect using the second movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it feasible.

In the example shown in FIG. 307(C), after the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends and the normal restoration is performed, until a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives. When the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again, when the new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are restored to their respective states. It is desirable to start processing (restoration operation) in parallel.

In the above example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends in failure (does not return to the original position), the first movable decorative body is It is desirable to start the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration processing (restoration operation). Further, even when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends in failure (does not return to the original position), the restoration process (restoration process) for the third movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the end of the (operation).

In the above example, when the third movable decorative body is not in the abnormal state at the time (timing tm34, tm44) when the restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed, the first movable decorative body is not detected. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body. Further, when the third movable decorative body newly becomes in an abnormal state within the execution period of the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” thus started, the third movable decorative body is changed to the abnormal state. When the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not completed, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not performed on the third movable decorative body, but when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives. It is desirable to perform the restoration process (restoration operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, when the restoration process (restoration action) for the fifth movable decorative body has not yet been completed and is in the execution state at the time when the new restoration action time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, the restoration action time comes. When the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" is not started at the time, and the restoration operation time comes after the "restoring processing (restoring operation) for the fifth movable ornamental body" is completed. It is desirable to start the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament".

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, of the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation before this (1 For the first movable decorative body that is performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the (th), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) without performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) again. However, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored for the fourth movable decorative body for which restoration processing (restoration operation) is not performed, but restoration operation is triggered by this. I'm trying to get started. In this regard, even in the case of the fourth movable decorative body that has started the restoration process (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42), a new movement is performed during the restoration process (restoration operation). When the restoration operation timing (timing tm43) arrives, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation timing (timing tm43) and continue the restoration operation so as to extend over the restoration operation timing.

When there is a movable decorative body that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoring operation) and a movable decorative body that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoring operation), the effect display related to the pattern change is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state that is not visible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormal state due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, while the above notification is being performed in response to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state, Restoration processing (restoration operation) that is already in the running state is continued without being stopped, and restoration processing (restoration operation) is also performed for the movable decorative body that is in the waiting state for restoration processing when the restoration operation time comes. It is desirable to newly start (restoration operation).

When there is a movable decorative body that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restore operation) or a movable decorative body that is in the state of waiting for the restoration process (restore operation), use those movable decorative bodies within the pattern fluctuation. When the execution timing of the movable effect has arrived, the driving force for the restoration process (restoring operation) may be applied to those movable ornaments, but the driving force for the effect execution may be applied. It is desirable to prevent it (do not perform the production operation) in order to realize an early return to a normal state. However, the driving force for performing the production is not applied to these movable decorations, but the light emission mode provided for each movable decoration is such that this appears in the light emission mode corresponding to the movable production. It is desirable to have the parts emit light as usual. That is, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, but a part of the effect that constitutes the movable effect (light emission effect) is properly executed. , "0" and "100" are included), different light emission modes also appear in the "movable decorative body which is not in a normal state", and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

In addition, for the movable ornament that is in a state in which the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended in failure, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not performed even when the restoration operation time comes again, so at least the power-on is continued. As long as it is, it can be said that the movable decorative body is not operated in the movable effect. However, even with the movable decorative body in such a state, when the timing for executing the movable effect using the movable decorative object arrives, the movable effect itself is not executed, and the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect (light emission effect) to be performed is appropriately executed. That is, in this case, the movable decorative body in a state in which the light emission mode different depending on the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”) is the state in which the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended in failure Will also appear, and it will be possible to maintain a favorable interest in gaming.

In addition, the movable ornament in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable ornament in the state of waiting for execution of the restoration process (restoration operation), and the state in which the restoration process (restoration operation) ends in failure. With respect to the movable decorative body in, the light emitting unit may be able to emit light as usual even when another effect is executed.

The restoration operation timing may include not only those that come in response to the symbol variation but also those that come under conditions other than that. Then, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific time that comes under a condition different from the symbol variation, while performing a specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation), When performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration processing (restoration operation) should be started (executed) in the non-notification state without performing the specific notification (moving body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, of the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation before this (1 For the first movable decorative body that is performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the (th), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) without performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) again. However, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored for the fourth movable decorative body for which restoration processing (restoration operation) is not performed, but restoration operation is triggered by this. I'm trying to get started. In this way, even when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to restore the normal state, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the design variation arrives, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not ignored. About the "fourth movable ornament" that will be started, it is used for important performances such as when the winning result is derived by pattern change, or when the big hit game is started or executed. Is desirable.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, regarding the third movable decorative body, the case where the “restoration processing (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” succeeds in normal restoration (reference position detection) and fails (reference position) The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the end of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” regardless of whether it is terminated (completed) or not. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, based on the fact that the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” has failed and the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornamental body” has ended. When the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" that has been performed is completed with a successful return to normal, the third movable decorative body is abnormal again within the pattern change that has successfully returned to normal. When the state comes, the "restoration process for the first movable ornament (restoration action)" is not performed when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation comes, and "the restoration process for the third movable ornament ( It is desirable to perform "restoration operation)".

However, at this time, at the time when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation arrives, the "fifth movable movement" started based on the completion of the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body". When the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the ornament" is in the execution state, the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament" and the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" "Restoring process for the first movable decorative body" triggered by "restoring operation timing corresponding to symbol variation" that comes after the "restoring process for the fifth movable decorative body (restoring operation)" is completed. It is desirable to perform the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" without performing the "restoration operation".

After the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is successfully completed, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" is executed while the restoration process is being performed. Even when an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, the "restoration processing (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" is executed so as to span the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable that the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” not be started at the time of the restoration operation. That is, in this case, at the time of the restoration operation that comes after the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" succeeds or fails in normal restoration, "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament" Will be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, of the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation before this (1 For the first movable decorative body that is performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the (th), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) without performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) again. Is ignored and this is executed continuously. Regarding the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is ignored, and the completion of the "restoration processing (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is completed. Based on this, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started. In this regard, when the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again while the "restoration process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" started in this way is being executed, the "third movable decorative body" When the "restoration process for the body (restoration operation)" is finished, the "restoration process for the first movable decorative body (restoration action)" is not started based on the end, but the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation is It is desirable to start the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" based on the arrival of a new item.

However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation newly arrives, the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” is not completed and the situation in the middle of execution (crossing the restoration operation time It is desirable to ignore the restoration operation time and wait for the completion of the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” when the situation is such that the restoration operation is performed. Then, the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament" is started at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation that has arrived after the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" is completed. It is desirable to let it do.

That is, in this case, the "first movable decorative body" and the "third movable decorative body" are restored so that when the "first movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, the "first movable decorative body" is restored in advance. Despite the relationship that the processing is performed, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation comes when the third movable decoration body is not in the normal state, the first movable decoration body, the restoration operation When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the time (when the third movable decoration body is not performing the restoration process) and when the restoration operation is not started (the third movable decoration body is When the restoration process is being executed), the restoration process can be realized according to the situation.

The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting changing unit capable of changing the winning probability of the hit determination and the selection probability of the effect pattern. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable to use the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation as the same timing (for example, when the symbol variation starts).

The first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration are movable decorations provided at positions where the player can contact them. The body may be included. In this case, it is considered that the movable decorative body provided at a position where the player can contact is most likely to be in an abnormal state. Then, it is desirable to be provided as a "fourth movable ornament" that starts the restoration process (restoration operation).

The light guide plate that exposes the light guide pattern is provided in front of the movable decorative body, and the effect of displaying the light guide pattern is not limited even during the restoration process (restoring operation) for the movable decorative body. Making it executable is desirable in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

The "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" shown in FIGS. 307B and 307C should be prepared as those having a performance relationship in which both are in an operating state in a specific movable effect. It is desirable to do. For example, the “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” may be provided with decorations that are related to each other, or they may move at the same time as a movable production based on a pattern change (production pattern). Be prepared to form decorations (such as completion of characters and character strings). The third movable decorative body is prepared as a specific movable effect or as an object that is not used when forming one decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is possible to prevent one decoration from being formed in the same manner (movement at the same time period) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (effect pattern) As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Regarding the "first movable decoration body", "second movable decoration body", "third movable decoration body", "fourth movable decoration body", and "fifth movable decoration body", the game board 5 may be provided separately from those provided on the door frame 3 side.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the “first movable decorative body”, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “second movable decorative body”. It is assumed that the "5th movable decoration body" is provided, but regarding the "2nd movable decoration body", "3rd movable decoration body", "4th movable decoration body", and "5th movable decoration body" Does not necessarily have to include all of the movable ornaments, but may include “one” of the movable ornaments, or appropriate “two” or “three” of the movable ornaments. Even with such a configuration, it has the technical features described with reference to FIGS. 307B and 307C (how the restoration process is performed in relation to the “first movable decorative body”). Becomes

[Penalty for operating the operation unit capable of producing light emission]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is changed by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). Processing is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing that reflects the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332). It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and regarding the brightness applied to each effect lamp when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated. A process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

In addition, regarding the acceptance of changes related to such set values (volume set value, brightness set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state in which the symbols are not changed and the symbols are changed In any of the states in which the player is operating, the operations can be executed by the player.

By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operating units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operating units may be handled roughly, and as a result, one of the operating units is operated. If any trouble occurs, the operability and the playability will be significantly deteriorated, so a decline in the enjoyment of the game is unavoidable.

Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation button 410,
A sword decoration body in which a sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, collar portion 5013) is movable (variable) between a sword storage position and a sword removal position by a predetermined operation (sword removal operation, sword operation). 5001 (see FIGS. 192 and 222, etc.)
The operation of pulling the sword part 5010 (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012, the collar part 5013) from the sheath part 5020 (extracting sword) and the If the “operation” is repeated, it may cause a failure.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the effect light emitting parts (not shown) are respectively arranged for the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013, and the blade portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, the collar portion 5013) are provided with a special detection portion (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the sheath portion 5020 is in a specific position (original position) where the sword is stored. Then, at least during the period in which the demo screen is displayed (a non-gaming state in which the game effect according to the big hit determination and the symbol variation are not executed), the sword portion 5010 is identified as a result of the detection by the special detection portion. When it is determined that the vehicle is not in the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a performance restriction period as a penalty.

According to such a configuration, at least when in the non-gaming state in which the symbol variation is not performed, the sword portion 5010 and the effect light emitting portion (the sword portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013) are subjected to a predetermined operation. As a result of the displacement, the production restriction period can occur when it is detected that the operation unit is not located at the specific position, and thus it is possible to preferably prevent the operating unit from being roughly handled.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned "change of set value (volume set value) for output volume of effect sound" and "set value (luminance set value) for light emission luminance" described above. The above-mentioned production restriction period is generated while any of the "changes" remains in a state in which it can be accepted by the operation of the player. However, as will be described later, during this production restriction period,
With regard to the effect sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume is changed, the effect sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume adjustment is performed. While the confirmation sound will not be output,
Regarding the effect lamp, when the set value (luminance set value) related to the light emission brightness is changed, the effect light emitting unit included in the sword part 5010 that is the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 concerned. Although the sword portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013 do not emit light with the brightness according to the brightness setting value, they are provided in a part different from the sword part 5010 to be detected. With respect to the effect lamp (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), effect light emission with the brightness corresponding to the set value is set to be executable, and the like. It can be done.

According to such a configuration, when the production restriction period occurs, both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the luminance can be accepted, but the setting related to the volume setting is related. The degree of limitation becomes different between the processing and the processing related to the brightness setting.

That is, with regard to the effect sound, the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, but the effect sound is not output in a manner in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is generated. It also tries to give the player a sense of tension (maybe they have done something they shouldn't do) by not even outputting.

On the other hand, with respect to the brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the effect light emitting parts (the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the brim part 5013) included in the “sword part 5010” operated by the player. Although the effect light emission is not performed in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected, the effect lamp provided in a part different from the "sword part 5010" operated by the player is changed. By making it possible to perform effect light emission in a manner in which the brightness setting value is reflected (for example, light emission that matches the timing at which a specific notice effect is performed), it is possible to handle the "sword part 5010" roughly. While it is possible to recognize that the production restriction is imposed and warn of this, it is possible for the pachinko machine 1 as a whole to appropriately appeal that the intention is to continue the game or the production. In this sense, with regard to the effect lamps on the game board 5 on which the game balls flow down or win the prize, the effect light emission should be executed in the normal manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Is desirable. With this, it is possible to give a warning against rough handling of the operation unit while preferably avoiding such things as "disincentive of player to start game or urging to end game". become.

Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the release condition for each limitation is made different between the limitation on the processing related to the volume setting and the limitation on the processing related to the brightness setting. .. In particular, regarding "volume setting related processing" on the side that imposed relatively strict restrictions at the beginning, it is strongly encouraged to continue playing by making a significant improvement to a normal state relatively early. On the other hand, although the “processing related to brightness setting” on the side that initially imposes a relatively soft limit shows an improving trend, it slows down the overall improvement speed, It is expected that the restrictions will be left to remain, so that the tension will be moderately maintained for a long period of time to prevent the mistreatment from being repeated.

FIG. 309 is a time chart showing an example of restrictions on volume setting and brightness setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on the sword section 5010.

Now, assuming that there is a non-gaming state in which no game is being executed, such as during the demo screen, and there is a normal state in which no error state or penalty has occurred, in that state, as shown in FIG. Execution of processing for changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the sound volume is permitted. When the volume setting value is changed, the process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed, and the adjusted volume. Will output a volume adjustment confirmation sound.

Further, in the same state, execution of a process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by the player regarding the brightness is also permitted. When the brightness setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount) is executed, and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. It will be.

Further, in the same state, the handle LED (effect light emitting unit in the handle portion 5012), the collar LED (effect light emitting unit in the collar portion 5013), the blade LED (effect light emitting portion in the blade portion 5011), and the operation outside LED (game) All the effect lamps on the board 5 are in the state of “normal light emission”. The "normal light emission" state corresponds to "a state in which light emission is maintained" as long as it is provided as a production lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the state of production. However, in the case where the lamp is provided as a production lamp that emits light when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, "a light emission waiting state in which it is allowed to be in a light emission state when the predetermined production condition is satisfied (Light-off state)” is also included, and the light does not necessarily have to be in a light-emitting state. Further, it is desirable to provide the sheath portion 5020 in a light-transmitting manner so that the light emitting mode of the blade LED can be confirmed even in the sword storage state.

However, as shown in FIG. 309, as a result of performing a predetermined operation at the timing to1, the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion) despite the non-gaming state in which the operation effect cannot occur. If it is detected that the sheath 5020 is not in a swording state with respect to the sheath 5020 (detection that it is not in a specific position (original position)), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment. Then, first, the first effect suppression state is to be generated.

In the first effect suppressing state, as shown in FIG. 309, it is permitted to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is not executed, and the volume adjustment is performed. No confirmation sound is output.

Further, in the same state, execution of a process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by the player regarding the brightness is also permitted. In this regard, when the brightness setting value is changed, of the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1, a pattern LED (effect light emitting section in the pattern section 5012) inside the sword section 5010 moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation. As for the collar LED (the effect light emitting section in the collar section 5013) and the blade LED (the effect light emitting section in the blade section 5011), a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (the brightness setting value is the light amount) However, for the outside-operation-unit LED (rendering lamp on the game board 5) that is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, it is based on the changed brightness setting value. A process of adjusting the light emission brightness (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as the light amount) is executed. Further, in the same state, although it is possible to adjust the emission brightness of some of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit), the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the adjustment is performed. I am trying.

According to such a configuration, in the first effect suppressing state, although it is possible to accept both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the brightness, it is related to the volume setting. The degree of limitation becomes different between the processing and the processing related to the brightness setting.

That is, with regard to the effect sound, the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, but the effect sound is not output in a manner in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is generated. It also tries to give the player a sense of tension (maybe they have done something they shouldn't do) by not even outputting.

On the other hand, with respect to the brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the effect light emitting parts (the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the brim part 5013) included in the “sword part 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected, but is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation and the effect lamp (operation is provided on the game board 5 where the game is performed. The outside LED) emits effect light in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected (for example, if a game is started in this state and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a specific notice effect is performed. It becomes possible to emit light according to the timing. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game or the effect, while warning the rough handling of the “sword part 5010”.

More specifically, in the first effect suppressing state, the pattern LED (the effect light emitting section in the pattern section 5012) continues the light emitting state (penalty light emission) in a predetermined light emission brightness and light emission mode. It is controlled, for example, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness setting value is not reflected, and the pattern variation is started and the result of the big hit determination is changed. Even if a light emission request is made, a light emission mode corresponding to the light emission request does not appear.

Further, the collar LED (effect light emitting portion in the collar portion 5013) can emit light as in the normal time even in the first effect suppressing state, and an effect lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the effect situation. If it is provided as a production lamp that emits light when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, if it is provided as a production lamp, a "predetermined production is performed". The light emission waiting state is permitted in which the light emission state is permitted when the conditions are satisfied. However, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the collar LED does not emit the effect light in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Even within the part 5010, the light emission effect is allowed to promote the continuation of the game, but at the same time, the mishandling of the "sword part 5010" can be warned.

Further, the blade LED (effect light emitting part in the blade part 5011) is controlled so as to continue the light-off state in the first effect suppressing state. Even if something happens, it doesn't respond to this. Therefore, with the blade LED, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, it is impossible for the blade LED to emit effect light in a manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected.

On the other hand, no limitation is imposed on the LED outside the sword portion 5010 which is moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, and the above-mentioned "normal light emission" state is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness setting value can be reflected (if it is in the light emitting state), and the pattern variation is started and the light emission according to the result of the big hit determination. When a request is made, a light emission mode corresponding to the request appears.

In such a configuration, since only the effect lamp provided in the "sword part 5010" that is moved by a predetermined operation is limited, the game board 5 on which the game is played is limited. If the gazing only gathers, it seems that the emission brightness can be adjusted as usual when the brightness setting value is changed, so that the first effect suppression state is in a state of occurring. There is a concern that things will not be recognized. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the brightness setting value is changed by the operation of the player in the first effect suppression state, and the light emission brightness of some of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit). Even if the adjustment is performed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. As a result, even when the "sword part 5010" is not visually recognized, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is in a restricted state, and the "sword part 5010" is returned to the original position. Will be able to encourage you to.

Then, at the timing to2 after such a first effect suppressing state occurs, an operation of positioning the sword portion 5010 into the sword-storing state is performed, and it is detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword-storing state (specification If it is detected that it is in the position (original position), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs a process of shifting from the first effect suppression state to the second effect suppression state.

In the second effect suppressing state, as shown in FIG. 309, with respect to the volume, all the restriction contents in the first effect suppressing state are cancelled, and normal processing is performed. Not only is the execution of the process of changing the volume setting value permitted, but the execution of the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume and the process of outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound are both permitted. Has become.

On the other hand, with regard to the brightness, although the "restriction on the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" of the restriction contents in the first effect suppression state is released, the "partial restriction on the brightness adjustment" is not released and continues. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, in the second effect suppression state, the process of changing the brightness setting value is executed, the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the LEDs outside the operation unit of the plurality of effect lamps is executed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. Execution of the process is permitted, but the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the effect lamp included in the sword portion 5010 of the plurality of effect lamps is not allowed to be executed (restricted state). It will be maintained until now.

That is, the second effect suppression state is a state that occurs based on "it is detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword storage state" in the first effect suppression state, and the sword portion 5010 has already been moved to the specific position (original position). It is located in (Position), and it can be said that the miscellaneous treatment has been eliminated. In response to this, the "processing related to volume setting" on the side that initially imposes relatively strict restrictions is promptly and greatly improved to a normal state, so that continued play is strongly encouraged. The main purpose is.

However, if the sword part 5010 is returned to the specific position (original position) and all the restrictions are immediately released after the first effect suppression state occurs, the function as the penalty is insufficient. Yes, the rough handling of "Sword 5010" may occur again. In this respect, according to the above configuration, when the "sword portion 5010 is detected to be in the sword storage state" in the first effect suppressing state, the state is shifted to the second effect suppressing state. Regarding the brightness, although the “restriction on the brightness adjustment confirmation sound” in the restriction contents when the first effect suppressing state is released, the “partial restriction on the brightness adjustment” continues without being released. I am trying.

That is, in this case, since the production restriction is left in the "sword part 5010" itself which has been subjected to rough handling, an atmosphere in which it becomes difficult to perform more rough handling of the "sword part 5010" (" I think it will be broken."), and thus prevent recurrence.

On the other hand, in the second effect suppression state, since the rough handling of the “sword part 5010” has already been eliminated, the player is paying attention to the game board 5 where the game is played ( It can be said that the situation where the game is concentrated) is in a desirable situation. In this respect, in the second effect suppression state, the brightness setting value is changed when the player is gazing at the game board 5 where the game is played (the situation in which the sword portion 5010 is not visually recognized). Sometimes the brightness setting value is changed by the player's operation in order to make it appear that the emission brightness can be adjusted normally (it looks like it is in a normal state), and some of the multiple effect lamps (operation When the emission brightness of the external LED) is adjusted, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. This allows the player to concentrate on the game and avoids recurring rough handling of the sword portion 5010.

According to such a second effect suppression state, although the “processing related to the brightness setting” on the side that initially imposes a comparatively mild restriction is showing an improving trend, it becomes a target of rough handling. By limiting the "sword part 5010" that has become unrestricted, the tension can be appropriately maintained for a long time to prevent the mishandling from being performed again, and the player can be played. Will be expected to focus on.

Further, in the second effect suppressing state, some of the effect lamps (design LED, collar LED, blade LED) are excluded from the light emission brightness adjustment targets, but other than that. When the emission brightness of the effect lamp (the LED outside the operation unit) is adjusted, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output as in the case of adjusting the emission brightness in the normal state. That is, in this case, even if the second effect suppression state occurs, it is not a situation in which the operation by the player cannot be accepted, but a situation in which the player can react to the operation as in the normal state. It becomes possible to appeal, and it is possible to suitably encourage the player to continue the game.

Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the emission brightness is adjusted only for some of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit) in the second effect suppression state, the normal state is achieved. The same brightness adjustment confirmation sound as at one time is assigned to a channel and output. As a result, even if the situation is such that only partial adjustment is possible, it is expected to give a sense of security as if the player has already returned to the normal state and motivate the player to continue playing the game. However, when the second effect suppression state is ended and the state shifts to the normal state, the brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted in such a manner that the brightness setting value at that time is collectively reflected. It is important not to output the adjustment confirmation sound in order to make it appear as if it had already returned to the normal state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurred. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (timing to3), it is possible to execute the process of ending the second effect suppression state and shifting to the normal state.

That is, the transition condition from the “first effect suppression state in which the effect restriction degree is relatively strict” to the “second effect suppression state in which the effect restriction degree is relatively weak” is “triggered by an operation by the player”. This makes it possible to establish this at an early stage, which prevents motivation to continue playing. However, regarding the transition condition from the "second effect suppression state in which the relative effect restriction degree is relatively weak" to the "normal state", it is assumed that "a predetermined time has elapsed after the second effect suppression state occurred". Therefore, it is not allowed to establish this early. By adopting these transition conditions, it becomes possible to effectively keep a motivation to continue playing the game while effectively issuing a warning against rough handling, and it can be expected to prevent recurrence. Like

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, a plurality of effect lamps provided in the “sword part 5010” that is a target of rough handling. Regarding some of the effect lamps (here, the collar LED and the blade LED) of the (pattern LED, collar LED, and blade LED), the case where the second effect suppression state is terminated and returned to the normal state Also allows only "limited" light emission.

More specifically, the brim LED and the blade LED can emit light as they normally do, but the changed brightness setting value is reflected even if the brightness setting value is changed. Instead, the effect light emission is performed only at a predetermined brightness setting value. That is, in this case, in particular, with respect to the tsuba LED, after the first effect suppression state occurs, only the effect light emission under the same restriction is continuously performed, which may cause a failure in part. It is expected that the sword portion 5010 will be reminded to prevent the rough handling of the sword portion 5010 from being recurred. Alternatively, even after the production suppression state ends and becomes a normal state, it becomes possible to function as a history of the production suppression state occurring before that, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 is expected. Will be able to. It should be noted that the effect restriction left for the tsuba LED and the blade LED may be kept irreversible, but, for example, when a different condition such as RAM clear or power shutdown is satisfied. It is desirable to make it releasable.

According to such a configuration, even after the first effect suppressing state is ended and the process related to the volume adjustment is returned to the normal state, the process related to the brightness adjustment is required to be further improved step by step. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the sense of tension for a longer period of time while maintaining the motivation for the game.

In addition, for the first effect suppression state (further, second effect suppression state), in addition to the non-gaming state (during the demo screen, etc.), the game execution state in which the game is being executed (symbol according to the result of the jackpot determination) Even if it is in a changing state or a jackpot gaming state, etc., it can be generated based on the fact that the sword portion 5010 is not in the sword storage state (detection that it is not in a specific position (original position)). It is desirable to do. That is, even in the game state (such as during pattern change according to the result of the big hit determination), the sword portion 5010 should not be roughly handled in a state where an operation opportunity is not given, and in advancing the game and the effect. This is because it is desired to be handled properly.

However, even if the situation is controlled to the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309, acceptance regarding the change of the brightness setting value is made in the game execution state (the symbol variation is the execution state). Therefore, it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound when the brightness adjustment is performed accordingly. That is, when the "first effect suppressing state" is shifted to the "second effect suppressing state", at least the processing side related to the volume adjustment will be able to release all restrictions, so that the feeling of tension can be maintained well. There is a concern that you will not be able to On the other hand, in order to strongly encourage the player to continue playing the game, it is important to greatly improve the restrictions on the "volume adjustment related process" on the side that was strict until then.

In this respect, "when the tension cannot be maintained well" means that the situation in which the second production suppression state has occurred (the situation in which the first production suppression state where the production restrictions are strict has ended) has been lightened and the game is restarted. It is assumed that such a situation has occurred, and conversely, in a situation where the game is not restarted, it is also assumed that the feeling of tension can be maintained well. Therefore, even in the second effect suppression state, when it is in the state of execution of the symbol fluctuation (resumption of game) that is assumed that the tension is not maintained well, the brightness adjustment confirmation is intentionally not output, Looking only at “processing related to adjustment”, it is possible to expect that a proper sense of tension will be imparted by making it appear that the first effect suppression state has not been improved.

In this sense, in the situation in which the "second effect suppressing state" shown in FIG. 309 is controlled, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the change in the volume setting value is accepted and the volume adjustment is performed accordingly. The volume adjustment confirmation sound may not be output even when is performed. Further, regarding such special processing (processing for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound, processing for not outputting the luminance adjustment confirmation sound) when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the second production suppression state ends and there is a limit. It may be applied even when the situation is such that the normal state is returned in the form of being left out. That is, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output in the middle of the game execution state, the meaning cannot be understood and the game is not played. This is because there is a risk of not being able to concentrate.

Although the handle LED, the collar LED, and the blade LED are provided in the above-described example, the sword portion 5010 may have at least the handle LED as an effect lamp. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the game motivation by showing a gradual improvement while warning the rough handling of the "sword part 5010" in the first effect suppressing state and the second effect suppressing state. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described example, as soon as "the sword part 5010 is detected to be in the sword storage state" is detected in the first effect suppressing state, the "first effect suppressing state" is shifted to the "second effect suppressing state". The process is performed, but the process is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after “detecting that the sword part 5010 is in the sword storage state” is detected in the first effect suppressing state. The process of shifting from the “first effect suppressing state” to the “second effect suppressing state” may be performed. According to such a configuration, while permitting a relatively early transition from the “first effect suppressing state” to the “second effect suppressing state”, the effect restriction is at least for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It becomes possible to maintain the strict first effect suppression state. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set as a time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) required from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end thereof. Desirably, but not exclusively.

Further, in the above-described explanation example, the cause of the production restriction is the predetermined operation on the operation means (sword portion 5010), but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if it is a specific object that is not the target of operation by the player (for example, an object that can be moved between the first state and the second state, such as a decorative movable body or a door frame 3), it will be treated roughly. If it is forcibly displaced, it may cause a failure. Therefore, based on the fact that at least a "lamp subject to the production restriction such as the above-mentioned pattern LED" is provided as the production lamp for the specific object and that the specific object is not in the original position It is desirable to generate the effect suppression state as described above. That is, in this case, regardless of whether it is in the non-gaming state or the gaming state, the first effect suppression state as described above is based on the fact that the specific object is not in the first state (home position). Then, based on the detection that the specific object has been returned to the first state (original position), the second effect suppression state as described above is generated, and a predetermined time has elapsed from the generation. Based on this, the normal state (or the limited normal state) is restored.

Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

Further, in the above-described example, when the change to the volume setting value is received a plurality of times in the “first effect suppressing state” and then the “second effect suppressing state” is entered, the “second effect suppressing state” is set. When the state is changed to "state", the volume is adjusted by collectively reflecting the changes made to the volume setting value up to that time. In addition, when the change to the brightness setting value is received a plurality of times in the "first effect suppressing state" or the "second effect suppressing state", and then returned to the normal state at the timing to3, the state becomes the "normal state". The brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted by collectively reflecting the changes made to the brightness set value up to that point a plurality of times. Regarding the method (including the presence or absence of the output of the adjustment confirmation sound at that time) for collectively adjusting the set value changes a plurality of times at “certain timing”, the contents described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168 are described. Can be realized by appropriately adopting Further, in this case, since the timing to2 at which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing to3 at which the brightness setting value can be collectively reflected are different, the path to return to the normal state can be shown in stages. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing by making it look as if he had already returned to the normal state, or by making him appear to be recovering. Further, the predetermined time from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end thereof may be about 10 seconds.

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

[Brightness adjustment at the time of alarm notification]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, various types of pachinko machine 1 equipped with the volume control buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332) are provided separately. It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for the effect lamp (a lamp that is the target of effect control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of various effect lamps is played. It is possible to execute a process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the person (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, if there is a production lamp that is in a light emitting state when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, a process of adjusting the emission luminance of the production lamp based on the changed brightness setting value ( The process of reflecting the brightness setting value as the light amount) is executed. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

For the effect lamps that are not in the light emitting state at the time when the brightness setting value is changed, after that, when there is a light emission request based on the result of the big hit determination, the brightness according to the changed brightness setting value is set. It will be in a light emitting state. More specifically, as long as it is provided as a production lamp that always maintains the light emission regardless of the production situation, as soon as the change of the brightness setting value is accepted, the light emission according to the changed brightness setting value is performed. Although it will be changed to the light emission mode with the brightness, if it is provided as a production lamp that emits light when a predetermined production condition is satisfied (a production request according to a big hit judgment), the predetermined production condition is set. At the timing when the effect condition is satisfied, the effect light emission is performed as the light emission brightness according to the changed brightness setting value. That is, until the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect light emission with the emission brightness according to the changed brightness setting value is maintained (light emission waiting state).

In addition, regarding the change acceptance regarding the brightness setting value and the adjustment processing according to the changed brightness setting value, the player is in a state where the symbol is not changing and the state where the symbol is changing, Can be executed by the operation by.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, when the specific abnormality detection as illustrated in FIG. 156 occurs, the abnormality notification according to the abnormality type is performed. If it is a type of abnormality detection that is unlikely to occur, there may be a case in which the player wants the player to continue playing the game. That is, if the game is less interesting and the player finishes the game as a result of the abnormality notification despite a minor abnormality that is not serious, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. There may be a disadvantage due to the decrease.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in a specific state (for example, a state where a right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state) Of the plurality of effect lamps, a part of the effect lamps (for example, effect lamps provided on the game board 5) can emit light by effect (during effect emission, or the condition of effect emission is satisfied). It is possible to execute the abnormality notification light emission by using at least the specific effect lamp (for example, the effect lamp provided on the door frame 3) included in the other effect lamps while remaining in the waiting state (off state) I am trying.

Then, even during such an abnormality notification light emission execution period, each time the player accepts an operation, a change in the brightness setting value can be accepted, and the light emission by the effect is left as it is. In the above-mentioned part of the effect lamps, the emission brightness can be adjusted based on the changed brightness setting value, whereas in the specific effect lamps, the changed brightness is adjusted. The abnormality notification light emission is executed only at a predetermined brightness setting value regardless of the setting value.

According to such a configuration, even during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission, the brightness setting value is changed every time the player accepts an operation, although it is a partial one of the plurality of effect lamps. Is reflected, and the effect light emission is executed with the reflected brightness setting value. Therefore, it is possible to suitably encourage the player to continue the game while notifying the hall side of the abnormality.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a change in the brightness setting value is accepted during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission in which the target of the brightness adjustment is limited to a part as described above. Even when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not always output, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the remaining time until the end of the period when the brightness adjustment target is limited to part is short It is possible to suggest to the player that it is in a stage where the normal light emission will be permitted soon after the abnormality notification light emission ends. I have to.

FIG. 310 is a time chart showing an example of the light emission mode of the effect lamp during the abnormality notification period according to the specific abnormality detection.

As shown in FIG. 310, at a timing tp1 when a game is not being executed, such as during a demo screen, at a specific state (for example, passing through the right gate in a non-time saving state (abnormal game)). Is detected), the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment generates the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection.

In the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), some of the effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 (equivalent to “LED-A group” in the figure) produce effect emission. While being enabled, the abnormality notification light emission is performed using the other effect lamps (corresponding to "LED-B group" in the figure). Note that the abnormality notification light emission does not necessarily have to be performed using all of the other effect lamps, and a part of the other effect lamps (for example, the specific effect lamp provided in the door frame 3). You may make it execute using only.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a specific state (for example, a state in which a right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state) occurs The lamps (corresponding to the "LED-A group" in the figure) are designed to emit light in the same manner as when the particular state is not occurring. While notifying, the player is preferably encouraged to continue the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is occurring, the change acceptance regarding the brightness setting value is allowed. Then, in some of the effect lamps (corresponding to the “LED-A group” in the figure) that are set to “do not perform abnormality notification light emission”, the light emission brightness thereof is the same as when the lamp warning period is not in progress. , So that it can be adjusted based on the changed brightness setting value (immediate change if it emits light all the time, waiting state for light emission with changed brightness set value if it emits light in response to a performance request) Yes (adjustment can be reflected).

On the other hand, for other effect lamps (corresponding to the “LED-B group” in the figure), even if the brightness setting value is changed during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the change is made. The brightness setting value is not reflected, and the abnormality notification light emission is performed only at a predetermined brightness setting value (adjustment cannot be reflected). That is, in this case, some of the effect lamps and the other effect lamps can emit light at the same time in a manner in which different brightness setting values are reflected. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the abnormality notification light emission, which is not related to, is being performed. In this sense, it is desirable for the effect emission to be able to change the brightness setting value only within a range equal to or less than the brightness setting value adopted by the abnormality notification light emission.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the execution of the abnormality notification light emission even when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. I try not to output. That is, until the timing tp2 (timing tp1 to tp2) when the remaining time until the end of the period in which the luminance adjustment target is limited to a part is shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) arrives (timing tp1 to tp2) Even if the brightness setting value is changed and the emission brightness of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Then, based on the arrival of the timing tp2, when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted (when the emission brightness of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted), the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again. It is trying to raise the situation that is.

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output despite the change of the brightness setting value, the remaining time until the period ends While it can be recognized that the situation is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output when the brightness setting value is changed, the period is ended. It becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until is shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Therefore, even if there is no change in the mode of the abnormality notification light emission itself and it is continued, it is internally suggested to the player that the situation is going toward a normal state (improvement). As a result, even if the abnormality notification light emission is performed for a relatively long period of time, it is expected that the desire to continue playing the game can be suitably encouraged.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period (timing tp2 to tp3) of the abnormality notification light emission in which the brightness setting value is reflected only partially (LED-A group), all the effects are produced. The lamp is designed to output the same sound as the above-mentioned brightness adjustment confirmation sound in the case of a normal state in which the brightness setting value can be reflected, which gives a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal state. It is intended to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game during the period when the abnormality notification light emission is being performed. However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310, at the timing tp3 when the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission ends, even if the brightness setting value is changed a plurality of times until then, the brightness setting value at that time is changed. Will be reflected in the other production lamps (“LED-B group” that had been emitting anomaly notification until then), but the production adjustment will be performed. It is important not to output the so as to make it look as if it had already returned to the normal state.

In the above-described example, when the game is not being executed, such as during the demo screen, a specific state (for example, a state where a right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state) The example has been described in which the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the fact that it has been detected. However, when it is in the game state where the game is being executed (such as symbol fluctuation state), it is detected that it has become a specific state (for example, the state where a right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state). Also in the case of the above, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the detection.

Even when the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated when the game is being executed in the game execution state (symbol variation state or big hit game state, etc.), basically, it is the same as the case of the above-described example. Is. However, in this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to timing tp1 to tp3) is reached regardless of whether or not the period (timing tp2 to tp3) has arrived after the timing tp2 when the remaining time is shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has arrived. In tp3), it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound. That is, since the case of being in the game execution state means that the game is just being continued by the player, it is assumed that there is an extremely low possibility that the game will be ended. Therefore, even if the situation (timing tp2 to tp3) in which the normal state can be restored soon will be maintained by maintaining the control in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, "the abnormality notification light emission is still being executed. It can be said that it is more desirable for the player to recognize accurate information such as ". Further, in this case, even after the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission (timing tp1 to tp3) ends and the normal state is achieved, the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained while the game execution state is continued. You may do it. This is because if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output in the middle of the game execution state, the meaning cannot be understood and there is a risk that the player cannot concentrate on the game.

In the above-described example, when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output during the period of timings tp2 to tp3, if the game execution state is changed from the non-gaming state (the symbol fluctuation starts). In such a case), "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (non-audible control at timings tp1 to tp2)" is re-executed based on the game execution state. Then, the "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" is maintained until the timing tp3 arrives or until the game execution state is ended.

Further, in the above-described example, even when the period (timing tp2 to tp3) after the arrival of the timing tp2 when the remaining time is shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) comes, If it is re-detected that a specific state (for example, a state where a right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state) is re-detected during the period, the above-mentioned point from the time of the detection is detected. It is desirable to repeat the processing (processing after timing tp1) related to the abnormality notification light emission. That is, in this case, even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output, it is returned to the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output.

In addition, in the above-described example, when the timing tp3 arrives, all the effect lamps are shifted to the normal state in which the adjustment based on the brightness setting value is possible. However, during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), a plurality of effect lamps are prepared as effect lamps that cannot be adjusted based on the brightness setting value, and when timing tp3 arrives, the effect lamps are not changed. Only a part of the lamps can be adjusted based on the brightness setting value, but at least the specific effect lamp cannot be adjusted based on the brightness setting value even in the normal state after the timing tp3. You may do it. According to such a configuration, since the limitation regarding the brightness adjustment is left for the specific effect lamp, even after the lamp warning period ends and the normal state is reached, the lamp warning is issued before that. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to function as a history of occurrence of a period, and stable operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be expected. Note that the restriction left for a specific effect lamp may be kept unreleasable, but may be released by, for example, RAM clear or power shutdown. Is desirable.

Note that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output as the same sound as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make something recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

Further, during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission according to the above-described example, it is desirable that the change of the set value related to the volume of the effect sound can be accepted based on the operation acceptance by the player. In this case, the "processing relating to notification sound and volume adjustment" during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission can be realized by appropriately adopting the contents described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. In this case, the “processing relating to the notification sound and the volume adjustment” described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168 may be ended (collective reflection of the volume) when the timing tp3 arrives. You may make it complete|finish (collective reflection of a sound volume) when tp2 arrives. In such a configuration, the timing tp2 at which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing tp3 at which the luminance setting value can be collectively reflected become different, and therefore the path to return to the normal state can be shown stepwise. This makes it possible to motivate players to continue playing by making them appear as if they had already returned to normal times or appearing to be recovering.

Further, in the above description example, the specific state is illustrated as "a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in the non-time saving state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 166 to FIG. 168 are referred to. It may be the same as in the example described above (a state in which a door opening abnormality, a magnetic detection abnormality occurs, or the like).

Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

[14. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by outputting voice, lighting/blinking a lamp, displaying an image, and the like, and in order to enhance the interest of the game, various elaborate effects have been tried. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes an effect according to the game state of the game. To do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation, for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique that realizes various effect displays by using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially specified in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. It is also possible to include the designation of BGM in the scenario data. In this case, the sound source IC outputs the designated BGM, so that the sound corresponding to the display screen can be output.

However, game machines require more elaborate presentations. In the above-mentioned conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as voice output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, the BGM could not be changed while executing the image display according to the scenario data. Further, when outputting a sound effect in response to a user's operation during the image display, the image display and the BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect is finished, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM is played, and the effect gives a feeling of strangeness. Regarding the lighting and blinking of the lamp, it is controlled by individual programs regardless of the content of the image display depending on the game state, and it is difficult to realize various lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the game effect. In the present embodiment, each component that executes an effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, the configuration and outline of the function for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment will be described, and then the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 311 is a functional block diagram illustrating the configuration and outline of the function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires the layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as a background and a character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (motion) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer displaying the character. As a result, it is possible to reduce the volume of effect data (scheduler data) and improve the development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying the effect for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing an effect. With the scheduler data, in order to control the effect in each effect device, a plurality of functions for instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required by the effect device are stored in the order to be executed. The data. The production block data is "liquid crystal production block data" for executing the production to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal symbol block data" for variably displaying the identification pattern on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of "sub effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes the scheduler control information including effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and the rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information. Each rendering device performs an operation based on rendering device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) included in the production control device (peripheral control board 1530) configures the production control unit 5020 by software, and the CPU executes another computer program. Is realized by. It should be noted that the effect control unit 5020 may be configured by a different arithmetic circuit and may be configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, details of the configurations of modules and the like that realize the above-described functions will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but part or all may be configured as hardware.

In the present embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each effect device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like, as modules related to rendering. Further, a performance control unit 5020 for creating performance device control information for driving each performance device based on the main command is included.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and transfers it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is a 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times by 8 bits. The main command buffer 5110, which is output as follows, receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command and confirms that the command is correct. If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information indicating the contents related to the production among the game state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the presence or absence of winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, the result of the special drawing lottery, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, etc. can be included in the main command. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor outputs such as door opening, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of a reel, success or failure of a role at the time of stop, and the like can be mentioned. It should be noted that the commands given here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the contents of the effect.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the content of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is a command related to production. When the command is determined to be related to the effect, it is passed to the effect control unit 5020.

The performance control unit 5020 specifies the layer to be the target of performance control from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing an effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting/blinking of a lamp, operation of a role object, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification patterns, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler executing unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and characters, and a liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. included.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame cycle (1f=approximately 33.334 milliseconds) that is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal display module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

The sound source built-in VDP 1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated, for example, by a method of expanding the character data designated by the liquid crystal display list command at the designated position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control unit 5320 executes the sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for executing each effect of the lamp, the sound, and the motor, and includes one or a plurality of sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs an operation defined in advance in the sub effect scheduler data.

The sub effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of each effect device, and executes the sub effect scheduler data included in the sub effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1-frame intervals and a sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect devices at 1-millisecond intervals. included. As described above, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it becomes possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is 1 ms, it becomes possible to promptly deal with a malfunction in the operation of the accessory.

The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than liquid crystal display, but in the present embodiment, as an example, about three kinds of effect control of sound (sound) output, lighting/blinking of a lamp, and operation of a role object. explain. It should be noted that the effect control by the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 is the same except for the execution cycle, and will be described without distinction. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of rendering device will be described.

First, a case of performing an effect by outputting a sound will be described. If the sub effect block data includes the scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. When a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameters. A plurality of schedulers can be activated. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and effect sound effects by different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel, and sounds can be output at the same time. .. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads the sound source data designated by the sound source driving data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case of performing an effect with a lamp will be described. When the sub effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameter. Note that it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers as in the case of sound output, and it is possible to control a plurality of lamps and layers in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data for each cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond), and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously generate and output ramp data in a single cycle. With this configuration, the ramp data output is changed to the next operation of the ramp data creation in response to the increase in the ramp control processing time due to the increase of the ramp system or the overlap of the ramp layers. By setting the cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the ramp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output, and the previously generated lamp drive data is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to turn on/blink each lamp. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The control of lighting/blinking of the LED is similar to that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a drive device (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for operating the accessory will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for controlling the driving device, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. When a drive device control function (eg, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. It is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers as in the case of sound output, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs it to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, the motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a regardless of the DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the timing of outputting from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all the motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the completion of the serial transmission of all the motor data, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission becomes an overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame cycle becomes longer. Is not enough. In the present embodiment, by shifting the timing of the latch signal output corresponding to the motor data serial transmission, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission is realized to 0, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using the DMA, and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission can be similarly set to 0. At the same time that the motor drive data is output, the performance drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each performance drive photo information is received by serial communication via the parallel-serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In this embodiment, the scheduler data can have various structures. For example, a call function for taking in other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, temporarily executes the other scheduler data specified by the call function and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to utilize general-purpose effect contents in various scenes, as in the case of calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the effect contents during the lottery and guess the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the call function can be used for general purpose production contents in various scenes, so that such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result and the like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function for switching the effect contents depending on the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the process defined by the scheduler data, and when executing the conditional branch function, determines the game state based on the main command and executes the effect contents according to the game state. .. By doing so, it is possible to deal with a variety of game states that branch with a single scheduler data. The game state used for conditional branching includes, for example, the result of a lottery performed during the game and the presence/absence of operation of buttons and the like by the player. The spinning reel type game machine may use the stopped state of the rotating reel, and the pachinko machine may use the winning state to the starting winning port. Further, the condition may be branched depending on whether or not an error occurs during the game.

The effect contents after the conditional branch can be configured in various ways. For example, after the conditional branch, the processing may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by the conditional branch, it may be configured to return to the process before the branch. According to the latter mode, for example, after the process of temporarily outputting the sound effect when the button is pressed during the game, it is possible to return to the conventional effect without a feeling of discomfort.

As described above, the game machine may include various effect devices, and as an example, may include a display device for displaying an image. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image, such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel and a plasma display, can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that expands an image into a bitmap according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like in which a character or the like to be displayed on the screen is prepared as a bitmap can be configured.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 313 is an explanatory view showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a case where the main effect control is a sub effect that is executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be described, and a sound output will be described as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub-effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device when executing the effect. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for reproducing the phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping the phrase being reproduced, "VOL_PH" for setting the volume level during phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and the control specified by the parameters is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels will be described as 4 for easy understanding. Further, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volume 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the channels Ch1 to Ch4 and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. Does not mean that

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by the channel management works 5507[1] to 5507[4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right part of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is performed. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a designation of whether or not to repeat the reproduction. These pieces of information are designated by the sound module 5500 based on the function for sound.

As described above, in FIG. 313, the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment has been shown by taking sound output control as an example. The sub-effect scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler specified by the sub-effect block data and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, the function for controlling each rendering device is called and processed by the module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, driving device module 5700) corresponding to each rendering device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The module configuration and the basic concept of control in the effect control of the gaming machine have been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from the reception of the main command to the acquisition of the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data required for production control]
FIG. 314A is a diagram illustrating a configuration until data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. When the production control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 as described in FIG. 312, the command analysis module 5200 analyzes the main command and notifies the production control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

The effect control unit 5020, based on the layer data table, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the hold effect), a game instruction layer (a game instruction Based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200 for each of the layer to be performed), the communication error layer (the layer that notifies the communication error), the notification layer (the layer that performs various notifications), and the abnormality notification layer (the layer that performs the abnormality notification) , Acquisition and update management of the effect block data number corresponding to each layer. Also, the obtained effect block data number is passed to the effect block control unit 5040. If the effect block number is, for example, a fluctuation pattern layer, based on the fluctuation pattern number, a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern, a liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern, and a sub effect block data for each fluctuation pattern It is determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) that are common effects within a series of effects (for example, effects executed from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect contents and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect for each effect block based on the effect block number, it is possible to synchronize the effects by each effect device. In addition, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern layer is at the bottom and the abnormality notification layer is at the top, and the more important information is displayed on the front. This is a configuration for.

When the production block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (production block number) corresponding to each layer, the scheduler control unit (liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub production block) corresponding to each layer. The control unit 5320) acquires corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect.

For example, when the main command is the start winning command, the holding layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of starting winning. 5053 is acquired. Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted, and the fluctuation pattern layer is specified. Furthermore, the command is transmitted when the occurrence of an error or a warning is notified, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. In addition, a plurality of effects can be simultaneously overlapped by performing the effect for each layer.

When the liquid crystal production block data 5051 is acquired from the liquid crystal production block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal production block data number, the liquid crystal production block control unit 5310 causes the liquid crystal production 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to display the liquid crystal. Start the production 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to perform the processing of the function defined in the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

Further, when the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5332. The liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is activated by. The liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to perform the processing of the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

When the sub effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053. When the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 activates the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 causes the sub-effect 1ms. Start the scheduler.

Furthermore, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub-effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub-effect schedule data 5073 has no difference in execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. As a result, it becomes possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers having different execution cycles, and the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the rendering device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed by different schedulers at the same time, which enables sharing of scheduler data, prevents the same type of failure from occurring at multiple locations, and also reduces the data capacity. it can.

Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 314B is a diagram for explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. For the step-up notice, four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed. By executing the production in which the production contents are developed in stages, the player can expect the variation display result of the symbols. Suggest a degree.

In the step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the step-up 2 effect ends. The same effect is executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect, respectively, the notice effect ends.

In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice production in accordance with the liquid crystal production. Since different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up production in the sound production, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progress state (stage) of the production. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one kind of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

In addition, when the step-up notice liquid crystal production progresses to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage, so multiple step-up productions can be performed simultaneously at the same time. There is a period to be seen. As described above, in the lamp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data even for the subsequent step-up effect. However, in the present embodiment, a plurality of schedulers can execute the same scheduler data at the same time. Is becoming Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the effect execution periods overlap.

Specifically, when the step up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 production, the same step-up is performed when the step-up 2 production is started immediately before the end of the step-up 1 production. The advance notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously (overlapping) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate. It has been achieved.

The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled and is defined in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. To process the specified function. Each module processes a function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data required to drive the rendering device, and outputs the drive data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 315 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and controls various effect devices by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 315 shows the structure of the scheduler data 5401 referred to for setting this command.

In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number specified by the effect block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence relationship between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect numbers is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer that indicates the storage address of the scheduler data. Although there are as many effect management pointers as the number corresponding to the effect numbers, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In the present embodiment, the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number. In the example of FIG. 315, the production numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent the storage addresses of the production management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may have a configuration in which effect numbers and effect management pointers are associated with each other, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for effect management pointers using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data. Processing may be performed. Further, if the address value of the performance management pointer is used as the performance number, the amount of data in the performance management table can be reduced, and the above-described search is unnecessary, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 315, each command forming the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of a function and a parameter. As described above, the function is a command for controlling the rendering device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the rendering device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (driving device), and user. The sequence control is a basic function for performing effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. A detailed description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320.

In the example shown in FIG. 315, the "call" function is specified at the address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and then sets the address designated by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily return to the address designated by the parameter to process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous process based on the pointer value saved as described above.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function next to the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the production command ends these processes, the "call" is returned to the designated address A2, and the process proceeds to the next address A3.

As described above, by utilizing the "call" function, the contents of the series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n can be fetched into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced and the creation load thereof can be reduced. In game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the effect contents during the lottery and guess the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the general-purpose effect contents can be utilized in various situations by calling, it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the lottery result and the like. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being spoiled.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function as described above, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as “accessory action number set”, “voice action number set”, and “lamp action number set”. This is because the scheduler execution unit 5060 merely specifically instructs a very limited function that can be realized.

In the example shown in FIG. 315, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the specified number of frames and continues processing the scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is awaited until the time designated by the parameter Prm[031] has elapsed. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, if the value of the parameter Prm[031] is not 0 in the “NOP” function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 once ends the processing of the scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing, and if this value is 0, , Perform processing to move to the function of the next address.

In the present embodiment, a work having the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 314A is used to specify the voice operation number and the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. Also, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 314A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be designated in parallel from these layers.

Similarly, after the address A11 of the conditional branch, the scheduler data is defined by the function and the parameter. In the example shown in FIG. 315, no conditional branch is provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, the accessory command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), and the like can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. .. Instead of these settings, the block BL3 or the like may be loaded by the "call" function.

In scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect contents may be generated and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 315, if the condition of “random number value≦Th1?” is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. If the address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition "Th1<random number value≤Th2?" next to the address A2 (address A2+1), the address A31 and the subsequent addresses are determined according to the value of the random number. Different performances are executed. In this way, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to the random number, the effect contents can be switched at random by the random number, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching the effect contents in this manner is referred to as "effect lottery" in the present specification.

In the production lottery, all of the display, sound, lamp, and drive device may be switched, or only some of them may be switched. When switching all, it is sufficient to specify all the contents of display, sound and lamp in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. To switch only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Further, in the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used to define that different scheduler data is called according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device perform the effect lottery independently, and as a result, the effect modes realized by the combination become extremely diverse, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

However, regardless of the result of the display lottery of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device, it is preferable that these productions be finished at the same time in order to realize a production without any discomfort. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data that is the selection target of the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends at the same time. It should be noted that it is not an essential requirement that the production is finished at the same time, and the production times may not be the same.

The effect lottery using the scheduler data has an advantage that the effect contents can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device. For example, when the drive device is performing an 8-shaped distribution operation at the time when the production lottery is instructed and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the production lottery related to the drive device. May be. Similarly, regarding the display, the sound, and the lamp, the production lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the production lottery is instructed. Further, in the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the effect lottery is to switch the effect contents by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the production lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of productions than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the sound output will be described. FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process designated by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs the sound. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. A work 5507 for operation management is prepared for each scheduler 5502. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler operation unit 5060 identifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and identifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice action number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with voice action numbers. In this embodiment, the voice action number corresponds to the storage address of the voice action number table. Any identification information can be used as the voice action number, but as with the case of the above-mentioned production number, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the volume of the voice action number table and the processing load when referencing the table. Has the advantage that

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In this embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. Functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320.

In the example shown in FIG. 316, the "call" function is defined at the address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown) and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H designated by the parameter and reproduces it.

Also, an example of the structure of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In this embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel designated when the phrase is reproduced. The left and right pan pots and the upper and lower pan pots are the left/right/upper/left output balance of the speakers provided in the gaming machine. Volume is the output volume. The song number is an identification number of a sound to be reproduced. When the tune number with built-in sound source is notified to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source reads sound source data corresponding to the tune number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces sound. The loop is a designation of whether or not the sound is repeatedly reproduced. Stereo is a designation of whether or not to perform stereo output.

A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the drawing. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is an address of scheduler data 5505 executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 316, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3 as the process progresses. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is designated by the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The sound module 5500 executes the following function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops that are multiply designated by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call) in the processing after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, call nesting is performed. The number is 2. When the second call ends and the first call returns, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The loop is similar. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 317 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting/flashing control. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for lamps. A work 5603 for operation management is prepared for each scheduler 5602. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the lamp operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with lamp operation numbers. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used as the lamp operation number, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the lamp operation number table and the processing load when referring to the table by using the storage address, as in the case of the above-mentioned production number. There is an advantage that it is possible.

The ramp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In this embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the ramp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters, like the effect data (FIG. 315). The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 319.

In the example shown in FIG. 317, the "call" function is defined at the address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown) and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

At address LA3, gradation pattern setting is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored in the address LA11 designated by the parameter. A gradation scheduler 5604 is provided in association with each of the lamp schedulers 5602. The lamp is turned on with the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value has elapsed, the lamp is replaced with the gradation data 2. Light up. Here, an example in which two kinds of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more kinds of gradation data are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings for the addresses LA12 and later, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between the gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. The gradation scheduler 5604 finishes the lighting of the lamp after executing the series of processes of the addresses LA11 to LA1n. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the process of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the process of the next address until it is stopped (address LAn).

A work 5603 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5602. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the drawing. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The ramp executes the next function when this value becomes zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 317, when the gradation data defined in the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 shifts to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is ended and the processing shifts to the processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 317, as the process proceeds, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is an address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the figure, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12 as the process proceeds. The loop count is the loop repeat count, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be nested.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Next, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. The control is similar to that of the lamp module 5600, and therefore the illustration is omitted. The drive device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive device. The drive module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, a movement amount (rotation step angle of the stepping motor), a movement time, a movement speed (motor rotation speed), an excitation method, a trapezoidal drive, a rotation direction, and the like. In addition, instructions to perform a return operation to return to the origin position and instructions to stop the mechanical end (stop when the movable range of the drive unit is mechanically limited and urged to the limit position of the movable range) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed stepwise when starting and stopping the rotation.

The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive will be described later in FIG.

[18-5. function]
The example in which the function is used in the module used for effect control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. 318 to 320 are diagrams showing an example of a function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are categorized into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. The functions belonging to each group will be described below.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of production. FIG. 318 shows an example of a function of sequence control. The outline of each function will be described below.

“STOP” is a function that represents the end of scheduler data. “NOP” is a weighting function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions depends on the processing cycle for executing the “NOP” function. If the frame is executed in one frame, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in the present embodiment. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is to be executed at a cycle of 1 ms, if the number of executions is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" has the number of executions (number of frames), the scheduler memory number, the mask value and the comparison value as parameters, and when the condition based on the scheduler memory number, the mask value and the comparison value is satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function is terminated and the condition is changed. If not satisfied, this is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

“MEMW” is a function that writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area using the target scheduler work number and value as parameters. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), specifies the beginning of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. In addition, if the number of loops is set to "0", an infinite loop is set. “LOOP” is a function for designating the end of the repeating process (loop).

“RET” is a function for returning processing to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the production management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, which executes a process from a specified address (block), and has information such as an address value and a label for specifying a callee, which is set as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the processing of the call destination, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the processing returns to the previous processing.

“SUBC” selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the branch table, and executes the selected process. That is, the "call" function is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. 323. When the process of the callee is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the process following the "SUBC" function).

"SUBJ" selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “JUMP” function described later is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. 324. The process of the callee is continued as it is without returning to the process of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function. "JUMP" sets the address designated by the parameter to the effect management pointer, and continues the process from the designated address or label.

“REQ” is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. 325. Like "REQ", "REQF" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start up. In "REQ", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" makes it possible to independently execute the processing of the scheduler data to be executed for a specified period. For example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, another scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It can be prevented from being disabled.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The function belonging to the lamp group is a function for controlling the flow of lamp production. FIG. 319 shows an example of a function relating to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

“HPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for turning on the lamp based on the gradation data designated by the parameter. In "HPPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp is reset and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

Similar to “HPPLAY”, “KPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproducing process for lighting the lamp based on the gradation data designated by the parameter. In "KPLAY", if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp being reproduced is continued without being reset.

“HPPLAY2” is a function for executing the ramp gradation data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the gradation data with a parameter. The processing is similar to that of “HPPLAY”. Similar to “HPPLAY2”, “KPLAY2” is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process. The processing is similar to that of "KPLAY".

"HPPLAY" and "KPLAY" execute designated lamp gradation data reproduction processing for reproducing the lamp gradation data designated by the parameter. When the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted during the reproduction by “HPPLAY” and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning, and the lamp gradation data is reproduced during the reproduction by “KPLAY”. Playback continues without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY" while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular process is executed.

In addition to the function of "HPPLAY" described above, "HPPLAY2" has the same process as "HPPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

In addition to the function of "KPLAY" described above, "KPLAY2" is the same as "KPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound)]
The function belonging to the sound group is a function for controlling the sound output. 319 and FIG. 320 show examples of functions related to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, it is reset and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process for outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter, like "SPPLAY". In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound reproduction is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping the reproduction of the sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter.

“PAN_PH” is the end of the panpot using the transition time and the panpot end coordinate position, which are also specified by the parameters, from the voice output coordinate position when the “PAN_PH” function starts executing the phrase being played specified by the parameter. It is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the designated transition time. In addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can also specify the panpot start coordinate position by a parameter. As with the "PAN_PH" function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of the function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position whose position is designated by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the designated transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the phrase being played specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameters. It is a function to increase/decrease the volume value in the transition time. In addition to the function of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" can also specify the fade start volume value as a parameter. As with the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase at the start of the function is a parameter. It is a function for increasing/decreasing the volume value at the transition time designated from the fade start volume value designated by the above to the fade end volume value.

“VOL_PH” is a function for increasing/decreasing the volume value of the phrase being played specified by the parameter with the volume value specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function for muting the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function for canceling the mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

“SCPLAY” and “SXCPPLAY” execute a designated channel music reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning when the reproduction is performed by "SCPLAY", and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption during the reproduction by "SXCPPLAY". In other words, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPPLAY" while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular process is executed.

“PAN_CH” performs the panpot targeting the phrase by “PAN_PH” described above, whereas the panpot targeting the ch (channel) is performed. The ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". As for “PAN_CH2”, the above-mentioned “PAN_PH2” performs a panpot targeting a phrase, whereas it performs a panpot targeting ch, except that “ch is designated by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch”. The processing remains the same.

“VOL_FADE_CH” performs the fade targeting the phrase while “VOL_FADE_PH” described above performs the fade targeting the ch. The ch is designated as a parameter and the phrase is changed to the ch as “VOL_FADE_PH”. Processing does not change. As for “VOL_FADE_CH2”, the above-mentioned “VOL_FADE_PH2” performs the fade targeting the phrase, whereas the fade targeting the ch target is performed, except that the ch is designated by the parameter and the phrase is changed to “CH_FADE_PH2”. Processing does not change.

"VOL_CH" increases/decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas "VOL_PH" increases/decreases the volume value for the ch. The ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". As for “VOL_MUTE_ON_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” mutes the target phrase (mute), while muting the target ch (ch) is specified by the parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". As for “VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” cancels the mute for the phrase, whereas the mute cancels for the ch. ch is the phrase specified by the parameter. The process is the same as that of "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
The function belonging to the motor group is a function for controlling the output of the motor or the solenoid. FIG. 320 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

“MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to regenerate an operation based on the motor data number designated in the parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor designated by the parameter to regenerate the operation based on the motor data number. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user's group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 320, and an outline of each function will be described.

“MBUF_SET” executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND0" are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command to start drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200, and the same operation as the main command is performed. "MEMC" executes a scheduler memory copy process for copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which the functions necessary for executing a series of processes are defined in the execution order. Although one or more schedulers are provided for each purpose of management, all the schedulers can execute all the functions, and the schedulers for sound can execute the functions related to the lamp and the schedulers for character products. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) among the plurality of schedulers that can execute the sound functions, and it is possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. There is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

FIG. 321 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. Hereinafter, the outline of representative types of schedulers will be described.

First, describing an example of a scheduler relating to state transition, there is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the game state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions when a predetermined condition is met, for example, when the player operates a production button, wins an execution lottery for production, or when a predetermined time elapses from the start of variation, transition to another state. To do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

To the scheduler targeted for sound, the background for controlling the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the variable display of the symbols, the scheduler for executing the symbol sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and the output when the notice production is executed There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound to be played, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for lamps includes a background for controlling lighting and blinking of the lamp associated with the background display and variable display of symbols, and a scheduler for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01 ), a scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp when the notice production is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp when the notice is executed by an accessory. The processing cycle of the ramp target scheduler is 1f (frame).

Also, a scheduler that controls sounds and lamps in conjunction is defined. In such a scheduler, a sound/lamp notification layer that performs sound output and lamp lighting/blinking is provided in order to notify the outside of such things as running out of balls and ball clogging and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing the scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound/lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to 05) that is generally used to execute an effect in which sound output and lighting/blinking of a lamp are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

The motor-targeted scheduler includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operation, and a scheduler for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for performing settings when RAM is cleared ( MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler for executing the motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the placement of the accessory (MOTINI_SCH), for executing a motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the action of the accessory by the effect or the like.

The scheduler for executing the action of the accessory according to the production or the like is a general-purpose scheduler that is used without depending on the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the specific accessory or the type of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

The processing cycle of the scheduler for motors is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for game state management, sounds and lamps (this embodiment 1f=about 33.334 ms). Is becoming

The number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, but the number of schedulers may be controlled to dynamically increase or decrease according to the gaming state or the advance notice. As a result, it becomes possible to activate each scheduler without depending on the number of prizes or the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and it is possible to reduce restrictions for executing effects.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (production 1)]
The outline of the types and functions of the schedulers that perform a series of controls by combining the functions used in production control and these functions has been described above. Below, with reference to the drawings, specific application examples of scheduler data and functions explain.

[18-7-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 322A is a diagram showing an example of an operation of an accessory that is controlled using the scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322A, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, a logo role object 5001, a star role object 5002 (a left star role object 5002a, a middle star role object 5002b, a right star role object 5002c) and a board role object 5003. Are placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged on the upper left side of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it drops (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the production is completed. Furthermore, the logo work 5001 can be moved vertically and can be vibrated vertically and horizontally before and after the movement.

The star role object 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star role object 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star role object 5002b is arranged on the center, and the right star role object 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star role object 5002 can be operated independently, and one or a plurality of star role objects 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the effect contents.

The left star role object 5002a moves to the lower left, and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle starry product 5002b moves downward and can be moved to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to a position slightly lower right of the center of the game area. Each star role object 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final reaching position, or may be stopped after returning to the final reaching position to an intermediate position.

The board member 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hook member 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the operation of the production button by the player or the lottery result of the hooked goods notice production, etc., it moves from the initial position to the intermediate position and temporarily stops, then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. The operation mode is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001 as well as the logo accessory 5001, it is possible to perform an effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after the movement.

Next, the flow of the notice effect executed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 322B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star role product notice and a button (BTN) logo feature product fall notice will be described. It should be noted that the flow of the notice effect including the hook notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 322B shows an example of the execution timing of the notice effect executed in the series of variable display from the start to the change of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the scheduler and the scheduler data used at this time. is there. In the series of variable displays shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice and the button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, a group notice, a star role notice, and a button (BTN) logo feature drop notice are executed. Scheduler data for controlling lighting of lamps, output of sounds, image output, operation of character parts, and the like is executed for each notice effect.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each of the notice effects will be extracted, and the control and the function configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Fig. 323) that controls the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Fig. 324) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star role object in the star-effect notice. Motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 325 to 327) for controlling the operation of 5002 and motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 328) for controlling the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory drop notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control during step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (step-up notice lottery result value). As shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01, and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02”.

FIG. 323 is a diagram illustrating the content of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, the function “SUBC:YKK_STP:TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up notification branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” and identifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the content of the step-up notification work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

The step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the addresses of the scheduler data are stored. It should be noted that SUBC_NON is an address for dummy call indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the notice is not won. .. SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” specifies the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, executes the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinks in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven by using the background/symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH01”.

After that, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the processing of the calling source (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes ramp tone data reproduction processing (KPLAY) by designating ramp tone pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step up, and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. The wait process of is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinks in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

After that, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the next process of the calling source (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

The step-up notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. Firstly, the scheduler data for the lottery results can be called with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in this embodiment) that are dynamically rewritten. is there. Depending on the content of the notice, there are some cases where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the two-branch such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the determination increases and the management becomes complicated because it becomes complicated. On the other hand, "SUBC" easily solves the above problem by using the work memory contents as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of work memories and the number of call address tables for branching are one, but it is also possible to process complicated conditional branching by one action by making them both. Secondly, since it takes the form of "CALL", it becomes possible to execute the common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and it is not necessary to describe the scheduler data after the branch for the number of branches. By describing one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements of the call address table for branching, the branching process may not be performed and the "SUBC" function may be ended.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and call the selected scheduler data. In a simple conditional branch, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data for each branch destination, but with the function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. , It is possible to easily add/change the production contents and improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in advance notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the advance notice is executed to the end by receiving the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similar to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) “LMP_SCH03” as shown in FIG. 322B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, the notice can be executed in parallel.

FIG. 324 is a diagram illustrating the content of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is started, first, the function “KPLAY:LMP_SCH03:PTA_CUT_STA” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights up (blinks) for 1 second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used.

Then, in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of loops of the parameter set to 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one frame, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to the function "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed a maximum number of times. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. Button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operating state of the effect button, "0: button OFF" when the effect button is not operated, "1: button ON" when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” are rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". It The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB” (function “LOOP”) of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” of the calling source. Therefore, when the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is ended.

On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notification button is ON in the button cut-in notification branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” is the function “SUBJ:YKK_CUT:TBL_LMP_CUT”, and the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” is the target scheduler work number “YKK_CUT” and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CMP”. Is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in advance notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CUT” stores the address of the button cut-in advance notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. It should be noted that SUBJ_NON is an address for dummy call indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the notice is not won. .. SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are scheduler data addresses for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is turned on in red (the gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by the lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the wait processing of 150 frames is performed to continue for 5 seconds. Let At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH03”.

Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is JUMP instead of CALL, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP", and the scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the calling source returns. do not do. Therefore, the end of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is terminated when the "STOP" function included in the "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in the schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed 2 There is.

The button cut-in advance notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. Firstly, the scheduler data for the lottery results can be called with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in this embodiment) that are dynamically rewritten. Depending on the contents of the notice, there are some cases where the range of the lottery result value will be several hundreds, and in the two-branch like the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage corrections etc. .. In "SUBJ", the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of work memories and the number of call address tables for branching are one, but it is also possible to process complicated conditional branching by one action by making them both. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", different processing can be executed for each branched scheduler data after the execution of the "SUBJ" function. Similarly to "SUBC", if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements of the call address table for branching, the branching process is not performed and the "SUBC" function is ended, in order to cope with the problem of the program. You may do it.

That is, like the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and selects the selected scheduler data. The processing can be transited to, and the same effect as that of the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Also, the function "SUBJ" is different from the function "SUBC" in that it continuously executes the processing of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the processing of the call source, and thus is suitable for executing the processing alternatively. ing. For example, by using the function "SUBJ" when the contents of the effect to be executed differ depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to prevent the effect from being redundantly executed. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing by the scheduler data of the calling source, it is possible to perform the common post-processing after the processing of the calling destination, and the processing can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, since it becomes easy to add/change by simply changing the branch destination of the table format, it is possible to improve the development efficiency and to easily change the specification of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control in starry goods notice]
Subsequently, the control of the starry product notice executed in the latter half of the variation in the present embodiment will be described. Reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, and when it shifts to the latter half of the variation, a group notice is generated and the star role notice is executed independently of the group notice. As for the star role product notice, a plurality of types of star role products 5002 (three types of left star role product 5002a, middle star role product 5002b, and right star role product 5002c in the present embodiment) that can be operated by a driving body (motor) are provided. By operating, the degree of expectation of symbol variation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of the star role objects 5002 that appear, the higher the degree of expectation.

The star role notice of this embodiment is executed by driving the star role notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star role star scheduler data scheduler) as shown in FIG. 322B. To be done. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star role object 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also be used. ..

325 to 327 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the starry product notice of the present embodiment. 325 is scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" for controlling the entire flow and the left star role object 5002a, FIG. 326 is scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" for controlling the right star role object 5002c, and FIG. 327 is a scheduler for controlling the middle star role object 5002b. It is a figure explaining the data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3."

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, the function “SUBC:YKK_HYA:TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star role notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified starry product notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA” and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the starry product notice work area “YKK_HYA”. .. In the starry product notice work area “YKK_HYA”, the lottery result value of the starry product notice is stored, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the starry product notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”.

The starry product notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" stores the address of the starry product appearance scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the addresses of scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for dummy call that indicates that no processing is performed. By preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to disable the accessory when the notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the starry thing announcement. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is the left staring role 5002a only, SUBC_MOT_c2a is the left staring role 5002a, and SUBC_MOT_c2a is the left staring thing 5002a. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star role objects 5002.

In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that a star role product notice for causing a left star role product 5002a, a middle star role product 5002b, and a right star role product 5002c to appear in the star role product preview work area "YKK_HYA" is displayed. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star role product 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role product notice is "1", and when the left star role product 5002a and the right star role product 5002c are operated, the star role product notice lottery is selected. “2” is set as the result value.

The scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” first executes the function “MPLAY” corresponding to the motor regeneration process by designating the parameter “PTA_HYA_LEF” indicating the pattern of the appearance operation of the left star role object 5002a. At this time, the function “MPLAY” is executed by the motor scheduler “MOT_SHC02” in which the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” by the function “REQ”. The function "REQ" is a function for executing the scheduler data designated by the parameter by the scheduler also designated by the parameter. Here, the right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role object 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "REQ" is used to execute the middle star role object 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the middle star role object 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04". In the present embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star symbol 5002c and the middle star symbol 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star symbol 5002a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by executing the scheduler data for operating the star parts 5002 by different schedulers.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a wait process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this waiting time, the left star role object 5002a operates in the designated manner. After the end of the wait process, the function “RET” is executed, the calling star star trailer motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is returned to, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is completed by the function “stop”.

Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 326. The right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role object 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 326, the parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star role object 5002c is designated and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. .. Then, the weight process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the right starry prize 5002c. After the wait processing is completed, the processing is ended by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 327, the control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be described. The middle star role object 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the middle star role object 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is started, as shown in FIG. 327, the parameter “PTA_HYA_MID” indicating the appearance operation pattern (pattern) of the middle star role object 5002b is specified and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. .. Then, the weight process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the middle star role product 5002b. After the wait processing is completed, the processing is ended by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role object 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role object 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role object 5002b are set to the function "REQ". It becomes possible to operate each accessory in parallel by executing using. That is, the operation of each character can be executed in parallel without performing special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that, first of all, a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when one scheduler performs multiple operations corresponding to the advance notice pattern, the number of combinations becomes enormous, and the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel with each other, it is possible to easily control by creating and calling the minimum number of scheduler data. In addition, in the present embodiment, an example in which three types of character objects are operated in parallel has been described, but if the operation of the character objects is not hindered, it is possible to execute more character objects in parallel. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control in advance notice of logo material fall]
Next, the control of the logo accessory drop notice executed in the latter half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. The notice of the fall of the logo character is executed independently of the notice of the group and the star. The logo accessory drop notice is a notice effect in which the logo effect 5001 imitating the logo of the game machine operates so as to vertically drop in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of a big hit being higher than usual. Is high.

As shown in FIG. 322B, the logo character fall notice of the present embodiment is performed by driving the logo character fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" by the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (logo character scheduler scheduler data scheduler). Executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 by a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09).

FIG. 328 is a view for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that performs motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is started, first, the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_GAT” is executed, and then the weight process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_LGO_GAT”. Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used.

Then, in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of loops of the parameter set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo bonus product fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. It

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo bonus product fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of the button logo bonus product notice work area “YKK_LGO”, determines the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo bonus fall notice is stored in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO", and "0: not executed" if the button logo bonus fall notice execution lottery is missed, the button Execution of the notice of the fall of the logo material When the lottery is won, "1: Execution of notice of the fall of the logo" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo bonus fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo bonus fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler when the logo bonus fall notice is not executed in the button logo feature drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" The data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO” (function “LOOP”) of the scheduler “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that is the calling source. Therefore, when the button logo bonus fall notice is missed, the loop process is executed 90 times, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop process, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. ..

On the other hand, when "1: Logo drop notice execution" is set in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo bonus drop announcement execution lottery is won, the button logo bonus drop is performed. In the notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of executing the logo accessory fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo post drop button branch call address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo bonus fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If it does, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo bonus fall notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button logo character drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" is set to the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" when the logo character drop notice button is OFF. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BGN:TBL_MOT_LGO” (function “RET”) of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” of the calling source. As a result, the process further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the player wins the button logo bonus fall notice execution lottery, if no effect button input is detected during the 90 loop processes, the process exits from the loop process and the function "STOP" is executed. Execution is performed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button logo bonus drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" will be displayed when the logo bonus drop notice button is ON. The data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND:COM_LGO_ON”. The function “COMMAND” is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as when the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Furthermore, the function “NOP:120” executes a wait process for 120 frames (about 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs the dropping operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

Further, by executing the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_INI”, the logo accessory 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Then, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:90”, and the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position in the meantime. After the weight process is completed, the execution of the logo accessory drop operation is completed, so the function "MEMW:YKK_LGO:0" is executed, the button logo accessory notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the scheduler of the calling source is executed. The process returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN". As a result, the process further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but because the button logo bonus notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: Not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo bonus is executed. However, the remaining loop number processing is performed, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is completed by the function “STOP”.

As described above, by internally issuing a command when dropping the logo role object 5001, it is possible to display an effect on the liquid crystal only when the logo role object 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo role object 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect devices in cooperation with each other at an appropriate timing as needed, and to perform a more interesting effect. ..

In the present embodiment, the function “COMMAND” is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal on the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. However, by processing the command issued by the function “COMMAND” on the program side, control is transferred from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result in the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that cannot be controlled by the function command can be performed. Further, the advantage of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuing timing is the processing timing as it is, so that time management and execution determination by the program are not necessary. Further, it becomes possible to interactively process an external input (button, jog dial, touch pad) by the user which is not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation and issue a command using the function “COMMAND” to perform the processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the function “COMMAND” has a function of transmitting a command having a fixed value. However, instead of a fixed value, a work area is designated and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. May be.

[18-8. Example of applying scheduler data (at power-on)]
Next, the scheduler data executed in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 329 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

Upon receiving the power-on command, the scheduler execution unit 5060 drives the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” with the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”.

When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” progresses, a screen corresponding to the sub internal state is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. 329. To be done. At this time, the main game state is a standby state. When the standby state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins the start winning port, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 330 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, and the relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is activated or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control in the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. It As described with reference to FIG. 312, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis processing in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event that has occurred in the main command analysis process, activates the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Further, even when the function “COMMAND0” (FIG. 319) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis processing, similarly to the main command. To be done.

When a main command or a command output by the function “COMMAND0” is received, a command for executing control by the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis processing. The generated commands include a command to activate the scheduler and a command to control various effect devices (sub internal output command).

In the command for activating the scheduler, for example, the scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change of the game state in the main control board 1310 and the change of the sub internal state due to the progress of control in the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board such as the start prize Scheduler data for executing effects corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, in addition to directly starting the scheduler from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function "REQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (sub internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The command for controlling the effect device is temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer, and processed in the order stored from the beginning of the buffer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of schedulers can be hierarchically combined and executed by receiving one main command by further activating another scheduler from the scheduler. As a result, various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, a plurality of types of effects can be mounted in parallel while realizing various effects controls. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine, such as improving the efficiency of debugging work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the command analysis processing can be made common by the command output by the function “COMMAND0”. This makes it possible to share the scheduler data selection logic and the function parameter determination logic by command analysis, resulting in the problem that a huge number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. Can be suppressed.

Next, the startup of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when the power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 331 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when the power is turned on in this embodiment.

As described with reference to FIG. 330, when the game machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis processing, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed to issue a command to create a sub internal state, and further outputs a lamp or sound corresponding to the sub internal state, if necessary. ..

To describe the scheduler to be executed in detail, first, the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Then, when the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” is executed by using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. After that, the function “NOP:900” is executed to enter the standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demonstration state. After that, the function “NOP:300” is executed to enter the standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demonstration state. After that, the function “NOP:900” is executed to enter the standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transit to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Accordingly, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data “PTA_LAMP_GOTO” in the got prevention state. Further, by executing the function "SPLAY:PTA_SND_GOTO", reproduction of the sound is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. After that, the function “NOP:450” is executed to enter the standby state for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine is in a playable state, the game is started, and the game machine loops in this standby state until a game ball wins.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 can be set only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" can control the main control board 1310 as if it issued a command. For example, the initialization command when the power is turned on may have a fixed parameter, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. As a result, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (production 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which, instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo notice of fall of the accessory, the notice of drop of the kakuyaku is executed. Hakuyaku fall notice is divided into the first half and the latter half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, a control different from the control described so far is performed in that control is performed such that the parameters used for the first half notice are handed over to the second half notice.

[18-9-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of variable displays from the start to the change of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and (A) is the effect executed from the change start to the end and The scheduler data for executing the effect and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hook member 5003 in the hook member falling notice.

In the series of variable displays shown in FIG. 332(A), a step-up notice and a button (BTN) first half notice of a hook-shaped object drop notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, the group notice, the notice of the fall of the half-finished goods and the fall of the half-finished goods, which is continued from the first half, are executed. Scheduler data for controlling lighting of lamps, output of sounds, image output, operation of character parts, and the like is executed for each notice effect. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 332(B), the contents of the notice of the drop of the hook-shaped object will be described. As described above, the notice of the drop of the kakuyakumono is composed of the notice of the first half drop of the button (BTN) kakuyakumono and the notice of the latter half drop of the kakuyakumono.

In the first half of the button-crate accessory drop notice, which is the first half, the notice effect is advanced by operating the effect button. For this reason, even if the player has won the execution draw for the first half drop notice of the button-knife combination, unless the effect button is operated, the drop-effect of the knife-like product 5003 is not executed. On the other hand, in the latter half of the trailing hook notice drop notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the second half notice notice of the knife strike, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

If the player wins an execution lottery for the button-cage accessory first half fall notice and operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the knife-actuator 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, when the execution prize for the latter half drop notice of the board member is won in a state where the board member 5003 has dropped to the middle position, the board member 5003 drops to the lower position. That is, the hook-shaped object 5003 drops from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the hooked product falling notice, and drops to the lower part (lower position) in the latter half. Incidentally, when the execution lottery for the notice of the latter half drop of the board member is won, the board will drop to the lower portion regardless of the position of the board member 5003. Further, when the notice of the drop of the hook member ends, the hook member 5003 returns to the upper portion (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 332(B), the effect of dropping the hook product is executed in six types of patterns. More specifically, when the result of the execution drawing of the button-halting officer first-half fall notice is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, and therefore, when the leading-knife officer half-fall notice is non-winning (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the notice of the first half drop of the button-knife accessory and the notice of the latter half drop of the knife-like product are non-wins, the kakuyomi 5003 is not dropped and is maintained without moving from the upper portion. In the case of pattern 2, in the trailing notice of the hook member, the hook member 5003 is located at the upper part without dropping, while in the trailing notice of the latter half of the hook member, since the winning lottery is won, the hook member 5003 is moved from the upper portion to the lower portion. It falls at a stretch.

When winning the execution draw of the button-cage auditors product first-half fall notice, the presentation mode of the button-cutter accessory first-half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, four patterns of staging modes can be executed for the notice of dropping the hook-shaped object depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery of the notice for the latter half drop of the hook-shaped object.

If you win the execution draw of the button hook first half notice, you do not operate the production button, and if the result of the execution lottery of the hook second half notice is non-win, the hook 5003 will not drop. Remain on top (Pattern 3). If the result of the execution lottery for the button-halt auditors product second half fall notice is won and the result of the execution lottery for the latter half-fall notices is non-win, when the director button is operated, the hook symbol object 5003 Falls from the upper part to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the notice of the drop of the hook-shaped object (Pattern 4).

If you win the execution draw of the button half-effects first-half drop notice and do not operate the production button, and if you win the execution lottery of the half-game products second-half fall notice, you will not be operating the production button. The board member 5003 does not drop until the latter half notice of the fall of the object is started, and is positioned at the upper part, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half notice of the latter part drop (pattern 5). If the player wins the execution draw of the button hook first half notice, operates the production button, and if the player wins the execution lottery of the hook second half notice, when the production button is operated, the hook product 5003 starts from the top. It drops to the middle, and further falls from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half notice of the hook-shaped object (pattern 6).

As described above, six patterns of effect forms can appear in the hook product drop notice of the present embodiment, and the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hook product 5003 in the hook product drop notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 332(A), the button-coupling object first-half drop notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for controlling the operation of the board-coupling object first-half fall notice in the button-coupling article first-half fall notice and the latter half The second half fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for controlling the operation of the half prize object 5003 in the fall notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls in the notice of the drop of a hooked object]
FIG. 333 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the button-knife-member first-half-fall-notification scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for performing motor control in the button-knife-member first-half-fall warning that is the first half of the hook-and-mortar object fall notification of this embodiment. . As described above, when the player wins the execution draw for the first half fall notice of the button-knife effect, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function "LOOP", and when the effect button is operated, the effect tool 5003 is operated. Perform the production to be performed. When the execution drawing of the button-cutter accessory first half fall notice is non-winning, and when the effect button is not operated even if the player wins, the tool-catching article 5003 ends without operating. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used to execute the button-halves auditors first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”.

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing the effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 rattles the board 5003. After that, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_NTA_GAT”. Specifically, the hook member 5003 rattles and vibrates.

Then, in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of loops of the parameter set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” uses the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA1” and the button hook member first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” as parameters. Executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" of the button-coupling material, and based on the contents of the first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1" of the button-coupling material, scheduler data to be a branch destination. Specify the start address of. In the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the first-half notice of the drop of the button-couplings, the result of the execution lottery for the first-half notice of the fall of the button-couplings is stored. If the player wins the "non-winning" button hook first half drop notice execution lottery, "1: hook half first half drop notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the advance notice of the button-couplings first half fall corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" of the pulling result of the button-couplings first-half notice.

If "0: Non-win" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the first half fall notice of the button-couplings, the button-coupling substance is selected in the call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" for the lottery result for the first-half fall notice of the button-coupling products. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” when the first half fall notice is not executed is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” are only for the function “STOP”, and the result of the button hook component first half fall notice lottery is “non-win”, so the scheduler data is not executed without executing the button hook component first half fall notice. Terminates the execution of.

On the other hand, in the case where "1: Hakama Yakumono first half fall warning execution" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1" for button Hakaku Yakumono early fall notice, that is, when the player has won the execution draw of the first half drop notice In the first half drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" of the button-knife combination, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the time of execution of the hook-shaped product drop notice is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" are the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hook first half fall notice button branch call address. The table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" is used as a parameter.

The scheduler executing unit 5060 refers to the button-cage auditors first half fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be a branch destination based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. .. As in the case of the button cut-in notice or the button logo bonus notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and "0: Button OFF" when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, "1: button ON" is set. The operating state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button-crate auditors first half fall notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”.

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button scheduler has the first half fall notice button branch in the call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1” (function “RET”) of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” of the calling source. As a result, the process further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the player has won the execution draw of the button-cage auditors first half fall notice, if no input of the effect button is detected during the 90 loop processing, the process exits from the loop processing and the function "STOP" is exited. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hook member first half fall warning button ON in the button hook member first half fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" Hour motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_STA-MID” and issue the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the board member falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-MID” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the intermediate position. Further, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:120”, and during this period, the hook member 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function “MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:1”, “1” is written in the scheduler's blade position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, and the fact that the blade member 5003 has moved to the intermediate position is recorded. After that, the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is ended by the function “STOP”.

The first half of the notice of the drop of the kakuyakumono When the notice of the fall of the first half of the kakuyakumono is announced, the latter half of the notice of the kakuyakumono is started. FIG. 334 and FIG. 335 are views for explaining the contents of the Hakuyoke latter half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the latter half notice of the Hakuyoke fall notice, which is the latter half of the Katemono fall notice of the present embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used to execute the second half drop notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, similar to the button half first half drop notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”.

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is started, first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA2_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect indicating whether or not the board member 5003 is dropped on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. After that, the weighting process “NOP:90” for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of a big hit becomes large when the board member 5003 drops, the effect drawing is performed for 3 seconds to increase the player's expectation.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2”. In the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed with the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA2” and the board late-fall drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” as parameters. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the second half of the hooked goods drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”, and based on the contents of the second half of the hooked goods advance notice work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data of the branch destination. Specify the start address. "YKK_NTA2" is the work area for the fall notice of the latter half of the kakuyakumono. The result of the execution lottery for the notice of the latter half fall of the kakuyakumono is stored in the work area. If the player wins the second half fall notice execution of the kakuyakumono, "1: Kakeyakumono second half fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the notice of the latter half of the Kakuyaku-mono is corresponding to the index (address) of each record of the result of the Katemono-yu late notice of lottery drawing branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2".

If "0: Non-win" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the latter half of the kakuyakumono, the second half of the kakuyakumono will be dropped in the call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the lottery result halfway notice The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON”, the function “SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” is executed, and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the halberd part late notice lottery result NO_NK branch table at the time of non-winning of the hooked object “N”T. Branch based on.

When "0: initial position" is set in the "Hatch position information work area for scheduler" "SCH_MEM_NTA", the second half drop notice of the second half fall notice of the second half drop notice is displayed in the "Hakuyoke latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The runtime motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored.

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected in the undecided half-finished product trailer drop notice result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". It In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored. After that, the value of the scheduler hull position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" is overwritten on "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the first half drop of the blade post in the "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" table Preliminary notice/second half fall notice When not winning, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

In the first half fall notice execution/second half fall notice non-winning motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON", the weight process "NOP:120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed. In the weight process executed here, as will be described later, a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position when the hook member 5003 is at the lower position is reached. Here, since the barrel accessory 5003 is originally at the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After the end of the weight process, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP” is executed to return the hook member 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operating time of the hook-up object 5003, the weight process “NOP:120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

In addition, when "1: Hakama latter half fall notice" is set in the work item latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the katemono latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" at the time of winning the trailing fall of the accessory is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” is executed, and the value of the siding position information work area for the scheduler “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the branch tool drop notice 2 branch call address table ‘NTBL_YK’ based on the knives drop notice 2 branch call address table ‘NBL_YK’. ..

If "0: initial position" is set in the scheduler's blade position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the blade member first half drop notification is not made in the blade member second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN". Execution/second half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” is selected.

In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 335), first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_STA-END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hook member 5003 drops from the initial position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process for 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:240”, and during this period, the hook-shaped object 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued at the timing when the board member 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the board member 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:90”, and effect drawing is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Then, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing the operation of returning the hook member 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Then, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to restore the hook member 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the scheduler's blade position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the blade member first half drop in the blade member second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" Preliminary notice execution/second half fall notice When winning, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” is selected.

In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 335), first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect in which the hook member 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:120”, and during this period, the hook-shaped object 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued at the timing when the board member 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the board member 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:90”, and effect drawing is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing of starting the operation of returning the board member 5003 to the initial position with the case where the board member 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position, 120 frames (about Wait processing for 4 seconds) is executed. This time is the time required for the hook member 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, as in the case of “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed, and the blade member 5003 is returned from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the hook member 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

When the hook object 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:0” is executed, and the value of the hook position information work area for scheduler “SCH_MEM_NTA” is set to “0: initial position”. The scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is updated.

In the notice of the drop of the hook product, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hook member 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the hook member 5003 by writing the position of the hook member 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the latter half. .. Thereby, the movement amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the hook-shaped object 5003, and by calling the corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute the effect according to the operation result of the effect button.

Further, even in the returning operation to the initial position after the operation of the hook member 5003, the common scheduler data is called when moving from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function “MEMW” can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area at the time of executing scheduler data and referencing it at the time of executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify a value that indicates the state that changes due to the execution of multiple scheduler data when executing each scheduler data. Therefore, it is possible to create a program code for the process according to the operation of the player, It is possible to complete the process only by defining the scheduler data without creating scheduler data in. This makes it possible to minimize the required number even for scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, making it possible to efficiently create and debug the scheduler data and facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, a function for writing a fixed value is used, but by specifying a work name in place of a fixed value by a parameter of the function, data is passed from the program side and processing based on command information is performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. The peculiar feature of the function "MEMW" is that even if the information including the function "MEMW" is not determined at the start of execution of the scheduler data, the process can be performed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Configuration example of scheduler data (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing the series of notice effects has been described above. Execution contents of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific performance contents are drawn for each notice performance.

Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of notice effects, and a basic effect related to the series of notice effects and the variation pattern (regardless of lottery other than notice effect The configuration of the scheduler data for executing a background effect and an effect related to the pattern effect which are rendered one-to-one with the variation pattern will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of the fluctuation is managed in block units (production sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol fluctuation until the reach occurs, or until the symbol stops if the reach does not occur (first half variation), from the reach occurrence until the symbol stops (second half variation). ), from the stop of the symbol to the end of the fluctuation. In addition, a time corresponding to the variation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and the execution time of the notice effect within the assigned time are defined. The data corresponding to the time corresponding to each block and the basic effect to be executed are collectively referred to as block data.

In addition, the rule of block division is that, when comparing basic effects related to fluctuations in a plurality of fluctuation patterns, the same basic effect part is used as common block data, and parts with different basic effect of liquid crystal display are divided as block data. To do. Referring to FIG. 336A, in the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern “10H01H” is the normal fluctuation 6 seconds. It is a loss, and a normal variation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a design effect of the loss is performed. Since the normal fluctuation 6-second effect and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, the normal fluctuation 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) and the loss-stop liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) are divided.

The fluctuation pattern "10H02H" is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the pattern effect of the deviation is performed. Since the normal fluctuation 12-second effect is also used for other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK), and the lost symbol effect is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H". As the liquid crystal effect block data for stop of loss, the liquid crystal effect block data for stop of stop (LCD02_BLK), which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks in the variation pattern “10H01H”, is used in common. Regarding other fluctuation patterns as well, similarly, the parts that have already been converted into block data regarding the basic effect are commonly used, and the parts that differ are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by performing block formation, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and basic effects such as all variation patterns and big hits other than fluctuations can be obtained by combining unique liquid crystal effect block data. It is possible to realize basic effects such as all fluctuation patterns and big hits other than fluctuations. Although it is important that the total amount of effect data to be created is significantly reduced, the biggest purpose of blocking is the liquid crystal effect that includes a specific basic effect when a specific basic effect is changed. The change is reflected in all fluctuation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, since the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data of sounds, lamps, and accessory in this embodiment, but the basic data is set for each block data. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for rendering and the rendering scheduler data for preview rendering are combined has the same configuration as the sub rendering block data for controlling sounds, lamps, character objects, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image/moving image material ID, display position information, enlargement/reduction information, rotation angle information, and color that are related to effects related to pictures and movies displayed on the background, and designs. It is composed of a function that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information. Further, the type and execution timing of the effect related to the notice effect generated in the block data can be set. Information to show is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification pattern independent of the control of the other liquid crystal effects, and for example, even when the shape of the identification symbol is changed and variably displayed, a common notice effect is provided. It becomes possible to carry out with a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for displaying symbols has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for displaying liquid crystal. Further, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for notice effect relating to the symbol are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for the symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the variable display mode of the identification symbol is embedded.

FIG. 336A is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, which stores a combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 336B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal pattern block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 337 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores a combination of sub effect block data corresponding to a change pattern command in the present embodiment.

The liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern is a table that holds information indicating a combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, with respect to the variation pattern number, a unique number that identifies the liquid crystal effect block data to be configured is held in chronological order. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is “10H03H”, the first half fluctuation includes “LCD03_BLK” that indicates normal fluctuation for 12 seconds, the second half fluctuation indicates that “LCD04_BLK” indicates normal short reach, and “LCD02_BLK” indicates that the deviation has stopped. To be done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. In this way, the configurations of the basic effect and the notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 435, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used for all the same effect sections. For example, when the first-half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized with a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 336B, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. .. In addition, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination, the same effect time) that corresponds to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), like the variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, shows information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination, the same effect time) that corresponds to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Next, a procedure for executing the notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for performing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 338 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation of 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the command analysis module 5200 analyzes the received command to specify the variation pattern number “10H03H”, and the effect control unit 5020 tells the production control unit 5020. Notice.

As explained with reference to FIG. 314A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and based on the determined block number, sets each variation pattern number “10H03H”. The corresponding block data number is obtained from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern, and the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern. To do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to the respective rendering devices to the same number, it becomes possible to execute all the rendering of each rendering device in synchronization.

And the production control unit 5020 transmits the block data numbers for all the layers to the liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub production block control unit 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit. 5333 (5334) executes the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal effect block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal symbol block data “ZUG03_BLK”. The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12-second sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are activated to execute the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect content. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies a parameter according to the effect contents, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source to draw on the liquid crystal display device.

When processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data according to the variable display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure of drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as the case of processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub effect 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub effect block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes the effect data designation function for controlling the effect devices such as the lamp (“KPLAY”), the speaker (“SPLAY”), and the accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specifying function in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to a module (a lamp module 5600, a sound module 5500, a driving device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and each module executes effects by various effect devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REQ, REQF". It is possible to control various effect devices by executing the effect data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time. Furthermore, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", control by a command can be performed instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designating function for controlling the action of the accessory, the action of the accessory and the drawing are linked like the above-mentioned Haku auditors fall notice effect. It is possible to execute the effect.

Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variation pattern-based sub effect block data control start processing relating to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

The effect block control unit 5040 selects the change pattern layer in the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the change pattern block data number corresponding to the change pattern. The control is started using the pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 337). The row position of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 337) is set to the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 337, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index, and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub effect block data combination number table sequence index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 causes the scheduler execution unit 5060 to execute sub-effect block data control scheduler activation processing for each variation pattern (step S7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing the procedure of variation pattern-based sub effect block data control activation processing of the present embodiment.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table based on the row and column index (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012). As a result, the process is started from the first record of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table identified from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table (FIG. 342(B)). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) is generated from the sub effect block data number table. get. One or more scheduler data are registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background effect effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to a notice), and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data items are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data items are associated with each other based on the announcement lottery result or the like.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data ends, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes pattern. It is determined whether the number of elements in the row of the different sub effect block data number table is exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is "YES"), the sub effect block data control start-up processing is ended. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the number of row elements of sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern (result of step S7014 is “NO”), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control update processing of the present embodiment. In the sub production block data control update processing for each variation pattern, in the sub production block data corresponding to each production (background sub production block data, sub production block data corresponding to a notice) that constitutes the sub production block data number table for each variation pattern This is a process for executing the next variation pattern-based sub effect block data when the execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data control update processing is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table using the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row and column index. Yes (step S7021). As a result, the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) forming the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table is specified and defined in the sub effect block data. It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is running (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control update processing is ended.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined by the variation pattern-based sub effect block data. When the process ends (the result of step S7022 is “NO”), the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table column index is incremented to determine whether the next column data is the end data (“DATA_END”). Is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (result of step S7023 is “YES”), since a series of effects has been completed, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control update processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (result of step S7023 is “NO”), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts execution of variation pattern-based sub effect block data corresponding to the next column data. A variation pattern-specific sub effect data block control scheduler activation process is executed (step S7024).

As described with reference to FIGS. 336A, 336B, and 337, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data or the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By setting the execution time of each block data to be the same, the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers can be synchronized. In addition, by performing blocking, if the same variation pattern, regardless of the combination of effects and the appearance of effects, the number of times of activation of the effect block and the scheduler defined by the effect block is always the same, Complexity can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub-effect schedulers, it is possible to coordinate the operations of various effect devices, and execute a variety of effects without a sense of discomfort. can do. Also, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, the scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be independently developed and checked for each rendering device and each block data. It is possible to improve the development efficiency.

FIG. 342 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of executing the basic effect of the variable display and the notice effect corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and FIG. Execution time of notice production, (B) has shown the constitution of the sub production block data classified by fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data includes background sub effect block data and notice sub effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. Note that in FIG. 342(B), two types of sub effect block data, that is, background block data and notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub effect block data can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 342, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern forming the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” includes “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), and “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left symbol and the right symbol stop. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK" corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the variable display is definitely settled and the fixed symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 342(A), the sub-effect block data related to the step-up notice, the BTN logo accessory drop notice, and the notice of the symbol stop notice and the sub-effect relating to the background Block data is defined. In the sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, sub effect block data for cut-in notice and group notice and sub effect block data related to the background are defined. Further, in the sub effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the notice effect sub effect block data is not defined, but the sub effect block data related to the background is defined. It should be noted that in the drawing, the execution of the notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 342 are as described above.

The effect control by each sub effect block data will be described below. As shown in FIG. 342(B), two types of sub effect block data in the variable display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” will be described.

In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, the normal 12-second background sub-effect block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12 second background sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12 second background are defined. Since the normal variation 12-second background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is completed.

In the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the notice, the function "NOP", step-up notice sub-effect block data, BTN logo accessory drop notice sub-effect block data, and symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined for performing sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the BTN logo bonus fall notice sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory drop announcement are defined. The BTN logo bonus fall notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo bonus effect drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the symbol stop notice sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notification are defined. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notification liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is configured by executing the sub effect block data in combination.

By executing the sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

At this time, during the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect Until the start of, and from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the final liquid crystal notice effect (symbol stop notice) until the end of the execution of the variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the fluctuation pattern-based scheduler block by the function “NOP”, the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. Further, the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data may be omitted.

A common time is defined for each notice effect as the execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data that controls the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the accessory. As a result, the time from the start of control by the sub effect block data to the execution of each notice effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

In addition, the time information at the time of executing the variation pattern-based sub effect block data is managed not by the start of the change but by a relative value from the start of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data execution. With this, when the same variation pattern-based sub effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data for each variation pattern has the effect start time from the start of the variation. Although different, the time value is relatively managed in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data, so that the processing can be performed without any problem. In the case of the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, similarly, the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern is managed by the relative value from the start of execution, and similarly for the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block for each variation pattern It is managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. The normal short reach background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” is completed.

The function "NOP", cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the notice. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined for executing the sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group announcement sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the group announcement are defined. The group notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the group notice liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" is configured by executing the sub effect block data in combination.

By executing the sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

Further, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" has the same number of sub effect block data strings as the variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK", but the number of sub effect block data strings does not increase or decrease. no problem.

Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK”, since no effect related to the notice is performed, only the loss stop background sub effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the loss stop background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to a normally fluctuating 12-second background are defined. Since the loss stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” is completed.

FIG. 343 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern of the present embodiment. For the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern, the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is only different from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

Next, the configuration of the sub effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described in FIG. 314B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file in a step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to effect 4) with the image synthesis/motion creation graphic tool for the liquid crystal display step-up notice of the present embodiment. is there.

The drawing data file is created in step-up effect units and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 344, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment in step-up effect units.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice production (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 production is changed, there are four types of step-up notices as in the present embodiment. If it is feasible, it is necessary to change four drawing data files. Considering the work time required for changes and the risk of omission of correction, create a unique number of drawing data files for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice by combining them.

FIG. 345 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of the step-up notice sub effect block data. As described above, although four types of step-up notices can be executed in the present embodiment, step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

Explaining the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, first, based on the step-up notice lottery result value acquired at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined which of the step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed. It If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the process ends without executing the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, so the step-up notice is not executed and drawing is not performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice The step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the next data to be executed is “DATA_END”, so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 ends.

In addition, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, and after waiting for the time specified by the parameter, the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step up 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed, since the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is completed.

As described above, a plurality of variations of a single announcement can be realized by combining the announcement scheduler data of the announcement in the minimum unit.

Next, the step-up notice sub effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 345(B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured to correspond to the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data in a one-to-one correspondence with each other in block configuration and execution time. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices even with respect to the combination of the variation pattern and the preliminary announcement lottery result, and it is possible to realize an effect with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub effect block data is different from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub production block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variation pattern-based sub production block data combination table “SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO”. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it is possible to execute the basic effect and the preliminary effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. ..

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data to be executed at the same timing is defined to have the same execution time. The effects can be synchronized. Furthermore, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, thereafter, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, simply by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that specifies the effect contents such as the variation pattern, the scheduler data that is hierarchically defined is automatically acquired and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and schedule data can be independently executed by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, which leads to a leap in development efficiency. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included therein) is updated, by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine, a common schedule is provided. The data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to utilize software assets related to production control of a gaming machine for a long term.

The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler started at the time of executing the scheduler data may be stopped after use, and the memory use area may be released. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, the schedule data may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the schedule data is completed, or when the gaming machine is in a customer waiting state, it may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler.

[19. LCD production scheduler data production control]
Next, details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data that constitutes the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data, like the sub effect block data, is composed of a combination of functions for controlling the effect target. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, the lighting of the lamp, the operation of the driving device, and the like are control targets, but the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is controlled by drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

[19-1. LCD production scheduler function]
First, a function (liquid crystal effect scheduler function) that constitutes the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is an instruction (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data that forms the above-described liquid crystal effect block data. Send and execute the performance. Further, when the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect is executed, it is possible to change the attribute (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying the parameter.

[19-1-1. LCD production scheduler function]
FIG. 346 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect of the present embodiment. The outline of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal effect scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub scheduler setting.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is to set the liquid crystal display target by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, for example. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display target.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” set the display position of the liquid crystal display target by designating the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively.

The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX” specifies the X-axis coordinate position and the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY” specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image or moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area that is designated to be enlarged or reduced when displayed on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or a moving image stored in CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to be. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the liquid crystal display target can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target by designating the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values.

Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when the liquid crystal display target is rotated and displayed is included will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and designating and displaying the angle, it is not necessary to store a plurality of rotated liquid crystal display objects, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. it can.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” rotates the liquid crystal display target by designating the X-axis value, the Y-axis value, and the Z-axis value.

Next, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display target. The α value is a numerical value indicating the transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that completely does not pass the background color.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically, sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display target. The frame value is a numerical value indicating the interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a layer for displaying a liquid crystal display target object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display target object is displayed on the front side or moved to the rear side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display target is the background, the Z index is set so as to be drawn on the back.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information on effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described in detail later, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch effect contents. , Perform another performance. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets the frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets SW information that defines special control information, which will be described later, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH” is a function for calling the sub scheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the process and improve the development efficiency.

[19-1-2. LCD function scheduler function parameters]
Heretofore, an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Next, the parameters specified when the liquid crystal effect scheduler function is executed will be described with examples. 347 and 348 are diagrams showing an example of the parameters for the liquid crystal effect scheduler function in the present embodiment.

The parameters of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function are managed for each group similarly to the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. The LCD function scheduler function group and the parameter group are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, and sub effect scheduler function.

Sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_ASC_ADALE" , Etc. are included. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for designating the α value which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display target, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is two parameters divided into a length of 8 bits.

“AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

“AAD_SCALE” is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area has one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display target on the XY 2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameter of the production SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” and the like.

“AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter for designating the number of the effect SW, and designates two numerical values each having a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numerical values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of footage setting parameters includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT”, and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter that specifies the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for designating a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_SUBENTRY" and "AAD_SUB" are included in the parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of sub-scheduler function parameters and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter that specifies the sub-scheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Performance control in a gaming machine has conventionally been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various performance devices, a program for linking a plurality of performance devices, and the like. These programs are described by a program code representing the operation content and control procedure of the effect device for each content of the notice in addition to the command associated with the variation pattern, and are created by a programmer having a high technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in a frame in which an effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, design, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent years, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the gaming machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, each programmer is required to have a high level of skill and the number of man-hours for development increases, and it becomes difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) in terms of quality and quantity. Further, since the total amount of program codes of the production control program is increased, the number of man-hours required for the test for the purpose of checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality is also increased.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is not possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by the program code. Instead, the program data for a gaming machine is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal drawing effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving quality.

Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal drawing effect is used by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in time series. In this tool, single effect drawing data (announcement, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and effect blocks are grouped for each state such as fluctuation patterns and big hits to create an effect common block. By combining multiple effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as variation patterns and big hits is realized.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player occur, so simply execute the combined effect common block as it is. Then, it is impossible to realize all the effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect common block is created by the above-described tool, an effect switch (effect SW) for calling a program for executing an effect at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control. ) Can be set (embedded). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, the callback is always generated regardless of whether the effect SW is “ON” or “OFF”. When the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, each display target in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the still image, and the moving image.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of drawing the liquid crystal, and detects the included effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback To). Then, a display list command can be created based on the information processed by the program function that is called back, and ON/OFF of the effect display and effect replacement can be realized. It should be noted that the program function called by the callback can also execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of lamps, operation of role objects, etc.). Further, it is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting a flag and updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize the display or non-display of the drawing by the plurality of effect blocks, the effect and the replacement of the pattern, and the interactive effect for the external input by the player. ..

The program function for turning on/off the liquid crystal effect and replacing the effect, which is called by the callback, is pre-installed in the peripheral control unit 1530 and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, designers and planners who do not have advanced program knowledge can set production elements such as images and videos during production design, and set production SW to call predefined program functions. It is possible to realize complicated performance specifications. Furthermore, it is possible to drastically shorten the development period by creating a production block (liquid crystal production scheduler data) for each composition unit of production using the production creation tool. By performing the test using the production SW without performing the test, it is possible to simplify the test process and significantly reduce the time required for the test.

[20-1. Production switch configuration]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect switch in this embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with the information necessary to replace the effect and the program function called by the callback.

The effect SW number is associated with the effect SW group ID, the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW attribute, the effect SW start command address, the effect replacement information table address, and the like.

The effect SW group is a set of effect SWs grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group it belongs to. The production SW reset group has the same configuration as the production SW group, and by designating the production SW reset group ID, the production SW groups belonging to the production SW reset group are set to OFF, and the productions belonging to the production SW group are collectively created. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit structure, a plurality of effect SW groups can be designated.

FIG. 350 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of the present embodiment. As described above, the effect SW includes active and passive, and the effect SW group includes one or a plurality of active effect SW and passive effect SW. Specifically, the head group number of the active production SW and the number of active production SW belonging to the production SW group, and the top group number of the passive production SW and the number of passive production SW are included.

The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive/active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information that specifies whether or not the effect SW belonging to the effect group specified at the time of evaluating the effect SW is set to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether to call a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive/active information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW. The passive SW evaluates the effect SW statically, and the active evaluates the effect SW dynamically.

The effect SW activation command address is an address of an effect SW activation command table. The production SW activation command is a command string for setting the production SW to ON, and the command for setting the production SW to ON is defined in the production SW activation command table. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 351 exemplifies the effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table includes the number of commands and data for the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing an example of the step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) shows a stage in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) is a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 352(A), the step-up notice of this embodiment can be executed up to a maximum of four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. .. When the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and when it does not develop, the step-up notice ends as it is.

Here, variations of the step-up notice production at each stage will be described. In step-up notice 1 which is the first stage after the start-up notice production is started, a production in which the display screen is filled with black is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of black and the pattern of filling. For example, when the black ink color is black, the degree of expectation is low, and in the order of white, red, and rainbow, the degree of expectation is high. As for the pattern of filling, the expectation is higher as the number of positions where the filling is started is higher, and the expectation may be changed at the position where the filling is started. For example, if the filling starts from only one place in the lower left, the degree of expectation is low, and if the filling starts from two places in the lower left and upper left, the filling starts from three places in the lower left, upper left, and upper right. Expectation increases in order, and when the filling starts from the four corners, the expectation is highest.

Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. The development effect is executed in a common manner halfway in order to increase the player's expectation regardless of whether or not the development is actually advanced to the next stage. Explaining the case of step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with the combination of the black color and the painting pattern determined by lottery. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink is gradually removed (thinned), and the characters to be displayed in the step-up notice 2 appear. When the step-up notice 2 is developed, the ink is removed as it is and the display of characters becomes darker, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not darkened and the ink is removed and the characters are not displayed.

In step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. The pattern of letters increases in the order of "change," "sentinel," "spirit," "continue," and "one shot kill." In the presentation mode of step-up notice 2, first, while the character is displayed, the screen is filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the black color and the variation of filling in step-up notice 1. After that, when the screen is completely filled with black ink, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink gradually disappears before the screen is completely filled with the ink, and eventually the ink completely disappears and the displayed characters disappear. Will end up.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is in a state of being filled with the black according to the step-up notice 2, and the effect of gradually removing the black from this state is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern in which the black ink flies off. For example, if the ink is being smeared from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, and if the ink is smeared from two places on the lower left and upper left, the ink is smeared from three places on the lower left, upper left and upper right. The expectation is higher in the order of going, and the highest expectation is obtained when the ink is removed from the four corners. When the characters are displayed in the process of brushing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been brushed, the development effect is successful, and the step advance notice 4 is entered. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the black ink has been brushed off, the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final step of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has a higher degree of expectation in the order of “game,” “opportunity,” “development,” “heat fight,” “heat,” “happiness”. In addition, as for the character color, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the production mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed character is enlarged is executed.

Next, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. 353 to 355 are diagrams for explaining an execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 353 is a diagram showing correspondences between all effect contents and effect SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 354(A) shows step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and drawing image for executing step-up notice 1 to fill with black ink from four directions of the screen, and (B) shows red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. The step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled in are shown. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for changing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

FIG. 353 shows all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1, and is divided for each drawing (ink drawing lower left, ink drawing upper left, ink drawing lower right, ink drawing upper right, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the effect contents are described in correspondence with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing classifications, and 10 effects with 5 effects each for character failure and successful character drawing classifications, with a total of 26 effects. Has become. Also, there is always one effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing category, and only one of the drawing categories "character failure" and "character success" is executed, so the maximum effect that can be executed simultaneously with step-up notice 1 The number is 5 totals including the drawing classification “lower left”, the drawing classification “upper left”, the drawing classification “lower right”, the drawing classification “upper right” and the drawing classification “character failure” or the drawing classification “character success”.

Further, the effect determination method of each drawing segment will be specifically described in accordance with the advance notice lottery result value of the step-up advance notice 1. First, a lottery for the step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the effect contents related to black drawing. The effect contents related to the black drawing are, specifically, the selection of the position where the black ink appears from the drawing classification “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right” and the color of the black ink appearing from the selected black appearance location. Become. In addition, either the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success" is the content of the character displayed at this time.

Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 drawing image when the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. .. As described above, the total number of effects of the step-up notice 1 is 26 effects, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes one for each of the drawing categories of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the performance data of is defined. When step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing of step-up notice 1 drawing image At the same time, black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen, and the characters of "change" in the drawing classification "character failure" and drawing classification "character success" are displayed lightly. The character of "change" is deleted by "failure", and at the same time, the character of "change" is clearly displayed by the drawing segment "character success".

Further, in FIG. 354(B), the drawing category “lower left” is “red”, the drawing category “upper left” is “none”, the drawing category “lower right” is “none”, and the drawing is based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 Issues a command in which the classification "upper right" is "red", the drawing classification "character failure" is "spirit", and the drawing classification "character success" is "none". As a result, in the drawing image, the red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left", and the red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right". , In the drawing category "character failure", the character "Ki" is deleted.

At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the effect corresponding to the content of each issued lottery command is set to ON. Specifically, the "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left", and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper right" is "red." Then, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "character failure is energetic". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing segment “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing segment “lower right” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing segment “character success” is “none” The command "" does not produce any effect, so that none of the effect SWs are set to ON and are set to OFF.

From the above, among all the effects of Step-up Notice 1, the red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left", and the red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right", and in the drawing category "character failed" It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying a character is set to ON corresponding to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 355, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. 354(A), to perform an effect in accordance with the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. 355(B), A mechanism for performing production replacement will be described.

FIG. 355 is a diagram illustrating master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing segment and effect SW corresponding to replacement data to be replaced with the master data, in the present embodiment. Describing it concretely with reference to the lower left black ink effect replacement group in FIG. 355, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the video in which black ink spreads from the lower left. And the corresponding production SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK". On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the effect number “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which the white ink spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the video in which the red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" to be performed becomes the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data but is separately defined in the lower left black effect effect replacement table. Also, the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command to draw the effect, and is defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. When the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” that is present is used as a trigger (when detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left black ink effect replacement table is referenced, all the effect SW registered in the lower left ink effect effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. To do. In the present embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower left” is “red”, and the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, so from the lower left corresponding to the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED”. The video number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

The replacement program function called by the callback transfers the specified moving image number on the CGROM of the red ink from the lower left to the liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and finishes the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 causes the CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above movie number, a display list command is generated using the movie number on CGROM corresponding to the movie in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

The feature of the replacement of the effect by the callback of the present embodiment is that the control structure of the low level (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment, the data structure that is easy to change and is suitable for tooling) to the high level control structure (the present embodiment By calling a program function for replacement in a mode, or a program function that is not suitable for change but allows complicated processing to be executed by a callback, it is possible to separate the detection of the timing of replacement and the replacement control. It realizes to perform complicated processing by using liquid crystal effect scheduler data which is a data structure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for making a callback (ON/OFF set value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by a callback, a structure for performing complicated control is introduced on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, and a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler is executed on the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side. When the effect control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed on the side of the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit increases, and when adding a new function or changing a function, be sure to It is necessary to change the LCD production scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, which not only causes a malfunction due to a change in control, but also affects a function that was operating normally before the change, causing a new malfunction. There is a risk that

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the callback is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON/OFF set value of the production SW), and a plurality of callbacks executed by the callback are executed. Executability or processing content is determined in the callback function of. By creating a corresponding callback function to realize a single function, it is not necessary to change the LCD production scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing a function, and a call corresponding to the new function is required. This can be done by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, it is less likely that the change range of the function or the range of influence due to the addition is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed and may affect other callback functions to cause a malfunction. In addition, compared with the case where the execution analysis of the LCD production scheduler data is centrally executed by a single large program, the execution analysis is performed by using multiple callback functions and the LCD production scheduler data for realizing each function. However, the structure and structure of the program can be further simplified.

In the present embodiment, the explanation has been made focusing on the replacement of the effects, but the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not only the replacement of the effects, but also the replacement of the symbols, the control of the display or non-display of the effects, and the drawing target. It is also applicable to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, with regard to the purpose of defining the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the movie in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table explain. When the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master production SW is not defined in the production replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master production SW is always the liquid crystal production scheduler. The index number on the CGROM corresponding only to the data and corresponding to the replacement SW corresponding to the master exists only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined by about several thousand. In the situation where game specifications are changed or game specifications are added frequently between the planning and development of a game machine and its introduction to the market, the consistency between the index number of the video (image) on the CGROM and the rendering SW Is extremely difficult to maintain.

In the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement is defined. It is possible that the above index number may be mistakenly registered in the LCD production scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the data number of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and the effect is replaced with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. .. Since the expectation is set for each of the effects, it is possible that a special effect for the big hit that does not appear due to the fluctuation of the deviation may appear, which is a fatal defect for the gaming machine. As in the present embodiment, the effect replacement table is defined by including the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, so that the consistency can be confirmed by comparing the total number of effects with the replacement table. Become. In addition, since the liquid crystal production scheduler data operates without problems regardless of which data in the replacement table is defined, the control method is extremely unlikely to cause any trouble. In the present embodiment, even if the master effect defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the master CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and must be replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and an effect is drawn.

In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the black ink is gradually erased from some or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development production fails, no black is displayed and the black ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends. In either case of success or failure, black ink is gradually erased from the vertices of the display area. Therefore, the effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns for gradually erasing black ink for each vertex are executed. (Layer) is defined. Further, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

The upper left ink replacement group, the lower right ink replacement group, the upper right ink replacement group, the character failure effect replacement group, and the character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group illustrated in FIG. 355 have the same configuration and control method as the lower left ink replacement group. Is.

In the step-up notice 4, the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter. Therefore, the effect SW flag (layer) may be defined according to the mode in the animation of the displayed character, or one type of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set by a parameter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are created by individually defining the drawing effect pattern for each appearance position of the black ink or the character content and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. It is possible to execute or a combined effect. Since switching and combination of productions is done only by changing production SW flag settings individually, a planner or the like who configures productions can set parameters using tools without needing a technique such as creating a new program. A variety of variations can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, dozens of drawing patterns can be realized only by combining four kinds of drawing patterns according to the appearance position of black and two kinds of development effect result display patterns. As a result, it is possible to minimize the types of programs to be developed, improve the development efficiency of the production control program of the gaming machine, and improve the efficiency by efficiently inspecting the developed production control program. You can

[20-3. Outline of control based on production switch]
Next, an outline of control based on effect switches will be described. FIG. 356 is a diagram for explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and particularly shows the evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In the present embodiment, first, when a main command (main control command) that triggers the production start from the main control board 1310 is received, the peripheral control internal issued to the configuration inside the peripheral control board 1510 by the peripheral control unit 1530. Issue commands are generated. The peripheral control internal issue command is a command for executing the advance notice lottery and executing the effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

The production SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding production SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b to determine whether or not the data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command row of the effect SW determination data, and if there is matching data, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The effect SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command string for turning on the effect SW. The production SW determination command string is not fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, main control command values and sub internal command values, or combine peripheral control internal issue command values and peripheral control internal command values. .. For example, the variation start designation command value and the probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background designation command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini-character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining multiple commands side-by-side, for example, even if the same mini-chara notice shows different mini-characters displayed for different backgrounds, the background command value is determined, and after the background is specified, the mini-character command value is determined. For the first time, it is possible to specify the production of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it is necessary to make multiple determinations for the number of commands. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the advance notice of the mini character side by side, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. It is not necessary to judge a plurality of times, and with respect to the effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, the corresponding effect can be specified in the same manner as the effect defined by a single command. Further, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, it is possible to simultaneously activate a plurality of effect SWs with a single command value.

The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, which is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs in a combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 356, when the command “0x103001” is received, since the effect SW number 100 “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” is registered in the effect SW determination data, the effect SW flag stored in the RAM. Set lcdsw_flg[LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 353 to 355, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding notice effect is executed. Be done.

Further, in the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, examples of these functions will be described. FIG. 357 is a diagram for explaining an example of a function defined in the production SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function takes the effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON from the regular program or the program that is called back. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a stationary program or a program that has been called back, not activation of the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the effect SW from a steady program or a program that is called back. In addition, when the attribute of "all reset" is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW is based on the "reset object effect SW group ID" of the "effect SW information table" corresponding to the effect SW number. All the production SWs belonging to the group are set to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function that acquires the attribute information of the target effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function that acquires the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the regular program or the program that is called back.

[20-4. Example of production switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. 358 to 363 are diagrams showing a part of the program code for executing the control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each drawing is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, each display target in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the still image, and the moving image. Since the effect SW is set in all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, it is determined in the callback function that the specific process is not executed, and the callback function is ended.

FIG. 358 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code that defines the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of effect SW control information. , (C) are diagrams showing an example of an effect SW group.

The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), and the effect SW group ID, reset target effect SW group ID, effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), effect SW. It includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW groups are grouped by functions such as effect SW for performing the same (same kind) notice effect, effect SW for hold display, effect SW for notification, and the like. ing. The effect SW group ID is expressed by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for specifying the effect SW group for which the effect SW is set to OFF when “effect SW all reset” is specified in “attribute bit assignment” described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively specify the effect SWs for which processing is stopped (reset) at the same time when the effect SWs are switched. The reset target effect SW group ID is represented by bits like the effect SW group ID, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive/active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 358(B), and the contents will be described below.

The passive (PASSIVE)/active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW, and is "PASSIVE" when the bit is "0" and "ACTIVE" when the bit is "1". Even if the command to activate the effect SW is received multiple times during the period in which the effect SW is defined in the passive mode, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect SW is performed only once, and in the active mode, the effect in the period in which the effect SW is defined is effected. When the command to activate the SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the command has been received. Active is used when a drawing effect corresponding to the button press is displayed when the button is pressed multiple times within the button effective period.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to "1", the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

The replacement information is information that calls a callback function for effect replacement when the effect SW is evaluated. If the bit is set to "1", a predefined callback function for replacement is called when evaluating the production SW defined for each display target, still image, and moving image in the LCD production scheduler data. Be done.

The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information that specifies whether or not the effect SW belonging to the effect group specified at the time of evaluating the effect SW is set to OFF. When the bit is set to "1", the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the "reset target effect SW group ID" is set to OFF at the time of effect SW evaluation.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 358(A). For the effect SW command information address, defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of effect SW evaluation. The command to be output is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and a new effect SW control or effect is executed by the output command.

The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when "1" is set in the replacement information bit of the effect SW control information (when "with replacement" is specified). The address of is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of related effect SWs are set, they are managed as an effect group. The effect group is configured to include effect SW group ID, active effect SW head ID, active effect SW number, passive effect SW head ID, and passive effect SW number.

The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effect SWs is the number of active effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the reset target effect SW group ID, if "effect SW all reset" is specified in "attrib bit assign", the continuous operation belongs to the effect SW group ID. It is possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effect SWs and the plurality of consecutive active effect SWs that have been turned off.

FIG. 359 is a diagram showing an example of a program code defining the effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 359, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area or the effect information table can be referred to by using the effect SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW numbers as an enumeration in this way, it is not necessary to directly handle the effect SW numbers with a numerical value when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the effect SW flag, and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON/OFF) the processing based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that calls back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the array index corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, "1" (ON) is set, and when not executed, "0" (OFF) is set.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 358(A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read when the program is executed and is a constant that is not updated unless the program data is changed. Has become. Further, the effect SW information table is stored in an array having an effect SW number as an index similarly to the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all effect SWs is stored.

Next, the effect SW replacement table information and effect SW replacement table for performing effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. 358(A). FIG. 361 is a diagram showing an example of effect SW replacement table information and program data defining the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is effect SW replacement table information and (B) ) Indicates a production SW replacement table.

FIG. 361(A) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”, this corresponds to the case where the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating a material to be replaced from the master data. For example, when the black color is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the rendering SW.

FIG. 361(B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the production SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined. In the present embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After the definition of the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure does not cause any problem.

As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement table information is referred to, and all the effect SW effect switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, description will be made assuming that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of rows of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the row of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number that identifies a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and moving images will be described. The layer can be used for a general purpose by displaying the display result by dividing the liquid crystal display target object into a plurality of regions (layers, layers) and drawing. For example, by dividing the background layer, it is possible to draw by a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

In the present embodiment, a table (layer information table) that stores layer information is individually stored and managed, so that a change in some layers does not affect other layers. You can

FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment. (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, (B) is a layer information table (background Content). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and a callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger to determine whether to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function. decide. For example, when the rendering SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Further, FIG. 363 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) contents of the layer information table (first half of notice), (B) layer information table (notice) The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables in the first and second halves of the notice both determine the layer table to be executed by the rendering SW, like the background layer information table.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362(A), a layer information table for background, symbol display, first half notice, big hit performance, character action, hold display, etc. is defined.

Also, FIG. 362(B) shows a layer information table for the background, and in the effect in the present embodiment, the sea background, the mountain background, and the river background are defined, and further, the background (time saving according to the game state is shortened. Medium background, high-precision middle background) are also defined. Further, variations can be added by changing the background color by the production SW.

FIG. 363(A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which roulette notice, blackout notice, and window notice are defined, and a notice clear command is also defined. FIG. 363(B) shows the layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which the step-up notice, the button mini-character notice, and the conversation notice are defined. As in the first half of the notice, the layer table for clearing the notice is defined. Also defines. The notice clearing layer table is used to end the notice drawing executed in each notice layer table defined in each notice layer information table. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the effect target SW group ID to be reset in the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and "attribute bit assign" is defined as "all effect SW resets". When the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the notice effect SWs of the notices belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset are set to OFF and the rendering corresponding to the effect SW is performed. Ends and disappears. It should be noted that the layer table for clearing the notice is empty because it does not produce anything.

In addition, the end judgment record is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list that stores the layer table and the table that stores the layer information. When the end judgment record is detected, it is determined that the data reading is completed. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the amount of data (the number of records) can be dynamically changed without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Example of step-up notice]
Next, an implementation example of the notice effect by the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table/LCD production block data]
FIG. 364 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table and a liquid crystal effect common block in the present embodiment. (A) is a liquid crystal layer table for step-up notice effect, and (B) is a liquid crystal effect common block. Shows the configuration of.

As shown in FIG. 364(A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up advance notice effect, the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number are the liquid crystal effect common blocks. It is defined in combination with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580) frames, the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. The callback is executed based on the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP", and it is determined whether or not to execute the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" based on the information of the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" in the callback function.

The liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of effect SW, total drawing frame number, loop start frame position, reproduction time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 364(B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. A terminal is set after the step-up notice 4, and it is configured so that the increase or decrease in the number of steps can be dealt with by adding or deleting the liquid crystal effect block. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

Similar to the effect SW defined in the layer table, the effect SW controls whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal effect block based on the set value. The total rendering frame number defines the total rendering frame number of the liquid crystal rendering block. Explaining using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced for (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the end of reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” on the first line.

The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal production block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total play time, the loop start frame position and the play time is that the play time is the play time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1", so after the play of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is again displayed. When performing loop reproduction from the beginning or in the middle, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Step up notice 1 The playback time of the LCD production block of "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is (150) frames, so if the 50 frames in the latter half of the LCD production block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" are played twice after the end of playback, the playback will be performed at the total playback time This can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames+loop reproduction time (50×2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. The effect of fluctuating and fluctuating without finalizing the symbol in the pseudo continuous effect can be realized by using the loop reproduction function.

Also, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of the reproduction even though the total reproduction time and the reproduction time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment is the same When the next rendering common block is not executed, the drawing is not updated, and in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping, when the total reproduction time is exceeded, drawing is repeated based on the loop start point.

In the present embodiment, the control by the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the case of executing the effects from the step-up notice 1 to the step-up notice 3 is performed after performing the notice lottery related to the effect on the peripheral control board 1530 and then stepping up. A peripheral control internal command relating to the notice production, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command, and a step-up notice 3 command are issued. Then, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the production SW, the callback is executed based on all the production SWs defined in the liquid crystal production common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and the callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and the liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2" and "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks "LCD_YSU_STEP_UP_3_LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2", "LED_YKK_STEP_SU2", "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2" and "LED_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2", "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2", "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2", "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2", "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2", "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2", "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2" and "LCD_YKK_STEPUP" are displayed. On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks in the liquid crystal effect common block and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect block using the effect SW. It is also possible to switch display/non-display of each effect.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block at each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

As the content of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function, or the function used in the liquid crystal effect block, which is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, is two kinds of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

Next, the liquid crystal effect block will be specifically described. Describing with reference to the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", the first (3) indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, "LCD_NOP" in which the number of execution frames (120) is designated is set, and therefore, waiting is performed for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. After waiting for (120) frames, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed by the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Then, "LCD_NULL" in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is ended.

As described in FIG. 352, at the end of the step-up notice of each step of the step-up notice, it is realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” to realize the execution of the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage. doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" does not wait, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" is started. The liquid crystal effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the wait by "LCD_NOP", waits for (120) frames, and then starts the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", whereby the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" is set. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution when (120) frames have elapsed since the execution started. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next stage.

Further, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect block in chronological order. When the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is continuously defined, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames. To execute the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the next line.

In the effect scheduler data of step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions is defined, the function NOP for waiting while executing step-up notice effect 1, the function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing step-up notice effect 2, Finally, the function LCD_NULL that indicates the end of scheduler data is defined. The step-up notice 3 and the step-up notice 4 are similarly described.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been described above. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the operation of the effect button while the symbol is changing and operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Mode of button mini character production]
FIG. 366 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the button mini character effect of this embodiment. The button mini-character production is executed when the main command is received or when the variation starts, and the execution lottery is performed. In the button mini-character production, when the production button is operated during the acceptance period of the button operation input, a predetermined character (mini-character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the acceptance period of the button operation input, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

More specifically, when the winning lottery for the button mini-character production is won and 90 frames (f) have elapsed from the start of the variation, the first half of the button mini-character becomes the valid period. The button mini-character first half effective period is 90 frames, and at the start of the button mini-character first half effective period, an image (moving image) prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. Button Mini-Character Mini-Character is displayed when the button is operated during the first half validity period. As will be described later in detail, when the button is operated during the first half effective period of the button mini character, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

If the button is operated during the second half effective period of the button mini character, the mini character is displayed as in the first half effective period of the button mini character second half. In FIG. 308, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character period, but it may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character period. The characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

If the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character period, the mini character will be displayed as in the first half of the button mini character period. In FIG. 366, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character period, but it may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character period. The characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 367, the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” corresponding to the button mini character effect is the total number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined in combination with the number and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180), the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawing frames (150) frames, the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002", first, the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" is executed during (180) frames. Then, during the (150)th frame, the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is ended.

Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks of the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 368 are the same as the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 364. LCD production block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is a production SW that calls a callback function to determine whether or not to execute. "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active productions that define active attributes in production SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed by the number of times the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini-character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 369 are the same as the above-described liquid crystal effect block data. Explaining the processing by each liquid crystal effect block data, first, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is executed, and waits for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. .. Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the first half effective period of the button mini character is executed for (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is ended. In the latter half of the production, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal production block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period is executed, and waits for (30) frames from the start of fluctuation. After that, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini character latter half effective period is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” is ended.

As described above, since the production SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active production SWs, the production SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. When the command is issued a plurality of times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SWs “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are executed for the number of times the commands have been issued. In addition, a callback is always generated by the effect SW and a corresponding callback function is called. The control when the button is pressed is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame after the button pressing control is completed and until the liquid crystal effect scheduler data execution is completed. By creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data for performing effect drawing during the button effective period and controlling it with the active effect SW, the control in which the period during which the callback is executed is determined as the button effective period without separately determining the button effective period. Is possible. For example, it is possible to count the number of times the button is repeatedly pressed by repeatedly pressing the button, and execute an effect according to the number of times. Also, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the lamp in the callback function, the lamp can be turned on in response to the button operation. Further, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory, it is possible to execute the scheduler data for performing the operation according to the number of button operations and returning to the initial position after the expiration of the button operation valid period. As a procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position, for example, an effect block including a function of returning the accessory to the initial position is made to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the button operation effective period ends.

[24. LCD production scheduler for design]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing content depending on the game state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game that is the notice target. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variable display game when a predetermined condition such as a game state is established. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification pattern will be described below.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and each column is assigned a reel in which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Identification symbols are drawn on each reel in a mode according to the game state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

The display of the identification pattern is updated for each frame similarly to the notice effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification pattern, an index number on the CGROM of a still image or a moving image for displaying the identification pattern and an effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. .. A reel number is defined in the effect SW for replacing the identification pattern. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game state and effect. For example, when the mountain background, the river background, and the identification pattern displayed on the sea background are different from each other, the mountain background left symbol is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, and the river background left symbol is R3, the middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol of the mountain background is R6, the medium symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of the identification symbol. With the reel arrangement, the identification pattern is displayed in order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9, 0, and after 0, the design of the identification pattern and the identification pattern when returning to 1 and displaying What defines the total number and the display order of identification symbols is defined as a reel index. It is possible to define a plurality of reel indexes.

Further, the table for replacing the identification pattern includes a replacement table of the identification pattern corresponding to the reel index number corresponding to the reel number and the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, index numbers on the CGROM of still images or moving images corresponding to reel arrays are defined for each reel index.

The replacement of the identification symbol is performed by using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. The reel index replacement work number table defines work numbers for reel replacement on one or a plurality of RAMs corresponding to each reel index. The reel replacement work, the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo-repeated fluctuation, the fixed symbol number value of the identification symbol, etc., is displayed when the identification symbol can be recognized as stopped or stopped by the player. The identification symbol number value according to the effect is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of fluctuation in accordance with the effect contents.

Explaining the identification of the data for replacing the identification symbol, when a callback is executed based on the production SW for the identification symbol replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number in the callback function for the identification symbol replacement Based on the reel index replacement work number table, the target reel index replacement work number is specified. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of displayed identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is identified in the identification symbol replacement table, and the reel in which the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the identified table is corrected Specify using the index replacement work number.

Further, the replacement of the identification pattern is not the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is used even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected similarly to the effect replacement. The display list command is created by using the index number on the master CGROM that is always defined in the replacement table, and the effect contents are drawn.

Further, by replacing the identification pattern every frame, it is possible to immediately return to the normal display even if an incorrect identification pattern is displayed due to noise or the like. Also, by setting the reels according to the game state, even if there is a problem in the replacement of the identification symbol due to an error, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the content of the identification symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, the timing at which a callback occurs when the production SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing segment by the parameter passed to the function in the callback function that calls back.

FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined in the callback function when the callback is executed by the production SW of this embodiment.

A callback occurs for "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" before the drawing of the liquid crystal A is started, and a callback occurs for "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A" after the drawing of the liquid crystal A is started. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" causes a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" causes a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B are different liquid crystals, and it is possible to determine whether the drawing of the respective liquid crystals is completed before or after the drawing of each liquid crystal is completed. It becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A triggered by.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before all drawing is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after all drawing is completed. It is possible to initialize the frame buffer with the required background color before drawing by making a judgment before drawing, and to instruct another effect device to execute an effect when drawing is completed by making a judgment of drawing end. It will be possible.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before the drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after the drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be executed before or after the drawing of the specific layer is started. For example, when a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing the notification layer by performing the determination before starting the layer drawing, it is possible to enlarge and display the display of the notification having a high priority. In addition, by making a judgment after starting the layer drawing, the effect drawing is performed around the design drawn at the timing when the design with high expectation stops before the design layer drawing starts, so the design with high expectation It is possible to display the effect around the pattern only when is stopped.

As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing segment and execute the predetermined process before or after the drawing is completed. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 370, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before the common block drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after the common block drawing is completed. Common block By stopping the execution of a specific liquid crystal effect block corresponding to a single effect that constitutes the liquid crystal effect common block by making a judgment before starting drawing, and not performing effect drawing, the liquid crystal effect common block By performing the determination after the completion of drawing, it is possible to execute a liquid crystal effect common block different from the liquid crystal effect common block scheduled to be executed at the start of the variation.

Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the liquid crystal effect block drawing in the liquid crystal effect common block is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" causes a callback after the liquid crystal effect block drawing is completed. It is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed according to the result of the external input by the player by performing the determination before starting the liquid crystal effect block drawing. Further, by making a determination after the liquid crystal effect block drawing is started, it is possible to add new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal effect block that draws a single effect. Furthermore, "LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST" can generate a callback before the start of drawing a still image and a moving image in the LCD effect scheduler data, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST" can generate a callback after the completion of the drawing of a still image and a moving image. It is possible to replace various effects by performing determination before starting drawing of a still image or a moving image. Further, it is possible to add the rendering of the effect according to the replacement content of various effects by performing the determination after the completion of the drawing of the still image or the moving image.

As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to judge the drawing section in each callback function that is called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal production schedule data for each liquid crystal production block, and an image or a moving image is drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine or the division of production. To be done. In addition, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set in each layer.

At the time of execution of the effect, images and the like are drawn in parallel on a plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal effect schedule data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice production, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Further, drawing is performed according to the step-up notice 1 on the notice layer (preliminary_first half layer). FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of the drawing results of the individual layers and the drawing results of all the layers at the time of executing the notice effect of the present embodiment.

At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set in each layer. However, if these effect SWs are individually managed, the processing may be complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SWs are grouped and managed for each layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the category of the effect.

For example, the effect SWs assigned to each layer are grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, the effect SW group background, effect SW group symbol, and effect SW group announcement are configured in correspondence with the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the game machine or for each effect category.

As described above, by grouping and managing the effect SWs, it is possible to collectively control individual effect elements. For example, in the case of changing the background currently displayed and the pattern display and the hold display according to the background to another background when a new variation starts, the background layer, the pattern layer, and the hold layer are divided according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. As a result, it is possible to collectively hide the symbol display and the hold display together with the current background together with the background, and to display the symbol display and the hold display according to the new background in the corresponding layers, thereby making it possible to display a plurality of layers. It is possible to switch the drawing only for the required effect display from the plurality of effect displays displayed in layers.

In addition, in the production over the game state, for example, in the big hit production after the fluctuation start to the end of the fluctuation, the design is hidden and the background is changed to the big hit performance, but with respect to the hold, the hold drawn during the change is held. It is also possible to continuously display. In such control, the above-described target effect group to be hidden is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which the effect SW all reset is designated is the liquid crystal effect common block at the time of start of variation, This can be achieved by defining it in the liquid crystal effect common block when the big hit effect is started.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described up to this point, in order to enhance the interest of the player, in order to efficiently control the complicated game effect, all effects are managed as a common block in units of blocks of a fixed length. With this, a production block is selected according to the variation pattern and the result of the preliminary lottery, and a series of productions such as variable display and big hits are realized by drawing based on the selected production block, and complicated control is performed. Without doing so, control was achieved to synchronize the sub-effects such as character products, lamps, and sound output with the drawing content. In the common block, a period is set that is divided at a predetermined timing from the start of the variation of the symbol to the determination of the symbol, and these periods correspond to the first half variation and the second half variation, and are assigned to the variation pattern. It was set according to the variation time of the design.

With this configuration, the common block can be used universally with a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, by securing the independence of the notice effect executed in the first half variation and the notice effect executed in the second half variation, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the combination of common blocks.

However, as described above, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation end only by combining the effect blocks having a constant length. When performing an effect that spans a plurality of such periods, the common block that precedes and the common block that follows will be associated and the versatility will be reduced, and in addition, each common block will be executed independently. Therefore, the control may be complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the performance. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to individually create and control a program code instead of setting the program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the present embodiment, not only is a series of productions of variable display and big hits produced by combining production blocks of a fixed length in all productions, but the length of production blocks Is configured to allow an effect block length that matches an effect period, rather than an exceptionally fixed length. Furthermore, it is possible to draw by combining effect blocks with different effect times, and by also enabling effect blocks that span the combined effect blocks to be drawn at the same time, a drawing effect that continues from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation is realized.

The production over a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown production in which a number is displayed in a countdown display as the symbol starts changing, and the countdown display is continued from the first half variation to the second half variation. FIG. 372 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block over a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment, (A) display timing of symbols and execution timing of notice effect, (B) liquid crystal notice effect block by common block, and , Shows the structure of a liquid crystal advance notice effect block by a common block extending over a plurality of periods.

In the example shown in FIG. 372, the first half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the second half fluctuation is “normal short reach”, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 372(A), a step-up notice and a BTN logo accessory drop notice are executed in the first-half variation, and a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed in the latter-half variation. The content of each notice production is as described above. The countdown notice is executed from the start of the step up notice to the end of the group notice.

In FIG. 372(B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect (step up notice, BTN logo accessory drop notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block and the group notice from the start of the step up notice. The structure of the production block of the countdown notice executed during the period until the end is shown. The block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The production block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal production notice block data starts, a liquid crystal production notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the second half variation ends after the liquid crystal production notice block data ends. .. The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect announcement block data is started is the NOP that is executed before the step-up announcement is started, and the function NOP that waits until the latter half variation is the NOP that is executed after the group announcement is completed. The same waiting time is set.

As described above, it is possible to more flexibly operate the common block by enabling the exception to be set during the execution period of the effect block. Also, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of the execution timing of other effect blocks being shifted due to the exception setting. Note that the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, like other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
To increase the interest of the game and to shorten the processing time related to drawing, draw the drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display from the frame buffer, and store it in the storage area for capture of the sound source built-in VDP1540a separately from the frame buffer. Then, processing such as image reuse and transformation/additional drawing was performed. As described above, by temporarily storing the drawing data in another area and using it for the drawing of the next frame, various rendering expressions have been efficiently realized.

FIG. 373 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration for writing an image in the frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 373, conventionally, the images drawn in the respective layers are superposed on the frame buffer, written, and then output to the display device.

Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed in the background layer is written in the frame buffer using the display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed in the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed in the notice layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Finally, a moving image or a still image related to the reserved layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command to create drawing data for one frame.

After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed, which is created in the frame buffer, to the capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. After newly adding an effect around the design to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, the drawing data is written back to the frame buffer to create one frame of drawing data for the next display.

By doing so, the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created only by adding an effect to the already created drawing data. However, in the image conversion according to such a conventional technique, only the image conversion for the drawing data for one frame can be realized, and in addition to the addition of a new drawing element for the liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, It is limited to enlargement or reduction of the entire LCD drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on a drawing element drawn on each layer or on each drawing element in the layer on the capture buffer.

The reason why image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, such as background, pattern, and notice, are overwritten on the frame buffer in the order of layers. It will be overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. In addition, drawing elements are a set of colored dots (dots) when drawn on the frame buffer, so even if you try to extract a drawing element with a rectangle, it will be overwritten with another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element in the overwritten portion is lost.

At present, the need for reusing image data for one screen of a liquid crystal display that has been drawn has become less due to the improvement in VDP processing capacity, but diversification of staging for the purpose of improving the entertainment of the game. For this reason, it was expected that the load would increase to execute complicated drawing processing.

In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and to perform more diverse effects, image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display in the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is transformed or newly drawn. When the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is newly drawn, the effect of dynamically changing the image during drawing in each presentation display unit that constitutes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is added. A complicated rendering expression is realized by adding a new drawing.

Specifically, a single effect drawing data (announcement, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and effect SW is included in the effect block unit in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block. Incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of drawing the liquid crystal, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When changing the image, instead of drawing the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the called back program function on the frame buffer, it is allocated on the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on the off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image of only a specific notice, adding a new image or replacing the effect of the background only, you can change the image of an image in which multiple effects are superimposed or add a new image. Additions can be realized.

The configuration in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the image is written in the frame buffer will be specifically described below. FIG. 374 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer and then writing the converted image file in the frame buffer according to the present embodiment.

As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers different from the frame buffers are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, image conversion is performed in the image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is enabled by combining the image converted in one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and the image drawn in the frame buffer.

To further explain, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data forming each layer corresponding to the effect and each liquid crystal effect scheduler data configuring the liquid crystal effect block data, and embedded when the display list command is created at the time of liquid crystal drawing. The callback function is called by the callback based on the rendered SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 374, first, before starting the drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Subsequently, before the drawing of the symbol layer is started, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the symbol layer, an effect is added to the pattern drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be added to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

Subsequently, before the drawing of the notice layer is started, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when all the rendering elements related to the notice layer have been drawn, a display list command for rotating the notice drawing of each presentation element of the notice layer in the function that is called back based on the production SW. create. By transmitting this display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Finally, all effect elements in the reserved layer are written in the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed for the entire screen, but for each layer drawing unit, drawing element forming a layer, and the order of drawing in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timings are as described using FIG. 370 described above.

Further, by performing the image conversion by the callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is the target of the image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of variation-related drawing, at the timing of creating a display list command that draws an image to be image-converted, an image based on the lottery result value of the preliminary lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input It is possible to determine the conversion method.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored in a CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a to perform drawing when the game effect is executed. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command for one screen is created, the external request DMA (transfer means) To send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

However, under the present circumstances, the production specifications are complicated and the processing load is increased, which increases the processing time such as advance notice lottery processing at the start of fluctuation, while the lamp lighting data layer combination processing and motor system due to the increase in the number of lamp systems. The processing time of the motor data creation processing is also increasing due to the increase in the number. Since the processing time of peripheral control such as performance is executed in a predetermined cycle, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle when the above-mentioned high-load processing is repeatedly executed. ..

Regardless of exceptional cases where processing cannot be completed within a cycle, when processing cannot be completed within a cycle steadily, game control by the main control device and effect control by peripheral control devices should be synchronized based on the processing cycle. However, there is a possibility that the progress of the game and the effect of the game by each effect device are separated from each other and the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by, for example, reducing the time required for heavy processing in the peripheral control processing such as production. In view of this, in the present embodiment, the rendering processing with a relatively high load in the peripheral control processing, in particular, the processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM described above and creating a native display list command that can be processed by the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source is provided. A means for reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure of transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 375 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 375, first, the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module acquires various liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and analyzes and converts the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal production scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal production scheduler data includes information (VDP register number and parameter value corresponding to the register number) regarding the display list command to be transmitted to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that can be executed by the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when the callback function called by the production SW is executed at the time of executing the liquid crystal production scheduler data, the liquid crystal production scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the display list transfer to the external request DMA in the process of processing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

Upon receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the VDP native display list command in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a by using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle when the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the processing of analyzing and converting a huge amount of liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into a VDP native display list command group becomes a large processing load. When a plurality of VDPs of different makers are installed in one gaming machine, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data which is an intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each maker. It becomes possible.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is applicable in which some or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 376 is a view for explaining the procedure for transferring the display list command group to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c in this embodiment.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 376, first, the display list transfer setting is made to the external request DMA by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal effect scheduler data as in the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. However, each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is a converted VDP native display list command group. And an interrupt display list command.

The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts a VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image in the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interrupt request is generated to the external request DMA. After that, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects the interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the interrupt factor is the interrupt due to the interrupt display list command in the interrupt processing module, and executes the callback. In the callback function, the liquid crystal production scheduler data corresponding callback information table is referred to, and the production is replaced or the design is replaced. The effect replacement method is the same as the description using FIG. 361 and the like described above, and the symbol replacement method is the same as the description using FIG. 361 and the like described above. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data-corresponding callback information table, effect SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and the display list command is transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. After that, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list analysis restart display list command to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list command for restarting the display list analysis, generates a transfer restart request to the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without performing conversion of the VDP native display list related to all effects other than replacement. Instead, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a using the external request DMA (transfer means).

With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a that accompanies the display of an image, and speed up the image processing. Further, since the use area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group and process the less frequently used VDP native display list command group by a conventional procedure. As a result, the processing of the display list command that is frequently used is shortened, so that the processing speed can be increased as a whole and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. In addition, a display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (moving image) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and different images are processed according to a different model or version according to the conventional procedure to improve the development efficiency. Will also be possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
A processor (CPU, MPU) used in game control and peripheral control (production control) of a gaming machine can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used in a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, and each has a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. . The floating point type is a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and has a size of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

Whether the processor used for peripheral control of the gaming machine is a CISC processor or a RISC processor, it is possible to read and write data stored in all addresses in 1-byte units on the memory (ROM, RAM). It has become a machine. The addresses for reading and writing data of a plurality of bytes are not limited to this. When a processor reads multi-byte data, it always reads from a byte boundary, and if it accesses across a byte boundary, an alignment violation occurs. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor.For example, instead of being able to continue processing, execution of the program may be delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or processing may be interrupted due to a runtime exception. To relax.

However, in the development of the current gaming machine, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information in a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur when the program is executed, and the program execution speed may decrease. In the peripheral control of the gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all the processing within a predetermined processing cycle, so that the reduction in the execution speed of the program may be a serious problem. In particular, since the performance of the gaming machine is configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. Data structure is adopted.

In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure configured by a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored when the data corresponding to the data structure is stored in the memory. Empty data is explicitly embedded between or at the end of the storage area. As a result, by adjusting the data access start position by the processor and arranging the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of alignment violation and prevent the execution speed of the program from decreasing. You can Adjusting the alignment for all the data structures on the ROM and RAM is an enormous task, so the load on the processor is large and the processing time becomes long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment by the data structure on the ROM or RAM related to the conversion processing, the control processing related to the drawing of the liquid crystal, the lamp control processing and the like. In addition, there is no problem in adjusting the alignment other than the processing described above.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination of which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected effect pattern type is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect(s) may be selectively appeared. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

Then, when such effect pattern determination or advance notice effect determination is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the determination, thereby changing the decorative pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The effect will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background effect) and the movement of the movable body (feature effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movement are movable. Expected performance related to body movements and the like will be provided as a performance having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background depiction (background notice), basically, there is a degree of directivity such as "how much to set the ratio at which an image with a high degree of expectation appears". There is nothing to do. Therefore, a fundamental problem such as "it is difficult to have an expectation for a big hit unless an image with high expectations (expected performance) appears" has not been solved yet.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that the special effect is to be performed as a result of the notice effect determination (when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background depiction is performed. It is possible to execute the process of displaying the background image used in the special mode different from the original image data, and when the background image is displayed in the special mode, the degree of expectation ( It is suggested that it is possible to suggest that the jackpot pattern appears at a high rate.

Here, as the “processing for displaying in a special mode”, for example,
Processing for displaying the original image data as rotation processing data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation around any of x, y, and z axes (or an appropriate combination) in the display area),
It is possible to exemplify a process of displaying the original image data as mosaic processing data in which a predetermined degree of “blurring” is inserted, and the like.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when predetermined rendering conditions are satisfied, the original image data is slightly processed (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.) The special effect of displaying this (displaying in a special mode) is intentionally performed. With such a configuration, even if a special effect in which the original image data is slightly processed is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to definitely detect and recognize the fact. However, in exchange for this, even if the special effect is not being performed, it is possible to memorize the feeling and illusion that "maybe it is in the state where the special effect is being performed". Therefore, even if a state in which an image with high expectation (special effect) does not appear continues to be expected, it is expected that the expectation for a big hit can be appropriately maintained.

However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status related to such "processing for displaying in a special mode", it is difficult to recognize even the possibility of a situation with high expectations. In the end, doing special production may lose its meaning.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment displays a help image as to whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed according to the operation by the player. It is possible to execute the processing that causes it. According to such a configuration, the help image can be displayed according to the operation by the player, so that it is not possible to recognize whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above-mentioned value and to maintain the desired feeling appropriately.

However, the "help image" according to this description example does not explicitly indicate whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, and is intended to include recognition difficulty. ing. It is because I intentionally have such recognition difficulty, even if it does not seem that the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, I can not be convinced of it, so I hope. Will be left behind and will be able to maintain expectations.

FIG. 377 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the state transitions between the non-gaming state in which the game is not executed (during the demo screen, etc.) and the game execution state in which the game is being executed. ..

FIG. 377(a) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when in a non-gaming state in which a game is not executed (in the demo screen or the like). As shown in FIG. 377(a), in the effect display device 1600 in the non-gaming state, a character image PG (here, a character image PG useful for checking "is the special effect being executed?" A guide image AG is displayed, which suggests that a character playing a penguin) can be made to appear by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like). In this explanation example, the explanation image and the character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

In the situation shown in FIG. 377(a), when the start winning occurs and the game (variation of the special symbol according to the big hit determination) is started, first in the effect display device 1600, FIG. 377(b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the variation effect by the decorative pattern SZ is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movable body operation (character effect effect). In this way, by automatically hiding the guide image AG when the game is started, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the playability in the game execution state, The presence of the character image PG (here, a character that imitates a penguin) can be favorably appealed.

FIG. 377(c) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377(b) is ended (stopped display).

In the situation shown in FIG. 377(c), when the hold information remains, the change of the decorative pattern SZ is newly started by digesting the hold information, and the guide image AG is not displayed. The effect situation shown in FIG. 377(b) will appear again in the state in which it has been kept. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 377(c), when the hold information does not remain, the state is shifted again to the non-gaming state (during the demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the game is not newly started for a predetermined time after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377(b) is ended (stopped display). The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 377(a)) will appear again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

Then, in the "processing for displaying in a special mode" according to this effect example, the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern" (when a predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination). However, it can be executed during the period in which the specific effect image appears (predetermined timing in the specific effect pattern).

In FIG. 378, the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is being executed in the “specific effect pattern”, and the expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image is performed. The example of a display in the production|presentation display apparatus 1600 when it is in the state which exists is shown.

That is, in this effect example, when at least the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed, on condition that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, It becomes possible to perform a process (a process of displaying in a special mode) of slightly rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) and then displaying them. There is. When the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "process for displaying in a special mode" is executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) for which the process for displaying in a special mode is not executed is displayed. The jackpot pattern appears more frequently than it is displayed.

More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 378(a), the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative pattern SZ and the background image (princess character) of each original image data It is still displayed. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 378(b), the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are rotated three times to the left and then displayed. In the situation shown in FIG. 378(c), the process (the process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed, and the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and the background image (princess character) is 6 degrees to the left. The process of displaying these after performing the rotation processing (process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed.

As is clear from FIGS. 378(a) to 378(c), each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) even when the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is performed. It is designed so that only a small amount of rotation processing is applied to. In particular, in the figure, it is possible to compare and see between FIGS. 378(a) to 378(c), but in the actual effect, FIG. 378(a) corresponding to the result of the effect determination is displayed. )-(C) is displayed, and it is not possible to compare between them. Therefore, even when FIGS. 378(b) and 378(c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the special mode is displayed, but the special mode is displayed. It is expected that the player will be aware of a certain possibility (the possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 378(a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. Is difficult to be convinced, and it is expected to leave a hope (maintaining a feeling of expectation) such as "may be in a state of being displayed in a special mode".

The original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and the background image (princess character) is subjected to rotation processing by 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displayed (processing in a special mode). ), the original image data may be subjected to rotation processing separately and then displayed. Alternatively, the original image data may be converted into one image and then the original image data may be converted into one image. It may be executed as a process of performing rotation processing on the image and displaying the image.

Regarding FIGS. 378(b) and 378(c), when the image shown in FIG. 378(c) is displayed, the jackpot pattern appears more than when the image shown in FIG. 378(b) is displayed. The relationship may be increased so that Alternatively, when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is executed, after displaying FIG. 378(a) once, it is displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes momentarily in the order of FIG. 378(b), (c). It may be allowed to. Alternatively, both of FIGS. 378(b) and 378(c) may not necessarily be prepared, and only one of FIGS. 378(b) and (c) may be displayed.

However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to judge the implementation status regarding such "processing in a special mode", performing such special production loses its meaning. It can happen. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is at least in a state in which the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is greatly displayed as a background image” is performed. It is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether or not the “process of displaying in a special mode” is being executed by an operation on a predetermined operation means such as.

In FIG. 379, the help image is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted in the state where the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image” is being performed. The example of a display in the production display device 1600 at this time is shown.

That is, in this effect example, an operation (operation button) by the player is performed at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image" is performed (see FIG. 378). 410 or the like), a character image PG (here, a character with a penguin) is used as a help image to help check "whether the special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed". It is supposed to be displayed.

More specifically, when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 378(a), the situation shown in FIG. 379(a) appears, and FIG. When the player performs an operation (operation button 410 or the like) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 379(b) appears, and when the situation shown in FIG. 378(c) appears. When an operation (operation button 410 or the like) is performed by the player, the situation shown in FIG. 379(c) appears.

However, as is clear from FIGS. 379(a) to 379(c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it is possible to make use of whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. , It is not possible to clearly indicate whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. Because it dare to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems that the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, it becomes possible to strongly recognize the possibility, Even if it seems that the "processing to display in a special mode" does not seem to be being executed, it is not possible to be convinced that hope for the feasibility of the processing can be left and the expectation can be maintained. It will be possible.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 379(a) to 379(c), the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is in a state where the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. Regardless of the mode of execution or the mode of execution thereof, it is possible to display only at one predetermined position and in one mode in which the ruler is held in the horizontal direction. In this way, by causing the image (here, a ruler) that is not influenced by the “display in the special mode” and that extends in the horizontal direction to appear by the operation of the player, the image is displayed. (Here, the ruler) can be made to function as a reference image (help image) as to whether or not the "special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed".

In particular, in this example of performance, the position that overlaps with the image (princess character) that is the execution target of the "display in the special mode" is not affected by the "process in the special mode" and is horizontal. A reference image (here, a ruler) that is displayed so as to extend in is displayed. Therefore, by checking the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) for which special processing is to be executed, it can be further useful in determining whether or not special processing is being executed. become.

That is, in such an example of the effect, the special effect to which the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is performed is a slightly tilted effect. When the tilted effect is performed, the tilt effect is Expectations are higher than if not done. Therefore, the player operates a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like) in order to determine whether or not the leaning effect is being performed, but even if the operation is performed, " It is intentionally made to have a recognition difficulty in which it is not definitely notified whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. As a result, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility of high expectations when the tilting effect appears to be being executed, and even if the tilting effect does not appear to be being executed, It is expected to leave a hope (maintaining a feeling of expectation) such as "may be in a state where a leaning effect is being executed".

Further speaking, a reference image (here, a ruler) as to whether or not the "special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed" is targeted for "processing for displaying in a special mode". One effect is to display at least a part of the image (decorative pattern SZ, background image) in the form of overlapping, and a standard image (here, a ruler) This is a single effect (expectation level) It is possible to provide an enjoyment that the function is exhibited for the first time by comparing it with the effect image (here, the princess character) that is not displayed as the effect.

Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to make a production without displaying the reference image (here, a ruler) depending on the selection by the player (depending on the operation). If you are not confident that you are in the state where the performance (here, tilt performance) is being executed”, you can enjoy various ways to play, such as not intentionally performing the operation by the player Become.

In addition, in this production example, the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is executed as "processing for performing rotation processing on the original image data and then displaying", but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, instead of the original image data, the image data created based on the original image data may be subjected to rotation processing and then displayed. Further, the image data may not be subjected to rotation processing but may be subjected to other processing or conversion. In short, it is possible to execute a special process for converting and displaying an image having a mode different from the normal mode, and when the special process can be executed, the player performs an operation to target the special process. As long as it is possible to display a rough guide image, the above-described effects can be achieved.

By the way, in the above-described production example, the "processing for displaying in a special mode" can be executed when "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed. However, depending on the result of the effect determination, the decorative symbol SZ may be allowed to be executed a plurality of times within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation. At this time, when the number of times that the “process for displaying in a special mode” is executed is large, it is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbols appear is higher than when the number of times is small.

In addition, not only when the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is in a state in which the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image" is performed, the decorative pattern SZ It may be made possible to be displayed by the operation of the player for the entire period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, it may be made displayable by an operation by the player.

That is, in this case, no matter what background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) to appear is executed. Becomes However, considering that the character image PG (particularly here, the ruler) is the “comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image”, the display position preferable for displaying the character image PG is the background image for each time. Obviously, it depends on the type. On the other hand, if the display position or display form of the character image PG (particularly here, a ruler) is changed according to the type of the background image each time, the character image PG will be compared with the comparison reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that amusement of the game will be deteriorated due to suspicion of lack of reliability. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an absolute image that is invariant regardless of the effect situation.

Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed among a plurality of predetermined display positions according to the operation (operation button 410 or the like) by the player. .. However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

FIG. 380 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

FIG. 380(a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player carries out an operation to display the comparison reference image (reference image) with a suspicion that "the processing for displaying in a special mode may have been executed". Then, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at any of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 380(b) to (d) shown in FIG. 380) that are predetermined according to the mode of the operation. The process of causing is performed.

For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the left position (FIG. 380(b)) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, the character image as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the center position (FIG. 380(c)) in the display area. When the process of displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 380(d)) in the display area. The process of displaying the character image PG as) is performed.

As is clear from FIGS. 380(b) to 380(d), the character image PG (particularly here, a ruler) is supposed to have the same form regardless of the display position. , Because the positional relationship between the background image (or the decorative pattern) and the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) that can be the target of the “display in the special mode” is different, “display in the special mode” The easiness of determining whether or not the "processing" is being executed is naturally different.

For example, when the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is displayed at the position (center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 380(c), the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is the comparison target. When the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is displayed at the position (right side position in the display area) shown in FIG. 380(d), Since the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) overlaps with the background image to be compared, it is displayed so as to cover almost the entire background image (till), so that the “display in a special mode” is performed. It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether or not the "processing" is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is played at a “display position suitable for comparison” which varies depending on the type of the background image at each time. Since it can be displayed by an operation by a person, it is possible to preferably provide the material for determining whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed.

In addition, in this effect example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is made variable according to the number of operations of the operation button 410 within a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press of the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any of these operation means may be operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operating means. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation on an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in the situation (operation period) when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. Will be possible.

Further, since the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function as an effect (expectation level) by itself, it is necessary for comparison and judgment with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the expected effect (background image) becomes a worthless image that makes it difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it is desirable that when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after being displayed by an operation by the player, it is automatically hidden without requiring any operation.

However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (particularly here, a ruler) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed and the type of the background image, the “display in a special mode” is executed. In some cases, it may not be enough for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to perform the comparison/judgment as to whether or not it is in the state. Therefore, in the above-described effect example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to cause the character image PG to appear appears again. If so, the time during which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, each time the predetermined operation means is re-operated, if it is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) with reference to the operation timing, it is intermittent until the player is satisfied. By performing various operations, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and it becomes possible to carefully compare and judge.

However, if such an endless continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be extremely easy to determine whether the special processing is being executed. .. That is, the player may always obtain a conclusive conclusion that "the special processing is being executed" or "the special processing is not being executed". It does not explicitly indicate whether or not the processing to be displayed in step 2 is being executed, but the above-mentioned purpose of "making it difficult to recognize" is discarded.

Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler that the character image PG has is shortened by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm), and the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced. Thus, it is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, every time the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden is extended. Since the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole becomes gradually smaller (here, the ruler becomes shorter), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It is possible to appropriately maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the processing for displaying in a special mode is being executed, while making it possible to extend.

However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), this cannot be used for comparison with the background image, which reduces the enjoyment of the game. It can be connected. Therefore, with respect to the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, a minimum size (here, the length of the shortest limit ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum level is set. When the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not extended even if the predetermined operation means is operated again in the state. It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. .. That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole. Is gradually getting smaller (here, the ruler is getting shorter), and finally it doesn't even appear. It will be possible to encourage them to operate only, and other than that, it is expected that they will concentrate on the original performance contents.

It should be noted that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over after the variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is started. With such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be provided as an extremely valuable opportunity for presentation, and basically, the "special aspect" can be obtained only by looking at the background image and the decorative pattern SZ. It is possible to provide the drama (see FIG. 378) for predicting whether or not the "display processing by" is being executed.

By the way, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 379 and 380 is in a state when it is first displayed by an operation on a predetermined operation means after the power is turned on (or the RAM is cleared). After that, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler becomes shorter), and finally it does not even appear. .. However, when a specific detection is performed or when a specific condition is satisfied, a comparison reference image (when appearing in multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions) It is also possible to prepare a process for displaying with a large display area as a whole (here, a ruler is made long). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation on the predetermined operation means.

Further, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means set such that the display positions of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are different from each other, the operation is performed depending on which of the operation means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. In this case, the number of remaining times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) that allows the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear is set separately for each operating means (display position), and the specific operating means is set. When an operation is performed on, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

For example, in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIG. 380, when the first operating means is operated in the effect situation shown in FIG. 380(a), the effect situation shown in FIG. 380(b) appears. Becomes In the effect situation shown in FIG. 380(b), when the first operation means is re-operated, the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended, but this is changed. As described above, the display is made smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, even after that, even when the second operation means is operated, the effect situation shown in FIG. 380(c) only appears, and the comparison criterion associated with the re-operation of the first operation means. The reduced display as the image (character image PG) is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the central position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, when the third operation means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380(d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) accompanying the re-operation of the first operation means. The reduced display as is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right side position by the operation on the third operation means.

In this regard, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at the specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 380(c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (central position). If another operation means (for example, the first operation means) is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (center position) is kept displayed. Then, it is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position that is difficult to compare with the background image due to the operation on the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means. By operating this operation means, it becomes possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. As a result, it is possible to add an interesting aspect of searching for at which position the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to enhance the ease of comparison.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is already in the display state is not triggered by this. Instead of displaying it, the display state is maintained. With such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, and the amount of comparison material with the background image is increased accordingly (two rulers are lined up here). This makes it possible to increase the horizontal length substantially). Therefore, although a background image that is difficult to compare appears, it is in a state where "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. It becomes possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when it is absolutely necessary to know whether there is any. However, this consumes two "remaining number of times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to be set" for each of the plurality of operating means at the same time. Since it can be generated in exchange for this, it can be said that the cost is greatly increased by greatly improving the ease of comparison.

In addition, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player. In order to increase the time for which (PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operation means as soon as possible after operating the first operation means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether only the comparison reference image (character image PG) that appears by the operation on the first operation means is in the “state in which the special processing is performed”, or the price is increased. In any case, it is necessary to make a quick judgment as to whether or not the second operation means should be further operated to greatly improve the ease of comparison, and the delay of the judgment causes a disadvantage on the player side. Since it will be enlarged, it becomes possible to maintain a suitable tension.

Further, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, the timings at which the comparison reference images (character images PG) are hidden are different. The size (length of the ruler) as each comparison reference image (character image PG) also differs from each other depending on the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) of each operation means, “the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if the specific operation means is operated, but the comparison reference image is operated when another operation means is operated. Since an effect situation such as "(character image PG) is displayed" can also appear, which operating means should be operated when the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears. Even in the judgment, it is possible to add a judgment element other than the type of the background image to be compared to provide even more fun.

As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by an operation by the player, but the predetermined time elapses. Prior to that, when the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is lost and is in a stopped state, it is desirable to be hidden by using this as a trigger. That is, as shown in FIGS. 379 and 380, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, and by comparison with the background image or the like. It will be difficult to concentrate on the performance contents. As a result, if there is a case where the player is unaware that the player has stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG for use in the production is lost, and the player is stopped due to a loss. In this case, it is desirable to hide the character image PG when this happens.

However, the character image PG may not be hidden when the jackpot is stopped due to a big hit, and may be continued in the displayed state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the big hit is stopped, the big hit game will be started even if the player does not notice this. Therefore, when the predetermined time elapses and the character image PG is hidden, it is a surprise. It is expected to function as a production.

Moreover, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that a specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed even when the user is gazing, but in the case of outputting such a specific sound, It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain the enjoyment of the game.

That is, although the remaining number of times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) that allows the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear can be set separately for each operation means (display position), the remaining If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area, and the effect is concentrated on the original effect. Becomes difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) can be output as a sound, while the specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) is “displayed in a special mode”. The sound output can be allowed only when is not executed. As described above, regarding the execution of the “processing for displaying in a special mode”, the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is not used as the confirmation suggestion on the affirmative side, but only the specific sound as the confirmation suggestion on the negative side (for example, , The sound of a penguin) is used, so that the player who dislikes such a specific sound concentrates on the original effect and is likely to execute the “processing for displaying in a special mode”. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at certain times.

However, for the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is not being executed. Even in the case of, it is desirable that the sound output is not always allowed. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image which is already in the display state is changed (the length of the ruler is shortened) is changed) by the operation of the player. At this time, when a specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is output, it is definitely recognized that the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is not being executed, but the specific sound ( For example, when the sound of a penguin) is not output, it may be in a state in which the “processing in the special mode” is being executed or in a state in which the “processing in the special mode” is not being executed. As a result, it is possible to maintain the interest when a specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) is not output.

It should be noted that the specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition even when any of the plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, if a specific sound can be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions only when a specific operation means is operated among the plurality of operation means, among the possibility that the specific sound is output, In a case where the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether the “display in the special mode” is being executed or the specific sound is not output, the “special mode” is selected. It is possible for the player to select whether or not to display the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the “display process” is performed.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is displayed in a special mode by displaying it in a small size (shorter ruler) in exchange for extending the display time. The difficulty in recognizing whether the processing is being executed is preferably maintained. In this regard, when the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large ( For example, if the volume is set lower than that when the sound of a penguin is output, the difficulty of recognition when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended is increased to some extent. You will be expected to maintain.

In addition, the size and display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are set so that the comparison reference images (character image PG) do not overlap each other when they are simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 380). It is desirable to set and respectively. It is possible to increase the number of comparison materials with the background image as much as the comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed without overlapping.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as an image having transparency. With such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap with each other, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be compared with the background image seen through. It becomes possible to perform it suitably.

In addition, in the above-described example of performance, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a small size (shorter ruler) each time a predetermined operation means is operated, but the display is not necessarily limited to this. Any mode may be used as long as it makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the process for displaying the mode is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. You can That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is “displayed with a specific transparency”, the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed with a specific transparency is small (specified by the ruler). It is important to display the portion that is displayed with transparency with a shorter length. It is possible to hide the portion that is no longer displayed with specific transparency, or to display it with higher transparency than specific transparency. You may make it difficult to visually recognize by displaying.

Further, as described above, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” means, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 378(a) to the display state shown in FIG. 378(b) and then to FIG. 378(c). It may be a dynamic drawing process for changing the display state. When the “display in the special mode” is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the “process in the special mode” is ended, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 378(c), After the display state shown in 378(b), the display state shown in FIG. 378(a) is restored.

In this regard, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the display, but as a dynamic drawing process. It is desirable to perform the "processing for displaying in a special mode" in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation of the player when the “display in a special mode” as the dynamic drawing process is being executed, While the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (within 3 seconds), “from the display state shown in FIG. 378(c) to the display state shown in FIG. 378(b), Since the movement such as "returning to the display state shown in 378(a)" always appears, it is possible to facilitate the comparison/determination as to whether or not the processing for displaying in the special mode is being executed. become able to.

However, the “display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation of the player when the “display in a special mode” as the dynamic drawing process is being executed. Also, while the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (within 3 seconds), “from the display state shown in FIG. 378(c) to the display state shown in FIG. 378(b). After that, the display state shown in FIG. 378(a) is not always displayed. Therefore, it is difficult to compare/determine whether or not the processing for displaying in the special mode is being performed. It will be possible to make it. In addition, the strategic characteristic is added because the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended.

Further, the “display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) and in a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the effect determination. May be performed in a long time. In addition, "processing for displaying in a special mode" as dynamic depiction processing that is performed in a time period shorter than a predetermined time period (3 seconds) within a period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern SZ to the stop of fluctuation thereof, The “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing that is performed for a time longer than the predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at predetermined different timings.

Further, although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, the sound of a penguin), the output of the sound should be interrupted in a time significantly shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “display in the special mode” is executed, the specific sound is displayed even after the “process in the special mode” is executed. Since it is possible to prevent the output of (for example, the sound of a penguin) from being maintained, a specific sound (for example, a process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed. , The sound of a penguin) makes it possible to make it difficult to generate a production situation as if it was denied.

In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (3 seconds) in a state of extending from before the execution of the “processing for displaying in a special mode” to after the execution thereof. Become. Therefore, when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic drawing processing is executed, for example, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is being displayed, the display shown in FIG. The state changes to the display state shown in FIG. 378(c) through the display state shown in FIG. 378(b).

Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of the character with the penguin and the ruler, only one of the character with the penguin and the ruler may be displayed. The point is that the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is not the target of the “display in the special mode” can be made visible by the operation of the player. However, by displaying a guide image (ruler) indicating a unit of length in the horizontal direction, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. It is possible.

The guide image AG in the demo screen shown in FIG. 377 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

[Prevention of mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination of which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected effect pattern type is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect(s) may be selectively appeared. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and accordingly, depending on the result of the big hit determination. The variable effect based on the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (feature effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movement are movable. Expected performance related to body movements and the like will be provided as a performance having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is set by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). The changing process is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing that reflects the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332). It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and regarding the brightness applied to each effect lamp when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated. A process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

In addition, regarding the acceptance of changes related to such set values (volume set value, brightness set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state in which the symbols are not changed and the symbols are changed In any of the states in which the player is operating, the operations can be executed by the player.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, many operation means (operation button 410, sword section 5010, effect selection left button 331) are operated by the player. , A production selection right button 332, a brightness adjustment button (not shown), and the like. Then, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variable effect based on the decorative design is being performed. I try to maintain.

However, if such a large number of operating means are provided, the presence of these operating means becomes more prominent, and thus the player is likely to be subject to mischief. As a result of rough handling, if any one of these operating means becomes abnormal or malfunctions, the operability and performance will be significantly deteriorated, and the enjoyment of the game will be unavoidable.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-gaming state (a state in which the above-mentioned operation effect cannot occur) in which the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is not executed. Instead, when a situation in which it is highly likely that mischief has occurred due to operation detection by multiple operating means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, which prevents the operating means from being mishandled. I can do it.

More specifically, in a state in which the game is not started (non-gaming state), among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operation means which should not need to be operated ( Here, when an operation on the operation button 410 or the sword part 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as a trigger.
In the effect display device 1600, in the state where the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed (reproduced),
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, changes in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp will not be accepted, and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed. The period is controlled to be generated for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the operation acceptance regarding the volume is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation acceptance regarding the brightness is permitted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output, so that the normal state as the non-gaming state is returned.

In the production restriction period (function restriction period) according to the present embodiment, “a change in the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted even if the volume adjustment button is operated, and the current volume is changed. Setting value is not displayed", and even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. However, only one of the volume adjustment process and the brightness adjustment process may be limited.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that trigger the generation of such an effect restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the generation condition of the production restriction period will be complicated and that a feeling of tension such as "Is the hall mischievous behavior actually monitored?"

FIG. 381 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a production restriction period is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined production restriction condition in the non-gaming state (during the demo screen or the like). is there.

Now, the game is controlled to a state where it is not started (non-game state), and the standby display is being performed on the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state or a demo screen). Is displayed, etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, the process of adjusting the volume (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if the predetermined effect lamp is in the light emitting state at the time of the operation, the process of adjusting the brightness (the brightness setting value is used as the light amount) The process of reflecting) will be executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

As described above, in the non-gaming state, when the player starts the game, the operation for the volume adjusting button and the brightness adjusting button is performed so that the volume and the brightness can be set to suit his or her preference. Reception is allowed. Then, when the operation is accepted, it is expected that the player is prompted to start the game by changing the volume setting value and the brightness setting value according to the operation acceptance.

However, as described above, in the non-gaming state, some mischievous operations may be performed on a plurality of operating means including such volume adjusting buttons and brightness adjusting buttons. As a result, if an abnormality or a failure occurs in any one of those operating means, the operability and the playability are significantly deteriorated, and the enjoyment of the game is unavoidable.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as mischief detection are prepared, and in any of these operation patterns in the non-gaming state. Based on the fact that an operation has been detected, it is possible to execute processing for causing a performance restriction period (function restriction period) in which a penalty is imposed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state, it is determined that the condition concerning the production restriction is satisfied. I am trying.
a. The operation detection on the operation button 410 is newly generated during the time period when the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started by the operation detection on the sword portion 5010 and the first timer time is completed. In addition, the detection of the operation on the sword part 5010 is started before the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) starts to be timed when the operation of the newly generated operation button 410 is detected. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurrence are set
b. A third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be triggered by the operation detection on the operation button 410, and a new operation detection is performed on the sword part 5010 until the third timer time is counted. In addition, the operation detection of the operation button 410 is started before the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) starts to be timed by the operation detection of the newly generated sword part 5010 and until the fourth timer time is completely measured. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurrence are set

It should be noted that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and a performance restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when a detection condition relating to another operation pattern is satisfied, or detection is performed. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. The first to fourth timer times may be the same time or may be different times. Further, the same timer may be used to measure the time, or a different timer may be used to measure the time.

Here, the "long press of the operation button 410" and the "continuous hitting operation of the operation button 410 (many times of operation)" are not required in the state where the game is not started (non-gaming state). Can be said. However, since these modes are modes in which operation instructions can be given in the operation effect in the game execution state, even in the non-gaming state, the player has some purpose in starting the game (for example, wishing and dry practice). It is assumed that these operations can be performed in, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, regarding the "operation combination for a plurality of operation means (for example, operation in the order of "sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010")" to be detected for mischief purposes, the game execution state is set. It can be said that it is important for avoiding erroneous detection that the operation effect is set as something that is not instructed to be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from significantly decreasing.

Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, before and after the operation on the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation on another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) different from the operation is performed. As a condition, the detection condition related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the performance restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when the operations on the plurality of operation means are disturbed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, it is possible for the player, etc., who has only touched the game once because of its uncommonness, not the intention of the prank, to be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more appropriately avoid that the operating rate is significantly reduced.

In this way, the stricter detection conditions are to prevent the production restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and to greatly reduce the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the pachinko machine from cluttering due to mischief. This is because it is expected that various combinations will be operated when the operation is performed, and therefore even if the detection conditions are made strict, there is a high possibility that the detection conditions will eventually be satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 381, first, at timing tq1 when in the non-gaming state, the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and determines whether or not the second-stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer time is completely consumed. The state (first stage state) is determined.

That is, as described above, the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" imposes three conditions (sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010) as conditions for generating the effect restriction period. Each time one is satisfied, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are raised one step at a time.

At timing tq1, the first staircase out of the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated is raised. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is exhausted, and the detection condition of the second stage (here, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been exhausted, the state is returned to the original state (one step down the stairs and the 0th stage) in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time has not expired (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern Among the three conditions (detection pattern) a, the “second stage detection condition” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and detects the third stage detection condition (here The condition (second stage state) for determining whether or not the detection condition (1) is satisfied is established.

That is, at the timing tq2, the second staircase among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated goes up. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is exhausted, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation on the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time is completely exhausted, the state is returned to the original state (state of 0th stage after descending two stairs) where none of the above three conditions is satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time is not completely exhausted (second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. The “third stage detection condition (final detection condition)” of the three conditions of the pattern a is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, the effect display device 1600 displays (reproduces) a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state in which the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed. Let it start. At the same time, even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Moreover, even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. , Generate performance restrictions. Then, the performance restriction period (function restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) from the timing tq3.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of operations are operated in a disordered manner, the production restriction period is generated, so that the operation due to mischief can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (up the stairs), but if a time-out occurs in the middle of the road, I am trying to eliminate all state levels and return to the original state. As a result, it is also preferable that the performance limit period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game even when the game is ended with the state level raised. Can be avoided.

In the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs) in this way, "volume adjustment button" and "luminance" which are the operation means to be restricted when the production restriction period occurs. A case in which the “adjustment button” is operated can also be assumed. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to his or her preference when starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated in the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs), this state is used as a trigger. It is desirable not to cause a change in the level or affect the first timer time or the second timer time.

That is, in this case, no matter how much the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated by mischief, it is not possible to generate the production restriction period triggered by this. However, at least the already raised state level does not drop due to these operations, and once the performance restriction period occurs, the target of performance restriction is "volume adjustment button" or "brightness adjustment button". Therefore, the operations for these are all invalidated, so it is also possible to suppress the mischief for the “volume adjustment button” and the “brightness adjustment button” that are not detected as the operations by the mischief. You will be expected to do it.

In addition, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for mischief detection, it is sandwiched between “two operations (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 381) for another operation means (for example, sword part 5010)”. Regarding the "operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 381)" in the form, the condition is that the operation is performed not a single time but a plurality of predetermined times. Is more desirable.

That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. When the operation on the button 410 is detected, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. When the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the detection condition related to the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied, and the performance restriction period is generated. The fifth to seventh timer times may be the same time or may be different times. Further, the same timer may be used to measure the time, or a different timer may be used to measure the time.

When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword section 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. Further, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), not the operation on the sword portion 5010 but the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again (a specific number of times (here, twice) that is more than the number of detection times (here, two times)). Then, the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset even after the third detection), and the production restriction period is not generated because the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied. Is more desirable.

With such a configuration, when the sword portion 5010 is operated twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is obtained when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) in succession. The detection condition is satisfied, and the production restriction period comes to occur. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated l times (>n times) between the two operations on the sword part 5010, the effect limitation period is reached. Since it will not occur, it is expected that the generation condition of the production restriction period will be complicated and a tension such as "Is the prank action actually being monitored by the hall side"? Become.

In addition, in order to make such complication, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword portion 5010 is performed again within the timer time, the operation button 410 is pressed. When operated within each timer time for a number of times (>n times), it is desirable to be controlled to a state different from the original state (may be different between m times and 1 times). .. Therefore, even if the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” in the state where these different states are controlled, the effect restriction period does not occur.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (>n times) between the two operations on the sword part 5010, the production restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (>l times). If the production restriction period can be generated (similarly to the case of being operated n times), the condition for generating the production restriction period is made more complicated, and “the mischievous action is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that the tension such as “ka” will be given more appropriately. In this case as well, it is needless to say that each time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time is generated and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" that trigger the generation of the production restriction period are prepared.

However, such a mischievous act is very different from a fraudulent act such as a magnet goto, and taking too strict measures may lead to a disadvantage on the hall side. Therefore, with regard to the specific moving image that appears during the production restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning content, the content is explained to the extent that a proper handling method related to the game and the production is explained, so as to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level. Is desirable.

As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and "operation acceptance regarding volume is allowed. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation acceptance relating to the brightness is permitted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output.” The non-gaming state is returned to the normal state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382, at a timing tq4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurred, the player starts the game. It is possible to assume a case where the game is shifted to the game execution state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by generating the start winning. In such a case, since the above-described intended purpose of quitting the mischievous act and starting the game has been achieved, in a state where the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet passed. The production restriction period (function restriction period) of something is ended.

However, if the game is started without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility of insufficient reflection, so at least the fluctuation of the decorative pattern that triggered the end of the production restriction period. Until the display is finished, each volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is accepted, but "Even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output and Even if the brightness is adjusted, the current brightness setting value is displayed, but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output."

As shown in FIG. 382, when the game execution state is transitioned in this way, the detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated regardless of whether or not it is controlled during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if the sword portion 5010 or the operation button 410 is operated, the first timer time and the second timer time are not timed with these operations as a trigger, and a performance restriction period is not generated. Absent.

According to such a configuration, when the game execution state is entered without waiting for the original duration as the production restriction period, a part of the content of the restriction during the production restriction period is left and the game is played. Since the state is changed to the execution state, it becomes possible to encourage reflection on the mischievous behavior without hindering the progress of the game production.

In addition, regarding the partial restriction period, not only until the variable display of the decorative pattern that has triggered the production restriction period is ended, the decorative symbol is stopped in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Until at least (until the non-gaming state), it may be continued at least.

Further, at the timing when the game execution state ends and shifts to the non-gaming state (for example, the timing tq5 shown in FIG. 382), a predetermined safe time is set and until the predetermined safe time elapses. It is desirable that the detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is made invalid even in the non-gaming state. In other words, in a situation where the game execution state has just ended, the player's excitement is not cooled down, and it is assumed that operations on a plurality of operating means will be overpowered. This is because if a penalty is imposed, the game may be immediately stopped. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game state shifts to the non-game state.

Also, when the game is transitioned to the non-gaming state while being controlled as the partial restriction period described above, there is a possibility that reflection on the mischievous behavior may still be insufficient, so the partial restriction until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, the detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is permitted again after the safe time has elapsed.

Further, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol change time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the stop thereof. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is immediately ended, at least until the safe time is ended, the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” can be performed. It will be possible to continue the invalidation state and the partial restriction period.

Further, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the form of ending the production restriction period (function restriction period), the symbol variable time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variable time It is desirable that variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. With such a configuration, the above-described partial restriction period can be continued for a relatively long time.

Further, in the above-described example, even if the detection near the occurrence of the production restriction period is made within the detection period (the portion in FIG. 381 where fine dots are applied) for the operation pattern (detection pattern). The behavior of does not appear. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs in which the penalty is generated is climbed), thereby urging the operation to be stopped due to mischief. You may do it. The specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of the operation means that is the detection target. Similarly to this, each time the timer time is set in the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs of the penalty occurrence is climbed), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. Good.

Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

[Prevention of noise due to adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination of which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected effect pattern type is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect(s) may be selectively appeared. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and accordingly, depending on the result of the big hit determination. The variable effect based on the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (feature effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movement are movable. Expected performance related to body movements and the like will be provided as a performance having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is set by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). The changing process is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing that reflects the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332). It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and regarding the brightness applied to each effect lamp when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated. A process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

In addition, regarding the acceptance of changes related to such set values (volume set value, brightness set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state in which the symbols are not changed and the symbols are changed In any of the states in which the player is operating, the operations can be executed by the player.

By the way, since only new customers try to start a game for a while after the opening of the hall, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment can be frequently performed in order to start a game with a set value that suits their taste. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is performed, the adjustment confirmation sound will be heard in the hall, and the atmosphere will be ruined. It's a thrill.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to perform an operation for volume adjustment or an operation acceptance for brightness adjustment until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is acceptable to accept the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value while the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is set to each “predetermined specific value”. I am going to

According to such a configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the set value (volume set value) and the brightness set value for the output volume of the effect sound are changed to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by automatically adopting the “specific value” as the set value of the volume that many players tend to prefer, a lot of games can be played in a time period just after the opening of the hall. It becomes possible to expect that it will be difficult for a person to adjust the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to his or her preference. The establishment of the predetermined condition may be that a certain period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that a predetermined command is received from the main control MPU 1310a, or that the peripheral control MPU 1511a has It may be that the specific process ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the volume setting value and the volume setting value are determined based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition or the arrival of a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Accepts changes in brightness setting values, but does not output volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if changes in these setting values are accepted. First, generate it. After such a special period (opening period), when a change in those set values is accepted, a period (normal business period) during which a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. There is. As a result, for a while after the opening of the hall (until the time required to complete various adjustments by new customers elapses), the state in which various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output is maintained. Then, it becomes possible to give an opportunity to perform the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment for starting the game with the set value which suits one's taste.

FIG. 383 is a time chart showing an example of processing during a special period (opening-only period).

Now, as shown in FIG. 383, if the power is turned on at the timing tr0, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is operated by the player until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Control is performed in a state in which the operation related to the adjustment and the operation related to the brightness adjustment are not permitted. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to a game such as a start winning is not permitted, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power recovery appears or no display output is performed, and standby screens (stop display of symbols, demo screens, etc.) have not yet been displayed. Do not show.

After that, when a timing tr1 when a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is established, detection related to a game such as a start winning is allowed, and a game start waiting state ( It will be controlled as a state waiting for the start winning). Even in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it is possible to recognize that the symbol variation waiting state is in effect.

Also, at this time, if the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, “accepting the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is permitted. Even if the change of the set value is accepted, a special period (opening period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such an opening-only period can be continued until a timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has passed from the occurrence of the period, and when the period ends at the timing tr2, the volume is increased. When a change in the set value or the brightness set value is accepted, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the production display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the change of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and the back thereof. Various background images displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) (images whose priority in the layer is lower than the decorative pattern) are displayed when the opening-only period shifts to the normal business period There is no change.

According to such a configuration, even after the state (standby screen) in which the stop symbol is displayed and the game start waiting state is reached, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening-only period ends). Since the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period (between), it is possible to preferably prevent the adjustment sound from reverberating immediately after opening the store. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), the adjustment confirmation sound can be automatically output so that the adjustment confirmation sound can be output. When various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments can be allowed while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. Moreover, while maintaining the state that the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen), the system automatically shifts to the normal business period when the adjustment confirmation sound can be output, so the predetermined time has elapsed from the time of opening the store. Until then, it becomes possible for the player side to be less likely to notice that the control sound is controlled during the opening-only period during which the adjustment sound is not output.

After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game start waiting state is reached (after timing tr1), when a change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, the effect display device 1600 responds to the changed setting value. Parameter display (volume side parameter display, brightness side parameter display) is performed. Therefore, by confirming such parameter display, it is possible to adjust the set value according to one's preference.

However, even if the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period immediately after the opening of the store (the opening-only period), the changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are reflected as the volume and the light amount. As a result, the atmosphere in the hall may end up being dyed in a single color, and there is a concern that the atmosphere will be spoiled and spoiled. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the volume setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable not to. In addition, regarding the brightness as well, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the brightness setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed brightness setting value is the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after opening the store (the period for opening the store), each player adjusts the set value according to his/her preference while checking the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. That is, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust to the set value according to one's preference, the surroundings of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected by sound or light, so that the atmosphere in the hall is improved. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Note that only the luminance of the volume and the luminance may be maintained in a state where the changed luminance setting value is not reflected as the light amount even after the timing tr2 arrives. That is, it is necessary to avoid reflecting the adjustment to the side where the power consumption becomes large by the operation by mischief before the game is started, and for the brightness where the power consumption is large compared to the volume while the game is not started. It is desirable that the adjustment is not reflected. Further, unlike the volume adjusting sound, it is not possible to confirm the degree of adjustment of the brightness adjusting sound, so that it may not be necessarily output.

However, even when the timing tr2 has not arrived yet (the time as the store opening period has not been exhausted), the symbol variation (variation display by the decorative symbol) starts based on the start winning. After that, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment by the player have been completed, and it is assumed that the adjustment frequency will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is early ended based on the detection. Then, it is possible to execute the process of shifting to the normal business period.

However, during the variable display period of the decorative design caused by the start winning that ended the opening-only period early, the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output. In such a case, it is assumed that most of the players will end the opening-only period early and then perform the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment, which may end up falling.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, after the timing tr1, when the start winning is detected before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is ended early to complete the normal business period. Although it is shifted to, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed until at least the variation state of the decorative pattern caused by this is terminated (variation suppression process).

FIG. 384 is a time chart showing an example of the processing when the game is started while the exclusive opening period (special period) is set.

For example, as shown in FIG. 384, it is assumed that the start winning is detected at the timing tr3 when the time as the special period has not yet been exhausted. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the processing for the opening-only period is ended, the process is shifted to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. This variation suppression processing is such that, while the variation display related to the decorative pattern is being performed, "the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is accepted, and the change of these setting values is performed in the output sound in the output state. It is possible to execute a process that reflects the volume of the sound and the light amount of the effect lamp in the light emitting state, but the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. The difference with the "processing for the opening-only period" is whether or not there is a variable display related to the decorative design, and the change in the set value is reflected as the volume and light intensity. The content of suppression for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, such a fluctuation suppressing process is changed to a non-gaming state (a state in which the number of holdings is 0 and a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). And unless it is migrated, we will continue to run it.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation having a short variation time is executed only once), and the non-gaming state at the timing tr4. If it is immediately returned to (the state in which the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed) (for example, one hour has not elapsed since the early-opening exclusive period has occurred) Even in the state immediately after opening the store, the special period (period for opening the store) does not occur again.

That is, in this case, in the non-gaming state after the timing tr4, as a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted. Will be controlled. During the normal business period when the fluctuation suppression process is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected as at least the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed brightness setting value is also the light intensity of the production lamp that is in the light emitting state. Is reflected as. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize that the symbol variation waiting state is in effect.

A player who creates a situation such as "the special opening period (special period) is ended early and then the game execution state is also immediately ended" is not convinced by the adjustment contents made while the adjustment sound is not output, and once started Since it is assumed that the person has a desire to make finer adjustments even after interrupting the game, even if it is in the state immediately after the store has opened for less than one hour after power-on It is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound without generating () again.

In the above-described example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) during which the opening-only period (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the opening-only period (special period) occurs. It may be the time until the specific processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to the respective “predetermined specific values” may be the timing tr1 or may be a predetermined timing prior to the timing tr1. ..

Further, in the above-described example, the configuration relating to the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after the timing tr1 has a technical feature, and the processing in the period before the timing tr1 has the above-mentioned contents. You may make it implement|achieve as a different process.

Further, in the above-described example, at the timing tr2, the decorative pattern and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed, but the display change is such that an image different from the decorative pattern and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, it may be performed.

Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

Further, in the above described example, only the set value of the volume or the brightness may be changeable.

[Control for volume adjustment confirmation sound according to production importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination of which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected effect pattern type is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect(s) may be selectively appeared. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and accordingly, depending on the result of the big hit determination. The variable effect based on the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (feature effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movement are movable. Expected performance related to body movements and the like will be provided as a performance having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is set by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). The changing process is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing that reflects the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332). It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and regarding the brightness applied to each effect lamp when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated. A process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

In addition, regarding the acceptance of changes related to such set values (volume set value, brightness set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state in which the symbols are not changed and the symbols are changed In any of the states in which the player is operating, the operations can be executed by the player.

Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first hit determination is performed according to the fact that the game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, and the second start opening 2004. In any case, if the second hit determination is made according to the acceptance of the game ball, the symbol variation (first symbol variation, second symbol variation) is performed according to the hit determination. After playing, advantageous benefits (big hit game) can be given to the player. However, the expected value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (second symbol change) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol change).

In the above example, the open/close pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at the big hit associated with the first special symbol, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the big hit related to the second special symbol, the open/close pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 16 times at maximum, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out. ing.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value is "a game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed", " The first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed on the first side execution state", and "the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed The second side execution state", and the numerical range in which the change of the volume setting value is permitted is the same in any of those states.

According to such a configuration, no matter which state (game start waiting state, first-side execution state, second-side execution state) the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game through sound adjustment according to each state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the set value (volume set value) concerning the output volume of the effect sound is changed when in the "game start waiting state" and the "first side execution state" described above. When this is done, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", control is such that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

That is, in the "game start waiting state", no effect sound is output because the game is not being executed, and if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, change It is not possible to confirm the loudness after that as an audible sound. Therefore, when in the "game start waiting state", it is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) relating to the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

Further, in the "first side execution state", although the effect sound corresponding to the first hit determination is being output, the situation is that the probability of a big hit being relatively low is a low probability game. It is often controlled to the state (low-probability non-time saving game state), and there is not much expectation in production. In recent years, it has been confirmed that a player plays a game while gazing at a mobile device such as a smartphone when in a game state with such low expectations. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the “first-side execution state”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is sent to surely inform the player of the change and the volume of the changed volume. Is desirable to be output.

On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", the effect sound according to the second hit determination is being output, and the probability that a big hit is obtained is relatively high. ) Is often controlled by. In such a situation, the expectation for the performance is high, and the volume adjustment for enjoying the performance tends to be performed.Therefore, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output when the volume setting value is changed, 2 It may be difficult to hear the effect sound and BGM according to the hit determination, which may lower the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the "second side execution state", control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed, and thereby clears the effect sound and BGM according to the second hit determination. It is desirable to maintain an amusement of the game appropriately by giving an opportunity to adjust the volume in a listening environment.

However, in the "second side execution state", the degree of expectation for the performance is increasing, and even after the second symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, this may be changed again and changed to a big hit manner. It can be said that securing a time (reverberation) to make the player aware of is important for maintaining amusement of the game. In this respect, if the normal processing when the game is in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after the game is transitioned to the "game start waiting state", the process related to the "second side execution state" is performed. The player side can easily detect that the game is in a state where the game is finished in the lost mode and is in the "game start waiting state", and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game is deteriorated.

Therefore, when the process related to the "second side execution state" is completed and the process is shifted to the "game start waiting state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition to the "game start waiting state" Control so as not to perform the normal process (the process of allowing the change of the volume setting value and outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) when in the "game start waiting state" It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after shifting from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "the volume setting value is allowed to be changed, but the volume setting value is changed. Also, it is desirable to perform "processing for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound" and "processing for not allowing the volume setting value itself to be changed". However, the possibility that the "second side execution state" is still continuing for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the "second side execution state" is changed to the "game start waiting state" is more positive. To make the users aware of it, as in the case of the "second side execution state", "Processing that allows changing the volume setting value but does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed" It is more desirable to do so.

On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect has not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. Therefore, when the processing related to the “first side execution state” is completed and the state is shifted to the “game start waiting state”, the “first side execution state” is different from the case of the above “second side execution state”. Continue to perform the above-mentioned normal processing (processing that allows the volume setting value to be changed and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) that is also performed when the "state" Is desirable.

By the way, in a situation where the "first-side execution state" is controlled, a mischievous operation is performed in which operations on a plurality of operation means are disturbed within a relatively short time due to stress that is difficult to win a jackpot. Is concerned. In other words, as a result of rough handling, if any one of those operating means becomes abnormal or malfunctions, the operability and the playability will be significantly deteriorated, and a further decline in the amusement of the game is unavoidable.

Therefore, it is possible that operation detection occurs with multiple operating means and it is mischievous not only when it is controlled to the "game start waiting state" but also when it is controlled to the "first side execution state". If the situation becomes high, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) in the above-described example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operating means (see FIGS. 381 and 382)” may be generated.

That is, in this case, some predetermined operations among the plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 1 in either of the "game start waiting state (non-gaming state)" and the "first side execution state" When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410, the sword part 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as a trigger.
In the effect display device 1600, in the state where the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed (reproduced),
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, changes in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp will not be accepted and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed. The control is performed to generate the period for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image on the effect display device 1600 is displayed even if the image related to the “first side execution state” has appeared before that. It should be noted that when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden and operation acceptance regarding the volume is permitted. A normal state as a "game start waiting state" or a "first side execution state" in which adjustment confirmation sound is also output, operation acceptance related to brightness is permitted and brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output Will be returned to.

It should be noted that as for detailed contents and other examples regarding such a performance restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt each content in the explanation example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operating means”. However, in this case, even if the "game start waiting state" is shifted to the "first side execution state" during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the effect restriction period (function restriction period) is not ended early, Under the same conditions as in the "game start waiting state", various processing relating to the production restriction period is continued as it is. As a result, it is expected that the mischievous operation is controlled when the anticipation degree is controlled to the “first side execution state”.

On the other hand, when the "game start waiting state" is shifted to the "second side execution state" during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the "production restriction period (described above with reference to FIG. 382. Processing related to early termination of (function restriction period)" and its modifications are appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere when the “second side execution state” with high expectation finally comes to be executed is maintained, and it is expected that amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

Further, in the above described example, only the set value of the volume or the brightness may be changeable.

[Period that operation acceptance is allowed (effective period) itself performance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern. Etc.), it is possible to execute effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) as to which expected effect (a plurality of possible effects) should be selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, it is possible that all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern are sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content according to the effect determination result, and the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. The variation effect according to the corresponding decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (preliminary effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of a big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected effect according to is to be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is changed regardless of the result of the notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception production (“inherent reception production” described later) in which the production reception is allowed when the based symbol production progresses to a specific timing. Even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, if the special result is obtained by the notice production determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is selected. It is possible to generate an operation reception production (“additional reception production” described later) in which the production reception is allowed when the design production based on the variation pattern of 2 has progressed to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the notice production determination, the operation reception production (effective when the pattern production based on the second variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing) Period) does not occur. It is possible to prepare a plurality of first variation patterns for generating the "internal reception effect" and a plurality of second variation patterns for generating the "additional reception effect". Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that the “internal reception effect” and the “additional reception effect” can be sequentially generated.

However, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions and the like means that a predetermined change (effect) for the effect member to be effected as long as an operation is detected within the effective period. At least one of the display change on the display device 1600, the effect sound change on the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, so that the operation acceptance effect (effective) is executed. (Period) This is poor in performance itself, and there is a concern that amusement of the game until the performance after operation is executed may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
When an operation by a player is detected, a first operation effecting means capable of executing an after-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern comes,
When a player's operation is detected, a second operation effecting means capable of executing post-operation effection in such a manner that the elapsed time from the detection timing is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value. I will prepare for it.

According to such a configuration, depending on whether the operation acceptance effect is performed by the first operation effector and the operation acceptance effect is performed by the second operation effector, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) itself. Since different performances will be provided, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game until the post-operation performance is executed.

That is, as the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the post-operation effect is executed until a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed earlier or later in the effective period. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the effective period occurs is advantageous for enjoying the effect because the execution state as the post-operation effect is maintained for a long time.

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the effective period, the elapsed time from the operation timing continues until it reaches a predetermined time value. Post-operation performance is executed. Therefore, it is recommended that the operation is performed for a short time after the effective period has occurred and not at a later time so that the overall effect time from the start of the effective period to the end of the post-operation effect is maintained for a long time. It can be said that it is advantageous for enjoying the performance.

In this case, the effect generation conditions for the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means and the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. The special result can be obtained with, and can be realized as something that occurs when the design effect (effect pattern) based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. You may make it implement|achieve as what occurs when it progresses to timing.

FIG. 385 is a first example in which after-operation performance is executed in such a manner that it is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the effective period to its detection. It is a time chart which shows an example about operation reception production.

Now, assuming that the first effect condition required for the occurrence of the “first operation acceptance effect in which effect acceptance is allowed” is satisfied, the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern progresses to the timing tr1, The first operation acceptance effect (effective period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (effective period) is terminated without executing the post-operation effect when the timing tr3 when a predetermined set time has elapsed without effect reception. During the execution period of the first operation reception production where the production reception is allowed, an image display showing the operation means to be operated and a gauge display showing how much effective time is left are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. Operation promotion production is performed.

When the first operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound indicating that the effect reception is allowed (or the effect reception is allowed) is output. .. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptance permissible sound for the predetermined set time, and at the intermediate stage where the predetermined set time has not yet passed. At a certain timing tr2, it is set in a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

It should be noted that the phrase "acceptable sound is output" here means that "sound data including the acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr1 and is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept that includes the arrival of the "acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data that has become the same as the timing tr1. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptable sound" may be output from before the timing tr1 until after the timing tr1 so as to extend over the timing tr1. In addition, here, “to put the sound data into the non-output state” means not only canceling the assignment state of the “sound data including acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel but also keeping the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. However, the concept includes that the "reception acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and a transition is made to a period in which the subsequent sounds (including silent data) are reproduced.

As described above, in such a first operation reception effect, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. The post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) that is started in this way is based on the variation pattern regardless of which timing within the effective period the effect is received. It is configured to end when a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) arrives. The "operation-induced process using the first effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the first decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the fact that the effect reception is performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr1a within the effective period (timings tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is: It is executed for a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 385, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timings tr1 to tr3), post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

According to such a first operation reception effect, it is necessary to perform the operation immediately after the effective period occurs, that is, the execution state as the post-operation effect (the execution state of the operation-induced process using the first effect member). It is possible to provide a performance that is maintained for a long time, which is advantageous for enjoying the performance.

As will be described later, in the first operation acceptance effect, effect acceptance is performed when the acceptance sound is in the output state, and post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect acceptance. Even in the case of being performed, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

FIG. 386 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation reception effect for executing the after-operation effect in such a manner that the elapsed time from the timing at which the detection is made continues until the time value reaches a predetermined time value.

Now, assuming that the second effect condition required for the generation of the "second operation acceptance effect in which effect acceptance is permitted" is satisfied, the symbol effect based on the variation pattern (effect pattern) progresses to the timing tr11. The second operation reception effect (effective period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. Similarly to the case of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect (effective period) does not execute the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 when a predetermined set time has passed without effect reception. It is supposed to end. A time value different from the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception production in which the production reception is allowed, an image showing the operation means to be operated and a gauge display showing how much effective time is left are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. Operation promotion production is performed.

Even when the second operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception acceptance sound indicating that the effect acceptance is allowed (or the effect acceptance is allowed) is output. It However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptance permissible sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a timing tr12, the output is set to a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

Note that the "acceptable sound is output" here is not only newly allocated "sound data including the acceptable sound" at timing tr11 but also already allocated to the channel. It is a concept including that the “reproduction period of the acceptance-permitted sound” in the sound data that arrives arrives at the timing tr11. Alternatively, the “acceptance acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr11 to after that so as to extend over the timing tr11. Further, here, "set to the non-output state" also cancels the assignment state of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel, but maintains the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The concept is that the "reception acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and a transition is made to a period in which sounds after that (including silent data) are reproduced.

Then, as described above, in such a second operation reception effect, the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. For the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the second effect member) that is started in this way, the effect is not accepted even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period. The elapsed time from the time when it is performed is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the valid period). The "operation-induced process using the second effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the second decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the effect reception.

For example, as shown in FIG. 386, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr11a within the effective period (timings tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is: The process is executed from the timing tr11a to the timing tr14 when a predetermined time value has passed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 386, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr12a within the effective period (timings tr11 to tr13), post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member). Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing that comes after the timing tr14) when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period occurs, from when the effective period is started until after the post-operation effect is finished. It becomes possible to provide a performance that is advantageous for enjoying the performance by maintaining the overall production time for a long time.

As will be described later, also in the second operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (the operation-induced process using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even when it is executed, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

As described with reference to FIGS. 385 and 386, the first and second operation reception effects (effective period) themselves are provided with different effect characteristics, and the operation reception effects (effective period) are made different from each other. Since it is generated based on the establishment of the condition, it is expected that the interest of the game from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (effective period) to the post-operation effect is preferably maintained.

However, the following problems remain if only the configuration related to the first and second operation reception effects (effective period) is adopted. In other words, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is advantageous to operate at an early time within the effective period in order to enjoy the effect, or to operate at a late time in the effective period in order to enjoy the effect. Since there is a certain operation timing for enjoying the performance, such as when there is such a situation, there is still a lack of performance in the effective period, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate. Therefore, it is more desirable to execute the operation reception effect as a special operation reception effect having the aspect described below.

FIG. 387 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the special production condition required for the generation of the special operation acceptance production is satisfied and the design production (production pattern) based on the variation pattern progresses to the timing tr21, the special production based on the progress to the timing tr21. Generate an operation reception effect (effective period). As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (effective period) is different from the case of the first and second operation reception effects, and the timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time elapses without effect reception. There is no such thing, and even if there is no operation, the effect reception is always generated within the effective period, and the after-operation effect described below is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect is set to be longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect.

Even when the special operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception acceptable sound indicating that the effect acceptance is permitted (or the effect acceptance is permitted) is output. To be done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment generates this acceptance permission sound (FIG. 387) corresponding to the first and second operation acceptance effects (FIGS. 385, 386). The output state is continued for a longer time. It should be noted that, in this example of explanation, the acceptance permission sound shown in FIG. 387 is also set in the non-output state at the timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage in which the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed, so that it cannot be heard. However, the acceptance permission sound shown in FIG. 387 may be such that the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 arrives.

Note that the "acceptable sound is output" here is not only newly allocated "sound data including the acceptable sound" at timing tr21 to the channel but also already allocated to the channel. This is a concept that includes the arrival of the "reception acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data that is being played, at the timing tr21. Alternatively, the “acceptance acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr21 to after that so as to extend over the timing tr21. Further, here, "set to the non-output state" also cancels the assignment state of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel, but maintains the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The concept is that the "reception acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and a transition is made to a period in which sounds after that (including silent data) are reproduced.

In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when an operation by the player is detected within the effective period and the effect reception is performed, based on the fact that the effect reception is performed, the "first movable operation" shown in FIG. The operation-based process using the decorative body (first effect member) and the "operation-based process using the second movable decorative body (second effect member)" shown in FIG. 386 are started in parallel with each other. It is supposed to do. Therefore, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is started, but the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" started in this way is performed at any timing within its effective period. Even when the effect reception is made, the process is ended when a predetermined timing tr24 in the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, and “operation using the second effect member” is performed. The "caused process" is started, but the "operation-caused process using the second effect member" started in this way is accepted even if the effect is received at any timing within the effective period. The elapsed time from the time when is reached is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the valid period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 387, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr21a within the effective period (timings tr21 to tr23), the “operation-induced process using the first effect member” in the post-operation effects. Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in the post-operation performance has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. The process ends at the timing tr25 when the time has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 387, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr22a within the effective period (timings tr21 to tr23), the “operation result using the first effect member” is included in the post-operation effects. The "process" is executed for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect is predetermined from the timing tr22a. It is executed until the timing tr26 (the timing that comes after the timing tr25) when the predetermined time value has elapsed.

As described above, the special operation reception effect according to the present embodiment occurs when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the effect reception is performed within the special operation reception effect (effective period), "a first effect member that continues the execution state until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives is used. The "operation-induced process" and the "operation-induced process using the second effect member that continues until the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value".

According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs, the execution state of the “operation-induced process using the first effect member” in the after-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. As a cost, the end timing of the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if the operation is not performed for a while after the effective period occurs and the operation is performed later, the end timing of the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect is set to this. Although it is possible to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a disadvantage that the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" in the post-operation effect cannot be maintained for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception performance, there is no operation timing that is most desirable for exciting the performance.
・In exchange for shortening the time until the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” is finished, the execution state of the “operation-induced process using the first effect member” is lengthened and enjoyed. (Whether to operate at an early stage within the effective period), or
・In exchange for shortening the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member", do you extend the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" ends and enjoy this? (Do you operate at a later stage within the effective period), or
-The time for which the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is completed are sacrificed little by little, and the whole As a balance (whether to operate at a timing that is neither early nor late within the effective period)
Special operation reception performance can now be provided with a special operation reception performance such as the above, which provides an operation reception performance that is easy to get tired of and can select the operation timing according to the mood of the player. You will be able to.

In addition, as will be described later, in the special operation reception performance, when the performance reception is performed when the reception acceptable sound is in the output state, the post-operation performance (operation-based process using the first performance member, based on the performance reception). The operation-induced process using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is released at this point.

Here, in the above-described example, when the effect reception is performed in the special operation reception effect (FIG. 387), “the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. The "operation-induced process used" and the "operation-induced process using the second effect member that continues until the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" .. However, even when the special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, when the jackpot determination is unsuccessful or when the predetermined effect determination is unsuccessful). In this case, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed even if the effect reception is performed within the special operation reception effect, and compared with the case where a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (Fig. 387). It is more desirable that the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set relatively short is performed in different effect modes.

According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, "the execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. "Operation-induced process using the first effect member" and ""Operation-induced process using the second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" Of the operation reception performances (first and second operation reception performances) in which only one of them is executed, the content is reduced to the same content, so by providing such a performance risk, tension when the special operation reception performance occurs It becomes possible to maintain a suitable feeling. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes" and "from the time when the effect is accepted When the post-operation production is performed in parallel with the "operation-induced processing using the second production member, which is continued until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time value," the first operation reception production and the second operation. It is desirable to make the jackpot pattern appear at a higher rate than when the post-operation effect appears in the reception effect.

However, this may not be detected well even if it is operated in the special operation reception performance (detection error), and the performance reception may not be performed. As a result, the effective period ends without the performance reception being performed. If there is such a thing, the player who saw that "the operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed after the operation is mistakenly recognized as the operation reception effect in which only one is executed. As a result, there is concern that the interest in playing games will decline. Therefore, regarding the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the effective period, and “the predetermined in the effect pattern is determined. The operation-induced process using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until the specified timing comes" and "the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable that each of the "2 operation-induced processing using effect members" be executed. As a method of automatically generating an operation reception (automatic reception) and a performance mode related thereto, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300, or an appropriate combination, and further, the content of the description Can be used.

In the above-described example, when the first operation acceptance effect, the second operation acceptance effect, and the special operation acceptance effect are generated, the acceptance allowable sound indicating that the effect acceptance has been permitted is output. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 385 to 387, the acceptance permission sound output when the special operation acceptance effect is generated is the first operation acceptance effect or the second operation acceptance. It is to be used as an effect sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptance allowable sound output when the effect is generated.

According to such a configuration, when the reception of the performance is allowed (when the image display showing the operation means to be operated or the gauge display of the remaining effective time is displayed) By confirming how long the acceptable reception sound to be output from is continued, the operation reception effect is displayed as follows: "The execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. "Operation-induced process using effect member" and "operation-induced process using second effect member that continues until the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time in which the “operation-induced process using the first effect member” can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect reception is made). Therefore, when it is recognized whether or not the operation reception effect is the "special operation reception effect", there is a demerit that the production strategy that the player can select is narrowed.

However, even when it is recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception production, it is important that the production strategy is left to some extent. Therefore, regarding the output time (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect are generated, a predetermined value as the "special operation acceptance effect (effective period)" is set. It is desirable to execute it as a non-output state when a specific time that is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of (4). According to such a configuration, the acceptance permission sound is set to the non-output state when a specific time less than half of the “predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation acceptance effect (effective period)” has elapsed. However, if the output state is maintained, it becomes possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Therefore, a predetermined set time (special period as the special operation reception effect (effective period) ( It becomes possible to provide a dramatic strategy in a state in which more than half of the timings tr21 to tr23)” is left.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the first operation acceptance effect or the second operation acceptance effect is generated is accepted in the output state. Even if it does, the output state is maintained, but for the acceptance permission sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated, if the effect reception is made in the output state, the output state is forcibly terminated. I have to. That is, in this case, when the production is received in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is the special operation reception production (the situation in which the specific time has not elapsed after the reception acceptable sound is output), the operation reception production is performed. Was a "special operation reception effect" and whether a mode with higher expectations appeared as a post-operation effect, but one of them (the operation reception effect is "special operation reception effect" It can be easily recognized by simply checking whether or not the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound has been ended with the reception of the effect. For example, even if it is recognized that the output state of the acceptance allowable sound is not ended and the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated as a result, the feeling is switched and “more expected as post-operation effect”. It is expected to concentrate on "has the appearance of a high-frequency aspect appeared?" Note that in this case, "when a mode with a higher degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect, the effect design is performed so that the ratio at which the special operation acceptance effect is newly generated is high until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable.

As described above, in the first operation acceptance effect, the second operation acceptance effect, and the special operation acceptance effect, the image display showing the operation means used as the operation target in each operation acceptance effect and the effective time Each of the remaining gauge displays is displayed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception production, when the production is received, the gauge display is left (displayed) and “the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the production pattern comes”. "Operation-induced processing using a production member" and "operation-based processing using a second production member that continues until the time elapsed from the timing of production reception reaches a predetermined time value". Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period is the timing at which the effect is received, after the effect is received, based on the gauge remaining amount that is left as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether the execution state of the operation-induced process using the first effect member will end soon. As a method for starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) as described above, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296 or an appropriate combination may be used. It is possible.

In the special operation reception performance, if the special operation reception performance is generated, it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception performance is generated by executing the operation-related display (precursor performance) that suggests the occurrence of the performance reception. It is desirable to tighten it. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player suitably enjoys the dramatic strategy over the entire period of the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect as well, it is desirable to execute the operation-related display (predictive effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect acceptance before it is allowed. As for the operation-related display, setting this to be executed as "a short-time predictive effect that is inferior to the timing suggestion function" makes it possible to obtain a transitional expectation as compared with the case where a special operation acceptance effect with high expectation occurs. It is desirable to not have it.

Here, as an operation-related display (a short-time precursor effect lacking a timing suggestion function) performed on the effect display device 1600 before the effective period of the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect occurs, For example, it is possible to realize "image display that simulates the operation means" as an image displayed in a fade-in state (white image or the like) when it appears in a fade-in mode.

FIG. 388 is a time chart showing an example of a process relating to an operation-related display when the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect are performed, and a process relating to channel assignment of sound data including acceptance acceptable sound. is there.

That is, ergonomically, when the effective period occurs, it is only necessary to display the suggestion image (operation related display) from several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the effective period occurs. It is known that the operation can be performed so that the production reception can be performed at a deadly timing. However, even though it is a few frames, if the "image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the effective period has not occurred, There is a possibility that a performance reception may not be made even if the player is operated in a state in which the "displayed image" is displayed, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 388, the timing trA arrives several frames before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. Although the operation-related display is started based on the above, the "image display imitating the operating means" is not displayed in a normal manner in a situation where the effective period has not occurred.

More specifically, at the timing trA, “allowable” that can be realized as a fade-in image in a state where “image display imitating operation means” is displayed in a fade-in mode, a predetermined effect image, or the like. "Pre-operation related display" is started. When the above-mentioned timing tr1 (or timing tr11) comes while the "pre-permission operation-related display" is being displayed in this manner, the "image of the operating means" is changed from the state in which the "pre-permission operation-related display" is displayed. The "display" is shifted to a state in which it is displayed in the normal mode.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the effective period occurs, the acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the effect acceptance has been permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 388, the acceptance permission sound is not started to be output at the timing trA, but is started to be output at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

In other words, in order to be able to operate so that performance reception can be performed at the timing immediately after the effective period occurs, the acceptable reception sound is also output from several frames before the effective period occurs. It seems that it is desirable to let them do it. However, if the acceptance-permitted sound is output a few frames before the valid period occurs, the output timing may deviate from the appearance timing of "image display imitating operation means". As a result, there may be a feeling of strangeness as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the period of timings trA to tr1 (timings trA to tr11), it is also possible to output a pre-permission operation related sound different from the reception permissible sound. However, if the pre-permissible operation-related sound is output in such a short period, the pre-permissible operation-related sound may not be an independent effect sound but may be heard in an integrated manner with the acceptance permissible sound. In the end, it is feared that a sense of incongruity may occur as if a sound shift had occurred.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-allowance operation-related display) is displayed for several frames. While the operation is started from the front, the operation-related sound (pre-allowance operation-related sound) is not intentionally executed, and only the acceptance/acceptance sound is output when the valid period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 388, the "acceptance acceptable sound" is output by allocating the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the state of allocation of the “acceptable sound including sound acceptance sound” to the channel is terminated so that the acceptance sound is made non-output. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" itself may be allowed to continue to be assigned to the channel even after the timing tr2. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 arrives. You can That is, in this case, the sound data itself is still assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable reception sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 388, when the effect reception is performed between the timings tr1 and tr2 (timings tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended and “the image display using the operation means is displayed. Is hidden. On the other hand, with respect to the “sound data including the acceptance-permitted sound”, the allocation state to the channel is maintained, and the acceptance-permitted sound is not forcibly terminated midway as described above.

FIG. 389 is a time chart showing an example of the processing relating to the operation-related display when the special operation reception effect is performed, and the processing relating to the channel allocation of the sound data including the reception acceptable sound.

As shown in FIG. 389, also in the special operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-allowance operation-related display) is performed when the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the effective period occurs arrives. However, the “period of timings trB to tr21” has a length that is more than twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timings trA to tr1” shown in FIG. 388. In the pre-allowance operation-related display displayed in, "expectation degree as to whether post-operation production performed when the production reception is performed is performed in a mode with high expectation" or "expectation degree at which big hit symbol appears" is As suggested, any one of the plurality of effect modes can be selectively appeared. Note that, in a situation where the effective period has not occurred, the “image display imitating the operating means” is not displayed in the normal manner, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 388.

For example, the “pre-allowance operation-related display” started at the timing trB has a different content from the “pre-allowance operation-related display” shown in FIG. 388, and the “image display imitating the operating means” is displayed later ( A plurality of effect images are repeatedly moved and displayed toward a position displayed at timing tr21) and hidden at the position, and the like, which has a slight story-like predictive effect (explained with reference to FIGS. 241 to 259. Either aspect of the "specific operation-related effect" described above may be applied). At this time, any one of the plurality of modes can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 comes while the "pre-allowance operation-related display" is displayed in this manner, the "image display imitating the operating means" is changed from the state in which the "pre-allowance operation-related display" is displayed in the normal mode. It will be moved to the displayed state.

In this respect, even in the special operation reception performance, as described above, when the effective period occurs, the reception permission sound indicating that the performance reception has been permitted is output. As for the sound, as shown in FIG. 389, it is configured to be output from timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a part of the sound data assigned to the channel at timing trB.

That is, as described above, in the special operation reception performance, it is larger than "the minimum time ergonomically required to enable the operation immediately after the effective period occurs" before the effective period occurs. For a long time (timing trB to tr21), the "pre-allowance operation display" with high performance is performed. Therefore, in order to further enhance the performance in such a performance period (timing trB to tr21), a performance sound (pre-permission operation related sound) commensurate with the "pre-permission operation related display" displayed within the same period is output. It is desirable to let it do. Further, since the effect period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performing the effect, even if the effect sound (pre-accept operation related sound) is output within the period, acceptance is permitted. The inconvenience of being heard as a sound integrated with the sound cannot occur.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the pre-permission operation related display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the pre-permission operation related sound is output, and these output states are output at the timing tr21. I am trying to continue until. When the timing tr21 arrives, the state in which the "pre-allowance operation related display" is displayed is changed to the state in which the "image display showing the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "pre-allowance operation related display" is displayed. The state in which "sound" is output is changed to the state in which "acceptable sound" is output.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 389, one sound data including the reproduction section of the “pre-permission operation-related sound” and the reproduction section of the “acceptance-acceptable sound” is set to the channel based on the arrival of the timing trB. By assigning to the above, the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized.

According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, the reception acceptable sound output when the effective period occurs is part of the sound data assigned to the channel in the form of the precursor effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as an effect sound reproduced in the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect is generated (for example, when the indication effect is generated), and the first half part is an effect corresponding to the indication effect (pre-allowance operation related display). The sound (pre-acceptance operation related sound) can be used to indicate the timing at which the special operation reception performance occurs, and after the effective period has occurred, the channel allocation is performed based on the performance reception. Since it can be appropriately released, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception. In addition, as an output method for “one sound data” including a reproduction section of “pre-permission operation-related sound” and a reproduction section of “acceptance allowable sound”, first, the degree of expectation (when the symbol variation is stopped After preparing a plurality of sound data with different jackpot patterns), one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as the result of the jackpot judgment (or performance judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.)). It is desirable to realize the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively allocating to the channels based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the reproduction section of the "pre-allowance operation-related sound (predictive effect)", but different in the reproduction section of the "acceptable sound (operation acceptance effect)". It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

That is, in the special operation acceptance effect, when the effect acceptance is performed between the timings tr21 and tr22, the state in which the effect acceptance is allowed is ended and the "image display imitating the operating means" is hidden. In addition to this, the assignment state for channels is also terminated for "sound data containing acceptance acceptable sound", and the output related to acceptance acceptance sound is forcibly terminated midway. As described above. Therefore, by confirming whether the acceptance sound is forcibly set to the non-output state when the production reception is made, it is possible to know that the special operation reception production was executed even after the production reception was made. Will be able to recognize.

Even with one sound data (timing trB to tr22), a section (first half portion) of the effect sound (pre-allowance operation-related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (pre-allowance operation-related display) is in the reproduction state. In the situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation is performed by the player, this is not forcibly terminated. Only when the section (second half) of the effect sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the effective period is in the reproduction state (timing tr21 to tr22), the assignment state to the channel is canceled based on the operation by the player. Becomes

The one piece of sound data (sound data including the pre-permission operation-related sound and the reception permissible sound) is allocated before the timing trB, and is already in the allocation state at the timing trB. Good. Further, as described above, the channel allocation state may be continued after the timing tr22, for example, the channel allocation state may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance-allowed sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr22.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the state of allocation of the “acceptable sound including sound acceptance sound” to the channel is terminated so that the acceptance sound is made non-output. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" itself may be allowed to continue to be assigned to the channel even after the timing tr2. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 arrives. You can That is, in this case, the sound data itself is still assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable reception sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

In the configurations shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, “a plurality of acceptable reception sounds with different lengths in which the output state is maintained” are prepared as acceptable reception sounds associated with the occurrence of the operation reception production, and the production reception is performed. When the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), which have different post-operation effects, different acceptance allowable sounds are generated. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is continued, there is a demerit that the above-mentioned staging strategy is narrowed, but the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or It is possible to recognize which one of the two operation reception effects) is occurring.

Moreover, the plurality of acceptable reception sounds have a first acceptable reception sound (special operation reception production) that is terminated when the player's operation is received, and the output state continues. The second acceptable reception sound (first and second operation acceptance effect) is included. Therefore, when the operation is performed such that the reception acceptance sound is output while the reception acceptance sound is in the output state, the special operation reception is performed by confirming whether the output state of the reception acceptance sound is ended when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) has occurred.

However, the acceptable reception sound should originally be in a non-output state when the effective period ends, and the output state may be maintained when the post-operation performance is started. If there is, it may hinder the production. In this respect, in the above-described example, the reception effect sound whose output state is terminated when the effect reception is made is the first acceptance permission sound (the reception acceptance sound on the side where the time set value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( Special operation reception production).

That is, in this case, when the performance reception is performed in the output state of the “second reception permission sound on the side where the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively short”, the output state is maintained. However, it can be said that the second acceptance permissible sound will soon be in a non-output state because the time set value for maintaining the output state is short in the first place, and it is unlikely to interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the performance reception is made in the output state of the "first acceptance permission sound on the side where the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively long", the original time setting for maintaining the output state is set. Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so it does not interfere with the production.

Moreover, by confirming how long the output state of the acceptance allowable sound is continued, it is possible to recognize which of the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player who wants to try, if the output state of the acceptable reception sound is maintained at the stage when the time set value for the second acceptable reception sound has passed, not the second reception acceptable sound but the first reception acceptable sound. It is possible to predict that is in the situation where is output. In this respect, without confirming that the output state of the first acceptable sound is ended, by confirming how the first acceptable sound is set to the non-output state when the effect reception is generated, It becomes possible to confirm at an early stage whether the prediction that the special operation reception performance is occurring is correct.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, when the valid period of the operation reception effect is generated, a pre-permission operation related display indicating that the valid period is about to occur is displayed. The operation-related displays include a first pre-allowance operation-related display having a short display time (see FIG. 388) and a second pre-allowance operation-related display having a long display time (see FIG. 389). In this regard, when the first pre-permission operation-related display having a short display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptance permissible sound" is not assigned to the channel and " By assigning "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound" to channels, the acceptance acceptable sound is put into an output state. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first pre-allowance operation-related display is not output, but it is possible to prompt the operation from the time of occurrence of the effective period without causing a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred. become able to.

On the other hand, when the second pre-allowance operation-related display having a long display time is displayed, "sound data including acceptance-allowed sound" is displayed for the channel from the time when the second pre-allowance operation-related display is displayed. In the allocation state, the acceptance-permitted sound is output by setting the reproduction section of the acceptance-allowed sound to arrive at the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect is generated (when the precursor effect is generated), and the first half is the precursor effect (pre-allowance operation related display). It is possible not only to be able to indicate the timing of the special operation reception effect by flowing the effect sound corresponding to the (pre-allowance operation related sound), but also after the effective period occurs, based on the effect reception. Since the channel assignment can be appropriately released, it is possible to let the player recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception.

That is, in the pre-allowance operation related display shown in FIG. 389, the corresponding pre-allowance operation related sound is output and the acceptance/acceptance sound is further output when the valid period occurs. In the display, the corresponding pre-permission operation related sound is not output, and the acceptance permissible sound is output when the valid period occurs.

In the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 385 to 389, the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, the movable ornament, and the like can be used as the “effect member”. Further, it is possible to employ any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body as the “first effect member”, and the “second effect member” is as follows. It is possible to employ any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body that is different from the “first effect member”.

Further, in the above-described example, the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) do not necessarily have to be the same operation means, and may be different. When the operation means to be operated are different, the image displayed in each effective period is different.

In the first operation reception effect, "the operation-induced process using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes" is executed as the post-operation effect, "Operation-induced processing in which the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes The operation-induced processing using the second effect member" may be executed as the post-operation effect. Furthermore, although the operation-induced processing using the effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the first operation acceptance effect, any operation is performed. The cause processing is also executed as the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

In the second operation reception performance, performing "operation-based processing using the second performance member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of reception of performance reaches a predetermined time value" as post-operation performance. However, “operation-induced processing using the first effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value” and “the predetermined timing within the effect pattern has arrived. The operation-induced process using the second effect member, in which the execution state is continued until then, may be respectively executed as post-operation effects. Furthermore, although the operation-induced processing using the effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, in the post-operation effect according to the second operation acceptance effect, any operation is performed. The cause process is also executed as being continued until the elapsed time from the reception of the effect reaches a predetermined time value.

In the special operation acceptance performance, "operation-induced processing using the first performance member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" and "elapsed time from the timing at which the performance is accepted in advance" "Operation-induced processing that uses a second effect member that continues until a predetermined time value is reached" is executed as post-operation effect, but an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is used. You may make it further perform the used operation origin process. In the special operation reception performance, the operation-induced processing executed as the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives, and the time elapsed from the timing when the performance is received is the predetermined time. Any operation-induced processing that is executed as being continued until the value is reached may be mixed.

In the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 385 to 389, the effective period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the effective period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I am trying to do it. By setting such a long time, it is possible to enjoy the effective period having the above-mentioned dramatic strategy.

In the first pre-allowance operation-related display (see FIG. 388) having a short display time, “Expectation level regarding whether post-operation production performed when the production reception is performed is performed in a high expectation mode” or “big hit”. Although there is no suggestion of the "expectation degree at which a symbol appears", in the second pre-allowance operation-related display (see FIG. 389) having a long display time, "the post-operation effect that is performed when the effect acceptance is made is the expectation level". It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether it will be performed in a high manner" or "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear".

In the “effective period of special operation reception effect” set as a relatively long time value, by causing one of a plurality of display modes with different expectations to appear, “after the operation performed when the effect reception is performed” It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether or not the performance is performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation" or "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears".

In addition, in the special operation reception performance, even if the performance reception is performed at any timing within the effective period, the "performance by the first performance member that occurs due to the performance reception" is "due to the performance reception. In order to make the player recognize that the effect content is the same as the post-operation effect, the relationship that the execution state is terminated earlier than the "effect by the second effect member that occurs" desirable.

In the above-described explanation example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the pachinko machine 1, the first operation acceptance effect, the second operation acceptance effect, and the special operation acceptance effect can be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. However, the first operation reception effect is not installed and does not occur, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect is not installed and does not occur, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect may not be installed and may not be generated, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. ..

In the special operation reception effect shown in the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 385 to 389, specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to a channel is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. In particular, it may be one that causes a state in which reception of performance is permitted.

[More detailed performance of acceptance sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content corresponding to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (preliminary effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of a big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected effect according to is to be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described variation pattern determination, identification of high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change). When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, the effect reception is performed. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance effect (effective period) that is allowed. However, as will be described later, the permissible acceptance sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect is generated has different modes depending on the result of the effect determination, which allows the post-operation effect to be performed in a mode with high expectations. I try to suggest the rate of being hit and the rate at which jackpot patterns are stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, Even if there is a special result in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, the operation that accepts the production is permitted. Reception performance (valid period) can be generated. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the operation acceptance performance (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing. .. In addition, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern for generating the operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach is other than the "specific variation pattern". May also be provided. However, no matter which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the operation acceptance effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from happening or to lower the selection rate.

By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is predetermined for the effect member to be effected as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). The post-operation effect that causes a change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change in the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. Reception performance (effective period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that amusement of the game until the post-operation performance is executed may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressing mode. During the execution period of the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and/or the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is changed. The corresponding "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence, or in a non-output state (whether the reproduction period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, or the channel assignment). Has been finished), it is possible to generate at least a high expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity.

In such a configuration, when the operation opportunity is given, when the output in the non-suppressing mode of "BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)" is maintained (low expected non-suppression reception production) and "BGM reproduction". (Specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or silent, or is in a non-output state (suppressed operation acceptance effect), and an aspect related to these operation acceptance effects (low expected unsuppressed acceptance) Since the proportion (expected degree) of winning the jackpot varies depending on the performance and the high-expectation suppression reception performance, the performance when the operation opportunity is given (when the operation opportunity is given It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by the effect of "whether BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is suppressed).

However, in the high-expectation suppression reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in the suppression mode or in a silent state, so that compared to the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect. There is a concern that the performance will be poor.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the high-expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is set as a reception permission sound. It is possible to output as. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the performance when the high-expectation suppression reception performance occurs.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the acceptance permission sound output when the high-expectation suppression reception effect is generated is higher than the acceptance permission sound output when the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. It is used as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long period of time, and this also suitably suppresses the deterioration of the performance when the high-expectation suppression reception performance occurs.

On the other hand, in the high-expectation suppression reception production, when the operation opportunity is given, "BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)" is output in a suppression mode or silent, or is set to a non-output state. When the post-production occurs, the production sound corresponding to the post-production can be emphasized, which is advantageous in improving the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, with respect to the acceptance allowable sound output when the high-expectation suppression acceptance effect is generated, the effect acceptance is performed when the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state. Then, the output state is terminated based on the reception of the effect. As a result, the effect sound according to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptance acceptable sound.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation reception effect is displayed as follows: "When the operation is not detected within the set time when the reception of the effect is allowed, the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends. The automatic reception mode in which the post-operation performance can be generated even when the operation is not detected within the set time for which the performance reception is allowed" It can also be generated by.

That is, when the operation reception effect is generated in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed even if the operation is not detected within the set time period in which the effect reception is allowed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not perform an operation and, as a result, the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. However, as will be described later, more strictly, the output time required for the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as that when the operation is detected, but the output time required for the liquid crystal display in the after-operation effect is detected by the operation. It is supposed to be shorter than when it was done.

In the automatic reception mode (operation reception performance) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if no operation is detected, performance reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (the automatic button function is enabled). The post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically received effect reception. That is, in this case, since the performance reception is always generated before the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the performance reception may be performed within the time after the specific timing within the set time. As a result, the length of the effective period during which the production reception is allowed is substantially shortened. As a result, unlike the case where the post-operation performance is started after the set time is over, the automatic button function is activated by not speeding up the production time, but conversely increasing the production tempo. Can be realized.

Also, if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity will be substantially lost even though the set time has not expired. As a player, fearing this, it is expected that he/she will actively perform the operation at an earlier stage within the set time, or that he/she will be able to play the game with a feeling of tension regarding the production.

In addition, in order to obtain such an operation effect, regarding the “gauge display of how much remaining effective time” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the automatic button function is displayed until a specific timing. It is desirable to display it not as an indication of the remaining time but as an indication of the remaining time until the end of the set time. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, the performance reception is always performed before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes "0".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, not only the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, at the time of occurrence thereof, A reception permitting sound that indicates that the production reception is permitted or the production reception is permitted can be output. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the situation in which performance reception is automatically generated due to forgetting the operation, and the performance reception cannot be generated by the user's own operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated, the specification is not output when the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Since the sound can be output as the acceptable reception sound, by confirming the type of the acceptable reception sound, the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated instead of the non-automatic reception mode. Will be able to recognize that there is.

On the other hand, in the post-operation production, since there is a production risk that is usually executed in a mode with low expectations, it is not always preferable to operate the post-operation production so as to improve the enjoyment of the game. There is also an aspect that it is not limited. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, if the acceptance permission sound is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the performance acceptance is permitted, the acceptance permission sound in the output state is output. By terminating relatively early, the "acceptable sound" is not output, so that "a time when it is possible to consider whether or not to generate the effect reception" is created.

However, even in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, if the reception allowable sound is terminated early, there is a concern that it may be misunderstood that "the reception of the performance is no longer permitted due to the function of the automatic button". Occurs. Therefore, in the automatic acceptance mode according to the present embodiment, the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button is not yet functioning and the performance acceptance is permitted. It is suggested that the player is in the state, and eventually the player can prompt the operation with a sense of security that "the automatic button is not yet functioning".

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the operation reception effect, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in the suppression mode or silence, or is set to the non-output state. Suppression reception effect (here, high-expectation suppression reception effect here) to which an operation opportunity is given, and an operation opportunity is given while "BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)" is output in a non-suppression mode. While the non-suppression reception effect (here, the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect) can be generated in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the performance reception is permitted or the performance reception is accepted. There is a technical feature in that the acceptance-permitting sound that suggests that the state becomes an acceptable state is generated in such a way as to further enhance their original performance.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, if the “acceptable sound” is explained again, the “acceptable sound” means that performance reception is allowed. It indicates that output is started within the set time and production reception is allowed, or output is started and production reception is allowed before the set time when production reception is allowed. It is intended to indicate that the state is changed, and is output as an effect sound such as "Pikyne". However, in the case where the output state is set before the set time in which the acceptance of performance is permitted occurs, the output state of the "acceptable sound" is maintained across the timing when the set time occurs ( It is required to be in the output state even within the set time (within the period during which performance reception is allowed), and it is more than the time from when the "acceptable sound" is output to when the set time occurs. It is desirable to set the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the “acceptable sound” to be longer. In this sense, the "acceptable sound" is output only when a set time (valid period) occurs, and is in an output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) in response to an operation by the player or the output time has elapsed.

The "acceptable sound" may be output by being assigned to a channel as effect sound data independent of this (see FIG. 388), or another effect sound (for example, set time (effective period). ) Is performed before the occurrence of), and the effect sound that is output in accordance with the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect", etc.) is assigned to the channel and output as one effect sound data. (See FIG. 389), and a method for realizing it may be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the low-expectation non-suppression acceptance effect is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode.

Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probable variation/non-time saving), the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, "predetermined variation in the low expected variation pattern that does not even form the reach state" If the "pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (effect depiction according to a predetermined variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the predetermined variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice effect is produced within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (announcement effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected "predetermined variation pattern". It should be noted that, including each of the effect examples described below, effect pattern determination (sub-control side) is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination (main control side), and advance notice determination (sub-control) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. In the case of performing the control side), regarding the processing relating to the notice production, the “variation pattern determination” may be replaced with the “production pattern determination” and the “variation pattern” may be replaced with the “production pattern”.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the variation effect of the decorative symbol is changed as shown in FIG. 390(b). When a timing tr32, which is a predetermined time after the start, arrives, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which effect acceptance is permitted is generated. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern),
-While the "BGM reproduction sound" according to the variation pattern (production pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode, a "non-suppression reception production (Fig. 390 (a) and (b)), and when no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the production reception is allowed, the post-operation production does not occur and the operation is not performed. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 390(j))" when the set time ends
It is generated as a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is in the suppression mode, so that the operation acceptance effect is generated. Since the set time (effective period) during which performance reception is allowed without suddenly suggesting performance is suddenly set (non-suppressed reception performance), the player will be surprised. It will be in the shape of a droop, and delay will easily occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time is ended without the post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to generate post-operation effects, it is possible to create a sense of tension during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern). You will be able to maintain.

However, although it is executed as such "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect", the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without the effect after the operation against the intention of the player. If such frequent occurrences occur, it is feared that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the timing tr31 slightly before arrives, the "acceptable sound" is started to be output, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production reception is allowed at a timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and “after the operation, contrary to the player's intention. It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently issue that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without producing an effect. However, as described above, the "acceptable acceptance sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is generated, for example, according to the generation timing tr32 of the set time. You may make it generate|occur|produce by.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Picine!" and "press!" The second allowable sound to be output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 390(d) and 390(h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), The second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is designed to be output, and the game is also performed by the output restriction on such a "reception permissible sound". A delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when a person tries to operate.

By the way, as a countermeasure against sudden setting of the set time (effective period) or execution as a non-automatic reception mode during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), It is considered that a player may try to keep hitting the opportunity of post-operation production by repeatedly hitting the operation means (here, the operation button 410) even when the production reception is not permitted. Be done. However, in this case, since the production reception is allowed and the post-operation production is started immediately, the started production is “what is performed according to the production reception (post-production production)”. However, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not it is the one that is automatically generated as a simple notice effect that is not related to the effect reception, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 390 (particularly, FIG. 390(c)), in the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (effective period) has occurred. When the effect reception is performed at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (effective period) itself is ended, but the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output as one permissible sound ends (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 390 (g)). It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "what is being performed (production after operation)" or "it is automatically generated as a simple announcement production that is not related to production reception". become able to.

Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 390, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tr32a in the figure), as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first time) is displayed. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, as for the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing of effect reception. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect reception is performed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) in a state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (effective period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 operates the operation means that is the operation target in the low anti-non-suppression reception effect. A grated image is displayed, and a gauge is displayed to indicate the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. As the display method of the scale image and the gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) can be adopted, and those display images (the scale image and the gauge display) are generated when the reception of the effect occurs. Based on this, they are hidden (they are hidden at the same timing).

However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a "special effect mode (automatic button effect state)" for activating the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. Alternatively, the player may be allowed to set and cancel the "special effect mode" by an operation. That is, in this case, even if the operation reception effect is generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), in the state of being set to the “special effect mode” , "Non-suppressed reception performance" and is executed in the above-mentioned "automatic reception mode", and "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance" only when not in the "special performance mode" Will occur as. However, in this specification (especially, "more detailed performance of acceptance acceptable sound" and related descriptions), unless otherwise specified, the "special performance mode" is not set. At this time, it is explained as an example of an effect when the "special effect mode" is not installed as the pachinko machine 1.

391 and 392 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the high expectation suppression acceptance effect is executed in the automatic acceptance mode.

Now, in the normal gaming state (uncertain change/non-time saving), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, "SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) high expectation to develop. If a "specific fluctuation pattern" is selected from among the "variation patterns", the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative design (effect depiction according to a specific variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation effect, effect determination The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of (3) is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected "specific variation pattern".

However, as described above, in the effect (effect pattern) related to the “specific variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 391(b), whichever result is obtained as the effect determination (advance determination). In addition, when the timing tr42 (timing within the SP reach state) when a specific time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol is started, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which effect acceptance is permitted is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the operation reception effect (effective period) generated at the timing tr42 in the specific fluctuation pattern,
-"Suppression reception production (Fig. 391(a)") that sets the set time during which the production reception is allowed while the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the variation pattern (production pattern) is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state. , (B)), and even when the operation for the operation means to be operated is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the production reception is allowed, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is started based on the effect reception being performed. Aspect (see FIG. 391(j))”
It is generated as a "suppression/automatic reception performance" executed by. In addition, as a method of outputting the “sound of BGM reproduction” in a suppression mode or in silence, a method of presetting a silent section (suppression section) in the data of the “sound of BGM reproduction” itself or the A method of changing the volume value for the channel to which the “BGM reproduction sound” is assigned to a suppression value (for example, “0”), a combination thereof, or the like can be adopted. As will be described later, this "suppression/automatic reception effect" is also called "second suppression operation reception effect", and the suppression mode here is also called "strong suppression mode".

According to such a configuration, the "BGM reproduction sound" is suppressed during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) related to the specific fluctuation pattern). Since the set time (effective period) during which the performance reception is allowed is set with the performance such as suggesting the occurrence of the operation reception performance by outputting the mode or the silence (suppression reception From the player side, it becomes easier for the player to operate immediately after the operation reception effect occurs. In addition to this, even when the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation performance is automatically generated at the latest when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives. As a result (automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that will not miss the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation accepting effect at the time of high expectation.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even in the "suppression/automatic reception effect", as in the case of the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" described above, Figs. 391(b), (c), (g). As shown in, when the timing tr41, which is slightly before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) for which the production reception is allowed, is generated, the "acceptable sound" is started to be output, and the timing tr42 is crossed. The output state is maintained at. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM reproduction sound" is being output in the suppression mode or in the silent state, a state in which the production acceptance is allowed to occur at the timing tr41 will soon occur. It is expected that it will be possible to recognize that it is possible to make it difficult to frequently say that "the player accepts the performance by activating the automatic button function instead of his own operation against the intention of the player". Become so. However, as described above, the "acceptable acceptance sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) is generated, and is generated, for example, according to the generation timing tr42 of the set time. You may do it.

However, regarding the timing tr40 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is shifted from the state of being output in the non-suppression mode to the state of being output in the suppression mode or silence (or the non-output state), the above-described operation is performed. In order to appropriately obtain the effect (suppression reception effect), as shown in FIGS. 391(a) to 391(c), a relationship such as “length of timings tr40 to tr41>length of timings tr41 to tr42”. Therefore, it can be said that it is important to set so that it arrives well before the “output start timing tr41 of the above-described acceptance-permitted sound that precedes the set time”.

Further, in the "suppression/automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391(c), (d), (g), and (h), the above-mentioned "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" is performed. Unlike the case of "," not only the first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as "Pikine!" but also the second allowable sound that is output as a message sound such as "Press!" With regard to the above, the output is also started at the timing tr41, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr42.

According to such a configuration, in the effect display device 1600, which operation means among the plurality of operation means (the operation buttons 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) included in the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since there is a possibility that it can be recognized even when the simulated image of the operation means to be operated is not displayed (timings tr41 to tr42), immediately after the operation reception effect occurs. It becomes easy to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the “suppression/automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as “press!” is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Please put a sword!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

In the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are started to be output at the same time, but the timings at which the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are started to be output are different from each other. Alternatively, the output states may be sequentially set. In this case, only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started to be output from a state where the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 391(g) and 391(h), the "first allowable sound" is adopted as the effect sound output for a relatively short time, and the "second allowable sound" is adopted. Is adopted as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, as for the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound”, as shown in FIGS. 391(g) and 391(h), the output state is maintained for different times, and the output It is desirable that the time when the state ends (the time when the state becomes inaudible) arrives at different timings before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, depending on which of the following conditions the "acceptable sound" is, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. It becomes possible to expect that it will be difficult to frequently say that "the player receives an effect by activating the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation against the player's intention."
・A first situation in which both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" maintain the output state ・The output state of one of the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" is maintained However, the other ends the output state (is inaudible) Second situation ・ Both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" have ended the output state Third situation (which is inaudible)

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “non-suppression/non-automatic reception production” in the production example shown in FIG. 390 and “suppression/automatic reception production” in the production example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikyne!") is output as the "first allowable sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sound is output as the effect sound that is not output in the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect", but the sound effect ( Since the first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the “non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect”, when the “BGM reproduction sound” is suppressed, It becomes possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect reception is allowed (first allowable sound) while maintaining the performance appropriately (second allowable sound).

It should be noted that timings tr41 to tr42 (or timings tr31 to tr32) in the case where the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is output prior to the set time (effective period) or the image display of the mock image. The time may be a minimum time (for example, 1 frame) in a control (processing) unit, or may be a time of 2 frames or more. That is, if it is possible to output the set time (effective period) and the display of the mock image as little as possible, the player is in a state in which the acceptance of the effect is permitted and the operation means that is the operation target. There is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize which is earlier by the amount of time that precedes it.Therefore, within the period until the set time ends, or when the automatic button function is activated. It is expected to prevent forgetting to do the operation within the period until it arrives.

By the way, as described above, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity may be lost by activating the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (effective period). Is. Therefore, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391(c) and (d), unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390(c), at least one of the acceptable reception sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound). When an effect reception is made while the output effect is received, the output state is ended based on the reception of the effect. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and as a result, the production acceptance is allowed ( Since it becomes possible to recognize that the (effective period) has ended, "a state where reception of the production has not occurred yet and the automatic button function can be activated (a state where operation opportunities can be lost)" It becomes possible to avoid the misunderstanding that there is. In addition, in the set time (effective period), when the operation is performed and the performance reception is performed before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, the performance is performed at the time when the performance reception is performed. Needless to say, even if the timing tr42A arrives, the automatic button function is not activated because the state in which the acceptance is permitted is terminated.

Further, also in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391, when the effect reception is made within the set time (effective period) (timing tr42a in the figure), as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 ( At least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member and an after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), no matter which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is performed, at a specific timing that comes after the timing tr43. In contrast to the non-display (not visible), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is to maintain the output state for a predetermined time from the time when the effect reception is made. ing.

However, as shown in FIG. 391, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is the "BGM reproduction sound" regardless of the effect reception at any timing within the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained at the time when the timing tr44 at which "" is returned from the suppressed state (silent state) to the output in the non-suppressed state. On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391, the output state is ended at the timing tr44 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is returned to the output in the non-suppressing mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the "sound of BGM reproduction" is returned to the output in the non-suppressing mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effect is produced. It is expected that the game will be greatly changed and the enjoyment of the game will be improved. The “sound of BGM reproduction” may be gradually returned by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressing mode. Further, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be ended at a specific timing after the timing tr44 instead of at the timing tr44.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 operates the operation means that is the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. A grated image is displayed, and a gauge is displayed to indicate the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. In this respect, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, in view of the output of the message sound (for example, “press!”) as the second permissible sound, the performance display device 1600 also has the non-automatic reception mode. A message display (for example, "press!") that does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in (3) is displayed. It should be noted that, as a display method for displaying the image, gauge display, and message, for example, the method shown in FIG. 206 (Z3) or 220 (R2) can be adopted. The gauge display and the message display) are hidden (they are not displayed at the same timing) when the set time has not yet elapsed based on the occurrence of the production reception. The message display does not necessarily have to be exactly the same as the content of the message sound, and may be any one that prompts an operation.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391(g) to (i), before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (effective period). While the output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible state), the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. After the automatic button function is activated, it is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr43 when the set time ends. The display state may be maintained thereafter. Since the set time (effective period) is ended at the time when the effect reception is made, it is actually ended at the latest at the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated. Therefore, strictly speaking, the "timing tr43 at which the set time is ended" means a timing at which the set time is ended if it is supposed to continue, and the time set at the timing tr42 is set. This is the timing that comes when the time tr42 has passed.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is made by the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the performance reception is performed by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target for the operation target prompted by the message display. The player can be informed that the situation is not right. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is mistakenly operated, it is possible to suggest that the effect reception caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in both the operation reception effect not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 390) and the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 391), Within the set time (effective period), the remaining time display (gauge display) that suggests the remaining time until the state in which the production reception is allowed is completed can be performed. Then, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the end of the set time. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the end of the set time decreases, and when the time becomes "0", the gauge amount is also dynamically displayed so that the gauge amount also becomes "0".

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without operation detection, the automatic button function is activated and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, after the specific timing tr42A arrives, even if the set time has not yet elapsed, the effect acceptance is not permitted. Therefore, if the "remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state in which the production reception is allowed is completed" is performed within the set time of such an operation reception production (Fig. 391), normally It is conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, the effect reception is allowed after the specific timing tr42A has arrived. Despite disappearing, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically changed based on the time until the set time elapses, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. I am trying to display it. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and the gauge amount is dynamically displayed such that the gauge amount also becomes “0” when the set time becomes “0”. However, here, the production reception is not permitted before the set time becomes “0”, so the production reception is not permitted with the gauge amount left. It will be transferred to the state.

According to such a configuration, when the performance is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left, so that the player's intention Contrary to this, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing operational opportunity", and this will allow the operation to be performed at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount for the next set time (effective period). Will be able to encourage you to do.

Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode according to the present embodiment, when the effect reception occurs due to the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time has elapsed ( Gauge display) can be hidden (not visible). On the other hand, when the effect reception occurs due to the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in a state where the set time has not ended, and at least the setting is performed. Until the end of time, the "indicated dynamic display mode in which the remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is made due to the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that the production is not accepted by the operation detection for the operation target that is prompted to be operated by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is mistakenly operated, it is possible to suggest that the effect reception caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

As described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. There is a case. That is, in this case, it may be confused as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (effective period) in which the production acceptance is allowed occurs, so the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr32 in FIG. 390, there is no “when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. As the set time, it is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. At this time, the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated is set after the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed after the set time (valid period) has occurred, contrary to the player's intention. It is desirable to control the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

Further, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means is operated, it is preferable that the effect reception is performed and the post-operation effect is executed. That is, the player may be confused if a situation in which the production is not accepted despite operating the operating means appears. Since it is difficult to further request an operation for the operating means on the side, even if an erroneous operating state is maintained, a performance reception is made when the operating means on the operating side is operated. It is desirable to do.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, it is possible to appropriately adopt the items described in the above-mentioned “controlled operation sound output process (FIG. 178)” and other examples thereof. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, tr44 in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, ts16 in the effect example shown in FIG. 178, respectively. Become.

However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception performance, the performance sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state when the operation opportunity is given, and thus the performance becomes poor as compared with the non-suppression operation reception performance. Is concerned. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the acceptance permission sound output when the suppression operation acceptance effect is generated is more than the acceptance permission sound output when the non-suppression operation acceptance effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for a different time as the first allowable sound are used. It is prepared and any one of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 390(c) and (g) and FIGS. 391(c) and (g), and the “time to be maintained as the output state” Is set as the shortest aspect of the above-mentioned plurality of aspects. Further, it is desirable that the proportion (expectation level) of the big hit symbols appearing differently when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the above plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that “which of a plurality of modes is to be output as the first allowable sound” and “which of a plurality of operating means is to be used as an operation target” are obtained as separate determination results in the advance notice production determination. Alternatively, the determination result may be obtained as one determination result within the advance notice effect determination. However, in at least the first aspect among the plurality of aspects, the first allowance is obtained regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound be selectable. Further, the second mode and the third mode can be selected regardless of whether the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the “sword decoration 5001” is the operation target. You may do it.

FIG. 392 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second mode is used as the first acceptable sound when the high-expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

As shown in FIG. 392, this performance example is basically the same as the case of the above-described performance example described with reference to FIG. Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the notice effect determination being performed, at the timing tr41, the first allowable sound is output not in the first mode but in the second mode longer than the first mode. The difference is that the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained for a longer time than the second allowable sound.

With such a configuration, the acceptable output sound that is output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound (first aspect) that is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. Since it is possible to output as a sound to be maintained, the performance is preferably maintained even in the situation where "BGM reproduction (specific type of sound effect)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence when an operation opportunity is given. You will be able to.

Further, in order to improve the performance in the suppression operation reception effect, a sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is used as the first allowable sound output in the second mode. It is desirable to do.

On the other hand, in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, there are “when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target” and “when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. However, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target in all cases. Therefore, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner as the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 391 (for example, “press!”). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 392(c) and 392(g), the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. Also, by making the output state of the first permissible sound end (inaudible state) before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, the automatic button function is also achieved in this production example. It is possible to estimate how much time is left until the activation timing tr42A arrives from the output status of the acceptance-permitted sound.

Particularly, in this effect example, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the “second allowable sound” output in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 is ended. By confirming that, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, as compared with the case of the effect example of FIG. 391. become. In addition, since only the first allowable sound of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is output in a longer different mode (second mode), the player side first uses the commonly used sound. 2 Estimate the "remaining time until the timing tr42A arrives" with reference to the timing when the output state of the permissible sound is ended, and perform the normal estimation in this way. Since more detailed guesses can be made by using the challenge, it is expected that amusement of the game will be maintained appropriately.

Note that, in the production example shown in FIG. 392, other matters are the same as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 391. The point that the state is ended midway is the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 391.

In addition, when the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIG. 391, FIG. 392) occurs in the state where the above-mentioned “special effect mode” is set, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function is enabled by the player's intention, even if the performance reception is made by enabling the automatic button function, the message display It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and is hidden before the timing tr43 (the timing at which the effect is received or the timing delayed by the above-mentioned time). Further, at this time, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated does not come in the output state when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. It is desirable to function so as to end in the middle of the first permissible sound output in the second mode when it is output in the output state.

Further, there are a case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the first mode and a case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the second mode. Not only the time when the output state is maintained is different from each other, but different effect sounds may be used. For example, when the first permissible sound (the sound effect as the acceptance permissible sound) is output in the first mode, the effect sound such as "Picine" is output, and the first permissible sound (the sound effect as the acceptance permissible sound) is output as the second sound. In the case of outputting in the form, it is possible to output the effect sound such as “gaoga-o”.

In the above-mentioned explanation example, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as a “variation pattern in which even a reach state is not formed”, but it is defined as a “variation pattern in which a design is stopped without being in the SP reach state”, and the low expectation pattern is defined. The effect example shown in FIG. 390 may be performed when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns.

Further, it is desirable that the "suppression/automatic reception effect" illustrated in the above-described example cannot appear in (the effect pattern corresponding to) the low expected fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state, The "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in the explanation example may also appear in (a corresponding effect pattern) high expected fluctuation pattern including the "specific fluctuation pattern" when in the normal gaming state. .. That is, even if the high expected variation pattern (corresponding to the production pattern), basically corresponds to the low expected variation pattern (in the period before the production progress to the SP reach state such as the non-reach state). Since the effect that appears in the effect pattern) is also executed, the “non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 390 can also appear during the period. Even with such a configuration, when "suppression/automatic reception performance" appears (high-expected fluctuation pattern), "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" appears (low-expected fluctuation pattern or high-expected fluctuation pattern). It can be said that the ratio (expectation) of the big hit symbols when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that of the pattern).

In addition, in the low expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to it) that occurs in the normal gaming state, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence when giving an operation opportunity. It is preferable that the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. It should be noted that this is the case where the "special effect mode" is not set, or the "special effect mode" is not installed as the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, regarding the length of time from the "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated" to the "timing tr43 at which the set time ends after the acceptance of the effect reception is permitted," the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be one frame) or a time of two frames or more. For example, the message display is visible at "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated", and such a visible state is at least "timing tr43 at which the preset time ends after the acceptance of the performance is allowed". If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length as the set time (effective period), and it may be possible to recognize that the player has not performed any operation. You will be able to make it. In the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception performance, a message sound (second allowable sound) or a message display is displayed for "timing at which the automatic button function is activated" within the set time. It is desirable that the relationship be output (see FIGS. 391(h) and (i) and FIGS. 392(h) and (i)).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in FIG. 391(i) and FIG. 392(i), “the time for which the message display is left after the effect reception is performed (in the example in the drawing, timings tr42A to tr43). )”) is made to appear even when the production reception occurs at another timing (FIG. 390(e), FIG. 391(e), etc.) due to the commonization of programs, but The program may be used so that it occurs only when the automatic button function is activated. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 390(e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 391(e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr42a. Become.

Further, in the above-described example (FIGS. 390 to 392), after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect) by the speaker (second effect member). Sound) is started at the same time, but the post-operation effect may be performed such that the start timings of those effects are shifted. For example, in a situation where the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) is started at the timing tr42, the after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is performed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed at the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 390 to 392 is not displayed yet (or when the fade-out process is started). If it is started, the display effect can be smoothly switched.

As described in the above “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 178 )”, even in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, a sign is given in a period before the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed. An effect (for example, the “specific operation-related effect” described above) may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectation that the big hit symbol appears, and perform the predictive effect in any of these modes as the predictive effect. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor effect sound output during the period in which the predictive effect is performed, and which of the plurality of modes is output as the predictive effect sound depends on the execution mode of the predictive effect. It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, regarding the first permissible sound, in the first mode and the second mode among the image of the object to be operated, the gauge display indicating the remaining time, and the message display of "press!" It is output in any of a plurality of modes including modes.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the operation acceptance effect shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 occurs, a specific sound (second sound) that is not output when the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 390 occurs. Since the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound according to the aspect can be output as the reception permissible sound, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the performance when the suppression operation reception performance is generated. Will be able to. Further, by confirming the type of the acceptance sound, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance effect is being generated in the automatic acceptance mode instead of the non-automatic acceptance mode.

Further, regarding the acceptable sound of the non-suppressing operation acceptance effect (FIG. 390), there are a first acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a sound effect and a second acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a message sound. Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output. On the other hand, regarding the reception permissible sound of the suppression operation reception performance (FIG. 391, FIG. 392), the above-mentioned first permissible sound and the above Both of the two permissible sounds are output. As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance when the suppression operation reception performance is being performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppressing operation reception effect (FIG. 390) and the suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 391, FIG. 392) (FIG. 390, FIG. 391). ) And a case where different effect sounds are output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 390 and 392).

That is, if the acceptance permission sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the acceptance of the effect is permitted, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, the second allowable sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, while the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is also output normally. Is desirable. While the acceptance permissible sound is output in this manner, the first permissible sound (sound effect) is also output with a predetermined probability as the effect sound (second aspect) that is not normally output. If the ratio (expectation level) of the big hit symbols is set to be higher than that when output in the first mode, the "BGM reproduction (specification) is performed while recognizing that the production acceptance is permitted. It is possible to favorably maintain the performance when the "type of sound effect"" is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. In order to obtain such an action effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first acceptance allowable sound in the effect determination such as the notice effect determination. It is desirable that the rate of determining to the effect is higher than the rate of determining to output the second mode.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, not only the operation acceptance effect executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode (FIG. 390) but also the operation acceptance effect executed in the automatic acceptance mode (FIGS. 391, 392). When this occurs, a reception acceptance sound may be output that indicates that the production reception is allowed or that the production reception is allowed. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation opportunity is lost and, as a result, the operation opportunity of the user is lost.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within this set time (effective period). It is assumed that the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without receiving the effect reception according to the operation detection. According to such a configuration, it is possible to start the post-operation performance within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not an operation has been performed. It will be possible to make it an automatic button without changing the flow of the production after that and without causing a dramatic extension.

Further, in the above-described example of performance, a "message sound prompting the user to operate (second allowable sound)" may be output as a reception allowable sound, and the message sound (second allowable sound) must be operated. The output is not output in the "operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode" that is not received, but is output only in the "operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode" that is received without any operation. There is.

That is, in the operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second permissible sound) that directly expresses that an operation should be performed is output, or many types of reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, Although it is conceivable that the second allowable sound) should be output, in the post-operation performance, since there is a performance risk that the performance is usually executed in a mode with low expectations, the post-operation performance should be performed. The operation is not always good for improving the enjoyment of the game. In this respect, the "operation acceptance effect executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode" is an effect in which it is permitted to make a selection such as "not intentionally generate an after-operation effect", and therefore such operation should be operated. Do not directly express the message as a message (second allowable sound), do not output the message sound (second allowable sound), and do not have the right to select whether or not to generate post-operation performance. It is desirable to output the message sound (second allowable sound) or output more kinds of allowable reception sounds only in the "operation reception effect executed in the mode". It should be noted that in the "operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode", if the set time ends without the performance reception being performed, the post-operation performance and the related performance are not performed, so the expected The production will proceed without the degree being suggested. In the non-moving reception performance, no message sound is output in any operation reception performance, but in the "operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode", a message sound is not output. An operation reception effect may be included.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of modes (“press!” and “put sword!”) as message sounds (second allowable sounds), and the effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392. In the example, depending on whether the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (based on the result of the notice effect determination), any one of these plural modes is selectively selected. I am trying to output. In this case, when the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 and a message sound (“press!”) corresponding to this is output, the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the sword ornament 5001. Compared to when a message sound ("Noto na!") according to is output, it suggests that "a big hit pattern appears when the symbol variation is stopped" in the post-operation production according to the production reception. The appearance ratio (expectation level) of appearances is reduced. The ratio (the degree of expectation) in which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the operation target Is not the sword ornament 5001, and the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Moreover, at least in the normal game state, it is suggested that "a big hit symbol will appear when the symbol variation is stopped" in the post-operation production that is executed when the production reception is made in the operation reception production where no message sound is output. The ratio (expectation level) in which the effect mode to appear appears in the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect reception is performed in the operation reception effect in which a message sound is output. It is set to be lower than the rate (expectation level) at which the staging mode that suggests "" appears. The ratio (expectation level) in which the above-mentioned presentation mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

With such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated, first, "is a message sound (second allowable sound) output?" is a branch point for knowing the degree of expectation, and the message sound ( When the second permissible sound is output, it is possible to further know the level of expectation by the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, it is possible to enjoy the post-operation performance under relatively high expectations when the message sound (second allowable sound) is output. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked by executing the post-operation effect in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the expectation degree becomes relatively low, and the “sword decoration body 5001” that is used only when the expectation degree is high becomes the operation target. Disappears. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the right to select whether to generate the post-operation effect by executing the post-operation effect in the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, in the operation reception effect executed in FIGS. 391 and 392, when the set time (effective period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 391(g) to (i) and FIGS. 392(g) to (i), regarding the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (effective period). While the output state is terminated (inaudible state) before tr42A, the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. Further, after the automatic button function is activated, the display is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is performed by the player's operation within the set time, the message display may be hidden at a stage before the set time has elapsed in accordance with the effect reception, but within the set time. When the automatic button function is activated, the message display (“press!” or “put sword!”) will continue to be displayed at least until the set time ends.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is made by the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the performance reception is performed by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target for the operation target prompted by the message display. The player can be informed that the situation is not right. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is mistakenly operated, it is possible to suggest that the effect reception caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

In the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) in which the automatic button function is activated, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display) when the effect reception is performed by the activation of the automatic button function at the timing tr42A. Since the amount of gauge in will be left behind, it will be possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing operation opportunity" against the intention of the player, and this will lead to the risk of During the set time (effective period), it becomes possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount.

Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) in which the automatic button function is activated, when the effect reception is performed by the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is at least set. Dynamic display continues until the end of time. Therefore, it becomes possible to indicate to the player that the effect reception is not made by the operation detection for the operation target which is prompted to be operated by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is mistakenly operated, it is possible to suggest that the effect reception caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, the same effect sound (first allowable sound of the first aspect) is output as the acceptance allowable sound. Even when the operation reception effect of (1) occurs, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the operation opportunity is given. Moreover, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, since the second permissible sound that is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is also output, which of these operation reception effects has occurred? It becomes possible to recognize. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode in (the effect pattern corresponding to) the specific variation pattern, the ratio executed in the mode shown in FIG. 391 is relatively high. The ratio executed in the mode shown is relatively low, and the ratio stopped in the jackpot pattern is relatively high when executed in the mode shown in FIG. 392. That is, in this case, the first permissible sound is not the “first mode” but the “second mode” that is not used in the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 390, while avoiding overlooking the post-operation performance. Since it will be output in, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, as compared with the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the effect sound in which the output state of the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained for a long time ( Since it is used as FIG. 392), it is possible to preferably maintain the performance when "BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence. become able to.

In the effect examples (suppressing operation acceptance effects) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. It is assumed that the same acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound of the first aspect) as when the non-suppressing operation acceptance effect (FIG. 390) is generated can also be generated. Then, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (the second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the effect sound (the first effect sound) in which the output state is maintained for only a short time (first In the aspect), the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is higher than that in the case where the first allowable sound is output (FIG. 391), so that new performance is added. As a result, the performance of "BGM reproduction (specific type of sound effect)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state while allowing the user to recognize that the effect reception is permitted. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the first allowable sound is output. When the production is accepted during the period in which the sound is being output, it is set to the non-output (non-audible) state even in the middle stage of the output (see FIG. 392(c)). . On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (first aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 390 and 391), the first allowable sound is the “suppression operation acceptance effect”. "And "operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode" (Fig. 391), if the performance reception is performed during the output, it is not output (non-audible) at that time. (See FIG. 390(c) and FIG. 391(c)). That is, in this case, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, even if the effect reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Note that the first allowable sound is in the output state during the period of timings tr41 to tr42, but within the period, even if an operation is detected, no effect reception is made, so that the first allowable sound is not output. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

That is, as described above, in the non-suppressing operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect occurs without being suppressed in "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)", so the post-operation effect is missed. The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode, the post-operation performance may not be generated. Therefore, when these operation acceptance effects are generated, it is assumed that some players repeatedly hit the balls before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, it may be difficult to understand whether it is the effect generated as the post-operation effect or the notice effect unrelated to the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such a concern by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduction data of (FIG. 390). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, there is no need to perform continuous hits. Therefore, in order to suppress the game caused by such continuous hits, the first allowable sound produces the first allowable sound and the second mode. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize in which of the above cases the output was made (output is stopped at an intermediate stage).

Even if the player accepts the performance within the set time, the message is displayed within the set time only when the operation is detected late, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. May be continuously displayed until the timing at which is ended, or the dynamic display may be continued until the timing at which the remaining time display (gauge display) is ended within the set time (described above). Common programs, etc.)

Further, as described above, in the post-operation production, since there is a production risk that is usually executed in a mode with low expectation, it is preferable to operate the post-operation production in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. It's not always good. In this respect, in the effect example (non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. 390, if the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output for a sufficient time to indicate that acceptance of the effect is permitted, it is relatively early. By using the mode (first mode) that is ended in step 1, the "time for determining whether or not to generate effect reception" is created while the acceptance permission sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), since it is not necessary to create such a time, the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same manner (first manner). In addition to the case, the acceptance permissible sound (the first permissible sound) may be output in a mode (second mode) longer than this, and it is suggested that the expectations are different depending on the modes. .. In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound for a comparatively long time, it becomes possible to suggest that the automatic button function is not yet activated, which gives a sense of security. In particular, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an operation.

Further, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), the automatic button function is enabled even when the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the long mode (second mode) (FIG. 392). The acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is made inaudible before the timing tr42A is reached, and the two acceptance permissible sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) are respectively set at different timings. I'm trying to finish.

As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive until the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound, second acceptable sound) becomes inaudible. In the inaudible state, it becomes possible to suggest that the automatic button function will soon be enabled unless it is operated quickly. At this time, in the mode (second mode) on at least the long side and the second permissible sound in which the output state is maintained longer than the first permissible sound in the first mode, the volume and pitch of the sound are changed with time. It is desirable to change at least one of the above in order to make it easy to recognize how much time has progressed.

Further, in the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, when the operation opportunity is given, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state, whereby an after operation effect occurs. When this is done, it is decided to devise a directing sound so that the corresponding directing sound can be heard. In this regard, regarding the acceptance allowable sound output when such a suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, when the effect acceptance is performed when the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state, it is based on that the effect acceptance is performed. Since the output state is terminated, the effect sound according to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptance acceptable sound.

In the above example of performance, when "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance" occurs, even if performance reception is made when the acceptance sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. And However, instead of this, “non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance” has a relatively high degree of expectation, for example, when it occurs in the SP reach state within (the performance pattern corresponding to) the high expected fluctuation pattern. Only when there is a situation, in order to encourage concentration on the performance, when the acceptance acceptable sound (even if the same production sound (first aspect) as the first acceptable sound is output) is in the output state This may be interrupted when the reception is made.

Note that the example productions shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 have described the case where the “suppression/automatic reception production” has occurred, but the “non-suppression/automatic reception production”, the “suppression/non-automatic reception production”, etc. also occur. If possible, the production progress may be performed in the same manner even when the “non-suppression/automatic reception production” or the “suppression/non-automatic reception production” occurs.

Further, when the high-expectation suppression reception effect is generated, it is possible to output the third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 391) and the second mode (FIG. 392) as the first allowable sound. When the third mode is output, it is desirable that the jackpot pattern appears at a higher rate when the symbol variation is stopped than when the first mode or the second mode is output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and it is possible to recognize the expectation level and set a time (effective period) during which performance reception is allowed. It becomes possible to more appropriately maintain the interest of the game within the period.

At this time, in the third aspect, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that the output mode is the third mode, not the first mode or the second mode. The longer the time required, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the feeling of tension within the set time (effective period) in which performance reception is allowed. Like Other matters when the third mode is output are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392, such as the interruption of the production reception when the third mode is in the output state. is there.

The automatic button function may be activated whenever the timing tr42A in (the effect pattern corresponding to) the specific variation pattern arrives, or when the big hit is obtained, the specific variation may occur. It is activated when the timing tr42A in (the effect pattern corresponding to) comes, but when the big hit is not obtained, when the timing tr42A in the specific variation pattern (effect pattern corresponding to) comes. It may not be activated.

A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (effective period), and some of these effects allow the acceptance sound (first time) when the set time (effective period) occurs. The permissible sound and the second permissible sound may not be output. That is, in this case, when the set time (effective period) during which the acceptance of the performance is permitted occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is “0” and the acceptance allowable sound is “1” (first allowable sound). ) And there are “2” acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound, second allowable sound), suggesting to what degree the pachinko machine 1 is “promoting operation”. You will be able to.

As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting fade-out when the timing of hiding has arrived may be adopted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, in the period of timings tr40 to tr44, “BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or in silence, but instead of this, It may be set to an output state (eg, a reproduction period in which audible sound of audio data is recorded is ended, or channel assignment is ended). That is, in this case, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel and brought into the output state at the timing tr44.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, as described above, a high-expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination is performed. When a specific variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.), when the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, the performance reception is performed. Operation acceptance production (effective period)
-"Suppression reception production (Figs. 391 (a) and (b)" that sets a set time during which the production reception is allowed while "the sound of BGM reproduction" according to the variation pattern is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state. 392, (a) and (b) in FIG. 392)”, and the operation to the operation means that is the operation target is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the production reception is allowed. Even in the case, when the timing tr42A within the set time comes, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is generated based on the fact that the effect reception is made. "The automatic reception mode (see FIG. 391(j) and FIG. 392(j))" is started.
It is generated as a "suppression/automatic reception performance" executed by.

At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (preliminary effect determination), which of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode the effect sound (first allowable sound) among the acceptance allowable sounds is output. It is determined whether the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sounds is to be output by "press!" or "put it in!", and the acceptance allowable sound (first accepting sound) is output in a mode according to the determination result. As described above, the permissible sound and the second permissible sound are respectively output (FIGS. 391 and 392). As described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and the second permissible sound is "Deliver!" Is output, the expectation is higher than when "Press!" is output. At this time, in order of high expectations, "second mode & sword!", "second mode & push!", "first mode & sword!", "first mode & push!" It is desirable to maintain the entertainment of the game when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

Also, as described above, in the "suppression/automatic reception effect" according to the effect example, the first allowable sound is in the output state regardless of which of a plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound. When the production reception is made at this time, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 391 and 392). In addition, even when the second allowable sound is output by either "press!" or "put it in!", when the performance reception is performed while the second allowable sound is in the output state, Decided to interrupt.

However, instead of this, if the production reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the reception of the performance. Although it is ended, when the effect reception is made while the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without being ended. That is, in this case, in the “suppression/automatic reception effect”, the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted midway, and even if the expectation cannot be recognized, the first aspect with the lowest expectation among the plurality of aspects Since it can be recognized that this is not the case, it is expected that the decline in the interest in gaming will be suppressed. Even if a mode with low expectations appears in the post-operation performance, if the output state of the first permissible sound with the lowest expectations among the plurality of modes is maintained, the performance after operations will be changed. By re-recognizing that the production state is hard to have expectations, it becomes easier to accept the result that appears as the post-operation production, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced.

Even if such a modification is adopted, when the “non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect” occurs within the predetermined variation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. The case where the first permissible sound of the “suppression/automatic reception effect” is output in the second mode within the specific variation pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 392. That is, of the above-described effect examples, the “effect mode shown in FIG. 391” when outputting the first permissible sound in the first mode in the “suppression/automatic reception effect” that appears within a specific variation pattern is 393” instead of the “drafting mode shown in 393”.

As shown in FIG. 393, also in the “production mode shown in FIG. 393”, basically, the same as the content described in “the production mode shown in FIG. 391” or the content described in another example thereof. is there. However, in the "production mode shown in FIG. 393", even if the production reception is performed at the timing tr42a in which the first permissible sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted by the production reception. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even when the “suppression/automatic reception effect” occurs in a specific variation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode with the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes (for example, , (Second mode) (for example, FIG. 392(c)), when the effect reception is performed at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception.

According to such a configuration, when the "suppression/automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific variation pattern, the effect reception is performed at such an early timing that it is difficult to confirm which mode the first allowable sound is. Even if it is done, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by checking whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is ended with this as a trigger. In particular, in this effect example (FIG. 391, FIG. 393, etc.), the first permissible sound is output from the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (effective period) to the timing tr42 at which the set time is set. Since the first allowable sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from the output state at the timing tr41 to the arrival of the timing tr42, the first allowable sound is set as the first allowable sound. It becomes possible to function as a time for "hearing" which mode is.

In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared as the one in which the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. I am trying. Accordingly, even when the after-operation effect is started when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound are It becomes possible to shorten the time in which the output states are overlapped with each other, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first allowable sound output in the first mode can also be output in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (see FIG. 390(c)). In this example, the effect reception is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the production reception appears, it can be provided as a production that does not cause discomfort.

However, for the second permissible sound, if the effect reception is made while the output state is in effect, no matter which mode is output as the first permissible sound, it is based on the fact that the effect reception is made. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 392(d) and 393(d)). That is, in this case, the first acceptable sound has a function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the effect reception is made early, while the second acceptable sound has been accepted by the operation detection ( The automatic button function will play a function that suggests whether or not there is a situation where operation opportunities may be lost). It becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game.

On the other hand, the acceptance permission sound output when the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 390 may be output in the first mode, or may be output in the special mode. However, it is desirable to maintain the output state without terminating the output state even if the production reception is made during the output in the special mode. In the case of outputting in the special mode, it is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing at the time of stopping the symbols becomes higher than that in the case of outputting in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. The output may be different from the first mode and the special mode.

That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, “BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)” is maintained in the output state in a non-suppressed manner, and there is a problem that the effect is poor. Since it is not present, it can be said that it is more desirable to be able to confirm the aspect as the first permissible sound even in the situation where the post-operation performance is started, and to be able to recognize the degree of expectation.

Note that, in the "suppressing operation acceptance effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or in silence, or in the non-output state", the specific type of effect sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in a non-suppressing manner even in a non-audible state.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, “suppression that an operation opportunity is given in the case where the production sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence, or in the non-output state” In the “operation reception performance (FIG. 391 to FIG. 393 )”, the acceptable reception sound output when the set time (effective period) is generated is one of “a plurality of modes in which the length of time maintained as the output state is different”. It is possible to output in the non-suppression mode, and the expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbols) is different depending on the output mode. In this regard, the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is also generated in the "unsuppressed operation acceptance effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in the uninhibited mode". In addition to the case where the output is performed in the non-suppression mode in the first mode (FIG. 390), the acceptance permissible sound (the first permissible sound) is different from the first mode (the length is different, the effect sound itself is different, etc.). ) May be output in a non-suppressing mode, and the expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbols) may be different depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, both the acceptable reception sound output when the "non-suppressing operation reception effect" is generated and the acceptable reception sound output when the "suppression operation reception effect" is generated are in the "output state". It is possible to output in any of a plurality of modes in which the length of time to be maintained is different, and further, the degree of expectation varies depending on the mode that is output. It is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game until the reception of the production is performed in both "and the suppression operation reception production".

FIG. 394 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the first permissible sound is output in a specific mode when the “non-suppressing operation reception effect (here, non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect)” occurs.

As shown in FIG. 394, also in this effect example, the portions not particularly noted are basically the same as those in the effect example shown in FIG. 390. However, in the non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (timings tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, when the occurrence occurs, an effect determination as to which of a plurality of modes the first allowable sound is to be output (for example, at the time of starting the symbol variation) Prediction effect determination) is performed, and as a result of the effect determination, as shown in FIGS. 394 (c) and (g), the “specific mode” is not the “first mode”. It is assumed that the jackpot pattern is output, and the proportion of the big hit symbol that appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than in the case of outputting in the "first aspect". The specific mode is output for a longer time than the first mode.

Here, in both the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the first permissible sound can be output by the first mode when the operation reception effect occurs. This is described above (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)). That is, in this case, in both the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", when the operation reception effects are generated, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound over the same time. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in the specific mode when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" is generated (Fig. 394), the first allowable sound is the first sound when the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" is generated. In the case of being output in two modes (FIG. 392), different effect sounds are output as different first allowable sounds over different time periods. In this effect example, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, the first allowable sound is output for a longer time than when the first allowable sound is output in the specific mode.

However, on the other hand, in the case where the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound over the same period of time (the first mode (see FIG. 390, FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)), the degree of expectation (the proportion of the jackpot pattern) Is the "first mode" output when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" occurs, or "suppressed/automatic reception effect (Fig. 391 (or Fig. 393)"". When the "first aspect" appears when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" occurs, the effect reception is performed. The expectation (proportion) that the big hit symbol will appear in the post-operation effect according to "the first mode" appeared when the "suppression/automatic reception effect (Fig. 391 (or Fig. 393))" occurred. In this case, it is lower than the expectation rate (ratio) at which it is suggested that the big hit symbol will appear in the post-operation presentation according to the effect acceptance, which may be 0% or 100%. ..

On the other hand, the degree of expectation in the case where different effect sounds are output as the first permissible sound for different times (when the “second mode (FIG. 392)” or the “specific mode (FIG. 394)” appears) ( The proportion of the big hit pattern) is the same as the predetermined value regardless of whether the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" or the "suppression/automatic reception effect" is output. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound as the first permissible sound is output for the same time, either the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" or the "suppression/automatic reception effect" occurs. Depending on the situation, the expectations will not always be the same. Further, even when the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first permissible sound, "suppression/non-suppression" when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound. The same degree of expectation as "automatic reception performance" will be suggested.

That is, in this case, the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" are set to have different expectations even if the first allowable sound is output in the same manner (first manner). In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make them appear to have no relation with each other. .. However, in reality, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expectation levels are set to be the same even though they are different sound effects and different output times. You will be able to have a secret relationship. For example, when the "BGM reproduction" is suppressed and the "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed when the set time (effective period) in which the reception of the performance is permitted occurs, it is normal (the reception acceptable sound is in the first mode). Is output), different post-operation productions (different expectations) are started when the production reception is performed, so that the productions have no production relation. However, when the acceptable reception sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation when the effect reception is performed while making it appear as if different effects were performed depending on whether or not "BGM reproduction" was suppressed. As a post production, the same content (the same degree of expectation) can be made to appear, and it is expected that a surprise production is provided by secretly having a production relationship.

In this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the first permissible sound in both the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", but the "first mode" is commonly used. With regard to "," it is desirable that any operation reception effect be set as a mode in which the output time is the shortest out of a plurality of modes. The "second mode" as the first permissible sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the "suppression/automatic reception effect" is generated, and The "specific mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" is generated. It is desirable to have different output times (for example, “output time of specific mode”<output time of second mode”) so as not to have a dramatic relationship with each other.

Further, in the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect", regardless of whether the first allowable sound is output in the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not ended in the middle stage regardless of whether the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first permissible sound can be left even after the post-operation performance is started, the “non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance” having relatively low expectations is executed. In this situation, even though the first permissible sound is output in the "specific mode" that pushes up to the same expected level as the "suppression/automatic reception performance", which has relatively high expectations, miss this. It becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that it will happen. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted when the production reception is performed by the “suppression/automatic reception production” is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393.

In addition, in the above-described production example, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound in the “suppression/automatic reception production” (FIG. 392), as the first permissible sound in the “non-suppression/non-automatic reception production”. The expectation levels are set to be the same as when the specific mode is output (FIG. 394). However, in the "suppression/automatic reception effect", the output time is maintained as a first permissible sound for a longer time than in the "first aspect (Fig. 391)" and the "second aspect (Fig. 392)". When the "third aspect" of "is possible to be output," the "third aspect" is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppression/automatic reception effect", instead of the "third aspect". The expectation levels are set to be the same as when the "specific mode" is output as the first allowable sound in "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect". The “third aspect” is as described above.

Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 394, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tr32a in the figure), as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first time) is displayed. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, as for the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing of effect reception. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect reception is performed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) in a state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

Further, in the above-described production example, the length of the "time when the acceptance sound is output" is not the "time when the sound data of the acceptance sound is allocated to the channel", but the "time. It means the length of "time to output as audible sound".

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in order to make the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception production" and the "suppression/automatic reception production" appear to have no production relationship with each other, the "second aspect" and the "third aspect" For "mode," it is possible to output only "suppression/automatic reception performance" among "suppression/automatic reception performance" and "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance", and for "specific mode", "suppression" -It is desirable that only "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance" can be output among "automatic reception performance" and "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance". In addition, when the "second mode" and the "third mode" are prepared as the output candidates in the "suppression/automatic reception effect", respectively, the "acceptance/automatic reception effect" has an acceptance sound (second Even if the mode, the third mode) is output, the level of expectation is not necessarily the same as when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" reception allowable sound (specific mode) peculiar to this is output. It is possible to more suitably improve the performance as a reception acceptable sound that is output when the “suppression/automatic reception performance” occurs.

Further, the non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (timings tr31 to tr33) does not have to occur as an effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern), and for example, a high level that develops into an SP reach state. As described above, it may be generated in the production period before the SP reach state is developed among the productions related to the expected variation pattern (for example, a specific variation pattern).

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, regarding the “suppression operation reception production” in which a specific type of production sound (for example, BGM reproduction production sound) can be suppressed, a “weak suppression mode (first suppression mode) Suppressing operation acceptance effect)” and a “strong suppressing manner (second suppressing operation acceptance effect)” in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or in a non-output state. Good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to "0".

According to such a configuration, when the set time (effective period) during which the production reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide the production performance with respect to how much the specific type of production sound is suppressed. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the degree of expectation depends on which of the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” have occurred. It is desirable to make the (big hit pattern appearing) different. In addition, here, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs, the expectation (rate) at which the big hit symbol is suggested to appear in the "post-operation effect according to effect acceptance" is " When the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, it is lower than the expectation (rate) at which it is suggested that a big hit symbol will appear in "post-operation effect according to effect reception". The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the “weak suppression mode (first suppressing operation reception effect)”, an effect corresponding to a high expected variation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.), and even a reach state is not formed (or, While a reach state can be formed, it does not develop into SP reach) and can appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, while the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) )” does not occur in the low expected effect pattern, but may occur as an effect corresponding to the high expected change pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is the expectation when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more favorably, it is possible to generate a "special production state" that can be transitioned based on the satisfaction of a special production condition, and in the "special production state", the player Each time a performance reception is made during a set time (effective period) in which an operation promotion image (such as a scale image or gauge display) that prompts the user to operate is displayed, a specific type of sound effect (for example, a sound effect of BGM reproduction) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception be executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed every time a set time (effective period) during which effect acceptance is allowed occurs. It becomes possible to provide the drama about whether or not, and the expectation is suggested by such a drama (how much it is suppressed) in addition to the expectation suggested by the post-operation drama. As a result, it is expected that the interest of the game will be further improved when the acceptance of the performance is permitted.

Also, within the symbol variation, a production pattern (for example, a high expected variation) in which the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be sequentially executed An effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern of the patterns) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" on the side with relatively low expectations is generated, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation) on the side with relatively high expectations" is generated. Since the possibility that "reception reception effect)" will occur will be suppressed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). Will be able to.

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, regarding the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”,
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, production determination is performed. Regardless of which result is obtained as (preliminary judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the production of the specific variation pattern occurs when the production progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression mode) Operation reception performance)”
-Even when the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.), the performance of the specific variation pattern does not occur even if it reaches the predetermined timing When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.), it occurs when the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" is effected in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern. As compared with the case in which "does not occur, when the effect reception is performed in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)", the ratio of the post-operation effect executed in the mode with high expectation is higher. Is desirable.

In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" is always generated in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, while the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" is generated. Is not always generated, and when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, the post-operation effect with high expectation in "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" As a result, the rate of execution of the "weak suppression mode" becomes high, and it becomes possible to focus attention on whether or not the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the "first suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs.

395 to FIG. 397 show “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) in the effect corresponding to the high expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern). )” is sequentially generated. FIG. 395 shows an example of the effect when the operation is detected relatively early after the set time (effective period) has occurred, and FIG. 396 shows comparison after the set time (effective period) has occurred. FIG. 397 shows an example of an effect when there is an operation detected at a relatively late stage, and FIG. 397 shows an example of an effect when an operation is not detected within the set time (effective period).

Now, as a result of the start condition being satisfied (holding exhaustion) and the change pattern determination being made, "specific change pattern" of "highly expected change pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change etc.)" If is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first makes an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Then, after this, the fluctuating effect of the decorative design (the effect depiction according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the specific fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuating effect, the effect determination An effect (notice effect, etc.) according to the result (notice determination, etc.) is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) of the selected "specific variation pattern" itself.

However, in the "specific variation pattern", the effect content that appears after the timing tr40 (timing within the SP reach state) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern has arrived Is the same as the case of the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. That is, first, when the timing tr40 arrives, regardless of which result is obtained as the preliminary announcement effect determination, “a state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state” (Or, a non-output state.) Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a “strong suppression mode”, and the timing tr42 (decorative pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed while the “strong suppression mode” appears in this way. When a specific time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, that is, the timing within the SP reach state), the operation acceptance is permitted regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. Performance (effective period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect that occurs while the "strong suppression mode" appears is referred to as "second suppression operation reception effect".

On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (the timing before the SP reach state is developed) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative pattern is started, the notice effect determination is made. On the condition that a special result is obtained, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which effect acceptance is permitted is additionally generated with respect to the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs at the timing tr51 is different from the operation acceptance effect (non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of "production (strong suppression mode)", a process of suppressing the volume of "specific type effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction)" can be performed under predetermined conditions.

According to such a configuration, even when the effect according to the “specific variation pattern” is being executed, when the special result is not obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.), FIG. The effect example shown in FIG. 392 appears, that is, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" does not occur in the effect corresponding to the variation pattern, and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression mode)" is not generated. Only the operation reception effect)” will occur. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation) is performed in the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. First, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 is further generated.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the effect contents after the timing tr40 arrives are as described with reference to FIG. 391, and therefore the description is omitted here. In this case, for the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first allowable sound is not the first mode shown in FIG. 391 or FIG. 395 to FIG. 397 depending on the result of the effect determination (advance determination, etc.). , Related contents of the effect contents shown in FIG. 391 such as being output in the second mode shown in FIG. 392, and the contents described above for other examples and modified examples are shown in FIGS. 395 to 397. It goes without saying that the present invention is appropriately applied to the contents of the effect after the timing tr40 (strong suppression mode (second suppressing operation acceptance effect)) among the effect examples.

Then, as described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the timing tr51 (developed into the SP reach state) when the predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol (the effect according to the specific variation pattern) is started. When the timing (before the timing) comes, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as a “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)” that is generated at the timing tr51 in the fluctuation effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern,
While the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the variation pattern is being output in a non-suppressing mode, a set time (effective period) during which performance reception is allowed is set, but within the set time (effective period) When the effect reception is performed, the "restriction reception reception effect with condition (Fig. 395") that changes the "sound of BGM reproduction" from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (mode in which the suppression degree is relatively low) is triggered by the reception of the effect. (See (a) and (b))”, and when the operation for the operation means to be operated is not detected within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) in which the production reception is allowed, No effect reception is performed, and as a result, each process triggered by the effect reception (a process of changing the “sound of BGM reproduction” from a non-suppression mode to a weak suppression mode, post-operation effects (liquid crystal display, effect) "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIGS. 397 (a), (b), and (f))" when the set time (valid period) ends without sound (such as sound) being executed
Is performed as a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect". As a method of outputting the “sound of BGM reproduction” in a weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is assigned is set to a strong suppression mode (for example, volume value (audible volume ) Is less than "0"), a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is "10") having a lower suppression degree can be adopted.

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (first suppression operation reception performance)", unless a performance reception is made by an operation by the player, "a specific type of performance sound ( It is possible to make it appear as if the “non-suppression reception effect” shown in FIG. 390 and FIG. 394 has occurred because the BGM reproduction sound) is not output to the state of being output in the suppression mode”. Like That is, in this case, when the player operates, the player recognizes for the first time that it is not the "suppression reception effect" by changing to the "state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode". Since it becomes possible, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by producing a surprise.

Note that, in order to obtain such an action effect, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" can be generated depending on the result of effect determination (notice determination, etc.). The variation pattern is set to be selectable only in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone), and when in the special effect state, "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect ( 390, 394)" can be selected depending on the result of the production determination (preliminary determination, etc.) can be selected variation pattern can be selected than when in a normal production state when the symbol variation is stopped, the big hit symbol appears It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 390 and 394)" appears. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by combining the above-mentioned surprise effect elements.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more favorably, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can occur in both "normal effect state" and "special effect state". In the "normal production state", the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception production (Fig. 390, FIG. 394)” and “suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception effect (FIG. 391, FIG. 392)” can occur sequentially, and in the “special effect state”, one fluctuation pattern In the production according to the one variation pattern paired with, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception It is desirable that "effects (FIG. 391, FIG. 392)" can occur sequentially.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance", when the set time (effective period) ends without the production reception being performed, "a specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction sound). ) Is output in the weak suppression mode” and the subsequent production is advanced (FIG. 397). That is, in this case, which of "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance" and "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance" occurred, and by extension, "normal performance state" and "special performance state" Since it is difficult to recognize in which situation it is, the subsequent production will be advanced, so it is said that the expectation is relatively low. Even when the "operation reception effect (effective period)" is generated, the operation by the player can be more actively urged.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a case where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" occurs and "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect ( 390)" is generated, the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) over the same time, and this also causes "conditional suppression (weak). Suppression mode)-Non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "Non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" are made difficult to recognize.

Further, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)", similar to the case where the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" occurs.
The output of the "acceptable acceptance sound (first acceptable sound)" is started when the timing tr50 comes shortly before the set time occurs, and the output state is maintained while crossing the timing tr51. point,
-The second permissible sound (for example, message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (for example, sound effect) is output.-Set time (effective period) is set. When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mock image of the operation means that is the operation target in the operation acceptance effect, and suggests the remaining time until the end of the set time. Each of the configurations such as the point where the gauge is displayed, etc. is also adopted, respectively, and this also applies to "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "non-suppression." It is made difficult to recognize which of the "non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" has occurred. Therefore, as in the case of the “non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)”, for example, the method shown in FIG. It is desirable that the same aspect as that of the effect example shown in FIG. 390 be adopted for the timing of hiding the display images (cursed image, gauge display) based on the occurrence of effect reception. desirable.

Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 395 to FIG. 397)” according to this embodiment, this is also the same as the case of the effect example shown in FIG. When the effect reception is made at the timings tr51a and tr52a (FIG. 395(c), FIG. 396(c)) in which the “acceptable acceptance sound (first acceptable sound)” is in the output state after the occurrence of the period), the setting is performed. While the time (effective period) itself is ended, the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated midway, but the timing at which it is output as the first acceptable sound (same as when there was no operation) The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 397 (c)).

According to such a configuration, even after the reception of the performance is performed by the player's operation, the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception" is performed only by listening to the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound). It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the "effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the state is changed to “a state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the weak suppression mode”. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained each time the production reception is made.

Further, also in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)", if the effect reception is made within the set time (effective period) (timing tr51a, 51b in the figure). ), as an after-operation effect according to effect reception, after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member). And at least occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr52, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, as for the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect reception is made. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect reception is performed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) when the timing tr52 has not elapsed. It is required to set so as to maintain the output state.

In addition, regarding the acceptable acceptance sound and the operation-related display appearing in “conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 395 to FIG. 397)”, another example or modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 390 should be appropriately adopted. However, it is desirable to use the same method for each.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for the "first suppression operation acceptance effect (conditional suppression/non-automatic acceptance effect)" that is generated at the timing tr51 in the effect according to the specific variation pattern, A process of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in a weak suppression mode (a mode in which the suppression level is relatively low) is performed for a predetermined period of time from the reception timing.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (effective period) is generated (FIG. 395), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is a weak suppression mode (the suppression degree is The timing tr53a for returning from the relatively low mode) to the non-suppressed mode also comes relatively early, and as a result, the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the weak suppression mode and the "BGM reproduction sound". A relatively long interval (timings tr53a to tr40) is provided between the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. On the other hand, when the effect reception is performed at the comparatively late timing tr51b after the set time (effective period) is generated (FIG. 396), the timing at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, a comparison is made between the period in which the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the weak suppression mode and the period in which the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the strong suppression mode. Only a relatively short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) is provided.

That is, in this case, the later the timing at which the player's operation is performed in the first suppression operation acceptance effect (the closer to the timing tr52), the more the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the weak suppression mode, and then “ The time until the period in which the “BGM reproduction sound” is set to the strong suppression mode is started is shortened. Thereby, depending on whether the timing at which the player's operation is performed in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode comes relatively early and is continuous. It is possible to make it appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode→strong suppression mode) is being executed, or the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode ends is relatively late and the "strong suppression mode" is reached. It is possible to make people feel anxiety such as "may not appear", and thus it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this effect example, the length of time (a predetermined fixed time) during which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the weak suppression mode is set to the effect after operation (liquid crystal display, effect sound). Although it is set to be the same as the execution time, it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time during which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in the weak suppression mode is set to be equal to or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). This is desirable in order to highlight the post-operation performance when the performance reception is made. Furthermore, even if the production reception is performed at the latest timing tr52 in the set time (effective period) of the "first suppression operation reception production (conditional suppression/non-automatic reception production)", the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time during which the “BGM reproduction sound” is output in the weak suppression mode so that the timing to end comes before the timing tr40 to start the strong suppression mode. In addition, in this example of performance, the times tr51a to 53a are the same as the times tr51b to 53b.

As shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, within the effect corresponding to one variation pattern,
-First suppression operation acceptance effect (timing from tr50 to end of post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode). ), and the second suppression operation acceptance effect (timing tr40 to end the after-operation effect) for suppressing a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively high suppression degree (strong suppression mode). Until period)
Can be generated sequentially. Then, as described above, the second suppression operation reception effect is a variation pattern in which "the effect mode (type of acceptable sound to be received, operation target, etc.) changes depending on the result of effect determination, but is not executed. On the other hand, the first suppression operation reception effect can be generated on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). ing.

Also, as described above, the first suppression operation acceptance effect is determined by the effect determination (preliminary judgment, etc.) even in the effect corresponding to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) in which the second suppression operation acceptance effect is not generated. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during symbol change, only one of the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect occurs, and the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the first suppression operation acceptance effect There may be cases where the two suppression operation reception effects sequentially occur.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect reception is performed in the first suppression operation reception effect during the period from "timing at which the weak suppression mode ends" to "timing at which the strong suppression mode starts". Since the variable period is set to be variable according to the timing when the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is completed after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is completed. It becomes possible to give a directing effect as to whether or not it occurs, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur sequentially, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (the rate of being stopped by the big hit symbol) is higher than the case where only the first suppressing operation reception effect (weak suppressing mode) occurs. In addition, in the variation pattern for generating the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is set before the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, a mode in which the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher degree of expectation than when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode). It will be executed in a higher rate.

By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) occurs, the degree of suppression thereof is high (second suppression operation reception effect in the strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first suppression operation reception effect of the mode). However, even if an attempt is made to infer whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode) when a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed. Actually, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison target. In particular, when the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode do not have a large difference in the volume value when the volume is suppressed, this is even more the case, and this makes the sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs. Can be favorably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect are output when a set time (effective period) during which the effect acceptance is allowed occurs. The first allowable sound is output as the same effect sound over the same time (in the figure, is output in the "first aspect"). That is, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it is possible to leave it difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether the suppression mode is strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode). This makes it possible to maintain the tension for the production more appropriately and attract more players to the production.

However, in reality, if it is not possible to predict whether the game is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, it is feared that the interest of the game will be decreased. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect element useful for estimating whether the operation mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is provided within a period from when the operation reception effect is started to when it is ended. The following items are prepared in a time-sequential manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, in a case where the above-described situation where the first permissible sounds can be output as the same effect sound over the same time (in the figure, output in the “first aspect”) appears. Even if there is, it is possible to infer whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode based on the first allowable sound.

That is, the first allowable sound that is output when the first suppression operation acceptance effect is generated does not end the output midway even if the effect acceptance is made in the output state, and is output for a predetermined time. On the other hand, the first allowable sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, when the effect reception is performed in the output state, based on the effect reception, The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 395 and 396). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first permissible sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, and the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is set. While increasing the sense of tension for the performance by making it difficult to guess, the first permissible sound itself also has a function that is useful for estimating whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Since it is made possible, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game because the guess cannot be made.

Further, in addition to the first aspect, the first permissible sound that is output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (second mode, third mode, etc.). ) Output is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode in which the first allowable sound is output, it is either the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode even if the effect reception is not performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state. It becomes possible to easily guess whether or not this is the case, and it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately. However, in order to maintain a sense of tension with respect to the effect, the output in the mode (the second mode, the third mode, etc.) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is more than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to reduce the execution rate.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. By confirming whether or not the permissible sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation. Since a difference is provided between the operation reception effect and the operation reception effect, it is possible to infer whether the operation mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to the fact that it appears later than the acceptance sound, there is only a partial difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect. Therefore, some difficulty is left in estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, and the tension for the performance is maintained.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether the sound is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptance permission sound or the operation-related display is finished. Also, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the first suppression operation acceptance effect, both "effect by liquid crystal display" and "effect by effect sound" "are performed for a certain period of time after the effect is accepted". On the other hand, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation acceptance effect, the “effect by effect sound” is “what is performed over a certain period of time from the time when the effect is accepted”. The “effect by” is “finished when a predetermined timing tr44 arrives”. That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the second suppression operation acceptance effect, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" depending on the timing at which the effect is accepted. Becomes variable, and a large deviation will occur. Therefore, by confirming such deviation, it becomes possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. .

However, even if the effect elements useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that can't be guessed, the interest in the game can be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is generated based on the fact that the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period). Is set to a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the BGM reproduction effect sound is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is set. During this time, a set time (effective period) is generated so that performance reception can be performed. According to such a configuration, a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed by the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). Since the timings to be changed are different, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode also by confirming the timing.

Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, unlike the case of the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), no operation is detected within the set time (effective period). When, the effect reception is not automatically generated, and the set time ends (see FIG. 397). That is, in this case, if there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the reception of an effect for a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the mode is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode, although there is a cost that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed.

Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the strong suppression mode is ended is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as a timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation acceptance effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is ended may be set after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing when the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception production according to the above-described production example, regardless of which timing within the set time (effective period) the production reception is performed, in the production display device 1600 (first production member). The length of the period in which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 395 and 396). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is performed. And the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed (see FIGS. 395 and 396).

According to such a configuration, the performance is brought about in "when the performance reception (operation) is performed", and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

Further, in the above-described configuration, the first allowance is made so that it is difficult to distinguish which of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect in which the execution mode of the post-operation effect is different is occurring. The sounds are output as the same effect sound over the same time, and the effect elements that are useful for distinguishing between them are arranged in a time series. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed while maintaining the tension of the production.

Further, in the above-described configuration, the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect in which the execution mode of the post-operation effect is thus different can be intentionally mixed in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern. Therefore, each time the operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension about "when to perform the operation reception (operation)". In addition, in order to obtain such an action effect, in addition to the aspect in which the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect are mixed in the effect corresponding to the one variation pattern, the effect corresponding to the one variation pattern It is desirable that a mode in which only the second suppression operation acceptance effect (or the first suppression operation acceptance effect) appears multiple times is executable.

In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the action effect based on the performance of "when to perform production reception (operation)", a specific type of production in the first suppression operation reception production and the second suppression operation reception production. The sound (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) may not be suppressed, and the output in the non-suppressed mode may be maintained.

Further, regardless of at which timing within the set time (effective period) the production reception is made, the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) on the production display device 1600 (first production member) and the speaker (second production member). ), the operation reception performance in which the length of the period during which the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) is performed in parallel is unchanged, provided that a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.). It is desirable that it should not occur as a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern.

That is, in this case, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer that the special result has been obtained in the notice effect determination (the expectation is relatively high). Therefore, unlike the variation of the variation pattern itself (pattern production) that always occurs regardless of the result of the notice production determination, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game when recognizing that it has been additionally performed. Like It should be noted that depending on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is performed, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) are used. Regarding the second suppression operation acceptance production in which the length of the period in which the post-operation production sound output (production sound) is performed in parallel changes, even if it occurs only as the production of the fluctuation pattern itself (design production) There may be both a case where it occurs as an effect (symbol effect) of the variation pattern itself and a case where it occurs on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.).

Note that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output at a suppression degree lower than the strong suppression mode may appear even when an operation opportunity is not provided (when the first suppression operation acceptance effect does not occur). You can That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without the operation opportunity. Then, in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, the more the weak suppression mode appears, including the first suppression operation acceptance effect, the higher the degree of suppression becomes until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. If the second suppression operation accepting effect is further executed), the performance can be further improved through the suppression status for the “BGM reproduction effect sound”. In addition, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) that occurs while the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is not in the suppression mode, "whether the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (Fig. 390” or the mode shown in FIG. 395)” can be added to the effect.

Further, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may also be able to appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation acceptance effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the performance of whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation acceptance effect occurs, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is generated based on the effect acceptance within the set time (effective period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is adopted. However, instead of this, even when the first suppressing operation reception effect is generated, as in the case where the second suppressing operation reception effect is generated, “BGM reproduction effect sound” is generated before the set time occurs. May be set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and the set time (effective period) during which the production reception is allowed may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" will be output when the predetermined timing arrives, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, it is possible to broaden the range of performance. In the first suppression operation acceptance effect, the timing at which the "effect sound of BGM reproduction" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as the timing at which the post-operation effect is ended, or after that. It is desirable to make it come.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and 395 to 397, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is strongly suppressed (suppression mode or The process of outputting silently or not outputting) was ended at the same timing as the end timing of the post-operation production or before the end timing, but the end timing of the post-operation production came. It may be ended later. In this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing (unless the symbol variation is stopped), the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may not be returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode. Good.

As described above, the acceptable reception sound does not have to occur slightly before the set time (effective period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (effective period).

In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and FIGS. 395 to 397, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). ) Is ended at a predetermined timing tr44 in the effect according to the variation pattern, while the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is accepted. It is supposed to be terminated when a certain time has passed from the time. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are changed. It may be configured to end each at a predetermined timing in the effect corresponding to the pattern, or after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and speaker (second effect member). Both the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by (1) may be ended when a certain time has elapsed since the effect reception was made.

It should be noted that the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) to be suppressed is the timing at which the effect changes at the start of the symbol variation or within the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (for example, SP reach effect is started. The output is triggered by the arrival of (such as timing). On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started from an indefinite timing (a desired operation) within the set time.

The specific variation pattern described in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 and the specific variation pattern described in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397 may be different variation patterns or the same. It may be a variation pattern. Further, the special effect state may be an effect state when the big hit probability involved in the big hit determination is relatively high, instead of the look-ahead effect zone.

In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type effect sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to put the "specific type effect sound" in an inaudible state (silence (audible volume is 0) or not output (end channel allocation)) Good.

In each of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is set as the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "first suppression operation reception effect", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "second suppression operation reception effect", refer to FIGS. 391 and 392. However, as described above, “when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode) based on the result of the preliminary announcement effect determination. )”. Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is the strong suppression mode, not the weak suppression mode. It should be noted that the effect reception has been made by "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation performance has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
The first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (effective period) occurs, and the operation receiving portion is driven by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs The operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to the specific position. Note that, here, the “first operation mode” is assumed to be an operation opportunity given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” is given an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. 198 (A3) and the like that the sword ornament 5001 is "a device that can give an operating opportunity to a player in a state where the sword ornament 5001 has moved to a specific position". However, it is as described above. However, one operation means (one operation receiving portion) may be provided with the “first operation mode” and the “second operation mode”, respectively, and the operation opportunity may be given by any of these modes.

And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the operation reception effect,
-While outputting a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) in a non-suppressing mode, a non-suppressing operation reception effect that is performed from generation of a set time (effective period) to execution of post-operation effect, and -A suppression operation acceptance effect is provided in which a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or silence, or is in a non-output state. Further, as the suppression operation acceptance effect,
A first suppression operation acceptance effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode) (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect"). )), and a second type of suppression operation reception effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (for example, the above-described “inhibition/automatic reception”). Production”)
Is prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception effect,
-While the particular type of effect sound is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (whether in the suppression mode or silently output or in the non-output state), the first operation mode with respect to the operation means (Here, the operation button 410 is used) In the suppression non-moving reception effect to which an operation opportunity is given, and in the case where the specific type of effect sound is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (output in the suppression mode or the silence). Or in a non-output state), a controlled movement reception effect is provided in which an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the sword decoration 5001 is removed) is given to the operation means. By preparing, it is possible to further improve the performance when an operation opportunity is given.

FIG. 398 shows an example of an effect (inhibited movement reception effect) that appears in “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as an operation target (second operation mode)” in the second suppression operation acceptance effect (suppression/automatic acceptance effect). It is a time chart shown. In the second suppression operation acceptance effect (suppression/automatic acceptance effect), regarding the effect example (suppressed non-moving acceptance effect) that appears in “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)”, It is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 395 (the period from the timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect).

As shown in FIG. 398, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect), the second suppression operation reception is also performed when “the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”. In the production (suppression/automatic reception production), basically the same as "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" with respect to a portion not particularly noted (FIGS. 391 and 392). 395 to 397), it is possible to appropriately adopt the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples.

However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving portion to the specific position by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs Although it is required to be performed, there is a problem in which timing the process is performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific game state (normal game state or probability variation short game state), as shown in FIG. 398(c), (h), first, The process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the timing tr40 at which the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode arrives. Therefore, for example, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is generated even if the set time during which the effect reception is allowed occurs. Is not given, and only the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is given. That is, in this case, unless the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, even if the operation opportunity is given, this is not the second operation mode. It becomes possible to prevent the user from performing an operation in an operation mode on the wrong side.

On the other hand, when the particular type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode while the strong suppression mode is set. There is a possibility of both being performed and a case where an operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player "whether the operation opportunity is given in which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode" is triggered by the fact that the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. Since it becomes possible to concentrate on ", it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of operational errors between these.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by concealing which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given until just before the operation opportunity is given, from the timing tr40. Tension and amusement of the game until the production is accepted after the reception of the production is started are appropriately maintained. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 398(c) and 398(h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. I am going to let you do it. In addition, here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (the proportion of the jackpot pattern that appears when the pattern variation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The notice production determination is made so that

However, in this case, during the short time after the set time (effective period) has occurred (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed), the performance reception itself is in a permitted state. Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving portion, the length as the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 398(c) and 398(d), regarding the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position, the acceptance allowable sound is generated. The first mode having the shortest output time of the (first permissible sound) is set as a time shorter than the time until the output ends. As a result, even if any mode (the first mode, the above-described second mode, third mode, etc.) is output as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound), the performance reception is performed in the middle of the output state. Can be performed (the output can be ended halfway), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is difficult for the inconvenience to be produced.

Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, regarding the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force, the operation receiving portion is not operated and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. From the original position to the original position, it is moved at a higher speed so that the time required is shorter than the time required to move the original position to the original position (see FIG. 398(h)). According to such a movement mode, it becomes possible to appeal that the user is trying to reduce the time that is substantially reduced as the set time (effective period), and the game due to the reduction of the time. It is expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of people.

Further, in order to more appropriately suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression shown in FIG. 390 is set as the set time (effective period). The operation reception effect of the mode (from timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) or the operation reception effect of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 395 (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) is set to “operation reception”. It is desirable to set a time value having a length equal to or greater than the sum of "the time required to move the set from the original position to the specific position". According to such a configuration, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that is surplus to compensate for the substantially reduced time is set. Since the set time (effective period) that the user has has come to be generated, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game. In this case, in order to standardize the programs, a set time having a similar length may be set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

However, as described above, the production of the set time (effective period) is substantially cut off without the effect reception being substantially made at the time of the timings tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated. In view of this, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is generated, as the set time (effective period), the operation reception effect in the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 390 (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect). ) Or the set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect (from the timing tr50 to the effect after operation) in the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 395, "required when moving the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position". It can be said that it is more desirable to set a time value having a length greater than or equal to the sum of "time" and "time of timings tr42A to tr43 after activation of the automatic button function". In this case as well, in order to standardize the programs, the set time having the same length should be set when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

Further, as described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, As shown in 398(a), (h) to (l), the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing tr42A, and based on the effect reception, the post-operation display effect in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). At least the (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are executed as the post-operation effect. However, in this case, as is clear from a comparison between FIG. 398(g) and FIG. 398(l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened. Therefore, there is concern that the interest in playing games may decline.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 398(h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, the "speed of moving the operation receiving part from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is changed to "moving from the original position to the specific position". It is slower than the "time speed", so that the moving state is maintained for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, the operation receiving unit moves the movable effect (after-operation effect) in exchange for shortening the execution time of the after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). It becomes possible to expect to function as a part of the game), so that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 398(h), the "movement effect from the specific position to the original position" by the operation receiving unit is after the operation corresponding to the effect reception being automatically generated (automatic button function). Although it is started when a predetermined timing during the execution of the effect arrives, it may be started at the timing tr42A at which the effect reception is automatically generated as in the post-operation effect.

However, no matter how slow the "movement from the specific position to the original position" is performed, it is not possible to earn sufficient time for the movable production, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the entertainment appeal. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 398(h), after the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position (or in the vicinity thereof), a vibration effect for vibrating the operation receiving portion is performed. Therefore, the period from when the movement from the specific position to the original position (or in the vicinity thereof) is started until when the vibration of the operation receiving portion is ended depends on "the operation receiving portion not operated by the player". It is designed to function as a movable production period. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably realize the movable effect using the "operation receiving portion that has not been operated by the player", and as a result of automatic effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). Therefore, it is expected that the performance of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) when the execution time becomes short can be appropriately maintained. In this case, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable effect if the operation receiving portion is caused to emit light while the operation receiving portion is being moved from the specific position to the original position. It is possible to appeal to.

Here, regarding the movable effect period (moving time from the specific position to the original position, the vibration time) by the “operation receiving unit not operated by the player”, when the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. It is desirable that the processing be ended before the timing tr44. As a result, the specific type of effect sound is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode, and it is possible to smoothly promote the progress (switching of effects) in the effect content corresponding to this.

In addition, the difference between the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that a message sound such as "Send me a sword!" is given as the second allowable sound (message sound). In some cases, a message display such as "pushing in" and an image of the "sword decoration image SYG" may be displayed as the output or the operation-related display, so that an operation error can be less likely to occur. become.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the operation opportunity is not given in such a second operation mode, but the “specific type effect sound” is set as the weak suppression mode. When the operation opportunity is given originally, an operation error may be promoted when the recognition of which of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears is incorrect. In this respect, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, an operation opportunity is provided under the condition that the “specific type effect sound” is in the weak suppression mode. Since the weak suppression mode is made to appear based on the reception of the performance without giving the effect, the useless tension and expectation that "the operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given" is given. You will be able to provide the production without holding it.

Note that, in the above-described effect example (second operation mode), even when the operation receiving unit is operated within the set time, as in the case where the operation receiving unit is not operated within the set time, FIG. As shown in c), when the predetermined timing (the same timing) within the period in which the post-operation effect is executed arrives, the vibration effect for vibrating the operation receiving portion is performed. With such a configuration, regardless of at which timing the post-operation effect has occurred, when the predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached, the vibration effect is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest that the strong suppression mode will soon be terminated and new production progress will appear.

However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is started early based on the fact that the effect reception is performed by the operation, so that the post-operation effect during the period is being performed. You may try to further improve the interest of the game. That is, in this case, when the operation receiving portion is operated within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when the operation receiving portion is not operated within the set time.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. However, instead of this, when the effect reception is permitted when the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is in the strong suppression mode, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is not suppressed. When the effect reception is allowed when the effect sound of a specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode, the ratio of operation opportunities in the second operation mode (0 Or may be 100).

In each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 192 to 398), in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function can be activated, the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated is set as the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set a time value that is longer than the sum of "the time from the activation of the automatic button function until the end of the set time" for the set time (effective period). . According to such a configuration, a set time (effective period) having a longer time value, which is more than the amount of time that is practically cut off as the period during which the reception of performances is allowed, is left over. , It becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state,
・The operation reception performance (inherent reception performance) executed as the performance (pattern performance) of the fluctuation pattern itself based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and that the special result is obtained in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) The operation reception performance (additional reception performance) executed as an additional performance to the performance of the fluctuation pattern itself (effect pattern)
Will be prepared at least.

That is, the "internal reception effect" is a variation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot determination (determination of which variation pattern to execute the symbol effect) when a special result is obtained (a special variation pattern is selected. Then, it is decided to be executed within the effect according to the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, the “additional reception effect” means that even if the “predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect” is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if the predetermined variation pattern is selected). It is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that the "additional reception effect" is generated is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) according to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, after the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is once started, the effect determination is performed rather than the occurrence of the “internal reception effect” that is associated with the variation pattern (effect pattern) and its occurrence is confirmed. It can be said that the occurrence of the "additional reception effect", which is allowed to occur depending on the result of the (preliminary judgment, etc.), is more beneficial to the player and is more important for enhancing the interest of the game. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern, if the "additional reception effect" occurs in the effect, the "additional reception effect" is generated in the effect. The proportion (expectation) of the big hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that when “” does not occur.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the internal reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of "BGM reproduction") is suppressed or Whether the production reception is allowed while the sound is being output silently or in the non-output state, and whether a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of "BGM reproduction") is being output in a non-suppressed manner There is a case where production reception is allowed. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur when in the normal game state, the effect reception is not allowed in the suppression mode or silent output, or in the non-output state, While the specific type of effect sound is being output in a non-suppressed manner, effect acceptance is allowed. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, when the effect reception is allowed, by paying attention to whether the specific type of effect sound is output in the suppression mode or silence, or in the non-output state, the additional effect can be obtained. It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the reception effect will occur, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the internal reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state is operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time for which the reception of the effect is permitted. In the case where it is executed in the automatic reception mode in which post-production can be generated, and when the operation is not detected within the set time when the production reception is allowed, the post-operation post-production does not occur and the set time ends There is a case where it is executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effect that may occur in the normal gaming state is not executed in the automatic reception mode but is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the additional reception effect is generated by paying attention to whether effect reception is automatically performed (automatic button function) within the set time. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained until the production is accepted.

FIG. 399 is a time chart showing effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 399, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 1 or the like) performed at the start of the symbol change, the advance notice effect At least a determination as to whether or not to execute A is performed. As a result of this effect determination, if it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, the notice effect A is compared with the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. When it is not determined that the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 comes. The symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

Here, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect change pattern 1 the effect (the design) itself. Production) is additionally executed. Note that "additionally executed" can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. At this time, the notice effect A may be displayed in such a manner that it covers all of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 and makes it invisible, or covers only a part of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1. The notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the “lamp effect according to the occurrence of the notice effect A” is output with priority over the “ramp effect based on the variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. Further, in the case of the effect sound, by assigning the “effect sound according to the notice effect A” to a channel different from the “effect sound based on the variation pattern 1”, the effect sound is based on the “variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. The "effect sound according to the notice effect A" is additionally output to the "effect sound".

FIG. 400 is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 400, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 2) performed at the start of the symbol variation, “addition At least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute "target reception performance". Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this effect example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390”. Therefore, as a result of this effect determination, when it is determined to execute the "additional reception effect", the "additional reception effect" is a symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 (the predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390). When the internal timing tr31 arrives, it will be additionally executed for the symbol effect (effect pattern) (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect is completed), and the "additional acceptance effect" is executed. When the determination is not made, the "additional reception effect" does not appear even when the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is executed. Become.

Here, regarding the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. In the meantime, the first allowable sound is output at the timing tr31, the set time (effective period) occurs at the timing tr32, and the set time ends without the automatic button function being enabled at the timing tr33. Since these are as described above with reference to FIG. 390 and the like, their description will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400 is not particularly described as “effect contents when the low expected non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode” shown in FIG. 390. The parts are basically the same, and the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 400, an example in which the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed in the mode of the above-described another example in FIG. 390. It has been described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tr32a in the figure), it is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. Then, "after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" and "after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by speaker (second effect member)" are used as after-operation effects. At least it is generated, but regarding the post-operation effect,
The "post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" is ended at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. ,
-"Post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)" is executed in such a manner that it is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the effect reception was made. It will be.

FIG. 401 is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 401, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, which result is obtained by the effect determination (the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 3) performed at the start of the symbol variation. Regardless of whether it has been performed, at the timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3, the above-described "strong suppression mode" is performed for the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" to be the "strong suppression mode". At the timing tr41 that appears while appears, "inherent reception effect" is generated as the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 until the post-operation effect is ended).

Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this effect example is the same as the "specific variation pattern shown in FIGS. 391 to 393, or 395 to 398, and the like." Therefore, regarding the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) shown in FIG. 401, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (specific fluctuation pattern) is in a strongly suppressed manner (for example, in a silent (volume 0)). Output state or a non-audible state such as a non-output state), when the timing tr41 arrives, the first allowable sound is output, and the set time (effective period) is generated at the timing tr42. When the "timing tr42A" before the timing tr43 that has elapsed is reached without receiving the effect reception, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated, but regarding these, as for "Fig. 391 to Fig. 393 or Fig. 395 to FIG. 398” and the like, the description is omitted here. That is, the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) shown in FIG. 401 is the same as the effect content of the “suppression/automatic reception effect” shown in FIG. 391, and the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples 393 and FIGS. 395 to 398) can also be appropriately adopted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal game state, during the period in which the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the strongly suppressed mode, "internal reception Although "production" may occur, "additional reception production" that is additionally executed to the symbol production based on the variation pattern does not occur, whereas "BGM reproduction" During the period in which the effect sound of "is in the non-suppression mode, there may be a case where an "inherent reception effect" that is a design effect based on the variation pattern occurs, and additionally to the design effect based on the variation pattern. In some cases, the "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern is in the strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is the "additional reception effect" is eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to generate the set time (effective period) during which the production reception is allowed in the environment in which the operation reception production is concentrated in which mode the production is performed. . On the other hand, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is being output in the non-suppressed mode, it can be recognized that the additional reception effect may be generated. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment of entertainment will be maintained.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such an operation effect, in addition to the case where the "additional reception effect" and the "inherent reception effect" appear in different fluctuation patterns 2 and 3, one fluctuation pattern (for example, It is desirable that the "additional reception performance" and the "inherent reception performance" can sequentially appear even in the performance corresponding to the specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3). It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" be generated at a timing before the "intrinsic reception effect".

More preferably, the "additional reception effect" and "inherent reception effect" are included in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern (specific variation pattern) while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the non-suppressing mode. “,” and “BGM reproduction” are set to the strong suppression mode, and “inherent reception effect” can be further made to appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to understand which of the “additional reception effect” and the “inherent reception effect” is occurring depending on the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , A case where it is difficult to understand which of the “additional reception performance” and the “inherent reception performance” is occurring (non-suppression mode), and a suppression mode for the production sound of “BGM reproduction” Through this, you will be able to improve your interest in playing games.

Furthermore, when the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode in the symbol effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the intrinsic effect is generated. It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" does not occur within the period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect may be the “additional reception effect”. Not only will it be eliminated, but even the possibility that "additional reception effect" will appear before the symbol fluctuation is stopped will be eliminated, so "additional reception effect" will occur. On the other hand, which mode (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.) in which the generated "internal reception effect" is executed without giving any sense of expectation You will be able to focus.

In addition, when the "additional reception effect" occurs, "inherent reception effect (both non-suppressing mode and strong suppression mode)" that occurs after the "additional reception effect" does not occur. As described above, it is desirable to increase the rate of execution in a mode with a high degree of expectation (acceptable sound, type of operating means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.).

Also, as described above, when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) is always generated during the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. May be. In this case, in the plurality of variation patterns that are the selection candidates in the variation pattern determination, “a strong suppression mode is set, but an operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. The "variation pattern that does not occur" is not included, and the "variation pattern that causes the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode" is included when the strong suppression mode is set. .. Alternatively, even if the effect sound of "BGM playback" is set to the strong suppression mode, the period of the strong suppression mode may be ended without the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) being generated. You can In this case, in the plurality of variation patterns that are the selection candidates in the variation pattern determination, “a strong suppression mode is set, but an operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. A variation pattern that does not occur" and a "variation pattern that causes the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when the strong suppression mode is set" are included. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the “strong” effect is generated. Even if the player does not notice that the "suppression mode" is set, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" has occurred is eliminated based on the following effect elements.

That is, when the "internal reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", first, even when the first allowable sound is the "additional reception effect". Even when the effect sound that can be output is output over the same time period (in the figure, it is output in the "first aspect"), based on the first allowable sound, "additional reception effect", not " It is possible to recognize that "internal reception performance" has occurred. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 400) that is output when the "additional reception effect" is generated is output halfway even if the effect reception is performed in the output state. Instead of outputting it, the output sound is output for a predetermined time, whereas the output sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", it is output when the "internal reception effect" is generated. When the effect reception is performed in the output state, the first allowable sound (see FIG. 401) is used to end the output midway based on the effect reception.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the "internal reception effect" is generated in the "strong suppression mode" of the effect sound of "BGM reproduction", in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second allowable sound is also output, by checking whether or not the second allowable sound is output, the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is generated is eliminated. It is also possible to recognize that However, as described above, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be prepared.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 400 and 401, the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the production reception is allowed. , "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode" when "internal reception performance" is occurring (with message display), and "additional reception performance" is occurring. The case (no message is displayed) is made different, and it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" has occurred is eliminated.

Further, in the "internal reception effect" that occurs when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the above-described automatic button function can be activated, In the "additional reception effect", the automatic button function described above is not activated, and this also eliminates the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is possible to recognize.

In this way, when the "inherent reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", various effects other than the effect elements related to the "suppression mode" are produced. Since the aspect different from that when the "additional reception effect" is generated appears in the element, the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is generated is relatively excluded. It is possible to easily recognize it, and it becomes possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the “inherent reception effect”.

On the other hand, in the case where the "internal reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", there is a common point between "additional reception effect" and various effect elements. The additional reception performance is generated by making it difficult to recognize whether the "internal reception performance" or the "additional reception performance" is occurring. We are trying to provide directivity that makes us aware of the possibility that there is.

FIG. 402 is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the “inherent acceptance effect” as a symbol effect based on the variation pattern occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “non-suppressing mode”. Is. Note that the "inherent acceptance effect" shown in FIG. 402 corresponds to the variation pattern when a variation pattern different from the "variation pattern capable of generating the operation acceptance effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401" is selected. It may also occur as a symbol effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation acceptance production shown in FIGS. 400 and 401 is selected, it occurs as a pattern production according to the specific variation pattern. .

As shown in FIG. 402, the “internal reception effect” that occurs in the “non-suppression mode” also occurs in the “strong suppression mode” that occurs in the “strong suppression mode”. In the same way as the "target reception performance", whichever result is obtained in the performance determination (preliminary determination), it always occurs when the predetermined timing (here, the timing tr71) in the symbol performance comes. It has become a thing.

However, the first permissible sound (first aspect) output when the "internal reception effect" shown in FIG. 402 is generated is the first permissible sound output when the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400 is generated. Similar to the sound (first aspect), even if the production reception is made in the output state, the output is not ended midway and is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). .. Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish whether the “internal reception effect” or the “additional reception effect” is generated based on the first mode. ..

Further, in the "internal reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first aspect), and this point is also shown in FIG. 400. It is similar to the "additional reception performance".

In the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the operation means to be operated is also displayed as an operation-related display (display prompting operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which effect reception is allowed. Only the reproduced image and the gauge display that indicates the remaining time are displayed, and the message display is not displayed. In this respect, the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400. Is becoming

Further, in the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the “operation button 410”, and the “sword ornament 5001” is not the operation target. This is also the case with this point as well as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG.

In the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, when the operation detection is not performed within the set time (effective period), the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated and the post-operation effect is The timing tr73 is reached when the set time (effective period) ends without being generated, and this point is also similar to the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 400.

In this way, when the "internal reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode", the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode". However, unlike the case where "internal reception performance" occurs, various performance elements are common to the time when "additional reception performance" occurs, and "additional reception performance" can occur. You will be able to make you aware of sex.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, "inherent reception performance (internal reception performance in which the automatic button function is not activated)" is selected while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode". Is generated, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) may be output, and the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself may not be output, and the set time may occur. . On the other hand, when the "additional reception effect" is generated while the "BGM reproduction" effect sound is in the "non-suppression mode", the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself is not output. The set acceptance time is not generated, and the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is always output.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is permitted while the production sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode", when the reception acceptable sound is output, "internal reception production". It is difficult to recognize which of the "additional reception performance" and the "additional reception performance" is occurring, but when the acceptance allowable sound is not output, the "internal reception performance" is not the "additional reception performance". You will be able to recognize that it is occurring. In addition, regarding whether or not the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output when the "internal reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode" It is desirable that the determination is made according to the type of the variation pattern, not the effect determination. The "internal reception effect" in the non-suppressing mode in which the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and the "internal reception effect" in the non-suppressing mode in which the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output As for, the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern) may be sequentially executed.

Further, according to the above configuration, when the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, the “internal reception effect” and the “additional reception effect” are generated when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output. While it is difficult to recognize which of the two is occurring, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is the "internal reception effect" when the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output. Like

In the "additional reception effect", it is described above that the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the effect determination (advance determination). The output sound may not be output when the "internal reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode" (for example, "specification shown in FIG. 394". Aspect”). However, in the different mode, it is desirable that the first permissible sound has a lower generation ratio than that output in the first mode.

Regarding the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, with respect to a part that is not particularly noted, another example or modification of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 may be appropriately used.

Note that, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 399 and 400, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated that the effect determination is performed while the symbol effect is being performed, but the effect determination is actually performed. Is performed at the start of the symbol variation.

In addition, in the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 390 to 402, regarding the aspect of the after-operation effect in response to the effect reception, the case where the big hit is obtained by the big hit determination and the case where the big hit is defeated by the big hit determination And may be different. For example, when the big hit is obtained by the big hit judgment, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 390 to FIG. The post-operation effect may be performed in a mode different from the effect example shown in 402.

As described above, the performance control in the peripheral control board 1510 has been conventionally realized by executing a program for individually controlling various performance devices, a program for linking a plurality of performance devices, and the like in combination. These programs are described by a program code representing the operation content and control procedure of the effect device for each content of the notice in addition to the command associated with the variation pattern, and are created by a programmer having a high technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in a frame in which an effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, design, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent years, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the gaming machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, each programmer is required to have a high level of skill and the number of man-hours for development increases, and it becomes difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) in terms of quality and quantity. Further, since the total amount of program codes of the production control program is increased, the number of man-hours required for the test for the purpose of checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality is also increased.

Therefore, although this is also described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) may not be realized by the program code. Instead, the program data for gaming machines is output by a tool that creates liquid crystal drawing effects, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, which shortens the development period and improves quality. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each of which represents the content of the effect. Each of the blocks is provided with a flag (usability information) indicating whether the effect based on the block can be executed. This flag (usability information) is, for example, stored as rewritable information on the RAM.

In the scenario data, for example, blocks as many as the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination are combined in time series. That is, when the start condition for starting the symbol variation is satisfied, first, an effect determination of which type of effect is to be generated among those effects is performed, and when the result is obtained, Based on the obtained results, the flag (usability information) is set to the ON state for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the determination result of execution is obtained, and the determination result of execution is obtained. The flag (usability information) of the block corresponding to the production type that has not been set is maintained in the OFF state. As a result, after the symbol variation (variation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in time series (every unit time (1 frame)) to correspond to the block set to the ON state. Only the type of performance is selectively executed.

Here, as the scenario data, different data may be prepared for each type of variation pattern, or may be prepared without depending on the variation pattern. When prepared as different data for each type of fluctuation pattern, only blocks corresponding to the effect type that may occur separately for each fluctuation pattern will be configured as scenario data that is combined in time series, Of these blocks, only the flag (usability information) of the block determined to be executed is operated in the ON state. On the other hand, when prepared as data commonly prepared for each fluctuation pattern, blocks (numbers corresponding to blocks) corresponding to all effect types are configured as scenario data stored in a table structure or the like. Then, it may be realized by operating only the flag (usability information) of the block determined to be executed among these blocks to the on state. Further, the scenario data prepared without depending on the variation pattern may be prepared corresponding to the type of processing read during the processing (analysis) of the block (see " "Scenario data related to post-operation performance", etc.), in this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern are prepared respectively, and correspond to the type of the fluctuation pattern. Since the scenario data that is not used can be commonly used in a plurality of types of variation patterns, the processing load and the storage capacity can be appropriately suppressed.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, interactive effects with respect to external input by the player, etc. occur, so each block operated in the ON state is executed. It is impossible to realize all the performances alone.

Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the process identification information (production SW) for calling a program that executes an effect at a predetermined timing or executes a predetermined control is in a block or in a block. It can be set (embedded) in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with. Here, the process identification information (effect SW) is prepared for each type of program to be called, and each type is set to an on state or an off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (effect SW) that can always function as an on state may be prepared. As a result, when the process identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like, depending on the type of the acquired process identification information. The process having the specified content is called, and the called process is executed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or the number in the table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. May be

When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) the incorporated process identification information while executing and analyzing the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like, the program function corresponding to the type of the obtained process identification information. Call (callback) dynamically. Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than liquid crystal effects (for example, sound output, lighting of lamps, operation of role objects, etc.) It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting or updating data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling the program function based on the process identification information, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of blocks, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player.

The program function called by the callback is incorporated in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and it is not necessary to newly create it for each model of the gaming machine. Therefore, even a designer or planner who does not have advanced program knowledge need only design various types of performance, and otherwise, set process identification information that calls a predefined program function. This makes it possible to easily realize this even with complicated performance specifications. Furthermore, by using the effect creation tool to create effect blocks (LCD effect scheduler data) for each element of the effect, the development period can be greatly shortened. In addition, the effect contents can be By performing the test using the flag (usability information) and the process identification information without performing the test, it is possible to realize simplification of the test process and a great reduction in the time required for the test.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a game control means (main control) that can determine a big hit and give a privilege based on a predetermined determination result (winning of a big hit) being obtained. Substrate 1310), effect control means (peripheral control section 1511) capable of executing processing related to various effects based on the variation pattern according to the determination, and image data in the display area based on the processing performed by the effect control means. The production control means reads out the time-series image information (such as the scenario data and blocks described above, or the liquid crystal production scheduler data) and outputs the time-series image information. An image information processing means capable of executing processing for displaying an image based on the above is provided.

Further, in the time-series image information (such as the scenario data and blocks described above, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof may include the process identification information. The information processing means can acquire the process identification information from the time-series image information and call the process corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. As a result, while the processing related to the image is performed every unit time (for example, one frame), the processing related to the effect element (lamp, sound, movable body, etc.) different from the image is performed based on the schedule for displaying the image. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the start timing from deviating between the effect elements when different effect elements cooperate to realize one effect. Become.

In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process identification information is acquired for each unit time in the time-series image information read when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern. The section can be included. In such a configuration, when the time-series image information itself that is the data that specifies the “process for displaying an image” in time series includes the process identification information that is the data that specifies the reading of the process. However, since the time-series image information that is read when the specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern can include the section where the process identification information is acquired for each unit time, detailed timing Even when it is necessary to perform the effect processing in (1), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation from the effect by the display image.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state, or in the non-output state. Allowable special operation reception performance can be executed. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-allowance operation-related display performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the effect reception is allowed in the special operation reception effect. The operation-permissible-operation display that is performed in the state of being displayed is based on time series image information different from each other (such as scenario data and blocks described above, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, since the effect reception is allowed while the specific type of effect sound is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state or in the non-output state, the operation effect Will be expected to focus on. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance may be poor due to the suppression of the specific type of performance sound. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the pre-permission operation related display performed when the special operation reception effect occurs, and the permissible operation related display performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect Since the display is performed based on different time-series image information, it is possible to realize a variety of display effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the operation is not detected within the period in which the effect reception is permitted, the special operation reception effect capable of generating the after-operation effect is executed. It is possible. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-allowance operation-related display performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the effect reception is allowed in the special operation reception effect. The operation-permissible-operation display that is performed in the state of being displayed is based on time series image information different from each other (such as scenario data and blocks described above, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in such a special operation reception effect, a post-operation effect can be generated even when an operation is not detected within a period in which the effect reception is allowed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not perform an operation and, as a result, it becomes impossible to confirm the post-operation effect. Moreover, in the above configuration, regarding the pre-permission operation related display performed when the special operation reception effect is generated, and the permissible operation related display performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect, Since the display is performed based on mutually different time-series image information, it is possible to realize a variety of display effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the entertainment of the game.

Further, as described above, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed is read from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the block, and the read information is subjected to the liquid crystal display control. It is possible to output to the unit 1512. In this regard, as will be described later, as blocks, the first type block that is read after a wait time (wait processing period) required until a predetermined timing arrives and the block that is read without a wait time (wait processing period) The second type block is to be prepared.

More specifically, the type 1 block is a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern and the timing to start the effect arrives. It can be configured to be read out later. Regarding the second type block, for example, the availability information corresponding to the second type block in the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the first type block. Can be configured to be read without waiting time (wait processing period) by being set to ON state.

That is, in this case, the second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data common to a plurality of timings and a plurality of fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate production design and production change, as well as to expect reduction of processing load and memory capacity.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect) of the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). The second time series image information (the second block or the second liquid crystal effect scheduler data) can be read out while the processing based on the scheduler data) is being executed, and the second time series image information is read out. Then, the process based on the second time-series image information is set to the execution state in place of the process based on the first time-series image information that is in the process of being executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to save the trouble of terminating the process based on the first time-series image information halfway, and it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity are reduced.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “block” according to the present embodiment will be described again. The “block” means the effect display device 1600. When the image displayed in is composed of "a plurality of image elements (a plurality of layers)", it is prepared separately for those image elements (layers), and in order to display the image elements. Further, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is used for a process for reading information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

Here, the process for reading the information (image number) corresponding to the image data (the process in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed in the "peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95)" that is activated for each frame. For each frame, it is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on the “block”, and if there is such information, it is read and A drawing list is created based on the information read out for each frame and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). As a result, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads the image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and then outputs the display image to the display area, thereby displaying in the effect display device 1600. The production will be realized.

Here, the “block” itself may be configured as a data structure that specifies “information (image number) corresponding to image data” for each unit time. In this case, the above-mentioned “liquid crystal” is used. Since it has a function as "production scheduler data", it is not necessary to prepare "liquid crystal production scheduler data" separately from the "block", and this can be omitted.

However, the “block” according to this explanation example identifies the type of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, and is currently displayed based on the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” associated with the “block”. It is determined whether or not there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be made, and if there is such information, it is read and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be associated with one “block”, and in this case, these “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” will be executed in a predetermined order, Alternatively, either of the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is selectively executed.

Further, in the “block” according to this description example, the “liquid crystal effect” in which the schedule for each frame regarding the information (image number) corresponding to the “image data in the image control unit (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)” is described. In addition to "scheduler data", information about which is executed as "processing regarding lamp emission", information about which is executed as "processing regarding movable body operation", and which is as "processing regarding sound output" It also includes information on whether to execute. That is, in this case, if the “block” for realizing the specific notice effect is read, the “image processing in the effect display device 1600” related to the specific notice effect and the “block” based on the “block”. Since the “light emission processing”, the “moving body operation processing”, and the “sound output processing” are respectively read and executed, different effect elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound ), when one effect (specific notice effect) is realized in cooperation with each other, it is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between the effect elements.

As described above, the “block” constitutes one scenario data together with other blocks or by itself, and the “block” in which the availability information is turned on in the scenario data. Only one of them is selectively executed (analyzed), so that the effect is executed according to the result of the effect determination.

However, with regard to scenario data and blocks, as long as they have a relationship such as "scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each of which represents the content of the effect," it is possible to separate from "blocks". There is no limitation on the detailed implementation method including the provision of “liquid crystal production scheduler data”.

FIG. 403 conceptually shows an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects by using “scenario data” and “blocks” when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the result of the big hit determination. It is a time chart. In FIG. 403, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is described as “animation list”, but these are synonymous.

As shown in FIG. 403, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this description example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. Blocks (block A for symbols, block B for symbols, block C for symbols, block D for symbols) are configured to be combined in time series. However, this embodiment also includes scenario data such as scenario data of layer 1 and layer 5, which is prepared only as one block indicating the content of the effect.

Further, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this description example also includes “the one configured to selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated blocks”. , In this case, by operating only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected block among the plurality of blocks to the ON state and leaving the unavailable information corresponding to the other blocks in the OFF state, Any one of them can be selectively executed. Alternatively, the block according to this example also includes "one configured to selectively execute any one of the associated liquid crystal effect scheduler data", In this case, only the unusable information corresponding to the selected liquid crystal effect scheduler data among the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data is turned on, and the unusable information corresponding to other liquid crystal effect scheduler data remains in the off state. By doing so, one of the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data may be selectively executable.

Now, assuming that the starting condition related to the symbol fluctuation (suspended consumption) is satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information regarding the results of various determinations from the main control board 1310. The information obtained in this way also includes information on the variation pattern, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads scenario data corresponding to the information (variation pattern) and associates it with the scenario data as a candidate for execution. An effect determination is made as to which block (effect) is executed from among the plurality of blocks (a block corresponding to the notice effect). Then, of the plurality of blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for the block (effect) for which the effect determination to execute is made, the availability information is operated (set) to the ON state and executed. For the block (effect) for which the effect determination to perform is not made, the availability information is left in the off state.

Regarding the availability information associated with each block (effect), when the scenario data is read out, it is operated (set) in an off state when the pattern effect (variable effect by the decorative symbol) is started. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read in this way, the above-described processing of which block the availability information is operated (set) to the ON state is performed.

Here, for the "block" for which the availability information is turned on (set) when starting the symbol effect, the symbol effect is started based on the scenario data and is immediately executed (analyzed), or the scenario It is executed (analyzed) following another block (reproduction) started based on the data, or executed at a timing after a wait time (wait processing period) set in advance for the scenario data and block ( Will be analyzed). However, the blocks (effects) include “things that may be executed at a plurality of timings in one fluctuation pattern”, “things that may be executed by a plurality of fluctuation patterns”, and the like. That is, when the design effect is started, if the mechanism is such that the usability information of all the blocks executed within the variation is operated (set) to the ON state, "even in the effect mode in which the same content appears , The scenario data (or block) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set are prepared only by different execution timings." That is, in this case, despite the same effect contents, different data is prepared and the effect is executed based on the data, which may adversely affect the processing load and the memory capacity.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always targeted for execution, but when the symbol effect is executed, the specific block (specific effect) is executed. It is possible to start the symbol effect in the OFF state without operating (setting) the availability information of) to the ON state. As such a specific block (specific effect), the “appearing EF block E”, the “operation waiting block E”, the “post-operation block E”, and the like in FIG. 403 correspond to these blocks. Will be described later. Of these, the “post-operation block E” is executed as an effect (an effect in which special effect contents dedicated to the big hit are prepared) that clearly indicates whether the big hit is won or lost.

Further, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, even in a block (effect) for which a result indicating execution is obtained as a result of effect determination, this is executed even in another variation pattern or another timing. When there is a possibility that there is a possibility that the symbol production is performed, it is possible to start the symbol production in the OFF state without operating (setting) the availability information in the ON state when executing the symbol production. In FIG. 403, such a block corresponds to “operation waiting block A”, “appearance EF & operation waiting block D”, and the like, and these blocks will also be described later.

In the example shown in FIG. 403, it is assumed that the starting condition is satisfied at the timing ts1. Therefore, at timing ts1, the scenario data that is predetermined for each layer in a manner corresponding to the type of the variation pattern is read. Next, an effect determination is made as to which of the block associated with the scenario data thus read and the availability information attached to the LCD effect scheduler data is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, the operation (setting) for the usability information is performed based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is executed (analyzed) for each layer under the operation (setting) with respect to the usability information in this way, whereby the effect is advanced in a mode according to the result of the effect determination.

However, instead of this, before the scenario data that is predetermined for each layer in a manner corresponding to the type of the variation pattern is read, the effect determination according to the type of the variation pattern may be performed. Good. That is, in this case, the result of the effect determination executed before the scenario data is read, using the block associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. It will be operated based on each.

Here, in the "layer 1" of the plurality of layers, regarding the "background image" displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not being executed (the symbol is stopped and displayed and the game is not executed) It corresponds to the scenario data block (block for normal background). Therefore, in "layer 1", a new block is not read when the timing ts1 arrives, and a block (block for normal background) already in the execution state is continuously executed ( Will be analyzed).

More specifically, in the normal background block, which “image data” should be output at “at which timing” as the “image data for the background image” stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Is associated with "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background" that is information (time-series image information). That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background" for each unit time (1 frame), and as a result, "image data for background image (moving image, or Each time the information corresponding to the “still image)” is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one piece of information (drawing list) may be created together with the information obtained from other frames, and the drawing list may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. As a result, the background display (normal background) according to the schedule defined by the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Regarding the blocks and scenario data that are associated with this "LCD production scheduler data for normal background", the timing when the power-on process is completed, the relevant production state (normal production state, high-precision production state, special production mode, etc.) It is preferable that the background image (background moving image) having the same content is set as the time-series image information that is displayed in a loop every predetermined time. In addition, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 does not create one piece of information (drawing list) together with the information obtained from other frames, but creates information corresponding to “image data for background image (moving image or still image)”. It may be transmitted to. In short, the information corresponding to the “image data for the background image (moving image or still image)” may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any form.

The normal background image displayed on "Layer 1" based on the normal background block is SP on "Layer 3" based on "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block" described later. When the background image at the time of reach is displayed, the background image on “layer 3” is preferentially displayed, so that it is hidden in the effect display device 1600. However, as the internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on the “layer 3”, “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the normal background” is displayed on the “layer 1”. It is assumed that the processing related to the normal background image based on is still being executed, and the processing is not executed depending on the processing status of the SP background image on "layer 3". Is becoming Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the SP reach ends, the normal background is displayed again, and thus the normal background is displayed. Originally, the "design block D" for displaying the stop design is executed. As a result, when the big hit symbol appears, it is possible to easily recognize in which effect state the player has won, and it is possible to suitably promote understanding of the game.

On the other hand, in "Layer 2", it corresponds to the block (block for symbols) of the scenario data regarding the "effect symbol (symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600)". Since the specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 403 is developed to SP reach production, the scenario data of “Layer 2” is associated with “pre-reach variation liquid crystal production scheduler data”. "Design block A" is associated with "Liquid crystal production scheduler data for normal reach variation", "Design block B" is associated with "SP reach variation liquid crystal production scheduler data", "Design" It is defined that the “block C” and the “block D for symbols” in which “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for stop symbols” are associated are sequentially executed (analyzed).

However, in recent years, during the period in which the SP reach background is displayed, the “effect symbol” is often displayed small in the effect display device 1600, and further, “after the SP reach background is displayed, the normal background is once displayed. It may be returned, and then the SP reach background is displayed again”. That is, in this case, it is feared that a gap may occur when there is some abnormality only by executing (analyzing) the display schedule concerning the "effect design" and the display schedule concerning the "SP reach background" for each layer. Therefore, the “symbol block C” associated with the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach variation” may be executed based on the display schedule related to the “SP reach background”. In this case, the process related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the effect design.

For example, in order to call "a process of turning on the availability information of the symbol block C" at a predetermined timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" described later. By attaching the process identification information, it is possible to execute the “design block C” and the “design block D” based on the display schedule related to the “SP reach background”. In this case, regarding the "block C for symbols" and the "block D for symbols", the availability information will be kept in the OFF state when the symbol effect is started, and "block A for symbols" ] Or “block B for symbols” is not included in the scenario data and is configured as another scenario data.

Further, the "layer 3" corresponds to the block of the scenario data (the block for the SP reach background, the block for the SP ending background) regarding the "background image after the SP reach effect is started". In this respect, the "background image after the SP reach effect is started" should not be displayed at the time when the symbol effect is started, but should be started at an intermediate timing of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the scenario data of "Layer 3", a wait time (wait processing period) is set so as to prevent the "background image after the SP reach effect is started" block from being executed until the timing comes. There is. As a result, after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has elapsed since the symbol effect was started, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” are sequentially executed (analyzed) and responded accordingly. Since the information can be read for each frame, the background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

That is, in this case, as the blocks, the first type blocks (blocks corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 403) which are read after a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives, The second type blocks (blocks corresponding to the layer 1, layer 2, layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 403, etc.) that are read without the wait time (wait processing period) are included. The type 2 block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period) and can be used as data that is shared at all performance timings, and thus it is urged to reduce the processing load and the memory capacity. In addition to being expected, it is possible to facilitate production design and production change.

In this regard, in the SP reach production, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, display contents with the same content are started and halfway through the production, the production contents for the big hit (for example, the production contents that the character wins) and for the lost game. Often, it is configured to suggest the result of the jackpot determination by branching to one of the effect contents (for example, the effect contents that the character is defeated). At this time, even though the display effect of the same content is executed until the middle stage of the SP reach effect regardless of whether or not the big hit is hit, they are different blocks (a big hit block and a block for losing). ) Or image data may adversely affect the processing load and the memory capacity.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the scenario data regarding the SP reach effect, a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between the big hit time and the lost time, and the big hit time. Blocks (SP ending background blocks) corresponding to different image data depending on the time of loss are divided and executed sequentially. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

By the way, in the scenario data regarding the SP reach effect, the “SP reach background block” is read after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" is read. These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data", there is a section in which the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame). The performance acceptance period (effective period) is generated not by the time management by a timer or the like but by the frame management of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

For example, in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” shown in FIG. 403, the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is executed (analyzed) separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. ), the processing identification information of "X1" is arranged in a line for each frame from the timing ts31. Every time the process identification information of "X1" is read, the following "process X1" is read and executed.
Process X1. A process of performing effect determination as to whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a section to which such process identification information (here, “X1”) is added for each unit time is “a production reception period during which a production reception can be performed by an operation ( In the "processing X1", the availability information of the "post-operation block C" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on in the "processing X1". Is operated (set). As a result, the "post-operation block C" is read out for each unit time for the corresponding time, and the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler" associated with the "post-operation block C" is read. The "data C" is to be executed (analyzed) every unit time, and the "processing relating to lamp emission" and the "processing relating to movable body operation" associated with the "post-operation block C". , "Processing regarding sound output" and the like are started, it is possible to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C".

Even in the next frame in which each process associated with the "post-operation block C" is started, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" is also executed. "Data" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when the production reception is made in the middle of the section (production reception period) to which the process identification information (here, "X1") is attached for each unit time, in the next frame, "SP reach background The process identification information (here, "X1") is read from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data", and the "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X1” also includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the “post-operation block C” is in a state in which execution is started. When it is determined that the process has been started, the "process X1" is ended without performing any further process based on the operation detection information.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 403, four pieces of the same process identification information (here, “X1”) are lined up from the timing ts31, but the second process identification information (here, “X1”) is read. In the "process X1", the production is received, and thereby the "after-operation liquid crystal production scheduler data C" associated with the "after-operation block C" in the "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). The case is assumed. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read the third and fourth process identification information (“X1” here) filled in the figure, “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler The "data" is automatically read during execution of each unit time. However, every time it is read out in this way, a process such as "Since the post-operation effect has been executed, the process X1 is terminated" is executed in the "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "X1"). As a result, the process related to effect determination is substantially invalidated (effect acceptance is not allowed).

On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the “process X1” (it is determined that the post-operation effect is not executed), the “post-operation block C” associated with the “layer 6” is used. The processing X1 is ended with the permission/prohibition information kept in the OFF state. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here, "X1") is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler is performed for each unit time (1 frame). The process identification information (here, "X1") is read from "data" and the above-mentioned "process X1" corresponding to this is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the above section ends at the fourth process identification information (here, “X1”), the fourth process identification information is read out and accordingly When the effect determination is not made in the processing X1, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” is not executed, and the effects thereafter are advanced.

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), “for SP reach background The same process identification information (X1) for reading the "process X1 that can cause post-operation effect" from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is acquired. However, since it is possible to substantially function as a production reception period (effective period) simply by analyzing such information, it is possible to favorably facilitate and standardize production design. Become.

Note that FIG. 403 merely shows the concept of such processing, and in reality, the processing identification information is not acquired only over four frames. If it is made to function as an effect reception period, it is usually set as a section in which the same process identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts31, and the same can be said for the effect reception period that occurs at another timing. Further, as described above, such process identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. Good.

Moreover, in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 403, the process identification information (here, "1") related to the operation effect is also attached at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of “1” does not read “the process in which the effect determination is performed as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect” is read, but the following “process 1” is read and executed. Has become.
Process 1. A precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an "effect reception period (effective period) during which effect reception can be performed by operation" will occur soon, and for the player that the effect reception period is occurring A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" for performing the operation waiting effect (prompting image, gauge display, etc.) that prompts an operation.

According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal production scheduler data D)" separately from "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". However, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) determined by "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". become. That is, in this case, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is started to be executed at every timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal" is started. Since it is possible to easily start execution of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" from the "liquid crystal production scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from the "production scheduler data", facilitating and commonizing production design Can be suitably achieved.

When the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is read. .. These processes will be executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "LCD appearance scheduler data for appearance EF & operation wait", first, in the case where production acceptance is not allowed, "production reception by operation is accepted." There is provided a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursor effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that an "effect reception period (effective period) that can be performed" will soon occur.

However, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal production scheduler data for operation waiting", an operation waiting production (prompt image or gauge described above that prompts the player to operate in the state where the production reception period has occurred from the middle thereof) A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to display) is acquired appears, and in the section, the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame). Has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting" executed (analyzed) from the timing ts41, apart from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present, "Y3" for each frame from the timing ts42. The process identification information of is attached so as to line up. Every time the process identification information of "Y3" is read, the following "process Y3" is read and executed.
Process Y3. A process of performing effect determination as to whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block D” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a section in which such process identification information (here, “Y3”) is added to each unit time is “a production reception period (effective period during which production reception can be performed by operation. )”. Moreover, in the "process Y3", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation wait block D (appearance EF & operation wait liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" which is the basis for reading out the "process Y3". The availability information of the “post-operation block D” associated with the same “layer 6” is operated (set) to the ON state.

That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block D” is read, various processes including the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” are executed. As a result, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block D” is generated. Of course, the newly read "after operation block D (after operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" is the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting) In place of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)”, the execution state is set to “layer 6”.

With such a configuration, only by reading the "post-operation block D", the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal" is no longer necessary to be read because the effect determination is made. Because the production scheduler data D)” and the process identification information of “Y3” for reading the “process Y3” can be substantially invalidated (the production reception is not allowed). Therefore, it is not necessary to separately perform the determination and the processing for terminating these, and it is possible to favorably facilitate and commonize the effect design. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 403, the second process identification information (here, “Y3”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is read out. The effect is received in the processed "process Y3", and thereby the "after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" associated with the "after-operation block D" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analysis). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the “ray portion” in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is erased by overwriting (substantially). It corresponds to the invalidated section).

That is, the process identification information of "Y3" can be attached to the "liquid crystal production scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" side, as in the production reception period generated from the timing ts31. However, "the appearance EF & the operation waiting liquid crystal production scheduler data (the appearance EF & the operation waiting block D is associated with the same layer as the "post-operation block D (the post-operation liquid crystal production scheduler data D)". It can be said that it is possible to achieve such an excellent action and effect by attaching it to the ")" side.

However, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, during the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect, "the appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation wait ( In addition to the process identification information of "Y3" included in "Appearance EF & operation waiting block D)",
-The process identification information of "Y2" included in the "LCD reach scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" is prepared.

That is, as described above, the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal production scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" is the same as "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal production scheduler data)" in "layer 6". If the processing identification information of “Y3” is added to this, when the “after operation block D (after operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is executed. This is useful in that it will be automatically deleted (invalidated). However, the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal production scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" is included in the "1. LCD reach scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)". It is executed (analyzed) by operating the availability information on the basis of the process identification information of ". Therefore, if the frame processing to which the process identification information of “1” is added may be skipped when the processing load is high, the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation This means that the waiting block D)” itself is not executed, and eventually the performance acceptance period (effective period) based on the process identification information of “Y3” may not occur.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect (the process of performing the effect determination regarding whether to generate the after-operation effect based on the operation detection information), The process identification information of "Y2" and the process identification information of "Y3" are prepared, and the process identification information of "Y2" is on the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" side. The process identification information of "Y3" is attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" side. As described above, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect, a predetermined wait time (wait process) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern and the timing to start the effect comes Wait time (wait process) by setting the availability information to be turned on in the process executed based on the first type block By providing both the second type block and the second type block that are read out without passing through the period), it is possible to reduce the above-mentioned risk that the effect reception period (effective period) does not occur. Will be able to.

Here, in the “process Y3” executed based on the process identification information of the “Y3”, when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the above-mentioned “post-operation block D” is operated in the ON state. The post-operation display effect (post-operation effect) on the effect display device 1600 is executed. On the other hand, in “process Y2” executed based on the process identification information of “Y2”, when the effect determination is made, “process regarding lamp emission”, “process regarding movable body operation”, and “sound output”. Each process is started to be executed. Therefore, even when the process identification information of "Y3" is not read, it is possible to realize the post-operation effect by the lamp emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output by the process identification information of "Y2". Has been done. The “process Y2” and the “process Y3” may be those that can generate different post-operation effects.

In the example shown in FIG. 403, three pieces of the same process identification information (here, “Y2”) are lined up from the timing ts42, but they are read from the second process identification information (here, “Y2”). It is assumed that the effect reception is performed in the "process Y2", and the post-operation effect by the lamp light emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output is thereby executed. In this case, it is no longer necessary to read the third processing identification information (“Y2” here) filled in the figure, but “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. Is executed every unit time and will be read out automatically. However, each time it is read out in this way, a process such as "Processing Y2" corresponding to the processing identification information (here, "Y2"), "Processing Y2 is completed because post-operation performance has already been executed" is executed. As a result, the process for effect determination is substantially invalidated (effect acceptance is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
A "first special operation in which reception of effect based on operation detection information is permitted" that occurs when a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or silence, or is in a non-output state Reception production (production reception period)",
A second special operation reception production (production reception period) that can generate post-operation production even if no operation is detected regardless of the production state (production mode)
And the like can be executed as described above (see, for example, FIG. 178 and FIGS. 390 to 402).

In the first special operation reception effect, since the effect reception is allowed while the specific type of effect sound is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state, or in the non-output state, focus on the operation effect. Will be expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance may be poor due to the suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-allowance operation related display (precursor effect) performed when the first special operation reception effect is generated and the effect reception is allowed in the first special operation reception effect. With regard to the permissible operation related display (during the valid period) (the above-mentioned image and gauge display, etc.), they are displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of performances with respect to the display performance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-allowance operation related display (precursor effect) performed when the second special operation acceptance effect is generated and the effect acceptance is allowed in the second special operation acceptance effect. The allowable operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) performed during the (valid period) is also displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of performances with respect to the display performance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

More specifically, in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 403, the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode, Further, even when no operation is detected, a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) that causes a post-operation effect can be generated, and at timing ts51, The process identification information “2” is read so as to start the process related to the special operation reception effect. However, the process identification information of “2” does not read “the process in which the effect determination is performed as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect” is read, but the following “process 2” is read and executed. .
Process 2. Availability of “appearance EF block E” for performing a precursor effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that a “effect reception period (effective period) in which effect reception can be performed by operation” will occur soon Process to operate (set) information in the ON state

According to such a configuration, in addition to the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)", the pre-allowable operation related display (predictive effect) dedicated block (appearing EF block E) , And the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) corresponding to the block, the “appearance EF block E” is described as “SP reach background liquid crystal effect. The execution can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) defined by the "scheduler data". That is, in this case, the "appearance EF block E" is started to be executed at every timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler" is started. Since it is possible to easily start the execution of the "appearance EF block E" from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from "data", it is possible to facilitate and standardize the effect design. Will be able to.

Further, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes having different expectation levels (expectation levels at which the jackpot pattern appears) are separately prepared for the pre-permissible operation-related display (predictive effect) and the permissible operation-related display, Since it is possible to appropriately combine which combination to execute them, it becomes possible to make a variety of variations as a production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. Become. Further, even when adopted in other variation patterns, the pre-allowance operation related display (predictive effect) has a common mode, but the permissible operation related display is executed in a unique mode that is not shared. It will also be possible.

When the "appearing EF block E" is executed (analyzed), the "appearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" corresponding to the "appearing EF block E" is read and executed (analyzed). To be done. When this "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF" is executed (analyzed), the effect (pre-permission operation related display) with a predetermined effect display is changed from "section for which effect acceptance is not permitted" to "effect acceptance." The image information (moving image or still image) to be executed over the "permitted section" is acquired.

However, for the "block EF for appearance EF" and the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF", "processing that can determine the effect of generating the post-operation effect based on the operation detection information" is executed. Since the process identification information is not attached, the effect reception period does not occur based on the block or the scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, when the timing ts52 comes within the “SP reach background block (SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”, “3” is generated in order to generate an effect acceptance period. The process identification information is read out. The process identification information of "3" does not correspond to "the process in which the effect determination that the post-operation effect is to be generated can be made based on the operation detection information", but is the data to be associated with the "process 3" described below. .
Processing 3. “Use availability information of the “operation waiting block E” for performing the operation waiting operation (the above-mentioned image and gauge display, etc.) that prompts the player to perform an operation while the effect reception period is occurring. Process to operate (set) to ON state

According to such a configuration, in addition to the "SP reach background block (SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" and the "appearing EF block E (appearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)", Display during permissible operation (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) A dedicated block (block E for operation wait) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation wait) corresponding to the block. Although it is necessary to prepare, it is possible to start execution of the “operation waiting block E” at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) defined by “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. become able to. That is, in this case, the "operation waiting block E" can be started to be executed at any timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler" can be started. Since it is possible to easily start the execution of the “operation waiting block E” from the “liquid crystal production scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from that of “data”, it is possible to favorably facilitate and standardize the production design. Will be able to.

Here, also in the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts52, the same process identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is arranged for each frame as in the effect reception period in which the effect reception is permitted at the timings ts31 and ts42. It may be configured as a rendered section. However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, this is realized by a method different from the effect reception period that occurs at the timings ts31 and ts42, and other effect reception periods may be configured by the method described below. You can

That is, for the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts52, depending on the state operation of the operation state flag (OFF state, ON state), the state where the production reception is not allowed (OFF state) and the state where the production reception is allowed (ON state) ) And to create a method. When this method is adopted, not the process called based on the process identification information, but the "peripheral control unit steady process" shown in FIG. It is desirable to make a judgment.

For example, every time the "peripheral control unit steady process" is performed, the operation state flag is checked, and the operation detection information is provided on the condition that the operation state flag is in the on state (condition that it is in the performance acceptance period). Based on the above, it is possible to perform the effect determination that the effect after the operation is generated. When the effect determination is made, the usability information of the block (here, “after operation block E”) corresponding to the type of post-operation effect corresponding to the operation state flag that is turned on is operated to the on state ( Setting).

That is, in this case, as for the operation state flag, only the type of post-operation effect will be prepared, and after determining which type the operation state flag that is in the on state is, the post-operation effect corresponding to that is determined. The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) in the ON state. The process of turning off the operation state flag may be executed in the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect to the on state, or the availability information is turned on. You may make it perform in the process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (liquid crystal production scheduler data) operated by the state.

The processing procedure in the case of adopting such a method will be described again from the point where the processing identification information of “3” is read at timing ts52 and the above “processing 3” is executed. The block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" is read and executed (analyzed).

The process of setting the operation state flag to the ON state may be performed in the “process 3”, but in the example shown in FIG. 403, the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler At the first frame (processing timing) when "data E)" is executed (analyzed), the process identification information of "Z1" associated with the following "process Z1" is read.
Process Z1. Of the operation state flags, a process of turning on the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E”

As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is operated (set) to the ON state at the timing ts52, and the determination based on the operation detection information in the above-mentioned “peripheral control unit steady process”. By performing the process, the period in which the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state can be made to function as the “production acceptance period”. Further, while the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state in this way, the permissible operation related display based on the execution (analysis) of the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” (described above). Image, gauge display, etc.) will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the pre-allowance operation-related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) associated with layer 7 and permission associated with layer 6 The middle operation-related display (operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is executed such that the display periods thereof partially overlap each other.

Here, the pre-permission operation related display associated with the layer 7 is displayed on the front side of the during-permission operation related display associated with the layer 6, and is preferentially displayed. It has become so. Therefore, the acceptance of the performance is permitted even when at least a part of the permissible operation related display is made difficult to be visually recognized by the pre-permissible operation related display, and thereby, any expectation level as the pre-permissible operation related display is obtained. It is possible to provide a performance effect in which it is possible to receive a performance effect under the condition that it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not the mode with the appearance appears.

In this respect, when an effect is received at timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage in which the effect reception period has not yet ended, the same layer as the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" The process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “after-operation block E” associated with No. 6 to the ON state is executed in the above-mentioned “peripheral control unit steady process”. As a result, each processing (lamp, movable body, sound, etc.) including the "after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" associated with the "after-operation block E" is executed. . At this time, in layer 6, the “after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with the “after-operation block E” is associated with the “operation-waiting block E” under the “operation-waiting block E”. Since it is executed in place of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for use in the process, it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the “operation waiting block E” midway. Further, at this time, the processing identification information of "Z3" described later included in the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" can be automatically deleted (invalidated). Become.

Regarding the process of turning off the operation state flag, when performing the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “after-operation block E” in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the first frame (when the “after-operation block E (after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”) is executed (analyzed) ( At the processing timing), the process identification information of “Z2” is read out and the following “process Z2” corresponding thereto is executed to execute the process based on the “post-operation block E” under the effect reception period. I am trying to do it.
Process Z2. Processing for turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the pre-allowance operation related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) is left in the screen (displayed state). As described above, there may be cases where performance reception is made. Therefore, in the "process Z2", it is determined whether or not the block EF for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) is in the execution state, and when it is in the execution state, a process for terminating it halfway is also performed. Is desirable. However, after the "block EF for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)" is continued without being terminated halfway, the image display based on the "block E for post-operation" is changed to "for appearance EF". “Preferred execution (display on the front side of the image display (layer) based on the appearance EF block E”) is performed in a range (for example, the entire screen) including at least all the “range where the image display based on the block E is performed”. Thus, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

Further, in the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, when the processing at the timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), “processing Z3” is performed so as to end the effect acceptance period. The process identification information of "Z3" attached is read out. Here, when the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is executed (analyzed) at the timing ts54, the “after operation block E (after operation) corresponding to the same layer 6 is executed. It means that the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" is not overwritten by "the liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for use", that is, the timing ts54 comes. It means that the production reception is not done until. However, the performance reception period generated from the timing ts52 is the same as that of the “after-operation block E” that is the same as when the performance reception is performed, even when the performance reception is not performed from the timing ts52 to the timing ts54. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" for operating (setting) the availability information to the ON state (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)", the following processing is executed in "processing Z3" executed based on the processing identification information of "Z3" read at the timing ts54. It is supposed to be done.
Process Z3. Among the operation state flags, a process of turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” is performed, and the availability information of the “post-operation block E” is turned on. Processing to operate (set) is performed

According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, even if the effect reception is not received within that period, the same block as when the effect reception is made is read out, and the block is read. Since the post-operation effect associated with is executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the player forgets to perform the operation. In addition, the post-operation effect is not executed after the effect reception period (timings ts51 to ts52) is finished, but “effect” is performed within the final frame (processing at timing ts52) of the process related to the effect acceptance period (timings ts51 to ts52). By performing "processing for reading the same block as when the reception was made", it is possible to realize smooth production progress without causing a difference between when there is an operation and when there is no operation. become able to.

Further, according to such a configuration, a display image based on the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” can be received by an operation by the player. In both the case where the performance reception is made by activating the automatic button function, the process of hiding the performance reception based on the reception of the performance (here, "operation Since the rear-use block E”) is executed, the production can be advanced in the same manner even when the player forgets to operate it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal. You will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 403, during the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, when the effect sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressing mode at the time of occurrence, the above-described “first It also functions as a "special operation reception performance". Also in the "first special operation reception effect" shown in Fig. 403, when the effect is received, the effect sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction) is not returned to the non-suppressed mode but continues to be output in the suppressed mode. Then, within the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed, the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is set to be returned to the output in the non-suppression mode.

It should be noted that the "specific type effect sound" means the sound of "BGM reproduction" (BGM reproduction for normal background or SP background), but here, in particular, it corresponds to "SP reach background block". This corresponds to a sound (BGM reproduced sound for SP reach) output by executing the attached “processing related to sound output”. As for the suppression mode and method, the modes and methods described above can be appropriately adopted.

In the above configuration, when the operation reception effect (timing ts52 to ts54) is generated while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed (or even when the effect reception is not performed, the effect reception effect is received). When an operation acceptance effect is generated in which the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated), a pre-allowance operation related display (block EF for appearance EF) and a permissible operation related display (operation waiting block) performed at the time of the occurrence. Regarding E), they are executed based on blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of performances with respect to the display performance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the operation reception effects (first special operation reception effect, second special operation reception effect) at such timings ts52 to ts54, images displayed by different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) (pre-allowance operation-related display) , Allowable operation related display) are displayed so that there are overlapping periods in time. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize the playability (such as the above-described difficulty of visual recognition) entwined between the "pre-permissible operation related display" and the "permissible operation related display", and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. become.

On the other hand, an operation acceptance effect that is generated when the "specific type effect sound" is not in the suppressed state, such as an operation acceptance effect that is generated at timing ts41 (or a post-operation effect is generated when the effect reception is not performed). In the non-accepting operation production), the pre-permission operation related display and the during-permission operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal production scheduler data). That is, such an operation acceptance effect is generated according to the result of the effect determination (notice determination), unlike the operation acceptance effect at timings ts52 to ts54 (the operation acceptance effect that suggests a big hit by the post-operation effect). Since it does not occur or does not occur, the pre-permission operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) to facilitate handling according to the determination result. It can be said that it is more useful to

However, even when the pre-allowance operation related display and the during-permission operation related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) as described above, the pre-allowance operation related display is provided on one layer. The display and the during-permissible-operation related display appear to overlap with each other at times (for example, both the before-permission-operation-related display and the during-permission-operation related display are displayed. It is desirable to carry out these effects (so that the parts are difficult to see).

Regarding the block of the operation-permitted display (operation waiting block E), the process identification information read based on the block of the pre-permission operation-related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) The availability information may be operated in the ON state in the processing according to.

The operation reception effect, which is allowed to receive the effect at timings ts52 to ts54, may be executed as at least one of the above-described first special operation reception effect and the above-described second special operation reception effect, for example, 178, or any of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described above with reference to FIGS. 390 to 393, 395 to 398, and 401. Good. In this case, regarding other operation reception effects among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 403, for example, the operation reception effects (operation reception without BGM suppression described above with reference to FIGS. 394, 400, and 402). It may be executed as any one of (production). Moreover, you may make it employ|adopt suitably also about each of these different examples of operation reception production mentioned later.

For example, different blocks are used in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) generated at the timing ts42, but these operations are performed. In the reception performance, the same reception permissible sound may be output when the production reception is performed (first permissible sound shown in FIGS. 390 to 402).

In addition, in the operation acceptance effect (operation waiting block E) that occurs at the timing ts52, if the effect acceptance is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the output state is terminated halfway, but the operation acceptance effect that occurs at the timing ts42 ( In the operation waiting block E), various configurations are appropriately set such that the output state is maintained even if the production acceptance is made during the output of the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound shown in FIGS. 390 to 402). Can be adopted for.

By the way, regarding the scenario data regarding the SP reach effect, a block corresponding to the image data that can be shared between the big hit and the loss (SP reach background block) and a block corresponding to the different image data between the big hit and the loss As described above, the blocks are divided into (SP ending background block) and sequentially executed. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 at which the “SP reach background block” is changed to the “SP ending background block” is within the period in which the post-operation performance is executed. I will set it so that it will always arrive.

That is, in the operation reception production where the production reception is allowed at the timing ts52, the production reception (including the automatic button function described above) is performed at any timing within the production reception period (timings ts52 to ts54). However, the predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as a period in which the post-operation effect is always executed (time setting required to execute the post-operation effect). In the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, a display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the “post-operation block E” (display effect after operation in the effect display device 1600 (after operation) Effect)) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has priority display over the display based on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP ending corresponding to the "block for SP ending background". (Displayed on the front side of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP ending background block). In this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set to be longer than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E, and the long time is set. Minutes will function as a “period during which the post-operation performance is always executed”.

While the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to such "post-operation block E" is being executed, the "SP reach background block" is switched to the "SP ending background block". By doing so, the "display of blocks for SP reach background (blocks shared in the current win)" and "display of blocks for SP ending background (blocks used only in one of the current wins)" have a completely different atmosphere. Even if the effect design is performed so that the player does not feel a sense of incongruity, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the scenario data of “Layer 4” and “Layer 5”, a block that does not relate to any image and simply functions as time-series data for calling a process at a certain timing (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) It corresponds to. That is, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and does not participate in any image display. Data structure” (empty time-series image information) is used. Even if such a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed in layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

There are two types of methods for such a data call block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call). First, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 4", the timing ts21 at which the process is called at the start of the symbol variation. A wait time (wait processing period) is set so that the data call block B (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call) is not executed until the arrival of. When the timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), the "data call block B" is executed (analyzed), and as a result, the "data call block B" corresponding to the "data call block B" is executed. The data presentation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B” is executed (analyzed).

Here, the "data calling block B" or the "data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" corresponding to the "data calling block B" is provided with process identification information of "X2" for each unit time. Each time the process identification information of the “X2” is read, the following “process X2” is executed.
Process X2. A process of performing effect determination as to whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block B”, based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

In this "data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)", the section in which the process identification information of "X2" is attached for each unit time is "effect acceptance that can be effected by operation. In the above-mentioned "Processing X2", the availability information of the "post-operation block B" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on when the effect determination is made. It is operated (set) to the state. As a result, the "after-operation block B" is executed (analyzed), and the "after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" associated with the "after-operation block B" is executed every unit time ( Of course, the “processing related to lamp emission”, the “processing related to movable body operation”, and the “processing related to sound output” associated with the “post-operation block B”, respectively. By starting the execution, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” can be generated.

Even in the next frame in which the respective processes associated with the "post-operation block B" are started, the "data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" It is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when the production reception is made in the middle of the section (production reception period) in which the process identification information (here, "X2") is attached for each unit time, the "data call block B The process identification information (here, "X2") is read out from "(liquid crystal production scheduler data B for calling data)", and the "process X2" corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X2” also includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the “post-operation block B” is in a state of starting execution. When it is determined that the process has been started, the "process X2" is terminated without further processing based on the operation detection information, which will be described in "Process X1" above. As I did.

On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the “process X2” (it is determined that the post-operation effect is not executed), the use of the “post-operation block B” associated with the “layer 6” is used. The processing X2 is ended with the permission/prohibition information kept in the off state. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here, “X2”) is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, the “data calling block B (data calling” is performed for each unit time (1 frame). The process identification information (here, "X2") is read out from the "LCD production scheduler data B)" and the above-mentioned "process X2" corresponding thereto is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the section ends at the sixth process identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth process identification information is read out and the response is made accordingly. When the effect determination is not made in the process X2, the effect after the operation corresponding to the “block B for after operation” is not executed and the effect thereafter is advanced.

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the “data call block B The same process identification information (X2) for reading the "process X2 that can generate post-operation effect" from "(liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)" is acquired. However, since it is possible to substantially function as a production reception period (effective period) simply by analyzing such information, it is possible to favorably facilitate and standardize production design. Become.

Here, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) corresponding to “Layer 4” does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and “Process X2” read from the process identification information of “X2”. Does not read the "operation waiting block". Therefore, in the operation acceptance effect that occurs at the timing ts21, the effect acceptance is allowed in a state in which the mood image and the gauge display are not performed. Is realized by.

With such a configuration, the "data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)" can be shared even when another variation pattern is selected. By preparing scenario data with different set values for the wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to make them appear at different timings.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 5”, the data call block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without waiting time (wait processing period). A substantial wait function works in the calling block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for calling data). That is, in the data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call), no image information or process identification information is read until the timing ts11 arrives, and “4” is reached when the timing ts11 arrives. The process identification information is read out. However, the process identification information “4” does not read “the process in which the effect determination is made as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect” is read, but the following “process 4” is read and executed. Has become.
Process 4. A precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an "effect reception period (effective period) during which effect reception can be performed by operation" will occur soon, and for the player that the effect reception period is occurring A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" for performing the operation waiting effect (prompting image and gauge display described above) that prompts the operation.

According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare the data call block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) separately from the “appearance EF & operation wait block A”, For the “waiting block A”, the process identification information of “4” is attached even from a block (liquid crystal production scheduler data) different from the “data calling block A (liquid crystal production scheduler data A for data calling)”. Since it is possible to call it properly just by doing so, it becomes possible to favorably facilitate and commonize the effect design.

When the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal production scheduler data A" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is read. . These processes will be executed (analyzed) every unit time. In the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal production scheduler data A", first, in the case where production reception is not allowed, A section is provided in which the image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to the precursor effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the "effect reception period (effective period) during which reception is possible" will occur soon will be provided.

However, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal production scheduler data A for operation waiting", an operation waiting production (the above-mentioned image or the above-mentioned image A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to the gauge display, etc. is acquired appears, and in the section, the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame). It has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" that is executed (analyzed) from the timing ts11, in addition to the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present, "Y1 The process identification information of “” is attached in a line. Every time the process identification information of "Y1" is read, the following "process Y1" is read and executed.
Process Y1. A process of performing effect determination as to whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block A”, based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410 ).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a section to which such process identification information (here, “Y1”) is added for each unit time is “a production reception period (effective period during which production reception can be performed by operation. )”. Moreover, in the "process Y1", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" from which the "process Y1" is read. The availability information of the “after-operation block A” associated with the same “layer 6” as described above is operated (set) to the ON state.

That is, in this case, when the "after-operation block A" is read, various processes including the "after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" associated with the "after-operation block A" are executed. As a result, a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block A" is generated. Of course, the newly read “after-operation block A (after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting In place of "LCD production scheduler data A)", the execution state is set in "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, only by reading "the block A for operation", the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal" is no longer required to be read because of the effect determination. Since the production scheduler data A)” and the process identification information of “Y1” for reading the “process Y1” can be substantially invalidated (production acceptance is not allowed). Therefore, it becomes possible to favorably facilitate and standardize the effect design, because it is not necessary to separately perform the determination and the processing for ending these. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 403, the second process identification information (here, “Y1”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is read out. The production is accepted in the processed “Process Y1”, and thereby the “after-operation liquid crystal production scheduler data A” associated with the “after-operation block A” in the same “layer 6” is executed (analysis). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the “radiation part” in the “block A for appearance EF & operation waiting (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for appearance EF & operation waiting)” is erased by overwriting (substantially It corresponds to the invalidated section).

In the "layer 4", the effect section to which the process identification information is added for each frame is set on the "data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" side. However, the effect section may be set in a block read from the "data call block" such as "layer 5". Also, in the "layer 4", as shown in the "layer 5", this is realized by operating a substantial wait function in the data call block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the data call). Good.

Also, in "Layer 5", an effect section in which the process identification information is added for each frame is set on the block side read from "Data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call)". did. However, the effect section may be set in the “data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” as in “Layer 4”. Also in the "layer 5", as shown in the "layer 4", this is realized by setting a wait for waiting the data call block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the data call) itself. Good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, it is suggested that when the process identification information of “1” or “4” is acquired, the “performance reception period (effective period) in which performance reception can be performed by operation” will occur soon. For performing the indication effect (such as appearance effect display) and the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image or gauge display) that prompts the player to perform an operation while the effect reception period is occurring. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block” to the ON state is executed. However, it is not always necessary to perform the indication effect (appearance effect display, etc.), and there is an effect waiting period in which the effect reception period is occurring, and an operation waiting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation (the above-mentioned mood image and gauge). A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “operation waiting block” for displaying (eg, display) may be executed. That is, in this case, as soon as the “operation waiting block” is read, the process identification information associated with the “process capable of effect determination” is acquired.

Further, as described above, the effect reception period generated at the timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may be realized by setting the operation state flag similarly to the effect reception period generated at the timing ts51.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are set to be read at the same timing, but they are read at different timings. It may be set.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the block and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding thereto are separately provided, but these may be configured as one data.

Further, regarding the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) for which information corresponding to image data is acquired for each unit time (for each frame), all of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) at the first processing timing (frame). The information corresponding to the moving image data over a period may be configured to be acquired. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame), and after that, the information corresponding to the image data is analyzed although it is analyzed for each unit time (for each frame). It is not acquired, and the process corresponding to it is executed only when the process identification information is attached.

For a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) for which the availability information is set to the ON state, the block may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing when the availability information is set to the ON state, or the availability information is set to the ON state. The processing may be executed (analyzed) at a processing timing after the processing timing set to 1.

Regarding "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block A (Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Liquid Crystal Rendering Scheduler Data A)" and "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D (Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Liquid Crystal Rendering Scheduler Data D)" Although different process identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to image data". Further, the length as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as an effective period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same image and the gauge display are displayed for the same time.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a background display effect for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result ) Is obtained and not obtained, the production section (SP reach background block) in which display data is shared, and the case where a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and not obtained The display section is divided into an effect section (SP ending background block) in which different display data is used. In such a configuration, when performing the background display effect for the specific reach, instead of using different display data for the entire period when the predetermined determination result is obtained and when not, it Since the display data is shared up to the section (timing ts55) and the winning (judgment result) is shown only by using different display data in the remaining period, it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity are reduced. Become.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the post-operation effect (in the case of the “layer 6” other than the “layer 3” in which the background display effect for the specific reach is executed is crossed (included) over the timing ts55 ( The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is designed to be executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has a priority display (SP) over the background display effect for specific reach (layer 3). By displaying the image on the front side of the image display based on the reach background block and the SP ending background block), it has been obtained that “a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained in Layer 3. "Switching from the production section where display data is shared when there is no display area to the production area where different display data is used depending on whether or not a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained" (Or make it hard to see). As a result, "a production section in which display data is shared between a case where a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and a case where the big hit is not obtained" and a "a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained" Even if there is a case where the production connection cannot be well designed, it is possible to hide it by the post production after the operation. As a result, production design can be facilitated. In this sense, in the post-operation effect, it is desirable to execute a process of moving the movable body forward of the display screen.

Further, regarding the post-operation effect (post-operation block E) that is executed so as to cross over (include) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, regardless of the effect mode. Since it is configured to be executed in a dynamic manner, "a performance section in which display data is shared when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "a big hit (predetermined result)" It is possible to reliably conceal the connection with the "effect section in which different display data is used depending on whether the determination result) is obtained or not.

In order to obtain such an effect, the timing ts55 at which the effect section is switched is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden. Period before the timing (when the end timing of the post-operation effect shifts depending on the operation timing, the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed when the effect reception is performed at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect generated at timing ts52. It is required to be set within a period before the timing of non-display). With such a configuration, the display-related processing (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed in the "layer 3", but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. .

However, "a performance section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration that hides the background display effect (layer 3) at the timing of switching to the "effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained", it should be executable when the big hit is won. However, it may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. For example, the post-operation effect (for loss) is executed even when the jackpot is not won, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, but a partial effect display, etc. By executing as, it is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3).

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 403, as one of the plurality of blocks corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the “post-operation block E” that is read based on the effect reception within the period of timings ts52 to ts54 is read. Will be prepared. For the "post-operation block E", performance reception is automatically performed even when an operation is not detected within the period of timings ts52 to ts54 (the same program as when the operation is detected is automatically generated). Since it is generated (by executing the program), it is possible to provide an interesting and attractive effect which has not been available in the past.

In this regard, although illustration is omitted, the "post-operation block E" is made executable even when the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed. Good.

For example, in the first variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” having the effect contents according to the first variation pattern are sequentially executed, and are shown in FIG. 403. Similar to the specific variation pattern, the process identification information of "2" and the process identification information of "3" are read based on the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)". That is, in the first variation pattern, although the effect contents of the SP reach background (“information about image data” acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) are different, the same pre-allowance operation related display (precursor effect) as the specific variation pattern. ) And the permissible operation related display (such as a moving image and a gauge display) are executed, and the same "after-operation effect" is also used as the after-operation effect when the operation acceptance effect is generated in this way. Block E" is executed.

In addition, in the first variation pattern, even if no operation is detected in the operation reception performance, performance reception is automatically performed, and "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block". It is the same as the specific variation pattern in that the post-operation effect is executed so as to cross over (include) the switching timing with ".

In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is not displayed at the switching timing of the "effect section in which different display data is used when it is not obtained" is the same as the specific fluctuation pattern in the first fluctuation pattern. Alternatively, it may be executed when the big hit is won, and may not be executed when the big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, although different background effects (SP reach effects) are being executed for the specific change pattern and the first change pattern, different background effects are not displayed when the jackpot is won. The same effect (effect after operation) always appears in the form of, and it becomes possible to recognize that the big hit has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, it is recognized that the jackpot is won at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) having different contents between the specific fluctuation pattern and the first fluctuation pattern appears. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the big hit is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit is won by hiding the "background effect" having different effect contents depending on the variation pattern and always causing one effect content to appear. On the other hand, when the big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit is lost because the "background effect", which has different effect contents depending on the variation pattern, is displayed without being hidden. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to sustain your expectations.

On the other hand, also in the second variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” having the effect contents according to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" in the second variation pattern may have the process identification information of "1", but the process identification information of "2" or "3". The process identification information is not included, and immediately before the transition to the “SP ending background block”, the operation reception production capable of generating the post-operation production straddling the transition timing does not occur. ..

In this regard, in the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" related to the second variation pattern, the process identification information "5" (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing while the effect acceptance is not permitted. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of "5", "the process of operating the availability information of the post-operation block E to the ON state (process 5) is executed". It is like this.

Then, the availability information of the “post-operation block E” is turned on in this way, so that the “variable pattern” and the “first variation pattern” described above are used for the second variation pattern as well as the “operation”. The same post-operation effect based on the "post-operation block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for post-operation)" may span (include) the switching timing between the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block". Will be executed on another layer.

In such a configuration, when the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, the place where the production design should be originally performed as the display related to the background production is that the period during which the production reception is permitted. Since the "after-operation block E" is intentionally executed as a block different from the block for the background image at a predetermined timing in the production section that has not occurred, the operation image is not displayed and the gauge is not displayed. Even though the production is not accepted and the production reception is not allowed, the post-operation production (block E for post-operation) suddenly appears when the production reception is performed with another variation pattern. , It is expected to improve the interest in playing games.

According to such a configuration, also in the second variation pattern, “a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “a big hit” Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design well the productional connection with "production section in which different display data is used when (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" It becomes possible to hide (cheat), and it becomes possible to facilitate production design.

In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is not displayed at the switching timing with the "effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained," the second fluctuation pattern also includes the specific fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern. Similar to the one variation pattern, it may be executed when the big hit is won, and may not be executed when the big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, although the background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern is executed, the different background effect is not displayed when the jackpot is won. The same effect (effect after operation) always appears in the form of, and it becomes possible to recognize that the big hit is won. On the other hand, when the big hit is not won, it is recognized that the big hit is lost at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) having different contents from the specific fluctuation pattern and the first fluctuation pattern appears. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the big hit is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit is won by hiding the "background effect" having different effect contents depending on the variation pattern and always causing one effect content to appear. On the other hand, when the big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit is lost because the "background effect", which has different effect contents depending on the variation pattern, is displayed without being hidden. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to sustain your expectations.

In the example shown in FIG. 403 and another example thereof, the operation acceptance effect is executed based on various process identification information attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach). The process identification information need not be attached to the SP reach background block (SP reach liquid crystal effect scheduler data), and may be, for example, a pattern block (design liquid crystal effect scheduler data). ), a block for calling (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for calling), or other blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples thereof, the process is performed in the process read based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3”. The effect determination based on the operation detection information for the specific operation means (operation button 410) has been illustrated as the effect determination performed. However, the specific operation means is not limited to the operation button 410, and may be other operation means. Further, in all or part of the above-described effect determination based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3”, a plurality of operating means (operation buttons 410, It is determined which one of the sword effect operation units 5000 etc. is given the operation opportunity, and whether the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is applied has been operated (effect determination). May be determined). According to such a configuration, it is determined which of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.) the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize the operation reception effect in which the operation opportunity is given only to any of the operation means, the process identification information, the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and the block are made common regardless of the operation opportunity to be given. Will be able to Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both different operation means, and the post-operation effect based on the process identification information may be executed based on the reception of the effect by one of the previously operated operation means. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples thereof, a plurality of pre-permission operation related displays in the appearing EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 that does not involve movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410, and a special appearance EF block E2 that involves movement of the operation button 410 (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.). Can be provided and any one of them can be executed (analyzed) according to the variation pattern. In this case, the blocks can be saved by commonly using the blocks following the appearance EF block E1 and the appearance EF block E2 (both the operation waiting block E and the post-operation block E). Like

In the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example thereof, based on the process identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. By executing the process that is read out, the operation for a specific operation unit can be accepted. However, in addition to this, regarding a predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means, a process (for example, a peripheral control unit steady process) that is completely unrelated to the process identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is performed. The operation may be accepted by and the change corresponding to the acceptance may be made to the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the production progress due to the block, the liquid crystal production scheduler data, etc., the operation for the predetermined operation means can be properly accepted, so that the game is interesting. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

In addition, the block itself is prevented from appearing by a player operation different from the process of performing the effect determination based on the process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3”. All effect elements (display, sound, movable) related to the target block may be invalidated. With such a configuration, it is possible to save layers.

In addition, during the performance determination period, a part of the process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3” is converted into other process identification information by the player operation. You may change the opportunity.

A specific layer may be scheduled to be used before the target fluctuation starts, and may be used over a plurality of fluctuations.

The block may be used not only during a change but also during a winning game or the like. In addition, it is possible to provide a block that spans during a change to a win game, or a block that spans between a win game and a probability change, and the process identification information is also included in these blocks and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block. It may be attached.

Further, "Y3" may be attached to only the block (or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the probability changing state, and the type of the process identification information read according to the game state may be changed.

Further, during error notification (abnormality notification) or the like, it is desirable not to delete the block being executed and the process identification information although an error image is displayed or an error sound is output. As a result, the effect can be properly restored after the error is released.

Further, among the inventions inherent in the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples thereof, the effects described are obtained without necessarily using the technology such as the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) or the process identification information. Those that can be realized may be realized by other methods.

[Performance determination based on operation detection information before the expiration of the effective period]
In general, when a performance reception period (effective period) in which performance reception is permitted occurs, the above-mentioned "image" or "gauge display (bar display)" is displayed in accordance with the timing of the generation. In this regard, when playing for a long time or playing many times, it becomes possible to predict at which timing in the variation pattern the “image” or “gauge display” will be displayed. Then, some players may not be able to wait for the operation and may operate with the timing in anticipation that the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. At this time, if there is a case where the operation is performed immediately before the "image" or "gauge display" is displayed (immediately before the performance reception period occurs), the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. It is mistaken as if it was operated in the state (while the production reception period is occurring), and as a result, the redone operation is delayed within the production reception period (effective period), and the production is received. There was a case where the performance reception period (effective period) would end without any action.

In this regard, in the special operation reception effect according to the present embodiment (for example, the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403), the effect reception period (effective period) from the predetermined timing within the m-th frame after the start of fluctuation. ) Occurs, even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect determination is made by the automatic button function and the after-operation effect can be generated as described above. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the post-operation performance cannot be confirmed even if the redone operation is delayed within the performance reception period (effective period) in the above-described situation. become able to.

However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, it is not possible to feel the realization that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation by the player, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, the effect determination that the effect after operation is generated is allowed only within the effect acceptance period (effective period), but the operation state is detected. Even if it is done within the period (immediately before) before the production reception period (effective period) occurs, this is intentionally used as a target (determination material) for the production determination. According to such a configuration, even when the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (effective period) is expected in advance, the operation is performed within the production reception period (effective period). After the operation, the post-operation performance will be executed. That is, in this case, the player side can feel that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation, so that the interest of the game can be favorably maintained.

On the other hand, as will be described later, even if the operation state is detected within the period (immediately before) before the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specific time. When the effect reception period (effective period) is generated while the above is maintained, it is not determined that the effect reception will be performed within the m-th frame. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to impart the production acceptance condition to the player fairly, and it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Also, as will be described later, at least in a predetermined operation reception performance, when a performance reception period (effective period) occurs from a predetermined timing within the m-th frame after the start of fluctuation, at the time when the m-th frame is started. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the "image of the operation means (or a gauge display indicating the remaining time)" is not displayed yet. That is, in this case, since a period during which the production reception is allowed internally occurs from the time when the mood image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, the player runs ahead, As a result, even if the operation is performed immediately before the image (or gauge display) is displayed, the effect reception will be made, and it may happen that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. You will be able to suppress.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the "performance reception period (effective period)" according to the present embodiment will be described again. "(Effective period)" means "a period from the start of the process for generating the state in which the production acceptance is permitted to the end of the process". Here, the details of the “process for generating a state in which acceptance of production is permitted” differs depending on the method of realizing the “production acceptance period (effective period)”. For example, “operation state flag (see FIG. 403)” Is turned on", "process for setting a timer", "process for calling effect acceptance determination based on process identification information (see FIG. 403)", and the like. That is, the "production acceptance period (effective period)" corresponds to "the production section (period) from the execution of the process for generating the state in which the production reception is allowed to the execution of a predetermined time", The "predetermined time" is "the time until the operation state flag is turned off" or "the time until the timer times out", and "the same process identification information is attached to each frame ends the effect section. It is equivalent to "time to be done". In such an "effect reception period (effective period)", determination processing as to whether effect reception is performed is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, for each frame) based on detection of the operation state. However, in the “determination process as to whether or not effect reception is performed” according to the present embodiment, not only “detection of operation state” performed within the “effect reception period (effective period)” but also The feature is that "operation state detection" performed before the "production acceptance period (effective period)" occurs is also targeted. Such a “production acceptance period (effective period)” is generally created as a period of about 100 frames, for example.

FIG. 404 to FIG. 409 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of processing performed before and after the production reception period (effective period) occurs. In each example described below, the case where an image is displayed using the “block” and the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” described with reference to FIG. 403 is shown, but the display method is not limited to this. As long as it is a general one in which image control is performed on a frame-by-frame basis, any implementation method thereof does not matter. Further, the "process for generating a state in which performance acceptance is allowed" is also exemplified as the "process for turning on the operation state flag", but the process is not limited to this, and the "process for setting a timer" and the "process for setting a timer" Other methods such as "the process of calling the performance acceptance determination based on the process identification information" may be used.

FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when there is no operation detection before and after the effect reception period (effective period).

Now, when a special operation acceptance effect (for example, an effect acceptance period that occurs at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403) occurs in a specific variation pattern, the “effect” is generated in the “m”th frame after the symbol variation is started. It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state as "processing for generating a state in which acceptance is permitted". Note that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state at the halfway "timing t1(m)" in the "m"th frame, because "the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state. Even if the "process" itself is executed based on the arrival of the "m"th frame, more strictly, in relation to the execution of other processes, the start timing of the "m"th frame Therefore, it is impossible to execute all of the various processes including the process in question, and it is possible that the various processes are executed in a predetermined order with a delay relative to the "frame start timing". Because it always happens.

When the operation state flag is operated in the ON state in this way, a production section (production reception period) in which production reception is allowed occurs, and within the production reception period, based on the operation detection information at predetermined time intervals A "determination process as to whether to generate a post-operation effect" is performed.

The effect reception period according to this example is described as “special operation reception effect” shown in FIG. 403. Therefore, as described above, regarding the “determination process for generating post-operation effect”, regardless of whether the effect reception period has occurred (whether the operation state flag is in the ON state), “peripheral control unit steady state” In “processing”, it is executed as “effect determination based on operation detection information” for each unit time (for each frame). By continuing this after the performance reception period, the "determination process as to whether to generate post-operation performance" is performed based on the operation detection information at predetermined time intervals even during the performance reception period. (In the figure, they are executed at “timing t2(m)”, “timing t2(m+1)”, “timing t2(m+2)”, and “timing t2(m+3)”, respectively). That is, in this case, the "determination process as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect" is executed even in a frame before the "m"th frame, but the operation state flag is in the off state. In the situation, it is substantially invalidated as described above, so it is omitted in the figure.

Further, in this example, as the order of various processes performed when a new frame arrives, “after the operation is performed” rather than the order in which the “process of setting (operating) the operation state flag to the ON state” is executed. The order in which the "determination process regarding whether to generate an effect is executed" is set later, so that the effect is generated in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state. Reception (determination of generating post-operation effects) can be performed. However, with respect to the order, it is not always necessary to first execute the “processing (setting) of the operation state flag to the ON state”, and conversely, “whether the post-operation effect is generated” is performed. The order in which the "determination process of" is executed may be set first. In this case, in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag has been operated (set) to be in the ON state, the "determination process regarding whether to generate post-operation effect" itself is not performed, so Reception (determination of generating post-operation effect) will not be performed.

Then, conventionally, at a timing t1 (m) in the "m"th frame, "a process for generating a state in which performance reception is permitted (here, "a process for operating the operation state flag to be in an on state") is executed. If it is performed, based on the operation detection information acquired within the period after the process is executed (here, “the period when the operation state flag is in the ON state”), “whether the post-operation effect should be generated is displayed. The “determination process” is executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 404, at the timing t2(m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not there is an operation within the period of the timing t1(m) to t2(m), and the operation is performed. When it is determined that the operation is performed, post-operation performance is executed, and when it is not determined that the operation is performed (or, although the operation state is detected, the length of time that is maintained as the operation state is incorrect). When it is determined that it is sufficient), the post-operation effect is not executed, and at the timing t2(m+1) in the next frame, it is operated whether or not there is an operation within the period of the timing t2(m) to t2(m+1). The process of determining again based on the detection information is executed for each frame.

However, in this case, if there is a person who can not wait for operation and operates aiming at a timing in anticipation that a production reception period will occur, the production reception period will not be received As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (validity period) will end. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the "performance determination to generate the post-operation performance" is permitted only within the performance reception period (effective period). Regarding the state detection” itself, even if it is performed within the period (immediately before) before the performance reception period (effective period) occurs, this is used as the target (determination material) of the operation detection determination. I dare to use it.

For example, in such an operation detection determination, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like, it is usually possible to use "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more" as a determination condition. Done. In this respect, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment also uses the operation detection information before the timing t1(m) arrives, and within the period of the timing t1(m) to t2(m). “Even if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is not maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more, a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more before the timing t1 (m) If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for the time of, it is determined that there is an operation, and the post-operation effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, even when the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (effective period) is expected in advance, the operation is performed within the production reception period (effective period). After the operation, the post-operation performance will be executed. That is, in this case, the player side can feel that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation, so that the interest of the game can be favorably maintained.

Which one is used as a more specific configuration for such operation detection information is not particularly limited. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment is configured to determine in frame units whether or not the operation state has been maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or longer, and For a frame in which the operation state is maintained (continued) for a time (for example, 3 ms) or more, a history as an “ON frame” is left, and a frame without a history as an “ON frame” is treated as an “OFF frame”. I have to. The history may be left at the end of the frame or at the start of the next frame, or may be left as the "ON frame" when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). You can

Then, as will be described later, in the “determination process for generating post-operation effect” according to this embodiment, there are three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” is left. When the operation detection information is obtained in the form of lined up, the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is performed so that the after-operation effect can be executed.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is the “ON frame” or the “OFF frame” at the end of the frame and leaves the history, so that FIG. In the “determination process for generating post-operation effect” performed at the timing t2(m) shown in, the “m”-th frame including the timing t2(m) is not used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-3"th frame, the "m-2"th frame, and the "m-1"th frame are used as determination materials, and these are the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". It is determined whether or not the history is left as a "frame". On the other hand, when the history as the “ON frame” is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the “operation” is performed at the timing t2(m) shown in FIG. 404. In the “determination process for generating post-production”, the “m”-th frame including the timing t2(m) is also used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-2"th frame, the "m-1"th frame, and the "m"th frame are used as the determination materials, and these are the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". As a result, it is determined whether or not the history is left.

In this respect, the example shown in FIG. 404 shows a case where no operation is detected before and after the production acceptance period (effective period). Therefore, at the determination timing (timing t2 (m), t2 (m+1), t2 (m+2), t2 (m+3) in each frame) after the production acceptance period (effective period) has occurred, It is determined that the history as “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “OFF frame” is left, and the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is not performed, and the after-operation effect is generated. Not executed

By the way, regarding the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, a delay of two frames (or one frame) may occur after the processing related to the display by the peripheral control unit 1511 is started until it appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing for determining which image is used as an image according to various determinations and processing for creating a drawing list in response to the determination). The processing in the image control unit (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that has received the processing result (information about an image such as a drawing list) on the peripheral control unit 1511 side (a so-called double buffering preparation buffer (a non-display buffer) 1) also requires one frame.

Therefore, conventionally, regarding the processing related to "production during the effective period (operation waiting block E)" by the peripheral control unit 1511, a frame two frames before the "m"th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. It is configured to start at the (“m−2”th frame), so that the effect display device 1600 appears during the effective period from the “m”th frame.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the "during effective period (operation waiting block)" is still displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time when the m-th frame is started. One of the features is that there is no state, and the period up to the "m-1"th frame immediately before the production reception period (effective period) occurs is "pre-effective period production (effect production etc. In addition to the "processing period for "appearance EF block E")", the period from the "m"-th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is defined as "effect during effective period ("such as image and gauge display). The processing waiting period for the operation waiting block E")" is set. Note that, as shown in FIG. 403, regarding the “process period for the pre-effective period effect (“appearance EF block E” such as effect effect)”, the process is continued even after the “m”-th frame,” It may be overlapped with the processing period for the production during the period (the “operation waiting block E” such as the image or gauge display).

More specifically, in a predetermined period until the "m"th frame arrives (or in a subsequent period), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to "pre-effective period effect (effect effect, etc.)". It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). On the other hand, in the predetermined period after the "m"th frame arrives (the period during which the effect is produced during the effective period), the drawing is performed based on the information corresponding to the "effect during the effective period (such as image and gauge display)". A list is created and this list is transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 404, in the peripheral control unit 1511, "pre-effective period effect (appearance EF block E)" up to (m-1)th frame (or thereafter). Processing is executed, and the processing related to “production during effective period (operation waiting block E)” is executed after the “m”-th frame, but in the effect display device 1600, in the “m”-th frame. "Pre-effective period effect (display based on appearance EF block E)" is still in the process of execution, and "effective effect period (display based on operation waiting block E)" finally starts in the "m+2"th frame. Will be done. That is, in this case, from the time when the "effect during effective period (display based on operation waiting block E)" is not yet displayed ("m"th frame, "m+1"th frame), the effect reception is internally performed. As a result, the player runs ahead, and as a result, he/she operates just before the "effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)" is displayed. Even in such a case, the effect reception is performed, and it is possible to prevent the situation in which the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation from occurring.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 404, the process relating to "pre-effective period effect (display based on appearance EF block E)" and the process relating to "effective period effect (display based on appearance EF block E)" are performed. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit 1511 executes each frame. However, when these effects are displayed by moving image data, it is only necessary to create a drawing list in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the “information corresponding to the moving image” at the start frame of the processing. That is, in this case, in each subsequent frame, the image control means (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) side automatically performs the process of reading and displaying the image data. The processing may not be performed every frame in the unit 1511.

FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started in the “m+1”th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404.

As described above, in the “determination process for generating post-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, there are three frames in which the history of “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” remains. When the operation detection information in the form of arranging is obtained, the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is performed so that the after-operation effect can be executed.

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 405, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2(m+1) in the “m+1”th frame (timing before the performance acceptance determination timing). Thus, the history of the “m+1”th frame itself as an “ON frame” is also left at the end of the frame. However, at the timing t2(m+1) in the frame, all of the three frames (“m−2”th frame, “m−1”th frame, and “m”th frame) to be determined are Since it is an "OFF frame", no effect reception (determination that an operation has been performed) is made.

Even at the timing t2(m+2) in the next frame "m+2"th frame, the three frames ("m-1"th frame, "m"th frame, "m+1"th frame) to be determined are Since the history of “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “ON frame” is left, the production reception (determination of the operation) is not performed.

When the timing t2(m+3) in the next frame "m+3"th frame is reached, the three frames ("m"th frame, "m+1"th frame, "m+2"th frame) to be judged are The history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” is left, respectively, so that the production reception (determination of the operation) is made.

According to such a configuration, since the "m+1"th frame and the "m+2"th frame are "ON frames", the operation state is equal to or longer than the predetermined time for two frames within the effect reception period (effective period). It is possible to judge that the situation is maintained (for example, 3 ms). In addition, since the "m"th frame is the "OFF frame", it is possible to determine that the operation is started within the production acceptance period (effective period). That is, in this case, since it means that the operation is properly performed within the period in which the effect reception is allowed, in the example shown in FIG. (Here, the timing t2 (m+3)), the effect reception is performed, and the post-operation effect (here, “post-operation block E”) corresponding to this is executed (started). In this example, the process of turning off the operation state flag is executed at the time the effect is received, but the operation state flag may be turned off at the end of a frame, etc. It suffices if the operation determination process is (substantially) not performed in the next frame by executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2 (m+3), the “after-operation effect (operation) It is supposed that the processing regarding the post-use block E)” is performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display corresponding to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the "m+5"th frame (not shown) two frames after.

FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the operation is started in the “m−2”-th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404.

As described above, in the “determination process for generating post-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, there are three frames in which the history of “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” remains. When the operation detection information in the form of arranging is obtained, the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is performed so that the after-operation effect can be executed.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment allows the “performance determination to generate the post-operation performance” only within the performance reception period (effective period). Regarding the “state detection” itself, even if it is performed within a period (several frames immediately before) before the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, this is the target of the operation detection determination (determination). I intentionally use it as a material.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation is started within the “m−2”-th frame that is two frames before the “m”-th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such timing is not used in the determination regarding the effect reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the performance acceptance period (effective period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the "m"th frame, the timing t2 in the "m"th frame. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the three frames ("m-3"th frame, "m-2"th frame, and "m-1"th frame) before this is received in the performance reception. It will be used in this determination. In this example, these frames ("m-3"th frame, "m-2"th frame, "m-1"th frame) are "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively. As a result, the history is stored, and the production reception (determination of the operation) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the "m-3"th frame is the "OFF frame", and the "m-2"th frame and the "m-1"th frame are the "ON frames". By doing so, it is possible to determine that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more (for example, 3 ms) over the two frames immediately before the production reception period (effective period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the "m-2"th frame that is two frames before the "m"th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, In the example shown in FIG. 406, the effect reception is performed within the effect reception period (effective period) (here, timing t2(m)), and the post-operation effect corresponding thereto (here, “post-operation block E”) is performed. ) Will be executed (started). When such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 406, the effect reception period (effective period) itself ends in an extremely short time without even one frame being continued. Even if the operation is started just before that in anticipation of the occurrence of the (period), the post-operation production is generated by regarding this as the operation performed within the production reception period (effective period). Will be able to That is, in this case, the player side can feel that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation, so that the interest of the game can be favorably maintained.

However, if the production reception in such a mode occurs frequently, the significance of the production reception period (effective period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, at the timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame, the effect reception based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period). When the operation is performed, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the mood image or the gauge display. In other words, in this case, it is possible to have a considerable amount of suspicion as to whether or not the "post-operation effect" is caused by being given an operation opportunity. It becomes possible to expect to suppress the start of the operation before the (period) occurs.

It should be noted that there is no particular limitation on a method of realizing "the post-operation effect is executed without displaying a moving image or a gauge display". In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the processing regarding the "during the effective period (operation waiting block E)" is performed from the "m"th frame without intentionally considering the delay of two frames. After that, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2 (m), the process related to the "after-operation effect (post-operation block E)" is performed from the frame ("m"th frame) for which the effect reception is performed. I am trying. As a result, as shown in FIG. 406, the process related to the “after effect (block E for operation)” is executed without executing the process related to “during the effective period (operation waiting block E)”. As a result, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the scale image or the gauge display.

In addition, in the example illustrated in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2”th frame is maintained while crossing the timing t2(m) in the “m”th frame. Therefore, it has been decided to explain what kind of determination is made under the assumption and the effect according to the determination is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 407, the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2”th frame is not maintained across the timing t2(m) in the “m”th frame, and “m Even if it is ended within the "-1"th frame, if the "m-2"th frame and the "m-1"th frame each have a history as an "ON frame" (respectively, If the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing described with reference to FIG. 406, and the same effect is executed according to the determination.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 406, the operation by the player is not detected at all after the production reception period has occurred, and is performed only within the period before the production reception period occurs. However, the judgment conditions ("m-3"th frame, "m-2"th frame, and "m-1"th frame) for the effect reception at the timing t2(m) are "OFF frames", respectively. , “ON frame” and “history as “ON frame” are left)” are satisfied even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2(m), the operation is accepted and the operation is performed. Post production will be executed.

With respect to such a configuration, the same can be said when an operation is performed within the production reception period (effective period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 405, the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2(m+3), and the timing is before the timing t2(m+3) in the “m+3”th frame, or “m+2”. Even if the operation state is completed within the th frame, the determination conditions (“m”-th frame, “m+1”-th frame, “m+2”-th frame, respectively) regarding the effect reception at the timing t2 (m+3) are “ As long as the “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “history as “ON frame” are left), the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m+3), as shown in FIG. The effect reception is performed as shown, and the post-operation effect is executed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing at which the "determination regarding performance reception" is performed, and the timing at which the "determination regarding performance reception" is performed. When the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more within a period earlier than the above (in the present embodiment, the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in each of two frames), the operation that is the operation target The effect reception is made assuming that the operation is properly performed on the means, and the post-operation effect is executed.

Here, the operation detection information obtained before the performance reception period (effective period) occurs in the “production reception determination process” performed after the performance reception period (effective period) occurs. If it is simply used as a determination material, for example, even when the precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed and there is no sign that the effect reception period (effective period) will occur, operation will be performed. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that someone will be allowed to receive the performance reception. That is, if the operation in this manner is permitted, the significance of the production reception period (effective period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as described above, not only the “ON frame” is set as a determination target, but whether the “OFF frame” and the “ON frame” are present is detected. In this way, the above-mentioned concerns are eliminated. In the present embodiment, ON/OFF is determined on a frame-by-frame basis, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to employ a method such as "the effect reception is performed on condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more from the timing". Even in such a case, it is possible to judge how long before the production reception period (effective period) the timing when the sensor signal rises or falls occurs, and to determine the time when the operation state is maintained. It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by determining how long it continues.

FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started from the “m−3”th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404.

As shown in FIG. 408, in this example, the operation started in the “m-3”-th frame that is three frames before the “m”-th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is the effect. It is assumed that the process continues until the "m+2"th frame within the reception period (valid period). In this example as well, when the production acceptance period occurs, first, the “determination regarding production acceptance” is performed at the timing t2(m) in the “m”-th frame, and in the determination, the production acceptance period is generated. The operation detection information acquired previously (here, the operation detection information acquired in the "m-3"th frame, the "m-2"th frame, the "m-1"th frame) is used as the determination material. It is designed to be used.

However, in this example, the "m-3"th frame, the "m-2"th frame, and the "m-1"th frame have history as "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively. Since it is in the state of being performed, the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is not made as a result of the “determination regarding effect reception” at the timing t2(m). Not only that, but also in the “decision regarding reception of performance” performed at the timing t2 (m+1) or the like after the next frame, “ON frame”, “ON frame”, “ON Since only the history as "frame" is left, as long as the operation state from the "m-3"th frame is maintained, as a result of "judgement regarding performance reception" performed in each frame There is no reception (determination that there was an operation).

That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the "m-3"th frame is temporarily terminated and a frame in which the history as the "OFF frame" is left is created and then the operation is not performed again, reception of the effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the (judgment of the operation) from being made. As a result, even if the indication effect (appearance effect) is not executed and the operation reception state (effective period) does not even indicate the situation, even if the operation state is maintained, It becomes possible to preferably avoid the production reception.

As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 405 to 408, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2(m) in the “m”th frame, the post-operation effect is displayed without displaying the mood image or the gauge display. It will be executed (see especially FIG. 406). However, in this case, since it is not possible to feel that the post-operation performance has occurred due to the operation, and there is concern that the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate, this is the case when the performance reception is performed at any timing within the performance reception period. However, the production progress may be performed so that the image and the gauge display are always displayed. In this case, regarding the feature such as "at the time point when the m-th frame is started, "the effect during the effective period (operation waiting block)" is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600", It is not necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

A method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited, but, for example, the timing at which the “processing (setting) operation (setting) of the operation state flag is performed” in the frame” and the “performance acceptance determination” are performed. This can be realized by setting the timing at which the "processing" is performed to be opposite to the case of the example shown in FIG. 404.

FIG. 409 shows an effect reception period (effective when the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state) is performed after the “determination process for effect reception” within the frame. It is a flow chart which shows an example about (period).

As shown in FIG. 409, assuming that the "m"th frame has arrived, first, at timing t12(m) in the frame, the operation state flag is turned on (set). Done. As a result, an effect reception period (effective period) is generated, but in the "m"th frame, "decision process for effect reception" is performed after the effect reception period (effective period) is generated. There is no such thing.

That is, although illustration is omitted, in the “m”-th frame, the timing at which the “determination process related to effect reception” is performed comes before the timing t12(m). Then, at this time, the "determination process for effect reception" itself is not performed, or the "determination process for effect reception" has been performed but the effect acceptance period (effective period) has not occurred. As a result, it is determined that the production is not accepted.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production reception from being performed in the frame (here, the "m"th frame) in which the production reception period (effective period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame (here, the “m”-th frame in this case) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the “effective period effect (operation waiting block E )” is always performed, and the display image (production during the effective period) according to the processing can be displayed on the production display device 1600 in the “m+2”-th frame two frames after. become.

That is, in this case, the production reception is performed after the production reception period has occurred, at the shortest, the "m-2"th frame, the "m-1"th frame, and the "m"th frame are "OFF frames". , “ON frame”, and “ON frame”, the timing t11(m+1) in the “m+1”th frame has arrived. Then, at this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs a process related to "after-operation effect (post-operation block E)" based on the reception of the effect reception. At this time, in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512), the preparation buffer (of the double buffering) is prepared based on the processing result regarding the “during effective period” processed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the “m”th frame. The drawing process on the (non-display state buffer) side has already been performed (see “Processing in image control means” in FIG. 409).

Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 409, even when the production reception is performed in the shortest time after the production reception period has occurred, in the production display device 1600, in the “m+2”-th frame, “production during the effective period” is performed. Is displayed, and the display related to "post-operation effect" is displayed in the "m+3"th frame, so that it is possible to start the post-operation effect after displaying the image and gauge display. become.

However, the method of starting the post-operation effect after displaying the mock image and the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. 409. For example, as in the case shown in FIG. 404, even in the frame (here, the "m"th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the effect reception can be performed at the timing t2(m). Even when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2(m), the processing relating to the "effective period effect (operation waiting block E)" in the peripheral control unit 1511 is performed at the timing t2(m). It may be performed.

That is, in this case, one frame for the frame for which the effect reception has been performed is the frame for performing the process related to the “after-operation effect (post-operation block E)” in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the reception of the effect. It will be delayed only. Therefore, even when the effect is received at the timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame, in the "m"th frame, the "control during the effective period (waiting for operation) in the peripheral control unit 1511. The processing regarding “block E)” is performed, and the processing regarding “after operation (after operation block E)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the next frame “m+1”-th frame. . Such "delay" is not limited to the frame (here, the "m"th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, and occurs in any frame when the effect reception is performed. . Even with such a method, even after the production reception period has occurred, even if the production reception is made in the shortest time, it is possible to start the post-operation production after displaying the mood image and the gauge display. Become.

Thus, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples thereof, in the “determination process for effect reception” performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, rather than when the m-th frame is started. The "detection information from the operation detecting means" acquired in the previous "m-1"th frame will also be used as the determination material for the effect reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples thereof, the “from the operation detection means” acquired in the “m−1”th frame before the “mth” frame is started. Both the "detection information" and the "detection information from the operation detecting means" acquired in the "m-2"th frame are used as the determination material for the effect reception. That is, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before (at an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the effective period) in anticipation of the effect reception period (effective period) occurring, this effect is produced. Since the post-operation performance will be executed on the assumption that the operation is performed within the reception period (effective period), the player will also feel that the post-operation performance has occurred due to the operation. You will learn.

Moreover, even when the operation state is not maintained at the time when the "determination process for effect reception" in the m-th frame is performed, the "operation detection means" acquired in the frame before the m-th frame The performance reception can be made based on the "detection information from". That is, in this case, even in the case where the operation state is maintained only immediately before (at an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the effective period) in anticipation of the effect reception period (effective period) occurring. Since the post-operation production will be executed by regarding this as an operation performed within the production reception period (effective period), the post-operation production is also performed on the player side due to the operation. You will feel the actual feeling.

However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to the “ON frame” at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the “ON frame” when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed in the frame. It may be operated (set). In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection unit) acquired from the start of the m-th frame until the production reception period (effective period) occurs is also used as the determination material for the production reception. Will be used. That is, in this case, the operation (for example, maintaining the operation state for 3 ms or more) is performed in each of the "m-1"th frame and the "m"th frame, and the operation is performed in the "m-2"th frame. When it is determined that it is not performed (for example, the operation state is less than 3 ms), the effect reception is performed. According to such a configuration, the time until the player's operation is used as the determination material is shortened, and thus it is possible to provide the post-operation effect with high immediate responsiveness.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 404 to 408 or another example thereof, at the time when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, it is assumed that the image and gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. ing. Then, when the effect reception is performed in the m-th frame, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying (creating) the button image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, even when the operation state is maintained only immediately before the production acceptance period (effective period) occurs (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the effective period occurs). , While the post-operation performance is executed assuming that the operation has been performed within the performance reception period (effective period), “When the post-operation performance is generated in such a mode, A button image or gauge display is not displayed.” It is possible to add a demerit to the production, and it is possible to encourage an appropriate operation within the production reception period (effective period). For example, when the button image or the gauge display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of those modes is displayed, and it is suggested by the mode. It is not possible to understand the degree of expectation, which is a demerit.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples thereof, when the production reception period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time, the production reception is not performed. It becomes possible to urge the user to operate in an appropriate mode during the performance reception period.

However, on the other hand, when the performance reception period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than the specific time, not for a long time, the performance reception is performed. Even if the operation is performed immediately before the period (effective period) is expected to occur, it is considered that the operation was performed within the production reception period (effective period), and the post-operation production is performed. As a result, the player feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation.

Moreover, in order to receive the performance, it is not enough that the operation state is maintained in a time shorter than the specific time, and that the operation state is required to be maintained for a time longer than the predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 409 and other examples thereof, in the process in the “mth” frame in which the effect reception period is started, no matter what operation detection information is obtained, the process related to post-operation effect ( Of the display process in the effect display device 1600, the process regarding the lamp light emission, the process regarding the sound output, the process regarding the movable body operation), at least regarding the display process in the effect display device 1600, “the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed. , "Processing for reading in the peripheral control unit 1511" is not performed, and processing when the effect reception is not performed (processing for reading information corresponding to image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) I decided to do it. According to such a configuration, even if any operation information is obtained in the m-th frame in which the effect reception period starts, in the m-th frame, the process (effect) when the effect reception is not performed At least a part (display process in the effect display device 1600) of the display process in the display device 1600, the process related to the lamp emission, the process related to the sound output, the process related to the movable body motion) is always performed. That is, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, the process (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511) in response to the reception of the effect is started with a delay. Before that, the process when the effect reception is not made (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) is always executed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the "post-operation effect" is an effect that is started due to an operation by the player.

Note that, as described above as another example of the example shown in FIG. 409, even in the "mth" frame in which the effect reception period starts, the effect determination can be performed based on the operation detection information, and the effect is then determined. In the frame where the determination is made, the “processing of reading the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and the “information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed in the next frame. , "Reading process in the peripheral control unit 1511" may be executed. That is, in this case, among the processes related to post-operation effects (display process in effect display device 1600, process related to lamp light emission, process related to sound output, process related to movable body motion), at least the effect effect determination is performed with respect to the display process in effect display device 1600. In the frame in which the effect is performed, the process (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the effect reception is not performed is executed. However, at this time, of the processes related to post-operation effects (display process in effect display device 1600, processes related to lamp emission, processes related to sound output, processes related to movable body operation), for example, “process related to lamp emission” and “related to sound output”. Regarding “processing”, processing of reading “information regarding the light emission mode after operation” or “information regarding sound output after operation” may be performed in the frame in which the effect determination is performed. That is, in this case, the lamp and the sound are started to be output in the post-operation mode based on the read information in the frame where the effect determination is made or in the next frame.

Further, as shown in FIG. 403, when the technique of displaying the effect image by blocks is adopted, and when the effect reception by the operation is made, the “after-operation block” for executing the after-operation effect is displayed. In addition, "Disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)" for displaying the disappearing effect image until the operation promotion image such as gauge image and gauge display that was displayed until then is hidden It may be executed. According to such "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinguishing EF)", for example, an image in which a mood image or a gauge display fades out upon reception of an effect (images gradually hidden) Can be displayed. Further, such "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinguishing EF)" may be executed when the effect acceptance period ends without effect after operation being performed. “Disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)” is also attached to a background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for background), an operation waiting block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting), and the like. It can be configured to be executed by operating the availability information in the process read based on the existing process identification information.

In addition, regarding the "process for generating a state in which the acceptance of the effect is allowed (process for operating (setting) the operation state flag to be in the ON state)" described with reference to FIGS. 404 to 409, the scheduler after the symbol variation starts It may be executed based on (elapsed time) or the like, and does not necessarily have to be executed with a frame as a trigger.

Further, the “image” and “gauge display” may be displayed as a pre-effective period effect (display based on the appearance EF block E). However, regarding the display mode when the effect before the effective period (display based on the appearance EF block E) is performed, it may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner or may be displayed in a hazy manner by another effect display. For example, it is required to display the “curtain image” and the “gauge display” in a mode different from that when the “production during the effective period (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is performed. Further, at this time, in the effect before the effective period (display based on the appearance EF block E), one of the “curtain image” and the “gauge display” may be displayed, and the effect may be advanced without being displayed. ..

[Further rendition of the image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content corresponding to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (preliminary effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of a big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected effect according to is to be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described variation pattern determination, identification of high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change). When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, the effect reception is performed. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance effect (effective period) that is allowed. However, as will be described later, the permissible acceptance sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect is generated has different modes depending on the result of the effect determination, which allows the post-operation effect to be performed in a mode with high expectations. I try to suggest the rate of being hit and the rate at which jackpot patterns are stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, Even if there is a special result in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, the operation that accepts the production is permitted. Reception performance (valid period) can be generated. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the operation acceptance performance (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing. .. In addition, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern for generating the operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach is other than the "specific variation pattern". May also be provided. However, no matter which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the operation acceptance effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from happening or to lower the selection rate.

By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is predetermined for the effect member to be effected as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). The post-operation effect that causes a change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change in the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. Reception performance (effective period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that amusement of the game until the post-operation performance is executed may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect,
During the execution period of the design effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressing mode. During the execution period of the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and/or the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is changed. The corresponding "BGM reproduction (specific type of sound effect)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence, or is in a non-output state (whether the reproduction period in which audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, channel allocation As described above, various measures are taken, such as at least generating a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the process has been completed (see FIG. 190). -FIG. 303, FIG. 385-FIG. 409).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the mock image displayed in the operation reception effect is further displayed as an integrated muffled image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the mock image. By doing so, when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated, the interest of the game is improved. Regarding such an integrated image, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) that is generated when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that is generated with the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (effective period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both of the low-expectation non-suppression reception effects and the high-expectations suppression reception effects. Also, regarding each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 190 to 303, FIG. 385 to FIG. 409), the display mode of the exemplified mock image may be replaced by any one of the integrated mood images described below. It is desirable to do so in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Hereinafter, a case in which the mock image is displayed as an "integral mood image" will be described.
First of all, the "image" will be explained again. The operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception performance is the "operation receiving portion" for receiving the operation by the player and the periphery of the operation receiving portion. A "periphery decoration part" for decoration is provided. In this respect, the "image" means an image of the "operation receiving portion" of the operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided so as to be displaced by an operation by the player, and the "periphery decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the “periphery decoration portion” is the frame unit 415. Will be equivalent to. Further, in the case of the operating means (sword decoration 5001) illustrated in FIGS. 192 and 222, the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the “periphery decoration portion” corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

FIG. 410 shows the “integrated image” displayed when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for the operation means provided with the “operation receiving portion” for receiving the “press operation” by the player, It is a figure which shows the example.

In this explanation example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an “operation receiving portion” on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001. That is, the pattern button 5014 is pushed into the pattern portion 5012 when a "press operation" is performed by the player, and is detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detection information is an effect (execution trigger of post-operation effect, etc.). ). According to such a configuration, in the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation unit, the "handle button 5014" that can be operated (moved up and down) with respect to the handle 5012 and the sheath 5020 (moved up and down). Two operation receiving portions including a possible “handle portion 5012” will be provided.

In FIG. 410, the “integrated image” when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 occurs when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing will be described. I decided to. However, in the example described below including FIG. 410, the “integrated image” when giving an operation opportunity to the design button 5014 is operated not on the design button 5014 but on the operation button 410. It may be applied as an “integrated image” when an operation reception effect (effective period) to which an opportunity is given occurs. In other words, in this case, the "images of the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-described performance examples (FIGS. 190 to 303, 385 to 409) are respectively referred to as "integrated image" described below. It can be replaced, and in this case, the handle button 5014 is not provided and this is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 410(a) to 410(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) When the effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. It is displayed as the integrated image images IGa to IGd. In the example shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), the button image BMG and the marginal decoration image SSG are not individually prepared as image data, but one image data (integrated Only the converted images IGa to IGd) are displayed. Further, when the integrated clip images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation prompting displays such as “press” and “down arrow” are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of description.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the post-operation performances to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception performance (effective period), “relatively low expectation first performance mode” and “relative A plurality of effect modes including "a second effect mode with high expectation" are prepared, and one of these effect modes is executed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). . In this respect, in the example shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d),
The mode (integrated image IGb) shown in FIG. 410(b) is more than that when the mode (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 410(a) appears in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). When appears, the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” is higher as the post-operation production,
The mode (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 410(c) is more than when the mode (integrated image IGb) shown in FIG. 410(b) appears in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). When appears, the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” is higher as the post-operation production,
The mode (integrated image IGd) shown in FIG. 410(d) is more than that when the mode (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 410(c) appears in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). Based on the result of the jackpot judgment (production judgment), the relationship that the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with relatively high expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation performance when Any one of the chemical images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as the integrated image images IGa to IGd. Even by preparing at least two modes, it is possible to suggest the expectation as post-operation performance within the effective period. Further, a mode different from the above four modes (integrated general images IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any one of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
Operating means (sword decoration 5001, sword decoration 5001,) having an operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by an operation by the player, and a peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof. Production operation unit 400),
Integrated lumber image display means for displaying the lumber image of the operation receiving portion as integrated lumber images IGa to IGd integrated with the peripheral decoration image for decorating the perimeter of the lumber image,
And an operation acceptance executing unit that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion due to an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed, The integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (the integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details of the “integrated general image” shown in FIGS. 410( a) to (d) will be described for each of these modes (integrated general images IGa to IGd).

First, the “integrated black image IGa” shown in FIG. 410(a) is configured to include a normal button black image BMGa and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the “integrated model image IGa”, the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as “an image of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given”. On the other hand, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is “the peripheral decoration portion (the pattern portion 5012, or the frame 5012 or the frame) that is actually provided on the peripheral edge of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given. The unit 415) is not used, and the periphery of the normal button image BMGa is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, first, even when a plurality of operating means are provided, which of the operating means is given an operation opportunity, the operating means to be operated ( It is possible to easily recognize by visually recognizing the normal button image BMGa which is a part of the image. Moreover, the normal button image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration portion, but is a gorgeous and large-sized image (integrated image IGa integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable in order to improve decorativeness and performance. ) Is displayed, the dramatic impact when the normal button image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration part gorgeous, and it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom without being restricted by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration part. become.

In the “integrated image IGA” shown in FIG. 410(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button image BMGa), and its upper surface has It has been given a certain decoration to warn that it is a highly dangerous button. As described above, these "pedestal" and "predetermined decoration" have different shapes from the existing peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

In this respect, in the "integrated image IGa" according to the present embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 411 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target region with time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from a display area having a predetermined maximum value when an operation is not accepted within the valid period. The display area is displayed so as to decrease as time passes. That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only has a function of suggesting the operation means as the operation target, but also suggests the remaining time until the state (valid period) in which the operation reception is allowed is ended. It also takes on the remaining time suggestion function.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 410(a), a partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is provided. .. The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 410(a), a predetermined decoration (here, “white and black striped pattern”) is provided in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. A gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner on the display target area having the predetermined decoration. With such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and is visible even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It becomes possible to maintain a favorable interest in the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

In order to realize such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superposed on the display target area having the predetermined decoration. In addition to the method of displaying by the above method, a method of changing the color of the display target area itself, which is provided with a predetermined decoration, between a portion with a gauge and a portion without a gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as image data alone, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by the color change of the predetermined decoration in the display target area.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 410(a), a predetermined decoration (here, “white and black striped pattern”) provided in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is applied to the normal peripheral decoration. Since it is applied so as to extend over other regions in the image SSGa, it is possible to further enhance the integrated decorativeness of the display target region itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is expected that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 410(a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the design button to be operated is generated. 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button image BMGa in the “integrated image IGa”. That is, as will be described later, the button image BMG is provided with a plurality of modes having different expectations, and the normal button image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. By adopting, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation degree) as the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 which is the operation target without visually recognizing the normal button model image BMGa.

The “button image BMGa (FIG. 410(a))” does not necessarily have to be the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated, and the point is that the operation target is What is displayed may be displayed with a copying level (deformation or the like) such that it can be recognized which operation means.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGb" shown in FIG. 410(b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa", and the button image BMG exercising the operation target. The peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated image IGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" described above, but the button composite image BMG is displayed in the "button composite image" described above. Instead of “BMGa”, it is displayed as a “special button image BMGb” having a different shape.

More specifically, in the “integrated model image IGb” shown in FIG. 410(b), the special button model image BMGb represents the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. However, the image is displayed as an image having a different shape from the "button image BMGa (Fig. 410(a))" obtained by using the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, when such a display method is simply adopted, it may be difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operating means is the operation target when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the “integrated model image IGa”, the “button model image BMGa” that modeled the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed integrally with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Therefore, the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” itself also has a function of suggesting that the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. In this regard, in the "integrated button image IGb", the "special button image BMGb" is displayed by being integrated with such a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Even if "BMGb" does not properly manipulate the operation target, it may be suggested that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target in the "integrated image IGb" as a whole. become able to. In order to preferably obtain such an operation effect (a function of suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” has an operation means different from that of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to be displayed when the pattern portion 5012 or the like is the operation target.

According to such a configuration, the button image BMG that imitates the operation receiving portion and the peripheral decoration image SSG that embellishes the periphery thereof are displayed as an integrated embroidery image, so that the integral The button image BMG, which is only a part of the ablation image, can be displayed by a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily confined to the shape of the operation means to be operated, resulting in a more prominent effect. It is expected that the appeal of the game will be improved by the nature and decoration.

Note that the “special button image BMGb” illustrated in FIG. 410(b) is depicted as a button with a streamlined shape in a more stylish design than the “button image BMGa”, and at the top thereof. The wording "DANGER" is applied. The appearance of a "special button image BMGb" that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1 makes it possible for the player to easily feel a premium feeling, and the "button image BMGa" appears. You will be expected to instinctively feel that expectations are higher than when.

Further, as shown in FIG. 410(b), even when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is set as an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button image BMGb in the “integrated image IGb”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a mode according to the type of the button image BMG in the “integrated image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) as the button image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGc" shown in FIG. 410(c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa", that is, the button image BMG exercising the operation target and its The peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated image IGc", the button image BMG is displayed as the same as the "normal button image BMGa" described above, but the peripheral decoration image SSG is "normal peripheral decoration" described above. The image is displayed not as the "image SSGa" but as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is also similar to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” in the following points.
“The peripheral decoration portion (the handle 5012 or the frame unit 415) actually provided around the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not used, and the effect display is performed. The periphery of the button image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect of the device 1600.
An area for displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such an “integrated image IGc (FIG. 410(c))”, when the “integrated image IGa (FIG. 410(a))” is used as a reference, any operation means is operated. It is possible to significantly change the shape of the “integrated button image IGc (FIG. 410(c))” as a whole without changing the shape of the “button button image BMG” that indicates whether an opportunity is given. become able to. As a result, it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom in decoration and performance by causing a shape change without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

Further, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 410(c))" according to this embodiment, at least a part of the image has the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 410(a))". Is displayed as. Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted when the "integrated image IGa (Fig. 410(a))" appears and when the "integrated image IGc (Fig. 410(c))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is the specified operation reception effect (effective period).

Particularly, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 410(c))" according to this embodiment, another member having special decoration is added to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 410(a))". The entire image is enlarged and displayed as an enlarged image. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as a developed version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and the expectation is higher than when the "button image BMGa" appears. You will be expected to instinctively feel the high price.

Further, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 410(c))" has a shape and decoration different from that of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 410(a))", but a gauge image (predetermined image). No change is made to the GG display target area itself.

That is, when a part of such an integrated image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, the display target area and the gauge image are only “a part of decoration”, or “remaining”. It is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a "portion having a function of suggesting time". In this regard, in the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 410(a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 410(c))", a gauge having an important function of "indicating remaining time" Since the shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed and the shape is changed in the other portions, the shape change can be performed without sacrificing the function of suggesting the remaining time. It is possible to realize a high degree of freedom in decoration and production by causing the effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 410(c), even when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGc" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the operation target is set. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button image BMGa in the “integrated image IGc”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a mode according to the type of the button image BMG in the “integrated image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) as the button image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, the normal button image BMGa when the "integrated image IGc" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "green") from when the "integrated image IGc" is displayed. You can In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

On the other hand, the “integrated image IGd” shown in FIG. 410(d) is also basically the same as the above-mentioned “integrated image IGa”, and the button image BMG showing the operation target and its The peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the “integrated button image IGd”, the button button image BMG is not displayed as the “normal button button image BMGa” described above but as a “special button button image BMGb” having a different shape. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa".

That is, in the “integrated image IGd (FIG. 410(d))”, the “special button image BMGb” used in the “integrated image IGb (FIG. 410(b))” and the “integrated image IGc” are used. (FIG. 410(c))” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” are displayed as an integrated image. According to such a configuration, the function and effect exhibited by the "special button image BMGb" described above regarding the "integrated image IGb (Fig. 410(b))" and the "integrated image IGc (Fig. 410( c))” and the effects obtained by the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” described above are obtained, and when the “integrated image IGa (FIG. 410(a))” is used as a reference, Since the modes of both the button image BMG and the marginal decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected to instinctively feel that the degree of expectation is high.

On the other hand, the button decoration image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are both changed in their modes, but the same decoration or shape appears in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG. Identification for the same post-operation effect when the "integrated image IGa (Fig. 410(a))" appears and when the "integrated image IGd (Fig. 410(d))" appears It becomes possible to suggest that it is the operation reception effect (effective period).

Further, as shown in FIG. 410(d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGd" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the operation target is also set. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button image BMGb in the “integrated image IGd”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a mode according to the type of the button image BMG in the “integrated image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) as the button image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, the special button image BMGb when the "integrated image IGd" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") from when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed. You may do it. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits rainbow colors.

As shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol effect based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation reception effect (effective period). When the button is generated, the button image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are displayed as an integrated image IG, but one side of the button image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. When the other side is displayed, the other side can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button image BMG is displayed as the “normal button image BMGa”, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as one of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” ( Figures 410(a), (c)). Further, when the button image BMG is displayed as the “special button image BMGb”, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as one of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” ( 410(b) and (d)). Also, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”, the button image BMG can be displayed as one of the “normal button image BMGa” and the “special button image BMGb” ( FIG. 410(a), (b)). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the button image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button image BMGa" or the "special button image BMGb" ( FIG. 410(a), (b)).

With such a configuration, although the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed integrally, only one side of the button change image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed when the mode changes. Therefore, by looking at the one side where the mode has not changed, it is possible to easily recognize that the predetermined operation reception effect (effective period) is occurring, regardless of which mode the other side is displayed. Also, by looking at the other side where the mode is changing, it is possible to preferably recognize the degree of expectation. Note that the aspect may not be changed on one side of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, and the aspect may be changed only on the other side.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410A to 410D, the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated image IG is displayed in the operation reception effect (effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with time. It is possible. That is, in this case, the "periphery decoration image SSG" has a remaining time suggesting function for suggesting the remaining time until the state in which the operation reception is permitted is ended, and which operation means is the operation target. By displaying the integrated button image IG integrated with the “button button image BMG” that has the function to suggest, it is possible to recognize the remaining time and the operation target while recognizing which of a plurality of modes has appeared. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment of the game when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated is maintained appropriately.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410A to 410D, in the peripheral decoration image SSG, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. And a non-display area of (there are both a portion having a remaining time suggesting function and a portion having no remaining time suggesting function). That is, the marginal decoration image SSG is not intended only to suggest the remaining time of the operation reception effect (effective period), and the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed is the “button decoration image BMG decoration”. Since it is possible to positively adopt a display mode for the purpose of "improving the performance", it is possible to suggest the remaining time while also indicating the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs. It will be possible to significantly improve. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more preferable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Can be said.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), the button model image BMG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, as a matter of fact, when the “pattern portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration portion has one aspect, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of aspects (a plurality of emission colors). ) To change to either. Therefore, when the button image BMG changes, it is possible to confirm it only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the copying target.

In addition, in the integrated black image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), when the button black image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as a substance, the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral decoration portion, does not change into any of the plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1 and decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG. Therefore, it is not necessary for the peripheral decoration image SSG to match the mode of the "pattern portion 5012" that is the peripheral decoration portion, and it is possible to perform a variety of depictions preferable for enlarging the effect. The “pattern portion 5012” that is the peripheral decoration portion may be provided so as not to change in a plurality of ways, such as being non-luminous.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), there may be a case where both modes of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change (FIG. 410(d)). However, as a substance, it is desirable that both the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG be changed when the “pattern portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration portion is in one mode.

Different modes appear in the "pattern portion 5012" that is the peripheral decoration portion depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". You may do it. However, at least the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes between the case of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and the case of the peripheral decoration image SSG of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", whereas the peripheral decoration portion It is desirable that the “pattern portion 5012 ”, which is the same as the pattern portion 5012, causes only a mode change (for example, a change in the light emission mode) without a shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration portion as a shape that cannot be changed in the first place in order to emphasize the virtual effect function of the peripheral decoration image SSG.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pattern image includes a button pattern image BMG that patterns the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) and a pattern pattern image that models the pattern portion 5012. TMGs are prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made different depending on which of these images is displayed. That is, in this case, since the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b for decorating the peripheral edge of the button image BMG cannot be displayed when a user image different from the button image BMG is displayed, the peripheral image is not displayed. The decoration image SSGa,b itself can be expected to have a "function of suggesting which operation means the operation target is".

In addition, when the form as the peripheral decoration image SSG is different depending on the form of the image (button image BMG, pattern image TMG), the form (thickness) as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image. , Length) is also desirable. The operation reception effect in which the button image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing in the same variation pattern (select which one occurs depending on the effect determination). Be performed), or an effect that occurs at different fluctuation patterns or at different timings. The peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when it is the button-shaped image BMG is not a copy of the peripheral decoration portion, and the peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when it is the pattern-shaped image TMG is a copy of the peripheral decoration portion. May be. However, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception effect (effective period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

In addition, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410A to 410D, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other area in the peripheral decoration image SSG are those areas. A predetermined decoration (here, "striped pattern") is provided over the area, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration is increased, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG is displayed in a superimposed manner on a display target area having a predetermined decoration. ing. With such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and is visible even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It becomes possible to maintain a favorable interest in the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration, and in this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration decreases as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. Since the number also decreases, the player who dislikes the decrease in the predetermined decoration is prompted to perform the operation early.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to 410(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decoration portion (the handle portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided in is not used, and the image represents an intangible object as a gaming machine component. Therefore, it is possible to realize a higher degree of freedom in decorativeness and performance without being restricted by the substance of the game machine parts.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to 410(d), at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes among the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG. That is, in this case, since it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG representing an intangible object without changing the shape of the button image BMG, which of the plurality of operation means is the operation target. It is possible to realize a display with higher performance and decoration by making the shape of the integrated image IG different while appropriately suggesting whether or not.

Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the shape may not necessarily be changed and only the color may be changed when the button image BMG is in one aspect. However, the shape change is allowed because the peripheral decoration image SSG represents an intangible object and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In addition, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed in the form of being enlarged. As will be described later, as a method of changing the form, there are either a method of increasing the number of objects represented as an image (such as the number of decorations) or a plurality of modes having different contour shapes (rectangular solids, spheres, etc.). It is possible to employ a method of expanding the target range to be displayed among those displayed as, or a predetermined object represented as an image. Further, as will be described later, with respect to the morphological change of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a precursor effect, an effect of gradually changing from a form with low expectation to a form with high expectation is executed, and then finally. The operation acceptance in the operation acceptance effect may be permitted while the changed form is maintained.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), the gauge image included in the peripheral decoration image SSG (regardless of the form in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed). The display target area of the predetermined image GG is not changed (at least the shape is changed) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if there is a change in the form of the marginal decoration image SSG, it is possible to preferably maintain the suggestive function of how much time is left, and thus this is important for important functions. While holding, the expectation degree can be suggested by the shape change of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the other area different from the display target area.

The peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily represent an intangible object depending on which one of the above-described effects is to be achieved, and the peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion is not necessarily represented. It may be displayed as an image of a copy.

In addition, the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "effective period in which operation acceptance is permitted" such as a predetermined operation acceptance effect. By doing so, the player is prompted to perform an operation.

However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, although the button model image BMG and the marginal decoration image SSG are displayed integrally, the button model image BMG and the marginal decoration image SSG are not displayed. Only one side is dynamically displayed and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, the one side is displayed so that the other side remains in place while contributing to the improvement of the performance when the button performance, which is an important performance, is generated by the dynamic expression. As a result, when the entire integrated image IG is viewed as a whole, it is not moved and displayed, so that it is possible to appropriately secure the visibility.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced in the movable range. The peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed and is not displayed dynamically. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (periphery decoration image SSG), and when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Can display the display area in the display target area so as to decrease with the passage of time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included on the side (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is the side that is not dynamically displayed, which does not have dynamic display) of the integrated image IG that ensures suitable visibility. With this, the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs is improved by the dynamic display by the button image BMG, but how much remaining time is allowed for the performance reception. Can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the integrated image IG, on the side that secures suitable visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is the side that is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image ( An area in which the predetermined image GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, when performing the effect that suggests the degree of expectation on the side that secures the suitable visibility in the integrated image IG, the effect is performed in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from being adversely affected.

Of the peripheral decoration image SSG, a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button image BMG are provided with a plurality of modes having different expectations, and Although any one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself has different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided and any one of the modes may be displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), the case where the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button image BMG, Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or a pattern in the peripheral decoration image SSG? However, it is feared that it will be difficult to understand whether or not it has a function of suggesting the remaining time. In addition, it is feared that it may be difficult to grasp the position where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced due to the mixture of the decoration and the pattern applied to the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, which may lower the enjoyment of the game. .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( An image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed in the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is referred to as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area at or near the end thereof. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, a “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is also displayed so as to be displaced in the same manner.

According to such a configuration, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the effective period comes to an end, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely decoration or suggests the remaining time, the position of the "specific image" You can recognize the remaining time by checking. In this sense, when such a “specific image” is displayed, it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 411 is a diagram showing a display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation acceptance is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 411, assuming that the timing A0 at which the effective period in which the operation reception is permitted (predetermined operation reception production) starts within the predetermined variation pattern, in the production display device 1600. , An integrated image IG and operation promoting images such as “press!” and “down arrow” are displayed.

In this example, the mode (integrated general image IGa) shown in FIG. 410(a) is displayed as the integrated general image IG, but FIGS. 410(b) to (d) are displayed based on the result of the effect determination. The display may be performed in any of the modes shown in FIG. Even when the integrated image IG is displayed in any of the modes, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the effective period, the specific image different from the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in the mode described below with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 411(a), first, in the integrated image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire area of the display target area. Will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 411(a), at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the effective period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The "specific image in which the aspect is partially changed" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, whether or not the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed. Only by confirming, it becomes possible to easily understand whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the operation acceptance was permitted (the condition in which the remaining crotch is reduced).

However, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” starts from timing A0 (start timing of the effective period). The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a mode such as "the display area is increased by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until the predetermined time (the time required for the appearance of the specific image to finish appearing) elapses. Is displayed in the display target area of.

For example, as shown in FIG. 411(b), the integrated scale image IG at the timing A1 when a little time has elapsed from the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period) is displayed as “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. "Specific image TG" as "a specific image different from the above or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" appears up to the point where about half of the image is visible. Therefore, it can be seen that the display area is being increased with the passage of time.

As shown in FIGS. 411 (c) and (d), the integrated image IG at the timings A2 and A3 where a large amount of time has passed, as shown in FIGS. The "specific image TG" as the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is in a state where the entire appearance has already finished, and the gauge image is not increased without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that there is a situation in which the display target area of GG is displaced.

That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced. (Image) Displayed at or near the end of GG, and displayed so that its display position is displaced (in the following form) in accordance with the displacement of the end of gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Has become.

The “specific image TG” according to this embodiment is displayed as an image in which a star-shaped mark is provided in a white square space at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become a thing. However, the “specific image TG” does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, for example, the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The image may be displayed in a mode in which the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually becomes thinner over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that indicates that the remaining time is exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, "0"). Therefore, even at the time when the remaining time runs out (at the time when the valid period ends), at least a part (may be the whole) is not hidden and the display state is maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 411(e), in the integrated image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the effective period, the gauge The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and the display area of the "specific image TG" is about half left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, in this state, the period during which the operation acceptance is permitted is ended, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the “specific image TG” does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the effective period, it is most desirable to display so that the display area of the “specific image TG” is all left, and such a configuration is You may do so.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is exactly “0” at the end of the effective period. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the “specific image TG” is displayed (in a following form) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Since it is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player's side, how many images among the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge images ( It becomes possible to make ambiguous whether it is a predetermined image) GG.

That is, the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and the display area of most (half or more or all) of the "specific image TG" is left, but from the player side. When viewed, the display area also appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG having the minimum display area (not displayed here) when the effective period ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than it actually is, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than it actually is. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game while the operation reception performance is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden because at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left and ended. Even if the period does not end soon after, the display area of the "specific image TG" can be reduced so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period from occurring. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer unit capable of absorbing such a temporal shift.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 411, at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the effective period, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed. The "specified image" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the effective period, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" The image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the display target area.

According to such a configuration, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is a part of the gauge image GG. Since it will be possible to actively show as if it is, it will appear as if the time longer than it is set is set as the effective period, and when the effective period occurs It is expected to improve.

FIG. 412 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation acceptance is permitted.

Now, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed (predetermined operation reception effect) is started in the predetermined variation pattern, the effect display device 1600 is also used in the example shown in FIG. 412. , An integrated image IG and operation promoting images such as “press!” and “down arrow” are displayed.

In this example as well, the mode (integrated general image IGa) shown in FIG. 410(a) is displayed as the integrated general image IG, but FIGS. 410(b) to 410() based on the result of the effect determination. It may be displayed in any of the modes shown in d). Even when the integrated image IG is displayed in any of the modes, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the specific image different from the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in the modes shown in FIGS. 412(a) to 412(d) with the passage of time. ..

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 412(a), in the integrated image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the entire display target area. The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are not displayed, respectively. At the timing A0 (valid period start timing), only a part of the “specific image TG” may be displayed, but the entire part is displayed here. With such a configuration, the “specific image TG” can be made to appear as if it functions as a part of the “gauge image GG”, and therefore, it seems that a time longer than it seems is left. It is possible to

The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image representing an “eraser”, and cannot be included in the area surrounded by the section image KG (display target area of the gauge image GG) and other areas (of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , Such as a region in which the aspect can change according to the degree of expectation). With such a configuration, the “specific image TG” can be made more conspicuous than the “gauge image GG”, and it is possible to prevent the situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is left. Be expected.

Further, in this example, when a time elapses from the timing A0 to the timings A2 and A3 and the “specific image TG” is displaced, as shown in FIGS. 412 (b) and (c), the “specific image TG” is changed. The part where "" has passed is changed to an "outlined area" as if it were erased by an eraser. With such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" represented in multiple colors (including similar colors and gloss expression) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the "specific image TG". At this time, since the reduced area is represented by only one color, the contrast with the "specific image TG" as a boundary becomes more prominent, and it is suggested how much time is left. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that it is a depiction. The color that appears in the reduced area is preferably a color that is not used in the “gauge image GG”.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 412, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge images (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the display area becomes the minimum value (here, “0”) and the remaining time is exhausted. Since it does not originally function as a part, at least a part (may be the whole) is not hidden even when the remaining time is exhausted (at the end of the effective period) and the display state is maintained. Become.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 412(d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0" in the integrated image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the effective period. And the entire display area of the “specific image TG” is left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, in this state, the period during which the operation acceptance is permitted is ended, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, also in this example, in the integrated image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, a part of the display area of the “specific image TG” is hidden and a part thereof remains. May be displayed as follows.

Even in this example, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced (in the following form) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, When viewed from the player side, it is possible to obscure to what extent the image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Like

That is, the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and the display area of most (half or more or all) of the "specific image TG" is left, but from the player side. When viewed, the display area also appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG having the minimum display area (not displayed here) when the effective period ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than it actually is, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than it actually is. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game while the operation reception performance is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden because at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left and ended. Even if the period does not end soon after, the display area of the "specific image TG" can be reduced so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period from occurring. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer unit capable of absorbing such a temporal shift.

In the example shown in FIG. 412, the images of the “gauge image GG” and the “specific image TG” are made different from those of the example shown in FIG. 411, but the same image may be used. On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 411, the same image as in the example shown in FIG. 412 may be used. Further, the valid period in which the images of the “gauge image GG” and the “specific image TG” are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411, and the images of the “gauge image GG” and the “specific image TG” in the mode shown in FIG. 412 The valid period for which is displayed may occur under different conditions. In this case, in the effective period in which the mode shown in FIG. 411 appears and in the effective period in which the mode shown in FIG. 412 appears, the shape of the integrated image IG itself or at least the display target area of the gauge image GG is mutually different. It is desirable to be different.

As described above, the integrated image IG is dynamic during the effective period of the predetermined operation reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 411(a) to (e) and FIGS. 412(a) to (12d). It can be displayed, thereby prompting the player to perform an operation. However, as also described above, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced in the movable range, while the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed. Tries not to display this dynamically. Then, in the peripheral decoration image SSG on which such dynamic display is not performed, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( Since the predetermined image) GG is changed, it is possible to easily recognize how much time remains until the expiration of the effective period even in the integrated image IG that is dynamically displayed. Will be able to.

The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” may be displayed as one image data or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configurations shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the “specific image TG” has the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” in the display target area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. It is displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when it is reduced, and its display position is displaced according to the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Will be displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, it is unclear how many images are the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Will be able to.

Further, the “specific image TG” illustrated in FIG. 411 is not displayed when the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has the maximum value, and the predetermined time has elapsed after the operation acceptance is permitted. Until the time elapses (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is complemented by the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". I am trying to increase. According to such a configuration, it is as if the remaining time suggested by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is not reduced at the beginning of the predetermined period after the start of the effective period. Since it becomes possible to have such an image, it becomes possible to maintain a favorable interest in the game.

Note that, in the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the integrated mood image IG is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 410(a) to (e)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). However, the display shapes of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” are the same regardless of which of these modes is displayed. Is desirable. Each of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and "specific image TG" (pattern, color, etc.) may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but a function for suggesting the remaining time is provided. In order to maintain the preferable condition, it is desirable that even if one of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" is changed, the other is not changed. For example, if the mark attached to the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 411 is not a star shape but a double circle, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high, and the “gauge image (predetermined As the image (GG) is gradually reduced, the degree of expectation (double circle) is gradually made visible, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, at least part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is non-existent even when the valid period ends without being operated by the player. The display state is maintained instead of being displayed. However, regarding the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, when the timing A4 arrives without the operation by the player, the operation reception is internally performed and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output (for example, the operation are performed. It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which only sound is output in response to reception. In this case, the timing A4 may be a timing at which the valid period ends or may be set as a timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (the timing when the gauge image is hidden or a timing after that), and the timing of the "specific image TG" It is desirable to set it as the timing to arrive with at least a part being displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the player performs an operation immediately after the operation acceptance is not permitted, even immediately after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is performed, Since the "specific image TG" is displayed, it can be displayed as if the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output has been started in response to the operation being accepted by the player in time and the operation acceptance accompanying this being generated. become able to. The “specific image TG” may be displayed even at the time when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, fade-out after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started. Things that are gradually hidden).

When the valid period during which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period that occurs due to the establishment of the first condition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the second condition different from the first condition. When the condition is satisfied, it is possible to generate the second valid period in which automatic reception is not performed. Even in the second effective period, the button image BMG is displayed as the integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof, and the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the gauge image (predetermined image). ) The display target area of GG is included. However, within the second effective period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG" is displayed. Is not displayed. The integrated image IG displayed within the first effective period and the integrated image IG displayed within the second effective period are displayed as the same image except that the "specific image TG" is not displayed. Can be done.

That is, in the second effective period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, unlike the first effective period generated by the satisfaction of the first condition, when the set time elapses without any operation by the player, The second valid period ends when the automatic reception does not function and no post-operation display or post-operation sound output (or both) is generated. Therefore, if the display of the “specific image TG” is left at the time when the operation by the player is no longer accepted, the valid period ends even though the remaining time has not been exhausted. It may cause a misunderstanding as if the game was played, and eventually the interest in playing the game may deteriorate. Therefore, in the second effective period, it is desirable that the "specific image TG" is not displayed for the entire period from the start to the end.

In this case, it is desirable that the first valid period and the second valid period have different lengths of set time (time from the acceptance of the operation acceptance to the end). Further, it is desirable that the display changes (display after operation) and the sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when an operation is accepted are made to have mutually different contents.

Further, in addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, a third valid period that is automatically accepted may be generated (for example, generated when the third condition is satisfied), In addition to the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth valid period that is not automatically accepted may be generated (for example, generated when the fourth condition is satisfied). In short, the valid period during which automatic reception is performed (valid period with different occurrence conditions) includes at least the first valid period in which the processing related to display and sound is performed in the above-described manner. It suffices that at least the second valid period in which the processing relating to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described mode is included in the valid period in which the above is not performed (the valid period with different generation conditions).

In addition, the "first effective period" here means
-It does not mean that after-operation display or after-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the effective period, only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set,
-It means that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are output regardless of the presence or absence of an operation within the effective period regardless of the effect state. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare "special performance state (automatic reception mode)" or "plurality of performance states" as performance states. In addition, when the "second effective period" occurs when the "special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set, whichever may be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is activated. (For example, it may be "automatic reception is not always activated regardless of the effect state"), and is not related to the configuration according to the technical features described here.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a non-linear specific shape. More specifically, when the effective period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the regions forming the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is formed. In the non-linear region of the part, display is performed such that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced with the passage of time. With such a configuration, the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG with the passage of time becomes decorative, and the remaining time as the effective period is consumed. It is possible to maintain a favorable interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined transmittance by applying a specific pattern to the display target region of the GG. (Predetermined image) GG is displayed in a form of being superimposed on it, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is provided with a specific pattern, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) is changed with time. It is possible to improve the decorativeness of the drawing itself, which reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend outside the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) may be changed over time. It is possible to further improve the decorativeness of the rendering itself, which reduces the display area of the GG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the non-linear specific shape display target area shown in FIGS. 411 and 412 is referred to as a “first display target area”. At this time, a second display target area having a shape (non-similar shape) different from the specific shape of the non-straight line and having a different distance from the start of the reduction of the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG to the end thereof. The operation reception effect (effective period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. Then, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, and by the player. At least there is a case where the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without any operation being performed, whereas the operation reception effect in which the second display target area is displayed (effective period) May end when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, but when the second set time elapses without any operation by the player I'm trying not to end it.

In this regard, an operation target to which an operation opportunity is given by the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. By making the (operation receiving unit) different, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different, and the operation targets are different. In addition to being present, it becomes possible to encourage people to enjoy the operation reception performance with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed are different from each other. The mock-up image will be displayed integrally with the peripheral decoration image. Also for the peripheral decoration image, an image in which different decorations are drawn in the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed However, in any case, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part thereof. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having display shapes different from each other.

In addition, in obtaining the above-described action and effect, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the “non-linear specific shape” and the case where “the shape different from this (non-similar shape)” When the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (first set time) is set, the display after operation and the sound output after operation are “big hit”. It is desirable that the proportions in which the "indicating mode" appears are different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

The operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed have the same set time (first set time). It is sometimes desirable to give the opportunity to accept the operation regarding the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output. At different set times, it is desirable to give an opportunity to receive an operation regarding different post-operation display and post-operation sound output.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the operation related display such as “press!” or “down arrow” is displayed by being superimposed on the integrated image IG so that the integrated image IG is combined with the integrated image IG. When I look at these, I try to express more strongly that I am in the situation to operate. However, here, the operation-related display such as “press!” or “down arrow” is not displayed overlapping with the button image BMG (at any timing when it is dynamically displayed) indicating the target to be operated. In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG indicating the remaining time and the specific image TG are not overlapped and displayed.

With such a configuration, an operation such as “press!” or “down arrow” is performed in a manner that avoids important information such as the button image BMG, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and the specific image TG in the integrated image IG. Since the related display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the integrated image IG, it is possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation while appropriately transmitting important information. It goes without saying that this is nothing but the button image BMG being displayed as the integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the post-operation display performed when the operation is accepted within the valid period is set as the valid period during which the operation acceptance is permitted. And multiple (kind) effective periods with different contents of sound output after operation are prepared. The generation conditions of the effective periods are different from each other, and when any one of the generation conditions is satisfied, a type of effective period corresponding to the generation condition is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed within the valid period of a plurality of types of valid periods (first valid period). And at least one (second effective period) in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed within the effective period. Hereinafter, in this example, the "first effective period" and the "second effective period" are the "first effective period" described above in which automatic reception is performed and the "second effective period" described above in which automatic reception is not performed. However, it may be applied as an effective period other than these.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, when performing the predictive effect (specific display) indicating that the operation acceptance is permitted, the predictive effect (specific display) is accepted. May be executed before and after the generation timing of the valid period allowed. According to such a precursor effect (specific display), an effective period will be generated while the flashy effect is being performed, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the effective period occurs. become able to.

However, when the aura effect (specific display) is executed in such a mode, the aura effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated image IG, so that when the effective period starts, Even if the activated image IG is displayed (internal layer display), a portion overlapping with the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (not visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the precursor effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated image IG that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) is made difficult to be visually recognized. In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area under such a situation that visibility is difficult.

That is, in this case, the indication effect (specific display) is hidden, or there is no portion that overlaps with the indication effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target) By the time the visibility of the entire area is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced, so from the player's perspective, the effective period (set time). You may remember the impression that is actually shortened.

On the other hand, the "specific image TG" described above can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, "a sign effect (specific display) is not executed or a sign effect (specific display) is executed, among a plurality of types of effective periods. In the "second effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is ended", from the occurrence of the second effective period to the end. The "specific image TG" is not displayed during the period. On the other hand, of a plurality (types) of valid periods, the gauge image is generated by the time when “the integrated effect image IG occurs during execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easily visible) In the "first effective period in which the display area of the (predetermined image) GG is reduced", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first effective period.

With such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is displayed during the first effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. Since the “specific image TG” is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image is displayed when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is visible. The display area of the GG can be made to appear as if the display area has not been reduced so much, and a decrease in the entertainment appeal can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second effective period during which the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed. When the "specific image TG" is displayed, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the effective period occurs and the effective period occurs, for example, in the case of the display mode of FIG. 411. It may be noticed that this does not function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the appearance of the “specific image TG” gradually appears with the passage of time from. That is, in this case, it is feared that the interest in playing the game may be deteriorated with the exaggerated expression of the remaining time. Therefore, the “specific image TG” is displayed in such a second effective period. It is desirable not to do so in order to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in addition to the second effective period, in a plurality (type) of effective periods, "a precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or a predictive effect (specific display) is executed, but the predictive effect (specific display) is executed. ) Is ended, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced in display area (effective period (fifth effective period))” may be prepared under different generation conditions. In addition, "the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases when the whole integrated image IG occurs during execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and becomes visible (or easily visible). Valid period (sixth valid period)” may be prepared under different generation conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned “specific image TG” is displayed at this time may be appropriately set. Good. In short, at least the second valid period in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed and the first valid period in which the “specific image TG” is displayed are included in the plural (type) valid periods. If so, at least when the effective period occurs, the above-described action and effect are exhibited in relation to the indication effect (specific display).

In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the mode shown in FIG. 412. It may be executed.

FIG. 413 is a diagram showing an example of production progress when the first effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period.

413 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is a special effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, the effect display device 1600. Shows the production situation being performed in.

FIG. 413(b) shows an effect situation in which the indication effect (specific display TH) is started on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 413(a).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 413(b), it can be understood that the integrated display image IG has not yet appeared in at least the effect display device 1600. However, since the indication effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated effect image IG is internally displayed, and the indication effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, whereby the integration is performed. The entire image IG may not be visible (or it may be difficult to view due to a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation acceptance is permitted (the effective period is started) from the time the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

FIG. 413(c) shows that, as a result of the advance effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 413(b) progressing and the area in which the precursor effect (specific display TH) is displayed being reduced, the integrated image IG is displayed. A part that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears, and the part is displayed in a state in which the visual recognition is good.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 413(b)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 413(b) appears, and is also shown in FIG. 413(c). When the "specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)", which is the timing that comes before the situation that occurs, appears at least in internal processing (display in layer processing) Has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 413(c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be viewed (or visually recognized because they overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH) that is preferentially displayed. Although difficult), the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already been started (progress), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already been started (progress). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the precursor effect (specific display TH).

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect (specific display TH) is performed over the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the effective period is generated is the precursor effect. Due to the (specific display TH), at least part of the integrated image IG cannot be visually recognized or is made difficult to be visually recognized. That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) Or the target of operation (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the effective period.

In the example shown in FIG. 413(c), it is difficult to visually recognize the button image of the operation target, but the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery is not in the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. Instead, it is in a state in which it can be recognized that it is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 413(c), since the “specific image TG” is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, the type in which the “specific image TG” is displayed at the beginning of the effective period ( (See FIG. 412) or the type (see FIG. 411) in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed at the time when the effective period starts and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 411). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 412, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said that, when adopted, it is particularly effective to execute the precursor effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

In FIG. 413(d), as a result of the further development of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 413(b), there is no part overlapping with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG). The situation (here, the precursor effect is hidden) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 413(d), at the time when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a state where the visibility is good, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has already appeared). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, a display area larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It remains, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it is possible to expect a reduction in the enjoyment of the game due to the already reduced display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the precursor effect (specific display TH) ends.

In FIG. 413(e), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (just before) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 413(e), at least part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even when the valid period ends. In this regard, in the first valid period, as described above, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed even if the player does not perform the operation within the period (FIG. 413). (See (f)).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception performance), even if the player performs an operation immediately after the expiration of the valid period (operation acceptance is no longer permitted), the display after operation is displayed. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed immediately before or after the sound output after the operation is performed, the post-operation display or the operation is performed in response to the operation acceptance by the player in time for the operation in time. It is possible to make it appear as if the rear sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (previous display) is performed in this manner, when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in good visibility, the gauge image (predetermined) is displayed. The display area of (image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of “specific image TG” has already started. That is, in this case, it is likely that the operation by the player will not be in time, so even if the player does not perform any operation within the valid period, the "specific image TG" is displayed after the operation. It can be said that outputting the sound after the operation or the operation is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Regarding the production progress in the mode shown in FIG. 413, there are a case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411 and a case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 412. It may be applied to any of the above.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 413, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated pattern image IG are displayed in different layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 413. It was decided to realize the production progress in the form. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the production progress in the mode shown in FIG. 413 may be stored as one moving image data and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. This method can also be applied to each example described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 413, the mode (integrated general image IGa) shown in FIG. 410(a) appears as the integrated general image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mock image IG may be made to appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 410A to 410D) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). .. When adopting such a method, it is more desirable to execute the aura effect in the mode shown in FIGS. 414 to 416 in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 414 to FIG. 416 are diagrams showing a modification example of the effect development when the first effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

414 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, the effect display device. 1600 shows a performance situation being performed.

FIG. 414(b) shows an effect in which the first indication effect (first specific display TH1) is started on the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 414(a) is being executed. It shows the situation.

This first predictive effect (first specific display TH1) is generated when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that operation-related effect is performed. Function as an effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), 415(c)” and “the image shown in FIG. 416(j)” are displayed, whereby the “normal button image BMGa” and “special image” are displayed as the button image BMG. The button image BMGb” is most likely to appear.

Here, when the “image shown in FIG. 415(c)” is displayed, there is a high possibility that the “normal button image BMGa” is displayed as the button image BMG (here, “100%”). Will be suggested.

The “image shown in FIG. 415(c)” according to this example has a different form (here, semi-transparent) from the “integrated image IGa” different from the normal state (the form shown in FIG. 410(a)). It is to be displayed as a represented image IGa'. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 415(c)”, the “integrated image IGa” may be displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 410(a). Alternatively, the “normal button image BMGa” may not be integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and may be displayed as a single image. Even when the “normal button image BMGa” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410(a)) or in the normal mode (FIG. 410(a)). The image may be displayed as an image expressed in a mode (semitransparent in this case) different from the mode shown in FIG.

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 415(c), the “normal button image BMGa” shown in FIG. 410(a) itself or an approximation of the “normal button image BMGa” is approximated. At least the image BMGa′ having the (grooved) outer shape is displayed. Thereby, the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as an "integrated image IGa (Fig. 410(a))" integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", or the "special peripheral decoration image" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that the effective period displayed as the “integrated image IGc (FIG. 410(a))” integrated with the “image SSGb” occurs.

After the image IGa′ (image BMGa′) shown in FIG. 415(c) is displayed, the image IGa′ (image BMGa′) is not the “integrated image IGa (FIG. 410(a))”. , An effect that suggests (remembers) the possibility of being displayed as the “integrated image IGc (FIG. 410(c))” is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 415(d), the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)". The rendered image SSGb'" is depicted as an effect that gradually approaches. As a result of such an effect, “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to “the image IGa′ representing the integrated general image IGa (or the image BMGa′ representing the normal button general image BMGa)” When the images are integrated by adding the image SSGb', an effective period in which the "integrated image IGc (Fig. 410(c))" appears appears. On the other hand, the “image SSGb′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to the “image IGa′ representing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa′ representing the normal button image BMGa)”. If they are not integrated, the effective period in which the "integrated image IGa (Fig. 410(a))" appears appears.

FIG. 415(e) shows an effect situation in which the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 415(d) is performed. There is.

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and suggests that operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a production. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “the image IGa′ representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa′ representing the normal button model image BMGa)” The "image SSGb' representing the special marginal decoration image SSGb" is started while gradually approaching, and at the time when the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is started, "the image IGa' (expressing the integrated image IGa" ( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the “image BMGa′) representing the normal button image BMGa” and the “image SSGb′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” are integrated.

When the effect shown in FIG. 415(e) progresses, whichever of “the image shown in FIG. 415(f)” and “the image shown in FIG. 415(h)” is based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 415(f) and 415(h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned “states and image contents shown in FIG. 413(c)”, and FIG. 415(e) As a result of the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) shown in (1) progressing and the area in which the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed being reduced, the integrated image IG is displayed. A portion that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, and indicates the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a good visual recognition state.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 415(e)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 415(e) appears, and FIG. 415(f) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)", which is the timing that comes before the situation shown in 415(h) appears, it is displayed at least by internal processing (display on layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time point shown in FIGS. 415(f) and 415(h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is the second precursor effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible (or difficult to view) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, with respect to the specific image TG, the entire image overlaps with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed over the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and after the effective period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG cannot be visually recognized or is made difficult to visually recognize by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) Or the target of operation (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the effective period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 415(f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Since it is in a state in which it can be recognized, as a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 415(d) and 415(e), "the image IGa' (or the normal button image BMGa representing the integrated model image IGa is represented. It can be recognized that the image BMGa′)” has failed to be combined with the “image SSGb′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 415(g), the integrated mood image IGa (see FIG. 410(a)). The whole picture of will appear. Since the production progress after that is as described above with reference to FIGS. 413(d) to 413(f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 415(h) appears, it is in a state in which it can be recognized that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated general image IG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. From the result of the effect shown in FIG. 415(d), “the image IGa′ representing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa′ representing the normal button image BMGa)” is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. It is possible to recognize that the connection with the image SSGb′ representing “. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 415(i), the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 410(c)). The whole picture of will appear. After that, the production progress is only that the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 410(a)) is replaced by the integrated model image IGc (see FIG. 410(c)), and FIG. Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the “image shown in FIG. 416(j)” is displayed, there is a high possibility that the “special button image BMGb” is displayed as the button image BMG (here, “100%”). Will be suggested.

The “image shown in FIG. 416(j)” according to this example has a different form (here, semitransparent) from the “integrated image IGb” different from the normal state (the form shown in FIG. 410(b)). It is to be displayed as a represented image IGb'. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 416(j)”, the “integrated image IGb” may be displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 410(b). Alternatively, the “special button image BMGb” may not be integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” but may be displayed as a single image. Even when the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410(b)) or in the normal mode (FIG. 410(b). The image may be displayed as an image expressed in a mode (semitransparent in this case) different from the mode shown in FIG.

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 416(j), the "special button image BMGb" shown in FIG. 410(b) itself or an approximation of the "special button image BMGb" is approximated. At least the image BMGb′ having the (exposed) outer shape is displayed. As a result, the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as an "integrated image IGb (Fig. 410(b))" integrated with the "normal edge decoration image SSGa", or the "special edge decoration image" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that the effective period displayed as “integrated image IGd (FIG. 410(d))” integrated with “image SSGb” occurs.

After the image IGb′ (image BMGb′) shown in FIG. 416(j) is displayed, the image IGb′ (image BMGb′) is not the “integrated image IGb (FIG. 410(b))”. , An effect that suggests (remembers) that it may be displayed as an “integrated image IGd (FIG. 410(d))” is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 415(k), the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to the "image IGb' (or the image BMGb' representing the special button image BMGb) expressing the integrated image IGb"". The rendered image SSGb'" is depicted as an effect that gradually approaches. As a result of such an effect, "the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to the "image IGb' (or the image BMGb' representing the special button image BMGb) expressing the integrated image IGb"" When the images are integrated by adding the “image SSGb′”, an effective period in which the “integrated image IGd (FIG. 410(d))” appears appears. On the other hand, the “image SSGb′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to the “image IGb′ representing the integrated image IGb′ (or the image BMGb′ representing the special button image BMGb)”. If they are not integrated, the effective period in which the "integrated image IGb (Fig. 410(b))" appears appears.

FIG. 416(l) shows an effect situation in which the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 416(k) is performed. There is. The third predictive effect (third specific display) may be executed instead of the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2).

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as an effect that suggests that. The second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “the image IGb′ (or the image BMGb′ that expresses the special button image BMGb) that represents the integrated image IGb”. The "image SSGb' representing the special marginal decoration image SSGb" is started in the course of gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, "the image IGb'(representing the integrated image IGb' ( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the “image BMGb′) representing the special button image BMGb” and the “image SSGb′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” are integrated.

When the effect shown in FIG. 416(l) progresses, whichever of the "image shown in FIG. 416(m)" and the "image shown in FIG. 416(o)" is based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

The situation and image contents shown in FIGS. 416(m) and 416(o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned “situation and image contents shown in FIG. 413(c)”, and FIG. 416(l) As a result of the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) shown in (1) progressing and the area in which the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed being reduced, the integrated image IG is displayed. A portion that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, and indicates the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a good visual recognition state.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 416(l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 416(l) appears, and FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)", which is the timing that comes before the situation shown in 416(o) appears, at least internal processing is displayed (display on layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 416(m) or FIG. 416(o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is the second precursor effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible (or difficult to view) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, with respect to the specific image TG, the entire image overlaps with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed over the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and after the effective period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG cannot be visually recognized or is made difficult to visually recognize by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) Or the target of operation (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the effective period.

In this respect, when the situation shown in FIG. 416(m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Since it is in a state in which it can be recognized, as a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 416(k) and (l), “the image IGb′ (or the special button image BMGb representing the integrated image IGb is expressed. It can be recognized that the "image BMGb')" has failed to be combined with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 416(n), the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 410(b)). The whole picture of will appear. The production progress thereafter is only that the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 410(a)) is replaced by the integrated model image IGb (see FIG. 410(b)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 416(o) appears, it is in a state in which it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated general image IG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. Therefore, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 416(k), "the image IGb' (or the image BMGb' representing the special button image BMGb) representing the integrated image IGb" is "the special peripheral decoration image SSGb. It is possible to recognize that the connection with the image SSGb′ representing “. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 416(p), the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 410(d)). The whole picture of will appear. After that, the production progress is only that the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 410(a)) is replaced by the integrated model image IGd (see FIG. 410(d)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, when FIG. 415(c) appears, the probability that the “special button image BMGb” appears as the button image BMG is set to “0%”, but as the button image BMG. The probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 415(e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 415(f)→(g), (h)→(i), FIG. 416(m)→(n), ( There is a possibility that the production progress is executed in the form of o)→(p).

According to such a configuration, in which mode the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed at the time when FIGS. 415(f) and (h) and FIGS. 416(m) and (o) appear. Although recognizable, it is not possible to recognize in what mode the button image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is suggested step by step according to the situation related to the progress of the second predictive presentation (the second specific display TH2), and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. .. In particular, when the button image BMG can indicate any one of a plurality of operation means having different operation targets depending on the display mode, the effective period has started and the operation-related expectation level is also indicated. In spite of the situation, the state in which it is impossible to recognize which of the operation targets is generated occurs, so that it is possible to significantly improve the degree of attention to the effect.

However, even in the situation shown in FIGS. 415(f) and (h) and FIGS. 416(m) and (o), the button is not available on the operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated by the player. It is desirable that the light is emitted in a mode according to the type displayed as the simulated image BMG (for example, light is emitted from the time when the effective period occurs). With such a configuration, a person who has a high motivation to operate, who tends to directly see the operation means (operation receiving unit), can quickly recognize the “type displayed as the button image BMG”. Therefore, it becomes possible to encourage the player to operate.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the first predictive effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 414(a) may be changed to the situation shown in FIG. 415(c) or FIG. 416(j).

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, even if the situation shown in FIGS. 415(d) and 416(k) is changed to the situation shown in FIGS. 415(g) and (i) and FIGS. 416(n) and (p), Good. That is, in this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 415(d) and 416(k) functions as a precursor effect. The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may have already decreased at the time of transition, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have decreased. When the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, when the gauge image is in the situation shown in FIGS. 415(d) and 416(k). (Predetermined image) GG will start to decrease its display area.

Further, some of the effects of FIGS. 414 to 416 may be omitted depending on the mode prepared as the integrated image IG. For example, when the modes shown in FIGS. 410(b) and 410(d) are not prepared as the integrated image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 416. At this time, this may be omitted from FIG. 415(c).

In addition, in the effects of FIGS. 414 to 416, the image BMG′ (or the button image BMG itself) expressing the button image BMG is provided before the operation acceptance is permitted (before the valid period occurs). (OK) is displayed (FIG. 415(d), FIG. 416(k)), but in the situation (before the valid period occurs), an image BMG′ (or a button image BMG) representing the button image BMG is displayed. Is not dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving section is displaced within the movable range. With such a configuration, even if the button image BMG and the image BMG′ representing the button image BMG′ are displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period, the effective period has not yet occurred. By implicitly suggesting, the player can concentrate on the production without worrying about the remaining time of the effective period. Since the reception of the production is permitted when the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) is being performed, it is difficult to visually recognize the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2). Then, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed.

FIG. 417 to FIG. 421 are diagrams showing an example of the production progress when the second effective period occurs among the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

That is, in FIGS. 413 to 416, an effective period (first effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is generated. Regarding the case, the example related to the production progress has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 417 to 421, whether the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or whether the precursor effect (specific display) is displayed. In the case where an effective period (second effective period) occurs without being interrupted, an example of the production progress will be described.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, basically, when a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs, a predetermined predictive presentation (precursor display) is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG” within the effective period. In order to make the feature stand out when performing the effect, a predetermined precursor effect (predictive display) itself is not performed when the effective period occurs, or even if a predetermined predictive presentation (predictive display) is performed, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not been reduced yet and has reached the maximum value when the entire display target area is made visible.

Here, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 411 to 416, etc.), the gauge image GG is displayed when the operation is not performed within the valid period. When the effective area ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), “the operation is not performed within the effective period and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are performed. Despite that, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) at the end of the valid period, and has a predetermined display area. The first display mode" can be mentioned. According to such a configuration, even if it seems that a lot of time remains until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player Becomes aware of the possibility that the effective period will be abruptly ended, so that it becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension during the effective period.

In addition, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 411 to 416, etc.), the gauge image GG reduces the display area every unit time within the effective period. However, it is possible to cite “a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the valid period”. According to such a configuration, even when it seems that there is only a short remaining time until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player keeps the gauge. It becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

That is, in the example described below, a “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” using at least one of such “first display mode” and “second display mode”. The example of a display when executing is shown.

First, in FIG. 417(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is rendered in the second effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. The production situation being performed on the display device 1600 is shown.

417(b), during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 417(a), an effective period during which operation acceptance for the operation means (operation receiving unit) is permitted occurs, and the effect display device 1600 appears. The integrated situation image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 417(b), at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value and is not yet reduced. ..

Further, when the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic" is executed within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is " It is set longer than the time (set time) set for the valid period (first valid period) in which the "display mode having characteristics of movement of gauge image GG" is not executed. This is nothing but the time required to execute the display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a feature within the effective period. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the first valid period in which the “display mode having a feature in the movement of the gauge image GG” is not executed and the “movement of the gauge image GG”. Despite the difference in the set time until the effective period ends with the second effective period in which the "display mode having the characteristics of" is executed, whether the integrated image IG itself is the same, The images are displayed in a form having a similar relationship (in this example, the integrated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic" is not executed, and "the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic" It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different between the second effective period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the amount of time in the situation where the display area is not reduced is displayed. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

When the effect situation shown in FIG. 417(b) occurs, a precursor effect suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed at the time when the entire integrated image IG (at least the "display area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated image IG") is displayed without overlapping the precursor effect. Is the maximum value, and it is required to be in a situation where it has not yet been reduced.

That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state (within the valid period) in which the operation acceptance regarding the predetermined post-operation display and the predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted. When the effect status shown in FIG. 417(c) appears after a predetermined time has elapsed from the effect status shown in FIG. 417(b), the gauge image GG shows the previous status. The display area is maintained in a state where the display area corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time) is reduced, and the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is started.

As shown in FIGS. 417(c) and 417(d), such a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is set to continue for a predetermined time after the period is generated. Is becoming However, even in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, the operation reception is maintained in an allowable state, and when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is operated, the effective period is concerned. Is terminated, and the integrated image IG is hidden, and after-operation display and after-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 417(g)).

According to such a configuration, “a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” appears within the effective period, so that the display area of the gauge image GG is continuously reduced at a constant speed. Thus, it becomes possible to suggest that there is a margin in the remaining time until the expiration of the effective period.

Further, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained in an allowable state, so that it is possible to give an image as if the effective period is extended. Therefore, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game when the valid period is occurring.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 417(c) and 417(d), in the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the decorative pattern SZ that has been displayed until then is in a non-display state or is difficult to visually recognize. The state is set so as to prompt the user to pay attention to the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic".

However, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that an image in the display screen suddenly becomes stationary, that is, a so-called “freeze effect” occurs. That is, since the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined time period and the state cannot be released, a false recognition that operation acceptance is no longer permitted However, it is feared that the player's motivation for operation may be lost and the interest in the game may be deteriorated. In particular, in this example, since the decorative pattern SZ is set in a non-display state or a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, this may also lead to erroneous recognition that operation acceptance is no longer permitted.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated image IG itself is not in a stationary state but the integrated image IG itself when the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept stationary, while the button image BMG included in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (the displacement of the operation receiving portion in the movable range is depicted. Display) is continued.

With such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button image BMG is continued, a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, so that the operation acceptance is not allowed ( It is possible to suppress the possibility that the freeze effect is erroneously recognized), and it is expected that the player's motivation for operation is appropriately maintained.

Here, the dynamic display by the button image BMG is executed as a display in which a predetermined operation (an operation of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiving portion, etc.) is repeated. In this respect, during the effective period (first effective period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the setting is performed. While the predetermined operation by the button image BMG is executed as a display that is repeated n times until the time ends, the indication effect (specific display) is not executed or the indication effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. During the effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time of (2nd effective period shown in FIG. 417 to FIG. 421), “the display area of the gauge image GG decreases during the set time”. It is desirable that the predetermined operation by the button image BMG can be executed as a display that is repeated m (>n) times only within the “non-executed period”.

With such a configuration, when the state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced for a time longer than the first effective period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 and the like. Since the state that is not performed continues, even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and it takes time to grasp the situation, you will have sufficient time to operate it. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately. Note that, as an effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, an effective period different from the first effective period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 or the like. If a period (one that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is prepared, than the longest one of each time (set time) set for those effective periods, Of the second valid periods shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 and the like, it is desirable that the number of times of the predetermined operation by the button image BMG is increased in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. ..

Then, as described above, at the time when such a second effective period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and the display area thereof has a predetermined maximum value. It is displayed (FIG. 417(b)). However, at this time, as shown in FIG. 412, when the specific image TG is displayed in a good visual recognition state in the display target area of the gauge image GG, the specific image TG is displayed. However, it may seem that the display area of the gauge image GG is decreasing, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 411, if the specific image TG may appear in a visually good state as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG may be displayed. It becomes clear that it does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated by exaggerating the length of the remaining time as the effective period.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second effective period. Therefore, even if the display area of the gauge image GG is started to decrease from the situation shown in FIG. 417(b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed in the state where the specific image TG is not displayed. When is reduced to a predetermined value, "a period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 417(c) and 417(d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the player's operation, the gauge image GG reduces its display area again. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or is in a state in which it is easily visible. After that, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 417(e)), the time set for the second valid period (set time) increases. As a result, the second valid period ends, and the operation-related image including the integrated image IG is hidden (FIG. 417(f)). Note that, here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is “0”, that is, when the gauge image GG is not displayed (FIG. 417(e)), the time set for the second valid period (set time) is up. Then, the second effective period is ended, and at the same time, the operation-related image including the integrated image IG is hidden (FIG. 417(f)).

As described above, in the second valid period, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation acceptance (FIG. 417(f)), the same operation as when the operation acceptance is performed within the second valid period. The rear display and the post-operation sound output are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions), and this point is also different from the first effective period. However, instead, in the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation acceptance is permitted in the display period in the stopped state. Since it is as described above, it can be said that the situation itself in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be performed in itself is difficult to occur. .

In the example shown in FIG. 417, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, the gauge image GG is usually predetermined within the effective period (see FIGS. 411 to 416). The case where the "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the valid period" is applied to the case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed has been described. However, as described above, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 411 to 416, etc.), when the operation is not performed within the valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed. When the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the valid period ends. “No operation is performed within the valid period and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. Nevertheless, at the time when the valid period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) and has a predetermined display area. The first display mode" may be further applied. When adopting such a method, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing the method in any of the modes shown in FIGS. 418 and 419 or the modes shown in FIGS. 420 and 421. Is more desirable.

418 and 419 are diagrams showing an example of the production progress when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

The situations shown in FIGS. 418(a)-(d) are the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 417(a)-(d) and other examples thereof. Therefore, also in this example, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second effective period, and the period including the period is in the second effective period. When the operation is accepted, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 419(g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the player, the gauge image GG is made to reduce the display area again. It is never displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is continued until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (a predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 418(d) and 419(e). In this state, the operation related image including the integrated image IG is hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or is in a state in which it is easily visible.

As described above, also in the second valid period according to this example, if the set time elapses without receiving the operation acceptance (FIG. 419(e)), the operation acceptance is performed within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at that time are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions). However, instead, the second valid period according to this example also displays the gauge image GG in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and operates during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, acceptance is allowed.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case), and the second effective period is set with the display area for the predetermined value remaining. Since the player is attempting to end the game, the player may not be able to operate it despite the intention of operating it, and the second valid period may end, which lowers the interest of the player. I have a concern. Therefore, in this example, after the second effective period ends without being operated by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop, or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is satisfied. While not operating, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means given the operation opportunity within the second effective period, and the operation means is provided. When the operation is accepted, the second valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second valid period ends without the player's operation, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period starts from the time when the second valid period ends. Can be said.

According to such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the predetermined set time having passed without the player's operation, the player's operation shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting the after-operation display and the after-operation sound output shown in ). More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 419(e), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is performed based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The effective period is started from the initial state (FIG. 419(f)). After that, the contents as described above will be repeated again with reference to FIGS. 418(b) to (d), 419(e), and (g). Therefore, even when the operation is accepted within the second effective period regenerated in this manner, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 419(g)). ).

When the operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 419(e), the image shown in FIG. 419(f) (the same as the image shown in FIG. 418(b)) appears as the post-operation display. It will be. Such an image is not displayed after the operation performed based on the operation reception during the second valid period (FIGS. 418(b) to (d) and FIG. 419(f)). It is different. In addition, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the reception of the operation during the special effective period shown in FIG. 419(e) is similarly performed in the second effective period (FIGS. 418(b) to (d) and FIG. 419(f)), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the reception of the operation.

FIG. 420 and FIG. 421 are diagrams showing a modification example of the effect development when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 420(a) is the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 417(a) and 418(a) and other examples thereof. However, in this example, when the second effective period occurs and the integrated display image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. The "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs from the time when the integrated image IG is displayed for a predetermined time (FIGS. 420(b) and (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG has the maximum display area. It will be maintained as it is.

It should be noted that the operation acceptance is allowed even when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG or the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The configuration and progress in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” such as the execution of the rear sound output are the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 417 to 419 and the other examples thereof. ..

Also in this example, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 418 and 419, “the display area of the gauge image GG decreases until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. It is designed to continue for "the period that is not done". Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (maximum value), as shown in FIGS. 420(c) and 421(d). In this state, the operation-related image including the integrated image IG is hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or is in a state in which it is easily visible.

In this way, even during the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation acceptance (FIG. 421(d)), the operation acceptance is performed within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at that time are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions). However, instead, the second valid period according to this example also displays the gauge image GG in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and operates during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, acceptance is allowed.

However, also in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until the display area reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the second effective period remains with the display area for the maximum value remaining. As a result, the player side may not be able to operate despite the intention of operating it and the second valid period may end, which lowers the interest of the game. I have a concern. Therefore, also in this example, after the second effective period ends without being operated by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is satisfied. While not being operated, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means given the operation opportunity within the second effective period. When the operation is received, the second valid period can be generated again based on the received operation. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period occurs.

With such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the predetermined set time having elapsed without the player's operation, the player's operation shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting the after-operation display and the after-operation sound output shown in ). More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 421(d), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is performed based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The effective period is started from the initial state (FIG. 421(e)). After that, the contents as described above will be repeated again with reference to FIGS. 420(b), (c), 421(d), and (f). Therefore, even if the operation is accepted within the second effective period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 421(f)). ).

However, in this example, even when the second effective period is regenerated in this way, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs from the time of the reoccurrence, so that FIG. 421(e) In the situation shown in (1), the decorative pattern SZ is hidden or made difficult to visually recognize.

That is, the “image shown in FIG. 421(e)” that appears as the post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 421(d) is the “image shown in FIG. 420(b)”. Is the same as. Such an image is displayed after the operation (FIG. 421(f), which is executed based on the operation acceptance in the second effective period (FIG. 420(b), (c), FIG. 421(d), etc.). )) is different from the image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation reception during the special effective period shown in FIG. 421(d) is also the second effective period (FIGS. 420(b), (c) and FIG. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 421(f)) executed based on the operation reception in 421(d) or the like.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 420 and 421, the entire period from the start to the end of the second effective period functions as the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any situation.

Note that in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 419(e) or FIG. 421(d), the integrated image IG may be displayed as in the second effective period. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output that are generated according to the operation are different effective periods (second effective period, special effective period), the second effective period and the special effective period are different from each other. It is preferable that at least one of the display position and the size of the integrated image IG differs from the effective period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second effective period, the integrated mock image IG in the mode corresponding to the second effective period is hidden, and the integrated mood image IG in the mode corresponding to the special effective period is newly added. Will be displayed in. When the integrated image IG is displayed during the special effective period, "a period during which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated within the effective period, or "a period during which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced". May not be generated.

The "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 is executable when the integrated image IGa of the integrated image IGa to IGd is displayed. It is preferable that the integrated image images IGb to IGd are not executed when the integrated image images IGb to IGd are displayed. That is, the integrated image IGa is displayed as a mode with the lowest expectation, but when the integrated image IGa is displayed, the movement of the gauge image GG shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 is displayed. Since there is a possibility that "a display mode having a feature" will appear, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 418 to 421, when the operation related image (integrated image IG or the like) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, it is determined by the player. Even if a situation occurs in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of a predetermined set period (second effective period) having passed without any operation being performed, operation reception occurs and the display changes (or , Post-operation sound output). More specifically, even if the predetermined set period (second effective period) has ended, if the operation receiving portion (operation means) that has been prompted to be operated by the integrated image IG until then is operated. A predetermined set period (second effective period) can be regenerated, and operation acceptance is allowed during the regenerated predetermined set period (second effective period) (Fig. 419(e), (f) and FIGS. 421(d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined setting period (second effective period) has ended without understanding the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” can be understood. Since the predetermined set period (second effective period) can be regenerated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

On the other hand, during a predetermined set period (first effective period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is not displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic", the operation is not accepted. Even after the predetermined setting period (first effective period) ends without being operated, even if the operation receiving unit (operation means) that has been prompted to be operated by the integrated image IG until then is operated, the predetermined setting period The (second effective period) is not regenerated (FIGS. 413 to 416).

In addition, about the predetermined setting period (second effective period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, the symbol variation is not always required. Does not have to occur during the execution period of. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of whether or not there is a symbol change, or during the period during which the big hit game is executed or the period before the big hit game is started, "the period when the symbol change is not executed. ] May occur at the same time.

Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 413 to 421, a longer time is set in the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421) than in the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416). However, the integrated image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship between the first effective period and the second effective period (in the above example, the integrated effective image IG itself is displayed). The chemical image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG has the same display area). When the integrated image IG is displayed in a form having a similar relationship, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button image is the same, so that the set time (set time) is set. Are expected to appear to be the same in length. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic" is not executed, and "the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic" It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different between the second effective period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the amount of time in the situation where the display area is not reduced is displayed. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

When displaying the integrated image IG in a similar relationship between the first effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416) and the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421), a “gauge image” is displayed. In the second effective period in which the “display mode having a characteristic of the motion of GG” appears, it is desirable to display the integrated image IG smaller than the first effective period.

Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 413 to 421, in the first effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416 ), if the operation is not accepted, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) has a specific value (here, “ 0"), the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than a specific value in the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421) if no operation is received. Will be terminated. That is, if the time (set time) set for the effective period is long, the sense of tension during the effective period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) has a specific value (here, " By setting the possibility that the effective period may end even if it does not become “0”), it is expected that the feeling of tension is appropriately maintained.

Further, according to the above-described example, when the integrated effect image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced (first effective period) while the omen effect is being performed, the omen When the integrated effect image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the indication effect is performed but the indication effect is performed (second effective) The image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG is different for each period. In this case, the modes of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. "The indication effect is performed, but the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the indication effect is performed", as illustrated in FIG. 420 and FIG. 421. This means that the display area of GG is not reduced.

In this respect, according to the above-described example, during the first effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416 ), the specific image TG is displayed, and the specific image TG is displayed when the set time elapses without any operation being performed. Although it is displayed, in the second effective period (FIGS. 418 to 421), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display The target area) is displayed. With such a configuration, in the first effective period, it is possible to make the effective period look longer by the amount of the specific image TG displayed at the end of the effective period, and in the second effective period. By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the effective period, it is possible to maintain the sense of tension by making the effective period end appear earlier than the player's assumption. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, in the second effective period, a large amount of the display area of the gauge image GG (display target region) remains (at least an area larger than half the maximum value) at the end of the effective period. It is desirable to do so.

Further, according to the above-described example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a mode in which the display area is reduced per unit time during the entire first effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416). However, the display area is not reduced during the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421). Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the feeling of tension is appropriately maintained.

Further, according to the above-described example, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced during both the first effective period and the second effective period. However, while the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first effective period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode in the second effective period. The display is performed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, although the button image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG) in the example described above. , When the button image BMG in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed, when the gauge image GG is in a reduced state and when the gauge image GG is not in a reduced state. I have to Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, it is preferable that the operation reception is allowed by the dynamic display of the button image BMG as the integrated image IG. You will be able to suggest.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, only when the normal button image BMGa and the special button image BMGb are displayed as the normal button image BMGa, the "characteristic of movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized. It is possible to display the “display mode that the user has”. Further, when the normal button image BMGa is displayed, not only the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG display characteristic display mode" may be displayed, but also the "gauge image (predetermined image)" is displayed. There is a case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a mode (normal mode) in which the "display mode characterizing the movement of the GG" is not displayed and the special button image BMGb is displayed. I did. Therefore, it is expected to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the normal button image BMGa having a lower expectation than the special button image BMGb is displayed.

Particularly, in the second effective period shown in FIGS. 420 and 421, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the mode (color or the like) in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. However, only one mode is displayed. That is, in this case, although the remaining time indicating function and the expectation indicating function are lost due to the gauge image GG itself and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The integrated image IG formed with is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is statically displayed (in the area invariant mode) in the integrated image IG. With such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second effective period is not an image indicating the remaining time or the degree of expectation, but functions only as a decoration image in the integrated image IG. Therefore, the function of the gauge image GG can be greatly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed within the first effective period, and the variety of the representation as the gauge image GG improves the enjoyment of the game. Will be expected.

Note that the first valid period and the second valid period may have different occurrence conditions. For example, it may occur at different timings within one symbol variation period. Further, the first valid period means a period in which the operation acceptance regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and the second valid period is the first valid period. It means a period during which the operation acceptance regarding the second post-operation display different from the post-operation display and the second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and within each period. The reactions (display change, sound output) that appear when an operation is accepted in are different from each other.

Also, regarding the integrated image IG,
After the start of the indication effect (specific display TH), from the time when the indication effect in the display state and the “integrated image IG” overlap each other, the display area of the gauge image GG per unit time A reduced mode (FIGS. 413 to 416),
The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap at least even if the precursor effect is displayed. Aspect (FIGS. 417 to 421)
So that there is According to such a configuration, whether the display area is already reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured as a result of the indication effect, or whether the indication effect is performed or not. In some cases, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is visually recognizable, and the enjoyment is provided by using the visibility of the gauge image GG. Will be able to.

In particular, when a mode (FIGS. 417 to 421) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is visible regardless of whether or not the indication effect is performed is adopted. As long as the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can appear even within the valid period, it is possible to further increase the gaze on the gauge image GG.

It should be noted that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the indication effect is not displayed or when the indication effect in the display state and the “integrated image IG” overlap at least even if the indication effect is started to be displayed. In the case of adopting the mode (FIGS. 417 to 421) which is not performed, in addition to the case where the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears within the effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421), There may be a case where the display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421) in which the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease appears is the second condition, the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease The occurrence condition of the specific effective period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above-described example, during the period in which the button image BMG is displayed, there may be a case where the display for reducing the display area of the gauge image GG is performed according to the passage of time and a case where the display is not performed. did. When the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may be hidden within the effective period. Nevertheless, with respect to the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first effective period in which the display area is reduced to be displayed as time elapses, but also the second display area is not reduced as time elapses. Since it is displayed even during the effective period, it is expected to suitably suggest that the production reception is allowed.

In the above-described example, the display for reducing the display area with the passage of time is not performed by the gauge image GG, and the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) elapses. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function will not be activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is activated in some cases, the feeling of tension due to the fact that the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image GG may be completely lost. With respect to (), it is desirable that the automatic reception function is not activated (in any performance mode). On the other hand, regarding the above-described first effective period, it is desirable to enable the automatic reception function (in any presentation mode).

Further, when the display method in which the button image BMG and the gauge GG are separately displayed and only the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is pursued, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. In that case, even if it is the gauge image GG, a great sense of incongruity is felt that the remaining time suggesting function is not exerted. In this respect, in the above-mentioned configuration, the button image BMG is displayed as the image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, a pattern can be seen on the back side of the gauge image GG, or the gauge image GG itself can be provided with a plurality of colors. Since this itself becomes decorative in the integrated image IG, it seems that it is expected to suppress an uncomfortable feeling when the situation in which the remaining time suggesting function of the gauge image GG is not exhibited. become.

By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, prior to the occurrence of the first effective period, a mode with low expectation (normal button image BMGa) and a mode with high expectancy as the “button image BMG”. (Direction image SMG) with a low expectation (normal margin decoration image SSGa) and high expectations (special margin decoration image) SSGb) and the performance of which one appears will be made to appear in stages. However, such performance can also be made to appear by the method described below.

FIG. 422 is a view for explaining a modified example of the effect in which the expected degree of the integrated image IG is suggested stepwise.

First, in FIG. 422(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is rendered in the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. The production situation being performed on the display device 1600 is shown.

422(b), during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 422(a), an effective period during which operation acceptance for the operation means (operation receiving unit) is permitted occurs, and the effect display device 1600 appears. The button situation image BMG is displayed.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 422(b), the button image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "periphery decoration image SGG", but remains displayed alone. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 422(b), the button image BMG is displayed in either a mode with low expectations (normal button image BMGa) or a mode with high expectations (special button image BMGb). It provides an effect of whether or not to be performed. In the figure, a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation (special button image BMGb) appears is illustrated. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

422(c) shows an effect situation in which the special button image BMGb shown in FIG. 422(b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 422(c) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the button image BMG (normal button image BMGa, special button image BMGb) shown in FIG. 422(b) is valid without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG (first valid period). ) Is prepared, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 422(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 422(c) and becomes effective after the integrated image IG is obtained. Whether the period (first effective period) is generated, or the effective period (first effective period) is generated without performing the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422(c) and becoming the integrated image IG. You will be able to provide some fun about what you do. When the valid period (first valid period) occurs without becoming the integrated model image IG, the gauge image GG is displayed as an image different from the button model image BMG, and has, for example, a rod shape (linear shape). The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced in the divided area of ). In this case, it is desirable not to display the specific image TG.

In addition, when the effective period occurs after the button image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, it is expected to be stopped with a big hit symbol than when the effective period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable to increase the degree (rate). 422(c) when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422(b) than in the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422(b). ) It is desirable that the ratio be integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG to be high as a result of progressing to the situation shown in FIG. The ratio may include “100%” and “0%”.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422(c), the button image BMG has a marginal decoration image with a low expectation (normal marginal decoration image BMGa) and a marginal decoration image with a high expectation (special margin decoration). Image BMGb) is provided with the effect of being integrated, and in the figure, a case in which a mode with a high expectation (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears is illustrated. .. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

Note that, for convenience of explanation, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) according to this example has a different image type from that shown in each of the examples (FIGS. 410 to 422) described above. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button image BMG, and a heart-shaped pattern (omitted in the drawing) is usually applied to the peripheral decoration image BMGa. On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a check pattern is applied. Then, among the areas provided with these patterns, the “area from the upper right to the lower left” is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 422(c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated, and as a meaning in terms of illustration, It is the same as 410(d).

422(d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated black image IGd shown in FIG. 422(c).

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 422(d) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated general image IG (integrated general image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 422(c). If the mode in which the occurrence occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production is progressed from the situation shown in FIG. 422(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 422(d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Whether the period (first effective period) occurs, or the effective period (first effective period) does not occur without the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422(d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. You will be able to provide some fun as to what happens.

When the effective period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated image IG, the effective period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (percentage) of stopping with a big hit symbol is higher than in the case. 422(b) when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422(b) or when the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422(c). 422 (d) rather than the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in (4) or the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). It is desirable to increase the proportion of the first additional decoration HS1 added. The ratio may include “100%” and “0%”.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422(d), the first additional decoration HS1 is provided with a performance as to whether the first additional decoration HS1 is added with a mode with low expectations or a mode with high expectations. You may do so.

FIG. 422(e) shows a rendering situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated black image IGd shown in FIG. 422(d).

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 422(e) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated general image IG (integrated general image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 422(d). If the mode in which the occurrence occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progress is performed from the situation shown in FIG. 422(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 422(e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Whether the period (first effective period) occurs, or the effective period (first effective period) without the second additional decoration HS2 being added without effecting the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422(e) You will be able to provide some fun as to what happens.

When the effective period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated image IG, the effective period occurs without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (percentage) of stopping with a big hit symbol is higher than in the case. 422(b) when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422(b) or when the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422(c). 422(e) rather than the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 22 and the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422(c). It is desirable to increase the proportion of the second additional decoration HS2 added. The ratio may include “100%” and “0%”.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 422(e), the second additional decoration HS2 is provided with a directivity as to whether the second additional decoration HS2 is added with a low expectation or a high expectation. You may do so.

422(f) shows an effect situation in which the effective period (first effective period) has occurred in the state where the integrated black image IGd shown in FIG. 422(e) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 422(f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, operation instruction images such as "press" and "down arrow" are displayed. In addition to this, the above-described specific image TG is displayed in the display target region of the gauge image GG, and the operation acceptance is permitted even by checking the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. Note that the specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from that shown in each of the examples (FIGS. 410 to 422) described above for convenience of description, but is basically the same. It is displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example is a depiction of a frog character, and the character is displaced in accordance with the “end portion of the gauge image GG” that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases. Will be done.

It should be noted that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed by the same method as the example shown in FIG. 411 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the effective period and is gradually displayed as time passes). Alternatively, the display may be performed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 412 (a method in which the whole is displayed when the effective period starts).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422(f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low-expectation mode (snail character) or a high-expectation mode (frog character) that is not shown. The performance is provided as to whether or not it is performed. In the drawing, the case where a mode with a high degree of expectation appears is illustrated. The specific image TG is displayed with a higher expectation when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422(d) than when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422(c). The ratio is high, and the expectation is higher when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422(e) than when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422(d). It is desirable to increase the display ratio of the specific image TG. The ratio may include “100%” and “0%”.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a drama about how far the operation-related image can be advanced to a mode with high expectations before the effective period occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game regarding the operation in the state where the effective period has not yet occurred. Further, while the operation-related images (button image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decorations HS1, 2) are used to indicate the degree of expectation before the effective period occurs, after the effective period occurs, Since the different image (specific image TG) is used to further indicate the degree of expectation, it is possible to favorably improve the interest over a period from before the effective period occurs until after the effective period occurs. Become.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 422, the timing of whether the production progresses from FIG. 422(b) to FIG. 422(c) or the production progress from FIG. 422(c) to FIG. 422(d). At the timing of whether or not to perform, or at the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 422(d) to FIG. 422(e), operation-related images (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) are displayed. It may be hidden once. That is, in this case, when the operation-related image (button image, marginal decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, it is possible to provide the fun of whether the production has progressed or whether the effective period has occurred. Will be able to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 422, at the stage before the occurrence of the effective period, the button image, the peripheral decoration image, the additional decoration and the like are displayed in the same manner as during the effective period, but a different mode from this. It may be displayed (blinking or semi-transparent).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 422, it is desirable that the time required to suggest the degree of expectation stepwise by the operation-related image before the occurrence of the effective period is longer than the set time for the effective period. .

By the way, the sword decoration 5001 according to the present embodiment includes a “handle 5012” that can be moved (moved up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020 and a “handle” that can be moved (moved up and down) with respect to the handle 5012. As described above, the two operation receiving portions for the button 5014" are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a valid condition (operation acceptance performance) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 is generated, the valid period (operation In the reception effect), both the “pattern image TMG” that imitates the pattern portion 5012 and the “button image BMG” that imitates the pattern button 5014 are to be displayed. During the effective period (operation reception performance) in which the operation opportunity is given to the design part 5012, the operation reception for the pattern button 5014 is not permitted, and the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the design button 5014 (operation reception performance) ), operation acceptance for the handle portion 5012 is not allowed.

In such a configuration, when an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 occurs, whether operation acceptance for the handle 5012 is permitted, or operation acceptance for the handle button 5014 is permitted. Can be difficult to recognize whether is allowed. That is, when the operation is accepted during the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the operation is performed after the operation is received, as compared with the time when the operation is accepted in the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5014. The appearance rate of the mode that suggests that the big hit symbol is stopped as display (or the mode that suggests that the big hit symbol is stopped as post-operation sound output) is high. The ratio may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation reception for the handle 5012 is permitted or the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is permitted, and the operation acceptance for the handle 5012 is permitted. When the player recognizes, the handle portion 5012 is operated in an uplifting feeling, and the interest of the game can be significantly improved.

In order to obtain such an operation effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception for the handle 5012 is permitted or the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effective period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the handle portion 5012 (the light emitting portion of the handle portion) is caused to emit light. The handle button 5014 (the light emitting portion of the handle button 5014) to which the operation opportunity is not given is made to emit light. That is, in this case, in the effective period (operation reception performance) in which both the “pattern image TMG” that imitates the pattern part 5012 and the “button imitative image BMG” that imitates the pattern button 5014 are displayed, the pattern part 5012 is displayed. Even if the user or the pattern button 5014 is directly visually inspected, it is difficult to recognize which of the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014 the operation opportunity is given. In such a situation, the player becomes aware that the operation acceptance for the handle 5012 is permitted, so that the player can operate the handle 5012 while feeling uplifted. Can be significantly improved.

That is, in the effective period (operation acceptance performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the design part 5012, the design part 5012 and the design button 5014 can be directly viewed or the performance display device 1600 can be seen a little. It is difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity is given to 5012 or the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. At least from a person who has played the pachinko machine 1 for the first time (beginner) or a person who is not familiar with complicated performance specifications (such as an elderly person), an operation opportunity is given to either the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the "effective period during which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given" is generated, It is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given within the effective period, but it is possible to recognize if a certain amount of time is required. Then, the button image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed respectively.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012, the “pattern image TMG” that the pattern portion 5012 is used, and the pattern button 5014 are used. Both of the "button image BMG" which is used to display the "button image BMG" are displayed respectively, but the "pattern image TMG" on the side of which the operation reception is permitted is dynamically displayed, but the operation reception is performed. The "button image BMG" on the side where is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. The “dynamic display” here is, for example, a display depicting a state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced within its movable range (in the case of the handle portion 5012, an operation (up and down movement) with respect to the sheath portion 5020). This corresponds to the drawn display, and if it is the pattern button 5014, it corresponds to the displayed display of the operation (up and down) of the pattern portion 5012).

Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given within the effective period. However, when a predetermined time enough to be recognized as a dynamic display (moving image) has elapsed, the behavior during operation appears as a dynamic display in the pattern image TMG, but the behavior during operation in the button image BMG. It becomes possible to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given, since it is noticed that is not displayed as a dynamic display. Then, when the player recognizes that the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) on the side with high expectation is allowed to accept the operation, he/she operates the handle portion 5012 while feeling uplifted. As a result, it becomes possible to significantly improve the enjoyment of games.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case where the “pattern image TMG” and the “button image BMG” are displayed during the effective period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012. Also, by displaying these mood images as "integrated muffled images" that are integrated with the marginal decoration image SSG that decorates their margins, the enjoyment of the game when the operation reception effect (effective period) occurs I am trying to. The function and modified example of such an integrated image are basically as described above. For example, even if the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 410 to 422 is displayed so as to further display (include) the “pattern model image TMG” in addition to the “button model image BMG”. Good.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “button image BMG” and the “pattern image TMG” are displayed as a “composite image HMG” that is obtained by at least a part of the sword decoration 5001. In this way, the "composite image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated image IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery.

FIG. 423 is a diagram illustrating an example of the “integrated image IG” displayed when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for the handle 5012.

As shown in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 is generated. In the effect display device 1600, in the effect display device 1600, the “composite image TMG” imitating the pattern portion 5012 is made into a “composite mood image HMG” integrated with the “button mood image BMG”, and then the “composite mood image” is obtained. The "image HMG" is displayed as integrated general images IGe to IGh that are integrated with the rim decoration image SSG that decorates the rim. In the example shown in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d), the "pattern image TMG", the "button image BMG", and the "rim decoration image SSG" are not individually prepared as image data, and they are not prepared. The image data is displayed as one integrated image data (integrated image images IGe to IGh). In addition, when the integrated image images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompting displays such as “push in” and “lower left arrow” are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of description.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “relatively” as an after-operation effect that is executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. A plurality of effect modes including "a first effect mode with a low expectation degree" and a "second effect mode with a relatively high expectation degree" are prepared, and these effect modes are produced based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). One of the aspects is executed. In this respect, in the example shown in FIGS. 423(a) to (d),
The mode (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 423(b) is more than the mode (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 423(a) in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). When appears, the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” becomes higher as a post-operation effect,
423(c) (integrated image IGg) shown in FIG. 423(b) in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) rather than when the aspect (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 423(b) appears. When appears, the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” becomes higher as a post-operation effect,
The mode (integrated image IGh) shown in FIG. 423(d) is more than the mode (integrated image IGg) shown in FIG. 423(c) in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). Based on the result of the big hit judgment (production judgment), the relationship that the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation performance when Any one of the chemical images IGe to IGf is displayed.

It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as the integrated image images IGe to IGh. Even by preparing at least two modes, it is possible to suggest the expectation as post-operation performance within the effective period. Further, a mode different from the above-described four modes (integrated general-purpose images IGe to IGh) may be further prepared, and any one of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
Operating means (sword decoration 5001) having an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) that is displaced by an operation by the player, and a peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) provided on the periphery thereof.
-Integration of displaying a mock image (pattern mage image TMG) imitating the operation receiving part (pattern part 5012) as integrated mood images IGe to IGh that are integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the mock image. A full-scale image display means,
An operation acceptance executing means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) by an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed. The integrated general image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (the integrated general images IGe to IGh).

Details of the “integrated general image” shown in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d) will be described for each of these modes (integrated general image IGe to IGh).

First, the “integrated model image IGe” shown in FIG. 423(a) has a pattern model image TMGe, a button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe), and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. Is configured. However, in the “integrated model image IGe”, the pattern model image TMGe and the button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe) are “an image of the pattern part 5012 which is a target to which an operation opportunity is given” and “. While the "image of the pattern button 5014 which is not the object to which the operation opportunity is given" is displayed as an integrated image, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is "the object to which the operation opportunity is given". The peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 is not used.In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe according to this example, a part of the peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020) is used. Most of the image SSGe is to decorate the periphery of the pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe) as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. There is.

In the “integrated black image IGe” shown in FIG. 423(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a treasure box in which some treasures including the pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe) are stored. As described above, these "treasure" and "treasure box" have different shapes and are expressed as different decorations from the existing peripheral decoration portion.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGe" according to the present embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target region as time passes. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from a display area having a predetermined maximum value when an operation is not accepted within the valid period. The display area is displayed so as to decrease as time passes.

The normal peripheral decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 423(a) is provided with a partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. . The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as the section image KG, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the necklace. However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 423(a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGe" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the handle portion to be operated is generated. 5012 is caused to emit light in the first mode (for example, the same color as the pattern image TMGe in the “integrated image IGE” (eg, “blue” in FIG. 423(a))). The pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the fifth mode (for example, the same color as the button image BMGe in the “integrated image IGe” (for example, “blue” in FIG. 423(a)). ) To emit light). Although the same color is used here, the first mode and the fifth mode may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated pattern image IGf" shown in FIG. 423(b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated pattern image IGe", and the pattern model image TMGf and the button model image BMGf( The composite image HMGf) and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the composite image HMGf) are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGf", the pattern model image TMGf and the button model image BMGf (composite model image HMGf) do not change in shape. However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, although the treasure box itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe", the amount and type of treasure as the content thereof is increasing. It is displayed as a decoration image SSGf". The amount and type of treasure are increasing, and the necklace, the sword, and the cup are also displayed in the case of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and are common.

Also, in the “integrated image IGf” shown in FIG. 423(b), as the amount and type of treasure increase, the “necklace (compartment image KG)” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The shape is changed, so that the display mode of the gauge image GG is changed. With such a configuration, the shape of the gauge image GG as the display target area is different (not similar) depending on which of the plurality of modes with different expectations is displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left as it is reduced, and it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 423(b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGf" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, a pattern to be operated is generated. The part 5012 is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, the same color as the pattern image TMGf in the “integrated image IGf” (eg, “green” in FIG. 423(b)) is emitted). The pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the sixth mode (for example, the same color as the button image BMGf in the “integrated image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 423(b)). ) To emit light). Although the same color is used here, the second mode and the sixth mode may have different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGg" shown in FIG. 423(c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGe", and the pattern model image TMGg and the button model image BMGg (composite model). The image HMGg) and a peripheral edge decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGg", the pattern model image TMGg and the button model image BMGg (composite model image HMGg) do not change in shape. However, the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same treasure as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" described above, but the treasure box (the shape) for storing them is different from the "second special peripheral decoration image". It is displayed as an image SSGg".

However, the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” is also similar to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and the “first special peripheral decoration image SSGf” in the following points.
“A peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 to which an operation opportunity is given is not used, and the virtual image is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As a decoration, the periphery of the pattern image TMGg (composite image HMGg) is decorated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 423(c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGg" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, a pattern to be operated is generated. The part 5012 is caused to emit light in the third mode (in FIG. 423(c), for example, the part 5012 emits light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the pattern image TMGg in the “integrated image IGg”). The pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the seventh mode (for example, the same color as the button image BMGg in the “integrated image IGg” (in FIG. 423(c), for example, “red”). ) To emit light). Although the same color is used here, the third mode and the seventh mode may have different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated mould image IGh" shown in FIG. 423(d) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated mood image IGe", and the pattern mood image TMGh and the button mood image BMGh (composite mood image). The image HMGh) and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated model image IGh”, the pattern model image TMGh and the button model image BMGh (composite model image HMGh) do not change in shape. However, with respect to the peripheral decoration image SSG, the amount and type of treasure are increased and the treasure box (the shape of the treasure box for storing them) is different from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe". It is displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGh".

Further, in the “integrated image IGh” according to this example, the shape of the “necklace (compartment image KG)” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes as the amount and type of treasure increase. Accordingly, the display mode of the gauge image GG is different.

However, the “third special peripheral decoration image SSGh” is also similar to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” in the following points.
“A peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020 and the like) actually provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 to which an operation opportunity is given is not used, and the virtual display effect on the effect display device 1600 is used. As a decoration, the periphery of the patterned image TMGh (composite image HMGh) is decorated.

That is, in the “integrated image IGh (FIG. 423(d))”, a part (treasure) of the “first special peripheral decoration image SSGg” used in the “integrated image IGf (FIG. 423(b))” is used. ) And a part (treasure chest) in the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” used in the “integrated image IGg (FIG. 423(c))” are displayed as a combined image. There is.

On the other hand, since the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the case where the “integrated image IGe (FIG. 423(a))” appears and the case where “integrated image IGe” appears It is possible to suggest that the specific operation reception effect (effective period) is the same as when the "image IGh (Fig. 423(d))" appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 423(d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGh" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, a pattern to be operated is generated. The part 5012 is made to emit light in the fourth mode (for example, the same color as the pattern image TMGh in the “integrated image IGh” (in FIG. 423(d), for example, “rainbow color”) is emitted). .. The pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the eighth mode (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGh in the “integrated image IGh” (FIG. 423(d), for example, “rainbow color”). )). Although the same color is used here, the fourth mode and the eighth mode may have different colors.

Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d), the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in any of the modes. However, as the amount and type of treasure changes (FIGS. 423(b) and (d)), or as the treasure box changes (FIGS. 423(c) and (d)), the pattern image The shapes of the TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) may be different.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d), in each aspect, the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in different colors, but the same color is used. May be displayed in.

In the case of displaying the button image BMG which imitates the pattern button 5014, in the example shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b are displayed integrally with the button image BMG. I decided to do it. In this regard, also in the examples shown in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d), the button image BMG which shows the pattern button 5014 is displayed, but the peripheral decoration images SSGa and b are not displayed. .. That is, since the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the case of the example shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d) and FIG. 423( It is possible to display as a completely different image from the case of the examples shown in a) to (d), and thereby it becomes possible to provide various performances.

In addition, in the configuration according to the example illustrated in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d), portions having the same functions as those in the example illustrated in FIGS. 410(a) to (d) are illustrated in FIGS. It goes without saying that the same operational effects as the various operational effects described above with reference to d) are achieved. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d), these can be appropriately adopted for the above-described modified examples and effect examples with respect to the examples shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (d).

Also, in the effective period in which the integrated muffled image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 423, as in the effective period in which the integrated mutilated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. The specified “specific image TG” is displayed.

However, in the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 410, the type of the effective period (the type as the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, or the indication effect) Depending on the type), the "specific image TG" may be displayed and the "specific image TG" may not be displayed, whereas the integrated image image is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 423. In the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the IG is displayed, the "specific image TG" is displayed regardless of the type of the effective period (the type of the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, the type of the precursor effect, etc.). It is always displayed.

That is, during the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 423, the “state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 is set. It does not include the effective period generated as a performance. Therefore, it is desirable to display the "specific image TG" in order to clarify how much remaining time is left. When the "specific image TG" is displayed, this may not necessarily be displayed for the gauge image GG.

The “specific image TG” when the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 423 may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411, or may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 412. You may do so.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 423, an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, whereby the handle portion 5012 is moved from the specific position to the original position. The operation (sword operation) is allowed. However, when the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the handle 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is in the original position, so that the movement operation (the sword removing operation) from the original position to the specific position may be permitted.

FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of an effect (operation acceptance effect) when the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 423.

424 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is a special effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, the effect display device 1600. In the effect situation that is being performed in, the effect display device 1600 shows the effect situation in which the display related to the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 413 to 416. When the effect patterns are the same, the effective period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 and the effective period shown in FIG. 424 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the effect pattern, respectively. Alternatively, only one of the effective periods (operation reception effects) may be generated at a predetermined timing within the effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination.

The precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed before and after the generation timing of the valid period in which the operation reception is permitted, and at this point, the operation reception for the handle 5012 ( Performance reception) is not allowed and the effective period has not occurred.

In this respect, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by the display of the integrated image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid portion of the treasure box). At the time point shown in FIG. 414(a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is displayed as a “closed mode”, whereby the pattern model image TMGe (composite model image HMGe). Some treasures including "are not displayed as images (by the specific display TH3 which is the lid portion of the treasure box) and are in a state where they cannot be viewed (or a state where they are difficult to view).

At the timing shown in FIG. 424(a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated image IG has a relatively low degree of expectation shown in FIGS. 423(a) and 423(b). And the aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation shown in FIGS. 423(c) and 423(d). The case where it is displayed in a low mode (FIGS. 423 (a) and (b)) is illustrated. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). The description of the case where the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is omitted, but in the same manner as "when the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a low degree of expectation", the subsequent production progress Will be performed.

FIG. 424(b) shows that as the precursor effect shown in FIG. 424(a) progresses (the area where the treasure box lid (specific display TH3) is opened and overlaps with “treasure” is displayed). In the "treasure", the part that does not overlap with the lid part (specific display TH3) of the treasure box gradually expands in the "treasure", and the part is displayed in a good visible state. Is shown.

That is, when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 424(a) progresses, the specific timing comes and the effective period for the handle portion 5012 occurs. When the valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. 424(b), the handle 5012 to be operated starts moving to the “specific position” by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the “pattern portion 5012” that is the operation target and the “pattern button 5014” that is not the operation target start light emission in a predetermined manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission is started, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 424(a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 424(b), in the integrated image IG, the lid portion (specific indication TH3) of the treasure box is changed from "closed state (fully closed)" to "opened state". (Fully open)” is being drawn. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 424(b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is “a precursor effect (specific display TH3) that is drawn (expressed) as if it were on the front side thereof. , But the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progress), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progress). ) Is in the situation. In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display TH), and is not displayed as an image.

With such a configuration, the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed in the form of the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the effective period occurs. The indication effect (specific display TH3) causes at least part of the integrated image IG to be invisible or difficult to see. That is, in this case, the entire image of the integrated image IG (pattern image TMG and button image BMG (composite image HMG), peripheral decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the effective period. Therefore, the degree of expectation (aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (aspect of the pattern image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG are interesting. The effective period can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the effective period.

That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 424(b), "treasure", which is the content of the treasure box, is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are small (a mode with relatively low expectations shown in FIG. 423(a)). There is at least a case where it is displayed, and a case where it is displayed in a mode in which the amount or type is large (a mode in which the degree of expectation is relatively high as shown in FIG. 423(b)). It is intended to provide directivity as to what is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 424(b), it is set in a state in which it is possible to recognize that "treasure", which is the content of the treasure box, is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are large (a mode with high expectation). ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 424(b), since the “specific image TG” is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, the type in which the “specific image TG” is displayed at the beginning of the effective period ( (See FIG. 412) or a type in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed at the start of the effective period and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 411). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 412, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said that, when adopted, it is particularly effective to execute the precursor effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. Note that the case where "treasure" is displayed in a mode with low expectations is omitted, but this is performed in the same manner as "when "treasure" is displayed in a mode with high expectations" described below. Subsequent production progress will be performed.

FIG. 424(c) overlaps with the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of further development of the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 424(b). It shows a situation where the portion (the portion where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the “treasure”) is gone. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated image IG is displayed, whereby the time before the effective period starts. It is possible to provide a single playability from the time to the end of the game, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in FIG. 424(c), at the time when the entire treasure of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in good visibility, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has already appeared). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, a display area larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It remains, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor effect (the effect of opening the lid portion which is the specific display TH) is completed. You can expect that. The “specific image TG” according to this example is displayed as an image expressing “light” that is displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 424(c), the pattern image TMG in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (a display depicting how the pattern portion 5012 is displaced within its movable range). However, as described above, the button image BMG is not dynamically displayed (display showing how the handle button 5014 is displaced within its movable range).

In FIG. 424(d), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period (set time) ends (or, An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 immediately before the expiration of the effective period) is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 424(d) appears, it is assumed that the operation reception is barely permitted in terms of time, but when the screen is displayed, the operation reception has already been accepted. It may not be allowed. However, in this case, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 are in a state in which each light emission has already ended at that time. Further, in this case, images such as “push in!” and “lower left arrow” may be hidden. In any case, at least part (or all) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the end of the effective period.

When the valid period ends, both the light emission of the handle 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are ended. In this respect, during the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed even if the player does not perform the operation within the valid period. Is performed (see FIG. 424(e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (FIG. 413(e), (f), etc.) that functions within the first valid period described above.

According to such a configuration (automatic reception performance), even if the player performs an operation immediately after the expiration of the valid period (operation acceptance is no longer permitted), the display after operation is displayed. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed immediately before or after the sound output after the operation is performed, the post-operation display or the operation is performed in response to the operation acceptance by the player in time for the operation in time. It is possible to make it appear as if the rear sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (previous display) is performed in this manner, when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in good visibility, the gauge image (predetermined) is displayed. The display area of (image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of “specific image TG” has already started. That is, in this case, since it is likely that the operation by the player will not be in time, there is a high possibility that the operation will be displayed after the operation while the "specific image TG" is displayed even if the player does not operate within the valid period. It can be said that outputting the sound after the operation is effective in suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Further, in this example, the pattern button 5014 on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given is set to the light emitting state in accordance with the occurrence of the effective period, and the operation opportunity is given to either the pattern portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014. I try to make it difficult to recognize. That is, in this case, there is a high possibility that the operation will not be in time within the effective period, and thus it can be said that it is effective in suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the operation is not in time.

Regarding the production progress in the mode shown in FIG. 424, there are a case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411 and a case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 412. It may be applied to any of the above.

In the example shown in FIG. 424, the indication effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed in different layers, and the indication effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 413. It was decided to realize the production progress in the form. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect progress in the form shown in FIG. 424 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data.

In the example shown in FIG. 424, the aspect (integrated general image IGa) shown in FIG. 423(b) appears as the integrated general image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mood image IG may be made to appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 423(a) to 423(d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination). .

According to the example shown in FIG. 424, first, when a treasure box that is a part of the integrated image IG is displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period, the treasure box is displayed as “a mode with high expectation”. A first effect is provided regarding which of "modes with low expectations" is displayed. Further, after the expiration of the effective period, the treasure box of the integrated image IG is gradually opened, and the "treasure" is either "a mode with high expectations" or "a mode with low expectations". The second effect of whether to be displayed in is provided. That is, in this case, the expectation level is suggested by the stepwise effects (first effectivity and second effectivity) that are performed over the occurrence of the effective period, so that the effective period occurs. It is expected that the interest of the game in the period from before to after the occurrence will be suitably improved.

In addition, since such a stepwise effect is realized by the depiction of the integrated black image IG itself (depiction of the lid portion of the treasure box), another image (specific display TH shown in FIG. 413) is displayed. It is possible to prevent stress from being felt more than when the visibility of the integrated image IG is deprived by being obstructed by () and the like, and it is possible to suppress deterioration in the enjoyment of the game. However, also in the example shown in FIG. 424, the precursor effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 415. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 415, the indication effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 424.

In FIG. 424, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the mock image simulating the operation target is integrated with the “periphery decoration image (first decoration image)” including the display target area of the gauge image. An example (first operation acceptance permissible period) relating to the production progress in the case of displaying as a simulated image has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 425 and 426, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the mock image simulating the operation target is displayed as “a peripheral decoration image (first decoration image) including the display target area of the gauge image”. An example (second operation acceptance permissible period) relating to the development of the effect will be described in the case of displaying as an "image not integrated with". In the example shown in FIG. 424 and the examples shown in FIGS. 425 and 426, the operation opportunity need not necessarily be given to the same operation target, but since the operation opportunity is given to the same operation object. If so, it is desirable that the image of the operation target itself is displayed as the same image (including a similar shape).

Here, as a mode in which the mock image simulating the operation target is displayed as “an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image”, for example, a mock image simulating the operation target is “marginal”. Displayed as "a single image that is not integrated with the decoration image in the first place," or as a "image combined with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display area of the gauge image" It is possible to adopt the mode described above. According to such a configuration, when the effective period occurs, when the gauge image showing the operation target is displayed as one image, when the gauge image is displayed in that image Since the gauge image may not be displayed in the image when the image is displayed as one image, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension during the effective period.

In the example described below, a display example is shown in which the image of the operation target is displayed as an “image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target region of the gauge image”.

First, in FIG. 425(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed with a specific effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holdings is 0. The production|presentation situation currently performed by the apparatus 1600 WHEREIN: The production|presentation situation which the display concerning a precursor production|production (specific display TH3) was started in the production|presentation display apparatus 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 and FIG. 424. When the effect patterns are the same, they may be generated respectively at the first timing and the second timing within one effect pattern, and any of the effective periods (operation acceptance effects) based on the result of effect determination. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing within the effect pattern.

In this example, the situations shown in FIGS. 425(a) and 425(b) are basically the same as the situations shown in FIGS. 424(a) and 424(b), and a description of the same configurations will be omitted. However, part of the "treasure (second decoration image)" that is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 425(b) is not visible in the situation shown in FIG. 424(b). The content is different from the "Treasure (first decoration image)". That is, as described above, the “mock image of the operation target” according to this example is displayed as “an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target region of the gauge image”. Regarding the "periphery decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image", the part displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "periphery decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image" and the part displayed as a different image There is something.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 425(c), FIG. 424 shows that the “treasure (second decoration image)” of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example includes the “holy grail”. This is the same as the “treasure (first decorative image)” shown. However, in the “treasure” of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the “gold bar” and the “necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)” shown in FIG. 424 are not displayed, and instead of this, An image of gold coins is displayed. The treasure box shown in FIG. 425(c) is the same as the treasure box shown in FIG. 424(c), and the treasure box is also displayed in any of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 423.

According to such a configuration, even if the specific display TH3 is in a situation (FIG. 425(c)) where there is no portion depicted as being on the front side of the “treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)”, The gauge image GG is no longer displayed in the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". That is, in this case, while the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" is gradually being visually recognized by the specific display TH3, even if the gauge image GG cannot be found, it cannot be found. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the tension about how much time is left.

In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. It is supposed that the same image (Holy Grail, etc.) as in the case (FIG. 423(c)) is intentionally displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to make the "necklace", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, appear to be displayed somewhere, so that the "necklace" that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. As I searched, when I realized that this was not displayed anywhere, it seems that a certain amount of time has already passed since the effective period occurred, so I felt a sense of tension during the effective period. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 425(b) to 425(d), the pattern image TMG that imitates the operation target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, and the integrated image IG itself has a gauge image. The display target area is not provided, and the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image separate from the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed, and it becomes difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left in the effective period, so that the feeling of tension during the effective period can be appropriately maintained. The display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image different from the integrated general image IG, and the display area is reduced over time. You may do it.

FIG. 425(d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set period for the valid period has passed and the valid period is about to be finished. As described above, the gauge image is not displayed in this example. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 425(d), there is no suggestion that the effective period is about to end, and the player will not be able to see the image even if he or she sees the image. I can't recognize it.

However, even during the effective period according to this example, in the pattern image TMG to be operated, a display depicting the pattern part 5012 reciprocating (reciprocating from the original position to the specific position) within its movable range is displayed. (Dynamic display) is being performed. In this regard, the valid period according to this example is designed to be terminated when the reciprocating motion is repeated N times (N may not be an integer) after the period has occurred, By keeping a close watch on the dynamic display by the pattern image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much (reciprocating motion) the remaining time as the effective period is left.

Even during the effective period according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 425(c) and 425(d), in the button image BMG, a display (movement) depicting how the handle button 5014 reciprocates within its movable range is displayed. Display) is not performed. In this respect, when the operation receiving unit (here, the handle button 5014) corresponding to the mock image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated during the valid period in which the display area of the gauge image is not displayed. Alternatively, the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output may be performed according to the operation acceptance.

That is, in the effective period according to this example, the player does not operate the display in a dynamic manner because the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time. Since it is assumed that there is a high possibility of operating the display, even if the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated, unlike the case shown in FIG. It is desirable to output the rear sound in order to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Examples of the post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case include a display and sound output such as "Push in the design portion, not the design button!". Therefore, even when the operation receiving unit on the side not dynamically displayed is operated and the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output corresponding to the operation is performed, the valid period is ended or the set time is set. It is preferable that the pattern image TMG is not reset and is continuously displayed without stopping its dynamic display. When the handle 5012 is operated within the effective period thus continued, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output corresponding thereto are performed (see FIG. 426(h)). In this case, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving section on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated (for example, “not the pattern button but the pattern section”). Needless to say, it is a different content). However, “in the valid period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the button image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, and the pattern image TMG that is dynamically displayed is displayed. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output when the operation receiving unit (handle 5012) is operated (for example, "Congratulations!"), and "button image not dynamically displayed within the valid period" After the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the BMG is operated, the post-operation display when the operation receiving unit (pattern unit 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated, It is preferable that the post-operation sound output (for example, "good time, congratulations!") is executed as different contents in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 426(e) shows an example of an image that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an operation is not accepted within the time (set time) set for the effective period according to this example.

That is, in the valid period according to this example, if the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIGS. 425 (d) and (e)), the operation is accepted for the handle 5012 within the valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when they are made are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed in the integrated image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as another image. Therefore, as a player side, There is a possibility that the valid period may end without being operated even though the player intends to operate the game, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, after the valid period ends without any operation by the player, while the specific condition (for example, symbol stop, or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is not satisfied The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (here, the handle portion 5012) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the valid period, and when the operation to the operation means is accepted, Based on the above, the valid period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the valid period starts from the time when the valid period ends.

With such a configuration, even if the valid period ends as a result of the predetermined set time having elapsed without any operation being performed by the player, the operation shown by FIG. 426(h) is performed by the player. It becomes possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output that are performed. More specifically, when the player operates the handle 5012 in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 426(e), the effective period starts based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. It starts from the state (Fig. 426 (f), (g)). After that, the content as described above will be repeated again with reference to FIGS. 425(b) to 425(d), 426(e), and (g). Therefore, even if the operation is accepted within the regenerated valid period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed in the above-described manner (see FIG. 426(h)). reference).

When an operation is accepted in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 426(e), the images shown in FIGS. 426(f) and (g) (FIG. 425(b), ( The same as the image shown in c) will appear sequentially. Such an image is an image display after the operation performed based on the operation reception during the effective period (FIGS. 425(b) to (d) and FIGS. 425(f) and (g), etc.). Are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation reception in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 426(e) is also effective period (FIG. 425(b) to (d) and FIG. 426(f), (g), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the reception of the operation.

Since the specific image TG is not displayed in the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 425 and 426, the precursor effect (dynamic display by the specific display TH3) is not necessarily performed in generating the effective period. Good. For example, when the predetermined condition for permitting the operation acceptance regarding the display after the predetermined operation (the sound output after the predetermined operation) is satisfied (when the predetermined timing arrives), the situation shown in FIG. 425(c) appears. After that, the display may be advanced similarly to the above-mentioned example.

In the example shown in FIGS. 424 to 426, the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG are displayed as one image (composite image HMG). However, these image images are respectively displayed as separate images. It may be displayed. In the examples illustrated in FIGS. 424 to 426, the “button image BMG” and the “pattern image TMG” are displayed as one image including both of these image images (composite image HMG). The "composite image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated image IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. However, the “button image BMG” and the “pattern image TMG” are displayed as separate images, and at least one of the image images is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery. You may make it display as an image. For example, if the "pattern image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image and the "button image BMG" is displayed as a separate image, the "pattern image" is displayed. Even though both "TMG" and "button image BMG" are displayed at the same time, "pattern image TMG" can be made more prominent, and operation corresponding to "pattern image TMG" It is possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving portion (handle portion 5012) should be operated. At this time, the "pattern image TMG" in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed, whereas the "button image BMG" displayed as a single image is not dynamically displayed. The configurations and other examples are similarly applicable.

Further, in the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 424, both the button image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed, but the image on the side to which the operation opportunity is given (here, the pattern). Only the image (TMG) may be displayed.

Further, it is desirable that the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 is generated as a setting time longer than the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 424. Then, in this case, a mode (a reciprocating speed or the like) in which the image (here, the pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 424 and FIG. 425 and FIG. It is desirable that the mode (the reciprocating speed or the like) in which the mock image (here, the pattern mage image TMG) is dynamically displayed is the same as each other within the indicated effective period (operation reception performance). According to such a configuration, even if the gauge image GG is not displayed, it is possible to confirm the “state of dynamically displaying the mock image” with reference to the case where the gauge image GG is displayed, and thereby allow a margin. You will be prompted to operate.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 424 to 426, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be an image of “treasure”, and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 424, when the operation receiving unit corresponding to the moving image that is not dynamically displayed is referred to as the “first operation receiving unit”, in the examples shown in FIGS. The operation receiving unit corresponding to the image may be the “first operation receiving unit”. However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 424, when the operation receiving section dynamically displayed is the “second operation receiving section”, in the examples shown in FIG. 425 and FIG. It is desirable that the operation receiving portion corresponding to the above is a “third operation receiving portion” different from the “second operation receiving portion”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to respectively generate two types of operation reception effects in which the display relationship of the three operation targets (operation receiving portions) is slid. , It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 does not necessarily have to occur during the execution period of the symbol variation. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of whether or not there is a symbol change, or during the period during which the big hit game is executed or the period before the big hit game is started, "the period when the symbol change is not executed. ] May occur at the same time.

In the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 425 and 426, the decorative pattern SZ that has been displayed until then is not displayed, as in the effective period in the example shown in FIGS. 418 to 421. Alternatively, it may be made difficult to visually recognize, so that it may be easier to notice that the gauge image is not displayed in a special effect state.

As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 424(c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 424 may not be performed in all the valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIG. 424 may be performed in at least one valid period.

As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 425(c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 may not be performed in all the valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 425 and 426 may be performed in at least one valid period.

In the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 425 and 426, unlike the case of the effective period shown in FIG. 424, a plurality of modes (colors and the like) cannot be displayed as the image, and one You may make it displayable only in a mode.

The valid period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is not displayed can be generated only when the operation opportunity is given to one of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014, and the operation opportunity is provided to the other. When granted, an effective period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is displayed may always occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the valid period (the valid period shown in FIGS. 417 to 419) in which the integrated image that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed, and the gauge image. The valid period (the valid period shown in FIG. 425 and FIG. 426) in which the integrated image without the display target area of the GG is originally provided can be generated as one of a plurality of types of valid periods. There is. In this respect, during these effective periods (FIGS. 417 to 419, 425, and 426), when the operation by the player is not accepted, and when the operation is accepted, in order to appropriately maintain the tension. In the effective period (FIGS. 413 to 416 and 424) in which the effect after the same operation as described above is not performed (the automatic button function is not provided) and the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced with the passage of time (FIGS. 413 to 416 and 424), In order to maintain a suitable state, it is desirable that when the operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted (with an automatic button function) is performed.

In this respect, the effective period (the effective period shown in FIGS. 417 to 419) in which the integrated image that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed, or the display area of the gauge image GG is not provided in the first place. When an operation is accepted for the operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the effective period in which the image is displayed (the effective period shown in FIGS. 425 and 426), a change (display) according to the operation acceptance is made. It is desirable that the integrated image is not hidden and is displayed at the time when execution of at least one of changes and changes caused by post-operation effects such as lamp light emission is started. It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated image is continued. As a result, while the gauge image does not suggest the remaining time, it will be possible to create anxiety about whether the performance reception was properly done, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained more appropriately. Become so.

In this case, the display mode (for example, the color or the like) of the change image before and after the change (at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) according to the operation reception occurs. Transparency etc.) does not have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult for the other image to visually recognize the mock image, and the operation acceptance can be made to determine which operation means was the operation target. It suffices to be recognizable even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) has occurred. On the other hand, within the effective period (FIG. 413 to FIG. 416, FIG. 424) in which the gauge image GG is reduced in size as time passes, a change (display change or , At least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lamp light emission, occurs in the state in which the change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) has occurred (both the image of the scale and the gauge image). ) May be hidden, and similar to the case described above, changes (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) in response to operation acceptance may be performed in a state where the integrated image is displayed without being hidden. It may be generated.

However, in this way, even in the effective period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced with the passage of time", the image of the operating means to be operated is displayed and the image is displayed. It is desirable to display the image in the mode described with reference to FIG. 288. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is possible to grasp the remaining time that the operation reception is allowed by the dynamic display by the image, but it is possible to play the game. It is expected that the interest will be maintained appropriately.

[Integrated image, effect before effective period, extinguished image]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The variation effect based on the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movable body operation (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of a big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected effect according to (2) will be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting a degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the change pattern determination, SP expectation (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) is specified. When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, the effect reception Acceptable state (valid period) is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even if it is, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, the production reception is allowed. Allowed acceptance status (valid period) can be generated. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the production determination, the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . Also, the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the particular variation pattern progresses to a particular timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach is not limited to the above “specific variation pattern”. May also be provided. However, no matter which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from happening or to lower the selection rate.

By the way, the acceptance allowable state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is predetermined for the effect member to be effected, as long as an operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Since the post-operation effect that causes the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the reception is performed. The permissible state (effective period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that amusement of the game until the post-operation performance is executed may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, first, when the acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the operation opportunity is given occurs, the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given is set. By displaying the mocked image as an integrated mage image (see FIG. 410) that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the mood image, it is possible to create a game until the post-operation performance is executed. We are trying to control the decline. Regarding such an integrated image, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) that is generated when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that is generated with the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (effective period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both of the low-expectation non-suppression reception effects and the high-expectations suppression reception effects. Also, regarding each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 190 to 303, FIG. 385 to FIG. 409), the display mode of the exemplified mock image may be replaced by any one of the integrated mood images described below. It is desirable to do so in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The “integrated image” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 410 to 426, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image, A display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 410) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the “integrated image”, and it is the same in that it is displayed in any of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance-permitted state occurs, the acceptance-permitted sound indicating that the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted is generated. The output is made so that it is difficult to forget the operation. Here, "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (valid period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). , Is a sound in a state where the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) has already occurred.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of acceptable reception states including a first acceptable reception state and a second acceptable reception state are prepared as acceptable reception states (valid periods). There is. Here, the first acceptance permissible state is allowed to occur when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from among the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns), but the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) Based on the fact that the valid period that cannot occur in the predetermined fluctuation pattern (or in any of the low expected fluctuation patterns) (the first condition is satisfied in the performance judgment based on the result of the big hit judgment) Valid period). In addition, as the second acceptance permissible state, a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). In any case (or in at least one of these fluctuation patterns), an effective period that can be generated (a second condition different from the first condition in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination) It is a valid period that is generated based on the establishment).

The "integrated image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first acceptance permitted state and the second acceptance permitted state. Here, since it is assumed that the first acceptable reception state and the second acceptable reception state both occur as acceptable reception states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410), The “integrated image” displayed in the first acceptance-allowed state and the second acceptance-allowed state is an image of the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, the special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 410(d)) among the plurality of modes prepared as the “integrated image” has the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state. Of these, it is possible to display only in the first acceptance permitted state, and in the second acceptance permitted state, it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, modes shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (c)). ing. In the first acceptance permissible state, it is possible to determine which of a plurality of modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. 410(a) to (d)) to display the “integrated image” based on the result of the jackpot determination. The "integrated image" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. In the second acceptance permissible state as well, which of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 410(a) to 410(c)) does not include the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination is to be displayed. The determination may be performed, and the “integrated image” may be displayed in a mode according to the result of the determination.

Then, in such a configuration, two types of acceptable reception sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are output in the first acceptable reception state, and in the second acceptable reception state, One type of acceptable reception sound (third acceptable reception sound) is output. Here, the first acceptable sound and the third acceptable sound are, for example, output as sound effects such as "Picine!", and may be output as the same sound, or different from each other. It may be output as a sound. On the other hand, the second permissible sound is output as a message sound such as "press!" However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and if the sound is different from the first permissible sound and is output over a different output time, there are two types of acceptance permission. It is possible for the player to preferably recognize that the sounds (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) are being output.

Here, in the first acceptance permissible state, it has been described above that the "integrated image" can be displayed by a mode different from the special mode (a mode with relatively low expectations). Even in such a case, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output. That is, in this case, if only one type of acceptance-permitted sound is output when the acceptance acceptable state occurs (displaying the integrated image), the special aspect is not displayed as the "integrated image" and the special aspect is displayed. Different modes are displayed, but when two types of acceptance allowable sounds are output, a special mode is displayed as the "integrated image", and a mode different from the special mode is displayed. There will be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated image" is displayed in the special mode based on which mode the acceptance-permitted sound is output. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when a situation occurs.

Further, when the "integrated image" is displayed in the first acceptance permitted state or the second acceptance permitted state, the preceding effect (precursor effect) is executed prior to this, and the integrated effect image is displayed. Is displayed (displayed in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize) in a state in which at least a part of the “image related to pre-production” overlaps in a state where the pre-production is being executed. Then, in the integrated image, the “image related to the pre-production” is gradually reduced to gradually reduce the overlapping portion, or the transmittance of the “image related to the pre-production” is gradually reduced. By gradually becoming higher, and finally being hidden, the mode (whole) is exposed (displayed in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize) after the occurrence of the acceptance permitted state. Such pre-effects (predictive effects) are, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 413(b) and (c), and FIGS. 415(c) to (f), and are executed in the same manner as this You may do so.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start output at the timing at which the first permissible sound is output, but starts output after being delayed. ing. However, at the time when the first permissible sound is output in advance, "the integrated image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize the mode" Of course, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started with a delay, at least a part of the integrated mood image is in a state in which the images related to the front effect (precursor effect) are displayed in a form of overlapping from the front side, This makes it difficult to see. It should be noted that the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) is designed to occur when the pre-production (precursor production) is started to be executed or during the execution period, and at least when the output of the second permissible sound is started. It has already occurred, or it occurs when the output starts.

According to such a configuration, at least when the first allowable sound is output and the second allowable sound is not output, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound and The first acceptable reception state in which the second acceptable sound is output occurs (or is occurring), or the second acceptable reception state in which only one type of acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) is output occurs ( Or it has occurred) is difficult to recognize. However, if a situation such as “the second allowable sound starts to be output after the first allowable sound is output”, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptance permissible state has occurred, and that the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode.

That is, in this case, in a state in which it is difficult to recognize in which mode the integrated image is displayed (or whether it is displayed),
When shifting from "a state in which only the first acceptable sound is output among the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound" to "a state in which at least the second acceptable sound is output" (first acceptance acceptable state) When,
When the "state in which only the first acceptable sound is output among the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound" is not transitioned to "state in which at least the second acceptable sound is output" (second acceptable reception state) With this, it becomes possible to suggest "the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode" by the mode of "transition related to the output of the acceptance permission sound". Therefore, while in the “state in which only the first allowable sound of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is output”, before the image relating to the front effect (precursor effect) is hidden, It becomes possible to make an interest in whether or not the output of the second permissible sound is started, and thereby, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. As a result, if the second permissible sound is output while the image related to the front effect (precursor effect) is displayed, an integrated image having a special aspect is displayed (displayed). It becomes possible to provide such a sense of expectation that the integrated image is gradually exposed in such a sense of expectation.

Note that, as described above, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a part of the integrated mood image is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “image related to the pre-production”. Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode, at least it is not easy to recognize in which mode the integrated image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained at the time point when the output of the second allowable sound is started, or the output state of the first allowable sound may be finished. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated acceptable image is displayed without outputting any acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound or second acceptable sound), and the operating means (here, the integrated effective image is displayed) is displayed. When the operation is accepted for the operation button 410), a display change or an output sound after the operation may be generated as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptance permitted state or the second acceptance permitted state. Good. In this case, the contents of the display change and the output sound after the operation may be different depending on the type of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state, second acceptance acceptable state, third acceptance acceptable state).

That is, by displaying the integrated image without outputting any acceptance permission sound, it becomes possible to make it difficult to understand when the acceptance of the operation is permitted, and it is possible to relate to the operation. It becomes possible to improve the interest in playing games. Therefore, in adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated image is displayed in any of the modes shown in FIGS. 417 to 421. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a “gauge stop period” in which the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined value (0) and remains the integrated value. Since the image will be hidden, it is possible to maintain a suitable feeling of tension when the acceptance-permitted state is occurring, and it is more preferable to improve the enjoyment of the game related to the operation. You will be able to plan.

Or, when displaying the integrated image without outputting any acceptance-permitted sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated image, and the display target area is not provided. Good. Such a display method is as described above with reference to FIGS. 425 and 426, although the operation target is different. For example, “the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the gauge image GG is displayed. The same image as when the target area is displayed (peripheral decoration image) is intentionally displayed as being included, or the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated image. The same applies to the technical idea such as “doing so”. Even with such a configuration, it becomes possible to preferably maintain a feeling of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to more appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game related to the operation. become able to.

Also in the acceptance-permitted state according to this example, when the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode, and the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction). ) Is output in the suppression mode, or there is a case where the operation acceptance is permitted while it is in the non-output state. "Outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) in a suppression mode" according to this example also includes the case of outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) at a volume "0" (silence output). is there. The “non-output state” is meant to include, for example, a case where no channel is even assigned.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a reception-permitted state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressing mode, and a specific-type effect. A plurality of acceptance acceptable states in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state are prepared respectively. The “acceptance state” and the “third acceptance acceptance state” are acceptance allowances in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state. It is included as one of the states, and in the above-mentioned “second acceptance permissible state”, operation acceptance is performed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressing mode. It is included as one of the acceptable acceptance states.

According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound) is suppressed or is set to a non-output state, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode. Since it is possible to do so, while avoiding a situation in which the performance is poor, the sound of BGM playback is suppressed, or while the output is in a non-output state, further concentration is given to enjoy the performance. You will be able to do it.

It should be noted that the "acceptable acceptance state in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state" is output in a non-suppressed manner. A specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) may be output in a suppression mode or may be in a non-output state before the acceptance-allowed state is generated, or a specific type of effect sound ( BGM reproduction) is being output in a non-suppressing mode, and a reception-permitted state is generated, and while the reception-allowed state is being generated (or at the same time), a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed. May be output or may be in a non-output state. In short, it is sufficient that the operation reception can be performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state.

Even in the acceptance-permitted state according to this example, when the operation is not detected within the set time for which the operation acceptance is permitted, it is executed in the automatic acceptance mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. There is a case where the operation is performed and a case where the operation is performed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, the acceptance acceptable state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed in the acceptance acceptable state is as described above,
-It does not mean that after-operation display or after-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the effective period, only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set,
-This means that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are output regardless of the production state (state of the production setting) regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the effective period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare "special performance state (automatic reception mode)" or "plurality of performance states" as performance states. In addition, if the acceptance acceptable state in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed among the acceptance acceptable states occurs when the special effect state (automatic acceptance mode) is set, is automatic acceptance enabled? Either may be adopted as to whether or not (for example, "automatic reception is not always activated regardless of the performance state"), or "when the special performance state (automatic reception mode) is set. It may be said that “automatic reception is enabled” only)), and is not related to the configuration according to the technical features described here.

More specifically, during the demo screen (the period during which the symbol fluctuation is not executed), if the settings relating to the game are possible, whichever of those settings is selected In the acceptance permitted state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed, the automatic acceptance is always enabled. Then, among these settings, when at least the specific setting condition is satisfied, the acceptance condition in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed and the acceptance condition in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed are different from each other. It has become possible to occur in the original. The settings relating to the game include not only the special effect state (automatic reception mode), but also settings such as volume, brightness, and effect appearance probability, and the setting related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not always installed. It does not have to be a thing. When the setting related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not set under the "specific setting condition".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, when at least the specific setting condition is satisfied, the acceptance permission state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed and the "non-automatic acceptance mode" are executed. A plurality of acceptance acceptable states are prepared, but the above-mentioned "first acceptance acceptable state" is included as one of the acceptance acceptable states in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed. The above-mentioned "second acceptable reception state" and "third acceptable reception state" are included as one of the acceptable reception states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed.

According to such a configuration, the first acceptance allowance with the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410(d)) (there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may be significantly reduced when the user forgets to perform the operation) In the state, the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate when the integrated mood image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is higher than other modes), after-operation performance (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a change in effect sound in the speaker, a change in light emission by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) can be generated, and a decrease in amusement of the game can be suppressed. Will be able to. On the other hand, the second acceptance acceptable state and the third accepting state in which there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410(d)) In the acceptance acceptable state, the "non-automatic acceptance mode" will be executed, so it is preferable for the sense of tension when the operation acceptance is allowed while suppressing the deterioration of the game pleasure when forgetting to operate. Will be able to maintain.

Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period in which the acceptance permission sound is output overlaps with the acceptance permission state, and when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state, the operation acceptance is performed. Then, based on the acceptance of the operation, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound can be terminated midway (can be made inaudible).

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the acceptance sound is ended halfway is the timing at which the operation by the player is detected (operation acceptance). It becomes possible to suppress anxiety about whether the reception is being performed or whether the operation has not been received yet.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptance permission sound is output overlaps the acceptance permission state, but when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state. Even if the operation is accepted by the user, there is a case where the output state of the acceptance permission sound is maintained without being stopped (can be made inaudible) on the basis of the acceptance of the operation. I have to. Then, as will be described later, a plurality of acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway and a plurality of acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated halfway are prepared. Is included as one of the acceptance-permitted states in which the acceptance-permitted sound is terminated halfway. The above-mentioned "second acceptance-permitted state" is the acceptance-permitted state in which the acceptance-permitted sound is not terminated halfway. It is included as one of the above.

According to such a configuration, the first acceptance allowance with the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410(d)) (there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may be significantly reduced when the user forgets to perform the operation) In the state, if the operation acceptance is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this is terminated in the middle. Therefore, when the integrated mood image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern is higher than in other modes), the message "whether the operation is being received or the operation is still being received" is displayed. It is possible to concentrate on post-operation performance such as post-operation display and output sound after operation, change in light emission by lamps, effect operation by movable decorative body etc. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, in the second acceptance-permitted state in which there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410(d)) Even if the operation acceptance is made while the permissible sound is being output, this is not ended in the middle, so while suppressing the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game, regarding the feeling of tension when operating it It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, When the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410(d)), the integrated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 410(a) to (c)). I try to make it happen.

More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the acceptance acceptable state in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. In addition to the above-mentioned first acceptance-allowed state that occurs when the fourth condition is met, at least the fourth acceptance-allowed state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied is included. When the mock image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 410(d)) and when the integrated mock image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 410(a) to (c)) However, in the fourth acceptance permissible state, the integrated image is not displayed in the special mode (see FIG. 410(d)), and a mode different from the special mode (FIG. 410(a) to ( It is designed to be displayed only by (see c)). Then, in the first acceptance-permitted state, if an operation acceptance is made while the acceptance-permitted sound is in the output state, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is terminated halfway based on the acceptance of the operation (inaudible On the other hand, in the fourth acceptance-permitted state, in the fourth acceptance-permitted state, when an operation acceptance is made while the acceptance-permitted sound is in the output state, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is interrupted based on the operation acceptance. I'm trying not to end it (to keep it inaudible).

With such a configuration, a reception-permitted state occurs in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, and the reception is performed. When the integrated image is displayed in the special state in the permissible state, the reception permissible sound is terminated midway based on the operation reception. On the other hand, when a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or a non-output state, an acceptance acceptable state in which operation acceptance is permitted occurs and the acceptance acceptable state is integrated. When the katakam image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there are cases where the acceptable reception sound is terminated midway based on the operation acceptance, and cases where the acceptable reception sound is maintained without being terminated midway. Like

That is, in this case, in the acceptance permitted state in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, the integrated image is displayed as the special mode. Is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which it is unlikely that the enjoyment of the game will be significantly reduced when the user forgets to operate), even if the operation is accepted, the acceptance acceptable sound may be terminated midway based on the operation acceptance. In some cases, the allowable sound may be maintained without being terminated halfway, so if the acceptable sound is not terminated halfway, the reason is that the operation has not been accepted. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether or not the reason is that the fourth acceptance acceptable state has occurred, but it is possible to maintain a favorable sense of tension while suppressing a decline in the entertainment appeal. Will be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, a wide area using at least half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is used prior to this. The pre-mold effect is started to be executed, and when the second acceptance permissible state occurs, prior to this, the narrow area pre-effect using only less than half of the predetermined display area is started. It is supposed to be done. Then, the mock image of the operation receiving portion (here, the integrated mood image) is displayed in both the period during which the wide area type pre-production is executed and the period during which the first acceptance allowable state occurs. However, in the period in which the wide area type pre-production is being executed and the period in which the first acceptance allowable state is occurring, they are displayed in different modes from each other.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated image (image) displayed during the period when the wide area type pre-production is executed, and the period during which the first acceptance-permitted state occurs The integrated image (image) to be displayed is based on the image data different from each other, although the same operation receiving portion (operation button 410) is used. As a result, not only the color scheme but also the contour shape itself is displayed differently.

According to such a configuration, when performing the wide area type pre-production, there is more freedom without being caught by the form (image data) of the integrated image (image) displayed in the first acceptance permitted state. Since it becomes possible to display the integrated mood image (mature image) with a highly independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing pre-production (wide area type pre-production) in a wider range. Like Obviously, such an effect cannot be obtained by image processing such as fade-in based on a single image data.

Further, in the acceptance acceptable state in which the wide area type pre-production is executed, as compared with the acceptance acceptable state in which the narrow area type pre-production is executed, a production at the time of a big hit that appears only when a big hit is obtained as a post-operation production. The appearance ratio is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance acceptable states are prepared as acceptance acceptable states corresponding to the wide area type pre-production (the wide area type pre-production is executed). A first acceptance permitted state and a third acceptance permitted state are prepared as one, respectively. In addition, a plurality of acceptable reception states are prepared as the acceptable reception state corresponding to the narrow area pre-production (where the narrow area pre-production is executed), and the second acceptable reception state is one of the acceptable reception states. The state and the fourth acceptance permissible state are prepared respectively.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first acceptance permissible state, an operation is performed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state. As described above, the reception can be performed, and in the second reception permissible state, the operation reception can be performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode. As I did. That is, when a narrow area type pre-rendering performance, which is relatively inferior in rendering performance, is performed, the operation reception is performed while the particular type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppressing aspect without being suppressed. Since it can be done (the second acceptance permissible state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that the wide area type pre-production which is relatively excellent in performance is not performed. On the other hand, when a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or when the operation can be accepted while it is in the non-output state, a wide area type relatively excellent in performance. Since the pre-production is to be performed (first acceptance permissible state), the game due to the operation reception not being made while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the non-suppressing mode. The decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least under the specific setting condition (one production state), in the first acceptance permissible state, the operation is not detected within the set time during which the operation acceptance is permitted. At this time, the operation is performed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second acceptance permissible state, the operation is detected within the set time during which the operation acceptance is permitted. As described above, when the operation is not performed, the operation is performed in the non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first acceptance permissible state in which the wide area type pre-production is performed, it is feared that the enjoyment of the game is deteriorated when the user forgets to operate it due to its high performance, but it is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player forgets to operate it. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state in which the narrow area type pre-production is performed, it is suggested in a relatively unobtrusive manner that the operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the production is firmly performed. Only the person who is paying attention and notices that the operation acceptance will be allowed can entertain the post-operation performance such as the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound, so that the feeling of tension can be favored. You will be able to maintain.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode, or in a reception-permitted state in which operation reception is permitted in the non-output state. Means that at least the first acceptance permission state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance permission state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied are included. As described above. In this respect, in the fourth acceptance permissible state, the operation acceptance can be performed while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the state, the operation reception can be performed while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or in the non-output state. I have to. Further, when the fourth acceptable reception state occurs, prior to this, the narrow area type pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. That is, when a narrow area type pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific-type production sound (BGM reproduction) is set to be low even if the suppression mode is set. (Fourth acceptance permissible state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that the wide area type pre-production, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation reception can be performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode or in the non-output state. In the case (first acceptance permissible state), since the wide area type pre-production that is relatively excellent in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is not low. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player accepts an operation while the above-mentioned first acceptance permissible state is occurring and the mood image (integrated mood image) is being displayed, the operation is accepted. A corresponding post-operation effect (at least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, an effect sound change in the speaker, a light emission change in the lamp, and an effect operation in the movable decorative body) is started to be executed, and a simulation image (integrated image). When hiding an image, a wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance effect) using at least half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is started to be executed. When the operation acceptance is made by the player while the second acceptance permissible state is generated and the mood image (integrated mood image) is being displayed, the after-operation effect according to the operation acceptance (effect display device) At least one of the display change in 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body is started, and the mood image (integrated mood image) is hidden. A narrow area disappearance effect (narrow area disappearance effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed.

Here, the disappearance effect (wide area disappearance effect, narrow area disappearance effect) means that a part or the whole of the displayed image (integrated image) is made hard to see or made invisible. It refers to the "image different from the image" and the "display effect on the image" displayed. Such an extinction effect (disappearance effect) may be executed as an image displayed in a different layer before the layer in which the mimic image (integrated mimetic image) is displayed, for example. , The image (integrated image) and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the image (integrated image) is displayed in the moving image. The effect may be such that it becomes difficult to visually recognize it, or it is executed by changing the display mode of the image (integrated image) itself (display effect). May be However, as such an extinction effect, in order to suggest the degree of expectation or to improve the enjoyment of the game, when hiding the image (integrated image), what is this? It goes without saying that it is more desirable to display it as a separate image.

Also, "when the mood image (integrated mood image) is hidden... the disappearance effect is executed" means that "when the mood image (integrated mood image) is hidden, .."Disappearance effect is executed", or "As the image (integrated image) disappears (the image (integrated image) itself has high transmittance. It may be "the disappearance effect is executed" or "the disappearance effect is executed after hiding the image (integrated image)". , Is meant to include any of these aspects. Also, in the process of hiding the image (integrated image), the fact that the transmittance of the image itself is increasing becomes "when the image (integrated image) is hidden. ... The disappearance effect is executed".

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect in response to the operation acceptance by the player is started to hide the mood image, the wide area disappearance effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there is a case where the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed and a case where the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to enhance the performance until the disappearance of the mock image (integrated mood image).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such an extinction effect (image at extinction) is executed, in the narrow area extinction effect (image at extinction of narrow area), the narrow area extinction effect (narrow image) The background image that was displayed before the area image disappeared image is displayed until the narrow area disappearance effect (narrow area disappeared image) is hidden or after the operation. While (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed, this is displayed (maintained) without being changed. On the other hand, the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is displayed before the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is displayed based on the operation acceptance by the player. The background image has a different background until the wide area disappearance effect (the wide area disappearance image) is hidden or after the post-operation effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is executed. It is supposed to change to an image.

That is, when the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is executed, at least a part of the background image is deleted from the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance time) in addition to the full-scale image (integrated complete image). Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize by the image), the background image is changed (replaced) with a different background image aiming at the timing at which such a wide area disappearance effect (image at wide area disappearance) is executed. As a result, it is possible to realize a smooth production transition (transition to a new production phase) using the button production. For example, the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance time image) is an image displayed in a layer that is before the layer in which the image (integrated image) and the layer in which the background image is displayed are displayed. Alternatively, the mood image (integrated mood image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and one of the mood image (integrated mood image) is displayed in the moving image. A part or the whole or a part or the whole of the background image may be expressed by the image (disappearance effect) to be difficult to be visually recognized.

On the other hand, when the narrow range disappearance effect (the narrow range disappearance image) is executed, the narrow range disappearance effect (the narrow range disappearance image) is hidden or after the operation. Since the background image is not changed while the effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is executed, effect transition (transition to new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, the player is interested in whether the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) or the narrow area disappearance effect (narrow area disappearance image) is displayed in addition to the post-operation effect. As a result, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest related to the mock image from the time when the mock image (integrated mood image) is displayed until it is hidden.

Also, when the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is displayed, a big hit is obtained as a post-operation effect than when the narrow area disappearance effect (narrow area disappearance image) is displayed. The ratio of the appearance mode at the time of a big hit, which appears only when the jackpot is high, is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance permission states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states corresponding to the wide area disappearance effect (image when wide area disappearance is performed). As one of the acceptance acceptable states, a first acceptance acceptable state and a third acceptance acceptable state are prepared respectively. In addition, a plurality of acceptance permission states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states corresponding to the narrow area disappearance effect (image when the narrow area disappearance is performed), and these acceptance acceptance states are available. The second acceptable reception state and the fourth acceptable reception state are prepared as one of the above.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first acceptance permissible state, a game in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state The player can accept the operation, and the second acceptance permissible state is such that the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not suppressed. What has become is as described above. That is, when a narrow range extinction effect, which is relatively inferior in rendering performance, is performed, depending on the player, the particular type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is not in the suppression mode but in the non-suppression mode. Since the operation can be accepted (the second acceptance allowable state), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game enjoyment caused by the fact that the wide area extinction effect, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, when the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, the effect is relatively expressed. Since the superior wide area type disappearance effect is performed (first acceptance allowable state), the operation acceptance by the player can be accepted while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game due to the lack of playing.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least in the specific setting condition (one production state), the operation is detected within the set time in which the operation reception by the player is allowed in the first reception permissible state. If not, it is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second acceptance permissible state, within the set time during which the operation acceptance by the player is permitted. As described above, when the operation is not detected in step S1, the operation is executed in a non-automatic reception mode in which the same display change as when the operation is detected is not generated. That is, in the first acceptance permissible state in which the wide area disappearance effect is performed, it is feared that the entertainment of the game will be deteriorated when the user forgets to operate it due to its high performance, but it is executed in the automatic acceptance mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player forgets to operate it. In other words, in this case, even when the player does not accept the operation and the automatic acceptance functions, the wide area disappearance effect is executed in the same manner as when the operation is accepted by the player. On the other hand, in the second acceptance permission state in which the narrow range disappearance effect is performed, since the execution is performed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, the set time elapses without the player's operation (second acceptance permission). When the state is finished), the mood image is displayed without performing post-operation effects (at least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, an effect sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body). It will be hidden. In this respect, in the second acceptance permissible state, the narrow area disappearance effect is executed even when the mood image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not executed, which causes a forgetting operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the effect after the operation is not executed. At this time, the narrow area disappearance effect may be executed in the same mode (the same image) as when the operation is received and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second acceptance permissible state according to this example, the narrow area type disappearance effect that appears when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed, and the case where the operation acceptance is not performed and the after-operation effect is not executed The mode (image) different from that of the narrow-range extinction effect that appears in FIG.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a reception that allows the player to accept an operation while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state The allowable state includes at least the first acceptance allowable state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance allowable state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. That is as described above. In the fourth acceptance permissible state, the operation can be accepted by the player while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the acceptance-permitted state, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression level than the fourth suppression mode, or is operated by the player in the non-output state. It has also been described above that the reception can be made. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation is accepted by the player in the fourth acceptance allowing state, the narrow range disappearance effect is executed instead of the wide area disappearance effect. . That is, when the narrow range extinction effect, which is relatively inferior in rendering performance, is performed, a specific type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed prior to that, but the degree of suppression is reduced. As a result (the fourth acceptance permissible state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that the wide area extinction effect, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation reception can be performed while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or in the non-output state. In the case (first acceptance allowable state), since the wide area type extinction effect relatively excellent in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is not low. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

FIG. 427 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second acceptance permitted state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 429 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the second acceptance permissible state occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation/non-time saving), and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. First, effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 429(a)). )), during the execution period of the variation effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "second variation pattern" itself. It will be.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained by the effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set as shown in FIG. 427(b). In the second acceptance permissible state (effective period), the operation acceptance regarding the second post-operation effect is allowed when the timing tB3 when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started. Is generated (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 429(d)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the second acceptable reception state (valid period),
-"BGM reproduction sound (specific type effect sound)" according to the second fluctuation pattern, for example, operation reception while the BGM reproduction sound during normal fluctuation maintains the output state in the non-suppressing mode. The operation is not permitted within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) that is in the allowable “non-suppressed reception allowable state (see FIGS. 427(a) and 427(b))” and that allows the operation to be received. In this case, the "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 427(h))" in which the after-operation effect (second after-operation effect) corresponding to the second acceptance permitted state is not generated
It is generated as a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, the set time (effective period) during which the operation reception is allowed without the directivity such as "the sound of the BGM reproduction" is suppressed to suggest the occurrence of the acceptance permitted state. ) Is suddenly set (non-suppression reception effect), the player may be surprised by the side, and a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time is ended without the post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity for the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) to be generated, it is possible to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

However, such a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" is a post-operation effect (here, a second post-operation effect) that is performed only in a big hit than a "suppression/automatic reception effect" described later. Although the percentage (which may be 0% or 100%) is low, if the player often does not produce post-operation effects against the player's intention, the interest in the game may deteriorate. I'm worried. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 427 (b), (e), and (i), a set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. When the timing tB2, which is slightly before, arrives, the output of the "acceptable acceptance sound (here, the first acceptable sound)" is started (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 429(c)"), and the timing within the set time Even if an operation is received at tB3a, the output state is maintained in a state of straddling the operation. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at a timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second acceptance permissible state is set. It may be difficult to frequently announce that the operation is not completed in time for the player to notice that the reception has been accepted and the operation after the operation (here, the second operation after the operation) does not occur. You will be expected. However, the "acceptable acceptance sound (here, the first acceptable sound)" does not necessarily have to occur before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) occurs, and for example, the generation timing of the set time. You may make it generate|occur|produce according to the generation timing of tB3.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Picine!" and "press!" The second allowable sound to be output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 427 (f) and (j), in the second acceptance permissible state, the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. Is output, and even if the output limitation of the "acceptable sound" is delayed, a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when the player tries to operate.

By the way, in the second acceptance-permitted state, as a countermeasure against sudden setting of the set time or execution of the non-automatic acceptance mode, the operation means (here, the operation means) is operated even when the operation acceptance is not permitted. It is conceivable that by repeatedly hitting the button 410), a player may try to make sure not to miss the opportunity for post-operation effects. However, in this case, since the operation acceptance is permitted and the post-operation effect is started immediately, the started effect is “what is performed according to the operation acceptance (post-operation effect)”. However, it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "a thing that is automatically generated as a mere notice effect that is unrelated to the operation reception", and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 427 (particularly, FIG. 427 (e)), in the second acceptance-permitted state, the “acceptance-acceptable sound (first acceptance sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) has occurred. When the effect reception is made at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is ended, but the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and is set as the first allowable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing when the output ends (the same timing tB3c (FIG. 427 (e), (i) as when there is no operation). It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a "thing that is being performed (post-operation effect)" or "an object that is automatically generated as an effect that is not related to operation reception". Like

Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 427, when the effect reception is performed within the set time of the second acceptance permissible state (timing tB3a in the figure), the effect display device is used as the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 427 (d)). See). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tB4, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, the output sound after operation (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is made. However, even if the operation is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output when the timing tB4 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the condition.

In the example production shown in FIG. 427, when the timing tB2 before the timing tB3 when the set time of the second acceptance permissible state is set arrives, in the production display device 1600, the operation means that is the operation target. Along with displaying a simulated image, a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the end of the set time is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 429(c)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at a timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second acceptance permissible state is set. It may be difficult to frequently announce that the operation is not completed in time for the player to notice that the reception has been accepted and the operation after the operation (here, the second operation after the operation) does not occur. You will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the sound image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) starts to be output, but the timing is not limited to this, and either one may be started earlier. You can Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptance sound (for example, only the mood image) may be started before the timing tB3.

Further, as described above, the mock image displayed when the second acceptable reception state occurs (the image mocking the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given) is the edge that decorates the edge of the mood image. The image is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the decorative image. The “integrated image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 410 to 426, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image (predetermined A display target region (section image KG) of the image) GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 410) having different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image IG”, and the same applies to the case of selectively displaying any of these modes. However, in the second acceptance permissible state, a special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 410(d)) among the plurality of modes prepared as the “integrated image” is selected by lottery (selection). (4) is not included as a target of (4), and only a mode different from the special mode (for example, a normal mode shown in FIG. 410A) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 429, the integrated lumber image IGa with the lowest expectation is displayed as the integrated lumber image IG.

In the example shown in FIGS. 427(c) to (f), it is assumed that the timing tB3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated image is displayed. When an operation is accepted in such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, post-operation effects (display change in effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable ornament). As at least one of the effect operations, the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are started (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 429(f)”).

However, as shown in FIGS. 427 (c), (d) and 429 (f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated image IG is not displayed when the post-operation performance is started. Instead of being turned off, the display state is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tB3a), the integrated image IG (specific layer) is not changed due to it, and a little time ( Until the timing tB3b after the elapse of a predetermined time) arrives, the "display of the integrated image IG" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in FIG. 429, a conversation notice (may be a chance) by the princess character is displayed as the post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) displayed by making a part or the whole of the integrated image in the display state invisible or invisible is made to appear (see FIG. 429). Equivalent to the situation shown in (g)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the integrated image IG is displayed, or the integrated image IG and the image (the disappearance effect). ) Is displayed as a single moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the moving image is represented by the image KSE (disappearing effect) and becomes difficult to be visually recognized. May be as described above.

As shown in FIG. 427(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the integrated image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearing effect) is started to be displayed. Instead of being turned off, the display state is maintained. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer in which the integrated image IG is displayed, the change caused by the integrated image IG is caused. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, the disappearance effect is displayed in a layer on the front side of the disappearance effect, so that the scale image and the gauge image GG are difficult to be visually recognized, or are invisible.

That is, in this case, the disappearance effect image KSE (also in the case of the wide area extinction effect image HSE described later) is used for the purpose of making it difficult or difficult to visually recognize the general image (integrated general image IG). Despite being in the situation of being displayed on a predetermined layer, the image (integrated image IG) itself displayed on a specific layer (back side (lower priority side than the predetermined layer)) itself The display in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted is maintained and no change occurs. Further, also for the gauge image GG, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced is continued across the operation reception. This makes it possible to visually recognize (at least a part of) the mode in which the operation reception is permitted, even in the process of making it difficult to visually recognize the general image (integrated general image IG) or making it invisible. This makes it possible to shorten the time to be maintained in the state shown in FIG. 429(f).

Then, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated image IG is ended within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) during which the disappearance effect image KSE is displayed (see "Fig. 429(i)"). The situation where the integrated image IG is not displayed on the layer after that, the disappearance effect (here, the narrow area disappearance that uses less than half of the predetermined display area) The effect image KSE will be displayed. The disappearing effect image KSE is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3b) from the start of its display (timing tB3b) (see FIG. 429 ( j)). In this regard, with regard to the timing tB3d when the non-display is performed, the display change (here, the liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 in the post-operation effects is irrespective of which timing the operation is accepted. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearance effect image KSE and the integrated image IG are displayed on a layer on the front side of the image (conversation notice by the princess character) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600, It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 429 (g) to (i), while the disappearance effect image KSE is displayed, an image (a conversation notice by a princess character) relating to a display change on the effect display device 1600 is visually recognized. It's getting harder. The same applies to the wide area disappearance effect.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, first, the post-operation performance is started, and in addition, the integrated image IG is displayed in any mode when the operation reception is performed. It is to be maintained in a state in which it can be grasped (whether in any of the modes in FIGS. 410(a) to (d), how much remaining time is suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) (“FIG. 429(f)”). Then, after this, the display of the disappearance effect image KSE in the form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “image relating to the display change in the effect display device 1600” and the integrated image IG among the post-operation effects is started. (Corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 429(g)”). As described above, as the disappearance effect, there are a narrow-range disappearance effect with low performance and a wide-area disappearance effect with low performance, and here, the disappearance effect is executed as the narrow-range disappearance effect. While the image KSE of the disappearance effect is displayed, the integrated image IG is hidden (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 429(i)”), and then the disappearance effect When the image KSE is hidden, the "image related to display change on the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character)" in the post-operation effect is finally visible in a clear state (" 429(j)".

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what the aspect of the integrated image IG was, and then what aspect appears as the disappearing effect, and then, Since it becomes possible to enjoy what form (here, a plurality of conversation notice forms with different expectations) appear as post-operation performance, when operation reception is made by such various performances. It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, the timing to start displaying the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tB3a but the timing tB3b or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing to be within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) being executed. However, also in this case, since the effect sound and the post-operation effect by the lamp are started to be executed at the timing tB3a, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself is still the timing tB3a.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 427 (g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptance permitted state has ended) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the second acceptance permissible state is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, after the set time elapses without the player's operation, the post-operation performance is not performed. The model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is hidden.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 427 (b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception permitted state) is finished, The model image on the specific layer (here, the integrated model image IGa) is not hidden, and the display state that has appeared when the acceptance state is maintained is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation acceptance is not permitted, at that time (timing tB4), the change caused by the change does not occur in the image (here, the integrated image IGa), and there Until the timing tB4a arrives after a short time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "display of the image" is continued in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted. There is. Further, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is slightly left even at the time when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception permissible state) is finished, and the display area remains after the timing tB4. The display area is reduced to "0".

With such a configuration, even if the valid period (second acceptance allowable state) is ended without any operation, the quality image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes with different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether it was. Moreover, since the display area of the gauge image is set to "0" after the expiration of the effective period, it is possible to urge the user to think "I was sorry" when the operation reception was not in time at the last minute. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the interest in playing games will be suppressed.

In this example, the valid period (second acceptance permitted state) ends without any operation accepted, compared to the time from the timing tB3a when the operation is accepted until the image is hidden (not visible). The time from the timing tB4 to the time when the simulated image is hidden (not visible) is shortened.

Further, as described above, in the second acceptance permissible state, after the operation, the post-operation effect is not executed if the set time has elapsed without the operation by the player being detected. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 427(g), the narrow area disappearance effect is executed when the general image (here, the integrated general image IGa) is hidden. While the narrow-area extinction effect is being executed, the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IGa) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the narrow range disappearance effect when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 427 (g)) is the narrow range disappearance effect when the after-operation effect is executed. It is executed in a mode (image) different from (FIG. 427(c)).

With such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether it is in time or not), it is possible to properly understand it by confirming the mode of the narrow-range extinction effect. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to grasp whether the post-operation performance is being performed. In order to suitably obtain such an action effect, as for the mode of the narrow area disappearance effect (FIG. 427 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed, when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 427 (g) )) should not appear. However, for example, the narrow area disappearance effect (FIG. 427 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is defined as “A (for example, change of the mood image itself)” and “B (for example, mood image). If the two modes of "another image display)" are executed together, the narrow range disappearance effect (Fig. 427 (g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed is executed by "A". May be. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted when the "B" mode does not appear in the narrow range disappearance effect, and the post-operation performance is performed. It is possible to avoid a decline in the entertainment appeal due to the lack of understanding of whether the game is in.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 427, when the timing tB1 prior to the timing tB3 at which the second acceptance allowable state occurs, the narrow area type pre-production using only less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. It is started (corresponding to "the situation shown in Fig. 429(b)"). Then, during the period in which the image KTH according to such a narrow area type pre-production is displayed, first, a display of a mock image (here, the integrated mock image IGa) of the operation receiving portion and the first allowance are displayed. The output of sound and the output of the sound are started (at timing tB2, which corresponds to “the situation shown in FIG. 429(c)”). At the time when the display of the general image (here, the integrated general image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the general image (integrated general image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH concerning the narrow area type pre-production. It's getting harder. That is, as the time passes, the range in which the image related to the narrow area type pre-production is displayed is reduced, or the transmittance thereof is increased, so that the “image (integrated image) The visual effect of gradually increasing the visibility of the image IG) is provided (FIGS. 429 (b) to (d)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, the narrow area type pre-production is being executed, and the second image is displayed while the image of the image (here, the integrated image of image IGa) is being displayed. The timing tB3 at which the acceptance permitted state occurs arrives and the operation acceptance is permitted (corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 429(d)”). That is, in this case, since the operation acceptance is allowed at a stage in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated muffled image IG) is being improved, the mood image (integrated muffled image IG) can be accepted. Confirm the mode (expectation level) as the model image (integrated model image IG) whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation level). After that, it becomes possible to provide a strategic production such as whether the operation reception (post-operation production) is made to be hidden or not.

Here, the image KTH used for such a narrow area type pre-effect is, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the general image (integrated general image IG) is displayed. It is also good to display the mood image (integrated mood image) and the image (narrow area pre-production) as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the mood image (integrated mood image IG) in the moving image. It may be one that expresses a state in which is gradually increased.

In the narrow area type pre-production, not only the image display on the production display device 1600, but also the production sound related thereto may be output. However, considering that the second acceptance permissible state is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to the operation, regarding the narrow area type pre-stage production, It can be said that, in order to increase the concentration of the effect, it is preferable to perform the effect display device 1600 as an image display without outputting the effect sound related thereto.

Further, as the narrow area type pre-production, a plurality of modes having different expectations may be prepared, and one of those modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination. .. However, considering that the second acceptance permissible state is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode and the post-operation effect is not executed if the user forgets to operate the operation, the narrow area pre-effect is: It is desirable to prepare only one aspect and display it according to only this aspect, in order to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player forgets to operate it.

FIG. 428 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the first condition is satisfied and the first acceptable reception state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 430 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permitted state occurs.

Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation/non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and it is assumed that the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU1511a, First, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect description according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 430(a)). )), an effect corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “first variation pattern” itself within the execution period of the change effect. It will be.

Then, as described above, in the effect related to the “first variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 428(b), the decoration pattern is obtained regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (advance determination). When the timing tC4 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the SZ variation effect is reached, the operation acceptance for the first post-operation effect is allowed. A permissible state (valid period) is generated (corresponding to the “state shown in FIG. 430(g)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the first acceptable reception state (valid period),
-"Suppression acceptance permissible state" (Fig. 428(a), (See (b))”, and, even when no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) in which the operation reception is allowed, When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the post-operation performance is started “automatic reception mode (see FIG. 428(h))”
It is generated as a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also referred to as “strong suppression mode”.

According to such a configuration, since the operation reception is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound" is being output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state (suppression reception effect), the game is played. From the operator's side, it becomes easy to operate immediately after the set time (effective period) occurs. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is the timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), you can enjoy operating with a sense of security that you will not miss the highly anticipated post-operation production .. That is, in such a “suppressed/automatic reception effect”, a ratio (0% or 100% that the post-operation effect is performed in a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit, compared to the above-mentioned “non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect”. Is also high as described above.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even in the "suppression/automatic reception effect", as in the case of the above-mentioned "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect", FIG. 428(b), (e), (i) As shown in, when the timing tC3, which is slightly before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) in which the production reception is permitted, occurs, the "acceptance acceptance sound (here, the first acceptance sound)" is output. The output is started, and the output state is maintained while crossing the timing tC4 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(f)”). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the “sound of BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)” is output in the suppression mode or is in the non-output state, the operation is performed at the timing tC3. It becomes possible to recognize that a state in which acceptance will be accepted will occur soon, and "not against the player's intention, the effect acceptance is made by activating the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation" It will be expected to make it difficult to frequently output. However, as described above, the “acceptable acceptance sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) is generated, and is generated at the generation timing tC4 of the set time, for example. You may do it.

In order to obtain the above-described effect (suppression reception effect) more preferably, the “sound of BGM reproduction” is changed from “output in non-suppression mode” to “output in suppression mode or non-operation”. Regarding the timing tC2a for transition to the "output state", an aspect different from that shown in the figure is provided, but "the length of the timing tC2a to tC3>the length of the timing tC3 to tC4" has a relationship " It can be said that it is desirable to set the time considerably before the above-mentioned output start timing tC4 of the acceptable reception sound that precedes the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may arrive before the wide-area pre-production is started.

Further, in the “suppression/automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 428(f) and (j), unlike the case of the “non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect” described above, As the “acceptance acceptable sound”, not only the first acceptable sound output as a sound effect such as “Picine!” but also the second acceptable sound that is a message sound such as “press!” is output. Moreover, in this example, the second permissible sound is delayed by a predetermined time from the timing tC3 at which the output of the first permissible sound is started, and the operation acceptance is already permitted (valid period). The output is started at the timing tC4a which arrives at.

That is, in this case, in the second acceptance permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated practicable image IG (practical image) cannot be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first permissible sound has the set time (valid period). The output is started without delay, and the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated practicable image IG (practical image) can be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first permissible sound is the set time (valid period). The output is started without delay, and the second allowable sound is started with delay after the set time (effective period) is generated.

With such a configuration, the first permissible sound (sound effect) is started to be output when the aspect of the integrated image IG (image) is difficult or invisible due to the pre-production. After that, when the first acceptance allowable state (effective period) is generated, it is possible to shift to a state in which both the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated image IG (image) is displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output. Will be able to. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is in the output state, the integrated mood image having a specific high expectation mode (special mode) It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the IG (image) will be displayed, and in such a situation, the integrated image IG (image) is gradually exposed (clear) Sex will be provided. Although described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 428 (c) and (f), the “second wide area type pre-production” of the wide area type pre-production is being executed (the image of the pre-production). Is displayed), the second allowable sound is started to be output.

As will be described later, in the “suppression/automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as “press!” is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Please put a sword!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 428(e), (f), (i), and (j), the “second allowable sound” is adopted as the effect sound output for a relatively short time. However, although the "first allowable sound" is adopted as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long time, the length relationship between these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, regarding the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound”, as shown in FIGS. 428(e), (f), (i), and (j), the output state is maintained for different times. At the same time, the timings of ending the output states (the timings of making the output inaudible) arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound" is in. It becomes possible to expect that it is difficult to frequently say that "the player receives the effect by the activation of the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation against the intention of the player".
・A first situation in which only the "first allowable sound" maintains the output state among the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" ・Both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" 2nd situation in which the output state is maintained ・The "1st permissible sound" maintains the output state, but the "2nd permissible sound" has finished the output state (because it is inaudible) The third situation ・The fourth situation in which both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" have finished outputting (being inaudible)

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “non-suppression/non-automatic reception production” in the production example shown in FIG. 427 and “suppression/automatic reception production” in the production example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikyne!") is output as the "first allowable sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sound is output as the effect sound that is not output in the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect", but the sound effect ( Since the first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect", the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type effect sound)" is suppressed. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the production reception is allowed while the production performance is appropriately maintained (the second allowable sound) when the current situation is present (the first allowable sound). Allowable sound). However, the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 427 and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. You may make it output.

It should be noted that the time length between arbitrary timings shown in each of the above-described diagrams and each of the later-described diagrams may be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or two frames. It may be the above time. For example, if the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) can be output in advance of the set time (effective period) even a little, the player is in a state where the operation acceptance is allowed (or It will be possible to recognize that the set time has expired earlier, until the set time ends or the timing when the automatic button function is activated. It will be expected to suppress forgetting to do the operation inside.

Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 428, unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. When the acceptance is made, the output state is terminated halfway based on the acceptance of the operation. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) is interrupted at that time, whereby the operation acceptance is permitted ( It is possible to recognize that the validity period has expired. As a result, it is less likely that an erroneous recognition that the operation has been accepted is made even though the operation has not been accepted, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the automatic acceptance function is activated against the intention of the player. become able to. If the operation is accepted by the operation before the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (effective period), the operation is performed at the time when the operation is accepted. Needless to say, even if the timing tC4f arrives, the automatic button function is not activated because the state in which the acceptance is permitted is ended.

Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 428(e) and 428(f), the first allowable sound starts to be output without delaying the occurrence of the set time (effective period), and the second allowable sound is set to the set time (effective period). The output is started after the occurrence of (period). With such a configuration, the first allowable sound starts to be output regardless of how fast the operation by the player is accepted, but the second allowable sound depends on the timing at which the operation is accepted. (When the operation is received between the timings tC3 and tC4a), the state in which the operation reception is allowed is ended without starting the output, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is ended. ) Will be executed. If the operation is performed between the timings tC3 and tC4, the operation is not accepted, and the first allowable sound is not ended with this as a trigger. If the operation is received before the timing tC4a arrives, the second allowable sound is not started to be output.

According to such a configuration, after the second permissible sound is confirmed to be output (after confirming that the first reception permissible state is reached), the post-operation performance is started or the second permissible sound is started. 2 Whether to start the post-operation performance without confirming that the permissible sound is output (without recognizing whether it is in the first reception permissive state or the second reception permissive state) Since it becomes possible to entrust the player with the choice, the range of games will be expanded, and it is expected that the interest of the game will be improved.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 428 (c) and (f), at least (the image of the pre-production (here, wide area type pre-production) is applied within the period of timings tC3 to tC4a. Some of them are not hidden and are kept visible. That is, in this case, in a situation where the second permissible sound is not yet output (timings tC3 to tC4a), the aspect (expectation level) of the integrated image (image) is not clearly visible due to the pre-production. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned amusement such as “leaving the player's side to select” more interesting.

Further, also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 428(d), when the operation reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tC4b in the figure), the after-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception. (Here, as the first post-operation effect), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member). Is generated at least (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(i)”). Here, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 427, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), While the non-display (invisible) is made at a specific timing (same timing) that comes after tC5, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is predetermined from the timing when the operation is accepted. The output state is maintained for a certain amount of time (certain time). In the example shown in FIG. 430, a background notice by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output related to liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 428, even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is “BGM reproduction sound ( It is desirable to set such that the output state is maintained when the timing tC6 at which the "specific type of effect sound)" is output from the suppressed state (non-output state) in the non-suppressed state.

On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is ended at the timing tC6 when the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppressing mode. That is, in this case, at the timing tC6, both the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppressing mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effect is large. It is expected that it will be changed and the game will be improved. However, in place of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may be maintained at the timing tC6. Further, the “sound of BGM reproduction” may be gradually returned by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressing mode.

Also in the effect example shown in FIG. 428, when the timing tC3 before the timing tC4 when the set time of the first acceptance allowable state is set, the operation which is the operation target in the effect display device 1600. A practicing image of the means is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the end of the set time is finished is displayed (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(f)”). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at a timing tC3 slightly before the timing tC4 at which the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) of the first acceptance permissible state is set, and the "operation It may be difficult to frequently announce that the operation is not completed in time for the player to notice that the acceptance has been permitted, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ends without occurring. You will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the sound image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) starts to be output, but the timing is not limited to this, and either one may be started earlier. You can Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptance sound (for example, only the mood image) may be started before the timing tC4.

In addition, as described above, the mock image displayed when the first acceptance allowable state occurs (the image mocking the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given) is also the edge that decorates the edge of the mood image. The image is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the decorative image. The “integrated image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 410 to 426, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image GG( A display target area (partitioned area KG) of the predetermined image GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 410) having different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image IG”, and the same applies to the case of selectively displaying any of these modes. However, unlike the second acceptance permissible state, in the first acceptance permissible state, a special aspect having a high degree of expectation among a plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated image IG” (for example, FIG. 410). As described above, the aspect (integrated image IGd) shown in (d) is included as a target of the lottery (selection) and can be displayed.

By the way, in the first acceptance permissible state (FIG. 428) executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the remaining time is displayed based on the time until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated when there is no operation is reached ( It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first acceptance permissible state (FIG. 428) according to the present embodiment, the remaining time display (not the time until the timing tc4f arrives) is based on the time until the timing tC5 when the set time ends. The gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and the gauge amount is dynamically displayed such that the gauge amount also becomes “0” when the set time becomes “0”.

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect is started to be executed due to the activation of the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left, It becomes possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operational opportunity" against the player's intention, and this makes it possible to set the next set time (effective period) regardless of the gauge remaining amount. You will be able to encourage operations at an early stage.

However, in the first acceptance permissible state (FIG. 428) executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted does not necessarily have to be started within the set time. May be started when or after.

In addition, the integrated image IG (image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 428 does not necessarily have to be the same as the integrated image IG (image image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 427. Good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 427, the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 428, the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target. May be depicted realistically.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 427, while the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target and is displayed as the integrated image IG (image), In the example shown in FIG. 428, the handle portion 5012 (sword decoration body 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target, and is displayed as an integrated mage image IG (mould image) which is mocked (FIG. 423(a)-(d)). The "integrated image IGe to IGh" is as described with reference to FIGS. 423 to 426, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image is included in the peripheral decoration image. (Predetermined image) A display target area of GG (compartment image KG) is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 410) having different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image IG”, and the same applies to the case of selectively displaying any of these modes.

As described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tC4 in FIG. 428, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. There is That is, in this case, it may be confused as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (effective period) in which the production acceptance is allowed occurs, so the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tB3 in FIG. 427, there is no “when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. As the set time, it is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. At this time, the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated should be set after the timing at which 3 seconds have passed after the set time (effective period) has occurred, contrary to the intention of the player. It is desirable to control the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

Further, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 428, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means is operated, it is preferable that the effect reception is performed and the post-operation effect is executed. That is, the player may be confused if a situation in which the production is not accepted despite operating the operating means appears. Since it is difficult to further request an operation for the operating means on the side, even if an erroneous operating state is maintained, a performance reception is made when the operating means on the operating side is operated. It is desirable to do.

Note that, as described above, in the suppression operation acceptance performance, since the specific type of effect sound is output or non-output in the suppression mode before the operation opportunity is given, compared with the non-suppression operation reception effect. There is a concern that the performance will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a time longer than the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for a different time as the first allowable sound are used. It is prepared and any one of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIG. 428(e), and the “time to be maintained as the output state” is set as the shortest mode among the above plurality of modes. There is something. Further, it is desirable that the proportion (expectation level) of the big hit symbols appearing differently when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the above plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that “which of a plurality of modes is to be output as the first allowable sound” and “which of a plurality of operating means is to be used as an operation target” are obtained as separate determination results in the advance notice production determination. Alternatively, the determination result may be obtained as one determination result within the advance notice effect determination. However, in at least the first aspect among the plurality of aspects, the first allowance is obtained regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound be selectable. In addition, the second mode and the third mode can be selected regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation target. However, it is desirable to prepare a mode in which output is possible only when the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation target. Even when the first allowable sound is output in any of these modes, the output state is maintained for a length equal to or longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG. 427.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 428(c) to (f), it is assumed that the timing tC4 arrives and the operation is accepted while the integrated image IG (in this case, the integrated image IGd) is displayed. doing. When an operation is accepted under such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, post-operation effects (display change in effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable ornament). As at least one of the effect operations, the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are started.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 428 (c) and (d), in this example as well, the integrated maze image IG on the specific layer is not hidden at the time when the post-operation performance is started. , The display state from the time of being in the acceptance acceptable state is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(i)”), it is attributed to the integrated image IG. Until the timing tC4c when a little time (predetermined time) has elapsed without causing a change, the “integrated image IG is taken in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is allowed. The “display” is continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) displayed by making a part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the display state difficult to visually recognize or making it invisible is made to appear (see “Fig. 430(j)”). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer (predetermined layer) that is in front of the specific layer in which the integrated image IG is displayed, or the integrated image and the image. An image (disappearing effect) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated image in the moving image is represented by the image (disappearing effect) so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image. It may be the one as described above.

As shown in FIG. 428(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the integrated mood image IG is displayed on the specific layer, and the image HSE( displayed on the predetermined layer is displayed. The disappearing effect) is not hidden even when the display is started, and the display state is maintained as it was in the acceptance acceptable state. More specifically, even under the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), a change occurs in the specific layer in which the integrated image IG is displayed due to the integrated image IG. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on the predetermined layer in front of it, it is difficult to visually recognize the scale image and the gauge image GG, and the state is gradually made invisible.

Then, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated image IG is ended within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) during which the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated image is displayed. The image HSE of the disappearance effect (here, the wide area disappearance effect using half or more of the predetermined display area) is displayed under the condition that the IG is not displayed on the specific layer. The disappearing effect image HSE is not displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4c) from the start of its display (timing tC4g). In this regard, with regard to the timing tC4g of this non-display, the display change (here, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 in the post-operation effects is generated irrespective of which timing the operation is accepted. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearance effect image HSE and the general image (integrated general image) are displayed on a predetermined layer in front of the image (post-operation effect) relating to the display change in the effect display device 1600. And is displayed in a form overlapping with this. Therefore, while the disappearance effect image HSE is displayed (FIGS. 430(j) and (k)), it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (effect after operation). There is.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, first, the post-operation performance is started, and in addition, the integrated image IG is displayed in any mode when the operation reception is performed. It is maintained in a state in which it can be grasped (whether in any of FIGS. 410(a) to (d), how much remaining time is suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.). Then, after this, among the post-operation effects, the image HSE of the disappearing effect in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “image concerning the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)” and the integrated image IG. The display will start. As described above, as the disappearance effect, there are a narrow range extinction effect with low performance and a wide area extinction effect with low performance, and here, the disappearance effect is executed as the wide area extinction effect. While the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed, the integrated image IG is hidden, and when the image HSE of the disappearance effect is hidden thereafter, the post-operation effect The "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)" is finally visible in a clear state (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 430(l)").

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what the aspect of the integrated image IG was, and then what aspect appears as the disappearing effect, and then, Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of form will appear as post-operation performance, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the operation is accepted by such various performances.

In addition, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing to start displaying the image (post-operation effect) relating to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tC4b but the timing tC4c or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) being executed. However, also in this case, since the effect sound and the post-operation effect by the lamp are started to be executed at the timing tC4b, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself is still the timing tC4b.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 428 (g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the first acceptance permitted state has ended) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the first acceptance permissible state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the post-operation performance is performed even when the set time has elapsed without any operation by the player. Meanwhile, the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IG) is hidden.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 428 (b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled, it is the same as when the operation by the player is accepted. , The integrated image (here, integrated integrated image) is not hidden, and the display state is maintained. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time (timing tC4f), the change caused by the image (here, the integrated image) does not occur, and there Until the timing tC4fa when a little time (predetermined time) has passed from the arrival, the “display of the image” is continued in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted. There is. In addition, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is slightly left even at the time when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second acceptance permissible state) is finished, and the display area remains after the timing tC4f. The display area is reduced to "0".

With such a configuration, even when the post-operation performance is started by activating the automatic button function, the mood image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes with different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether it was.

Further, in this example, the time from the timing tC4c when the operation is received until the mood image is hidden (not visible) and the mood image is hidden (not visible) from the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated. ) It is supposed to be the same as the time it takes.

In addition, in this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), as shown in FIG. 428(g), the mock image (here, the integrated mood image IG) is not displayed. When the wide area disappearance effect is executed, the wide-area disappearance effect is executed, and the mood image (here, the integrated mood image) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of the effect, an image related to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 428(c)) when the operation by the player is accepted, and an image when the automatic button function is activated. The image is executed in the same manner as the image related to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 428 (g)) (all images are “image HSE”). This is a different part from the case of the example shown in FIG. 427 (the narrow area type disappearance effect when the simulated image is hidden in the non-automatic reception mode is different from that during operation).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not in time at the last minute, the same aspect as when the operation reception is in time appears, so that “the operation reception is in time and the post-operation performance is performed. It has become possible to encourage people to think that "there is a start of execution", and it is expected that a decrease in the entertainment appeal will be suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 428, when the timing tC1 before the timing tC3 when the first acceptance permitted state occurs, the wide area type pre-production using half or more of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. (Corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(b)”). Then, within the period in which the wide area type pre-production is being executed, the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) of the operation receiving portion and the output of the first permissible sound are started ( The timing is tC3, which corresponds to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(f)”. At the time when the display of the general image (here, the integrated general image IG) is started, a part or the whole of the general image (integrated general image IG) becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image related to the wide area type pre-production. ing. In other words, as time passes, the range in which the image related to the wide area type pre-production is displayed is reduced or the transmittance is increased, so that the "image (integrated image) ) Gradually increasing the visibility” is provided (FIGS. 430(f) to 430(h)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, the wide area type pre-production is being executed, and the general image (here, the integrated general image IG) is being displayed. The timing tC4 at which the allowable state occurs arrives and the operation acceptance is permitted. That is, in this case, since the operation acceptance is allowed at a stage in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated muffled image IG) is being improved, the mood image (integrated muffled image IG) can be accepted. Confirm the mode (expectation level) as the model image (integrated model image IG) whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation level). After that, it becomes possible to provide a strategic production such as whether the operation reception (post-operation production) is made to be hidden or not.

Here, the image used for such a wide area pre-production may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the general image (integrated general image IG) is displayed. , The image (integrated image) and the image (wide area type pre-production) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the image (integrated image) in the moving image is gradually increased. It may be one that expresses how it goes.

Regarding the wide area type pre-production, considering that it suggests the occurrence of the first acceptance-permitted state with a relatively high degree of expectation, unlike the case of the second acceptance-permitted state, in the presentation display device 1600. It is desirable to output not only the image display but also the effect sound related thereto. Then, a part of the effect sound related to such a wide area type pre-effect may be executed so as to function as the first allowable sound.

Further, as a wide area type pre-production, it is possible to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectations and selectively display one of those modes based on the result of the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination. It is desirable to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 428(c), the wide area type pre-production according to this example is started when the timing tC1 in the “first variation pattern” arrives, and the first acceptance allowable state occurs. It is executed across the timing tC4 and is ended within the set time of the first acceptance permitted state. However, the first wide area type pre-production and the second wide area type pre-production are sequentially executed as the wide area type pre-production from the start to the end of the wide area type pre-production. It is like this. These two wide area type pre-effects may be displayed as one moving image data set or may be displayed as different moving image data sets.

Here, the first wide area type pre-production is started when the timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 430(b)"), and the second wide area type pre-production is timing. When tC2 arrives, the display is started in a form that replaces the first wide area type pre-production (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(e)”), but any of these pre-productions is displayed. Even during the period, "a mock image of the operating means to be operated" is displayed during the period in which the pre-production is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 428(c), when the timing tC1a within the period in which the first wide area type pre-production is executed arrives, the mood image (integrated mood image) is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, at a relatively early stage (corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 430(c)”). In FIG. 430(c), the image HTH1 according to the first wide area type pre-production is described as "an image in which the whole of the general image (here, the integrated general image) is outlined" is produced. It is only a white state, and it is at a stage where it can not be said that it is an image of the effect button that is the operation target. After this, the "image A1 in which the entire image of the moxibustion (here, the integrated mood image) is outlined" is "at least the outline of the mood image (here, the integrated mood image) by at least one of the decoration and the pattern. The image is displayed as a “shaped image A2” (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(d)”), which suggests that the operation target is an effect button. From this, it can be said that such an “image A2” is a full-scale image of the operation means that is the operation target. That is, such an image A2 is executed as an effect that looks as if the "image HTH1 by the first wide area type pre-effect" was produced. The “outline of the image (here, the integrated image)” means the outline of the operation receiving part (here, the outline of the operation receiving part and the outline of the peripheral decoration image).

However, when the timing tC2 arrives, whether the “image A2 as a general image (integrated general image)” and the “image HTH1 related to the first wide area type pre-production” which have been displayed until then are not displayed. The "second wide area type pre-production" is started to be executed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 430(e)"). Then, when the timing tC3 within the period in which the second wide area type pre-production is being executed, the full-scale image (integrated full-scale image IG) is displayed again (in the “state shown in FIG. 430(f)”). Correspondingly, the timing tC4 at which the first acceptance permissible state occurs in the displayed state is reached (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 430(g)”). That is, the second-time image (FIGS. 430(f) to (k)) is continuously displayed from when the operation acceptance is permitted until at least it is not permitted, and the second-time mimetic image is displayed. An operation is accepted while the image is displayed, and execution of the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is started.

That is, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance-permitted state, the pre-effect is executed twice, and among the pre-effects, “the display is hidden before the operation acceptance is allowed”. "(1) image of the first time (Figs. 430(c) and (d))" and "2nd image of the second time (Figs. 430(f) to 430(k)) that continues to be displayed after the operation is accepted. With such a configuration, a higher degree of freedom can be achieved without considering the mode (result of effect determination, etc.) to be displayed when the acceptance acceptable state occurs. Since it becomes possible to display a mood image (middle image (first time) that is hidden before operation acceptance is allowed) under the direction design, it is possible to broaden the range of effects. In this sense, the “image (first time) that is hidden before operation acceptance is permitted” may be displayed when the operation acceptance is within the permitted period. It is desirable to display it as a non-present aspect (an aspect different from any of the aspects shown in FIG. 410).

Here, the mock image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-production is being performed is similar to the above-mentioned mood image displayed while the narrow area type pre-production is being performed. Since the display state is continued even after the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted occurs, it is displayed as one of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 410 (in the example shown in FIG. 428, , An integrated image IGd which is a special aspect). On the other hand, with respect to the mock image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-production is being performed, at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image (here, image A2). For example, the shape is expressed by deforming the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target, such as making the contour portion of the image of a round image round, or using a lot of curved lines without using many straight lines. A method of displaying as an image or the like can be adopted. In the narrow area type pre-production described above, an image having at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from the acceptance permitted state does not appear.

Further, when the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, the mood image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-production is performed is a plurality of the plurality of images shown in FIG. Regardless of which mode is displayed, the mood image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-production is performed can be displayed by one mode (same mode). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide area type pre-production can be exclusively used to "show which type of operation means will be given an operation opportunity soon". According to the first wide area type pre-production as described above, the player can be made to recognize the operation target without deteriorating the interest of the game, and thus the operation target is made to be recognized by the player. Then, the transition is made to the second wide area type pre-production in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such an operation effect, for the first wide area type pre-production, the operation means (the sword decoration) having a higher expectation among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). It can be said that it is more desirable to execute it only when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). That is, in this case, in either of the case where the acceptance acceptable state in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs or the acceptance acceptable state in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 occurs. However, prior to this, the wide area type pre-production can be executed. However, regarding the first wide area type pre-production, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword decoration body 5001. It will be executable only when granted. In this case, the first acceptance permitted state may be generated as the acceptance permitted state in which the operation opportunity can be given only to the sword ornament 5001. On the other hand, the second wide area type pre-production is executed both when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Made possible. At this time, the second wide area type pre-effect is executed in the same manner when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Or may be executed in a different manner.

Further, when the mock image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-production is performed is displayed as the integrated mock image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. However, even in such a case, for the mock image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-production is performed, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. You may make it display as an image which does not include. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the mock image (integrated mound image) is different. At this time, the mound image may be displayed as an integrated mood image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. May be displayed as.

According to the effect example described above, in the second acceptance permissible state shown in FIG. 427, the mood image (integrated mood image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptance sound is output as the acceptance permission sound. However, the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state shown in FIG. 428, the mood image (integrated mood image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptance sound and the second acceptance sound are respectively accepted acceptance sounds. It is possible to output. However, in the first acceptance permissible state shown in FIG. 428, even when a mode (low expected mode used in FIG. 427) different from the special mode is displayed as the general image (integrated general image IG). It is needless to say that the reception allowable sound is processed as described with reference to FIG. 428, and the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can be output as the reception allowable sound.

At the start of the output of the second permissible sound (message sound), the image related to the wide area type pre-production remains, and the form of the mock image (integrated mood image IG) is difficult to visually recognize. In a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the form of the general image (integrated general image IG), the state in which only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output is changed to the state in which the second allowable sound (message sound) is also output. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed in a special mode by the acceptance sound. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the general image (integrated general image IGd) having a special aspect is exposed. In the middle, the general image (integrated general image IG) is gradually exposed.

The integrated image IG includes the display target area (compartment image KG) of the gauge image GG, but the integrated image IG is displayed in either a low expectation mode (IGa) or a high expectation mode (IGd). In this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG (the target portion where the gauge image GG is displayed and the portion that increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize how much remaining time is left, regardless of the mode of the image.

As described above with reference to FIG. 410, the low-expectation mode (IGa) and the high-expectation mode (IGd) differ not only in the mood image but also in the peripheral decoration image. Further, although the operation means (effect button or the like) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the general image, the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

According to the effect example described above, when in the predetermined game state, the acceptance allowable state at the time of suppression that allows operation acceptance while the specific effect sound is suppressed, and the specific effect sound are suppressed. Although there are a plurality of acceptable reception states during non-suppression in which operation reception is permitted while there is no operation, the integrated image IG is a special mode in the first acceptable reception state among the acceptable reception states during suppression. While it is possible to display, in the second acceptance-permitted state of the acceptance-permitted state during non-suppression, the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in the special aspect (IGd) and is different from the special aspect. Can be displayed in. In the second acceptance permissible state, the integrated image IG is not displayed selectively from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) different in expectation except the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). Only the display may be possible. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the performance is poor compared to when the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, after displaying the integrated image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated image is one of the modes shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 420 and 421). ) Is adopted and displayed as described above. However, when such a third acceptance permissible state (a valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease) is generated, as in the case of the first acceptance permissible state, prior to this, "the sound of BGM reproduction (specific type Effect sound)” is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or the non-output state), and the post-operation display that does not appear in the other acceptable reception states including the first acceptable reception state and the second acceptable reception state ( It is desirable that the post-operation effect) and the post-operation output sound be executed. That is, when the “BGM playback sound” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state) when the acceptance acceptable state occurs, it is expected that a mode (special mode) with a high degree of expectation is displayed as the integrated image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, the performance is inferior to the case where the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output unsuppressed, which makes the game stand out. There is concern about a decline in interest. In this respect, in the third acceptance permissible state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can appear, and after-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed. Even if the special mode does not appear as the integrated image IG, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the entertainment.

However, in any of the first acceptance permitted state and the third acceptance permitted state, the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type effect sound)" in the suppressed state (or non-output state) is triggered by the operation acceptance. It is preferable that the output is not restarted in the non-suppressing mode, and the display change or the output sound after the operation is performed while the suppression state (or the non-output state) is maintained.

Even if the reception acceptable state occurs after the “sound of BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)” is set to the suppressed state (or non-output state), when the third acceptance permitted state occurs, 1 Unlike the case of the acceptance acceptable state, the integrated image IG may not be displayed in a special mode, and may be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the “sound of BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state), either the first acceptance permitted state or the third acceptance permitted state It will be possible to add interest in what happens.

Further, in the third acceptance permissible state, it is assumed that the display area of the gauge image GG is executed as an effective period in which the display area is not reduced, but instead of this, a mode in which the display target area of the gauge image GG is not included (FIG. 425, FIG. 426), it may be executed as an effective period in which a mock image (which may be an integrated mood image or may not be an integral mood image) is displayed. It can be said that even with such a configuration, the same operational effect can be achieved. Needless to say, in this case, the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types with different occurrence conditions are prepared as acceptance acceptable states, but this is the case when an acceptance acceptable state different from the first acceptance acceptable state occurs. However, when this is the acceptance type of the specific type, it is desirable that the integrated image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd). However, for the acceptance acceptable state in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in the special aspect (IGd), it is preferable to execute the acceptance acceptance state in the automatic acceptance aspect in order to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the user forgets to operate. Is desirable.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 428, the automatic button function is activated at a predetermined timing within the set time (effective period), but when the set time (effective period) ends, or after the end, the automatic button function automatically The button function may be activated, and the execution of “the same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is accepted within the valid period” may be started. In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is validated is the same as the “processing from timing tC4f” shown in FIGS. 428 (g) and (h).

429 and 430, the image itself is set to have a predetermined transmittance so that the image behind the image can be visually recognized although it is difficult. Good.

According to the effect examples shown in FIG. 427 to FIG. 430, when the operation by the player is accepted or the automatic button function is activated and the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the image of the image (integrated Both the aspect of the chemical image IG) and the aspect of the gauge image GG are displayed in a good visual state without being made difficult by the disappearance effect (FIG. 429(f), See FIG. 430(i)). As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-operation performance while recognizing in which mode the mood image (integrated mood image IG) is displayed and how much time is left. It becomes possible to improve the interest in playing games.

In the example production shown in FIG. 429, even if the operation reception is performed and the post-operation production (second post-operation production) is executed in the second reception acceptable state, the background image is displayed before and after the post-operation production is started. This is maintained without causing a switch. On the other hand, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 430, when the operation reception is performed and the after-operation effect (first after-operation effect) is executed in the first acceptance allowable state, before and after the after-operation effect is started. The background image is switched (after operation, the space background).

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and it is possible to appropriately cause the background image to be switched even if the user forgets to perform the operation. Will be able to progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the acceptance acceptable state in which the automatic acceptance function is not enabled, the background image is not changed, so when the operation is forgotten, the background image is not switched or only the background image is displayed. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenient events such as sudden changes.

In addition, in the second acceptance permissible state, after the operation acceptance (or the activation of the automatic button function) is performed, a large part of the display area becomes invisible because it overlaps with the image HSE applied to the wide area disappearance effect. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a small portion that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide area disappearance effect, by checking the image in that portion, the state after the operation can be confirmed. Can be recognized, and the disadvantage caused by executing the wide area disappearance effect can be eliminated. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, when the operation reception (or the activation of the automatic button function) is performed in the second reception permissible state, after the operation in a mode in which the jackpot pattern appears relatively high. To make the background images when the post-operation production is executed different from each other when the production is executed and when the post-operation production is executed in a mode in which the jackpot pattern appears relatively low. Is more desirable. The ratio of these may be 0% or 100%. In this case, the background image itself is changed when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the jackpot pattern appears relatively high, whereas the post-operation effect is changed in a mode in which the jackpot pattern appears relatively low. The background image may be maintained unchanged when is executed.

In the above-described production example, when giving an operation opportunity, a case where a specific type of effect sound is output in a non-suppressing mode (second acceptance allowable state) and a state in which a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressing mode There is a case where it is set to a non-output state (first acceptance permissible state), and the ratio (expectation level) of the post-operation effect that is executed in such a manner that it appears only when the big hit is won depending on the type Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance when the operation opportunity is given. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In the first acceptance permissible state, when a manipulation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or a non-output state, so that when an after-operation effect occurs, It is decided to make some creative ideas so that the corresponding production sound can be heard prominently. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the acceptance permission sound output when the first acceptance permission state occurs, when the performance acceptance is performed when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state, the performance acceptance is performed. Since the output state is ended based on this, the effect sound according to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptance acceptable sound.

There are a plurality of types of acceptance permission states in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). In any of these acceptance permission states, operation acceptance is performed when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state. Then, it is desirable that the acceptance permission sound be terminated halfway. On the other hand, a plurality of types are prepared as the acceptance acceptable state in which the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd). However, in the acceptance acceptable state, when the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state. When the operation acceptance is performed, the acceptance permission sound is terminated halfway, and when the acceptance acceptance sound is in the output state, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated halfway when the operation acceptance is performed ( It is desirable to include both the second acceptance permission state and the like) (can occur under different conditions).

As described above, the acceptance permission sound includes the sound effect and the message sound. In this respect, the message sound is always interrupted when the integrated reception image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa) when the production is received in the output state, whereas the sound effect is , When the integrated image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), it is not interrupted when it is interrupted when the production is accepted in the output state (first acceptance allowable state) It is desirable to set the time (second acceptance acceptable state). It is desirable to prepare a plurality of types of acceptance-allowed states including the first acceptance-allowed state as the acceptance-allowed states in which the message sound is output.

In the wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 428 and FIG. 430, it is realized by sequentially executing the first wide area type pre-production. In this regard, in both the first wide area type pre-production and the second wide area type pre-production, a mock image (integrated mood image) showing the operation means (operation receiving portion) which is the operation target is displayed. However, the simulated image A2 displayed within the execution period of the first wide area type pre-production is the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state). Is different from, and does not gradually change to the general image (integrated general image IG).

That is, the image A2 (FIG. 430(d)) displayed in the first wide area type pre-effect is not displayed when the second wide area type pre-effect is executed prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance allowable state. The display state (invisible state) is set. Then, after a predetermined time in which no image of the operation target is displayed (maintained in an invisible state) (FIG. 430(e)), as the image of the second wide area type pre-production within the execution period. An image different from the mock image A2 displayed in the first wide area type pre-production is displayed (FIG. 430(f)). And, this “second image within the execution period of the wide area type pre-production” is the actual image (integrated image IG) itself displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state). The image HSE related to the second wide area type pre-production is displayed in a manner crossing the occurrence of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state), so that the image (integrated image IG) is displayed. The operation acceptance will be accepted. The general image (integrated general image IG) is also displayed when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is started to be executed (FIG. 430(i)). It is designed to be displayed for a period from before the acceptance acceptable state occurs until after it ends.

Here, when the mock image A2 is displayed in the wide area type pre-production (the first wide area type pre-production), the operation means (operation receiving portion) which the mood image A2 is making is about to be displayed (other productions). Opportunity will always be given (without sandwiching). That is, in the example of the above-described effect, the accept image is allowed to be generated while maintaining the display state of the mage image A2. "A state in which no image of the user is displayed" is once generated, and then the image of the operating means (operation receiving portion) is drawn differently from the first time (A2). It is designed to be displayed as an integrated image IG).

According to such a configuration, in order to suggest that an acceptance acceptable state with a high degree of expectation occurs, operation acceptance is allowed even when the mood image is displayed for a long time as a pre-production. It is expected that the operation will be prompted without delaying the timing. That is, if the mood image is displayed for a long time as the pre-production and the acceptance acceptable state is generated while the mood image is being displayed, the timing at which the operation acceptance is permitted suddenly arrives. This may result in frequent operation delays even though the pre-production is being performed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance permitted state, a mood image having a depiction different from the mood image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is preceded. Not only is it displayed, but after a time in which no mood image is displayed, a mood image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is displayed. That is, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the first acceptable reception state can occur only within a period after the mood image displayed within the set time of the acceptable reception state is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation delay from occurring while displaying the mock image as a pre-production for a long time.

In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the “time required for the first wide area type pre-production” and the “time for which the mock image A2 is displayed” are set after the “second wide area type pre-production is performed. It is more preferable to set so that the "1 time until the acceptance acceptable state occurs" or "the time from the display of the full image (integrated image IG) to the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptable state" becomes shorter. The desirability is clear. The mimetic image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide area type pre-production.

Further, in order to preferably obtain such an action and effect, regarding the mock image (integrated mood image IG) displayed in the second wide area type pre-production, “motion in the movable region” as the operation unit (operation receiving unit) "And "behavior when operated" are displayed dynamically (see FIG. 411 etc.), while the image A2 displayed in the first wide area type pre-production is It is more desirable to display without dynamic display. The dynamic image (integrated dynamic image IG) displayed in the second wide area type pre-effect continues its dynamic display state even after the first acceptance permitted state occurs. In addition, the image of the small area (integrated image IG) displayed in the pre-production is also in the form of expressing the "movement in the movable area" and the "behavior when operated" as the operation means (operation receiving portion). This is dynamically displayed, and the state of the dynamic display is continued even after the second acceptance permitted state occurs.

430(f) is a state image (integrated image IG) in the state, and 430(g) is a state image (integrated image IG) in the state shown in this image Although the same in itself, the transmittance may be different.

As for the image KTH relating to the narrow area type pre-effect shown in FIG. 429, it is more preferable to display the entire image (integrated image IG) as an image having a size capable of being covered from the front side. . Then, the display area of the image KTH is reduced and/or the transmittance thereof is increased, so that the image of the image KTH is displayed from the position where the image KTH was displayed (the integrated image IG). ) Is desirably displayed in such a manner that it gradually becomes exposed as time passes.

Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 relating to the wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 430, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the mock image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the mock image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the mock image (integrated muffled image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the mood image (integrated muffled image IG)). That is, after the image HTH2 is displayed as an image having a size capable of covering the entire mock image (integrated mood image IG) from the front side, as in the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect (FIG. 430 ( e)), the display area is reduced and/or the transmittance thereof is increased, and thereby, a simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) from the position where the image HTH2 was displayed. Is gradually exposed with the passage of time. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed so as to make the depiction of the mimetic image A2 stand out, there is a demerit of making it difficult to visually recognize the mimetic image when giving an operation opportunity (any operation It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay occurs).

The wide area type pre-production is performed by sequentially executing the first wide area type pre-production and the second wide area type pre-production, and regarding the production sound output in the wide area type pre-production, these are treated as one sound data (1 It is desirable that the sound is output by playing back one sound effect/song).

Further, in the narrow area type pre-production shown in FIG. 429, the background image displayed before this is maintained without being changed in the narrow area type pre-production, but the wide area type shown in FIG. In the pre-production, the background image displayed from before this is changed in the wide-area pre-production (here, it is changed at the start of the wide-area pre-production). In such a configuration, the background change can be executed as a part of the wide area type pre-production, and thus the front effect having a higher directivity than that of the narrow area type pre-production which is limited to the partial production change. It will be executed as a production. It should be noted that the background image that was displayed before the narrow area type pre-production was performed (FIG. 429(a)) and the background image that was displayed before the wide area type pre-production was performed (FIG. 430( It may be a background image different from a)).

In the second wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 430(f), an integrated image which is integrated with the "periphery decoration image in which the partition image KG partitioning the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)" Although it is decided to display the mock image as the IG, in the first wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 430(d), it is decided to display the mock image in which such a partition image KG is not decorated (depicted). Thereby, in the first wide area type pre-production, it is possible to entertain the pre-production without causing the player to worry about at least the remaining time. The section image KG that is not decorated (depicted) may be any image that does not display the section image KG that is decorated (depicted) in the integrated model image IG, and at least a part of the integrated model image IG. In addition to the mode in which the decoration (gauge region) is not displayed, a mode in which the shape itself is different from the integrated general image IG may be used.

As described above, the “acceptance state in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, and is executed in the automatic reception mode” Are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the “first acceptance permitted state” is prepared as one of the acceptance acceptable states. However, in these acceptance-permitted states, "a first wide area type pre-production (Fig. 430(c) to (e)) in which a mood image is displayed and hidden and the timing of occurrence of the acceptance-permitted state are straddled. In addition to the first acceptance-permitted state in which the second wide area type pre-production (FIGS. 430(e) to (g)) in which the mock image is displayed is performed, “the mood image is displayed and hidden. Specific reception acceptance in which the first wide area type pre-production is not performed and the second wide area type pre-production (FIGS. 430(e) to (g)) in which a mock image is displayed across the occurrence timing of the acceptance permitted state It is desirable to include the state. That is, in this case, in the first acceptance-permitted state, the post-operation effect is executed at a higher rate than in the specific acceptance-permitted state in a mode that appears only during a big hit, so that the timing at which the operation acceptance is permitted is higher than that. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game from the time when the timing (the timing at which the first wide area type pre-production) appears significantly before. In this case, the second wide area type pre-production performed when the first acceptance permitted state occurs and the second wide area type pre-produced performed when the specific acceptance permitted state does not necessarily have to be the same content. It may be executed as different effect contents (images). Further, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first acceptance permitted state and the second acceptance permitted state.

As described above, the “acceptance state in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppression mode and the execution is performed in the non-automatic reception mode” is the occurrence condition (variation). A plurality of different patterns (for example, patterns) are prepared, and a “second acceptable reception state” is prepared as one of the acceptable reception states.

The wide area type pre-production which is performed in the first acceptance permissive state is executed under the condition that "specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or not output. (BGM reproduction)" is executed for a longer time than the narrow area type pre-production (second acceptance permissible state) that is executed while being output without suppression, so this is maintained favorably for entertainment. You will be able to. In particular, by making only the first wide area type pre-production among the wide area type pre-productions be executed for a longer time than the narrow area type pre-production, it is suitable for amusement of interest even before the acceptance acceptable state occurs. Will be able to increase. The timing at which the "specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or not output may be reached while the first wide area type pre-production is being executed, or the first wide area type before. You may make it arrive before the production is started to be executed.

According to the above-described production example, when the wide area type pre-production (FIG. 430) is performed when the first acceptance permitted state occurs, the production change including the background image is caused, whereas when the second acceptance permitted state occurs. When the narrow area type pre-production (FIG. 429) is performed, the background image is not changed, and the production change is generated while maintaining the background image. Furthermore, in the first acceptance permissible state that occurs while such a wide area type pre-production is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation production (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether or not the operation is performed. On the other hand, in the second acceptance permissible state that occurs while the narrow area type pre-production is being performed, the production is advanced while the background image is not changed by the post-operation production and is maintained. There is. According to such a configuration, in the first acceptance permitted state, the background image is changed twice before and after the occurrence in the first acceptance permitted state, so that the effect is different from that in the second acceptance permitted state. It will be possible to greatly enhance the sexuality, it will be possible to further focus on the operation-related production.

In the wide area disappearance effect according to the example of the above-described effect, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 430(j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come after the timing at which the wide area disappearance effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 430(i), the post-operation effect (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed while the background image is not changed. Then, after the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the wide area disappearance effect first makes the background image displayed in the acceptance-permitted state difficult or invisible (FIG. 430(j)). The background image is not changed in the situation shown in Fig. 4), and then the background image is changed by displaying another background image (the situation shown in Fig. 430(k), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 430(l)). The other background image may be displayed in such a manner that it is gradually exposed while the wide area disappearance effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide area disappearance effect is finished. You may.

In the example shown in FIG. 430, as the post-operation effect, first, the display change in the liquid crystal display (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed. As the post-operation effect, execution may be started first, and the display change in the liquid crystal display may be started after this (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As described above, a plurality of "acceptance acceptable states in which the wide area disappearance effect is executed in the automatic acceptance mode" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.). As one of them, a "first acceptance allowable state" is prepared. However, in these acceptance permissible states, in addition to the “first acceptance permissible state”, “post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) in the same mode as the first acceptance-allowed state can be executed, but the wide area disappearance effect It is desirable to include the "special acceptance permissible state" that is executed as different images (the display timings may be the same). That is, in this case, even if the same post-operation effect is performed, the extinction effect will be different, so that it is possible to improve the effect and it is expected that a decrease in the entertainment level of the game is suppressed. become. The special acceptance permitted state may be the specific acceptance permitted state described above. The specific acceptance permissible state and the special acceptance permissible state are executed in the same manner as the first acceptance permissible state regarding aspects such as the display timing of the image, the processing regarding the output of the acceptance acceptable sound, and the processing regarding the disappearance effect. ..

As described above, a plurality of "acceptance acceptable states in which the non-automatic acceptance mode and the narrow range disappearance effect are performed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.). As one of the above, “second acceptance acceptable state” is prepared. However, in addition to the "second acceptance acceptable state", these acceptance acceptable states include "after-operation performance (third after-operation performance) of a type different from the second acceptance-allowed status (for example, conversation notice and movable body motion). ) Is possible, but it is desirable that the narrow-range disappearance effect includes a special acceptance permission state in which it is executed (the display timing may be the same) as the same image. That is, in this case, since the disappearance effect itself is displayed as the same image even if different post-operation effects are performed, it is easy to be in a situation where the operation is accepted regardless of the type of post-operation effects. You will be able to recognize. The special acceptance-permitted state is executed in the same manner as the second acceptance-permitted state regarding aspects such as the display timing of the image, the processing relating to the acceptance acceptance sound output, and the processing relating to the disappearance effect.

In the narrow area disappearance effect, the image KSE applied to the narrow area disappearance effect is hidden even after the post-operation performance is started to be executed and the general image (integrated joint image IG) is hidden. Instead, the display state is maintained (see FIG. 429(i)). In this regard, the mood image (integrated mood image IG) is longer than the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation performance is started to be executed) until the mood image (integrated mood image IG) is hidden. It is desirable to set such that the time from the non-display of () to the non-display of the image KSE applied to the narrow range extinction effect becomes longer. According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the display state of the image (integrated image IG) is maintained and the mode can be confirmed, but the after-operation effect is The reason why it is not revealed clearly is that it is not due to the "image in which the display state is maintained" but to the directivity of the "image KSE applied to the narrow range disappearance effect". As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. In this case, it is needless to say that the narrow area disappearance effect is performed by dynamic display using an image different from the mock image, rather than a fade-out that ends relatively early. With regard to the "dynamic display by another image" as such a narrow-range extinction effect, a plurality of types with different expectations are prepared and selectively generated according to the type of acceptance/reception state with different generation conditions. It is more desirable to do so.

According to the wide area disappearance effect according to the above-described production example, it is possible to expect a function that suggests that the first acceptance permitted state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode. On the other hand, in the second acceptance permissible state, since the operation is accepted only by the operation of the player and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect is executed without affecting the entire screen. However, it can be said that it is advantageous in that the post-operation effect can be immediately executed in a good visual recognition state by executing the narrow area type disappearance effect in which the image related to the disappearance effect is small. According to such a configuration, in the case of a wide area type disappearance fact, it is required to change the background image to secure its visibility, but in the case of a narrow area type disappearance fact, this is not changed. It becomes possible to secure the visibility only by performing the effect after the operation while maintaining the.

As described above, in the second acceptance permissible state, a plurality of modes (first mode) in which the proportion (0% or 100% may be stopped) of the jackpot symbol is different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination , (Including the second aspect), the post-operation effect (second operation effect) is executed. In this respect, in the case where the first mode (mode in which the ratio is relatively high) appears and the second mode (mode in which the ratio is relatively low) appears as post-operation performance (second post-operation performance), In each case, the narrow range disappearance effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state, a plurality of modes (third mode) in which the proportion (0% or 100%) at which the big hit symbol is stopped are different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination , (Including the fourth aspect), the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, in the case where the third mode (mode in which the ratio is relatively high) appears and the fourth mode (mode in which the ratio is relatively low) appears as post-operation performance (first post-operation performance), The wide area disappearance effect is executed in different modes (images), or when the third mode (a relatively high proportion) appears, the wide area disappearance effect is executed, and the fourth mode (relatively). It is desirable to execute the narrow-range extinction effect when a mode in which the ratio is low appears. The narrow range disappearance effect at this time may be the same as or different from the narrow range disappearance effect performed corresponding to the second acceptance permissible state.

With such a configuration, in the first acceptance-permitted state in which the wide-area disappearance effect may occur among the first acceptance-permitted state and the second acceptance-permitted state, the disappearance effect itself has a degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the low visibility of the post-operation effect by the wide area disappearance effect. It should be noted that not only the first acceptance permissible state and the second acceptance permissible state but also the later-described fourth acceptance permissible state and fifth acceptance permissible state in both the variation pattern that is a big hit and the variation pattern that is a big hit. It is possible that the above-mentioned first variation pattern and second variation pattern, as well as the fourth variation pattern and the fifth variation pattern, which will be described later, are “variation patterns at the time of a big hit and variation patterns at the time of loss (at the time of losing)”. It goes without saying that they are prepared as a pair.

Further, the second acceptance permissible state may be allowed to occur not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptance permitted state is generated at a relatively early timing within the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance permitted state is generated at a relatively late timing.

The timing at which the display output (display on the layer) of the image (integrated image IG) is ended within the period in which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed (timing from the reception of the operation to the time of non-display) Regarding, the first allowable reception state and the second allowable reception state may be different.

When the operation is accepted in the “situation in which the image KTH according to the narrow area type pre-production is displayed” shown in FIG. 429(d), the image KTH is not hidden by using this as a trigger. It is preferable that the post-operation effect is started to be executed while the display of the image KTH is continued. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 429(f). After that, when the narrow range disappearance effect is started, the "image KSE related to the narrow range disappearance effect" is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "image KSE related to the narrow range disappearance effect". It is desirable to develop the production as described above.

In addition, even when an operation is accepted in the "situation in which the image HTH2 according to the wide area type pre-production is displayed" shown in FIG. Instead, it is desirable that the post-operation effect be started while the display of the image HTH2 is continued. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 430(i). After that, when the wide area disappearance effect is started to be executed, the "image HSE concerning the wide area disappearance effect" makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the "image HTH2 concerning the wide area pre-production". It is desirable to develop the production.

In the example shown in FIG. 428, when the operation reception is allowed while the “specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction)” is in the non-output state, the “specific type effect sound ( Regarding "BGM reproduction)", it is not always necessary to re-output before the symbols are stopped. For example, at the timing tC6, either the “specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction)” that is already in the non-output state or the “effect sound related to the post-operation effect” that is output when the operation is accepted. Alternatively, a special effect sound different from the above may be newly output. The output of the special effect sound is not started upon receipt of the operation acceptance, but is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing within the variation pattern.

The image related to the wide area type pre-production and the image related to the narrow area type pre-production are displayed until the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is ended (or the automatic acceptance button is operated). Good. Further, the output state of the first permissible sound may be maintained until the set time of the reception permissible state is ended (or the automatic reception button is operated).

Further, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, the image of the operation receiving part is displayed in both the wide area type pre-production and the narrow area type pre-production, but in the wide area type pre-production (the first wide area type pre-production). The display is made in a mode (image data) different from the mode (image data) that appears in the period in which the operation reception is permitted (first acceptance permitted state). Thereby, in the wide area type pre-production (first wide area type pre-production), even if the mood image is displayed when the operation reception is not permitted yet, the operation reception is permitted. It becomes possible to appeal to the occurrence of the operation reception effect (acceptable acceptance state) while making it difficult to cause erroneous recognition, so that it is possible to perform a large-scale pre-effect that requires a relatively long time. become. In the second wide area type pre-production and narrow area type pre-production, the mood image (integrated mood image) is displayed as it is in the mode (image data) that appears during the period when the operation reception is permitted (acceptance permitted state). As the pre-production is being hidden (the display area is decreasing), this is gradually exposed. That is, in this case, the display image of the image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptance-allowed state occurs continues to be displayed from before the occurrence of the acceptance-allowed state to after it occurs. This is the same in the fourth acceptance permitted state described later.

In each of the effect examples shown in FIG. 427 (FIG. 429) and the effect example shown in FIG. 428 (FIG. 430), a change according to the operation reception (after-operation effect) Yes, at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) is not displayed but is displayed (and dynamic display) when the execution is started. (See FIG. 429(f), FIG. 430(i), etc.). After that, the disappearance effect (a narrow area disappearance effect or a wide area disappearance effect) is started to be executed (see FIGS. 429(g) and 430(j)). However, in the wide area disappearance effect executed in a relatively large range, it is difficult to visually recognize most of the change (the post-operation effect) that has appeared clearly once, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated. Therefore, when the narrow range disappearance effect is executed, a change in response to the operation acceptance (a change in display or a change caused by post-operation effects such as lamp light emission) is executed before the narrow range disappearance effect is executed. At least one) is started, and at this point, the image (gauge image) is not hidden and is displayed without being visually impaired by the narrow area disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area disappearance effect is executed, before the wide area disappearance effect is executed, a change (display change, lamp light emission, or the like) is performed according to the operation acceptance. At least one of the resulting changes) may not be initiated. That is, in this case, a change image (gauge image) at the time point when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the light emission of the lamp, which is the post-operation effect, which is the post-operation effect) is started in this case. Is not hidden but is displayed, but it is difficult to be visually recognized by the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 430(j)).

That is, when the narrow range disappearance effect is executed, at the time when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) in response to the operation reception is started, the operation is started. The display state of the mock image (gauge image) is maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the reception. In this case, at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the mood image (gauge image) is not made difficult to be visually recognized by the narrow area disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area type disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to display FIG. 428(j) after passing through FIG. 428(i). 428(j) may appear at the time when the execution is started.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, with respect to the acceptance permissible state executed in the “suppression operation acceptance production” in which the effect sound of the specific type can be suppressed, the suppression degree is relatively high or a non-output state. In addition to the first acceptance-permitted state executed in the “strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 428)”, the “weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. 427) whose suppression degree is relatively low. As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance permissible state executed in “)” are prepared. Note that in this case, the specific type of effect sound to be suppressed may be different effect sound or the like, and may be, for example, a sound effect of the same function such as a BGM reproduction effect sound. Good.

According to such a configuration, when a set time (effective period) in which the operation reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide the production performance with respect to how much the particular type of production sound is suppressed. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on whether the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)” or the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)” occurs. It is desirable that the proportions in which the patterns appear) be different. In addition, here, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)" occurs, the ratio (expected degree) in which the "post-operation effect according to the operation acceptance" is executed only in the jackpot , When the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance permissible state)" occurs, the "post-operation effect according to operation acceptance" becomes lower than the rate (expected degree) executed in a mode that appears only when the jackpot is won. ing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%.

As for the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)", an effect corresponding to a high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (a reach effect involving a background change, etc.) and even a reach state is not formed (or reach (A state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach.) While it is possible to appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance permissible state)” ", does not occur in the low expected effect pattern, but may occur as an effect corresponding to the high expected change pattern. Even with such a configuration, the jackpot expectation when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" occurs. Can be said.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more favorably, it is possible to generate a "special production state" that can be transitioned based on the satisfaction of a special production condition, and in the "special production state", the player Each time an operation is accepted during the set time (effective period) during which an operation prompting image (such as a scale image or gauge display) that prompts the user to perform an operation is displayed, a specific type of sound effect (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed each time a set time (effective period) during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. It becomes possible to provide directivity regarding whether (a plurality of aspects including a weak suppression aspect and a strong suppression aspect appears), and in addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation performance, Since the degree of expectation is also suggested by (how much it is suppressed), it is expected to further improve the enjoyment of the game when the production reception is permitted. In this case, the above-mentioned second acceptance permissible state does not occur in the "special effect state", but can be caused in an effect state (normal effect state) different from this.

Further, within the symbol variation, a variation pattern (for example, a high expected variation pattern) in which the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" and the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" are sequentially executable Of these, effects corresponding to specific fluctuation patterns) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first acceptance acceptable state)" on the side with relatively low expectations occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptable state) on the side with relatively high expectations" )” is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game in the case where the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). Like

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the deterioration of the gaming enjoyment when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" is:
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, production determination is performed. Regardless of which result is obtained as (preliminary judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the production of the specific variation pattern occurs when the production progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression mode) Operation reception performance)”
-Even when the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.), the performance of the specific variation pattern does not occur even if it reaches the predetermined timing When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.), it occurs when the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. When the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)" occurs in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)" is generated in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Compared to when it does not occur, the ratio in which the post-operation performance is executed in a mode with a high expectation when the effect reception is performed in the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)” (mode that appears only during the big hit) It is desirable to increase the rate of execution in (1).

With such a configuration, in the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance permissible state)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)" When it does not always occur, and when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" occurs, the post-operation performance with high expectation is executed in the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)". Since the ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to focus attention on whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" )” occurs, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" does not necessarily have to occur in the same variation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)". The "(first acceptance allowable state)" may occur within the first variation pattern, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptable state)" may occur within the fourth variation pattern.

FIG. 431 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance permitted state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 431 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the fourth acceptance permissible state occurs.

Now, for example, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (holding exhaustion) in the "special effect state" and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, First, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “fourth variation pattern” itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set as shown in FIG. 431(b). In addition, when the timing tD3 when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, the operation acceptance for the fourth post-operation effect is allowed, and the fourth acceptance allowable state (effective period). Generate. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptable reception state (valid period),
Setting the set time (valid period) during which the operation acceptance is allowed while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is output in the non-suppressed mode, but within the set time (valid period) When the operation is accepted by the user, the "bGM playback sound" is changed from the non-suppressed mode to the weakly suppressed mode (the mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) when triggered by the operation. 431 (a) and (b))”, and, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) in which the operation acceptance is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth acceptance permitted state. "Non-automatic reception mode (see Fig. 431(h))" in which no post-production (post-operation fourth-production) is generated
Is performed as a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect". As a method of outputting the “BGM reproduction sound” in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (maximum “100”) for the channel to which the “BGM reproduction sound” is assigned is set to the strong suppression mode (for example, Alternatively, a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) whose suppression degree is lower than the volume value (audible volume) is “0” can be adopted.

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (fourth acceptance permissible state)", unless the operation is accepted by the player's operation, "specific type effect sound (BGM Since the “playback sound) is not output to the state of being output in the suppression mode”, the “non-suppression reception effect (first reception permissible state)” illustrated in FIG. 427 is displayed as if it is occurring. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the player operates, the player recognizes for the first time that it is not the "suppression reception effect" by changing to the "state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode". Since it becomes possible, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by producing a surprise.

In addition, in order to obtain such an action effect, the fourth variation that allows “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 431)” to occur depending on the result of performance determination (notice determination, etc.) The pattern is set so that it can be selected only in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone). When the pattern is in the special effect state, "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 427)” can be selected depending on the result of the production determination (preliminary determination, etc.). A variation pattern that can be selected can be selected when the design variation is stopped than when the design variation is stopped. ) Is desired to be high. According to such a configuration, when the “conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect” appears, the expectation is higher than when the “non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 427)” appears. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by combining the above-mentioned surprise-like effect elements.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more favorably, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance permissible state)" can occur in both "normal production state" and "special production state". In the "normal production state", "non-suppression/non-automatic reception production (Fig. 427) is performed within the production corresponding to one variation pattern (one variation pattern that is paired in the winning or losing). )” and “suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception performance (FIG. 428 )” can occur sequentially, and in the “special performance state”, one variation pattern (a pair of winning and losing) is generated. Change condition), "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 431)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception performance (Fig. 428)" are sequentially performed. It is desirable to be able to occur.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance", when the set time (effective period) has elapsed without receiving an operation reception, "a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM reproduction) ) Is output in a weak suppression mode” and the subsequent production is advanced. That is, in this case, which of "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance" and "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance" occurred, and by extension, "normal performance state" and "special performance state" Since it is difficult to recognize in which situation it is, the subsequent production will be advanced, so it is said that the expectation is relatively low. Even when the "operation reception effect (effective period)" is generated, the operation by the player can be more actively urged.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a case where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 431)" occurs and "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 427)". In the case where "is generated," the same effect sound is output as the above-mentioned acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) over the same time, and this also causes "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance." (Fig. 431)" or "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 427)" is made difficult to recognize.

Further, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 431)", similarly to the case where the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 427)" occurs.
a. Prior to the acceptance of the operation acceptance, the narrow area type pre-production is performed at the timing tD1,
b. When the timing tD2 slightly before the occurrence of the set time arrives, the "acceptable acceptance sound (first acceptable sound)" is started to be output, and the output state is maintained while crossing the timing tD2. point,
c. The second allowable sound (for example, a message sound) is not output, but the first allowable sound (for example, a sound effect) is output.
d. When the timing tD2 slightly before the set time occurs, on the effect display device 1600, a mock image (integrated mood image) showing the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect is displayed. In addition, the gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the end of the set time is displayed,
e. Even if the operation acceptance is made during the output of the acceptance permission sound, the acceptance permission sound in the output state is not terminated halfway,
f. Point at which the display state is continued without hiding the image (integrated image) and the gauge image when the operation is accepted. g. A point where the narrow range disappearance effect is executed while the image of the joint (the integrated image of the joint) and the gauge image are displayed, and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow range disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow range disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the operation is accepted, and so on. Each of the configurations is also adopted, and this also causes any of "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 431)" and "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 427)". I try to make it difficult to recognize what I am doing. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, “a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the weak suppression mode. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the state has been changed to the "retained state", it is expected that the feeling of tension will be appropriately maintained every time the production reception is made.

Therefore, as in the case where the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 427)" occurs, for example, as shown in Fig. 429, the display method of the mood image, the gauge image, the narrow area type front effect, and the narrow area type disappearance effect is also shown. It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is also desirable to adopt the same aspect as the effect example shown in FIG. However, the same aspect does not necessarily have to be adopted.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 431)", if the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation is accepted. At least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and an after-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated as the corresponding after-operation effect. It has become. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tD4, regardless of which timing the set time (effective period) is received. On the other hand, the output sound after operation (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the operation is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect reception is performed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output when the timing tD4 has not elapsed. It is required to set to maintain the state.

Other than the performance examples shown in FIG. 427 and FIG. 429, the acceptance allowable sound, the operation-related display, the pre-production, the disappearance effect, and the post-operation production that appear in the “conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 431)” are different from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 427 and 429. It is possible to appropriately adopt the examples and modified examples, and it is desirable to use the same method for each.

In this example of performance, regarding the length of time (the predetermined fixed time) during which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the weak suppression mode, "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance (first Even if the operation is received at the latest timing tD4 in the set time (effective period) of “4 acceptance acceptable state)”, the timing of ending the weak suppression mode is the end timing of the effect sound related to the post-operation effect. It is set to arrive at the same time or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode related to the “sound of BGM reproduction” is ended may be set to be always the same as the timing at which the effect sound of the post-operation effect is ended. In any of such configurations, the post-operation effect when the effect reception is made can be emphasized.

By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) occurs, the degree of suppression thereof is high (strong suppression mode or non-output first acceptance permissible state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the weak reception mode is the fourth acceptance allowable state). However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or no output, or a weak suppression mode). Even if an attempt is made, in reality, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or non-output) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison target. In particular, when the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode do not have a large difference in the volume value when the volume is suppressed, this is even more the case, and this makes the sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs. Can be favorably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

However, in reality, if it is not possible to predict whether the game is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, it is feared that the interest of the game will be decreased. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect element useful for estimating whether the operation mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is provided within a period from when the operation reception effect is started to when it is ended. The following items are prepared in a time-sequential manner.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first permissible sound output when the fourth reception permissible state is generated is output midway even if the performance reception is made in the output state. While the output is not finished but is output for a predetermined time, the first allowable sound output when the first reception allowable state occurs is effected when it is in the output state. Then, based on the reception of the effect, the output is terminated halfway. In such a configuration, the first permissible sound itself has a function useful for estimating whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, the second acceptance sound is output in addition to the first acceptance sound. By confirming whether or not a sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first acceptance permissive state and the fourth acceptance permissible state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed, the special mode is included in the first acceptance-allowed state. In any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 410(a) to (d)), any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 410(a) to (c)) excluding the special mode in the fourth acceptance permissible state. Since it is displayed with, it is possible to infer whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the operation-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether the sound is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptance permission sound or the operation-related display is finished. Also, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. That is, in the after-operation effect according to the fourth acceptance permissible state (fourth after-operation effect), both the “effect by liquid crystal display” and the “effect by effect sound” are “constant from the time when the effect is accepted. In the post-operation effect according to the first acceptance permissible state (first post-operation effect), “effect by effect sound” is “a fixed time from when the effect is accepted”. However, the "effect by liquid crystal display" is "finished when a predetermined timing arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the first acceptance permissible state, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" is depending on the timing at which the operation is accepted. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, by confirming such deviation, it is possible to infer whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by confirming the execution mode of the pre-effect and the disappearance effect with respect to the acceptance permitted state, it is possible to infer whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. You can also do it. That is, in the pre-production and disappearance effect corresponding to the fourth acceptance permissible state, an image related to the pre-effect and an image related to the disappearance effect are displayed in a relatively small area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, in the pre-production and disappearance effect according to the first acceptance permission state, the image related to the pre-effect and the disappearance effect are displayed in a relatively large area, and the background image is changed at that time. It is supposed to be accompanied. By confirming such a mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

However, even if the effect elements useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that can't be guessed, the interest in the game can be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is generated based on the effect acceptance being performed within the set time (effective period). A weak suppression mode is set. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the BGM reproduction effect sound is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression is performed. In the mode, the set time (effective period) is generated so that the performance can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the timing of suppressing a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) in the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode) and the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode). Therefore, by confirming the timing, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, unlike the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the operation detection is performed within the set time (effective period). If not, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 431(h)). That is, in this case, if there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by operation reception for a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is also performed. Since it will not be avoided, it is possible to recognize that the effect was not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode, although there was a price that the effect after operation could not be confirmed.

Further, in the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the strong suppression mode is ended is the end timing of the post-operation effect. The timing is set to be the same as or earlier than. Therefore, in the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is ended may be later than the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing when the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Further, as described above, in the fourth acceptance permissible state according to the above-described production example, regardless of which timing within the set time (effective period) the production reception is performed, the operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) is performed. The length of the period during which the rear display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state, after the operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), depending on which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is performed. , The length of the period in which the post-operation output sound (effect sound) made by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed.

According to such a configuration, the performance is brought about in "when the performance reception (operation) is performed", and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output at a suppression level lower than the strong suppression mode may appear even when an operation opportunity is not provided (when the fourth acceptance permissible state does not occur). May be. That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without the operation opportunity. Then, in the effect according to one variation pattern, the more the weak suppression mode appears, including the fourth acceptance permissible state, the higher the degree of suppression is until the symbol fluctuation is stopped (second If the (1 acceptance acceptable state is further executed) is increased, the performance can be further improved through the suppression state for the "BGM reproduction effect sound".

Further, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may also be able to appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first acceptance allowable state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the performance of whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 431, when the fourth acceptance permissible state occurs, the "bGM reproduction effect sound" is suppressed based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period). Suppression mode). However, instead of this, even when the fourth acceptance-allowed state occurs, as in the case where the first acceptance-allowed state occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is suppressed before the set time occurs. A mode (weak suppression mode) may be set, and a set time (effective period) during which the production reception is allowed in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) may be generated. In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) when the predetermined timing arrives, Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not provided, it is possible to broaden the range of performance. In the fourth acceptance permissible state, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-reduction mode is the same as the timing at which the post-operation performance is ended or arrives after that. It is desirable to do so.

In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type effect sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to put the "specific type effect sound" in an inaudible state (silence (audible volume is 0) or not output (end channel allocation)) Good.

In each of the above-described production examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth acceptance acceptable state", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first acceptance acceptable state", as described above, the result of the notice effect determination. Based on the above, there are "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is the strong suppression mode, not the weak suppression mode. It should be noted that the effect reception has been made by "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation performance has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
The first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (effective period) occurs, and the operation receiving portion is driven by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs The operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to the specific position. Note that, here, the “first operation mode” is assumed to be an operation opportunity given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” is given an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. 198 (A3) and the like that the sword ornament 5001 is "a device that can give an operating opportunity to a player in a state where the sword ornament 5001 has moved to a specific position". However, it is as described above. However, one operation means (one operation receiving portion) may be provided with the “first operation mode” and the “second operation mode”, respectively, and the operation opportunity may be given by any of these modes. Further, as described above, in the first acceptance permitted state, an operation opportunity may be given to the sword ornament 5001 without fail.

According to the above-described production example, the acceptance allowable state (suppression) is set so that the post-operation production is executed while the “production sound of BGM reproduction” is being output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. In the reception effect), the case where the image (integrated image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 410(d)) means that the acceptance permitted state is the “first acceptance permitted state (strong suppression aspect)”. Means that the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410(a)) as the special mode, the acceptance acceptable state is “first acceptance acceptable state”. (Strong suppression mode or non-output)” or “fourth acceptance allowable state (weak suppression mode)”.

That is, in this case, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 410(d)), if the operation is accepted while the acceptable reception sound is being output, the operation is terminated halfway. (First acceptance acceptable state). On the other hand, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410(a)), if the operation acceptance is accepted while the acceptable reception sound is in the process of being output, this may be terminated midway. There will be cases where the process is not terminated halfway (first acceptance acceptable state, fourth acceptance acceptable state). With such a configuration, it is possible to favorably maintain the entertainment of the game when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410(a)).

In addition, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 410(d)), the acceptance acceptable state is executed in the automatic acceptance aspect (first acceptance acceptable state). On the other hand, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410(a)), the acceptance acceptable state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode and in the non-automatic acceptance mode. Will occur (first acceptance acceptable state, fourth acceptance acceptable state). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410(a)).

In this respect, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 410(a)), the display is performed when the first acceptable reception state occurs and when the fourth acceptable reception state occurs. You may make it differ in the magnitude|size which depends on. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the acceptance-permitted sound is ended midway, and whether it is performed in the automatic acceptance mode or the non-automatic acceptance mode.

In addition, according to the above-described production example, by confirming whether the pre-production is performed by the “wide area type pre-production” or the “narrow area type pre-production”, the production sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is generated. It becomes possible to easily confirm whether the sound is a “weak suppression mode” or a “strong suppression mode or non-output” when the sound) is suppressed. Then, by confirming whether or not this is terminated midway when an operation is performed while the acceptance acceptable sound is being output, whether it is in the "weak suppression mode (not terminated)" or "strong suppression" It becomes possible to re-confirm whether it is "mode or non-output (finished halfway)" during the post-operation performance.

Further, according to the above-described production example, when the strong suppression mode or the non-output is adopted, the wide-range front is performed while the specific type of the effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode or the non-output. While the effect is executed, when the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow area pre-effect is executed while the specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is not in the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance when the narrow area type pre-production is performed.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first acceptance-permitted state has a higher rate of execution of a mode that appears only during a big hit as a post-operation performance than the second acceptance-permitted state (the degree of expectation is higher). It has become higher) as described above. This ratio may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-described production examples, when the first acceptance permissible state (special acceptance permissible state) occurs and the second acceptance permissible state (predetermined acceptance permissible) from the time before the operation acceptance is performed. Since different effect contents (acceptable acceptance sound, model image, previous effect, etc.) appear when the state) occurs, the second acceptable acceptance state occurs due to such effect contents (or , What is happening) may be noticed by the player in advance, which may cause a decline in the interest of the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of the plurality of acceptable reception states, the fifth acceptable reception state (specification is generated based on the fifth condition being satisfied in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination). The acceptance acceptance state) is further prepared. Regarding the fifth acceptance acceptance state, the operation acceptance is performed while making it difficult to distinguish it from the second acceptance permission state until the operation acceptance is made. After that, by realizing the production progress that evokes the first acceptance permissible state, it is possible to make it less likely that the enjoyment of the game will decline at least until the operation acceptance is made. In order to suitably obtain such an operation effect, when the fifth acceptance permissive state occurs, the first acceptance permissible state after the symbol is stopped than when the second acceptance permissible state occurs It is desirable to set it so that the rate of occurrence is high. Further, it is desirable to set the proportions at which the big hit symbols are stopped to be different from each other when the second acceptance allowable state occurs and when the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs. The ratio of these may be 0% or 100%.

While making it difficult to distinguish between the second acceptable reception state and the fifth acceptable reception state, after the operation acceptance is made in the fifth acceptable reception state, the production progress that reminds the first acceptable reception state is realized. As a method for doing so, for example, first, when the second acceptance-permitted state occurs and when the fifth acceptance-permitted state occurs, the same mode is output as the acceptance-permitted sound, but the first acceptance-permitted state occurs. In such a case, a mode in which the acceptance-permitted sound cannot be output in any of the second acceptance-allowed state and the fifth acceptance-allowed state (for example, the type of the sound as the first acceptable sound is different, and the second acceptable sound is Further, the output mode) is output. Then, when the operation is accepted in the second acceptance permitted state, the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed while continuously outputting the sound that was in the output state at the time when the operation acceptance was made. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state, when an operation is accepted, all sounds in the output state at the time when the operation is accepted are output in a suppressed manner. The state or the non-output state is set, and the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect or fifth post-operation effect) is executed in the state. In this respect, if the specific effect movable body is used as a target that causes a change in both the first post-operation effect and the fifth post-operation effect, it is possible to distinguish between the second acceptable reception state and the fifth acceptable reception state. However, after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, it is possible to realize the production progress reminiscent of the first acceptance-permitted state. As a result, the possibility that the first acceptance acceptable state has occurred (the possibility that the acceptance acceptable sound was erroneously heard) becomes conscious, and it can be expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is suppressed. .

That is, in this case, in the first acceptance permissible state, at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the after-operation effect (first after-operation effect). Performing a movable effect in which the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (such as the effects shown in FIGS. 237(C), (D), and 238(CC1) to (CC3)). Is possible.

On the other hand, even in the fifth acceptance permissible state, at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), but the effect is the first operation. It is desirable that the content of the effect is significantly different from that of the after effect. In other words, the fifth acceptance-permitted state is, at the very least, even if the situation in which the aspect of the pre-production or the acceptance-permitted sound suggests the possibility of the second acceptance-permitted state having a low expectation level appears, at least the operation acceptance It is prepared for the purpose of "maintaining the entertainment pleasure until it is done", giving a false recognition that the first acceptance acceptable state had occurred at the time when the post-operation performance was executed. If this happens, it is unavoidable that the interest in playing the game will deteriorate when a misrecognition is noticed.

Therefore, as such post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), it is desirable to perform an effect having a more suppressed tendency than in the case of the first post-operation effect, for example, operation acceptance is performed. The specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the point of time is not operated (driving force is not generated) and its light emitting range is reduced or the light is not emitted. It is possible to perform as an effect that causes. It should be noted that in the second post-operation effect, there is no effect change that tends to be suppressed, such as a decrease in the light emission range of the specific effect movable body or a non-light emission state. In this case, the specific movable decorative body has a predetermined light emitting portion.

According to such a configuration, the first reception allowable state (first post-operation performance) is evoked by causing a production change using the specific production movable body, whereby a second reception acceptable state (second While making it aware that it is not (post-operation performance), it is calmly determined that it is not in the first acceptance allowable state (first post-operation performance) as the suppressed content of the performance is gradually exposed. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed.

In addition, in order to more appropriately execute the fifth post-operation effect as an effect having a suppressed tendency as compared with the case of the first post-operation effect, the first post-operation effect is regarded as an operation target. The operating means (the operation receiving portion such as the effect button) emits light (or causes a change in light emission) when the operation is accepted, and the driving means (motor or the like) provided corresponding to the operating means. ) Is caused to generate a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the operation means (operation receiving portion such as effect button) to be operated is operated. When the reception is made, the light is turned off (the mode may be gradually turned off), and a predetermined movement is performed without driving the drive means (motor or the like) provided corresponding to the operation means. It is desirable not to cause (vibration, etc.). In this way, while performing the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect, fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative body in the first acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state, By providing a mode in which the contents of the effect are completely opposite between the effect after the first operation and the effect after the fifth operation, the above-described action and effect can be suitably exhibited.

FIG. 432 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth acceptance permitted state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 432 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the fifth acceptance permissible state occurs. The fluctuation pattern will be described as the fifth fluctuation pattern, but may be the first fluctuation pattern as described above.

Now, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability variation/non-time saving), and the “fifth variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. First, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the fifth variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “fifth variation pattern” itself.

Then, as described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 432(b), the fifth operation is performed when the timing tE3 when the fifth predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ has arrived. The fifth acceptance permissible state (effective period) in which the operation acceptance regarding the post-production is permitted is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the fifth acceptable reception state (valid period),
The "non-suppression acceptance permissible state ("the non-suppression acceptance permissible state (" 432 (a) and (b))”, and when no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which the operation acceptance is permitted. Even after that, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation performance is started "automatic reception mode (see FIG. 432(i))".
It is generated as "non-suppression/automatic reception performance" executed by. The timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, and may come at or after the end of the set time.

According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second acceptance-permitted state has occurred until the post-operation effect starts to be executed, whereas the post-operation effect starts to be executed by the automatic acceptance mode. When this is done, the production progress as if to recall the first acceptance permissible state is realized, so that it is possible to preferably maintain the gaming interest until the post-operation production is started to be executed. ..

Also in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, as in the second acceptance-permitted state, as shown in FIGS. 432(b), (e), and (j), the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) during which the operation acceptance is permitted. ) Occurs, the "acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)" is started when the timing tE2 arrives, and the output state is changed over the timing tE3 when the set time occurs. I try to keep it. The length of time from the start of the output of the first permissible sound until the acceptance of the operation is also the same. In addition, the sound itself output as the first permissible sound is the same, and the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, which is the same as in the second acceptance permissible state. As a result, with respect to the acceptance acceptable sound, the same aspect appears in the second acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state until the operation acceptance is made, so that it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment appeal. Be expected.

However, as described above, in the second acceptance permissible state, the operation is performed at the timing tB3a (FIG. 427(e)) at which the “acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)” is in the output state after the set time (valid period) is generated. When the reception is made, the set time itself is ended, while the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the timing when the output is finished as the first allowable sound (no operation is performed) The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (Fig. 427(e)) as in the case of the above. When the operation acceptance is made at the timing tE3a (Fig. 432(e)) in which the "acceptable sound)" is in the output state, the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not only terminated for the set time itself. This also means that this behavior (midway end) with respect to the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" appears when the operation acceptance is performed in the first acceptance acceptable state. Therefore (FIG. 428(e)), the production progress as if to recall the first acceptance-allowed state is realized despite the situation where the fifth acceptance-allowed state has occurred. It is expected that the interest in playing games will be maintained appropriately.

Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 432, when the operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance permissible state (timing tE3a in the figure), the effect display device is provided as the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. A post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 432(d)). reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) maintains the execution state until timing tE5 regardless of the time when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is in the execution state for a predetermined time. Is maintained, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be executed.

Although illustration is omitted, in this example of the effect, the post-operation effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance permissible state (fifth post-operation effect) and the post-operation effect corresponding to the first acceptance permissible state (first In any of the "after-operation effect", at least the "effect using the specific effect movable body" is executed. As for the respective effect contents of the "effect using the specific effect movable body" corresponding to the first acceptance allowable state and the "effect using the specific effect movable body" corresponding to the fifth acceptance allowable state, as described above. Is. For example, as the first post-operation effect, a movable effect in which the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 237(C), (D), and 238(CC1) to (CC3) to (CC3)). ), etc.) can be performed. In addition, as the fifth post-operation effect, an effect change is caused in which the specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the time of receiving the operation is reduced in the light emitting range or is set in the non-light emitting state. It can be performed as a production.

According to such a configuration, the first reception allowable state (first post-operation performance) is evoked by causing a production change using the specific production movable body, whereby a second reception acceptable state (second While making it aware that it is not (post-operation performance), it is calmly determined that it is not in the first acceptance allowable state (first post-operation performance) as the suppressed content of the performance is gradually exposed. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed.

Further, also in the effect example (fifth acceptance permissible state) shown in FIG. 432, as with the effect example (second acceptance acceptable state) shown in FIG. 427, rather than the timing tE3 when the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is set. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mock image simulating the operation means that is the operation target, and displays a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses. Is done respectively. Further, the display mode of these mock images and gauge images is similar to that in the second acceptance-permitted state, and for example, is displayed as an integrated mock image IG. The same applies to the point that the special mode shown in FIG. 410(d) is not displayed as the integrated image IG. As a result, the same aspect appears in the second acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state with respect to the mock image and the gauge image until the operation acceptance is made. It is expected.

In this example as well, the timing at which the mimic image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is started to be output, but the timing is not limited to this, and either one starts earlier. It may be done. Alternatively, only one of the mound image and the acceptance sound (for example, only the mood image) may be started before the timing tE3. However, even in the case of adopting such another example or the other example described above, the configuration until the operation reception is performed should be the same in the second acceptance permission state and the fifth acceptance permission state. Is desirable.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 432 (c) to (f), when the timing tE3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is displayed. Is assumed. When an operation is accepted in such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after the fifth operation effect (display change in effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration). At least one of the staging operations by the body) is started, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the staging after the fifth operation is started, an integrated model image (model image, gauge image) Is not hidden and remains visible. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tE3a), the change due to it does not occur in the integrated image (specific layer), and a little time (predetermined) Until the timing tE3b when the time has elapsed arrives, the “display of the integrated image (the image of the gauge, the image of the image)” in the same manner as when the operation reception is allowed is continued. The display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when the timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) displayed by making a part or the whole of the integrated image (display image, gauge image) in the display state invisible or invisible is displayed. Let it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of rendering, the integrated image (acupuncture image, gauge image) is not hidden even when such an image (disappearance effect) is displayed, and is displayed. Stay in the state. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer in which the integrated image (image image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated image (image image, gauge image) is displayed. The change in the image) is not caused, and the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, the disappearance effect is displayed on the layer in front of it, so that the water image and the gauge image are difficult to see or are made invisible.

That is, in this case, although it is in a situation where the disappearance effect image is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making it difficult to visually recognize the gauge image or gauge image (integrated image) or making it invisible. The scale image and gauge image (integrated scale image) displayed on the specific layer (the side behind the predetermined layer (the side having lower priority)) itself is the same as when the operation acceptance was permitted. The display at will be maintained and no change will occur. Further, also for the gauge image, the display of which the display area is continuously reduced is continued across the operation reception. As a result, the mode (at least a part of) when the operation reception is allowed is made even in the process of making the image and the gauge image (integrated image) difficult to visually recognize or making them invisible. You will be able to see it.

Also, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated image (images, gauge images) is completed within the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) in which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated image is displayed. The image of the disappearance effect is displayed in a situation in which the image of the image (image of the image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer.

Regarding the image and gauge image, such a display method after the operation is accepted is common to the first acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state, so that the interest of the game is deteriorated. There is no.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 432, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 427, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 at which the fifth acceptance permitted state occurs, less than half of the predetermined display area is reached. The narrow area type pre-production that uses only the area is started to be executed. Then, during a period in which an image related to such a narrow area type pre-production is displayed, first, a display of a mock image of the operation receiving portion (here, an integrated mock image) and a display of the first allowable sound are displayed. And output are started respectively (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the mood image (here, the integrated mood image) is started, a part or the whole of the mood image (integrated mood image) becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image related to the narrow area type pre-rendering. There is. That is, as the time passes, the range in which the image related to the narrow area type pre-production is displayed is reduced, or the transmittance thereof is increased, so that the “image (integrated image) The visual quality of “images” will be gradually increased.” In this respect, also in the fifth acceptance permissible state, while the narrow area pre-production is being executed and the mood image (here, the integrated mood image) is being displayed, the fifth acceptance acceptable state When the timing tE3 occurs, the operation acceptance is permitted, and the narrow area type pre-effect is performed across the timing tE3 when the fifth acceptance permitted state occurs.

Here, the image used for such a narrow area type pre-effect may be, for example, an image displayed on a different layer before the layer on which the mood image (integrated mood image) is displayed. Then, the mood image (integrated mood image) and the image (narrow area pre-production) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the mood image (integrated mood image IG) gradually increases in the moving image. It may also be a representation of how it is being enhanced. However, as the image of the narrow area type pre-production corresponding to the fifth reception permission state, it is desirable to use the same image as the image of the narrow area type pre-production corresponding to the second reception permission state.

In the narrow area type pre-production, not only the image display on the production display device 1600, but also the production sound related thereto may be output. However, considering that the second acceptance permissible state is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to the operation, regarding the narrow area type pre-stage production, It can be said that, in order to increase the concentration of the effect, it is preferable to perform the effect display device 1600 as an image display without outputting the effect sound related thereto.

In this way, with regard to the narrow area type pre-production that occurs before the acceptance of the operation acceptance, the same aspect appears in the second acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state, which makes the game entertaining. It is expected to be maintained appropriately.

According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the effect is advanced in the same manner as the effect contents shown in FIGS. 429(a) to (e). Even if the player is aware in advance that the first acceptance acceptable state with high expectation has not occurred, it is interesting to know whether the second acceptance acceptable state or the fifth acceptance acceptable state occurs. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed.

However, as described above, after the operation by the player is detected in the fifth acceptance permissible state and the post-operation effect (fifth operation post-effect) is started to be executed, the first acceptance allowable state is not the second acceptance allowable state. The production will be advanced in such a manner as to evoke.

That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 432, when an operation by the player is detected (operation acceptance) in the fifth acceptance permissible state, a sound that is in an output state in a non-suppressing mode at the time when the operation acceptance is made ( All) are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or set to the non-output state to end the process halfway. In the example shown in FIG. 428 (first acceptance permissible state), when the operation is accepted, the “first permissible sound” and “second permissible sound” that were in the output state in the non-suppression mode are changed to the strong suppression mode. The output state or the non-output state is set so as to terminate them abruptly. However, in the example (fifth acceptance permissible state) shown in FIG. 432, when the operation acceptance is performed, the non-suppression is performed. The “BGM reproduction sound” and the “first allowable sound” that were in the output state in the mode are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or are set to the non-output state, and these are terminated halfway. Accordingly, with respect to (all of) the sounds that were in the output state in the non-suppressing mode before the operation was accepted, the operation acceptance was triggered in both the second acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state. As described above, the output state is set to the strong suppression mode or the non-output state is set, so that it is possible to recall the first acceptance permitted state at the timing tE3a illustrated in FIG. It is expected that amusement of entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

In this case, it may be either the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state triggered by the operation reception, but the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state may be set. It is desirable to perform the same processing in. For example, in the second acceptance-permitted state, if the operation acceptance is used as a trigger to turn the sound that was in the output state in the non-suppressing state into the non-output state, the operation acceptance is also triggered in the fifth acceptance-permitted state. The sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressing mode until then is put in the non-output state.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 432(g) to 432(k), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptable reception state has ended) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the fifth acceptance permissible state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without the player's operation, the operation acceptance is performed. The same processing will be executed.

Therefore, at the timing tE3c, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is not only started to be executed, but also the sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppression mode (here, the sound of the BGM reproduction) is strongly suppressed. The output state in the mode or the non-output state is set, and these are terminated halfway. Even in the first acceptance permissible state (FIG. 428), a predetermined sound (for example, the first permissible sound) is output in a non-suppressing mode until the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated, and the timing tC4f is reached. In the above, the output state may be set in the strong suppression mode, or the non-output state may be set, and this may be terminated halfway.

Further, at the timing tE3d, the "wide area disappearance effect" is started to be executed as the above-mentioned disappearance effect while the fifth post-operation effect is already in the execution state. Regarding the "wide area disappearance effect", the image itself does not necessarily have to be the same as in the case of the first acceptance permitted state, but disappearance accompanied by a change from the background image displayed until the operation acceptance is made. It is desirable to be executed as an effect. That is, in this case, it goes without saying that at least half or more of the display area is used for execution. As a result, the same aspect (wide area extinction effect) is applied to the disappearance effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed) in both the second acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state. After the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed, it becomes possible to recall the first acceptance allowable state, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game. The aspect related to such disappearance effect is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is activated (timing tE3c). The same applies to the case of the first acceptance permitted state.

In the example shown in FIG. 432, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) ends with respect to the timing when the “BGM reproduction sound” is output again in the non-suppressing mode in the fifth acceptance permissible state. Although it is set as the timing tE5 to be performed, the timing may be reached while the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, or the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) may be set. It may be the timing to arrive after the end.

Also in the first acceptance-permitted state, as in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, the timing at which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is switched to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode is set when the operation reception is made. Good.

In the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state, the process of changing the sound that was in the output state in the non-suppression mode until then to “output in the suppression mode” or “non-output state” and the output sound after operation The processing to be output does not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, and any processing may be started as soon as an operation is accepted.

Further, as described above, when the operation reception is performed in the fifth acceptance permissible state, the specific effect movable body that has been in the light emitting state until then is turned off for a predetermined time, as a trigger (the fifth operation. (Post-production), when an operation reception is made in the first reception-permitted state, a driving force is applied to the specific-production movable body so that a predetermined production operation appears in response to this (after the first operation). Production) is desirable. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, a driving force is generated with respect to the driving means corresponding to the operating means to be operated so that a predetermined movement (vibration etc.) appears in the operating means. On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect, it is desirable not to perform such processing. Further, at this time, in the first post-operation effect, the light emission mode of the operation means that is the operation target is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the light emission of the operation means that is the operation object is turned off. It is desirable to do so. It is desirable that these processes in the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state be modes that can appear when the same result (for example, a big hit win) is obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

Further, when the movable effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the first post-operation effect, it is desirable that the light can be emitted in a mode that does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

Further, in the first post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is started and then continuously output, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is generated. Is output for a predetermined time, it is desirable that a state in which no effect sound is output in the non-suppressing mode (a state in which it is output in the strongly suppressing mode or a non-outputting state) appears. According to such a configuration, in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is properly executed, but there is a tendency to be suppressed to this compared to the case of the first post-operation effect. As a result, it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately.

Further, it is desirable that the acceptance-permitted sound output when the first acceptance-permitted state and the fifth acceptance-permitted state differ from each other when they occur. That is, as described above, the first acceptable sound (sound effect) and the second acceptable sound (message sound) are output in the first acceptance-permitted state, while the second acceptance sound is output in the fifth acceptance-permitted state. The permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first permissible sound (sound effect) itself is also output as a different sound.

Further, as described above, in the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state (second acceptance permissible state), the same mode (shown in FIGS. 410(a) to (c)) is shown as a general image (integrated general image). Mode) can be displayed. However, even if the same mode is displayed as the general image (integrated general image) in the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state (second acceptance permissible state), the size of the display is large. It is preferable to display different values (similar shapes) in the fifth acceptance-permitted state (second acceptance-permitted state) in a mode smaller than that in the first acceptance-permitted state. However, the sizes are displayed in the same manner in the second acceptance permitted state and the fifth acceptance permitted state. Note that, in the first acceptance permissible state, a special mode can be displayed as a general image (integrated general image), but in the fifth acceptance permissible state (second acceptance allowable state), a general image (integrated general image) As described above, the special mode is not displayed as ")."

Further, in the first post-operation effect according to the first acceptance permissible state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the effect sound (variation pattern) not triggered by the operation acceptance. It is desirable that the effect sound that is output at a predetermined timing within the above) be output in a non-suppressing manner (for example, BGM return or the like). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect according to the fifth acceptance permissible state, the effect sound that is not triggered by the operation acceptance while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner ( It is desirable that the effect sound that is output at a predetermined timing within the variation pattern is not started in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, after the output sound after the operation corresponding to the operation reception is set to the non-output state, the effect sound not triggered by the operation reception (the effect sound output at the predetermined timing in the variation pattern) is not output. Since the output is started in the suppressed mode, by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first acceptance permissible state, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, the second acceptance-permitted state can be generated by both the variation pattern in which the first acceptance-permitted state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptance-permitted state does not occur. When the state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance permissible state may occur within a period until the symbol fluctuation in the execution state is stopped. In addition, the fifth acceptable reception state is generated by allowing both the variation pattern in which the first acceptable reception state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptable reception state does not occur. In this case, the first acceptance-permitted state may occur within the period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, when the fifth acceptance-allowed state occurs, the rate of occurrence of the first acceptance-allowed state is higher than when the second acceptance-allowed state occurs until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is desirable to set to. This ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, the fifth acceptance-permitted state has occurred even if the player has previously noticed that the first acceptance-permitted state has not occurred before the operation acceptance. Since it becomes possible to expect the possibility, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

According to the above-described production example, as a result of the operation reception being performed when the mock image (integrated mood image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 410(d)), the operation is performed. If the acceptance-permitted sound is not ended midway based on the reception, not only the acceptance-permitted sound but also other sounds that have been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (such as "BGM playback sound") are not suppressed. The output state will be maintained (see FIG. 427). On the other hand, as a result of the operation reception being performed when the mock image (integrated mood image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410(d)), based on the operation reception When the acceptance-permitted sound ends midway, not only the acceptance-permitted sound but also other sounds that have been in the output state in the non-suppressing mode (such as "BGM playback sound") are output or non-output in the strongly suppressing mode. State (see FIG. 432).

According to the above-described production example, in the situation where the big hit is obtained by the big hit determination, as a result of the operation reception being performed while the general image (integrated general image) is displayed, the operation is accepted based on the operation reception. When the permissible sound ends midway, based on the operation acceptance, "when the specific effect movable body is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (Fig. 428)" and "the light is in the light emitting state. There is a case where the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or light is turned off and no effect operation is caused (FIG. 432). Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game under the condition that the acceptance permission sound is ended midway. In addition, in the case of "when the specific effect movable body is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 428)", non-light emission is performed by "processing for reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body or extinguishing the light." It is desirable that the portion marked with is also to emit light.

In each of the above-described effect examples, the integrated mood image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. Further, when displaying the mage image and the gauge image as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In each of the examples described above, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output so that there is a time when they are output overlapping each other. However, after the first allowable sound is output, the second allowable sound is output. The output may be started.

Further, in the acceptance-permitted state according to each of the above-described examples, the mock image is displayed as the integrated mock image IG including the gauge image GG, but it is not always necessary to display it as the image including the gauge image GG.

The acceptance permissible state according to each of the above-described examples can occur in both the variation pattern at the time of big hit and the variation pattern at the time of loss.

In each of the acceptance acceptable states described above, the disappearance effect is executed as a different image from the mock image when the post-operation effect is executed, but the post-operation effect is executed as a result of being executed in the non-automatic reception mode Only when it is not performed, it is desirable to execute the disappearance effect by fading out the image itself, in order to prevent the degree of expectation from being recognized. In this case, the image itself displayed on the specific layer is subjected to a process that is changed from the mode in the acceptance-permitted state.

In each of the acceptance acceptable states described above, even if the acceptance acceptable state is the same, depending on the degree of expectation as a mode when the jackpot is won, when the jackpot is lost (or lost), or after the operation is performed. The type of disappearance effect may be changed.

The wide area disappearance effect is set to more than half of the display screen and the narrow area disappearance effect is set to less than half of the display screen. However, if "display area of wide area disappearance effect> display area of narrow area disappearance effect" is not always satisfied. It does not have to satisfy the conditions of more than half or less than half. Similarly for the pre-production, the wide area type pre-production is set to be more than half of the display screen and the narrow area type pre-production is set to less than half of the display screen. , It is not always necessary to satisfy the conditions of more than half or less than half.

The post-operation effect may be performed only by any one of liquid crystal display, sound output, and light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5. In short, any operation may be used as long as it causes some change in display, sound, light emission, or the like.

Further, the “specific type effect sound” may be a BGM reproduction sound that is output during normal fluctuation, or may be a BGM reproduction sound that is output over a plurality of fluctuations.

The fourth acceptance permissible state does not necessarily have to be executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but may be executed in the automatic reception mode.

In addition, after-operation performance when the operation reception is performed in the first acceptance permissive state (first after-operation effect) and after-operation performance when the operation reception is performed in the fourth acceptance-allowed state (fourth operation after-effect) In and, it is desirable to make the contents of production different from each other.

When the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, processing for decreasing the visibility of the integrated image IG (specific layer) itself (for example, increasing the transmittance) may be performed together.

The image applied to the disappearance effect (wide area disappearance effect, narrow area disappearance effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance. In this case, the entire image (integrated image) is displayed. Even if the images are displayed so as to overlap with each other, it is possible to confirm the mode of the image (integrated image).

In each of the above-described production examples, the "narrow area type pre-production" means "background change (the background image that has been displayed until then cannot be visually recognized, and the production is performed in a state in which a new background image is displayed. (Pre-production without production). In this case, "wide area type pre-production" means "background change (production in which the background image that has been displayed until then cannot be visually recognized and the new background image is displayed). It means "pre-production with". The background image may be an image of a single black color or a single white color.

In each of the above-described effect examples, the aspect shown in FIG. 410(d) may be omitted as the aspect of the integrated image. In this case, the "special aspect" is an operation means (an aspect in which the shape of the image of the operation receiving portion is the same and the shape of the peripheral decoration image is different (an aspect shown in FIG. 410(c)). Will be used.

In each of the above-described effect examples, when a mock image (integral mock image) is displayed, the mock image indicates “motion in the movable region” or “behavior when operated” as the operation means (operation receiving unit). As described above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of representation. In this respect, it is desirable that such a dynamic display is continued on the specific layer until it is hidden after the operation is accepted.

In each of the above-described effect examples, the display method relating to the mock image may be appropriately changed or added to the contents described in FIGS. 410 to 426, the explanatory text corresponding to these drawings, and the other examples. You can In addition, regarding the mood image, the gauge image, the acceptance sound, and the post-operation effect when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, FIGS. It may be appropriately changed or added to the explanations described in "the effective period that occurs while the reproduced sound is in the strong suppression mode" or the contents applied to another example. .. In addition, regarding the mood image, the gauge image, the acceptance sound, and the post-operation effect when the second acceptance allowable state occurs, FIGS. The description may be appropriately changed or added to the description applied to the explanatory text or another example described regarding "the valid period that occurs while the reproduced sound is in the non-suppressed mode". ..

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to some embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications are possible within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. Can be improved and the design can be changed.

For example, although there is a case where a display such as "during automatic button setting" is performed in each of the above-described production examples regarding the automatic production function, the display need not necessarily be performed. In particular, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 which is set in the automatic effect mode, and is realized as the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic effect function is always enabled and the process itself such as “setting to the effect state” is not installed, It is desirable not to display "Auto button setting in progress". In the pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with the processing itself such as “setting to the rendering state”, the effective period in which the automatic rendering function is performed and the automatic rendering function are set in accordance with the type of operation reception production that the player is allowed to operate. A valid period that is not played may occur.

Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the “middle image” may be an image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and is, for example, an operation target such as an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down. It does not have to be displayed as an image of the operating means.

Further, in the case where the automatic effect function is adopted in each of the above-described effect examples, the timing of automatically generating (automatically accepting) an operation acceptance within the operation valid period is set to any timing within the operation valid period. May be In order to appropriately give an operation opportunity to the player, the operation is performed when the operation is not detected until a predetermined timing after the operation valid period occurs and half or more of the operation effective period elapses. It is preferable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) and the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when the operation is not detected until the time when the remaining time within the operation valid period becomes 1 frame, and the post-operation performance is generated based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get it started. Further, in each of the above-described effect examples related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden and is maintained even after the expiration of the effective period, the operation to be operated according to the timing when the effective period is ended. It is desirable to execute an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously, it is expected to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that "the validity period is continuing?". Become so.

In addition, in each effect example described with reference to FIG. 285 to FIG. 303 and the effect example described with reference to FIG. 387, after the operation is performed without keeping the black image (or bar display) hidden. In the case where the effect is started, "the time from the timing when the operation is detected to the timing when the image (or the bar display) is hidden (the period of timing tf2 to tf4, the period of timing tg3 to tg5, the timing “Th3 to th4 period, etc.)” may have a time of at least several frames (for example, 2 frames). Alternatively, there may be only one frame of time. Even if there is such a time, the period in which the mimic image (or bar display) is displayed and the period after the post-operation performance is started overlap, and some players can recognize it. In some cases.

In the example of the production related to “improvement of performance using the automatic production function (see FIG. 300)”, the automatic production function is not activated in the state where the hold display on the production display device 1600 is hidden. The automatic reception performance and the automatic reception performance in which the automatic performance function is activated may be generated respectively. According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate the reception effect in a state where the number of holdings is large or small, that is, in a state where it is difficult to grasp the easiness of activation of the automatic effect function. Become. Still further, for example, when the non-automatic reception effect occurs in the state where the hold display is hidden, the subsequent symbol fluctuation is stopped more than when the non-automatic reception effect occurs in the state where the hold display is displayed. By setting the rate at which the automatic reception performance is further generated by the time it is performed, it is possible to improve the performance when the hold display is hidden and the ease of enabling the automatic performance function is difficult to grasp. You will be able to add fun.

Further, in the description example of the “help image for promoting the understanding of the effect”, the ruler is exemplified as the “reference image in which the length unit in the horizontal direction is shown”, but an image other than this may be used. May be. In short, when the player operates, it is enough to display a displayed image without being affected by the special effect. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but another function. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image indicating the degree of expectation, an image indicating the current effect state, an image indicating the state related to effect setting, etc.) is drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. Note that such an image does not necessarily have to be drawn as a single image, but may be drawn so that a plurality of images are arranged side by side and extend in the horizontal direction as a whole.

In addition, in the example of “preventing mischief against multiple operating means”, mischievous acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto, and it is not possible for the hall side to take strict measures. It can also lead to profits. Therefore, the image that appears based on the detection of the operation by the player (including the image that appears in the process of making the specific moving image appear) should be realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. Good. In short, when the player operates a plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), "in the effect display device 1600, a game effect according to a big hit determination is executed. Display (playback) a specific video that may not appear in the state of being displayed (may be a video with content that has nothing to do with mischief prevention (for example, move a predetermined movie to a streaming state)) )”, “Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change in the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted and the current volume setting value is not displayed.” Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. I wish I had it. In this case, the player can voluntarily generate the function restriction period in which the above-described specific moving image is reproduced by operating a plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (procedure). Is.

Further, in the example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operating means”, in the state where variable display of decorative symbols is performed, the partial restriction period may be always controlled.

Regarding the example of "Preventing noise by adjusting confirmation sound when opening a store", the point is to control to the normal state where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. If the gaming machine is controlled to the normal state after the limited state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and the game is started in the limited state, the limited state is ended early. It is only necessary that the device be controlled to a normal state by setting the length of time to be maintained in the restricted state as appropriate (set from several seconds to several hours). Good. If the length of time to be maintained as a restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effect in the game period immediately after opening the store will not be achieved, but about the noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after turning on the power Can suppress this.

Further, in the description example of the "control for the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the effect importance degree", when the first special symbol is being changed and when the second special symbol is being changed, it is an advantageous condition. Volume change confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the second special symbol that can be played, but during the fluctuation of the first special symbol that can be played under disadvantageous conditions. The case where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is illustrated. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology for a gaming machine in which the second special symbol is not installed, for example, a specific symbol for which a lottery is performed under a more disadvantageous condition than the first special symbol is prepared. However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under advantageous conditions, but the side that can be played on unfavorable conditions The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the change of the specific symbol.

In addition, in the description example of “the period during which the operation reception is permitted (effective period) itself performance”, the reception acceptable sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation reception production and the occurrence of the first and second operation reception productions The effect sound may be different from the acceptance acceptable sound. Further, in FIG. 388, the acceptance permissible sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11), but as "one sound data" that extends over the timing tr1 (tr11), it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA, for example. You may make it output.

Even if a mock image of the operation receiving section that receives an operation and a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image are separately prepared as image data, and displayed as an integrated mage image by combining the respective image data. Good.

In the example shown in FIG. 410, when the “ordinary button image BMGa” is displayed when the operation opportunity is given to one operation means (FIGS. 410(a) and (c)), There is a case where a "special button image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 410(b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 410(a) and 410(c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving portion), and the "special button" is displayed. In the case where the "quality image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 410(b) and 410(d)), the second operation means (second operation receiving portion) different from the first operation means (first operation receiving portion) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given.

In each of the above-described examples, the members (operation means) prepared as the operation target include those requiring pressing operation (buttons, etc.), those requiring insertion/removal operation (sword decoration, etc.), and non-contact. Alternatively, it may be realized as a device requiring a touch operation (such as a proximity sensor).

Although the peripheral decoration image SSG does not include the peripheral decoration portion that is actually provided on the periphery of the “operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given”, at least a part of the peripheral decoration portion does not include the peripheral decoration portion. It does not matter as long as it is not present, and there may be a portion that is used to embellish the peripheral decoration portion.

Regarding the second effective period in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG etc.) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, and the effective period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, The predetermined set time is not limited and may be infinitely continued unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is satisfied.

When the specific image TG is displayed within the valid period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

As for the “automatic reception performance” described in FIG. 410 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods related to the “automatic reception performance” illustrated before that may be adopted. Any of the above-described implementation methods may be adopted as to how each of the scale image and the gauge image is displayed when the automatic reception performance is performed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the invention is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same operational effect can be obtained.

Claims (1)

Determination means for performing determination,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained by the determination by the determining means,
Reception-related effect execution means capable of executing a reception-related effect that causes a period in which an operation opportunity is given,
A mock image display means capable of displaying a mock image display of the operation target of the player during the effective period in which the operation opportunity of the reception-related effect is given,
When an operation is detected in the effective period to which the operation opportunity is given, an disappearance EF display capable of displaying an disappearance EF display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the deletion image display before the display of the deletion image And means
When the reception-related effect is executed , a precursor effect display that indicates that an operation opportunity is given can be executed, and a valid period in which the operation opportunity is given has occurred, or the operation opportunity is given. A gaming machine capable of audibly outputting a reception acceptance sound that suggests that a valid period is generated,
As the reception related production,
The first reception-related production that can be executed based on the satisfaction of the first effect condition based on the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the satisfaction of the second effect condition based on the result of the determination by the determination unit There is at least a second reception related effect that can be executed based on
The first reception-related effect is
When the operation is not detected within the effective period to which the operation opportunity is given, the post-reception effect is not executed,
The second reception-related effect is
Even if the operation is not detected within the effective period to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to start executing the same post-reception effect as when the operation is detected within the effective period,
When the first reception-related effect is executed and when the second reception-related effect is executed, different effect modes are executed as the precursor effect display,
When the precursor effect display is executed in the second effect mode corresponding to the second reception-related effect , when the predictive effect display is executed in the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception-related effect. In the case where a specific sound that is not audibly output is audibly output as the reception permission sound, and when the aura effect display is executed in the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception-related effect. There is a case where a predetermined sound that can be audibly output is audibly output as the reception permission sound.
further,
When the aforesaid effect display is executed in the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception-related effect, the aforesaid effect display has an effective period in which an operation opportunity for the first acceptance-related effect is given. It is possible to execute in the form of crossing the timing
When an operation by the player is detected while the aforesaid effect display is displayed in the first effect mode within the effective period in which the operation opportunity of the first reception-related effect is given, the aforesaid effect display Is not displayed in a non-displayed state at the time when the post-reception production corresponding to the detection is started to be executed, but is displayed .